docApplied Biology - McGraw
download 
Report Transcription
Applied Biology - McGraw
TABLE OF CONTENTS Applied Biology........................................................................... 11 Cellullar Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics.......................... 55 Chemistry.....................................................................................71 Forestry/Agriculture.................................................................. 87 General & Human Biology......................................................... 93 Geography...................................................................................111 Geology...................................................................................... 119 Integrative Biology (PAE)......................................................... 129 Nutrition.................................................................................... 145 Physics & Astronomy................................................................ 151 Dushkin/McGraw-Hill Titles Listing....................................... 168 Title Index................................................................................. 171 Author Index.............................................................................. 176 Main content & new title page.in1 1 9/29/2006 11:44:21 AM TABLE OF CONTENTS Applied Biology.............. 11 ALLIED HEALTH Advanced First Aid.......................................................... 14 Biology of Aging.............................................................. 29 BLS/CPR for the Professional Rescuer.............................. 14 Computers in the Medical Office..................................... 15 PUBLIC SAFETY ACLS/Advanced Cardiac Life Support.............................. 53 EMT Paramedic............................................................... 52 Firefighting...................................................................... 54 First Responder................................................................ 51 Homeland Security.......................................................... 50 CPR and AED.................................................................. 16 EKG / ECG / Electrocardiology......................................... 17 First Aid........................................................................... 19 Math for Health Professions............................................. 20 Cellular Molecular, Microbio- logy & Genetics........... 55 Massage Therapy............................................................. 19 Medical Assisting - Administrative and Clinical................ 21 Medical Billing and Coding............................................. 22 Medical Insurance........................................................... 22 Medical Law & Ethics...................................................... 24 Medical Office Procedures.............................................. 24 Medical Terminology...................................................... 25 Pathophysiology.............................................................. 29 Pediatric First Aid, CPR & AED........................................ 29 Reproductive Biology...................................................... 30 Biotechnology................................................................. 69 Developmental Biology/Embryology................................ 57 General Genetics............................................................. 58 Human Genetics............................................................. 57 Immunology.................................................................... 57 Introductory Microbiology Laboratory............................. 65 Introductory Microbiology-Majors Text............................ 61 Introductory Microbiology-Non Majors Multimedia......... 65 Introductory Microbiology-Non Majors Text Allied Health Emphasis................................................ 62 Microbiology Printed-Supplements.................................. 69 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY Anatomy & Physiology - Supplements............................. 48 Histology......................................................................... 50 Molecular Biology........................................................... 56 STDs/AIDS....................................................................... 70 Virology.......................................................................... 57 Human Anatomy - Lab..................................................... 31 Human Anatomy - Multimedia........................................ 33 Human Anatomy - Textbooks.......................................... 30 Human Physiology - Lab.................................................. 35 Human Physiology - Multimedia..................................... 37 Human Physiology - Textbooks....................................... 34 One-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Lab..................... 39 One-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Textbooks........... 37 Two-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Lab..................... 43 Two-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Multimedia......... 47 Two-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Textbooks........... 41 Main content & new title page.in2 2 9/29/2006 11:44:21 AM TABLE OF CONTENTS Chemistry...................... 71 Allied Health/Nursing Chemistry (General, Organic and Biochemistry) - Lab Manuals.............................................................. 76 - Supplements . ........................................................... 77 - Textbooks.................................................................. 75 Analytical Chemistry........................................................ 85 Biochemistry - 1 Semester - Textbooks.................................................................. 81 General Chemistry - Lab............................................................................ 80 - Multimedia................................................................ 81 - Supplements.............................................................. 80 - Textbooks.................................................................. 77 Kinetics and Reaction Mechanics..................................... 86 Liberal Arts Chemistry (Non Science Majors) - Textbooks.................................................................. 72 General & Human Biology....................... 93 Biology Multimedia................................................................ 109 Supplements.............................................................. 110 General Biology Majors Laboratory................................................................. 106 Textbook................................................................... 104 General Biology - Non Majors Laboratory................................................................. 100 Textbook..................................................................... 95 General Biology - Non Majors & Majors Combined Laboratory................................................................. 103 Textbook................................................................... 101 Human Biology Laboratory................................................................. 108 Textbook................................................................... 107 Organic Chemistry - 1 Semester - Textbooks.................................................................. 82 Organic Chemistry - 2 Semester - Lab Manual............................................................... 84 - Supplements.............................................................. 84 - Textbooks.................................................................. 83 Geography........................111 Physics Chemistry - Lab............................................................................ 85 - Supplements.............................................................. 85 - Textbooks.................................................................. 85 Human / Cultural Geography......................................... 113 Prep/Basic Chemistry - Supplements............................................................. 74 Map Use / Cartography.................................................. 115 - Textbooks................................................................ 73 GIS................................................................................ 112 Intro to Geography........................................................ 114 Latin America................................................................ 117 Meteorology.................................................................. 116 US & Canada................................................................. 117 Forestry/Agriculture........ 87 World Regional Geography........................................... 116 FORESTRY Geology...................... 119 Dendrology..................................................................... 88 Dinosaurs...................................................................... 120 Forest Resources.............................................................. 88 Earth Science................................................................. 120 Mensuration Measurement.............................................. 88 Environmental Geology................................................. 121 Silviculture...................................................................... 88 General Geology........................................................... 121 Geomorphology............................................................ 121 AGRICULTURE Hazards / Natural Disasters............................................ 122 Agricultural Business...................................................... 89 Historical Geology........................................................ 122 Agricultural Economics.................................................... 89 Hydrogeology................................................................ 123 Agricultural Education..................................................... 90 Meteorology.................................................................. 123 Animal Science................................................................ 91 Oceanography............................................................... 124 Soil Science..................................................................... 91 Main content & new title page.in3 3 9/29/2006 11:44:22 AM TABLE OF CONTENTS Paleontology................................................................. 125 Petrology....................................................................... 125 Nutrition..........................145 Introduction to Nutrition Physical Geology Multimedia................................................................ 147 Laboratory................................................................. 128 Supplements.............................................................. 147 Textbook................................................................... 126 Textbook................................................................... 146 Nutritional Assessment.................................................. 149 Integrative Biology (PAE)...................... 129 Nutrition and Sport........................................................ 148 Nutrition Through The Life Cycle Nutrition & Human Development............................. 148 Animal Behavior............................................................ 130 Biostatistics.................................................................... 130 Botany (Economic)......................................................... 131 Physics & Astronomy.......151 College Physics............................................................. 156 Botany - Non Majors Conceptual Physics........................................................ 156 Lab Manuals.............................................................. 131 Textbook................................................................... 130 Electricity and Magnetism.............................................. 162 Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy.................................. 140 Integrated Sciences........................................................ 155 Conservation Biology.................................................... 132 Introduction to Astronomy............................................. 165 Ecology......................................................................... 132 Laboratory................................................................. 133 Intro to Physical Science................................................ 152 Environmental Science Introductory Texts...................................................... 133 Media........................................................................ 137 Medical Physics............................................................. 163 Evolution....................................................................... 137 Invertebrate Biology...................................................... 138 Limnology..................................................................... 138 Mammalogy.................................................................. 138 Marine Biology.............................................................. 139 Mathematical Physics.................................................... 162 Modern Physics............................................................. 163 Optics........................................................................... 165 Quantum Mechanics..................................................... 164 Stars and Galaxies......................................................... 167 Technical Physics.......................................................... 164 University Physics......................................................... 161 Parasitology................................................................... 139 Vertebrate Biology Laboratory................................................................. 140 Textbook................................................................... 140 Zoology Laboratory - Majors.................................................... 142 Supplements.............................................................. 142 Textbook................................................................... 141 Dushkin/McGraw-Hill Titles Listing................169 Indexes................................... Title Index........................................................................... Author Index....................................................................... Main content & new title page.in4 4 9/29/2006 11:44:22 AM 2007-2008 NEW TITLES Applied Biology 2007 New Titles AEHLERT Emergency Medical Responder.................................51 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302260-4 / MHID: 0-07-302260-8 BOOTH Math and Dosage Calculations for Medical Careers with Student CD-ROM, 2e...........................20 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302262-8 / MHID: 0-07-302262-4 EDER Laboratory Atlas of Anatomy and Physiology, 5e.............................................................................48 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282733-1 / MHID: 0-07-282733-5 GUNSTREAM Anatomy and Physiology Laboratory Textbook: Essentials Version, 4e...............................39 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-246470-2 / MHID: 0-07-246470-4 KIDD Safe Firefighting - First Things First with Student DVD............................................................54 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312397-4 / MHID: 0-07-312397-8 MARTIN Human Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory Manual: Fetal Pig Dissection, 3e..............................43 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282734-7 / MHID: 0-07-282734-3 MARTIN Laboratory Manual to accompany Hole’s Human Anatomy and Physiology, 11e......................44 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282957-0 / MHID: 0-07-282957-5 MEDICAL COLLEGE OF OHIO Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CDs 1-4 Complete Series........................................................33 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321553-2 / MHID: 0-07-321553-8 MEDICAL COLLEGE OF OHIO Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CD #4 Digestive, Urinary, Reproductive and Endocrine Systems....................................................34 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321551-8 / MHID: 0-07-321551-1 NSC Basic Life Support: Healthcare and Professional Rescuers..............................................14 NSC Standard First Aid, CPR and AED with Pocket Guide, 2e..................................................... 17 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329693-7 / MHID: 0-07-329693-7 PATTON Laboratory Manual to accompany Essentials of Anatomy & Physiology, 6e...................................40 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294594-2 / MHID: 0-07-294594-X PFLANZER Experimental and Applied Physiology Laboratory Manual, 8e.............................................36 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-250077-6 / MHID: 0-07-250077-8 REEDER Solve Saladin: Anatomy & Physiology Crossword Puzzles Specially Prepared for Anatomy & Physiology, 4e by Ken Saladin..................................48 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340359-5 / MHID: 0-07-340359-8 SALADIN Anatomy and Physiology, 4e....................................41 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322804-4 / MHID: 0-07-322804-4 SANDERSON Case Studies for the Medical Office, 4e....................15 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325480-7 / MHID: 0-07-325480-0 SANDERSON Computers in the Medical Office with Student Data CD-ROM, 5e.......................................15 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-311213-8 / MHID: 0-07-311213-5 SEELEY Essentials of Anatomy & Physiology, 6e...................38 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322805-1 / MHID: 0-07-322805-2 SHADE Fast & Easy ECGs with DVD.....................................18 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297409-6 / MHID: 0-07-297409-5 SHIER Hole’s Human Anatomy & Physiology, 11e..............42 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321364-4 / MHID: 0-07-321364-0 THIERER Medical Terminology Essentials................................27 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325644-3 / MHID: 0-07-325644-7 WISE Anatomy and Physiology Laboratory Manual, 4e.............................................................................44 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287509-6 / MHID: 0-07-287509-7 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329690-6 / MHID: 0-07-329690-2 NSC CPR & AED, 2e .......................................................16 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329698-2 / MHID: 0-07-329698-8 NSC First Aid Taking Action............................................ 14 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322068-0 / MHID: 0-07-322068-X NSC First Aid with Pocket Guide, 2e................................19 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329695-1 / MHID: 0-07-329695-3 Main content & new title page.in5 5 9/29/2006 11:44:22 AM 2007-2008 NEW TITLES Applied Biology 2008 New Titles ABBOTT Massage Therapy Review: Passing the NCETM and NCETM with Student CD-ROM............19 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320929-6 / MHID: 0-07-320929-5 ALLEN Medical Language for Modern Health with Student CD-ROM.....................................................25 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327294-8 / MHID: 0-07-327294-9 BOOTH Anatomy, Physiology and Pathophysiology for Allied Health.......................................................21 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337393-5 / MHID: 0-07-337393-1 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330209-6 / MHID: 0-07-330209-0 BOOTH Intravenous Therapy for Allied Care Personnel with Student CD-ROM.............................21 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328112-4 / MHID: 0-07-328112-3 BOSTWICK Medical Terminology: A Programmed Approach..................................................................26 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340194-2 / MHID: 0-07-340194-3 BROYLES Workbook to accompany Anatomy & Physiology Revealed.................................................39 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340354-0 / MHID: 0-07-340354-7 CAMPBELL Homeland Security and Emergency Medical Response..............................................................50, 52 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304437-8 / MHID: 0-07-304437-7 CHAPLEAU The Paramedic.........................................................52 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352071-1 / MHID: 0-07-352071-3 CHAPLEAU The Paramedic Workbook with Student CD.............52 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320532-8 / MHID: 0-07-320532-X DELVE PRODUCTIONS INC Paramedic Review DVD and CD-ROM....................53 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322069-7 / MHID: 0-07-322069-8 DUMITH McGraw-Hill Allied Health Medical Dictionary.......26 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351096-5 / MHID: 0-07-351096-3 FOX Human Physiology, 10e............................................34 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294613-0 / MHID: 0-07-294613-X FOX Laboratory Guide to Human Physiology, 12e...........35 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294617-8 / MHID: 0-07-294617-2 GRINE Regional Human Anatomy, 3e..................................31 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305128-4 / MHID: 0-07-305128-4 Main content & new title page.in6 6 BOOTH Electrocardiography For Health Care Personnel with Student CD-ROM, 2e.......................17 LONGENBAKER Mader’s Understanding Human Anatomy & Physiology, 6e.......................................................37 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328886-4 / MHID: 0-07-328886-1 LUTTERSCHMIDT Lab Exercises in Human Physiology: A Clinical & Experiemental Approach with PhILS 2.0...............36 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330539-4 / MHID: 0-07-330539-1 McKENNA ACLS Basics and More with Student CD & DVD.....................................................................53 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-301971-0 / MHID: 0-07-301971-2 MEDICAL COLLEGE OF OHIO Anatomy & Physiology Revealed Online..................47 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319620-6 / MHID: 0-07-319620-7 NSC Pediatric First Aid, CPR and AED, 2e.......................29 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329701-9 / MHID: 0-07-329701-1 NEWBY Medical Insurance Coding Workbook 2007-2008................................................................22 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352205-0 / MHID: 0-07-352205-8 PALIN Catastrophe Preparation and Prevention for Law Enforcement Professionals with Student CD............51 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331774-8 / MHID: 0-07-331774-8 SALADIN Human Anatomy, 2e................................................30 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329369-1 / MHID: 0-07-329369-5 SHADE Pocket ECGS: A Quick Information Guide...............18 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351976-0 / MHID: 0-07-351976-6 SHADE Practicing ECGs........................................................18 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331418-1 / MHID: 0-07-331418-8 SAEGER New Foundations in Therapeutic Massage and Bodywork with Student CD-ROM......................20 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302582-7 / MHID: 0-07-302582-8 SEELEY Anatomy and Physiology, 8e....................................41 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329368-4 / MHID: 0-07-329368-7 THIERER Medical Terminology Word Builder and Communications Workbook with Flashcards...........27 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331544-7 / MHID: 0-07-331544-3 VALERIUS Medical Insurance: An Integrated Claims Process Approach Workbook, 3e.............................23 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340210-9 / MHID: 0-07-340210-9 WISE Human Anatomy Laboratory Manual, 2e.................32 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294602-4 / MHID: 0-07-294602-4 WISE Laboratory Manual to accompany Anatomy and Physiology, 8e...................................................43 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296561-2 / MHID: 0-07-296561-4 9/29/2006 11:44:22 AM 2007-2008 NEW TITLES Cellular Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics 2007 New Titles Benson’s Microbiological Applications: Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology, Complete Version, 10e ...........................................65 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299273-1 / MHID: 0-07-299273-5 2007 New Titles BROWN Chemistry BROWN Benson’s Microbiological Applications: Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology, Short Version, 10e....................................................66 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299272-4 / MHID: 0-07-299272-7 HYDE Introduction to Genetics..........................................59 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110803-4 / MHID: 0-07-110803-3 KLEYN Microbiology Experiments, 5e..................................67 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299949-5 / MHID: 0-07-299949-7 LEWIS Human Genetics, 7e.................................................57 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310143-9 / MHID: 0-07-310143-5 BAUER Conceptual Introduction Chemistry.........................73 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322106-9 / MHID: 0-07-322106-6 CHANG Chemistry, 9e...........................................................77 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322103-8 / MHID: 0-07-322103-1 DENNISTON General, Organic and Biochemistry, 5e...................75 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322107-6 / MHID: 0-07-322107-4 GOLDBERG Fundamentals of Chemistry, 5e................................73 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322104-5 / MHID: 0-07-322104-X HENDRICKSON Laboratory Manual by Hendrickson to accompany General, Organic & Biochemistry, 5e.......................76 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282848-1 / MHID: 0-07-282848-X SILBERBERG Principles of General Chemistry...............................78 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322105-2 / MHID: 0-07-322105-8 NESTER Microbiology: A Human Perspective, 5e...................63 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321152-7 / MHID: 0-07-321152-4 Chemistry Cellular Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics 2008 New Titles HARLEY Microbiology Lab Manual, 7e..................................65 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299293-9 / MHID: 0-07-299293-X HARTWELL Genetics: From Genes to Genomes, 3e....................58 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322738-2 / MHID: 0-07-322738-2 STINE AIDS Update 2007...................................................70 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340234-5 / MHID: 0-07-340234-6 2008 New Titles TALARO Foundations in Microbiology, 6e..............................62 TALARO Foundations in Microbiology: Basic Principles, 6e.............................................................................63 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331184-5 / MHID: 0-07-331184-7 CHANG General Chemistry, 5e..............................................77 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331185-2 / MHID: 0-07-331185-5 DENNISTON Foundations of General, Organic and Biochemistry............................................................75 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331183-8 / MHID: 0-07-331183-9 SMITH Organic Chemistry, 2e.............................................84 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304986-1 / MHID: 0-07-304986-7 2007 New Titles ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330947-7 / MHID: 0-07-330947-8 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331994-0 / MHID: 0-07-331994-5 CAREY Organic Chemistry, 7e.............................................83 Forestry / Agriculture ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330540-0 / MHID: 0-07-330540-5 WEAVER Molecular Biology, 4e..............................................56 KAY Farm Management, 6e..........................................89, 90 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302829-3 / MHID: 0-07-302829-0 WILLEY Prescott/Harley/Klein’s Microbiology, 7e..................61 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330208-9 / MHID: 0-07-330208-2 Main content & new title page.in7 7 9/29/2006 11:44:22 AM 2007-2008 NEW TITLES General & Human Biology 2007 New Titles ENGER Concepts in Biology, 12e..........................................98 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322737-5 / MHID: 0-07-322737-4 ENGER Laboratory Manual to Accompany Concepts In Biology, 12e.........................................................100 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298663-1 / MHID: 0-07-298663-8 LEWIS Life, 6e.....................................................................101 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322480-0 / MHID: 0-07-322480-4 MADER Biology, 9e...............................................................102 MADER Lab Manual to Accompany Biology, 9e....................103 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298682-2 / MHID: 0-07-298682-4 PRESSON Biology: Dimensions of Life......................................97 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322736-8 / MHID: 0-07-322736-6 RAVEN Biology, 8e...............................................................105 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322739-9 / MHID: 0-07-322739-0 VODOPICH Biology Laboratory Manual, 8e................................106 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299522-0 / MHID: 0-07-299522-X 2007 New Titles MADER Laboratory Manual to Accompany Essentials of Biology.................................................................101 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340341-0 / MHID: 0-07-340341-5 MADER Essentials of Biology.................................................98 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322479-4 / MHID: 0-07-322479-0 STRETE Photo Atlas for General Biology, 2e.........................110 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-284610-2 / MHID: 0-07-284610-0 2008 New Titles MADER Laboratory Manual to Accompany Inquiry Into Life, 12e............................................................100 Geography ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298955-7 / MHID: 0-07-298955-6 General & Human Biology ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298690-7 / MHID: 0-07-298690-5 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320928-9 / MHID: 0-07-320928-7 MADER Laboratory Manual to Accompany Human Biology, 10e.............................................................108 BROOKER Biology.....................................................................104 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299287-8 / MHID: 0-07-299287-5 JOHNSON Essentials of the Living World, 2e.............................95 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330935-4 / MHID: 0-07-330935-4 JOHNSON The Living World, 5e................................................95 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325653-5 / MHID: 0-07-325653-6 MADER Human Biology, 10e.................................................107 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322272-1 / MHID: 0-07-322272-0 FELLMANN Human Geography, 9e.............................................113 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322271-4 / MHID: 0-07-322271-2 Klett International Perthes World Atlas ................................113, 115, 117 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329073-7 / MHID: 0-07-329073-4 Geography 2008 New Titles ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326807-1 / MHID: 0-07-326807-0 DOLPHIN Biological Investigations Lab Manual, 8e..................106 BRADSHAW Contemporary World Regional Geography 2e.............................................................................116 CHANG Introduction to Geographic Information Systems, 4e..............................................................112 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305115-4 / MHID: 0-07-305115-2 GETIS Introduction to Geography, 12e...............................114 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305126-0 / MHID: 0-07-305126-8 PRICE Mastering ARCGIS with Video Clips CD-ROM 3e.............................................................................112 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331280-4 / MHID: 0-07-331280-0 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298686-0 / MHID: 0-07-298686-7 MADER Inquiry Into Life, 12e................................................96 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330933-0 / MHID: 0-07-330933-8 Main content & new title page.in8 8 9/29/2006 11:44:23 AM 2007-2008 NEW TITLES Integrative Biology (PAE) Geology 2007 New Titles 2007 New Titles LUCAS Dinosaurs: The Textbook, 5e....................................120 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282695-1 / MHID: 0-07-282695-9 PLUMMER Physical Geology, 11e..............................................127 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321821-2 / MHID: 0-07-321821-9 ZUMBERGE Laboratory Manual for Physical Geology, 13e............................................................................128 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298861-4 / MHID: 0-07-298861-4 Geology 2008 New Titles CARLSON Physical Geology, 7e................................................126 CHAMBERLIN Exploring the World Ocean......................................124 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305091-1 / MHID: 0-07-305091-1 McCONNELL The Good Earth: Introduction to Earth Sciences....................................................................120 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325650-4 / MHID: 0-07-325650-1 SVERDRUP Introduction to the World’s Oceans, 9e...................124 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321881-6 / MHID: 0-07-321881-2 HICKMAN Animal Diversity, 4e.................................................141 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-252844-2 / MHID: 0-07-252844-3 HICKMAN Laboratory Studies in Animal Diversity, 4e..............142 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326098-3 / MHID: 0-07-326098-3 MILLER Zoology, 7e..............................................................141 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322807-5 / MHID: 0-07-322807-9 2008 New Titles ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325648-1 / MHID: 0-07-325648-X CUNNINGHAM Environmental Science, 9e.......................................136 Integrative Biology (PAE) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329232-8 / MHID: 0-07-329232-X JONES Lab Manual to accompany Physical Geology, 6e.............................................................................128 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321577-8 / MHID: 0-07-321577-5 ABBOTT Natural Disasters, 6e...............................................122 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331276-7 / MHID: 0-07-331276-2 CASTRO Marine Biology, 6e...................................................139 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325483-8 / MHID: 0-07-325483-5 CUNNINGHAM Principles of Environmental Science, 4e...................133 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330446-5 / MHID: 0-07-330446-8 ENGER Environmental Science, 11e.....................................134 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330447-2 / MHID: 0-07-330447-6 KARDONG Introduction to Biological Evolution, 2e...................137 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305077-5 / MHID: 0-07-305077-6 KAULFMANN Environmental Science.............................................135 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331186-9 / MHID: 0-07-331186-3 MOLLES Ecology, 4e...............................................................132 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330976-7 / MHID: 0-07-330976-1 STERN Introductory Plant Biology, 11e...............................130 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331421-1 / MHID: 0-07-331421-8 STERN Laboratory Manual to accompany Introductory Plant Biology, 11e....................................................131 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-283068-2 / MHID: 0-07-283068-9 Main content & new title page.in9 9 9/29/2006 11:44:23 AM 2007-2008 NEW TITLES Nutrition 2007 New Titles LEE Nutritional Assessment, 4e.......................................149 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-244106-2 / MHID: 0-07-244106-2 WARDLAW Contemporary Nutrition, 6e.....................................146 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325652-8 / MHID: 0-07-325652-8 WARDLAW Perspectives in Nutrition, 7e....................................146 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322806-8 / MHID: 0-07-322806-0 WILLIAMS Nutrition For Health, Fitness and Sport, 8e..............148 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327058-6 / MHID: 0-07-327058-X TILLERY Lab Manual to accompany Integrated Science, 3e.............................................................................155 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299682-1 / MHID: 0-07-299682-X TILLERY Lab Manual to accompany Physical Science, 7e.............................................................................153 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304993-9 / MHID: 0-07-304993-X TILLERY Physical Science, 7e.................................................153 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325647-4 / MHID: 0-07-325647-1 TILLERY Physics (Chapters 1-7), 7e.........................................154 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329817-7 / MHID: 0-07-329817-4 TIPPENS Physics, 7e................................................................164 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322270-7 / MHID: 0-07-322270-4 Physics & Astronomy 2008 New Titles Physics & Astronomy 2007 New Titles GIAMBATTISTA College Physics, 2e...................................................157 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322274-5 / MHID: 0-07-322274-7 GRIFFITH Physics of Everyday Phenomena, 5e.........................156 GIAMBATTISTA Physics.....................................................................156 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-332750-1 / MHID: 0-07-332750-6 KRAUSKOPF The Physical Universe, 12e......................................152 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331275-0 / MHID: 0-07-331275-4 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325315-2 / MHID: 0-07-325315-4 SCHNEIDER Pathways to Astronomy: Stars and Galaxies (Vol 2) with Starry Nights Pro CD-ROM..............................166 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327966-4 / MHID: 0-07-327966-8 SCHNEIDER Pathways to Astronomy with Solar System (Vol 1) with Starry Nights Pro CD-ROM..............................166 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327968-8 / MHID: 0-07-327968-4 SCHNEIDER Pathways to Astronomy with Starry Nights Pro CD-ROM (Version 3.1).......................................165 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-292208-0 / MHID: 0-07-292208-7 TILLERY Chemistry (Chapters 1, 8-13), 7e..............................152 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329818-4 / MHID: 0-07-329818-2 TILLERY Chemistry and Physics Split Prepack, 7e..................153 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329850-4 / MHID: 0-07-329850-6 TILLERY Integrated Science, 3e..............................................155 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322273-8 / MHID: 0-07-322273-9 10 Main content & new title page.in10 10 10 9/29/2006 11:44:23 AM 2007-2008 NEW Applied Biology Titles Applied Biology ~ Contents ALLIED HEALTH Advanced First Aid.......................................................... 14 Biology of Aging.............................................................. 29 BLS/CPR for the Professional Rescuer.............................. 14 PUBLIC SAFETY ACLS/Advanced Cardiac Life Support.............................. 53 EMT Paramedic............................................................... 52 Firefighting...................................................................... 54 First Responder................................................................ 51 Homeland Security.......................................................... 50 Computers in the Medical Office..................................... 15 CPR and AED.................................................................. 16 EKG / ECG / Electrocardiology......................................... 17 First Aid........................................................................... 19 Math for Health Professions............................................. 20 Massage Therapy............................................................. 19 Medical Assisting - Administrative and Clinical................ 21 Medical Billing and Coding............................................. 22 Medical Insurance........................................................... 22 Medical Law & Ethics...................................................... 24 Medical Office Procedures.............................................. 24 Medical Terminology...................................................... 25 Pathophysiology.............................................................. 29 Pediatric First Aid, CPR & AED........................................ 29 Reproductive Biology...................................................... 30 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY Anatomy & Physiology - Supplements............................. 48 Histology......................................................................... 50 Human Anatomy - Lab..................................................... 31 Human Anatomy - Multimedia........................................ 33 Human Anatomy - Textbooks.......................................... 30 Human Physiology - Lab.................................................. 35 Human Physiology - Multimedia..................................... 37 Human Physiology - Textbooks....................................... 34 One-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Lab..................... 39 One-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Textbooks........... 37 Two-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Lab..................... 43 Two-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Multimedia......... 47 Two-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Textbooks........... 41 11 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 11 9/29/2006 11:54:15 AM 2007-2008 NEW Applied Biology Titles 2007 New Titles AEHLERT Emergency Medical Responder.................................51 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302260-4 / MHID: 0-07-302260-8 BOOTH Math and Dosage Calculations for Medical Careers with Student CD-ROM, 2e...........................20 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302262-8 / MHID: 0-07-302262-4 EDER Laboratory Atlas of Anatomy and Physiology, 5e.............................................................................48 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282733-1 / MHID: 0-07-282733-5 GUNSTREAM Anatomy and Physiology Laboratory Textbook: Essentials Version, 4e...............................39 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-246470-2 / MHID: 0-07-246470-4 KIDD Safe Firefighting - First Things First with Student DVD............................................................54 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312397-4 / MHID: 0-07-312397-8 MARTIN Human Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory Manual: Fetal Pig Dissection, 3e..............................43 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282734-7 / MHID: 0-07-282734-3 MARTIN Laboratory Manual to accompany Hole’s Human Anatomy and Physiology, 11e......................44 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282957-0 / MHID: 0-07-282957-5 MEDICAL COLLEGE OF OHIO Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CDs 1-4 Complete Series........................................................33 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321553-2 / MHID: 0-07-321553-8 MEDICAL COLLEGE OF OHIO Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CD #4 Digestive, Urinary, Reproductive and Endocrine Systems....................................................34 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321551-8 / MHID: 0-07-321551-1 PATTON Laboratory Manual to accompany Essentials of Anatomy & Physiology, 6e...................................40 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294594-2 / MHID: 0-07-294594-X PFLANZER Experimental and Applied Physiology Laboratory Manual, 8e.............................................36 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-250077-6 / MHID: 0-07-250077-8 REEDER Solve Saladin: Anatomy & Physiology Crossword Puzzles Specially Prepared for Anatomy & Physiology, 4e by Ken Saladin..................................48 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340359-5 / MHID: 0-07-340359-8 SALADIN Anatomy and Physiology, 4e....................................41 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322804-4 / MHID: 0-07-322804-4 SANDERSON Case Studies for the Medical Office, 4e....................15 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325480-7 / MHID: 0-07-325480-0 SANDERSON Computers in the Medical Office with Student Data CD-ROM, 5e.......................................15 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-311213-8 / MHID: 0-07-311213-5 SEELEY Essentials of Anatomy & Physiology, 6e...................38 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322805-1 / MHID: 0-07-322805-2 SHADE Fast & Easy ECGs with DVD.....................................18 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297409-6 / MHID: 0-07-297409-5 SHIER Hole’s Human Anatomy & Physiology, 11e..............42 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321364-4 / MHID: 0-07-321364-0 THIERER Medical Terminology Essentials................................27 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325644-3 / MHID: 0-07-325644-7 WISE Anatomy and Physiology Laboratory Manual, 4e.............................................................................44 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287509-6 / MHID: 0-07-287509-7 NSC Basic Life Support: Healthcare and Professional Rescuers..............................................14 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329690-6 / MHID: 0-07-329690-2 2008 New Titles NSC CPR & AED, 2e .......................................................16 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329698-2 / MHID: 0-07-329698-8 NSC First Aid Taking Action............................................ 14 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322068-0 / MHID: 0-07-322068-X NSC First Aid with Pocket Guide, 2e................................19 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329695-1 / MHID: 0-07-329695-3 NSC Standard First Aid, CPR and AED with Pocket Guide, 2e..................................................... 17 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329693-7 / MHID: 0-07-329693-7 12 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 12 ABBOTT Massage Therapy Review: Passing the NCETM and NCETM with Student CD-ROM............19 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320929-6 / MHID: 0-07-320929-5 ALLEN Medical Language for Modern Health with Student CD-ROM.....................................................25 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327294-8 / MHID: 0-07-327294-9 BOOTH Anatomy, Physiology and Pathophysiology for Allied Health.......................................................21 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337393-5 / MHID: 0-07-337393-1 12 9/29/2006 11:54:15 AM 2007-2008 NEW Applied Biology Titles 2008 New Titles BOOTH Electrocardiography For Health Care Personnel with Student CD-ROM, 2e.......................17 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330209-6 / MHID: 0-07-330209-0 BOOTH Intravenous Therapy for Allied Care Personnel with Student CD-ROM.............................21 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328112-4 / MHID: 0-07-328112-3 BOSTWICK Medical Terminology: A Programmed Approach..................................................................26 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340194-2 / MHID: 0-07-340194-3 BROYLES Workbook to accompany Anatomy & Physiology Revealed.................................................39 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340354-0 / MHID: 0-07-340354-7 CAMPBELL Homeland Security and Emergency Medical Response..............................................................50, 52 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304437-8 / MHID: 0-07-304437-7 CHAPLEAU The Paramedic.........................................................52 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352071-1 / MHID: 0-07-352071-3 CHAPLEAU The Paramedic Workbook with Student CD.............52 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320532-8 / MHID: 0-07-320532-X DELVE PRODUCTIONS INC Paramedic Review DVD and CD-ROM....................53 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322069-7 / MHID: 0-07-322069-8 DUMITH McGraw-Hill Allied Health Medical Dictionary.......26 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351096-5 / MHID: 0-07-351096-3 FOX Human Physiology, 10e............................................34 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294613-0 / MHID: 0-07-294613-X FOX Laboratory Guide to Human Physiology, 12e...........35 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294617-8 / MHID: 0-07-294617-2 GRINE Regional Human Anatomy, 3e..................................31 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305128-4 / MHID: 0-07-305128-4 LONGENBAKER Mader’s Understanding Human Anatomy & Physiology, 6e.......................................................37 MEDICAL COLLEGE OF OHIO Anatomy & Physiology Revealed Online..................47 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319620-6 / MHID: 0-07-319620-7 NSC Pediatric First Aid, CPR and AED, 2e.......................29 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329701-9 / MHID: 0-07-329701-1 NEWBY Medical Insurance Coding Workbook 2007-2008................................................................22 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352205-0 / MHID: 0-07-352205-8 PALIN Catastrophe Preparation and Prevention for Law Enforcement Professionals with Student CD............51 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331774-8 / MHID: 0-07-331774-8 SALADIN Human Anatomy, 2e................................................30 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329369-1 / MHID: 0-07-329369-5 SHADE Pocket ECGS: A Quick Information Guide...............18 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351976-0 / MHID: 0-07-351976-6 SHADE Practicing ECGs........................................................18 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331418-1 / MHID: 0-07-331418-8 SAEGER New Foundations in Therapeutic Massage and Bodywork with Student CD-ROM......................20 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302582-7 / MHID: 0-07-302582-8 SEELEY Anatomy and Physiology, 8e....................................41 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329368-4 / MHID: 0-07-329368-7 THIERER Medical Terminology Word Builder and Communications Workbook with Flashcards...........27 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331544-7 / MHID: 0-07-331544-3 VALERIUS Medical Insurance: An Integrated Claims Process Approach Workbook, 3e.............................23 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340210-9 / MHID: 0-07-340210-9 WISE Human Anatomy Laboratory Manual, 2e.................32 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294602-4 / MHID: 0-07-294602-4 WISE Laboratory Manual to accompany Anatomy and Physiology, 8e...................................................43 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296561-2 / MHID: 0-07-296561-4 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328886-4 / MHID: 0-07-328886-1 LUTTERSCHMIDT Lab Exercises in Human Physiology: A Clinical & Experiemental Approach with PhILS 2.0...............36 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330539-4 / MHID: 0-07-330539-1 McKENNA ACLS Basics and More with Student CD & DVD.....................................................................53 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-301971-0 / MHID: 0-07-301971-2 13 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 13 9/29/2006 11:54:16 AM Applied Biology Allied Health Advanced First Aid New FIRST AID TAKING ACTION By National Safety Council NSC 2007 (March 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322068-0 / MHID: 0-07-322068-X Website: http://www.mhhe.com/FATA First Aid: Taking Action covers the material required for a semester long First Aid course. The focus is teaching how to recognize and act in any emergency and to sustain life until professional help can arrive. Quality content will feature information based on the 2005 national guidelines for breathing and cardiac emergencies, including CPR, choking care and using an automated external defibrillator (AED). Other information includes bleeding control, first aid for sudden illnesses and injuries, and remote first aid. Information is presented in a concise easy-to-read manner that works as a handy reference after the course. A National Safety Council completion card for CPR and First Aid are available with the course. BLS/CPR for the Professional Rescuer New BASIC LIFE SUPPORT Healthcare and Professional Rescuers By National Safety Council NSC 2007 (August 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329690-6 / MHID: 0-07-329690-2 National Safety Council’s-Basic Life Support: Healthcare and Professional Rescuers presents core content needed to meet the credentials for the professional rescuer CPR course. Included in this 100 page manual is material on rescue breathing, AED in cardiac emergencies, and airway obstruction. In this manual, technical information is presented in a way to enhance effective learning. Included are end of Chapter scenarios that ask students questions to stimulate learning. With products from the NSC you are getting content that meets the 2005 Emergency Cardiac Care Guidelines and techniques, nationally recognized completion cards, and superior instructors support material. Features Coverage on the role of the professional rescuer is included. Features Relevant end of Chapter scenarios help students prioritize threats and learn how to deal with the unexpected. Instructor Productivity Center includes an instructor manual, PowerPoint slides, and an instructor DVD with video clips of skill demonstrations. This text covers basic life support, including rescue breathing, cardiac emergencies and CPR, airway obstruction, and AED. Review! Review questions are located throughout each Chapter and at the end of each Chapter to help assess understanding. This text meets federal guidelines from the CDC, OSHA, and NFPA. Flexible! Appendix on Advanced Resuscitation Techniques provides information required for a Healthcare Provider/Professional CPR completion card. Contents Disaster preparation! Appendices include information on how to prepare for a natural disaster such as a hurricane or tornado. Skills are laid out in an easy-to-follow design with step by step information and full color illustrations. 1. Role of the Professional Rescuer 2. Preventing Infectious Disease 3. Victim Assessment and Basic Life Support 4. Basic Life Support 1: Rescue Breathing 5. Basic Life Support 2: Cardiac Emergencies and CPR 6. Basic Life Support 3: Airway Obstruction 7. Basic Life Support 4: AED in Cardiac Emergencies 8. Special Resuscitation Situations 9. Advanced Resuscitation / Appendix A Review Questions Appendix B Answers to Case Scenarios and Review Questions Glossary Index Controversy boxes give more information about controversial areas in first aid. True Story boxes give real life true stories that involve the specific Chapter content. Contents 1 Preparing to Act 2 Acting in an Emergency 3 The Human Body 4 Assessing the Victim 5 Basic Life Support 1: Rescue Breaths 6 Basic Life Support 2: CPR 7 Basic Life Support 3: Choking Care 8 Basic Life Support 4: Automated External Defibrillator (AED) 9 Controlling Bleeding 10 Shock 11 Wounds and Soft Tissue Injuries 12 Burns 13 Head and Spinal Injuries 14 Chest, Abdominal, and Pelvic Injuries 15 Bone, Joint, and Muscle Injuries 16 Extremity Injuries and Splinting 17 Sudden Illness 18 Poisoning 19 Substance Misuse and Abuse 20 Bites and Stings 21 Cold and Heat Emergencies 22 Behavioral Emergencies 23 Pregnancy and Childbirth 24 Remote Location First Aid 25 Rescuing and Moving Victims 26 Are You Prepared? 27 Moving Forward COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog. Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com 14 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 14 9/29/2006 11:54:16 AM Applied Biology Computers in the Medical Office Instructor’s Productivity CD-ROM included in the Instructor’s Manual provides PowerPoint presentations and end-of-week solution files for the Medisoft applications. Contents New Part 1 Introduction to Polaris Medical Group Part 2 Polaris Medical Group Policy and Procedure Manual Part 3 On the Job Part 4 Source Documents / Glossary / Index CASE STUDIES FOR THE MEDICAL OFFICE 4th Edition By Susan Sanderson 2007 (July 2006) / 224 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325480-7 / MHID: 0-07-325480-0 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/capstone4e This capstone simulation using Medisoft Advanced Billing Software, Version 11, gives students enhanced training that fosters superior qualifications for a variety of medical office jobs. Extensive hands-on practice with realistic source documents teaches students to input information, schedule appointments, and handle billing, reports, and other essential tasks. The simulation is recommended for students who have completed the study of Medisoft Advanced Version 11 using Computers in the Medical Office or Patient Billing. New to this edition Medisoft Advanced Student-at-home software (Optional Package Item), a full-featured software option for distance education or students who want to practice with the software at home. The only limitation is the number of patients a student can enter into the software. Otherwise, this is a full working version. Features Capstone Billing Simulation teaches transferable skills. Through studying how to use Medisoft patient billing software in a simulated job environment, students develop the skills and knowledge to quickly learn to use any medical billing software they encounter during employment in medical offices. Provides hands-on applications for medical assisting externship practice. The organization of the book¿the introductory part setting the stage for the work experience and the On the Job section covering two weeks’ billing tasks--extends student billing skill. In the Introduction, students learn about the job environment¿the physicians in the practice, the work rules, and their role as patient services specialist¿and study the practice’s Policy and Procedures Manual, which offers a realistic exposure to actual work setting. In the On the Job section, each day’s work is clearly presented, and additional Medisoft skills are taught in context. Medisoft Advanced patient billing software, a full-feature software program, is available to adopters of CAPSTONE BILLING SIMULATION-it can be requested through your McGraw-Hill sales representative. Capstone fits the curriculum requirements for a culminating work experience that permits students to integrate acquired billing skills in a realistic manner. The billing tasks represent a realistic mix of HMO, PPO, and feefor-service cases. The simulation format fits the curricular requirement for a culminating work experience that permits students to integrate acquired billing skills in a realistic manner. Instructors can easily check student progress by utilizing a removable short-answer Daily Worksheet which follows each day’s task listing. The print Instructor’s Manual provides all of the resources necessary to successfully use Capstone Billing Simulation in your classroom. It includes instructions for installation and troubleshooting the software, teaching suggestions, and answers to the quizzes, daily worksheets, and jobs, including hundreds of Medisoft V11 screenshots for solutions. The New COMPUTERS IN THE MEDICAL OFFICE WITH STUDENT DATA CD-ROM 5th Edition By Susan Sanderson 2007 (July 2006) / 352 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-311213-8 / MHID: 0-07-311213-5 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cimo5e Computers in the Medical Office, Fifth Edition offers medical office training using full-featured, state-of-the-art software and current, realistic medical office cases while building transferable computerized medical billing and scheduling skills. Students who complete this course will learn the appropriate terminology and skills to use any patient billing software program with minimal additional training. This text/workbook introduces and simulates medical office billing situations using Medisoft Advanced Version 11, the widely used medical office software program. As students progress through Medisoft, they learn to gather patient information, schedule appointments, and enter transactions. Information in the text contains updated HIPAA standards for privacy, security, transactions, and code sets. This text/workbook is written for those enrolled in community colleges, technical institutes, and career colleges seeking jobs in health information management, medical billing, and medical office assisting. Its practical, systematic approach is based on real-world medical office activities. The text and software work together to give the student a solid background to work in the medical office industry. Updated Government Regulations: The Fifth Edition teaches the most recent HIPAA standards for privacy, security, transaction and code sets. Use of MediSoft Advanced v.11: This software is widely used in medical offices. Skills learned through use of this program in conjunction with Computers in the Medical Office provide students with readily transferable skills for other similar software programs. This software is available to adopters of the book through McGraw-Hill. New Material: Chapter 10, “Managing Collections”, reflects a new feature in MediSoft Advanced. Hands-on case studies with realistic mix of HMO, PPO, and fee-for-service included earlier in the text. New--”On Your Own” hands-on exercises Exercise(s) in each Chapter offer guided instruction, and proceed from simple to complex. At the end of each Chapter, new “On Your Own” exercises provide students with the opportunity to practice applying what they learned in the Chapter without guided instruction. Student books include a CD-ROM that contains the database students need to complete exercises. Students must have access to Medisoft Version 11, either in the classroom or lab or the AtHome version. Access to the Online Learning Center provides additional learning resources for the student. 15 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 15 9/29/2006 11:54:16 AM Applied Biology The Instructor’s Manual comes with an Instructor Productivity Center in CD-ROM format that provides test banks and PowerPoint TM slides. The Classroom Performance System in-class quizzing and classroom management system is also available. The Online Learning Center also has resources for the instructor. Additionally, instructors can use Capstone Billing Simulation, Fourth Edition, a detailed medical practice simulation, as a follow-up to Computers in the Medical Office. Capstone also uses Medisoft Version 11 throughout, and comes with a CD-ROM. New to this edition CPR and AED New CPR & AED 2nd Edition The sequence of the text has been changed to match a patient’s visit to a doctor’s office. By National Safety Council NSC 2007 (July 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329698-2 / MHID: 0-07-329698-8 Outstanding New Design, using full-color graphics in screen captures and other book features. Nearly every two minutes, someone dies of sudden cardiac arrest. Automated external defibrillation (AED) could save a quarter of these lives. AED devices are showing up everywhere from industrial settings to shopping malls, and the demand for training is rising. And fortunately, the number of people trained in CPR grows every year too. National Safety Council programs offer the very latest techniques and AHA guidelines for CPR and meet OSHA standards for emergency care training in the workplace. And now we use Video Self Instruction to increase retention of the techniques. Our CPR and AED program teaches the average person the basics of emergency life support, and takes the fear out of AED use. We give you all the background information and skill testing you need to feel confident in the event of an emergency-and help save a life. Billing Cycle Overview in Chapter 1 gives students the “big picture” needed to put computing procedures in context. On Your Own Exercises, a new feature, allow students to set up and work problems themselves. Collections are covered in the new Chapter 10, allowing students to explore this important part of the billing cycle. Posting EOBs (Explanation of Benefits) is emphasized, with numerous examples now provided. Medisoft version 11 is used in the new edition, providing an up-todate approach to medical office computing and software use. Features Office Simulation is presented in Chapters 12--15, so students can apply their skills to realistic situations, using reports and documents provided. HIPAA Coverage is included in Chapter 2, providing students with important information on the latest guidelines. For additional practice with claims case studies, an excellent follow-up text to Computers in the Medical Office is Sanderson/Capstone Billing Simulation 4e (ISBN 0-07-325480-0). Contents PART 1 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS IN THE MEDICAL OFFICE Chapter 1 The Medical Office Billing Process Chapter 2 Information Technology and HIPAA PART 2 MEDISOFT ADVANCED PATIENT ACCOUNTING TRAINING Chapter 3 Introduction to Medisoft Chapter 4 Entering Patient Information Chapter 5 Entering Insurance, Account, and Condition Information Chapter 6 Entering Charge Transactions and Patient Payments Chapter 7 Creating Claims Chapter 8 Posting Insurance Payments and Creating Patient Statements Chapter 9 Printing Reports Chapter 10: Collections in the Medical Office Chapter 11 Scheduling PART 3 APPLYING YOUR KNOWLEDGE Chapter 12 Handling Patient Records and Transactions Chapter 13 Setting Up Appointments Chapter 14 Printing Lists and Reports Chapter 15 Putting it all Together PART 4 SOURCE DOCUMENTS Glossary Index New to this edition NEW! Video Skill Instruction: With VSI, students practice CPR at the same time it’s demonstrated on the video, taking their cues from the rescuer on the screen. VSI is shown to result in better CPR skills acquisition and retention than traditional teaching methods. And, it helps you provide consistent instruction to all students and stick to a tight teaching schedule. Features Emphasis on the use of the Automated External Defibrillator (AED) by the layperson. Contains need-to-know information and has a clear and easy-tounderstand presentation. The Emergency Cardiovascular Care Guidelines for the layperson are followed in the manual. Contents Course Lessons / Basic Life Support / Acting in an Emergency / Check the Victim / Recovery Position / Choking (Responsive Victim) / Heart Attack and Chest Pain / Preventing Disease Transmission / Quick Guide / CPR / Using an AED / Choking-Responsive Adult or Child / Choking-Responsive Infant / Recovery Position-Adult or Child / Recovery Position-Infant INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg 16 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 16 9/29/2006 11:54:16 AM Applied Biology New STANDARD FIRST AID, CPR AND AED WITH POCKET GUIDE 2nd Edition By National Safety Council NSC 2007 (June 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329693-7 / MHID: 0-07-329693-7 Standard First Aid, CPR & AED includes content covered in a 8 hour course. This 96 page full-color manual combines the content of First Aid and CPR & AED into one easy-to-use reference. The focus is teaching the layperson to recognize and act in any emergency and to sustain life until professional help can arrive. This manual includes Step-by-step photo sequences that reinforce skill development and retention. This edition includes the latest CPR and Emergency Cardiac Care Guidelines. New to this edition Standard First Aid, CPR, and AED has updated the training to incorporate Video Self Instruction(VSI)for CPR skills. With VSI, students practice CPR along with the video, taking their cues from the rescuer on the screen. As an added bonus, all NSC instructors get exclusive access to our web-based Emergency Care Instructor Portal, which contains downloadable promotions, administrative documents, course outlines, state-by-state approvals, product previews, trade show listings, and more. Plus, you get free student recordkeeping!Visit www. emergencycare.nsc.org. Features The CPR segment teaches the principles of basic life support. You will also learn how to perform rescue breathing and manage a choking victim. The AED portion of the program details key operating characteristics of AEDs, and shows you proper precautions and maintenance techniques. It also includes guidelines for meeting the state Public Access Defibrillation (PAD) laws. The First Aid training covers all the basics: breathing emergencies, sudden illness and injury, bleeding, and preventing disease transmission. Contents Lesson 1-basic life support Lesson 2-acting in an emergency Lesson 3-check the victim Lesson 4-recovery position Lesson 5-choking (responsive victim) Lesson 6-heart attack and chest pain Lesson 7-preventing disease transmission Lesson 8-bleeding and wound care Lesson 9-shock Lesson 10-burns Lesson 11-serious injuries Lesson 12-bone, joint, and muscle injuries Lesson 13-sudden illness Lesson 14-poisoning Lesson 15cold and heat emergencies Lesson 16-rescuing and moving victims EKG/ECG/Electrocardiology New ELECTROCARDIOGRAPHY FOR HEALTH CARE PERSONNEL WITH STUDENT CD-ROM 2nd Edition By Kathryn Booth, Total Care Programming, Patricia DeiTos, N. Virginia CC-Springfield and Thomas Edward O’Brien, Central Florida Institute 2008 (April 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330209-6 / MHID: 0-07-330209-0 Electrocardiography for Health Care Personnel provides ECG skills training for health care students as well as health care personnel who are interested in mastering additional skills. The text includes the essential skills needed to perform an ECG, including anatomy of the heart, basic characteristics, equipment, appropriate intervention, and other technical applications, such as Holter monitoring and stress testing. Emphasis throughout the text is placed on troubleshooting. New to this edition NEW! Text is now 4-color. Increased number of exercises including new, more realistic ECG strips. Many questions have been added to the troubleshooting feature. The updated Student CD-ROM provides video, audio, and illustrations with interactive exercises to bring the competencies presented in the text to life. Key terms are defined and pronounced correctly. Practicing Law & Ethics, Providing Safety and Infection Control, Patient Education and Communication, and Troubleshooting Activities include critical-thinking questions. There are also drag-and-drop exercises in each Chapter to reinforce the student’s knowledge of anatomy, supplies, and equipment discussed in the text. Interactive Questions provide additional review and suggest areas for improvement. The CD-ROM can be used for traditional, hybrid, and distance learning classes. Features Troubleshooting features identify problems which may arise when performing an ECG and provide suggested solutions. These help promote critical thinking and prepare students for real life situations. Safety and Infection Control features provide tips and techniques to provide safe care to patients and prevent the spread of infection. Patient Education and Communication provides suggestions for communicating effectively, both orally and in writing, and provides for patient education related to the ECG. Law and Ethics features provide information about HIPAA, legal responsibilities, limitations, and implications, as well as performing duties with established ethical practices. Critical Thinking and Interactive Questions provide review and suggest areas for improvement. The print Instructor’s Manual provides an overview of the student text, suggestions for implementing the Interactive Drill, Practice, and Review CD-ROM included with the student text, teaching suggestions, correlation charts, and answer keys. The Instructor’s Manual also includes an Instructor’s Productivity Center CD-ROM which includes PowerPoint presentations and EZ Test test generator. 17 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 17 9/29/2006 11:54:16 AM Applied Biology Contents Chapter 1-Role of the Electrocardiographer Chapter 2-The Cardiovascular System Chapter 3-The Electrocardiograph Chapter 4-Performing a 12-Lead ECG Chapter 5-ECG Interpretation and Clinical Significance Chapter 6-Exercise Electrocardiography Chapter 7-Ambulatory Monitoring / Appendix A-Competency Checklist Appendix B-Common Cardiac Medications Appendix C-Abbreviations/Symbols / Glossary New POCKET ECGS A Quick Information Guide By Bruce Shade, Cuyahoga CC-Metro Campus 2008 (September 2006) / 160 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351976-0 / MHID: 0-07-351976-6 This book is a portable, easy to view, quick reference pocket guide. It puts the key points about how to recognize the various dysrhythmias and cardiac conditions at the fingertips of the practitioner allowing them to quickly identify what they see in the field and/or clinical setting. It is also a useful tool in the classroom for the student to quickly look up key information. There is a short introduction that talks about the location of the heart, lead placement and the nine step process for interpreting the various wave forms and characteristics. It briefly describes the normal and abnormal features found on ECG tracings. It visually demonstrates how to calculate the heart rate, identify irregularities and identify and measure the various waveforms, intervals and segments. The introductory information is followed by Chapters, broken out by where the dysrhythmias originate (i.e., sinus, atrial, junctional, ventricular, AV heart block), on the key characteristics of various dysrhythmias and conditions that can be detected through the use of the electrocardiogram. New PRACTICING ECGs By Bruce Shade, Cuyahoga CC-Metro Campus 2008 (February 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331418-1 / MHID: 0-07-331418-8 Practicing ECG’s, by Bruce Shade, is a practice workbook to help refine a student’s skill in reading ECG tracings. There will be approximately 500 rhythm strips which will include both 3 and 12 lead. The strips will be a compilation of both simple and complex in order to test the student’s knowledge and to give them a variety of different scenarios. Features The use of 9 second tracings rather than just 6 second tracings will allow for a more accurate interpretation and more realistic image. The use of 500 different strips gives students a variety of scenarios to interpret This workbook includes both 3-lead dysrhythmia interpretation and 12 lead analysis to attract beginning and advanced students. A DVD will be included with each copy of the student text. There will be numerous practice strips showing both 3 and 12 lead. Other features of the DVD include a virtual caliper, and an “eProfessor”, to assist students in identifying strips correctly. Contents Chapter 1: ecg assessment and interpretation review Chapter 2: sinus node dysrhythmias Chapter 3: atrial dysrhythmias Chapter 4: junctional dysrhythmias Chapter 5: ventricular dysrhythmias Chapter 6: av heart blocks Chapter 7: other conditions Chapter 8: assess your knowledge-pretest Chapter 9: 12 lead ecgs Chapter 10: assess your knowledge-final exam Features It is small enough to be tucked away in a pocket so it can be conveniently viewed by the student or practitioner at any time. Its visually simplistic and colorful design makes it easy to find information quickly, even under the pressures of the field or clinical environment. Key information is bulleted, “to the point” and easy to understand making it useful while actively working to interpret an ECG tracing. Sample tracings include figures of the heart that illustrate where each dysrhythmia originates and how it occurs. This helps the student understand the ECG dysrhythmia rather than just memorizing strips. Each Chapter has a different color margin to allow the student to quickly find information. The Chapter openers give characteristics common to each days thus summarizing the key points for students to remember. This is a helpful tool for students to quickly reference when analyzing ECGs in the field. Key values for each waveform, interval and segment are listed. Characteristics for each dysrhythmia are listed in simple to view tables. Contents Ch 1. The Electrocardiogram Ch 2. Analyzing the ECG Ch 3. Sinus Dysrhythmias Ch 4. Atrial Dysrhythmias Ch 5. Junctional Dysrhythmias Ch 6. Ventricular Dysrhythmias Ch 7. AV Heart Blocks Ch 8. Electrical Axis Ch 9. Hypertrophy, Bundle Branch Block, and Preexcitation Ch 10. Myocardial Ischemia and Infarction Ch 11. Other Cardiac Conditions New FAST & EASY ECGS WITH DVD By Bruce Shade, Cuyahoga CC-Metro Campus and Keith Wesley 2007 (September 2005) / 512 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297409-6 / MHID: 0-07-297409-5 Fast and Easy ECGs: A Self-Paced Learning Program brings the classroom to the student! Organized using the 5-step interpretation approach, concepts are taught with a combination of repetition, anatomical and physiological understanding of the dysrhythmias and practice. Stimulating sidebars highlight key concepts and provide instructor notes, critical thinking questions, and clinical tidbits. The ECG Mentor Companion DVD brings an ECG instructor (co-author Dr. Keith Wesley) to the reader with presentations, demonstrations and animations of difficult-to-grasp and key concepts. Fast and Easy ECGs covers basic ECG interpretation and introduces the reader to concepts in 12-lead ECG interpretation. Features The ECG Mentor DVD! The companion DVD provides approximately 100 minutes of presentations on key ECG topics, demonstrations of basic techniques and animated concepts of heart anatomy and electrophysiology. Practice Makes Perfect Exercises! Approximately 200 Practice Makes Perfect Exercises are located throughout the textbook. 18 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 18 9/29/2006 11:54:17 AM Applied Biology Massage Therapy Outstanding Art Package! The text and The ECG Mentor are highly visual. Approximately 500 pieces of full-color art uniquely illustrate important concepts, anatomical and physiological causes of dysrhythmias and lots of practice ECG strips Contents 1 Anatomy and Electrophysiology of the Heart 2 The Electrocardiogram 3 Heart Rate 4 Regularity 5 P Waves 6 QRS Complexes 7 PR Intervals 8 Origin and Clinical Aspects of Sinus Node Dysrhythmias 9 Origin and Clinical Aspects of Atrial Dysrhythmias 10 Origin and Clinical Aspects of Junctional Dysrhythmias 11 Origin and Clinical Aspects of Ventricular Dysrhythmias 12 Origin and Clinical Aspects of AV Heart Blocks 13 Electrical Axis 14 Hypertrophy, Bundle Branch Block, and Preexcitation 15 Myocardial Ischemia and Infarction 16 Other Cardiac Conditions and the ECG First Aid New FIRST AID WITH POCKET GUIDE 2nd Edition By National Safety Council NSC 2007 (July 2006) ISBN-13: 0-07-329695-1 / MHID: 0-07-329695-3 First Aid is a 64-page full-color manual that covers the material necessary for a 3.5 to 4 hour Basic First Aid course. The layperson (not a health care provider) is the audience for the manual and course. The focus is teaching a layperson to recognize an emergency and take action in an emergency until professional help arrives. Guidelines of care are derived from the national guidelines such as Emergency Cardiovascular Care and the American Burn Association. The manual focuses on needto-know information and has a clear and easy to understand presentation. Contents Acting in an Emergency / Check the Victim / Recovery Position / Choking (Responsive Victim) / Heart Attack and Chest Pain / Preventing Disease Transmission / Bleeding and Wound Care / Shock / Burns / Serious Injuries / Bone, Joint, and Muscle Injuries / Sudden Illness / Poisoning / Cold and Heat Emergencies / Rescuing and Moving Victims New MASSAGE THERAPY REVIEW Passing the NCETMB and NCETM with Student CD-ROM By Laura Abbott, Georgia State University 2008 (January 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320929-6 / MHID: 0-07-320929-5 Massage Therapy Review: Passing the NCETMB and NCETM Exams is designed to help massage therapists prepare for the National Certification Exam for Therapeutic Massage and Bodywork (NCETMB) AND the National Certification Exam for Therapeutic Massage (NCETM). The certifying exam, National Certification Board for Therapeutic Massage and Bodywork (NCBTMB), broke into two separate sections last year, with the former being more robust, including additional oriental modalities. The exam reviews are a thorough study of a broad range of material; new graduates find it stressful, as they must pass in order to practice as a licensed professional in most states. This is the only review text that offers questions, answers, and explanations in the same form and organization as the exam itself. A high first time fail rate combined with the fact that graduates must pass this exam in order work as a professional, makes Massage Therapy Review: Passing the NCETMB and NCETM Exams an excellent choice. A richly illustrated text, a Prep Course Outline, a 200-page Anatomy and Physiology Outline, and a CD containing 980 test questions provides a comprehensive review presented in a clearly written style. Features The only exam review program that offers questions and answers and explanations in the same form and organization as the exam itself. This text provides a highly clinical and practical perspective. The text and Student CD-ROM offer the most complete exam review and testing to enhance student success on the NCBTMB and NCETM Exams. Review questions with an answer key highlight the most important features of a Chapter. Boxed Study Tips give the student bits of advice to remember when taking the exam. Mnemonic devices, always useful to the student absorbing large amounts of information, are used throughout the book. The text lists conditions and makes clear what is indicated and contraindicated to aid students in their client assessments. The same purpose is served with the inclusion of pathological conditions within the anatomy review. COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog. Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com Review materials at the end of Chapters are detailed and pose wellwritten, accurate questions with their answers readily available. Questions are set up in a multiple-choice format, which is the same used on the exam. Correct answers as well as the answer explanations are provided, giving a more beneficial review and understanding of the information to the student. Contents Chapter 1 General Knowledge of Body Systems Chapter 2 Detailed Knowledge of Anatomy, Physiology, and Kinesiology Chapter 3 Pathology Chapter 4 Therapeutic Massage and Bodywork Assessment Chapter 5 Therapeutic Massage and Bodywork Application Chapter 6 Professional Standards, Ethics, Business and Legal Practices Chapter 7 Eastern Modalities (NCETMB Only) Appendix A: Prep Course Outline 19 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 19 9/29/2006 11:54:17 AM Applied Biology New NEW FOUNDATIONS IN THERAPEUTIC MASSAGE AND BODYWORK WITH STUDENT CD-ROM By Jan Saeger, Keiser College and Donna Kyle-Brown, Blue Cliff College 2008 (February 2007) / 736 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302582-7 / MHID: 0-07-302582-8 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/saegermassage New Foundations in Therapeutic Massage and Bodywork offers a core curriculum of fundamental principles and practical applications for beginning students as well as practitioners in the field who seek a desk reference and review for continuing education. This text also goes beyond the core curriculum by addressing such topics as massage for hospice patients and survivors of abuse as well as massage routines for common pathologies (including carpal tunnel syndrome, thoracic outlet syndrome, and fibromyalgia). With Exam Points highlighted throughout the text as well as a student CD offering additional test questions and study materials, New Foundations is designed to help students reach two important goals: to succeed in passing their National Certification Exam and to ultimately succeed in their careers. Practice expectations and realities are emphasized through case studies and author/contributor anecdotes. Fullcolor photographs and line art give the student a detailed view of the application or points being studied. Workbook pages, titled Applying Your Knowledge, are incorporated within the Chapters for easy access and review. Features 4 Therapeutic Massage Techniques Chapter 5 Physiological Effects of Therapeutic Massage PART TWO: KINESIOLOGY, ANATOMY, AND PATHOPHYSIOLOGY Chapter 6 Biomechanics of Movement Chapter 7 Skeletal System Chapter 8 Muscular System Chapter 9 Other Body Systems PART THREE: BEYOND THE BASIC CURRICULUM Chapter 10 Maternity, Infant, and Pediatric Massage Chapter 11 Massage for Special Populations (Children with Special Needs, Geriatric, Hospice, & Palliative Care Chapter 12 Massage for Survivors of Abuse Chapter 13 Sports Massage: For Amateur and Professional Athletes Chapter 14 Spa Therapy: Peace, Beauty, and Massage PART FOUR: COMPLEMENTARY MASSAGE & BODYWORK MODALITIES Chapter 15 Oriental Practices and Energy Work Chapter 16 Introduction to Other Modalities PART FIVE: WELLNESS FOR BODY AND MIND Chapter 17 Body-Mind Connection Chapter 18 Diet and Wellness Chapter 19 Eastern and Western Principles of Movement PART SIX: ETHICS AND PROFESSIONAL BUSINESS PRACTICES Chapter 20 Law, Ethics, and Professionalism Chapter 21 Business Development, Marketing Success, and Community Education PART SEVEN: PHARMACOLOGY AND SPECIFIC PATHOLOGY ROUTINES Chapter 22 Common Medications and Effects in Clients Chapter 23 Special Massage Routines for Common Pathologies (Carpal Tunnel, Thoracic Outlet, Torticollis, Temporomandibular Joint Dysfunction, and Fibromyalgia) / Quick Guide A: Resource List Quick Guide B: Aromatherapy, Herbal Preparations, and Supplements Quick Guide C: Medical Terminology Quick Guide D: Diseases Common to Body Systems Quick Guide E: Skin Pathologies Quick Guide F: Common Medications Quick Guide G: State-by-State Requirements Quick Guide H: State-by-State Guide to Massage Practice Laws Math for Health Professions Emphasizes a scientific perspective while retaining the spiritual, artistic foundations of massage therapy. Clear organization and supportive pedagogical features, including Chapter reviews and test preparation. Attractive and helpful design with integrated exam points designed to help you study and review for the National Certification Exam. Detailed content on topics such as Common Pathologies Massage Therapists Encounter and the Physiologic Benefits of Massage (including expanded examples on CD. Full-color photographs and line art throughout the text give the student a realistic and step-by-step view of the application or points being studied. Full-color photos with anatomy overlays provide a detailed view of the human body systems and structures. A complete Instructor’s Manual, entitled Massage Educator’s Guide to Effective Performance, is available. This helpful supplement contains curriculum guidelines for a 500-hour program as well as a 1000-hour program. Included are syllabi, calendars, and Lesson plans for effective delivery of information to students, and tools for designing and developing a program of study that supports diverse student learning styles. Supportive of the move to a standardized (500-1000 hour) curriculum. Emphasizes the client/massage therapist connection. Practice expectations and realities will be emphasized via case studies, author/contributor anecdotes. Detailed modalities written by the developer themselves not found in any other text currently on the market...beyond the curriculum line. Contents PART ONE: BASIC CONCEPTS OF THERAPEUTIC MASSAGE AND BODYWORK Chapter 1 History of Therapeutic Massage Chapter 2 Equipment, Environment, and Safety Practices Chapter 3 The Massage Therapy Session: Preparations for Before, During, and After Chapter New MATH AND DOSAGE CALCULATIONS FOR MEDICAL CAREERS WITH STUDENT CD-ROM 2nd Edition By Kathryn Booth, Total Care Programming and James Whaley, Baker College-Owosso 2007 (September 2005) / 518 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302262-8 / MHID: 0-07-302262-4 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/mathdosage2e Math and Dosage Calculations for Medical Careers teaches the skills and techniques medical assistants, nurses, pharmacy technicians, and paramedics need to calculate the amount of medication they should administer to patients. Students learn to calculate dosages based on ratio proportions, fraction proportions, the formula method, and dimensional analysis. New to this edition Four methods of dosage calculations: Fraction-proportion; Ratioproportion; Dimensional analysis; and Formula method are introduced together and used throughout the book. Each method is identified by a different color for easy reference Includes over 250 full-color, up-to-date drug actual drugs labels currently used by the health care profession to provide realistic learning. CD-ROM references throughout that direct the student to exercises and provide for independent review, reinforcement, and evaluation. Link feature refers the student to an earlier Chapters for a quick review when concepts are repeated. Added Pocket size dosage calculation reference cards 20 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 20 9/29/2006 11:54:17 AM Applied Biology Features Instructor Manual provides detailed answer key, additional exercises for each Chapter, and an image bank for classroom use. Accompanying CD-ROM contains the EZTest testing software and Instructor PowerPoint Presentations. Interactive CD-ROM, packaged free with every book, corresponds to text Chapters and helps students learn, review, and test their skills. Contents 1 Fractions and Decimals 2 Percents, Ratios, and Proportions 3 Systems of Weights and Measures 4 Equipment for Dosage Measurement 5 Drug Orders 6 Drug Labels and Package Inserts 7 Methods of Dosage Calculations 8 Oral Dosages 9 Parenteral Dosages 10 Intravenous Dosages 11 Calculations for Special Populations 12 Specialized Calculations Appendices A. Comprehensive Evaluation B. Answer Key Glossary Credits Index Reference Cards New INTRAVENOUS THERAPY FOR HEALTH CARE PERSONNEL WITH STUDENT CD-ROM By Kathryn Booth, Total Care Programming 2008 (January 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328112-4 / MHID: 0-07-328112-3 Intravenous Therapy for Health Care Personnel is a one of a kind book for entry-level health care practitioners to learn the basics of IV therapy. This eight-Chapter text/workbook covers the essential topics for IV therapy for entry-level practitioners, including coverage within the scope of practice for Medical Assistants. The book and accompanying CD is highly visual and focus on application and understanding, as well as presenting real-life situations that can occur during IV therapy and their necessary solutions. Features Medical Assisting - Administrative and Clinical New ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND PATHOPHYSIOLOGY FOR ALLIED HEALTH By Kathryn Booth, Total Care Programming and Terri Wyman, Sanford Brown Institute 2008 (February 2007) / 288 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337393-5 / MHID: 0-07-337393-1 Features 4-Color photos and illustrations Case Study Boxes at the beginning of each Chapter Case Study Questions in the end-of-Chapter review Educating the Patient Boxes Pathophysiology feature at the end of each Chapter End-of-Chapter review elements » Case Study Questions » Discussion Questions » Critical Thinking Questions » Application Activities » Internet Activities Instructor’s manual Instructor Resource CD-ROM Access to the Medical Assisting Online Learning Center New 4-color text The Student CD-ROM provides video, audio, and illustrations with interactive exercises to bring the competencies presented in the text to life. Key terms are defined and pronounced correctly. Practicing Law & Ethics, Providing Safety and Infection Control, Patient Education and Communication, and Troubleshooting Activities include critical-thinking questions. There are also drag-and-drop exercises in each Chapter to reinforce the student’s knowledge of anatomy, supplies, and equipment discussed in the text. Interactive Questions provide additional review and suggest areas for improvement. The CD-ROM can be used for traditional, hybrid, and distance learning classes. Troubleshooting feature identifies problems and provides suggested solutions. These help promote critical thinking and prepare students for real life situations. Safety and Infection Control features tips and techniques to provide safe care to patients and prevent the spread of infection. Patient Education and Communication feature provides suggestions for communicating effectively, both orally and in writing, and provides patient education related to IV Therapy. HIPAA, Law, and Ethics: includes tips for practicing within the HIPAA regulations and legal and ethical standards. Check Questions throughout the text ensure learning and understanding. Complete End of Chapter Review Section including a variety question types to accommodate various learning styles and ensure comprehension. The print Instructor’s Manual provides an overview of the student text, suggestions for implementing the Interactive Drill, Practice, and Review CD-ROM included with the student text, teaching suggestions, correlation charts, and answer keys. The Instructor’s Manual also includes an Instructor’s Productivity Center CD-ROM which includes PowerPoint presentations and EZ Test test generator. Contents Chapter 1: Introduction to Intravenous Therapy Chapter 2: Safety and Infection Control Chapter 3: Intravenous Therapy Supplies and Equipment Chapter 4: Intravenous Fluids, Components, and Compatibility Chapter 5: Preparation and Patient Communication Chapter 6: Monitoring and Maintaining IV Therapy Chapter 7: Documenting and Discontinuation Chapter 8: Intravenous Therapy Calculations / Appendix A: IV Solutions and Concentrations Chart Appendix B: IV Compatibility Chart Appendix C: Common IV Medications Appendix D: IV Formulas and Conversions Appendix E: Answer Key Glossary Index 21 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 21 9/29/2006 11:54:17 AM Applied Biology Medical Billing and Coding PATIENT BILLING WITH STUDENT CD-ROM & FLOPPY DISK 5th Edition By Susan Sanderson 2006 (December 2004) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310150-7 / MHID: 0-07-310150-8 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/patientbilling5e Instruction in the fifth edition of this seven-Chapter text-workbook tutorial is based on NDCMediSoft Advanced, version 9. Students will systematically learn how to use the patient billing features of this popular software, which is used in thousands of medical offices. A four-day simulation of patient billing in a Family Care System provides hands-on practice in all billing tasks. New to this edition Patient Billing teaches transferable skills. Through studying how to use MediSoft, students develop the skills, terminology and knowledge to quickly learn to use any medical billing software they encounter during their career. The organization of the book builds student skill and confidence. The instructional pattern in part 2--brief concept coverage followed by immediate exercises--is highly effective in skill building and reinforcement. Part 3 test knowledge in application mode. Examples in the text represent a realistic mix of HMO, PPO, and fee-for-service billing cases. Includes HIPAA tips and concepts. NDCMedisoft Advanced Version 9 patient billing software, a fullfeatured software program, is available to adopters. Contact your McGraw-Hill representative to request software. Instructor’s Manual has NDCMedisoft example solutions by Chapter. Instructor Productivity CD-ROM includes EZTest test generating software and Chapter-by-Chapter PowerPoint lecture outlines. Contents 1 Introduction to Patient Billing 2 Using The Computer For Patient Billing 3 Managing Data With A Computerized System 4 Entering Patient and Case Information 5 Processing Transactions 6 Processing Claims and Creating Statements 7 Producing Reports / Family Care Center—A Patient Billing Simulation Appendix—Office Hours Source Documents Index Medical Insurance New MEDICAL INSURANCE CODING WORKBOOK 2007-2008 By Cynthia Newby, Chestnut Hill Enterprises 2008 (January 2007) / 160 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352205-0 / MHID: 0-07-352205-8 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/medinsurance3e The Medical Insurance Coding Workbook for Physician Practices builds coding expertise by providing thorough practice, tips, and reinforcement in code selection and linkage. This supplementary workbook offers extensive opportunities for students to practice ICD-9-CM (diagnoses) and CPT/HCPCS (procedures) coding using the standard code reference manuals. Unique coding linkage coverage reviews and practices reporting diagnosis and procedures codes correctly together for compliant coding. The exercises build from one-line diagnostic/procedural statements to case studies. The Workbook also contains three comprehensive examinations covering ICD-9-CM, CPT/HCPCS, and Code Linkage topics. The Medical Insurance Coding Workbook for Physician Practices is designed to help users master the information needed to pass the coding certification exams and become employable. The precise and tightly focused nature of the workbook helps instructors to readily gauge students’ levels of coding proficiency. New to this edition Updated Information: The workbook includes the latest ICD and CPT codes. Case Studies: Each section contains case studies to provide practice coding from medical documentation. Review and Practice: Updated Coding Compliance Coverage provides review and practice so students learn to link diagnosis and procedure codes correctly. Coding Quizzes test students’ understanding of guidelines and prepare students for the coding certification exams. Answers to workbook exercises are available on the password-protected Instructor’s site on the Valerius/Medical Insurance 3e Online Learning Center. Features Tips: Coding Tips reinforce coding guidelines. Contents Part 1 ICD-9-CM Part 2 CPT and HCPCS Part 3 Coding Linkage and Compliance Appendix A ICD-9-CM Guidelines for Coding and Reporting Outpatient Services Appendix B CPT Modifiers: Description and Common use in Main Text Sections COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog. Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com 22 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 22 9/29/2006 11:54:17 AM Applied Biology INSURANCE CODING AND ELECTRONIC CLAIMS FOR THE MEDICAL OFFICE New MEDICAL INSURANCE An Integrated Claims Process Approach Workbook 3rd Edition By Joanne Valerius, Nenna Bayes, Cynthia Newby, Chestnut Hill Enterprises and Janet Seggern, Lehigh Carbon Coll College 2008 (January 2007) / 256 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340210-9 / MHID: 0-07-340210-9 New to this edition New for this edition is a text-specific workbook which provides both review and application learned in the textbook. The workbook is learning outcomes-based. In addition to claim completion case studies, applications include math and communication skill development. (Details unavailable at press time) MEDICAL INSURANCE CODING WORKBOOK FOR PHYSICIAN PRACTICES 2005 EDITION By Cynthia Newby, Chestnut Hill Enterprises Inc 2006 (June 2005) / 160 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-301470-8 / MHID: 0-07-301470-2 Medical Insurance Coding Workbook offers numerous exercises for students to practice ICD and CPT coding. This workbook can be used with Valerius’ Medical Insurance or any other medical insurance text. Features ICD and CPT coding practice reinforces proper coding procedure. Coding Compliance coverage provides review and practice in linking diagnosis and procedures codes correctly. By Shelley Safian 2006 (July 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305307-3 / MHID: 0-07-305307-4 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/icec-safian This text is structured to reflect a day in the life of an insurance codding and billing specialist. Using a “layered learning” concept, the student will move through the book in a logical progression, building upon each element learned at each stage of the reimbursement process. Students will learn to carefully glean pertinent data to code accurately from review and analysis of: a.) Superbills, b.) Provider’s notes, c.) Referral authorization forms, and d.) New patient information forms. Features Understanding medical necessity. Examples are provided to help students appreciate their responsibility of assuring the relativity between diagnosis codes and procedure codes. Computer program troubleshooting for students. Learning how to fix minor problems that can occur within the two software applications. For example, when claim forms won’t print, making corrections to erroneous data entry, etc. In other textbooks, this information is usually reserved for the instructor. However, students do need to learn how to fix certain basic problems that could easily occur in the workplace (where the student will be on their own). Realistic scenarios help students identify with learning Student-friendly, conversational writing style makes new concepts understandable. Instructor’s Manual includes additional forms for extra credit and/or practice assignments, guidelines for helping students understand each component, and the answers to the Chapter review questions. Instructor Productivity CD-ROM provides a PowerPoint presentation for each Chapter, additional test questions using EZTest with answer key for in-class practice, review, and additional grading opportunities. Coding tips reinforce essential coding guidelines. Medisoft Advanced, Version 9 is presented as “one” example of patient accounting software. Students practice entering patient information and coding data. Coding Quizzes test students’ understanding of guidelines and prepare students for the coding certification exams. Contents Contents Part 1 ICD-9-CM Part 2 CPT and HCPCS Part 3 Coding Linkage and Compliance Appendix A ICD-9-CM Guidelines for Coding and Reporting Outpatient Services Appendix B CPT Modifiers: Description and Common use in Main Text Sections 1 Insurance Overview 2 HIPPA’s Privacy Rule Overview 3 Source Documents 4 Introduction to Coding-Guidelines Overview 5 Coding Diagnoses: ICD-9-CM 6 Coding Diagnoses: ICD-10-CM 7 Coding Procedures: CPT 8 Coding Procedures: ICD-9-CM Volume 3 and ICD10-PCS 9 Complete Coding Practice: ICD-9-CM and CPT 10 Health Claims Form CMS-1500 11 Electronic Claims Management: Using Patient Accounting Software 12 Working with Insurance Companies 13 Receiving Revenues 14 Complete Coding and Claims PracticeAppendix A-Abbreviations Appendix B-ICD-9-CM Offical Guidelines for Coding and Reporting Appendix C-1997 Documentation Guidelines for Evaluation and Management Services Appendix D-Medisoft Advanced, Version 9-Issues and Answers INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg 23 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 23 9/29/2006 11:54:18 AM Applied Biology Medical Law & Ethics LAW & ETHICS FOR MEDICAL CAREERS 4th Edition By Karen Judson, Carlene Harrison, International College and Sharon Blesie Hicks 2006 (April 2005) / 352 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302263-5 / MHID: 0-07-302263-2 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/judson4e Law and Ethics for Medical Careers, 4th edition, provides an overview of the laws and ethics you should know to help you give competent, compassionate care to patients that is within acceptable legal and ethical boundaries. The text can also serve as a guide to help you resolve the many legal and ethical questions you may reasonably expect to face as a student and, later, as a health care practitioner. The text features pertinent legal cases, anecdotes, and sidebars related to health-related careers. Content has been updated and special attention has been paid to legislation affecting health care. New to this edition Medical Office Procedures MEDICAL OFFICE PROCEDURES WITH DATA DISKS AND PROJECTS CD-ROM 6th Edition By Karonne Becklin 2006 (January 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320108-5 / MHID: 0-07-320108-1 Medical Office Procedures is a text-workbook that introduces and teaches medical assisting administrative tasks; teaches records management, medical communications, and scheduling skills; and describes procedures for preparing patients’ charts and bills. Practice management and finances are also addressed. Multi-day simulations provide real-world experience with physician dictation. New to this edition Medisoft Advanced Version 9 patient billing software, a full-featured software program, is available to adopters. Contact your McGraw-Hill representative to request software. An Ethics Guide has been added to each Chapter. The Guides contain ethical principles and discussion questions relevant to the material covered in each Chapter. Working Papers at the end of the text include medical histories, handwritten drafts, correspondence, and other forms needed to complete projects and simulations. New Chapter--Chapter 7, “Privacy Law and HIPAA.” This Chapter can inform all allied health personnel as to the relevance and mandates of HIPAA. Correspondence, scheduling, financial, and records projects in each Chapter provide hands-on practice with concepts and skills. Examples and cases cover many different medical careers. This means students with the same or various medical career goals can be in one class. About Your Job provides practical job-related facts. Case studies (formerly You Be the Judge) and questions foster critical-thinking skills. FYI sidebars enhance and extend content. The Instructor’s Manual includes teaching strategies, answer keys, and CMA and RMA correlation tables. The accompanying IPC CDROM contains Chapter-by-Chapter PowerPoint slides, case studies, and EZTest test generator. Contents Part 1 The Foundations of Law and Ethics 1 Introduction to Law and Ethics 2 Working in Health Care 3 Law, the Courts, and Contracts Part 2 Legal Issues for Working Health Care Practitioners 4 Professional Liability and Medical Malpractice 5 Defenses to Liability Suits 6 Medical Records and Informed Consent 7 Privacy Law and HIPAA Part 3 Professional, Social, and Interpersonal Health Care Issues 8 Physicians’ Public Duties and Responsibilities 9 Workplace Legalities 10 The Beginning of Life and Childhood 11 Death and Dying 12 Ethics for Health Care Practitioners Student CD-ROM, included in the text, contains files for letterheads and patient information forms and statements for Chapter projects and simulations. Data Disks, provided with every text in CD-ROM and floppy disk format, provide the patient database to complete NDCMedisoft simulation exercises. Instructor’s Manual contains teaching notes and resources, AAMA/ AMT/NHCSSP correlation charts, and answer keys. IPC contains ExamViewPro test generator, PowerPoint presentations and CPS capability. Simulation recordings contain recordings for the 3 simulations of medical office conversations, instructions from the doctor, incoming and outgoing phone calls, interruptions, and the doctor’s dictation for transcription. Contents Part 1 The Administrative Medical Assistant’s Career 1 The Administrative Medical Assistant 2 Medical Ethics, Law, and Compliance 3 Computer Usage in the Medical Office Part 2 Administrative Responsibilities 4 Telephone Procedures and Scheduling 5 Records Management 6 Written Communications Part 3 Patient Records 7 Patient Medical Records 8 Insurance and Coding 9 Billing, Reimbursement, and Collections Part 4 Practice Finances and Management 10 Practice Finances 11 Office Management / Appendix A Introduction to MediSoft 24 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 24 9/29/2006 11:54:18 AM Applied Biology Medical Terminology New MEDICAL LANGUAGE FOR MODERN HEALTH WITH STUDENT CD-ROM By David Allen, Michelle Buchman, Everest College and Karen Lockyer 2008 (March 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327294-8 / MHID: 0-07-327294-9 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/allanmedlanguage MEDICAL LANGUAGE FOR MODERN HEALTH CARE Combining the Time-Tested A & P Approach with a New Contextual Approach Promotes Active Learning Chapters in the textbook are organized by body system in accordance with an overall anatomy and physiology (A & P) approach. Lessons introduce and define terminology through the context of A & P, pathology, and clinical and diagnostic procedures/tests. The organization of the body systems into Chapters is based on an “outside to inside” sequence that reflects a physician’s differential diagnosis method used during an examination. To provide students with an authentic context, the medical specialty associated with each body area or system is introduced along with the anatomy and physiology. Students actually step into the role of an allied health professional associated with each specialty. Patient cases and documentation are used to illustrate the real-life application of medical terminology in modern health care: to care for and communicating with patients, and to interact with other members of the health care team. The A & P organizational approach, used in conjunction an authentic medical setting and patient cases, encourages student motivation and facilitates active, engaged learning. Each Chapter is structured around a consistent and unique framework of pedagogic devices. No matter what the subject matter of a Chapter, the structure enables students to develop a consistent learning strategy, making Medical Language for Modern Health Care a superior learning tool. Features Focus on “modern” medicine Includes Chapters such as genetics and CAM that are not found in other books. Lesson-based approach. Chapters are divided into Lessons, coverage of which can be taught in a 50-minute installment. Each is supported by a 50-minute Lesson plan in the Instructor’s Manual that pulls all teaching information and materials together into a scripted, times presentation. Self-contained spreads. Terms presented within the context of anatomy and physiology. Chapters are organized by body systems, and terms are intro duced within the context of the body’s anatomical structures and/or physiological processes. Frequent, innovative exercises. Variety of exercises appear on each spread, at the end of each Chapter, on the CD-ROM, and on the Online Center. Some exercises simulate documentation in the medical record. End of Chapter exercises include all taxonomy levels and meet all Chapter objectives. Strong supplements package. To include: Student CD-ROM with interactive, applied spread exercises and term pronunciations; Online Learning Center for students with exercises and web research activities, and instructor resources; Instructor’s Manual (PRINT) with 50-minute Lesson plans, as signment masters, and testbank masters; Instructor Productivity CD-ROM with customizable Lesson plans, PPT slides, electronic image collection, testbank in an EZ test generator program; Online medical terminology curriculum; online medical ter minology train-the-trainer course. Contents Chapter 1: welcome Chapter 2: anatomy of word building Chapter 3: the body as a whole:the language of primary care Chapter 4: integumentary system:the language of dermatology Chapter 5: special senses: seeing and hearing-the language of opthalmology an otology Chapter 6: musculoskeletal system: the language of orthopedics Chapter 7: digestive system: the language of gastroenterology Chapter 8: cardiovascular system: the language of cardiology and hematology Chapter 9: respiratory system: the language of pulmonology Chapter 10: nervous system: the language of neurology Chapter 11: urinary system: the language of urology Chapter 12: male reproductive system: more language of urology Chapter 13: female reproductive system and breast: the language of gynecology and obstetrics Chapter 14: endocrine system: the language of endocrinology Chapter 15: lymphatic and immune systems: the language of immunology Chapter 16: growth and development: the language of pediatrics Chapter 17: aging: the language of gerontology Chapter 18: rehabilitation medicine: the language of rehabilitation Chapter 19: mental health: the language of psychology and psychiatry Chapter 20: infection: the language of infectious diseases Chapter 21: genetics: the language of dna Chapter 22: nutrition: the language of nutrition Chapter 23: complementary and alternative medicine: the language of cam Each spread covers one topic only, each spread a complete unit that includes text, work analyses/definitions, and exercises. Contextualized, real-world approach. A virtual medical facility, complete with medical practices, practitioners and patients, provides the contextual framework for presenting terms. Each Chapter represents the language of whichever specialty is covered by that Chapter, for example “Respiratory System: The Language of Pulmonology.” Real-world scenarios throughout Chapters provide immediate application of and context for terms. 25 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 25 9/29/2006 11:54:18 AM Applied Biology New MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY A Programmed Approach By Paula Bostwick 2008 (February 2007) / 608 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340194-2 / MHID: 0-07-340194-3 Medical Terminology: A Programmed Approach is the ideal resource for instructors and students wanting a concise and systematic approach to learning the language of health care. Recognizing that students learn medical terminology by constructing and deconstructing words into their parts, the authors have built this process into the text and the numerous exercises. The approach builds and constantly reinforces skills needed to deal with increasingly complicated terms. A body systems organization is used, providing a clear content framework for the text. Each body system Chapter separates words into easily learnable groups: major parts of each system; word parts related to each system; and diagnostic, pathological, surgical and pharmacological terms. Carefully chosen Chapter features help bring the subject to life, and add an on-the-job perspective. Case-study information is built into examples, and real medical documents are used whenever appropriate. Internet references are included throughout, to emphasize the importance of online resources and tools. While most activities are straight-forward practice exercises, word-building and critical thinking skills are also built in. Wherever possible, material on Complementary and Alternative Medicine (“CAM”) is included to highlight this growing area of medicine. In addition to the text, students will be able to access a wealth of electronic resources to aid their studies: The Student CD-ROM will include a suite of activitybased learning tools: crossword puzzles, “Hangman” game, “Concentration”, term to definition matching, audio feedback, and “That’s Epidemic”, an activity focusing on pathology terms. Exercises are gradable online, or can be used for self-paced review. The Online Learning Center website (“OLC”) will provide a set of additional self-test questions; Chapter study outlines; web links of interest; and additional word-building activities. An optional Spanish/English audio CD ROM is available, which includes pronunciations of key medical terms in both languages. English-language audio CD ROMs (2) are also available as an optional package item; these include pronunciation of all terms included in the text. Instructors will also finds a wealth of teaching & learning resources for their classes: The Instructor’s Manual (“IM”) will contain answers to all exercises, teaching strategy suggestions, and discussion of word-building techniques. The Instructor Productivity Center CD ROM (“IPC”) will contain the IM in electronic form; PowerPoint presentations for each Chapter; and electronic test generator and test banks (with 300 questions). Features Programmed methodology provides a streamlined, time-effective way to learn basic terminology. Word-building skills are presented in the opening Chapters, then used extensively with each Body System Chapter. Body systems organization is used to structure the text. Real-life case studies and medical records are used throughout the text, to provide a career context for the terminology being learned. Complementary and Alternative Medicine (CAM) terms are included in the text. Internet Chapter features provide practical tips on how to use the web. Contents Chapter 1 Learning Terminology Chapter 2 Prefixes and Suffixes in Medical Terms Chapter 3 Body Structure Chapter 4 The Integumentary System Chapter 5 The Musculoskeletal System Chapter 6 The Cardiovascular System Chapter 7 The Respiratory System Chapter 8 The Nervous System Chapter 9 The Urinary System Chapter 10 The Female Reproductive System Chapter 11 The Male Reproductive System Chapter 12 The Blood System Chapter 13 The Lymphatic and Immune Systems Chapter 14 The Digestive System Chapter 15 The Endocrine System Chapter 16 The Sensory System New McGRAW-HILL ALLIED HEALTH MEDICAL DICTIONARY By Kevin Dumith, Sanford Brown Institute 2008 (January 2007) / 1408 pages ISBN-13: 978--07-351096-5 / MHID: 0-07-351096-3 Kevin Dumith has teamed up with Myrna Breskin to compile the McGraw Hill Allied Health Dictionary. With Kevin’s long experience working as a medical terminology instructor in a career college and with Myrna’s background as a lexicographer, the dictionary has the combined experience of these two people directing a staff that has written a truly useful reference book. This dictionary will be the only one on the market specifically aimed at the allied health level. This important distinction makes it a very salable product for a student population that has traditionally found the learning of medical terminology one of the most challenging in the allied health curriculum. It is written for the student who finds the higher level dictionaries written for the health care practitioner too difficult to understand and to navigate. the definitions are clear and concise. The only etymologies given are useful word-building breakdowns that reinforce this skill necessary to understanding medical terms. The appendices make this reference a tool that will follow the allied health student into the workplace as a “keeper” for a long time to come. There is a 32-page insert of anatomy plates that cover the body systems with beautiful illustrations as well as instructive and helpful text. Features Simple straightforward definitions in understandable language with cross-referencing done meticulously. Cross-referencing is a very important part of dictionaries. In many Stedman’s dictionaries, for example, you are sent to entries that don’t exist or words are defined with medical terms not in the dictionary. Our dictionary uses common language as much as possible or uses medical terms that appear in the dictionary or are explained where they are used. Extensive coverage of anatomy groups (such as tables of muscles, bones, and nerves at those entries) and an overview 32-page 4-color insert of anatomy art and text. Bound-in Student CD ROM provides readers with a wealth of motivating medical terminology games and activities. Warnings are put at all abbreviations that are no longer allowed to be handwritten in medical documents so as to avoid medical errors. An appendix of these abbreviations is also included. OLC website contains study resources, self-tests and additional activities for students; and resources for instructors under password protection. A straightforward comprehensive pronunciation system with as few symbols as possible enables the user to clearly pronounce medical terms-a skill that is essential in allied health careers. Optional audio CD sets--English-language, and Spanish/English--are available for packaging with the text. 26 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 26 9/29/2006 11:54:18 AM Applied Biology Appendices of essential allied health reference material such as lab values, combining forms, abbreviations, and so on round out this comprehensive book. Four-color illustrations appear throughout the book and illustrate medical concepts appropriate to the allied health level. Student CD-ROM to accompany the McGraw-Hill Allied Health Dictionary. It will contain searchable list and audio pronunciations for all terms in the Dictionary. Contents Introduction / How to use this dictionary / Letters a-z / Anatomical plates 1-32 / Appendices / Combining forms, prefixes, and suffixes / Abbreviations and medical errors / Normal laboratory values / Spanish terms / Weights and measures / Dietary guidelines to start the job search. Reference appendices will make this a valuable reference tool for use in medical terminology and related courses. Contents Unit 1 Communication Using Medical Terms, How Medical Terms Are Formed, Legal and Ethical Issues, Communication in Healthcare Unit 2 Prefixes Unit 3 Suffixes Unit 4 Terms in the Integumentary System Unit 5 Terms in the Musculoskeletal System Unit 6 Terms in the Cardiovascular System Unit 7 Terms in the Respiratory System Unit 8 Terms in the Nervous System Unit 9 Terms in the Urinary System Unit 10 Terms in the Female Reproductive System Unit 11 Terms in the Male Reproductive System Unit 12 Terms in the Blood System Unit 13 Terms in the Lymphatic and Immune Systems Unit 14 Terms in the Digestive System Unit 15 Terms in the Endocrine System Unit 16 Terms in the Sensory System Appendix A Combining Forms, Prefixes, and Suffixes Appendix B Normal Laboratory Values Appendix C Sample Medical Documents New MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY WORD BUILDER AND COMMUNICATIONS WORKBOOK WITH FLASHCARDS By Nina Thierer, Ivy Tech Comm College of Indiana-Ft Wayne and Kevin Dumith, Sanford Brown Institute 2008 (February 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331544-7 / MHID: 0-07-331544-3 Nina Thierer has teamed with Kevin Dumith to bring to market a workbook that will complement a number of allied health products, especially the Allied Health Dictionary and the medical terminology textbooks published by McGraw-Hill. The Medical Terminology WordBuilder and Communications Workbook emphasizes the dual tasks of word building and communication--the prime learning difficulties for most students in medical terminology and related courses. Particularly in the private career colleges, these two areas are where schools are putting the bulk of their emphasis in an attempt to make their students valuable employees in their allied health careers. The workbook is chock-full of exercises, case studies, and verbal and written communication work that will guide the student through realistic simulations of job activities and job search tasks. Features The organization of the workbook by body systems makes it usable with McGraw-Hill products as well as with most medical terminology texts on the market. This free-standing item will sell into markets that use everything from Chabner to programmed texts to no text at all, just resource materials. The workbook’s design is usable as a write-in, self-study guide or as a companion to various texts and resources. The workbook is also usable for students working primarily on computer. Each unit begins with a review of the word parts used to build words in a particular body system. This is immediately followed by a number of activities aimed both at word building and basic body system knowledge. Word games such as word finds, crosswords, or word jumbles are featured in every unit to provide fun learning activities for each body system. These word games require and reinforce body system knowledge at all learner levels. Each of the body system units has a realistic case study that emphasizes the ability to communicate with coworkers, clients, supervisors, job interviewers, and so on. The communication exercises require basic telephone and writing skills with an emphasis on polite, accurate communications. These case studies include many letters and forms similar to ones used in most health care facilities. The way the case studies are structured, they can be used by everyone from the most inexperienced beginning student to students in the final stages of their courses about New MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY ESSENTIALS With Student & Audio CD’s and Flashcards By Nina Thierer, Ivy Tech Comm College of Indiana-Ft Wayne and Lisa Breitbard, Sunrise Senior Living 2007 (January 2006) / 512 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325644-3 / MHID: 0-07-325644-7 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/medtermess Essentials of Medical Terminology is a precise, completely upto-date, student-oriented text that is ideal for the one-semester course in Medical Terminology. The text emphasizes real world applications of the vocabulary of medicine, and students will see current medical events reflected in this book. The main text is accompanied by an outstanding selection of supplementary learning resources. Essentials of Medical Terminology concentrates on just the key terms and concepts that can be taught in a half-year course. Its clean, uncluttered design keeps readers’ attention focused on learning these basic terms, and definitions are kept concise. The interactive Essentials of Medical Terminology Student CD-ROM, and Audio Program CD-ROMs (2-disk audio CD set), linked directly to the text and its selection of terms, are included with each copy of the text. They provide a powerful suite of learning tools geared to the diverse learning styles of today’s students. A Spanish-English Audio CD-ROM is also available for student purchase. The Student CD-ROM is set up by text Chapter, and includes a variety of games and skill-building activities such as key terms with audio, flash cards, word building, multiple choice and true/false questions, matching, crossword puzzles, and a game called “That’s Epidemic”. A progress review component records and prints student progress reports. The CD-ROM is ideal for reviewing terms, for group activities, and for courses that have a self-study component. Features Medical Terminology Essentials provides accurate, concise instruction on the basics of medical terminology, presenting what’s appropriate for a 1-semester course. Both clinical and office situations are included throughout the text, to provide a realistic context for understanding medical terms. Meets Instructor/Student Goals: The text is closely matched with the typical 1-semester syllabus. It is tightly focused on the “need to know” concepts and definitions. Coverage of underlying word structure and word building prepares students to think critically about medical terminology encountered in subsequent courses, and in their allied health careers. 27 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 27 9/29/2006 11:54:18 AM Applied Biology Extensive Review Activities: Critical thinking case studies follow every major section and give immediate reinforcement of key concepts presented. End-of-Chapter activities include review questions, case studies, and optional Internet exercises that expand student familiarity with the subject of each Chapter. HIPAA Information: Examples, and exercises are included throughout the text, providing important up-to-date information on important HIPAA guidelines. Case Studies: Brief cases in each Chapter present realistic medical situations related to that particular topic and its key terms. Online Learning Center web site: This site provides students and instructors with extensive teaching, learning and Internet reference resources. The Instructor side is password protected for security. Instructor’s Manual with Instructor Productivity CD-ROM: This supplement has answers, teaching suggestions, instructional PowerPoint slides, electronic test banks and EZ Test electronic testing software, and the Classroom Performance System (CPS) in-class quizzing and management tool. Contents To the Student / Getting the Most Out of Your Textbook / Chapter 1 Learning Terminology Chapter 2 Prefixes and Suffixes in Medical Terms Chapter 3 Body Structure Chapter 4 The Integumentary System Chapter 5 The Musculoskeletal System Chapter 6 The Cardiovascular system Chapter 7 The Respiratory System Chapter 8 The Nervous System Chapter 9 The Urinary System Chapter 10 The Female Reproductive System Chapter 11 The Male Reproductive System Chapter 12 The Blood System Chapter 13 The Lymphatic and Immune Systems Chapter 14 The Digestive System Chapter 15 The Endocrine System Chapter 16 The Sensory System Chapter 17 Terms Pharmacology / Appendix A—Combining Forms, Prefixes, and Suffixes Appendix B—Abbreviations- Ones to Use and Ones to Avoid Appendix C—Normal Laboratory Values Appendix D—Medical Terminology Style / Index INTRODUCTION TO MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY WITH STUDENT AUDIO CD-ROM By Pam Besser, KCTCS Jefferson Comm and Tech College and J Patrick Fisher 2006 (May 2005) / 543 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302261-1 / MHID: 0-07-302261-6 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/besser This text-workbook gives students a firm foundation in medical terminology meanings and pronunciations. It provides a concise presentation of terms reinforced by practice exercises. It can be used in a short course or a review course of medical terminology or as a self-paced text. Features Introductory Chapters (Suffixes and Prefixes) provide a foundation for the terminology presented in the textbook. Contents Part 1 Learning About Medical Words 1 Suffixes 2 Prefixes 3 Numbers, Amounts, Colors and Positions Part 2 Systems of the Body 4 Integumentary System 5 Respiratory System 6 Digestive System 7 Cardiovascular System 8 Hematic and Lymphatic Systems 9 Urinary System 10 Male Reproductive System 11 Female Reproductive System 12 Nervous System 13 Endocrine System 14 Musculoskeletal Systems 15 Special Senses Part 3 Medical Specialties 16 Medical Specialties 17 Psychiatric Terminology / Appendices A. Selected Medical and Chemical Abbreviations B. Selected Abbreviations used in Pharmacy and Prescription Writing C. Common Latin and Greek Singular and Plural Endings D. Common Prefixes E. Common Suffixes F. Common STDs for Male and Female / Glossary / Index MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY Language for Health Care with Student and Audio CD’s and Flashcards, 2nd Edition By Nina Thierer, Ivy Tech Comm College of Indiana-Ft Wayne 2006 (December 2005) / 802 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327295-5 / MHID: 0-07-327295-7 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/medterm2e Medical Terminology: Language for Health Care provides the comprehensive coverage needed for a 2-term or intensive 1term Medical Terminology course. It provides clear instruction on the basics of anatomy and physiology, using a body systems approach, and making use of extensive new line art figures and photos. The text includes both clinical and administrative office examples and cases that provide a realistic context for introducing terms and definitions. The up-to-date coverage includes a new Chapter on Alternative Medicine, and information on HIPAA guidelines. The student textbook comes with a free Student CD-ROM with interactive exercises and activities, and a 2-CD Audio Program for building pronunciation skills. Wordbuilding exercises are included in every body system Chapter. New to this edition Enhanced Art Program: A wealth of new photos, illustrations and charts increase the visual appeal of the book, and aid in the teaching of anatomy and physiology topics. Med Term Audio Program: 2 English-language audio CD-ROMs are included free with the text, to provide help with pronunciation of terms HIPAA Coverage: Information, examples, and exercises are incorporated to help build student awareness of these important guidelines. Spanish-English glossary and Spanish Audio Program CD (available separately) help students work in our increasingly bilingual health care environment. Online component provides instructors another means of allowing students access to the course. Online Learning Center: This web site offers a range of learning and review activities for students, plus password-protected Instructor resources; these can be used with the leading Classroom Management systems. Flash cards included free with every student text. Features Case studies and labeling exercises to all the systems Chapters. Clear and Comprehensive Coverage: the basics of anatomy & physiology are covered by body system, along with medical terms from all areas of health care and medicine. Instructor Manual includes teaching strategies, course syllabi and answer keys. Instructor Productivity Center CD-ROM contains Chapterby-Chapter PowerPoint presentations and EZTest test generator. Classroom Lab CDs provide pronunciation of the Lessons for classroom use. Test Lab CDs are provided for instructors to test students’ pronunciation and comprehension. Extensive Review Activities: Critical thinking case studies follow every major section, providing immediate learning reinforcement reinforcement. End-of-Chapter activities include review questions, case studies and optional Internet and Challenge sections that expand student familiarity with Chapter concepts and terms. 28 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 28 9/29/2006 11:54:18 AM Applied Biology Biology of Aging Updated Student CD-ROM: This highly acclaimed CD-ROM includes a wealth of student activities (such as Flashcards, Crosswords, Concentration, Hangman, and “That’s Epidemic”), and a new built-in grading feature. Contents How to Use This Program / 1 Learning Terminology 2 Prefixes and Suffixes in Medical Terms 3 Body Structure 4 The Integumentary System 5 The Musculoskeletal System 6 The Cardiovascular system 7 The Respiratory System 8 The Nervous System 9 The Urinary System 10 The Female Reproductive System 11 The Male Reproductive System 12 The Blood System 13 The Lymphatic and Immune Systems 14 The Digestive System 15 The Endocrine System 16 The Sensory System 17 Human Development 18 Terms in Oncology—Cancer and Its Causes 19 Diagnostic Imaging, Radiation Oncology, and Surgery 20 Terms in Psychiatry 21 Terms in Dental Practice 22 Terms in Pharmacology 23 Terms in Complementary and Alternative Medicine / Appendix A—Combining Forms, Prefixes, and Suffixes Appendix B—Abbreviations—Ones to Use and Ones to Avoid Appendix C—English Glossary Appendix D—Spanish Glossary Appendix E—Normal Laboratory Values Appendix F-Medical Terminology Style / Index HUMAN AGING Biological Perspectives, 2nd Edition By Augustine G Digiovanna, Salisbury State University 2000 / 408 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-292691-0 / MHID: 0-07-292691-0 Website: www.biologyofhumanaging.com CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Molecules, Cells, and Theories of Aging Chapter 3 The Integumentary System Chapter 4 Circulatory System Chapter 5 Respiratory System Chapter 6 Nervous System Chapter 7 Eyes and Ears Chapter 8 Muscle System Chapter 9 Skeletal System Chapter 10 Digestive System Chapter 11 Diet and Nutrition Chapter 12 Urinary System Chapter 13 Reproductive Systems Chapter 14 Endocrine System Chapter 15 Immune System Chapter 16 About the Future Pathophysiology Pediatric First Aid, CPR, AED International Edition New PEDIATRIC FIRST AID, CPR AND AED 2nd Edition By National Safety Council NSC 2008 (September 2006) ISBN-13; 978-0-07-329701-9 / MHID: 0-07-329701-1 PATHOPHYSIOLOGY Concepts and Applications for Health Care Professionals, 3rd Edition By Thomas J Nowak and A Gordon Handford of British Columbia Institute of Tech. 2004 / 752 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-027255-2 / MHID: 0-07-027255-7 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121497-1 / MHID: 0-07-121497-6 [IE] The Pediatric First Aid, CPR & AED manual is 153 pages and full-color. It covers the material included in a 6.5 to 8.5 hour course. This book is for anyone who takes care of children, including parents, daycare and other childcare workers, teachers and others. The focus is on preventing childhood injury where possible, how to recognize and act in a pediatric emergency and sustain life until professional help can arrive. Along with basic first aid components such as bleeding control and shock, the book covers child abuse and common childhood illnesses. Comprehensive information about preventing infection and illness, preventing injuries, and making places safe for children have been added. This text has been updated to include the new 2005 guideline changes. The traditional pathophysiology book is written for the medical student. Nursing and allied health students (usually at the sophomore level) have simply had to make-do with cumbersome (1500 to 1600 page) books, that assume considerably more science background than the typical allied health student has acquired. The Nowak book is not only briefer (at 700 pages) but is organized in a manner that brings the principles of pathophysiology to the forefront. The authors focus on the relatively few patterns of disease, rather than asking students to memorize extensive catalogs of specific diseases. This conceptual approach is more suited to the allied health student than the disease centered approach featured in the major competitors. Contents Part 1 Foundation Concepts of Pathophysiology Chapter 1 Cell Injury Chapter 2 Inflammation Chapter 3 Fever Chapter 4 Healing Chapter 5 Disease of Immunity Chapter 6 Neoplasis Part 2 Systemic Pathophysiology Chapter 7 Blood Disorders Chapter 8 Hemodynamic Disorders Chapter 9 Vascular Disorders Chapter 10 Cardiac Pathophysiology Chapter 11 Circulatory Shock Chapter 12 Respiratory Pathophysiology Chapter 13 Gastrointestinal Pathophysiology Chapter 14 Hepatobiliary and Pancreatic Pathophysiology Chapter 15 Renal Pathophysiology Chapter 16 Fluid and Electrolyte Imbalances Chapter 17 Endocrine Pathophysiology Chapter 18 Skeletal and Muscular Pathophysiology Chapter 19 Reproductive Pathophysiology Chapter 20 Disorders of Central ervous System Development, Vascular Support, and Protection Chapter 21 Disorders of Movement, Sensation, and Mental Function Chapter 22 Seizures and Epilepsy Chapter 23 Pain and Pain Management Chapter 24 Trauma Introduction: Why Learn Injury Prevention and First Aid? PART ONE: FIRST AID Chapter 1- Take Action in an Emergency Chapter 2- Basic Life Support Chapter 3--Bleeding and Wound Care Chapter 4--Shock Chapter 5 – Burns Chapter 6--Serious Injuries Chapter 7--Bone, Joint, and Muscle Injuries Chapter 8--Sudden Illness Chapter 9 – Poisoning Chapter 10--Heat and Cold Emergencies Chapter 11 – Common Minor Childhood Problems and Injuries Chapter 12 – Child Abuse and Neglect PART TWO: CHILDHOOD ILLNESSES Chapter 13 – Common Childhood Illnesses PART THREE: PREVENTING ILLNESS AND INJURY Chapter 14 – Preventing Illness and Infection Chapter 15 – Preventing Injuries Chapter 16 – Making Places Safe for Children / Index CONTENTS 29 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 29 9/29/2006 11:54:19 AM Applied Biology Reproductive Biology HUMAN REPRODUCTIVE BIOLOGY 3rd Edition By Sylvia S Mader 2005 (April 2004) / 288 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287234-7 / MHID: 0-07-287234-9 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/maderrepro3 This text presents human reproduction from the biological point of view. It is most appropriate for use by non-science students who would like a biological understanding of human reproduction. The three parts of the book may be studied in whatever sequences the instructor desires. Part I contains topics on human inheritance and biotechnology. Part II has in depth coverage of fertilization, and the major biological events of embryonic and fetal development. In Part III, the evolution of sexual reproduction is presumed to have increased biological fitness. CONTENTS Part I- Human Inheritance 1 Chromosomes and Chromosomal Inheritance 2 Genes and Medical Inheritance 3 DNA and Molecular Genetics 4 Genetic Counseling Part II- Human Reproduction 5 Reproductive Hormones and Sexual Maturation 6 Human Reproductive Systems 7 Human Sexual Response 8 Fertilization, Development, and Birth 9 Birth Control and Infertility 10 Sexually Transmitted Diseases AIDS SUPPLEMENT Part III- Evolution, Behavior, and Population Concerns 11 Evolution 12 Behavior 13 Population Concerns Anatomy & Physiology Human Anatomy - Textbooks International Edition New HUMAN ANATOMY 2nd Edition By Kenneth S Saladin, Georgia College and State University 2008 (January 2007) / 864 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329369-1 / MHID: 0-07-329369-5 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110209-4 / MHID: 0-07-110209-4 [IE] From the most pedagogically sound organization to the exceptional art, to the complete integration of the text with technology, Saladin has formed a teaching system that will both motivate and enable students to understand and appreciate the wonders of human anatomy. This distinctive text was developed to stand apart from all other anatomy texts with an approach borne out of 25 years of teaching, unparalleled art, and a writing style that has been acclaimed by reviewers. Designed for a one-semester college anatomy course, Saladin requires no prior knowledge of college chemistry or cell biology. NEW TO THIS EDITION • Revamped Art Program--We’ve made this unparalleled, completely digitized from the groundwork up, art program even better with the use of a more colorful and 3-dimensional style; and many of the figures will be larger than in previous editions. INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog. Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com • Anatomy & Physiology Revealed!--Anatomy & Physiology Revealed! is a unique multimedia tool designed to help students learn and review using a virtual human cadaver! Detailed cadaver photos layered upon one another provide an interactive dissection experience! The program includes 5 major areas: dissections, animations, imaging, anatomy terms and an incredible self testing program. All sections combine to make study time efficient and lectures unforgettable. • Correlations to Anatomy & Physiology Revealed! multimedia tool-The new edition will feature basic Anatomy & Physiology Revealed! correlations throughout the book, as well as specific correlations offered on the website. • A.R.I.S.--McGraw-Hill’s ARIS (Assessment, Review, and Instruction System) is an electronic homework and course management system which is designed for greater flexibility, power, and ease of use than any other system. Homework is easy-to-assign, automatically graded, and recorded in a robust grade book. Instructors can even share their course materials and assignments with colleagues. Whether you are looking for a “ready-to-use-straight-out-of-the-box” system or one you can customize to fit your specific course needs, ARIS is your solution. Contact your local McGraw-Hill Publisher’s representative for more information on getting started with ARIS. • More Critical Thinking Questions--These new critical thinking questions are found near Figure Legends throughout the text. FEATURES • Exceptional Writing!--This is the main Saladin advantage! His text is VERY accurate, straightforward and conversational. Based on 23 years of teaching, and written to the typical anatomy student, Saladin avoids confusing side issues and extraneous material in his text. He frequently uses analogies to help students understand difficult concepts. • Pedagogy as a Teaching Tool--Human Anatomy was created with one goal in mind – to offer students a superior learning tool with which to master anatomy. His approach conveys the necessary information, but is structured around a consistent and unique framework of pedagogical aids.s.s. 30 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 30 9/29/2006 11:54:19 AM Applied Biology • Objectives--Each Chapter is divided into five or six digestible sections. Each section begins with a short list of objectives, making it easier to break down the subject matter as well as Before You Go On questions at the beginning and end of each section. These features enable students to set manageable learning goals and to evaluate their own comprehension and progress in digestible segments before moving ahead. • Macroscopic to Microscopic--Complex structures provide macro and micro views of images so students can learn to connect the levels of reality with each other. • Atlas Quality Cadaver Images Full-color photographs of dissected human cadavers provide detailed views of human anatomy that allow students concrete visualization of anatomical students and their position relative to other parts of the body. CONTENTS Part One: Organization of the Human Body 1 The Study of Human Anatomy Atlas A Survey of the Human Body 2 Cytology—The Study of Cells 3 Histology—The Study of Tissues 4 Human Development Part Two: Support and Movement 5 The Integumentary System 6 Bone Tissue 7 The Axial Skeleton 8 The Appendicular Skeleton 9 Joints 10 The Muscular System—Introduction 11 The Axial Musculature 12 The Appendicular Musculature Atlas B Surface Anatomy Part Three: Integration and Control 13 Nervous Tissue 14 The Spinal Cord and Spinal Nerves 15 The Brain and Cranial Nerves 16 The Autonomic Nervous System and Visceral Reflexes 17 Sense Organs 18 The Endocrine System Part Four: Maintenance 19 The Circulatory System I—Blood 20 The Circulatory System II—The Heart 21 The Circulatory System III—Blood Vessels 22 The Lymphatic System and Immunity 23 The Respiratory System 24 The Digestive System 25 The Urinary System Part Five: Reproduction 26 The Reproductive System International Edition HUMAN ANATOMY 6th Edition By Kent Van De Graaf, Weber State University 2002 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-248665-0 / MHID: 0-07-248665-1 (Mandatory Package) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112284-9 / MHID: 0-07-112284-2 [IE] Website: www.mhhe.com/vdg CONTENTS Historical Perspective: 1 History of Anatomy Terminology, Organization, and the Human Organism: 2 Body Organization and Anatomical Nomenclature Microscopic Structure of the Body: 3 Cytology 4 Histology Support and Movement: 5 Integumentary System 6 Skeletal System: Introduction and the Axial Skeleton 7 Skeletal System: The Appendicular Skeleton 8 Articulations 9 Muscular System 10 Surface and Regional Anatomy Integration and Coordination: 11 Nervous Tissue and the Central Nervous System 12 Peripheral Nervous System 13 Autonomic Nervous System 14 Endocrine System 15 Sensory Organs Maintenance of the Body: 16 Circulatory System 17 Respiratory System 18 Digestive System 19 Urinary System Reproduction and Development: 20 Male Reproductive System 21 Female Reproductive System 22 Developmental Anatomy, Postnatal Growth, and Inheritance Appendix A Answers to Objective Questions with Explanations Human Anatomy Lab International Edition HUMAN ANATOMY By Michael McKinley, Glendale Community College and Valerie O’Loughlin, Indiana University --Bloomington 2006 (Feb 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310941-1 / MHID: 0-07-310941-X (with OLC Bind-In Card) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111722-7 / MHID: 0-07-111722-9 [IE] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/mckinley1 From the most pedagogically sound organization to the exceptional art, to the complete integration of the text with embryology, McKinley has formed a teaching system that will both motivate and enable students to understand and appreciate the wonders of human anatomy. This distinctive text was developed to stand apart from all other anatomy texts with an unrivaled, brilliantly rendered art program and a student friendly, accessible writing style that has been acclaimed by reviewers. CONTENTS Chapter 1 A First Look at Anatomy Chapter 2 The Cell: Basic Unit of Structure and Function Chapter 3 Embryology Chapter 4 The Tissue Level of Organization Chapter 5 Integumentary System SKELETAL SYSTEM Chapter 6 Cartilage and Bone Connective Tissue Chapter 7 Axial Skeleton Chapter 8 Appendicular Skeleton Chapter 9 Joints (Articulations) MUSCULAR SYSTEM Chapter 10 Muscle Tissue and Organization Chapter 11 Axial Musculature Chapter 12 Appendicular Musculature Chapter 13 Surface Anatomy NERVOUS SYSTEM Chapter 14 Nervous Tissue Chapter 15 Brain and Cranial Nerves Chapter 16 Spinal Cord and Spinal Nerves Chapter 17 Pathways and Tracts Chapter 18 Autonomic Division Chapter 19 Senses—General and Special Chapter 20 Endocrine System CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM Chapter 21 Blood Chapter 22 Heart Chapter 23 Vessels and Circulation Chapter 24 Lymphatic System Chapter 25 Respiratory System Chapter 26 Digestive System Chapter 27 Urinary System Chapter 28 Reproductive System New REGIONAL HUMAN ANATOMY A Laboratory Workbook for use with Models and Prosections, 3rd Edition By Frederick Edward Grine, Stony Brook University 2008 (January 2007) / 416 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305128-4 / MHID: 0-07-305128-4 The Grine Lab Workbook is designed for the Human Anatomy Lab course and takes a REGIONAL approach as opposed to a systems approach. This approach is becoming more and more popular as a way to teach Human Anatomy. Instructors who use a lab book with a “regional approach” and combine it with a text that takes a “systems” approach offer their students a combination that serves to reinforce anatomical knowledge since it forces the student to see each anatomical structure from two perspectives. Grine can be used effectively in conjunction with a lab course that uses human cadavers since the content is presented in the regional sequence typically practiced in dissection. NEW TO THIS EDITION • Currently, there is no other manual on the market that takes this approach that is NOT a dissection guide. This approach mimics the dissection of a human cadaver, and the order of the Chapters is such that most cadaveric dissections follow the same sequence. • The regional perspective allows students to think about anatomical structures (the heart for example) not only in terms of their relationship within a body system (cardiovascular), but also in terms of their relationship to organs located in the immediate vicinity (thoracic structures for example). • Exquisite collection of precisely rendered black and white illustrations intended for students to color them in and add labels. 31 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 31 9/29/2006 11:54:19 AM Applied Biology Labels are keyed to text explanations, so student reads text and then matches structure numbers to fill in the labels. • Collection of data is imbedded within each exercise as opposed to a separate table in the back of the manual. • Boxed activities including critical thinking questions, prompts to examine lab specimens or models, palpation exercises, etc. • Study Hints are located in selected exercises where additional information is provided to help students comprehend and retain difficult material presented. • Boxed clinical asides note important clinical connections. CONTENTS Laboratory 1: Anatomical Terminology, General Osteology, and General Arthrology1.1 Anatomical Terminology 1.2 General Osteology 1.3 General Arthrology Laboratory 2: The Back 2.1 The Integument 2.2 The Vertebral Column 2.3 Spinal Cord and Spinal Nerves 2.4 Muscles of the Back Laboratory 3: The Upper Limb 3.1 Bones of the Upper Limb 3.2 Joints of the Upper Limb 3.3 Innervation of the Upper Limb 3.4 Muscles of the Upper Limb 3.5 Blood Vessels of the Upper Limb Laboratory 4: The Lower Limb 4.1 Bones of the Lower Limb 4.2 Joints of the Lower Limb 4.3 Innervation of the Lower Limb 4.4 Muscles of the Lower Limb 4.5 Blood Vessels of the Lower Limb Laboratory 5: The Neck 5.1 Bones and Cartilages of the Neck 5.2 Nerves of the Neck 5.3 Muscles of the Neck 5.4 Blood Vessels of the Neck 5.5 Thyroid and Parathyroid Glands Laboratory 6: The Head 6.1 The Skull 6.2 The Dentition 6.3 Muscles of the Head 6.4 Nasal and Oral Cavities 6.5 Blood Vessels of the Head Laboratory 7: The Brain and Cranial Nerves 7.1 The Brain 7.2 Cranial Nerves Laboratory 8: The Eye and The Ear 8.1 The Eye 8.2 The Ear Laboratory 9: The Thorax 9.1 The Breast 9.2 The Thoracic Skeleton 9.3 Skeletal Muscles of the Thorax 9.4 The Thoracic Cavity 9.5 The Mediastinum 9.6 The Respiratory Apparatus 9.7 The Heart 9.8 Lymphatics in the Thorax 9.9 Blood Vessels of the Thorax 9.10 Nerves of the Thorax Laboratory 10: The Abdomen 10.1 The Abdominal Skeleton 10.2 Skeletal Muscles of the Abdomen 10.3 Abdominal Cavity and peritoneum 10.4 Digestive Canal and Organs 10.5 Blood Vessels of the Gut 10.6 Lymphatic Organs and Lymph Drainage 10.7 The Kidneys and Adrenal Glands 10.8 Gonadal Blood Vessels 10.9 Nerves in the Abdomen Laboratory 11: The Pelvis 11.1 The Pelvic Skeleton 11.2 Muscles of the Pelvis 11.3 Peritoneum in the Pelvic Cavity 11.4 Common Pelvic Viscera 11.5 Male Genitalia 11.6 Female Genitalia 11.7 Blood Vessels of the Pelvis 11.8 Nerves of the Pelvis CONTENTS 1 Organs, Systems, and Organization of the Body 2 Microscopy 3 Cell Structure 4 Tissues 5 Integumentary System 6 Introduction to the Skeletal System 7 Appendicular Skeleton 8 Axial Skeleton: Vertebrae, Ribs, Sternum, Hyoid 9 Axial Skeleton--Skull 10 Articulations 11 Introduction to the Study of Muscles and Muscles of the Shoulder and Upper Extremity 12 Muscles of the Hip, Thigh, Leg and Foot 13 Muscles of the Head and Neck 14 Muscles of the Torso 15 Introduction to the Nervous System 16 Brain and Cranial Nerves 17 Spinal Cord and Somatic Nerves 18 Introduction to Sensory Receptors 19 Endocrine System 20 Blood Cells 21 The Heart 22 Introduction to Blood Vessels and Arteries of the Upper Body 23 Arteries of the Lower Body 24 Veins, Fetal Circulation, and the Lymphatic System 25 Respiratory System 26 Digestive System 27 Urinary System 28 Male Reproductive System 29 Female Reproductive System / Appendix Preparation of Materials HUMAN ANATOMY LABORATORY TEXTBOOK 7th Edition By Harold Benson and Kathleen Talaro of Pasadena City College 2005 (May 2004) / 416 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247579-1 / MHID: 0-07-247579-X This stand-alone manual, featuring complete explanations of essential information, is ideal for the one-semester, introductory human anatomy course. The main dissection specimen is the cat, with additional exercises for the cow, rat, and sheep organs. CONTENTS New HUMAN ANATOMY LABORATORY MANUAL 2nd Edition By Eric Wise 2008 (June 2007) / 320 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294602-4 / MHID: 0-07-294602-4 This laboratory manual is expressly written to coincide with the Chapters of Human Anatomy, 2/e by Kenneth Saladin. This lab manual has clear explanations of anatomy experiments. Other features include a set of review questions at the end of each lab, plus numerous outstanding color photographs and artwork. FEATURES 1 Some Fundamentals 1 Anatomical Terminology 2 Body Cavities and Membranes 3 Organ Systems: Rat Dissection 2 Cells and Tissues 4 Microscopy 5 Basic Cell Structure 6 Mitosis 7 Epithelial Tissues 8 Connective Tissues 9 The Integument 3 The Skeletal System 10 The Skeletal Plan 11 The Skull 12 The Vertebral Column and Thorax 13 The Appendicular Skeleton 14 Articulations 4 The Skeletal Muscles 15 Muscle Tissue 16 Muscle Structure 17 Body Movements 18 Cat Dissection: Skin Removal 19 Head and Neck Muscles 20 Trunk and Shoulder Muscles 21 Upper Extremity Muscles 22 Abdominal and Pelvic Muscles 23 Lower Extremity Muscles 5 The Nervous System 24 Nerve Tissue 25 The Spinal Cord, Spinal Nerves, and Reflex Arcs 26 The Neuromuscular Junction 27 Brain Anatomy: External 28 Brain Anatomy: Internal 29 The Eye 30 The Ear The Histology Atlas 6 Metabolic Support 31 The Blood 32 The Heart 33 The Arteries and Veins 34 Fetal Circulation 35 The Lymphatic System and the Immune Response 36 The Respiratory System 37 The Digestive System 38 The Urinary System 7 The Endocrine and Reproductive Systems 39 The Endocrine System 40 The Reproductive System Histology Self-Quizzes Laboratory Reports / Appendix A Answer Keys to Histology Self-Quizzes / Appendix B Slice of Life Videodisc Directory • The cat is the main dissection specimen in this laboratory manual, however, it is integrated with material on human anatomy, so that animals do not have to be relied upon as dissection specimens. • Instructors can down load Instructors Manual’s and other materials at: www.mhhe.com/labcentral • Review sections at the end of each exercise assist students in assessing thier understanding. This lab manual includes about 20 review questions per exercise! • Review questions include short answer exercises as well as application questions and labeling activities. • All experiments presented in numbered list format making it easier for students to follow the steps required to set up and complete each experiment. 32 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 32 9/29/2006 11:54:19 AM Applied Biology LAB MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY HUMAN ANATOMY 6th Edition By Kent Van De Graaf, Weber State University 2002 / 320 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-290794-0 / MHID: 0-07-290794-0 Website: www.mhhe.com/vdg CONTENTS 1 Body Organization and Anatomical Nomenclature 2 Cytology 3 Histology 4 Integumentary System 5 Skeletal System: Introduction and the Axial Skeleton 6 Skeletal System: The Appendicular Skeleton 7 Articulations 8 Muscular System: Muscles of the Upper Body 9 Muscular System: Muscles of the Lower Body 10 Nervous Tissue and the Central Nervous System 11 Peripheral Nervous System 12 Endocrine System 13 Sensory Organs 14 Circulatory System: Blood, Heart, and Arteries 15 Circulatory System: Veins, Fetal Circulation, and Lymphatic System 16 Respiratory System 17 Digestive System 18 Urinary System 19 Reproductive System 20 Anatomy of the Cat Human Anatomy - Multimedia New ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED CDS 1-4 COMPLETE SERIES By Medical College of Ohio 2007 (May 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321553-2 / MHID: 0-07-321553-8 Anatomy & Physiology Revealed is the ultimate interactive cadaver dissection experience. This state-of-the-art tutorial uses cadaver photos combined with a layering technique that allows the student to peel away layers of the human body to reveal structures beneath the surface. Anatomy & Physiology Revealed offers animations, radiologic imaging, audio pronunciations, and a comprehensive quizzing tool. This tutorial can be used as part of any one or two semester undergraduate Anatomy & Physiology course; it is available as a stand-alone or can be combined with any of McGraw-Hill’s Anatomy & Physiology textbooks. FEATURES • DISSECTION: Using actual cadaver photographs blended together with a state of the art layering technique, Anatomy Revealed allows students to partake in an interactive dissection of a human cadaver. Students can literally peel away layers of the human body to reveal structures beneath the surface. • ANIMATION: Compelling animations demonstrate muscle actions, clarify anatomical relationships, or explain difficult concepts. ANATOMY REVEALED: VOLUME 1, SKELETAL AND MUSCULAR SYSTEMS By Medical College of Ohio and McGraw-Hill 2006 (Jan 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312323-3 / MHID: 0-07-312323-4 (CD#1) CD 1: Muscular and Skeletal Systems CD 2: Nervous System CD 3: Cardiovascular and Respiratory Systems CD 4: Digestive, Urinary, Reproductive, and Endocrine Systems CONTENTS CD 1: Muscular and Skeletal Systems CD 2: Cardiovascular and Respiratory Systems CD 3: Digestive, Urinary, Reproductive, and Endocrine Systems CD 4: Nervous System ANATOMY & pHYSIOLOGY REVEALED CD#2 NERVOUS By Medical College of Ohio and McGraw-Hill 2006 (April 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312321-9 / MHID: 0-07-312321-8 Anatomy & Physiology Revealed is the ultimate interactive cadaver dissection experience. This state-of-the-art tutorial uses cadaver photos combined with a layering technique that allows the student to peel away layers of the human body to reveal structures beneath the surface. Anatomy & Physiology Revealed offers animations, radiologic imaging, audio pronunciations, and a comprehensive quizzing tool. This tutorial can be used as part of any one or two semester undergraduate Anatomy & Physiology course; it is available as a stand-alone or can be combined with any of McGraw-Hill’s Anatomy & Physiology textbooks. ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED CD #3 - CARDIOVASCULAR, RESPIRATORY AND LYMPHATIC SYSTEMS By Medical College of Ohio 2006 (December 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321550-1 / MHID: 0-07-321550-3 Anatomy & Physiology Revealed is the ultimate interactive cadaver dissection experience. This state-of-the-art tutorial uses cadaver photos combined with a layering technique that allows the student to peel away layers of the human body to reveal structures beneath the surface. Anatomy & Physiology Revealed offers animations, radiologic imaging, audio pronunciations, and a comprehensive quizzing tool. This tutorial can be used as part of any one or two semester undergraduate Anatomy & Physiology course; it is available as a stand-alone or can be combined with any of McGraw-Hill’s Anatomy & Physiology textbooks. • IMAGING: Labeled x-ray, MRI, and CAT scan images are available by system. • SELF-TEST: Challenging quizzes allow students to test their ability to identify anatomical structures in a timed practical exam format. 33 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 33 9/29/2006 11:54:19 AM Applied Biology New ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED CD #4 – DIGESTIVE, URINARY, REPRODUCTIVE AND ENDOCRINE SYSTEMS By Medical College of Ohio 2007 (May 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321551-8 / MHID: 0-07-321551-1 Anatomy & Physiology Revealed is the ultimate interactive cadaver dissection experience. This state-of-the-art tutorial uses cadaver photos combined with a layering technique that allows the student to peel away layers of the human body to reveal structures beneath the surface. Anatomy & Physiology Revealed offers animations, radiologic imaging, audio pronunciations, and a comprehensive quizzing tool. This tutorial can be used as part of any one or two semester undergraduate Anatomy & Physiology course; it is available as a stand-alone or can be combined with any of McGraw-Hill’s Anatomy & Physiology textbooks. FEATURES • DISSECTION: Using actual cadaver photographs blended together with a state of the art layering technique, Anatomy Revealed allows students to partake in an interactive dissection of a human cadaver. Students can literally peel away layers of the human body to reveal structures beneath the surface. • ANIMATION: Compelling animations demonstrate muscle actions, clarify anatomical relationships, or explain difficult concepts. • IMAGING: Labeled x-ray, MRI, and CAT scan images are available by system. • SELF-TEST: Challenging quizzes allow students to test their ability to identify anatomical structures in a timed practical exam format. VIRTUAL ANATOMY DISSECTION REVIEW CD-ROM Version 2.0 By John R. Waters, Pennsylvania State University – University Park 2004 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297431-7 / MHID: 0-07-297431-1 (Stand-Alone Version) Nationwide, a majority of teaching laboratories use cats as their primary dissection specimens. Carolina Biological, for example, provides 120,000 cat specimens per year to the college market. However, students often have a difficult time making the correlations between the cat dissection and the human body. This new CD-ROM dissection program identifies approximately 600 different anatomical structures. Sound profiles provide pronunciations for each of these 600 terms. Also featured on the CD, are 100 high-resolution photographs. By clicking anywhere on the structures of the cat, an information frame will then provide the name of the structure, as well as a smaller image that highlights and puts the structure in its human anatomical context. In addition, approximately 30 QuickTime movies demonstrate joint movements. CONTENTS Skeletal System (Axial Skeleton) Skull, anterior view / Skull, lateral view / Skull, inferior view / Skull, interior view / Atlas / Axis / Cervical vertebra / Thoracic vertebra / Lumbar vertebra / Sacrum / Sternum / Rib (Appendicular Skeleton) Clavicle / Scapula / Humeus / Ulna / Radius / Wrist and Hand / Os coxa / Femur / Tibia / Fibula / Ankle and Foot Muscular System Chest / Chest, deep / Neck / Shoulder/back / Shoulder/back, deep / Abdomen / Arm, flexors / Arm, flexors, deep / Arm, extensors / Antebrachium, extensors / Hind region, lateral / Hind region, lateral, deep / Leg, medial / Leg, medial, deep / Shank, lateral / Shank, medial Gastrointestinal System Mouth and Throat / Abdominal cavity, general view / Liver / Small intestines / Large intestines Respiratory System Larynx and Trachea / Lungs Cardiovascular System Cranial vessels, general view / Cranial vessels, shoulder and arm / Caudal vessels, general view / Caudal vessels, hip and leg / Sheep heart, external view / Sheep heart, interior, right side / Sheep heart, interior, left side Urogenital System Reproductive system, male / Reproductive system, female / Sheep kidney Nervous System Sheep brain, lateral view / Sheep brain, inferior view / Sheep brain, posterior view / Sheep brain, sagital section / Sheep eye, external view / Sheep eye, internal view / Inner ear (model) Human Physiology - Textbooks International Edition New HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY 10th Edition By Stuart Ira Fox 2008 (January 2007) / 800 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294613-0 / MHID: 0-07-294613-X ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110207-0 / MHID: 0-07-110207-8 [IE] Human Physiology, Tenth Edition, is intended for the one-semester Human Physiology course often taken by allied health and other biology students. The beginning Chapters introduce basic chemical and biological concepts to provide students with the framework they need to comprehend physiological principles. The Chapters that follow promote conceptual understanding rather than rote memorization of facts. Health applications are included throughout the book to heighten interest, deepen understanding of physiological concepts, and help students relate the material to their individual career goals. Every effort has been made to help students integrate related concepts and understand the relationships between anatomical structures and their functions. NEW TO THIS EDITION • Inovative Clinical Pedagogical Techniques--The innovative pedagogical techniques utilized in Human Physiology helps students to make the most of the information in the text. Each Chapter includes the following clinical learning aids: 1) “Clinical Investigations” are brief case studies presented at the beginning of the Chapters to present a fascinating puzzle. Clues to solving the case are given along the way, as each relevant piece of information is presented. 2) “Clinical and Fitness Applications” boxes help students understand physiological concepts through medical and exercise applications. • A new and updated art program helps clarify difficult concepts. 18 new figures and 3 new tables are indcluded in the text. The new figures are: 1.6, 1.24, 5.1, 6.18, 6.27, 6.29, 6.30, 7.15, 7.16, 7.25, 8.24, 10.11, 10.22, 11.12, 12.17, 12.23, 14.13, 16.36, 16.43 • Revisions and content updates have been made in every Chapter, keeping the text current with the latest research, and incorporating new and recently modified physiological concepts. • New Text Specific Website!--McGraw-Hill’s ARIS (Assessment, Review, and Instruction System) is an electronic homework and course management system which is designed for greater flexibility, power, and ease of use than any other system. Homework is easy-to-assign, automatically graded, and recorded in a robust grade book. Instructors can even share their course materials and assignments with colleagues. Whether you are looking for a “ready-to-use-straight-out-of-the-box” system or 34 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 34 9/29/2006 11:54:19 AM Applied Biology one you can customize to fit your specific course needs, ARIS is your solution. Contact your local McGraw-Hill Publisher’s representative for more information on getting started with ARIS. FEATURES • A revised and improved Instructor Manual is now available with Fox 10e. The manual includes Chapter scope, lecture outlines and answers to text questions. CONTENTS 1 The Study of Body Function 2 Chemical Composition of the Body 3 Cell Structure and Genetic Control 4 Enzymes and Energy 5 Cell Respiration and Metabolism 6 Interactions Between Cells and the Extracellular Environment 7 The Nervous System: Neurons and Synapses 8 The Central Nervous System 9 The Autonomic Nervous System 10 Sensory Physiology 11 Endocrine Glands: Secretion and Action of Hormones 12 Muscle: Mechanisms of Contraction and Neural Control 13 Blood, Heart and Circulation 14 Cardio Output, Blood Flow, and Blood Pressure 15 The Immune System 16 Respiratory Physiology 17 Physiology of the Kidneys 18 The Digestive System 19 Regulation of Metabolism 20 Reproduction Appendix A Solutions to Clinical Investigations Appendix B Answers to Test Your Knowledge of Terms and Facts Questions Human Physiology Lab New LABORATORY GUIDE TO HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY Concepts and Clinical Applications, 12th Edition By Stuart Ira Fox 2008 (January 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294617-8 / MHID: 0-07-294617-2 A Laboratory Guide to Human Physiology, Twelfth Edition, is a stand-alone human physiology manual that can be used in conjunction with any human physiology textbook. It includes a wide variety of exercises that support most areas covered in a human physiology course, allowing instructors the flexibility to choose those exercises best suited to meet their particular instructional goals. Background information that is needed to understand the principles and significance of each exercise is presented in a concise manner, so that little or no support is needed from the lecture text. New to this edition International Edition VANDER’S HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY 10th Edition By Eric P. Widmaier, Boston University, Hershel Raff, Medical College of Wisconsin and Kevin T. Strang, University of Wisconsin — Madison 2006 (January 2005) / 864 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312286-1 / MHID: 0-07-312286-6 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111678-7 / MHID: 0-07-111678-8 [IE] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/widmaier10e The tenth edition of this classic text has been entrusted into the capable hands for the 2nd time to a dynamic author team. Eric Widmaier, Hershel Raff, and Kevin Strang have taken on the challenge of maintaining the strengths and reputation that have long been the hallmark of Human Physiology: The Mechanisms of Body Function. The fundamental purpose of this textbook has remained undeniably the same: to present the principles and facts of human physiology in a format that is suitable for undergraduates regardless of academic background or field of study. Human Physiology, tenth edition, carries on the tradition of clarity and accuracy, while refining and updating the content to meet the needs of today’s instructors and students. The tenth edition features a streamlined, clinically oriented focus to the study of human body systems. contents 1 Homeostasis: A Framework for Human Physiology 2 Chemical Composition of the Body 3 Cell Structure and Protein Function 4 Movement of Molecules Across Cell Membranes 5 Control of Cells by Chemical Messengers 6 Neuronal Signaling and the Structure of the Nervous System 7 Sensory Physiology 8 Consciousness, the Brain, and Behavior 9 Muscle 10 Control of Body Movement 11 The Endocrine System 12 Cardiovascular Physiology 13 Respiratory Physiology 14 The Kidneys and Regulation of Water and Inorganic Ions 15 The Digestion and Absorption of Food 16 Regulation of Organic Metabolism and Energy Balance 17 Reproduction 18 Defense Mechanisms of the Body Procedures Revised--Many of the exercises have updated explanations of basic physiology and clinical applications, as well as procedures that have been updated for newer equipment. 15 NEW EXERCISES IN Ph.I.L.S.! The Physiology Interactive Lab Simulations (Ph.I.L.S.) 2.0 CD-ROM now contains 26 simulated lab exercises that can be performed in addition to, or instead of, the noted exercises in the Fox laboratory guide. This easy to use software offers students the flexibility to change the parameters of every lab experiment, with no limit to the amount of times a student can repeat experiments or modify the variables. Revised Review Activities--The review activities have been revised for almost all of the exercises in order to improve clarity and coverage. Features A “Caution” Icon--This special Caution icon is used throughout the guide to alert the student that special attention is necessary when preparing for or performing the laboratory exercises. Review Activities Throughout--The review activities in the laboratory reports provide the same 3-level review question format as found in the textbook. Questions fall into 3 levels: a.) Test Your Knowledge of Terms and Facts, b.) Test Your Understanding of Concepts and Principles, and c.) Test Your Ability to Analyze and Apply Your Knowledge. Correlations to Human Physiology, by Stuart Fox--Each exercise includes a “Textbook Correlations” box that enables students to integrate the Fox: Human Physiology text and lab material. However, this is still a stand alone lab manual and can be used with any Human Physiology text. Intelitool laboratory exercises are included. Alternative procedures for users of BIOPAC are provided for several exercises pertaining to recording the EEG, cardiovascular measurements (blood pressure, pulse, etc.), skeletal muscle recordings (EMG, contractions, fatigue), and respiratory measurements. Instructors can download the Instructor’s Manual and other materials at: www.mhhe.com/labcentral Contents 1 Introduction: Structure and Physiological Control Systems 2 Cell Function and Biochemical Measurements 3 The Nervous System and Sensory Physiology 4 The Endocrine System 5 Skeletal Muscles 6 Blood: Gas Transport, Immunity, and Clotting Functions 7 The Cardiovascular System 8 Respiration and Metabolism 9 Renal Function and Homeostasis 10 Digestion and Nutrition 11 Reproductive System / Appendix 1 Basic Chemistry Appendix 2 Sources of Equipment and Solutions Appendix 35 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 35 9/29/2006 11:54:20 AM Applied Biology 3 Multimedia Correlations to the Laboratory Exercises New LAB EXERCISES IN HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY A Clinical & Experimental Approach with PhILS 2.0 By William Lutterschmidt and Deborah Lutterschmidt, Oregon State University 2008 (January 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330539-4 / MHID: 0-07-330539-1 This stand-alone laboratory text has been developed as an introduction to fundamental concepts in physiology. The text has been designed to emphasize an experimental approach to teaching physiology and is therefore designed for a particular type of student and curriculum. Many of the exercises will help students develop their clinical knowledge of physiology, plus help them gain an appreciation for the clinical techniques as would be needed by students studying nursing, physical therapy, and other health-oriented fields. Although this laboratory text may be used independently, its presentation and formal of material will closely follow that of Vander’s Human Physiology, 10th Edition. FEATURES • Exercise on Scientific Investigation--A Laboratory exercise on Scientific Investigation is included to introduce basic data analyses used in physiology. Each laboratory exercise is also organized in a format of a scientific publication having An Introduction, Materials and Methods, Results, and Discussion sections. • Pre-Lab Exercises--Each laboratory presents an introduction and a series of pre-lab exercises that students should complete before each laboratory session. These pre-lab exercises may be collected by the instructor at the beginning of the laboratory session in addition to or in lieu of a pre-lab quiz. A brief introduction to the exercise presents the essential information for understanding the physiological significance of each laboratory. • Offering “Comparative Notes”--The study of physiology is most intriguing to both students and instructors when particular physiological processes are placed in the broader context of physiological adaptation. Each lab exercises offers a “Comparative Note” to introduce the student to a variety of physiological solutions to the unique challenges of a species’ environment. • Expectations Clearly Defined--Each laboratory has a clear and consistent organization: A concise statement of Purpose, Learning Objectives, Materials List, and a brief Introduction. • Physiology Interactive Lab Simulations (Ph.I.L.S.) 2.0--This laboratory text utilizes Ph.I.L.S. where no appropriate alternative to classical animal-based experiments are available. • Lab Reports--A laboratory report follows each exercise to examine a student’s understanding of the physiological concepts investigated in the laboratory. • Instructor’s Manual--An instructor’s manual is provided online at www.mhhe.com/lutterschmidt1. Simply contact your local McGrawHill sales representative to obtain the appropriate user name and password. CONTENTS 1 Scientific Investigation 2 Homeostasis 3 Diffusion, Osmosis, and Tonicity 4 Enzyme Activity 5 Action Potentials 6 Reflexes 7 Sensory Physiology 8 Functional Anatomy of Muscle and Mechanics of Contraction 9 Physiology of Muscle Contraction 10 Endocrine Physiology 11 Cardiovascular Physiology 12 Physiology of Blood 13 Respiratory Physiology 14 Renal Physiology 15 Metabolic Rate New experimental and applied physiology laboratory manual 8th Edition By Richard G Pflanzer, Iupui - Indianapolis 2007 (Sept 2005) / 384 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-250077-6 / MHID: 0-07-250077-8 Experimental and Applied Physiology Laboratory Manual, Eighth Edition, is a comprehensive, stand-alone laboratory manual for the one-semester physiology course taught at the undergraduate level. It can accompany any physiology textbook on the market, and reinforces those principles that are fundamental to all courses on physiology. The strengths of this lab manual are its emphasis on hands-on experiments, a practical balance of background information, and clear procedural instructions. NEW TO THIS EDITION Laboratory exercises have been updated throughout to reflect latest technology and current procedures. The lab manual has been shortened in length through the elimination of experiments which used older equipment such as the Harvard Modular Recording System, the Lafayette Datagraph, and the Narco Bio-Systems Physiograph. features One of the great strengths of this lab manual is the emphasis on handson experiments and activities. In order to perform these experiments, students must rely on recording, collecting and analyzing data. The excellent illustration program continues to provide students with realistic, dimensional, and anatomical renderings. The outstanding pedagogical program includes Review Concepts and Chapter Objectives to guide students through the experimental process. The manual’s unique organization arranges experiments according to the equipment used. All BioPac computer experiments have been removed from the text, but are available as an optional package. CONTENTS 1 Metrics, Measurements, Computations 2 Bioinstrumentation 3 Compound Light Microscopy 4 Physical Processes of Biological Importance 5 Neural Control of Skeletal Muscle 6 Contractility of Skeletal Muscle I: The Twitch and Motor Unit Summation 7 Contractility of Skeletal Muscle II: Mechanical Summation, Contracture, Tetanus, and Fatigue 8 Contractility of Skeletal Muscle III: Isotonic Contraction and Initial Length versus Work 9 Electromyography and Dynamometry 10 Neuromuscular Reflexes of the Spinal Cord and Brain Stem 11 Somatic Sensation 12 Cranial Nerves: Assessment of Functions 13 Visual Acuity, Accommodation, Peripheral Vision, Color Vision, and Ophthalmoscopy 14 Hearing and Equilibrium 15 Electroencephalography I: Relaxation and Brain Rhythms 16 Electroencephalography II: Occipital Lobe Alpha Rhythms 17 Blood Cells and Blood Types 18 Red Blood Cell Count 19 Hemoglobin Content, Hematocrit, and Red Cell Indices 20 Hemostasis: The Platelet Count, Bleeding Time, and Coagulation 21 White Blood Cell Count 22 Microcirculation 23 The Cardiac Cycle 24 Heart Sounds, Pulse Rate, and Systemic Blood Pressure 25 Plethysmography and the Peripheral Pressure Pulse 26 Electrical Activity of the Heart: The Electrocardiogram 27 Electrical Activity of the Heart: Vectorcardiography 28 The Respiratory Cycle 29 Pulmonary Function Tests: Volumes and Capacities 30 Pulmonary Function Tests: Forced Expiratory Volume and Maximal Voluntary Ventilation 31 Analysis of Urine 32 Digestion 33 Metabolic Rates: Indirect Calorimetry 34 Maintenance and Regulation of Body Temperature 35 Glucose Tolerance Appendix A Preparation of Agar Plates and Pipettes Appendix B Preparation of the Egg Osmometer Appendix C Pithing the Frog Appendix D Preparing the Freshwater Turtle for Heart Experiments Appendix E Jones Pulmonor Disinfectant Procedure 36 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 36 9/29/2006 11:54:20 AM Applied Biology Human Physiology - Multimedia MEDIAPHYS VERSION 3.0 An Introduction to Human Physiology, 3rd Edition By Tom Stavraky, University of Western Ontario 2006 (June 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294582-9 / MHID: 0-07-294582-6 (Stand-Alone) One-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Textbooks Website: http://www.mhhe.com/mediacentral McGraw-Hill is proud to introduce MediaPhys 3.0, the most comprehensive physiology study tool available. MediaPhys is a multimedia educational CD-ROM that offers cross-platform compatibility (Windows or Macintosh systems). This dynamic program offers 16 complete modules featuring detailed explanations, high-quality illustrations, and animations to provide students with a thorough introduction into the world of physiology. MediaPhys is filled with interactive activities and quizzes to help reinforce physiology concepts that are often difficult to understand. Now students can learn and study on their own while using a powerful tool that challenges them to succeed! CONTENTS 1. Introduction to Physiology 2. Body Fluids 3. Human Cell 4. Nerve Cells 5. Muscles 6. Nervous System 7. Sensory Systems 8. Cardiovascular System I- The Heart 9. Cardiovascular System II- Blood Vessels 10. Respiratory System 11. Renal System, Water and Electrolyte Balance 12. Acid-Base Balance 13. Endocrine System 14. Reproductive System 15. Digestive System 16. Metabolism PHYSIOLOGY INTERACTIVE LABORATORY SIMULATIONS 2.0 2nd Edition By Phillip J Stephens, Villanova University 2006 (June 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297009-8 / MHID: 0-07-297009-X (CD-ROM) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331005-3 / MHID: 0-07-331005-0 (Stand-Alone) Created by Dr. Phil Stephens at Villanova University, the Ph.I.L.S (physiology interactive lab simulations) CD-ROM offers 23 laboratory simulations. This revolutionary learning tool may be used to supplement or substitute for wet labs. Students can use Ph.I.L.S. to adjust variables, view outcomes, make predictions, and draw conclusions. This easy-to-use software offers each student the flexibility to change the parameters of the lab experiment. There is no limit to the amount of times a student can repeat the experiment or change variables within the experiments. The Ph.I.L.S. CD-ROM allows students to perform experiments without having to use expensive lab equipment (like Biopac, IWORX or Intellitool). Students can work individually to perform the experiments on their own time without harming themselves or live animals. The Ph.I.L.S. CD-ROM is the perfect way reinforce key Physiology concepts with powerful lab experiments. CONTENTS Skeletal Muscle Function: 1) Stimulus-Dependent Force Generation; 2) The Length-Tension Relationship; 3) Principles of Summation and Tetanus Electrocardiogram and Heart Function: 4) ECG and Exercise; 5) The Meaning of Heart Sounds; 6) Electrical Axis of the Heart Respiration: 7) Altering Body Position; 8) Altering Airway Volume; 9) Exercise-Induced Changes; 10) Deep Breathing and Cardiac Function Basal Metabolic Rate and Body Size: 11) Size and Metabolism Crayfish Muscle: 12) Membrane potentials and K+; 13) Membrane potentials and Na+; 14)Spatial summation of EPSPs Frog Sciatic Nerve: 15) Stimulus-response relationships; 16) Conduction velocity and temperature; 17) Refractory Periods Endocrine: 18) Thyroid Function and Metabolic Rate Frog Heart: 19) Imposed Conditions and Heart Function; 20) Refractory Period of the Heart Blood: 21) pH and the Oxygen Dissociation Curve; 22) DPG and the Oxygen Dissociation Curve Blood Pressure: 23) Blood Pressure and Gravity Blood: 16) pH and the oxygen dissociation curve International Edition New MADER’S UNDERSTANDING HUMAN ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 6th Edition By Susannah Longenbaker, Columbus State Community College 2008 (January 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328886-4 / MHID: 0-07-328886-1 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110208-7 / MHID: 0-07-110208-6 [IE] Renowned for her effective learning systems, respected author Sylvia Mader has helped thousands of entry-level students understand and enjoy the principles of human anatomy and physiology. Now, Susannah Longenbaker is building on Dr. Mader’s format and engaging writing style while adding her own personal touch to this successful title. The writing is still clear, direct and user-friendly, but is now enriched with new clinical information, terminology and classroom-tested features such as “Focus on Forensics” readings and in-text “Content Check-Up” questions. Drawing on over twenty years of teaching experience, Sue Longenbaker writes for the next generation of students that will learn anatomy and physiology from this classic textbook. NEW TO THIS EDITION • Logical, accessible writing style (without being overly “chatty”) for the one-semester course that includes lots of relevant examples, artwork and analogies. • Excellent pedagogy written to capture the interest of the student and expand upon the Chapter concepts. Examples include; Focus on Forensics, Medical Focus, Visual Focus and What’s New boxed readings. • Direct Application to Careers in Health-Related Fields. • Anatomy and Physiology Revealed (APR)--This text has the opportunity to be packaged with the most unique and popular student tutorial CD in the anatomy & physiology market today. CONTENTS Part I Human Organization 1 Organization of the Body 2 Chemistry of Life 3 Cell Structure and Function 4 Body Tissues and Membranes Part II Support and Movement 5 The Integumentary System 6 The Skeletal System 7 The Muscular System Part III Integration and Coordination 8 The Nervous System 9 The Sensory System 10 The Endocrine System Part IV Maintenance of the Body 11 Blood 12 The Circulatory System 13 The Lymphatic System and Body Defense 14 The Respiratory System 15 The Digestive System 16 The Urinary System and Excretion Part V Reproduction and Development 17 The Reproductive System 18 Human Development and Birth 19 Human Genetics / Appendix A Reference Figures: The Human Organism / Appendix B Understanding Medical Terminology 37 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 37 9/29/2006 11:54:20 AM Applied Biology International Edition New ESSENTIALS OF ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 6th Edition By Rod R Seeley and Trent D Stephens of Idaho State University and Philip Tate, Phoenix College 2007 (March 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322805-1 / MHID: 0-07-322805-2 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125782-4 / MHID: 0-07-125782-9 [IE] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/seeleyess5 Designed for the one-semester course, Seeley/Stephens/Tate’s Essentials of Anatomy and Physiology is written to allow instructors the ability to accomplish one overall goal: to teach the basics of A&P while fostering the skill of problem solving. Through learning how to solve problems and think critically, students learn A&P based on two themes: the relationship between structure and function, and homeostasis. NEW TO THIS EDITION Updated Art- In addition to art updates based on new data, and new scanning electron micrograph’s, all of the homeostasis art pieces will be improved to better explain flow patterns and be easier to comprehend. “Case in Point” Readings- Certain manifestations or symptoms are described to the reader based on the material in the text that they have just read. This is then followed by a physiological and/or anatomical explanation. These sections reinforce and present immediate real-life applications to what the student is reading, thereby increasing comprehension. In some instances they will build on the Clinical Aside boxes and Predict Questions (current features of the text) to offer an even more thorough example of the topic(s) being discussed in the surrounding textual material. Anatomy & Physiology Revealed A unique 4 CD multimedia tool designed to help students learn and review using a virtual human cadaver! Detailed cadaver photos layered upon one another provide an interactive dissection experience! Anatomy & Physiology Revealed includes 4 major areas: dissections, animations, imaging, anatomy terms and an incredible self testing program. All sections combine to make study time efficient and lectures unforgettable Homework Manager Homework Manager--McGraw-Hill’s Homework Manager is a complete electronic homework and course management system. Free on adoption, instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. Instructors can edit questions, import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. Homework Manager has automatic grading and reporting of easy-to-assign homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a student is registered in the course, all student activity within Homework Manager is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. features Process figures. These self-contained art pieces break down physiological processes into a series of smaller steps, allowing students to track the key occurrences and learn them as they navigate through the figure. Homeostasis figures. These specialized flowcharts provide a summary of homeostatic mechanisms by outlining the functions of a system and the means by which that system regulates a parameter within a narrow range of values. Clinical Focus boxes. These boxed essays are expanded versions of the clinical notes that permit more detailed coverage of a topic. Subjects covered include pathologies, current research, sports medicine, exercise physiology, pharmacology and clinical applications. They are designed to not only illustrate the Chapter content but also to stimulate interest. Predict questions. These critical thinking questions, embedded throughout each Chapter, convert the passive learner into an active learner by requiring students to use new information to solve a problem. The answer to this kind of question is not a mere restatement of a fact, but rather a prediction and analysis of the data, the synthesis of an experiment, or the evaluation and weighing of important variables of a problem. Answers for the Predict questions are explained at the end of each Chapter to demonstrate the process of problem-solving. CONTENTS 1 Human Organism 2 Chemical Basis of Life 3 Cell Structures and Their Functions 4 Tissues, Glands, and Membranes 5 Integumentary System 6 Skeletal System: Bones and Joints 7 Muscular System 8 Nervous System 9 Senses 10 Endocrine System 11 Blood 12 Heart 13 Blood Vessels and Circulation 14 Lymphatic System and Immunity 15 Respiratory System 16 Digestive System 17 Nutrition, Metabolism, and Body Temperature Regulation 18 Urinary System and Fluid Balance 19 Reproductive System 20 Development, Heredity, and Aging / Appendixes A Table of Measurements B Some Reference Laboratory Values C Solution Concentrations D Answers to Critical Thinking Questions International Edition ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY WITH INTEGRATED STUDY GUIDE 3rd Edition By Stanley E. Gunstream, Emeritus, Pasadena City College 2006 (Jan 2005) / 544 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-235111-8 / MHID: 0-07-235111-X ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111703-6 / MHID: 0-07-111703-2 [IE] Designed for an introductory, one-semester course, the scope, organization, writing style, depth of presentation, and pedagogical aspects of this text have been tailored to meet the needs of students preparing for a career in allied health. This text does not assume any prior science knowledge on the part of the student and effectively presents students with the fundamentals of anatomy and physiology. It’s the only one-semester text available with a built-in study guide/workbook. CONTENTS Part 1 Organization of the Body 1 Introduction to the Human Body 2 Chemical Aspects of Life 3 The Cell 4 Tissues and Membranes Part 2 Covering, Support, and Movement of the Body 5 The Integumentary System 6 The Skeletal System 7 The Muscular System Part 3 Integration and Control 8 The Nervous System 9 The Senses 10 The Endocrine System Part 4 Maintenance of the Body 11 Blood 12 Heart and Blood Vessels 13 The Lymphatic System and Defenses Against Disease 14 The Respiratory System 15 The Digestive System 16 Urinary System Part 5 Reproduction 17 The Reproductive Systems 18 Pregnancy, Prenatal Development, and Genetics Part 6 Study Guides Appendix A Keys to Medical Terminology Appendix B Answers to Check Your Understanding Questions System Pathology boxes. These boxes, found in each system Chapter, represent a modified case study. Their goal is to show how each body system is influenced by the condition described in the case study. A System Interactions table explains how the pathology described impacts each body system, and a Predict question is included to stimulate application of the concepts utilized in the case. 38 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 38 9/29/2006 11:54:20 AM Applied Biology International Edition HOLE’S ESSENTIALS OF HUMAN A&P 9th Edition By David N. Shier, Washtenaw Community College, Jackie l. Butler, Grayson County College and Ricki Lewis, Contributing Editor, “The Scientist” 2006 (January 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310938-1 / MHID: 0-07-310938-X (with Online Learning Center Bind-In Card) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111656-5 / MHID: 0-07-111656-7 [IE] Designed for the one-semester anatomy and physiology course, Hole’s Essentials of Human Anatomy and Physiology assumes no prior science knowledge and supports core topics with clinical applications, making difficult concepts relevant to students pursuing careers in the allied health field. The unparalleled teaching system is highly effective in providing students with a solid understanding of the important concepts in anatomy and physiology. CONTENTS Unit 1 Levels of Organization 1 Introduction to Human Anatomy and Physiology 2 Chemical Basis of Life 3 Cells 4 Cellular Metabolism 5 Tissues Unit 2 Support and Movement 6 Skin and the Integumentary System 7 Skeletal System 8 Muscular System Unit 3 Integration and Coordination 9 Nervous System 10 Somatic and Special Senses 11 Endocrine System Unit 4 Transport 12 Blood 13 Cardiovascular System 14 Lymphatic System and Immunity Unit 5 Absorption and Excretion 15 Digestion and Nutrition 16 Respiratory System 17 Urinary System 18 Water, Electrolyte, and Acid-Base Balance Unit 6 The Human Life Cycle 19 Reproductive Systems 20 Pregnancy, Growth, and Development One-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Lab New WORKBOOK TO ACCOMPANY ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED By Robert Broyles, Butler County Community College 2008 (January 2007) / 480 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340354-0 / MHID: 0-07-340354-7 The Workbook to Accompany Anatomy and Physiology Revealed by Robert Broyles is a workbook/study guide designed to help students get the most they can out of the Anatomy and Physiology Revealed (APR) CD, and out of their anatomy and physiology course. The Table of Contents closely follows the 4CD APR set and is organized along the lines of a typical Anatomy and Physiology course. The individual exercises include art from APR and also have review questions, tables, terminology quiz questions, and reminders on key content. FEATURES • The inside front cover includes a step-by-step quick reference chart covering the initial steps needed to access main sections of APR. The author refers students back to this chart when appropriate at different points in the workbook. • Each Chapter is numbered; exercises reflect the Chapter number, followed by the sequential exercise number (e.g. Exercise 4.1, Exercise 4.2, etc.), making it easy for instructors to assign portions of the workbook. • The introductory Chapter includes an overview of tools, views, etc., to help students navigate within APR. • “Check Point” questions within many of the exercises help students make the connection between content in APR and lecture/lab. • “Heads-Up” notes let students know that the content is important and related to information or exercises to come. • Many exercises include tables to help students visually comprehend various anatomical groupings. A “Bonus Question” on root words and/or terminology is included at the end of the tables. • The workbook includes coloring figures to identify bony landmarks. • “What Have I Learned?” questions summarize each exercise and may be assigned as a quiz or homework activity. CONTENTS Volume One: Skeletal and Muscular Systems / Skeletal System / Muscular System / Volume Two: Nervous System /Volume Three: Cardiovascular, Lymphatic and Respiratory Systems: Cardiovascular System / Lymphatic System / Respiratory System / Volume Four: Digestive, Urinary, Reproductive and Endocrine Systems: Digestive System / Urinary System / Reproductive System / Endocrine System New ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY LABORATORY TEXTBOOK Essentials Version, 4th Edition By Stanley E Gunstream, Pasadena City College 2007 (Feb 2006) / 352 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-246470-2 / MHID: 0-07-246470-4 Gunstream’s manual presents the fundamentals of human anatomy and physiology in an easy-to-read manner appropriate for allied health students. Designed especially for a one-semester course, the Essentials Version features a concise writing style, 37 self-directing exercises, full-color photomicrographs in the Histology Atlas, and numerous illustrations in each exercise. NEW TO THIS EDITION Numerous illustrations have been revised to improve understanding FEATURES The back inside cover features a description of the relative positions of anatomical parts that require the use of directional terms. Also, to observe some anatomical structures, it is necessary to view them in sections that have been cut along specific planes through the body or a body part. Common directional terms and the planes are described, and most of them are illustrated in an accompanying figure. Each exercise topic is covered at an appropriate level of difficulty for the intended student audience and presented in a direct, concise manner to facilitate student learning. The necessary key terms are in bold print to aid students in building a vocabulary of anatomical and physiological terms. Activities consist of (1) labeling illustrations, (2) dissections, (3) study of specimens and models, (4) physiological experiments, and (5) microscopic studies. These activities allow students to develop an understanding of each exercise topic by (1) labeling the illustrations using information presented in the text and (2) completing corresponding portions of the laboratory report. 39 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 39 9/29/2006 11:54:20 AM Applied Biology Each exercise begins with a short list of objectives that outline the learning responsibilities for students. The exercises are basically selfdirecting, which minimizes the need for lengthy introductions by the instructor. A major dissection specimen is not included. Instead, a rat dissection is used in a single exercise to acquaint students with the basic organization of organ systems in mammals. Instructors will find that the listing of required equipment and materials on the first page of each exercise facilitates laboratory preparation. The exercises use standard equipment and materials that are usually available in most biology departments. CONTENTS Part 1, Fundamentals Exercise 1, Introduction to Human Anatomy Exercise 2, Body Organization Exercise 3, The Microscope Exercise 4, Cell Anatomy Exercise 5, Mitotic Cell Division Exercise 6, Diffusion and Osmosis Exercise 7, Epithelial and Connective Tissues Exercise 8, The Integument Part 2, The Skeletal System Exercise 9, The Skeletal Plan Exercise 10, The Skull Exercise 11, The Vertebral Column and Thorax Exercise 12, The Appendicular Skeleton Exercise 13, Articulations Part 3, The Muscle System Exercise 14, Muscle Organization and Body Movements Exercise 15, Head and Trunk Muscles Exercise 16, Muscles of the Upper Limb Exercise 17, Muscles of the Lower Limb Exercise 18, Muscle and Nerve Tissues Exercise 19, The Nature of Muscle Contraction Exercise 20, The Physiology of Muscle Contraction: Using the Narco Bio-Systems Physiograph Exercise 21, The Physiology of Muscle Contraction: Using the Intelitool Physiograph Part 4, The Nervous System Exercise 22, The Spinal Cord and Reflex Arcs Exercise 23, Brain Anatomy: External Exercise 24, Brain Anatomy: Internal Exercise 25, The Eye Exercise 26, The Ear Part 5, The Circulatory System Exercise 27, Blood Tests Exercise 28, The Heart Exercise 29, Blood Vessels, Fetal Circulation, and Lymphatic System Exercise 30, Cardiovascular Phenomena Part 6, The Respiratory System Exercise 31, The Respiratory Organs Exercise 32, Respiratory Physiology Part 7, The Digestive System Exercise 33, The Digestive Organs Exercise 34, Digestio Part 8, The Urinary System Exercise 35, The Urinary System Exercise 36, Urine and Urinalysis Part 9, The Endocrine and Reproductive Systems Exercise 37, The Endocrine Glands Exercise 38, The Reproductive Organs Histology Atlas Laboratory Reports Appendix A: Caliberating the Physiograph Appendix B: Sample Physiograph Records Appendix C: Vital Capacities Appendix D: Microorganisms New LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY ESSENTIALS OF ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 6th Edition By Kevin T Patton, St Charles Community College 2007 (July 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294594-2 / MHID: 0-07-294594-X Kevin Patton divides the lab activities typically covered in A&P lab into 42 subunits, allowing instructors the flexibility to choose the units and sequence that integrates with lecture material. Basic content is introduced first, and gradually more complex activities are developed. Features include procedure check lists, coloring exercises, boxed hints, safety alerts, separate lab reports, and a full-color histology mini-reference. FEATURES Written in an easy-to-understand step-by-step format that allows students to focus on lab activities, not on reading. Includes clinical examples and other practical applications that help improve critical thinking skills. Emphasizes a multisensory approach to learning. Flexible activities can be adapted for different types and availability of equipment and specimens. IM includes alternate activities and demonstrations, individual and global supply lists, supply sources, specific teaching hints, answers to questions, and more CONTENTS Welcome to Anatomy and Physiology Laboratory / Histology Minireference / The Basics 1 The Microscope 2 Cell Anatomy 3 Transport through Cell Membranes 4 The Cell’s Life Cycle 5 Epithelial Tissue 6 Connective Tissue 7 Muscle and Nerve Tissue 8 Organization of the Body Support and Movement 9 The Skin 10 Overview of the Skeleton 11 The Skull 12 The Vertebral Column and Thoracic Cage 13 The Appendicular Skeleton 14 Joints15 Organization of the Muscular System 16 Muscle Identification 17 Muscular Contractions Integration and Control 18 Nerves and Reflexes 19 The Spinal Cord and Spinal Nerves 20 The Brain and Cranial Nerves 21 The Eye and Vision 22 The Ear, Hearing, and Equilibrium 23 Endocrine Glands 24 Hormones Regulation and Maintenance 25 Blood 26 Structure of the Heart 27 Electrical Activity of the Heart 28 The Pulse and Blood Pressure 29 The Circulatory Pathway 30 The Lymphatic System and Immunity 31 Respiratory Structures 32 Pulmonary Volumes and Capacities 33 Digestive Structures 34 Enzymes and Digestion 35 Urinary Structures 36 Urinalysis Reproduction 37 The Male Reproductive System 38 The Female Reproductive System 39 Development 40 Genetics and Heredity Major Dissection 41 The Laboratory Rat 42 The Fetal Pig 43 The Human Appendix LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY HOLE’S ESSENTIALS OF HUMAN ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 9th Edition By Terry R. Martin, Kishwaukee College 2006 (Jan 2005) / 384 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-285287-5 / MHID: 0-07-285287-9 This full-color manual is designed for students with minimal backgrounds in science who are pursuing careers in allied health fields. Designed to support the ninth edition of Hole’s Essentials of Human A&P by Shier, Butler, and Lewis, this manual contains 49 laboratory exercises and reports, which are integrated closely to the textbook. Exercises are planned to illustrate and review the anatomical and physiological facts and principles presented in the text and to help students investigate some of these ideas in greater detail. CONTENTS Fundamentals of Human Anatomy and Physiology 1 Scientific Method and Measurements 2 Body Organization and Terminology 3 Chemistry of Life 4 Care and Use of the Microscope Cells 5 Cell Structure and Function 6 Movements Through Cell Membranes 7 Cell Cycle Tissues 8 Epithelial Tissues 9 Connective Tissues 10 Muscle and Nervous Tissues Integumentary System 11 Integumentary System Skeletal System 12 Bone Structure 13 Organization of the Skeleton 14 Skull 15 Vertebral Column and Thoracic Cage 16 Pectoral Girdle and Upper Limb 17 Pelvic Girdle and Lower Limb 18 Joints Muscular System 19 Skeletal Muscle Structure 20 Muscles of the Face, Head, and Neck 21 Muscles of the Chest, Shoulder, and Upper Limb 22 Muscles of the Abdominal Wall and Pelvic Outlet 23 Muscles of the Hip and Lower Limb Nervous System 24 Nervous Tissue and Nerves 25 Reflex Arc and Reflexes 26 Meninges and Spinal Cord 27 Brain and Cranial Nerves 28 Dissection of the Sheep Brain Special Senses 29 Ear and Hearing 30 Eye 31 Visual Tests and Demonstrations Endocrine System 32 Endocrine System Cardiovascular System 33 Blood Cells 34 Blood Testing--A Demonstration 35 Blood Typing 36 Heart Structure 37 Cardiac Cycle 38 Blood Vessels 39 Pulse Rate and Blood Pressure 40 Arteries and Veins Lymphatic System 41 Lymphatic System Digestive System 42 Digestive Organs 43 Action of a Digestive Enzyme Respiratory System 44 Respiratory Organs 45 Breathing and Respiratory Volumes and Capacities Urinary System 46 Kidney Structure 47 Urinalysis Reproductive System 48 Male Reproductive System 49 Female Reproductive System Appendix 1 Preparation of Solutions Appendix 2 Assessments of Laboratory Reports 40 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 40 9/29/2006 11:54:21 AM Applied Biology Two-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Textbooks International Edition New ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 8th Edition By Rod Seeley and Trent Stephens of Idaho State University and Philip Tate, Phoenix College 2008 (March 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329368-4 / MHID: 0-07-329368-7 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110210-0 / MHID: 0-07-110210-8 [IE] Anatomy and Physiology is designed to help students develop a solid, basic understanding of anatomy and physiology without an encyclopedic presentation of detail. Great care has been taken to select important concepts and to perfectly describe the anatomy of cells, organs, and organ systems. The plan that has been followed for eight editions of this text is to combine clear and accurate descriptions of anatomy with precise explanations of how structures function and examples of how they work together to maintain life. To emphasize the concepts of anatomy and physiology, the authors provide explanations of how the systems respond to aging, changes in physical activity, and disease, with a special focus on homeostasis and the regulatory mechanisms that maintain it. Timely and interesting examples demonstrate the application of knowledge in a clinical context. NEW TO THIS EDITION • Comprehensive coverage without encyclopedic detail. Examples include: Homeostasis Summaries-summarize entire process explained in susurrounding text. Tables with Illustrative Art. Process Art. • More Clinical Coverage--In direct response to reviewer feedback case studies have been added to the eighth edition. These will be an excellent addition to the clinical material also found in the Homeostasis Summaries, Systems Pathology boxed readings, Clinical Asides, Clinical Focuses, NEW Clinical Genetics and/or Process Figures. • New Genetic Material -Chapter 3 & 29 have been completely rewritten to include new findings in this exciting and relevant field. -New Genetics boxed readings address some of the most significant discoveries and how they affect diseases. • Resource Reference Guide directs instructors to all relevant A& P resources for each Chapter of the text. -Bound into instructor’s copies, this foldout chart is indispensable for instructors planning their class lectures. • Online Prep Center includes Digital Content Manager content. The digital assets formerly on this cross-platform CD-ROM are now organized online and can be easily searched and downloaded. -Art Library: Full-color digital files of all illustrations in the book (745 images), plus the same art saved in gray scale (745 images). These images are also pre-inserted into blank PowerPoint slides for ease of use. Unlabeled versions of 164 figures are included in both color and grayscale formats. -Photo Library: Digital files of 160 instructionally significant photographs from the text- including cadaver, bone, histology, and surface anatomy images. Also includes 34 photos saved in unlabeled versions. -Table Library: Every table that appears in the text is provided in electronic form (195 tables). -PowerPoint Lecture Outlines: Ready-made presentations that combine art and lecture notes are provided for each of the 29 Chapters of the text. -Active Art Library: 41 pieces included (30 new, book specific/11 repurposed pieces from other texts) -Animations Library: 45 full-color animations illustrating physiological processes are provided (30 new, book specific/15 repurposed animations from 6th edition). CONTENTS Part 1 Organization of the Human Body 1 The Human Organism 2 The Chemical Basis of Life 3 Cell Biology and Genetics 4 Histology: The Study of Tissues Part 2 Support and Movement 5 Integumentary System 6 Skeletal System: Bones and Bone Tissue 7 Skeletal System: Gross Anatomy 8 Articulations and Movement 9 Muscular System: Histology and Physiology 10 Muscular System: Gross Anatomy Part 3 Integration and Control Systems 11 Functional Organization of Nervous Tissue 12 Spinal Cord and Spinal Nerves 13 Brain and Cranial Nerves 14 Integration of Nervous System Functions 15 The Special Senses 16 Autonomic Nervous System 17 Functional Organization of the Endocrine System 18 Endocrine Glands Part 4 Regulations and Maintenance 19 Cardiovascular System: Blood 20 Cardiovascular System: The Heart 21 Cardiovascular System: Peripheral Circulation and Regulation 22 Lymphatic System and Immunity 23 Respiratory System 24 Digestive System 25 Nutrition, Metabolism, and Temperature Regulation 26 Urinary System 27 Water, Electrolytes, and Acid-Base Balance Part 5 Reproduction and Development 28 Reproductive System 29 Development, Growth, and Aging / Appendix A Table of Measurements Appendix B Scientific Notation Appendix C Solution Concentrations Appendix D pH Appendix E Reference Laboratory Values Appendix F Answers to Review and Comprehension Questions Appendix G Answers to Critical Thinking Questions Appendix H Answers to Predict Questions International Edition New ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 4th Edition By Kenneth S Saladin, Georgia College and State University 2007 (Jan 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322804-4 / MHID: 0-07-322804-4 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110804-1 / MHID: 0-07-110804-1 [IE] From the completely new, exceptional art program, to the complete integration of the text with technology, Saladin has formed a teaching solution that will both motivate and enable your students to understand and appreciate the wonders of anatomy and physiology. This distinctive text was developed to stand apart from all other A&P texts with unparalleled art, a writing style that has been acclaimed by both users and reviewers and clinical coverage that offers the perfect balance without being too much. Saladin’s well-accepted organization of topics is based upon the most logical physiological ties between body systems. The text requires no prior knowledge of college chemistry or cell biology, and is designed for a two-semester A&P college course. NEW TO THIS EDITION Entirely new art program! Saladin is raising the bar on art programs in A&P! The new art program features the highest quality of realism, 3D appeal, accuracy and clarity. The entire new art program is also available for use digitally by intructors. Anatomy and Physiology Revealed! A unique 4 CD multimedia tool designed to help students learn and review using a virtual human cadaver! Detailed cadaver photos layered upon one another provide an interactive dissection experience! Anatomy & Physiology Revealed includes 5 major areas: dissections, animations, imaging, anatomy terms and an incredible self testing program. All sections combine to make study time efficient and lectures unforgettable. McGraw-Hill’s ARIS for “Anatomy & Physiology” is a complete electronic homework and course management system, designed for greater ease of use than any other system available. Free on adoption of “Anatomy & Physiology”, instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. Instructors can edit questions and algorithms [if applicable], import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of easy-to-assign algorithmically generated [if applicable] homework, quizzing, and 41 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 41 9/29/2006 11:54:21 AM Applied Biology testing. Once a student is registered in the course, all student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. an interactive dissection experience! Anatomy & Physiology Revealed includes 4 major areas: dissections, animations, imaging, anatomy terms and an incredible self testing program. All sections combine to make study time efficient and lectures unforgettable. Tables have been reorganized to allow for even greater effectiveness. All figures and tables are positioned nearby their description within the narrative helping students make the connections. McGraw-Hill’s ARIS for “Hole’s Human Anatomy & Physiology” is a complete electronic homework and course management system, designed for greater ease of use than any other system available. Free on adoption of “Hole’s Human Anatomy & Physiology”, instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. Instructors can edit questions and algorithms [if applicable], import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of easy-to-assign algorithmically generated [if applicable] homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a student is registered in the course, all student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. FEATURES Exceptional writing. Saladin offers the perfect balance between accurate, sufficient, detail and text description. Students are able to better understand the difficult information provided without being overloaded with excessive content and wordiness. Clinical coverage and thought-provoking questions widely used. Saladin repeatedly uses clinical examples and thought-provoking questions to lead the student to more complete understanding of difficult topics and the relevance of material presented in their future career. Some topics Saladin addresses include: medical imaging techniques, gene therapy, carpal tunnel syndrome, Alzheimer disease, AIDS, Viagra and hypertension. Each Chapter is divided into five or six digestible sections with Objectives and Before You Go On questions at the beginning and end of each section. These features enable students to set manageable learning goals and to evaluate their own comprehension and progress in digestible segments before moving ahead. CONTENTS Part 1 Organization of the Body 1 Major Themes of Anatomy and Physiology 2 The Chemistry of Life 3 Cellular Form and Function 4 Genetics and Cellular Function 5 Histology Part 2 Support and Movement 6 The Integumentary System 7 Bone Tissue 8 The Skeletal System 9 Joints 10 The Muscular System 11 Muscular Tissue Part 3 Integration and Control 12 Nervous Tissue 13 The Spinal Cord, Spinal Nerves, and Somatic Reflexes 14 The Brain and Cranial Nerves 15 The Autonomic Nervous System and Visceral Reflexes 16 Sense Organs 17 The Endocrine System Part 4 Regulation and Maintenance 18 The Circulatory System: Blood 19 The Circulatory System: The Heart 20 The Circulatory System: Blood Vessels and Circulation 21 The Lymphatic and Immune Systems 22 The Respiratory System 23 The Urinary System 24 Water, Electrolyte, and Acid-Base Balance 25 The Digestive System 26 Nutrition and Metabolism Part 5 Reproduction and Development 27 The Male Reproductive System 28 The Female Reproductive System 29 Human Development International Edition New HOLE’S HUMAN ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 11th Edition By David N Shier, Washtenaw Community College, Jackie L Butler, Grayson County College and Ricki Lewis, SUNY-at Albany 2007 (March 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321364-4 / MHID: 0-07-321364-0 (with ARIS) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110785-3 / MHID: 0-07-110785-1 [IE] Shier et al., continue the unparalleled tradition of Hole in the 11th edition. Hole was created for the introductory level student and assumes no prior science knowledge by placing emphasis on the fundamentals. This new edition updates a great A&P classic while offering greater efficiencies to the user. The 11th edition of Hole also offers never before technology that combined with the text offer users an incredible Course Solution! Technology like Anatomy and Physiology Revealed and the new online Homework Manager bring unprecedented opportunities to the classroom whether on campus or at home! NEW TO THIS EDITION Anatomy and Physiology Revealed! A unique 4 CD multimedia tool designed to help students learn and review using a virtual human cadaver! Detailed cadaver photos layered upon one another provide A new section called “Foundations for Success” has been added to the beginning of the text. This section was specifically designed to help students LEARN how to study at the collegiate level and efficiently use the tools available to them. References to Appendices now appear in a different color to make them stand out for quick student reference to the outstanding appendices. Membrane potential substantially revised--The entire section on the establishment of the resting membrane potential in neurons, and how graded potentials can lead to action potentials, has been revised, including many new supporting figures. Cadaver Atlas Reference Plates have been integrated into the appropriate Chapters, rather than being covered at the end of Chapter 24. This allows students to effectively and efficiently view the plates as content is covered within the Chapters. Font sizes within tables have been increased for greater clarity and ease of use. FEATURES Outstanding pedagogical program key tools include: - InnerConnections multipurpose illustrations, found at the ends of systems Chapters, conceptually link the highlighted body system to every other system, reinforcing the dynamic interactions of groups of organs. These graphic representations review Chapter concepts, make connections, and stress the “big picture” in learning and applying the concepts and facts of anatomy and physiology. - Summary Material: Hole places emphasis on tables which are consistent with the narrative, keeping them clear and succinct, and avoiding excessive detail. - From Science to Technology sections preview the technological applications of knowledge in anatomy and physiology that students are likely to encounter in the future, and explain how and why the technology was developed. Clinical Coverage – Hole uses the appropriate amount of clinical coverage to draw students into the material by showing readers relevance of information presented. Often clinical coverage can help a student better understand a concept from a new perspective CONTENTS Unit One Levels of Organization 1 Introduction to Human Anatomy and Physiology 2 Chemical Basis of Life 3 Cells 4 Cellular Metabolism 5 Tissues Unit Two Support and Movement 6 Skin and the Integumentary System 7 Skeletal System 8 Joints of the Skeletal System 9 Muscular System Unit Three Integration and Coordination 10 Nervous System I: Basic Structure and Function 11 Nervous System II: Divisions of the Nervous System 12 Somatic and Special Senses 13 Endocrine System Unit Four Transport 14 Blood 15 Cardiovascular System 16 Lymphatic System and Immunity Unit Five Absorption and Excretion 17 Digestive System 18 Nutrition and Metabolism 19 Respiratory System 20 Urinary System 21 Water, Electrolyte, and Acid-Base Balance Unit Six The Human Life Cycle 22 Reproductive System 23 Pregnancy, Growth, and Development 24 Genetics and Genomics 42 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 42 9/29/2006 11:54:21 AM Applied Biology DICTIONARY OF BIOSCIENCE 2nd Edition By McGraw-Hill 2003 / 662 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141043-4 / MHID: 0-07-141043-0 [A Professional Publication] CONTENTS Preface / Staff / How to Use the Dictionary / Fields and Their Scope / Pronunciation Key / A-Z Terms / Appendix International Edition CONCEPTS OF HUMAN ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 5th Edition By Kent M Van De Graaf, Weber State University and Stuart Ira Fox, Los Angeles Pierce College 1999 / 1088 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115865-7 / MHID: 0-07-115865-0 [IE] CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction to Anatomy & Physiology Chapter 2 Chemical Composition of the Body Chapter 3 Cell Structure and Genetic Regulation Chapter 4 Enzymes, Energy and Metabolism Chapter 5 Membrane Transport and the Membrane Potential Chapter 6 Histology Chapter 7 Integumentary System Chapter 8 Skeletal System: Bone Tissue and Bone Development Chapter 9 Skeletal System: Axial Skeleton Chapter 10 Skeletal System: Appendicular Skeleton Chapter 11 Articulations Chapter 12 Muscle Tissue and Muscle Physiology Chapter 13 Musclar System Chapter 14 Functional Organization of the Nervous System Chapter 15 Central Nervous System Chapter 16 Peripheral Nervous System Chapter 17 Autonomic Nervous System Chapter 18 Sensory Organs Chapter 19 Endocrine System Chapter 20 Circulatory System: Blood Chapter 21 Circulatory System Chapter 22 Circulatory System: Cardiac Output and Blood Flow Chapter 23 Lymphatic System and Immunity Chapter 24 Respiratory System Chapter 25 Urinary System: Fluid, Electrolyte, and Acid-Base Balance Chapter 26 Digestive System Chapter 27 Regulation of Metabolism Chapter 28 Reproduction: Development and the Male Reproductive System Chapter 29 Female Reproduction Chapter 30 Developmental Anatomy and Inheritance Two-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Lab New human anatomy & physiology laboratory manual Fetal Pig Dissection, 3rd Edition By Terry R Martin, Kishwaukee College 2007 (March 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282734-7 / MHID: 0-07-282734-3 Human Anatomy and Physiology Laboratory Manual: Fetal Pig Dissection is designed for one- or two-semester A&P lab courses that utilize the pig as the primary dissection specimen. This lab manual offers excellent, full color dissection photos of the fetal pig with matching, corresponding labeled art. Web site activities found in numerous labs give students additional resources for learning. This laboratory manual contains sixtytwo laboratory exercises and reports. The exercises illustrate and review anatomical and physiological facts and principles presented in an A&P textbook and help students investigate these ideas in greater detail. New to this edition All new Exercise 3: The Chemistry of Life has been added, as well as an all new exercise on Genetics, based upon feedback from current users and reviewers. The following exercises have been moved to the Online Learning Center, giving instructors the option of continuing to use live specimens in these experiments if desired: Skeletal Muscle Contraction, Nerve Impulse Stimulation, and Factors Affecting the Cardiac Cycle. Features Additional pedagogical features include: safety guidelines found on the inside front cover, learning objectives included for each exercise and laboratory reports that follow each exercise for ease of use. Often the laboratory exercises are short or are divided into several separate procedures. This allows an instructor to select those exercises or parts of exercises that will best meet the needs of a particular program. Also, exercises requiring a minimal amount of laboratory equipment have been included. A section entitled “Study Skills for Anatomy and Physiology” is located in the front material, and was written by students in a human anatomy and physiology course. Critical thinking applications are included within most of the laboratory exercises to enhance valuable critical thinking skills that students need throughout their lives. A metric measurement and conversion table is included inside the back cover of the laboratory manual for easy reference. Additional Web Activities can be found at the accompanying website at: http://www.mhhe.com/martinlm New LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 8th Edition By Eric Wise, Santa Barbara City College 2008 (March 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296561-2 / MHID: 0-07-296561-4 (Details unavailable at press time) Instructors can download Instructors Manual’s and other materials at: www.mhhe.com/labcentral Full-color fetal pig dissection photos are enhanced with corresponding illustrations. A “Materials Needed” list can be found at the beginning of each exercise. Contents Fundamentals of Human Anatomy and Physiology 1 Scientific Method and Measurements 2 Body Organization and Terminology 3 Chemistry of Life 4 Care and Use of the Microscope Cells 5 Cell Structure and Function 6 Movements Through Cell Membranes 7 Cell Cycle Tissues 8 Epithelial Tissues 9 Connective Tissues 10 Muscle and Nervous Tissues Integumentary System 11 Integumentary System Skeletal System 12 Bone Structure and Classification 13 Organization of the Skeleton 14 43 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 43 9/29/2006 11:54:21 AM Applied Biology Skull 15 Vertebral Column and Thoracic Cage 16 Pectoral Girdle and Upper Limb 17 Pelvic Girdle and Lower Limb 18 Joints Muscular System 19 Skeletal Muscle Structure 20 Muscles of the Face, Head, and Neck 21 Muscles of the Chest, Shoulder, and Upper Limb 22 Muscles of the Deep Back, Abdominal Wall, and Pelvic Outlet 23 Muscles of the Hip and Lower Limb 24 Fetal Pig Dissection: Musculature Nervous System 25 Nervous Tissue and Nerves 26 Meninges and Spinal Cord 27 Reflex Arc and Reflexes 28 Brain and Cranial Nerves 29 Dissection of the Sheep Brain Somatic and Special Senses 30 Receptors and Somatic Senses 31 Smell and Taste 32 Ear and Hearing 33 Equilibrium 34 Eye Structure 35 Visual Tests and Demonstrations Endocrine System 36 Endocrine Histology and Diabetic Physiology Cardiovascular System 37 Blood Cells 38 Blood Testing – A Demonstration 39 Blood Typing 40 Heart Structure 41 Cardiac Cycle 42 Blood Vessels 43 Pulse Rate and Blood Pressure 44 Arteries and Veins 45 Fetal Pig Dissection: Cardiovascular System Lymphatic System 46 Lymphatic System Digestive System 47 Digestive Organs 48 Fetal Pig Dissection: Digestive System 49 Action of a Digestive Enzyme Respiratory System 50 Respiratory Organs 51 Fetal Pig Dissection: Respiratory System 52 Breathing and Respiratory Volumes and Capacities 53 Control of Breathing Urinary System 54 Kidney Structure 55 Urinalysis 56 Fetal Pig Dissection: Urinary System Reproductive Systems and Development 57 Male Reproductive System 58 Female Reproductive System 59 Fetal Pig Dissection: Reproductive Systems 60 Fertilization and Early Development 61 Genetics Online Laboratory Exercises 62 Skeletal Muscle Contractions 63 Nerve Impulse Stimulation 64 Factors Affecting the Cardiac Cycle Appendix 1 Preparation of Solutions Appendix 2 Assessments of Laboratory Reports New LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY HOLE’S HUMAN ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 11th Edition By Terry R Martin, Kishwaukee College 2007 (March 2006) / 480 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282957-0 / MHID: 0-07-282957-5 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/shier10 This best-selling Laboratory Manual, written by Terry R. Martin, has been updated throughout. The new 11th edition of this effective manual is organized into units that correlate directly with the text and include new and updated art to match Hole’s Human Anatomy and Physiology, 11e. New to this edition All new Exercise 3: The Chemistry of Life has been added, as well as an all new exercise on Genetics, based upon feedback from current users and reviewers. The following exercises have been moved to the Online Learning Center, giving instructors the option of continuing to use live specimens in these experiments if desired: Skeletal Muscle Contraction, Nerve Impulse Stimulation, and Factors Affecting the Cardiac Cycle. Features Critical Thinking applications are included within most of the laboratory exercises to enhance valuable critical thinking skills. The cat reference plates are incorporated within the appropriate system of dissection. All cat dissection figures are in full color. The laboratory manual begins with a lab on the Scientific Method and Measurements. The tissue micrographs are named and have labels added on the micrographs. Many color photographs and line art of the skull, muscles, sheep brain, eye dissection, and reflexes enhance learning for the student. A “Materials Needed” section is located at the beginning of each laboratory exercise for greater ease in laboratory preparations. A section entitled “Study Skills for Anatomy and Physiology” is located in the front material, and was written by students in a human anatomy and physiology course. Instructors can download Instructor’s Manual and other materials at: www.mhhe.com/labcentral Contents Fundamentals of Human Anatomy and Physiology 1 Scientific Method and Measurements 2 Body Organization and Terminology 3 Chemistry of Life 4 Care and Use of the Microscope Cells 5 Cell Structure and Function 6 Movements Through Cell Membranes 7 Cell Cycle Tissues 8 Epithelial Tissues 9 Connective Tissues 10 Muscle and Nervous Tissues Integumentary System 11 Integumentary System Skeletal System 12 Bone Structure and Classification 13 Organization of the Skeleton 14 Skull 15 Vertebral Column and Thoracic Cage 16 Pectoral Girdle and Upper Limb 17 Pelvic Girdle and Lower Limb 18 Joints Muscular System 19 Skeletal Muscle Structure 20 Muscles of the Face, Head, and Neck 21 Muscles of the Chest, Shoulder, and Upper Limb 22 Muscles of the Deep Back, Abdominal Wall, and Pelvic Outlet 23 Muscles of the Hip and Lower Limb 24 Cat Dissection: Musculature Nervous System 25 Nervous Tissue and Nerves 26 The Meninges and Spinal Cord 27 Reflex Arc and Reflexes 28 Brain and Cranial Nerves 29 Dissection of the Sheep Brain Somatic and Special Senses 30 Receptors and Somatic Senses 31 Smell and Taste 32 Ear and Hearing 33 Equilibrium 34 Eye Structure 35 Visual Tests and Demonstrations Endocrine System 36 Endocrine Histology and Diabetic Physiology Cardiovascular System 37 Blood Cells 38 Blood Testing – A Demonstration 39 Blood Typing 40 Heart Structure 41 Cardiac Cycle 42 Blood Vessels 43 Pulse Rate and Blood Pressure 44 Arteries and Veins 45 Cat Dissection: Cardiovascular System Lymphatic System 46 Lymphatic System Digestive System 47 Digestive Organs 48 Cat Dissection: Digestive System 49 Action of a Digestive Enzyme Respiratory System 50 Respiratory Organs 51 Cat Dissection: Respiratory System 52 Breathing and Respiratory Volumes and Capacities 53 Control of Breathing Urinary System 54 Kidney Structure 55 Urinalysis 56 Cat Dissection: Urinary System Reproductive Systems and Development 57 Male Reproductive System 58 Female Reproductive System 59 Cat Dissection: Reproductive Systems 60 Fertilization and Early Development 61 Genetics Online Laboratory Exercises 62 Skeletal Muscle Contractions 63 Nerve Impulse Stimulation 64 Factors Affecting the Cardiac Cycle Appendix 1 Preparation of Solutions Appendix 2 Assessments of Laboratory Reports New ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY LABORATORY MANUAL 4th Edition By Eric Wise, Santa Barbara City College 2007 (March 2006) / 672 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287509-6 / MHID: 0-07-287509-7 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/saladin3 This manual (utilizing the cat as the primary dissection specimen) uses the same four-color art program as the fourth edition of Saladin’s Anatomy & Physiology and follows the same order of presentation. The 47 exercises provide a comprehensive overview of the human body and present the core elements of the subject matter. New to this edition The third edition includes many new and revised illustrations and photographs. There are many new photographs in the skeletal section as well as the muscular, cardiovascular and reproductive exercises. Several photographs in the manual have been enlarged to show better detail. This is particularly true regarding the photographs of cat dissections. The artwork and the photographs in the third edition were carefully matched not only for visual comparisons but also for terminology as well. 44 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 44 9/29/2006 11:54:21 AM Applied Biology Expanded review sections at the end of each exercise assist students in assessing their understanding. Previous edition generally included 5 review questions per exercise. This new edition of the Lab Manual includes about 20 review questions per exercise! Review questions include short answer exercises as well as application questions and labeling activities. All experiments presented in numbered list format making it easier for students to follow the steps required to set up and complete each experiment. Utilizes computer simulations as alternatives to frog experimentation for selected exercises. Instructors can download Instructors Manual’s and other materials at: www.mhhe.com/labcentral Features The cat is the main dissection specimen in this laboratory manual, however, it is integrated with material on human anatomy, so that animals do not have to be relied upon as dissection specimens. Collection of data is imbedded within each exercise as opposed to a separate table in the back of the manual. Study Hints are located in selected exercises where additional information is provided to help students comprehend and retain difficult material presented. Contents Laboratory Exercises 1 Measurement in Science 2 Organs, Systems, and Organization of the Body 3 Microscopy 4 Cell Structure and Function 5 Some Functions of Cell Membranes 6 Tissues 7 Integumentary System 8 Introduction to the Skeletal System 9 Appendicular Skeleton 10 Axial Skeleton, Vertebrae, Ribs, Sternum, Hyoid 11 Axial Skeleton--Skull 12 Articulations 13 Introduction to the Study of Muscles and Muscles of the Shoulder and Arm 14 Muscles of the Forearm and Hand 15 Muscles of the Hip and Thigh 16 Muscles of the Leg and Foot 17 Muscles of the Head and Neck 18 Muscles of the Trunk 19 Muscle Physiology 20 Introduction to the Nervous System 21 Structure and Function of the Brain and Cranial Nerves 22 Structure and Function of the Spinal Cord and Nerves 23 Nervous System Physiology-Stimuli and Reflexes 24 Introduction to Sensory Receptors 25 Taste and Smell 26 Eye and Vision 27 Ear, Hearing, and Balance 28 Endocrine System 29 Blood Cells 30 Blood Tests and Typing 31 Structure of the Heart 32 Electrical Conductivity of the Heart 33 Functions of the Heart 34 Introduction to Blood Vessels and Arteries of the Upper Body 35 Arteries of the Lower Body 36 Veins and Fetal Circulation 37 Functions of Vessels, Lymphatic System 38 Blood Vessels and Blood Pressure 39 Structure of the Respiratory System 40 Respiratory Function, Breathing, Respiration 41 Physiology of Exercise 42 Anatomy of the Digestive System 43 Digestive Physiology 44 Urinary System 45 Urinalysis 46 Male Reproductive System 47 Female Reproductive System Appendix A Measurement Conversions Appendix B Periodic Table of the Elements Appendix C Preparation of Materials and Solutions Appendix D Lab Reports LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY SEELEY: ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 7th Edition By Eric Wise, Santa Barbara City College 2006 (Jan 2005) / 576 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-255330-7 / MHID: 0-07-255330-8 The outstanding illustrations and a balanced combination of line art and photographs make this lab manual an invaluable tool for teaching the undergraduate anatomy and physiology course. Using the cat as the primary specimen, this manual contains 42 exercises that provide a comprehensive overview of the human body and present the core elements of the subject matter. CONTENTS 1 Organs, Systems, and Organization of the Body 2 Microscopy 3 Cell Structure and Function 4 Tissues 5 Integumentary System 6 Introduction to the Skeletal System 7 Appendicular Skeleton 8 Axial Skeleton: Vertebrae, Ribs, Sternum, Hyoid 9 Axial Skeleton: Skull 10 Articulations 11 Muscles Physiology 12 Introduction to the Study of Muscles and Muscles of the Shoulder and Upper Extremity 13 Muscles of the Hip, Thigh, Leg and Foot 14 Muscles of the Head and Neck 15 Muscles of the Torso 16 Introduction to the Nervous System 17 Brain and Cranial Nerves 18 Spinal Cord and Somatic Nerves 19 Nervous System Physiology: Stimuli and Reflexes 20 Introduction to Sensory Receptors 21 Taste and Smell 22 Eye and Vision 23 Ear, Hearing, and Balance 24 Endocrine System 25 Blood Cells 26 Blood Tests and Typing 27 Structure of the Heart 28 Electrical Conductivity of the Heart 29 Functions of the Heart 30 Introduction to Blood Vessels and Arteries of the Upper Body 31 Arteries of the Lower Body 32 Veins and Fetal Circulation 33 Function of Vessels, Lymphatic System 34 Blood Vessels and Blood Pressure 35 Structure of the Respiratory System 36 Respiratory Function, Breathing, Respiration 37 Physiology of Exercise 38 Anatomy of the Digestive System 39 Digestive Physiology 40 Urinary System 41 Urinalysis 42 Male Reproductive System 43 Female Reproductive System Appendix A Measurement Conversions Appendix B Periodic Table of the Elements Appendix C Preparation of Materials Appendix D Lab Reports ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY LABORATORY TEXTBOOK Complete Version, 8th Edition By Harold Benson, Stanley Gunstream, Arthur Talaro and Kathleen Talaro of Pasadena City College 2005 (Jan 2004) / 672 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-235107-1 / MHID: 0-07-235107-1 Benson’s COMPLETE is designed for a 2-semester A&P course. In addition to the dozens of effective exercises, this lab manual is unique in that students are asked to label many of the figures to reinforce concepts. The cat is the primary dissection specimen in this manual. It is self-contained, detailed, and very logical in its approach. Because of its detailed content (textual material, line art, photos, and histology micrographs), it is generally not necessary to take the course textbook to the lab. The atlas of quality histology micrographs has always been a strong feature and makes it unnecessary to purchase an additional histology atlas. CONTENTS Part 1 Some Fundamentals Part 2 Cells and Tissues Part 3 The Skeletal System Part 4 The Nerve-Muscle Relationship Part 5 Instrumentation Part 6 Skeletal Muscle Physiology Part 7 The Major Skeletal Muscles Part 8 The Nervous System Part 9 The Sense Organs: The Histology Atlas Part 10 Hematology Part 11 The Cardiovascular System Part 12 The Respiratory System Part 13 Autonomic Responses to Physical and Psychological Factors Part 14 The Digestive System Part 15 The Excretory System Part 16 The Endocrine and Reproductive Systems Histology Self-Quizzes / Answer Keys to Self-Quizzes 45 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 45 9/29/2006 11:54:22 AM Applied Biology ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY LABORATORY TEXTBOOK Intermediate Version, CAT, 6th Edition By Harold Benson, Stanley Gunstream, Arthur Talaro and Kathleen Talaro of Pasadena City College 2005 (Feb 2004) / 560 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247663-7 / MHID: 0-07-247663-X This laboratory manual is ideal for introductory, two-semester anatomy and physiology students. This new edition works well with any textbook and includes complete explanations of essential information. Clear, step-by-step procedures for each exercise are accompanied by detailed illustrations and labeling exercises. The main dissection specimen is the cat. CONTENTS Part 1 Some Fundamentals Part 2 Cells and Tissues Part 3 The Skeletal System Part 4 Skeletal Muscle Physiology Part 5 The Major Skeletal Muscles Part 6 The Nervous System Part 7 The Sense Organs / The Histology Atlas / Part 8 Hematology Part 9 The Cardiovascular System Part 10 Respiratory System Part 11 The Digestive System Part 12 The Excretory System Part 13 The Endocrine and Reproductive Systems / Histology Self-Quizzes / Answer Keys to Self-Quizzes ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY LABORATORY TEXTBOOK Short Version, 8th Edition By Harold Benson, Stanley Gunstream, Arthur Talaro and Kathleen Talaro of Pasadena City College 2005 (March 2004) / 528 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-235109-5 / MHID: 0-07-235109-8 Benson’s SHORT is designed for a 1 or 2-semester A&P course where no single dissection specimen is used. In addition to the dozens of effective exercises, this lab manual is unique in that students are asked to label many of the figures to reinforce concepts. It is self-contained, detailed, and very logical in its approach. Because of its detailed content (textual material, line art, photos, and histology micrographs), it is generally not necessary to take the course textbook to the lab. 59 Spirometry: The FEVt Test 60 Spirometry: Using Computerized Hardware Part 11 The Digestive System 61 Anatomy of the Digestive System 62 The Chemistry of Hydrolysis 63 Factors Affecting Hydrolysis Part 12 The Excretory System 64 Anatomy of the Urinary System 65 Urine: Composition and Tests Part 13 The Endocrine and Reproductive System 66 The Endocrine Glands 67 The Reproductive System / Laboratory Reports / Appendixes A Tables B Solutions and Reagents C Tests and Methods D Physiograph Sample Records E Microorganisms F “Slife of Life” Bar Codes BIOLOGY DEMYSTIFIED By Dale Layman 2003 / 401 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141040-3 / MHID: 0-07-141040-6 [A Professional Publication] CONTENTS PREFACE / PART 1: GETTING READY FOR BIOLOGY Chapter 1. The Coming of Biology Chapter 2. Patterns of Life Chapter 3. Evolution: From Dawn to Darwin Test: Part 1 PART 2: THE UNIVERSAL BUILDING BLOCKS OF LIFE Chapter 4. Chemicals: The Tiniest Blocks Chapter 5. Cells: The “Little Chambers” in Plants and Animals Test: Part 2 PART 3: THE FIVE KINGDOMS OF LIFE, PLUS VIRUSES Chapter 6. Bacteria and the “Homeless” Viruses Chapter 7. The Protists: “First of All” Chapter 8. The Fungi: Not Just Mushrooms! Chapter 9. The Plants: “Kings and Queens” of the World of Green Chapter 10. Invertebrates As Special Animals: “Have You No Spine?” Chapter 11. The Arthropods: No Jointed Backbone, but “Jointed Feet” Chapter 12. The Chordata: Animals with a “Chord” In Their “Back” Test: Part 3 PART 4: ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY OF ANIMALS Chapter 13. Skins and Skeletons Chapter 14. The Neuromuscular (Nerve-Muscle) Connection Chapter 15. Glands and Their Hormone Messengers Chapter 16. Blood and the Circulatory System Chapter 17. Immune and Lymphatic Systems: “The Best Survival Offense Is a Good Defense!” Chapter 18. The Respiratory System: Breath of Life Chapter 19. “Getting the Goodies”: Nutrition and the Digestive System Chapter 20. Urine and (Gulp!) Sex in Animals Test: Part 4 / Final Exam / Appendix: Answers to Quiz, Test, and Final Exam Questions / Index CONTENTS Part 1 Some Fundamentals 1 Anatomical Terminology 2 Body Cavities & Membranes 3 Organ Systems: Rat Dissection Part 2 Cells & Tissues 4 Microscopy 5 Basic Cell Structure 6 Mitosis 7 Osmosis & Cell Membrane Integrity 8 Epithelial Tissues 9 Connective Tissues 10 The Integument Part 3 The Skeletal System 11 The Skeletal Plan 12 The Skull 13 The Vertebral Column & Thorax 14 The Appendicular Skeleton 15 Articulation Part 4 Skeletal Muscle Physiology 16 Electronic Instrumentation 17 Muscle Structure 18 Body Movements 19 Nerve and Muscle Tissues 20 The Neuromuscular Junction 21 The Physicochemical Nature of Muscle Contraction 22 Muscle Contraction Experiments: Using Chart Recorders 23 Muscle Contraction Experiments 24 Electromyography Part 5 The Major Skeletal Muscles 25 Head and Neck Muscles 26 Trunk and Shoulder Muscles 27 Upper Extremity Muscles 28 Abdominal and Pelvic Muscles 29 Lower Extremity Muscles Part 6 The Nervous System 30 The Spinal Cord, Spinal Nerves, and Reflex Arcs 31 Somatic Reflexes 32 The Patellar Reflex: A Computerized Evaluation 33 Brain Anatomy: External 34 Brain Anatomy: Internal Part 7 The Sense Organs 35 Anatomy of the Eye 36 Visual Tests 37 The Ear: Its Role in Hearing 38 The Ear: Its Role in Equilibrium / The Histology Atlas / Part 8 Hematology 39 A White Blood Cell Study: The Differential WBC Count 40 Total Blood Cell Counts 41 Hemoglobin Percentage Measurement 42 Packed Red Cell Volume Blood Typing 43 Coagulation Time Part 9 The Circulatory System 44 Anatomy of the Heart 45 Cardiovasular sounds 46 Electrocardiogram Monitoring: Using Chart Recorders 47 Electrocardiogram Monitoring: Using Computerized Hardware 48 Pulse Monitoring 49 Blood Pressure Monitoring 50 Peripheral Circulation Control (Frog) 51 The Arteries and Veins 52 Fetal Circulation 53 The Lymphatic System and the Immune Response Part 10 The Respiratory System 54 The Respiratory Organs 55 Hyperventilation and Rebreathing 56 The Diving Reflex 57 the Valsalva Maneuver 58 Spirometry: Lung Capacities COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog. Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com 46 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 46 9/29/2006 11:54:22 AM Applied Biology Two-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Multimedia CARDIOLOGY ATLAS CD-ROM 2nd Edition By Blausen Medical Communications 2005 (Jan 205) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304272-5 / MHID: 0-07-304272-2 (Details unavailable at press time) New ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED ONLINE By Medical College of Ohio 2008 (January 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319620-6 / MHID: 0-07-319620-7 Anatomy & Physiology Revealed is the ultimate interactive cadaver dissection experience. This state-of-the-art tutorial uses cadaver photos combined with a layering technique that allows the student to peel away layers of the human body to reveal structures beneath the surface. Anatomy & Physiology Revealed offers animations, radiologic imaging, audio pronunciations, and a comprehensive quizzing tool. This tutorial can be used as part of any one or two semester undergraduate Anatomy & Physiology course; it is available as a stand-alone or can be combined with any of McGraw-Hill’s Anatomy & Physiology textbooks. FEATURES • New Organ System Added--The Integumentary System has been added to the list of organ systems included in this program. All layers of the skin will be included and this new section will also feature histology images and full coverage of the dermis, epidermis, hair shaft, specific glands, etc. • Expanded Skeletal and Joint Coverage--The Skeletal System and Muscular System have been separated into each their own system allowing for substantially expanded information to be provided in each. The Skeletal System will now include full coverage of joint dissections. 75 NEW photos of disarticulated bones have been added. • NEW Histology Section!--The online version of Anatomy & Physiology Revealed includes a new button for histology views to support every body system. Students can access this information by clicking on the microscope icon located on the navigation bar. • NEW! Expanded Quizzing Types and Options --Physiology animation quizzes have been added to Skeletal, Muscular and Nervous Systems. In addition, the user can now select the number of questions he/she wants included in each quiz (10, 25 or ALL). • NEW! Navigation and Interface changes! • A new “Smart” (google-like) search button has been added and integrated across all systems. • Tags are now color coded. All tags pertaining to the given system one color and reference structures not part of that system are another color. HUMAN ATLAS (FORMERLY INTERACTIVE CLINICAL RESOURCE CD-ROM) 2nd Edition By Blausen Medical Communications 2005 (Jan 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294580-5 / MHID: 0-07-294580-X Created by Blausen Communications Inc., the Interactive Clinical Resource CD-ROM offers NEW animations, one hundred and fifty 3D animations and 3D models of human disease and disorders. It also contains 13 sections of clinical content (and nearly every body system) including Urinary, Skeletal, Reproductive, Nervous, Muscular, Immune, Digestive, Circulatory and Endocrine. The Interactive Clinical Resource CD ROM may be used as a classroom lecture tool or study guide for students post lecture. Students can use the Interactive Clinical Resource CD-ROM to play the 3D animations, explore the 3D models, print the associated text and view the slides with labels and definitions of key structures related to the disease/disorder. Students will learn how the various diseases/disorders affect the human body system along with possible treatments. The Interactive Clinical Resource CD-ROM is the perfect way to reinforce and relate the physiological concepts taught in the classroom to real life. ORTHOPEDIC ATLAS CD-ROM 2nd Edition By Blausen Medical Communications 2005 (Jan 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304271-8 / MHID: 0-07-304271-4 (Details unavailable at press time) REPRODUCTION ATLAS CD-ROM 2nd Edition By Blausen Medical Communications 2005 (Jan 205) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304273-2 / MHID: 0-07-304273-0 (Details unavailable at press time) CONTENTS Integumary System / Skeletal System / Muscular System / Nervous System / Cardiovascular System / Lymphatic System / Respiratory System / Urinary System / Digestive System / Endocrine System / Reproductive System A&P ANIMATIONS COLLECTION By McGraw-Hill 2004 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-288990-1 / MHID: 0-07-288990-X Enables instructors to demonstrate physiological processes in motion by importing full-color animation files into classroom presentations or online course materials. 47 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 47 9/29/2006 11:54:22 AM Applied Biology Anatomy & Physiology - Supplements International Edition New LABORATORY ATLAS OF ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 5th Edition By Douglas J Eder, Southern Illinois University, John W Bertram and Shari Lewis Kaminsky 2007 (Nov 2005) / 192 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282733-1 / MHID: 0-07-282733-5 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110648-0 / MHID: 0-07-110648-0 [IE] This full-color atlas is intended to effectively supplement the A&P laboratory course and aid students in their studies. Eder’s high-quality visuals, in combination with its unique tables, make it a valuable supplement in any lab course. Tables include terms and definitions as well as descriptions of the origin, insertion, action, and innervation of muscles. This atlas illustrates the dissection structures as they actually exist, so students will be able to easily recognize the parts when they are dissecting or taking an exam. New to this edition This 5th edition will have a Chapter 6 entitled “Specialized: Heart, Kidney, & Brain”. There are 10 new photos of sheep brain, heart and kidney. Numbered structured lists are now listed in order of appearance instead of alphabetically, in response to review feedback. Features son of Female and Male Skeletons Table 5.7 Extrinsic Muscles of the Eye Table 5.8 Facial Muscles Table 5.9 Chewing Muscles Table 5.10 Muscles of the Throat Table 5.11 Muscles of the Tongue Table 5.12 Muscles of the Pharynx and Palate Table 5.13 Muscles That Move the Head able 5.14 Muscles That Move the Shoulder Table 5.15 Muscles That Move the Upper Arm Table 5.16 Muscles That Move the Lower Arm Table 5.17 Muscles That Move the Wrist and Hand Table 5.18 Muscles That Move the Chest Wall: Breathing Table 5.19 Muscles That Move the Abdominal Wall Table 5.20 Muscles of the Pelvic Floor: The Pelvic Diaphragm Table 5.21 Muscles of the Vertebral Column: Muscles of Erect Posture Table 5.22 Muscles Located in the Lateral Hip Table 5.23 Muscles Located in the Anterior Hip Table 5.24 Muscles Located in the Posterior Hip Table 5.25 Muscles Located in the Anterior Thigh Table 5.26 Muscles Located in the Medial Thigh Table 5.27 Muscles Located in the Posterior Thigh Table 5.28 Muscles Located in the Lower Leg Table 5.29 The Cranial Nerves Table 5.30 Spinal Nerves and Their Branches Table 5.31 Events of the Cardiac Cycle Table 5.32 Major Blood Vessels and Their Branches Table 5.33 Major Hormones of the Pituitary Gland 6 Specialized Heart, Kidney, and Brain New SOLVE SALADIN: ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY CROSSWORD PUZZLES SPECIALLY PREPARED FOR ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY The Unity of Form and Function, 4th Edition By Ken Saladin By Greg Reeder, Broward Community College 2007 (May 2006) / 200 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340359-5 / MHID: 0-07-340359-8 (Details unavailable at press time) Human muscular anatomy section features full-color, large illustrations and clear labeling. Eder also includes a variety of useful and clear dissection photos of the cat, fetal pig, and rat. Extensive reference tables include tables of origin, insertion, action, and innervation of a variety of muscles. Full-Page, Full-Color Dissections. The dissection photos are crucial as they illustrate to the student just how the various stages of dissection should look as they do it themselves. These fantastic full-color photos will be as large as a full page and truly be the best on the market. The Eder atlas provides students with vivid, full-color, real-life images that are often not included in their laboratory manual. Many instructors comment that students have a lot of trouble learning to use a microscope. The full-color histology images (featuring descriptions and labels) help students interpret what they are seeing through their microscopes. Features more than 100 common histology images with labeling and descriptions. International Edition ATLAS OF SKELETAL MUSCLES 5th Edition By Robert J. Stone and Judith A. Stone of Suffolk Community College - Selden 2006 (Jan 2005) / 240 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-250178-0 / MHID: 0-07-250178-2 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124479-4 / MHID: 0-07-124479-4 [IE] This unique atlas is a study guide to the anatomy and actions of human skeletal muscles. It is designed for use by students of anatomy and physiology, physical therapy, chiropractic, medicine, nursing, physical education, and other health-related fields. This concise, compact reference shows the origin, insertion, action, and innervation of all human skeletal muscles. Students and instructors appreciate this atlas for the simplicity of the line art which helps students learn the main structures without overwhelming them with detail. Human Anatomy line art has been updated throughout the manual. CONTENTS Highlights human skeletal anatomy using a combination of full color photographs and complementary color illustrations, with extensive labeling. 1 The Skeleton 2 Movements of the Body 3 Muscles of the Face and Head 4 Muscles of the Neck 5 Muscles of the Trunk 6 Muscles of the Shoulder and Arm 7 Muscles of the Forearm and Hand 8 Muscles of the Hip and Thigh 9 Muscles of the Leg and Foot Contents 1 Histology 2 Human Skeletal Anatomy 3 Human Muscular Anatomy 4 Dissections 5 Reference Tables Table 5.1 Structure and Function of Some Cellular Components Table 5.2 Some Membrane Transport Processes Table 5.3 Formed Elements of Blood Table 5.4 Terms for Bone Structure Table 5.5 Bones of the Human Skeleton Table 5.6 Compari- 48 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 48 9/29/2006 11:54:22 AM Applied Biology A VISUAL ATLAS FOR ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY TO ACCOMPANY HOLE’S HUMAN A&P 10th Edition By McGraw-Hill 2004 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294643-7 / MHID: 0-07-294643-1 This collection of images was assembled to provide students with a comprehensive resource for studying anatomical structures and a convenient place to write notes during lecture or lab. CONTENTS Unit 1 Axial Skeleton Unit 2 Appendicular Skeleton Unit 3 Articulations Unit 4 Muscular System Unit 5 Nervous System Unit 6 Eye and Ear Unit 7 Heart and Lungs A VISUAL ATLAS FOR ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY TO ACCOMPANY SALADIN’S A&P 3rd Edition • So small and light that they fit in a backpack! International Edition AN ATLAS TO HUMAN ANATOMY By Dennis Strete, McLennan Community College 2000 / 208 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-697-38793-6 / MHID: 0-697-38793-3 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115591-5 / MHID: 0-07-115591-0 [IE] Website: www.mhhe.com/biosci/abio CONTENTS Part 1 Cells and Tissues Chapter 1 Anatomy at the Cellular Level Chapter 2 Tissue Organization: Epithelial, Connective, Muscle, and Nervous Tissue Part 2 Organ Systems Chapter 3 Integumentary System Chapter 4 Skeletal System Chapter 5 Muscular System Chapter 6 Nervous System Chapter 7 Special Senses: Olfactory, Gustation, Auditory, Visual Chapter 8 Endocrine System Chapter 9 Cardiovascular System Chapter 10 Lymphatic System Chapter 11 Respiratory System Chapter 12 Digestive System Chapter 13 Urinary System Chapter 14 Male Reproductive System Chapter 15 Female Reproductive System By McGraw-Hill 2004 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294394-8 / MHID: 0-07-294394-7 This collection of images was assembled to provide students with a comprehensive resource for studying anatomical structures and a convenient place to write notes during lecture or lab. CONTENTS Unit 1 Axial Skeleton Unit 2 Appendicular Skeleton Unit 3 Articulations Unit 4 Muscular System Unit 5 Nervous System Unit 6 Eye and Ear Unit 7 Heart and Lungs SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF HUMAN ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 2nd Edition By Kent Van De Graaf, Brigham Young University 1997 / 453 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-066887-4 / MHID: 0-07-066887-6 [A Schaum Professional Publication] Website: http://books.mcgraw-hill.com/cgi-bin/getbook.pl?=007066887 6&adkey=W02003 CONTENTS SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE OF HUMAN ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY By Kent M. Van De Graaff, Weber State University and R. Ward Rhees, Brigham Young University—Provo 2001 / 160 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-136976-3 / MHID: 0-07-136976-7 [A Schaum Professional Publication] Website: http://doi.contentdirections.com What could be better than the bestselling Schaum’s Outline series? For students looking for a quick nuts-and-bolts overview, it would have to be Schaum’s Easy Outline series. Every book in this series is a pared-down, simplified, and tightly focused version of its predecessor. With an emphasis on clarity and brevity, each new title features a streamlined and updated format and the absolute essence of the subject, presented in a concise and readily understandable form. Graphic elements such as sidebars, reader-alert icons, and boxed highlights stress selected points from the text, illuminate keys to learning, and give students quick pointers to the essentials. • Designed to appeal to underprepared students and readers turned off by dense text • Cartoons, sidebars, icons, and other graphic pointers get the material across fast • Concise text focuses on the essence of the subject • Delivers expert help from teachers who are authorities in their fields Introduction to the Human Body. / Cellular Chemistry. / Cell Structure and Function. / Tissues. / Integumentary System. / Skeletal System. / Muscle Tissue and Mode of Contraction. / Muscular System. / Nervous Tissue. / Central Nervous System. / Peripheral and Autonomic Nervous Systems. / Sensory Organs. / Endocrine System. / Cardiovascular System: Blood. / Cardiovascular System: The Heart. / Cardiovascular System: Vessels and Blood Circulation. / Lymphatic System and Body Immunity. / Respiratory System. / Digestive System. / Metabolism, Nutrition, and Temperature Regulation. / Urinary System. / Water and Electrolyte Balance. / Reproductive System. INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg • Perfect for last-minute test preparation 49 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 49 9/29/2006 11:54:22 AM Applied Biology Public Safety Histology International Edition Homeland Security basic histology text & Atlas, 11th Edition By Luiz Carlos Junqueira and Jose Carneiro of University of San Paulo, Brazil 2005 / 544 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-144091-2 / MHID: 0-07-144091-7 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111888-0 / MHID: 0-07-111888-8 [IE with CD] The leading text of medical histology and microscopic anatomy! With a full-color design and OVER 600 photomicrographs and illustrations, this book continues to be the most authoritative histology text on the market. Revised to reflect the latest research in the field, this book emphasizes the relationships and concepts that link cell and tissue structures with their functions. A bonus image library CD-ROM featuring all the photos and illustrations from the text with “zoom in” and “zoom out” capability is also included. Contents 1. Histology & Its Methods of Study 2. The Cytoplasm 3. The Cell Nucleus 4. Epithelial Tissue 5. Connective Tissue 6. Adipose Tissue 7. Cartilage 8. Bone 9. Nerve Tissue & the Nervous System 10. Muscle Tissue 11. The Circulatory System 12. Blood Cells 13. Hematopoiesis 14. The Immune System & Lymphoid Organs 15. Digestive Tract 16. Organs Associated with the Digestive Tract 17. The Respiratory System 18. Skin 19. The Urinary System 20. Hypophysis 21. Adrenals, Islets of Langerhans, Thyroid, Parathyroids, & Pineal Gland 22. The Male Reproductive System 23. The Female Reproductive System 24. Photoreceptor & Audioreceptor Systems New HOMELAND SECURITY AND EMERGENCY MEDICAL RESPONSE By John Campbell 2008 (February 2007) / 352 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304437-8 / MHID: 0-07-304437-7 Homeland Security and Emergency Response is a first edition product for McGraw-Hill Higher Education. The book and its ancillaries are being developed and designed to meet the needs of a 16 hour course by the same name. If focuses on providing information on recognizing threats, acting on threats, and providing patient care as well as the communication that must occur when a threat to homeland security occurs. Threats covered include Biological, Nuclear, Chemical, Incendiary and Explosive threats. Additional information on Clandestine Drug Laboratories is also covered. The information is easy-to-read and step-by-step procedures for using related equipment and skills are included. The primary market for this product suite and course include those in emergency medical services (paramedics, EMT-Basics, First Responders), police, and those in fire. Features This text is divided into two distinct sections –The first 8 Chapters cover concepts. The remaining 7 Chapters are a compilation of skills (personal protective equipment, decontamination, use of nerve agent antidote kit, use of anthrax test kit, use of chemical agent detectors, use of radiation detectors, practical response situations) which outline the steps involved in performing each skill. The student will be taught these skills using the same equipment he/she would use in real life situations. Each of the first 8 Chapters begin with a Case Study to grab the student’s attention. There are “It Happens” boxes that contain “real world” information about content. There are several end of Chapter elements that highlight important areas for the student to retain: 1. Pearls – this is a list of key summary points for the Chapter. These are “tips to remember” in the field. 2. Case Study Conclusion – this is a continuation of the case study at the beginning of the Chapter. 3. Case Study Discussion – this leads the class through a discussion of the preceding case. COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog. Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com 4. Want to Know More? – this section will be a list of bibliographical references and suggested learning sources. Contents Introduction / Chapter 1. Recognition and Emergency Medical Response Chapter 2. Chemical Agents used in Terrorist Attacks Chapter 3. Biological Weapons I Chapter 4. Biological Weapons II Chapter 5. Radiological or Nuclear Incidents Chapter 6. Incendiaries and Explosives Chapter 7. Clandestine Drug Laboratories Chapter 8. Putting it All Together / Practical Skills / Skills Chapter 1. Selection and Use of Personal Protective Equipment Skills Chapter 2. Decontamination of Patients Skills Chapter 3. Use of Nerve Agent Antidote Kit (NAAK) Skills Chapter 4. Use of the Anthrax Test Kit Skills Chapter 5. Use of Chemical Agent Detectors Skills Chapter 6. Use of Radiation Detection Equipment Skills Chapter 7. Scenario Review / Appendix: Acronyms 50 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 50 9/29/2006 11:54:23 AM Applied Biology First Responder New CATASTROPHE PREPARATION AND PREVENTION FOR LAW ENFORCEMENT PROFESSIONALS WITH STUDENT CD By Phil Palin, Teleologic Learning Company 2008 (October 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331774-8 / MHID: 0-07-331774-8 Catastrophe Preparation and Prevention for Law Enforcement is a multi-media product for Homeland Security designed for law enforcement personnel. This spiral-bound worktext contains a link to an online simulation game called “San Luis Rey” and a CD-ROM containing selected government documents and excerpts from McGraw-Hill reference texts. Instructors can use the wealth of material in the CD-ROM to adjust the length of the course. It can be taught in a single day or two-day course or expanded into a full semester. The worktext guides the student through the material and links the learning experience from the different formats. The simulation-based program is sponsored by the Office for Domestic Preparedness and Department of Homeland Security to build a common, minimum level of preparedness among the nation’s first responders and related homeland security professions in fulfilling the National Homeland Security Strategy. Its goal is to support the ability of every jurisdiction in the United States to 1) develop capacity in preventing terrorism, 2) demonstrate coherence with a common standard of practice in prevention of terrorism; and 3) ensure that every jurisdiction has a basic ability to recognize crucial links between prevention, response, and recovery. Features The flexibility of this program allows instructors to teach it in a 1 2, or semester long course. During the course, learners participate in an online simulation game where they will have to detect and prevent a terrorist attack. Failure has dire consequences for them and the fictional jurisdiction of San Luis Rey. The game challenges learners to move beyond response-oriented training and think about what it takes to prevent a terrorist attack. Contents Orientation / Chapter 1--Introduction Chapter 2 – Recognize Threats Chapter 3 – Share Information Chapter 4--Collaborate Chapter 5 – Manage Risk Chapter 6 – Decide to Intervene / Chapter Review / Apply What You Have Learned Acknowledgments Works Cited Appendix – San Luis Rey General Index New EMERGENCY MEDICAL RESPONDER First Responder in Action with Student CD-ROM, Student DVD and Pocket Guide By Barbara Aehlert 2007 (March 2006) / 604 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302260-4 / MHID: 0-07-302260-8 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/aehlertemr Emergency Medical Responder: First Responder in Action, 1st edition by Barbara Aehlert, RN, provides the first responder student with must-know information. This product is the only product that integrates the didactic and skills information. First Responder training is the entry level of emergency medical services. This full-color, well-illustrated textbook/workbook combo is the only first responder product written by an EMS educator who is an experienced author. It includes information on the medical management of the results of current national security threats. Features Content that follows the U.S. Dept of Transportation (DOT) curriculum. This text includes both didactic and skills-based information that meets and sometime exceeds DOT curriculum objectives. Over 600 Illustrations are in the text that are key to learning-and straight forward. In addition the text includes skill drills that contain both step-by-step explanations as well as figures that depict the skills. This text is the only title to include a DVD with the textbook that contains every DOT and National registry skill in video format for students and instructors. Additional Material: First Responder contains material that exceeds the DOT curriculum and reflects adjustments made after the Sept.11 attacks. New appendices are: Weapons of Mass Destruction: Awareness and Response, Rural and Frontier EMS, and Special Populations. Instructor Support Materials: These include PowerPoint slides with Lesson plans that correspond to each slide. The Lesson plans include the following: recommended minimum time to complete each Lesson for both initial and refresher courses, qualifications for primary and assistant instructors, key terms and definitions, quiz questions with answers, “twists” on textbook case studies with answers to case study “twists”, appropriate activities for students to perform in class, instructor scenarios, skill sheets for each Chapter, and knowledge testing games. Contents Module 1: Preparatory 1 Introduction to the EMS System 2 The WellBeing of the Emergency Medical Responder 3 Legal and Ethical Issues 4 The Human Body 5 Lifting and Moving Patients Module 2: Airway 6 Airway and Breathing Module 3: Circulation 7 Circulation Module 4: Patient Assessment 8 Patient Assessment Module 5: Illness and Injury 9 Medical Emergencies 10 Bleeding and Soft-Tissue Injuries 11 Injuries to Muscles and Bones Module 6: Childbirth and Children 12 Childbirth 13 Infants and Children Module 7: EMS Operations 14 EMS Operations / Appendices Appendix 1: Weapons of Mass Destruction: Awareness and Response Appendix 2: Rural and Frontier EMS Appendix 3: Special Populations 51 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 51 9/29/2006 11:54:23 AM Applied Biology EMT Paramedic New HOMELAND SECURITY AND EMERGENCY MEDICAL RESPONSE By John Campbell 2008 (February 2007) / 352 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304437-8 / MHID: 0-07-304437-7 Homeland Security and Emergency Response is a first edition product for McGraw-Hill Higher Education. The book and its ancillaries are being developed and designed to meet the needs of a 16 hour course by the same name. If focuses on providing information on recognizing threats, acting on threats, and providing patient care as well as the communication that must occur when a threat to homeland security occurs. Threats covered include Biological, Nuclear, Chemical, Incendiary and Explosive threats. Additional information on Clandestine Drug Laboratories is also covered. The information is easy-to-read and step-by-step procedures for using related equipment and skills are included. The primary market for this product suite and course include those in emergency medical services (paramedics, EMT-Basics, First Responders), police, and those in fire. Features This text is divided into two distinct sections –The first 8 Chapters cover concepts. The remaining 7 Chapters are a compilation of skills (personal protective equipment, decontamination, use of nerve agent antidote kit, use of anthrax test kit, use of chemical agent detectors, use of radiation detectors, practical response situations) which outline the steps involved in performing each skill. The student will be taught these skills using the same equipment he/she would use in real life situations. Each of the first 8 Chapters begin with a Case Study to grab the student’s attention. There are “It Happens” boxes that contain “real world” information about content. There are several end of Chapter elements that highlight important areas for the student to retain: 1. Pearls – this is a list of key summary points for the Chapter. These are “tips to remember” in the field. 2. Case Study Conclusion – this is a continuation of the case study at the beginning of the Chapter. 3. Case Study Discussion – this leads the class through a discussion of the preceding case. 4. Want to Know More? – this section will be a list of bibliographical references and suggested learning sources. Contents Introduction / Chapter 1. Recognition and Emergency Medical Response Chapter 2. Chemical Agents used in Terrorist Attacks Chapter 3. Biological Weapons I Chapter 4. Biological Weapons II Chapter 5. Radiological or Nuclear Incidents Chapter 6. Incendiaries and Explosives Chapter 7. Clandestine Drug Laboratories Chapter 8. Putting it All Together / Practical Skills / Skills Chapter 1. Selection and Use of Personal Protective Equipment Skills Chapter 2. Decontamination of Patients Skills Chapter 3. Use of Nerve Agent Antidote Kit (NAAK) Skills Chapter 4. Use of the Anthrax Test Kit Skills Chapter 5. Use of Chemical Agent Detectors Skills Chapter 6. Use of Radiation Detection Equipment Skills Chapter 7. Scenario Review / Appendix: Acronyms New THE PARAMEDIC By Will Chapleau, Angel Burba, Peter Pons, David Page, Inver Hills Community College 2008 (April 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352071-1 / MHID: 0-07-352071-3 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/chapleau1e CONTENTS Part 1-Foundations 1. The ems profession 2. The well-being of the paramedic 3. Professional ethics 4. Legal issues 5. Clinical decision making 6. Medical terminology 7. Anatomy overview 8. Physiology overview 9. Safety and scene size-up Part 2-Foundations of communication and assessment 10. Therapeutic communications and history taking 11. The normal physical examination Part 3-Foundations of critical care: caring for the sick patient 12. Airway management, ventilation, and oxygenation 13. Shock overview 14. Patient assessment 15. Pharmacology 16. Medication administration and iv 17. Documentation & communication Part 4-Trauma 18. Mechanism of injury 19. Hemostasis and hermorrhagic shock 20. Head, face, and neck trauma 21. Thoracic trauma 22. Abdominal trauma 23. Spinal trauma 24. Skeletal trauma 25. Soft tissue and muscle trauma 26. Burn trauma 27. Trauma patients and trauma systems Part 5-Medical Issues 28. Pulmonary 29. Cardiology 30. Neurology 31. Endocrinology, electrolytes, and acid/base 32. Allergies and anaphylaxis 33. Infectious and communicable diseases 34. Gastroenterology 35. Toxicology 36. Urology 37. Hematology 38. Environmental conditions 39. Eyes, ears, nose, and throat 40. Behavioral and psychiatric disorders 41. Obstetrics and gynecology Part 6-Special Populations 42. Neonatology 43. Pediatric patients 44. Geriatric patients 45. The abused and neglected 46. Patients with special challenges 47. Patients with chronic illnesses 48. Patients from diverse cultures Part 7-Operations 49. Ambulance operations 50. Medical incident command 51. Rescue awareness 52. Teamwork and operational interface 53. Hazardous materials incidents 54. Special events and mass gatherings 55. Responding to wmd events / Glossary / Index New THE PARAMEDIC WORKBOOK WITH STUDENT CD By Will Chapleau and Arthur Hsieh 2008 (June 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320532-8 / MHID: 0-07-320532-X Website: http://www.mhhe.com/chapleau1e The Paramedic Manual is not a traditional workbook in that it goes beyond the simple “review and test” approach of most workbooks. Instead, this manual supports the students’ exploration of the art and science of prehospital medicine by providing a rich palette of learning tools, images, and even video to better explain concepts and techniques. The Paramedic Manual speaks clearly and directly to the paramedic student. The material in each chapter revolves around “Need To Know” (NTK) objectives; those that the authors of both the Textbook and Manual felt were absolutely necessary for the paramedic student to master before moving on to the next section or chapter. All features in the Manual were designed to ensure that learners can successfully master these NTK objectives. Multimedia tools on the accompanying DVD create an educational space that is rich with information. Features Skills--This section presents Step-by-Steps, illustrated instructions for performing key skills. Accompany skill sheets for these and additional skills are provided in the back of the book. 52 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 52 9/29/2006 11:54:23 AM Applied Biology Ample vignettes and progressive case studies, followed by critical thinking questions (answers at the end of each chapter), effectively review basic concepts, encourage students to build on and apply new information, and require the learner integrate what he or she has been learning into real-world practice. Problem-Based Learning (PBL) cases – These unique cases are designed to be challenging and open-ended--just like many EMS patients. The learner must work his or her way through the case, using not just the manual and textbook, but often other resources that must be found and researched. In the process, the student will learn about the process of learning itself. Activities--Self-directed, student-centered activities provide alternative methods for mastering the chapters’ main concepts. Many are designed for use with partners and small groups. The student CD that accompanies the manual provides skills – Step-by-Steps in a PowerPoint format that show skills being correctly performed using Quicktime video. Text “bubbles” and arrows point to key aspects of skill performance Contents Part 1-Foundations Chapter 1-the ems profession Chapter 2-The wellbeing of the paramedic Chapter 3-Professional ethics Chapter 4-Legal issues Chapter 5-Clinical decision making Chapter 6-Medical terminology Chapter 7-Anatomy overview Chapter 8-Physiology overview Chapter 9-Safety and scene size-up Part 1 problem-based learning case Part 2-Foundations of communication and assessment Chapter 10Therapeutic communications and history taking Chapter 11-The normal physical examination Chapter 12-Airway management, ventilation, and oxygenation Part 2 problem-based learning case Part 3-Foundations of critical care: caring for the sick patient Chapter 13Shock overview Chapter 14-Patient assessment Chapter 15-Pharmacology Chapter 16Medication administration and iv Chapter 17-Documentation Part 3 Problem-based learning case Part 4-Trauma Chapter 18-Mechanism of injury Chapter 19-hemorrhage and hemorrhagic shock Chapter 20-Head, face, and neck trauma Chapter 21-Thoracic trauma Chapter 22-Abdominal trauma Chapter 23-Spinal trauma Chapter 24-Skeletal trauma Chapter 25-Soft tissue and muscle trauma Chapter 26-Burn trauma Chapter 27-Trauma patients and trauma systems Part 4 Problembased learning case Part 5-Medical Chapter 28-Pulmonary Chapter 29Cardiology Chapter 30-Neurology Chapter 31-Endocrinology Chapter 32-Allergies and anaphylaxis Chapter 33-Infectious and communicable diseases Chapter 34-Gastroenterology Chapter 35-Toxicology Chapter 36-Urology Chapter 37-Hematology Chapter 38-Environmental conditions Chapter 39-Eyes, ears, nose, and throat Chapter 40-Behavioral and psychiatric disorders Chapter 41-Obstetrics/gynecology Part 5 Problem-based learning case Part 6-Special populations Chapter 42Neonatology Chapter 43-Pediatric patients Chapter 44-Geriatric patients Chapter 45-The abused and neglected Chapter 46-Patients with special challenges Chapter 47-Patients with chronic illnesses Chapter 48-Patients from diverse cultures Part 6 Problem-based learning case Part 7-Operations Chapter 49-Ambulance operations Chapter 50-Medical incident command Chapter 51-Rescue awareness Chapter 52-Teamwork and operational interface Chapter 53-Hazardous materials incidents Chapter 54-Special events and mass gatherings Chapter 55-Responding to the wmd events Chapter 56-Military paramedicine Part 7 Problembased learning case / Appendices / Skill sheets / Answers and rationale / Answers to problem-based learning cases / Resources New PARAMEDIC REVIEW DVD AND CD-ROM By Delve Productions, Inc 2008 (January 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322069-7 / MHID: 0-07-322069-8 A paramedic student needs a review product that contains both all testable certification skills and the ability to test and assess the didactic course material. Paramedic Plus Review combines both skills (all ALS skills) and a didactic review of all paramedic material in a DVD and CD-ROM format. It can be used by a student studying for their written and practical exam or by an instructor for classroom teaching of the skills. Features The DVD includes videos which provide review of steps and procedures of each testable skill plus a didactic review. Passing the paramedic course and National Registry written and practical skills examinations will be stressed. : DVD skills performed according to national standards. Well-known and proven development team. Contents Well-Being / Lifting and Moving Patients / Airway / Patient Assessment / Bleeding and Soft Tissue Injuries / Injuries to Muscles and Bones / Child Birth / Neonatology / Infants and Children / Geriatrics / Abuse & Assault / Pharmacology/Venous Access/Meds / Advanced Airway Techniques / EMS Operations / Assessment Based Management ACLS/Advanced Cardiac Life Support New ACLS BASICS AND MORE WITH STUDENT CD & DVD By Kim McKenna 2008 (February 20070 / 224 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-301971-0 / MHID: 0-07-301971-2 ACLS-Basics and More contains the “Cliff Notes” of the ACLS Provider Course, as well as essential info from the advanced resuscitation course. The textbook provide 60 illustrations, including approximately 20 rhythm strips for essential review. It also features 19 essential treatment algorithms. Appendices include a comprehensive medications table and a listing of common ACLS abbreviations. For each medication within the appendix, the following information is provided: action, uses, adult dose, common side-effects, and notes. In addition, within the medications table, ACLS medications and medication details for the experienced provider are italicized. The textbook is packaged with a DVD that provides the most common scenarios the end-user may encounter in the field. It is also packaged with a CD that contains multiple-choice, self-test questions with answer key and rationales. Authored by a knowledgeable ACLS provider and DVD experts. 53 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 53 9/29/2006 11:54:23 AM Applied Biology Firefighting Features The textbook contains a streamlined or “Cliff Notes” approach of the ACLS Provider Course, as well as essential information from the advanced resuscitation course. The textbook will provide rhythm strips and numerous drug tables for essential review. Textbook will be packaged with a DVD. The accompanying DVD will contain the following information in a video format: 10 scenarios reflecting the “core” ACLS cases and 4 scenarios reflecting topics covered in the advanced ACLS course. Additionally, the DVD will include skills that are not part of the scenarios (e.g., CPR). Contents Section I – Introduction to ACLS Chapter 1 – Passing ACLS Chapter 2 – ACLS Fundamentals Chapter 3 – Respiratory Distress and Arrest Chapter 4 – Public Access Defibrillation Chapter 5 – ECG Rhythms and ACLS Algorithms Chapter 6 – Acute Coronary Syndromes Chapter 7 – Acute Ischemic Stroke Section II – ACLS for Experienced Providers Chapter 8 – Advanced Acute Coronary Syndromes Chapter 9 – Toxicology in ACLS Chapter 10 – Special Resuscitation Situations / Appendices Appendix A: ACLS Medication Table Appendix B: Common ACLS Abbreviations New SAFE FIREFIGHTING - FIRST THINGS FIRST WITH STUDENT DVD By Steve Kidd and John Czajkowski of Delve Productions, Inc and Garry Briese, International Association of Fire Chiefs 2007 (July 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312397-4 / MHID: 0-07-312397-8 Safe Firefighting: First Things First, is the initial orientation and training for beginning firefighters who will not be going inside to fight a structure fire. It will empower the beginning firefighter with the ability to assist on most exterior firefighting and emergency rescue operations. At this level, the firefighter will need tight supervision and will only have the capabilities to assist the next two levels of firefighters trained in this program. By providing condensed entry-level training to the newest firefighter recruit, the fire department can get personnel safely involved in some fire department emergency operations sooner, while you complete your more advanced training. This approach is a great help for fire departments that are in dire need of personnel, particularly volunteer departments. Features This text/workbook introduces the volunteer firefighter to the testable skills required by the National Fire Protection Association. Written for the Volunteer: The is the first text to deal only with the volunteer firefighter, which is about three quarters of all firefighters. The primary and consistent focus of this text is on the Firefighter’s safety. Personal and crew safety is emphasized consistently in both the knowledge and skills content. This a new approach to initial training for volunteer firefighters. Presently there are no textbooks, nor a nationally recognized curriculum, that focus on the exterior firefighter working in a volunteer or combination fire department. Each book includes a free Student DVD that demonstrates all of the essential skills in the text, and digital flash cards for self-study. The material is featured in context using scenario based training, so the student will not only learn the skills, but will know when to apply them in the field. The result is a safer, “thinking” firefighter. Each chapter features a section called “Reality”. This section provides a real-world example of where the skills in the chapter will apply, keeping with the training in context model. Contents INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Chapter 1--Welcome to the Fire Service Chapter 2--First Aid and CPR Chapter 3--Protective Equipment Chapter 4--Pre-Connected Attack Lines Chapter 5--Response Safety and Vehicle Crashes (No Entrapment) Chapter 6--Extinguishing Small Fires Chapter 7--Ground Cover Fires Chapter 8--Passenger Vehicle Fires Chapter 9--Supply Hose Lines Chapter 10--Large Attack Lines Chapter 11--Single Family Dwelling Fires (Two Story, Exterior Attack) Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg 54 HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 54 9/29/2006 11:54:23 AM 2007-2008 NEW Cellular Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics Titles Cellular Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics ~ Contents Biotechnology................................................................. 69 Developmental Biology/Embryology................................ 57 General Genetics............................................................. 58 Human Genetics............................................................. 57 Immunology.................................................................... 57 Introductory Microbiology Laboratory............................. 65 Introductory Microbiology-Majors Text............................ 61 Introductory Microbiology-Non Majors Multimedia......... 65 Introductory Microbiology-Non Majors Text Allied Health Emphasis................................................ 62 Microbiology Printed-Supplements.................................. 69 Molecular Biology........................................................... 56 STDs/AIDS....................................................................... 70 2007 New Titles BROWN Benson’s Microbiological Applications: Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology, Complete Version, 10e.............................................65 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299273-1 / MHID: 0-07-299273-5 BROWN Benson’s Microbiological Applications: Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology, Short Version, 10e....................................................66 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299272-4 / MHID: 0-07-299272-7 HYDE Introduction to Genetics..........................................59 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110803-4 / MHID: 0-07-110803-3 KLEYN Microbiology Experiments, 5e..................................67 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299949-5 / MHID: 0-07-299949-7 LEWIS Human Genetics, 7e.................................................57 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310143-9 / MHID: 0-07-310143-5 NESTER Microbiology: A Human Perspective, 5e..................63 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321152-7 / MHID: 0-07-321152-4 Virology.......................................................................... 57 2008 New Titles HARLEY Microbiology Lab Manual, 7e...................................65 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299293-9 / MHID: 0-07-299293-X HARTWELL Genetics: From Genes to Genomes, 3e....................58 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322738-2 / MHID: 0-07-322738-2 STINE AIDS Update 2007...................................................70 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340234-5 / MHID: 0-07-340234-6 TALARO Foundations in Microbiology, 6e..............................62 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330540-0 / MHID: 0-07-330540-5 TALARO Foundations in Microbiology: Basic Principles, 6e.............................................................................63 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330947-7 / MHID: 0-07-330947-8 WEAVER Molecular Biology, 4e..............................................56 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331994-0 / MHID: 0-07-331994-5 WILLEY Prescott/Harley/Klein’s Microbiology, 7e.................61 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330208-9 / MHID: 0-07-330208-2 55 HED 2007 Cellular Molecular, Mic55 55 9/29/2006 12:02:14 PM Cellular Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics Molecular Biology International Edition New MOLECULAR BIOLOGY 4th Edition By Robert Weaver, University of Kansas-Lawrence 2008 (January 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331994-0 / MHID: 0-07-331994-5 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110216-2 / MHID: 0-07-110216-7 [IE] Molecular Biology, 4/e by Robert Weaver, is designed for an introductory course in molecular biology. The text is geared not only toward presenting concepts of molecular biology, but also the experiments that led to those concepts. Guided by this experimental approach, Dr. Weaver has been published by National Institutes as well as National Geographic. NEW TO THIS EDITION • Information on Affinity Chromatography--Chapter 5 (Molecular Tools for Studying Genes and Gene Activity) now includes information on Affinity Chromatography, one of the most powerful separation techniques, and also touches on Forensic Uses of DNA Fingerprinting and DNA Typing. • Thoroughly Revised Website--McGraw-Hill’s ARIS--Assessment, Review, and Instruction System for Molecular Biology, 4/e is a complete electronic homework and course management system. Instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. Instructors can edit questions and algorithms, import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of easy-to-assign algorithmically generated homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a student is registered in the course, all student activity within McGrawHill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. Contact your local McGraw-Hill Publisher’s representative for more information on getting started with ARIS. • New material on Eukaryotic RNA--Chapter 10 (Eukaryotic RNA Polymerases and Their Promotors) includes lots of new material, inlcuding Three Dimensional Structure of RNA Polymermase II in the Post-Translocation State and info on Rpbl’s interaction with the DNA-RNA hybrid. • New Information on Structure and Function of eIF3--Chapter 17 (The Mechanism of Translation I:Initiation) includes new information on the Structure and Function of eIF3 as well as Shifts in mRNA Secondary Structure. • New Informaton on the X Chromosome and more!--Chapter 24 (Genomics, Proteomics, and Bioinformatics) includes new information on the X Chromosome and its role in sex-linked diseases. Also discussed in this chapter is the “Barcode of Life”, a section connecting DNA to how taxonomists now classify organisms. A few other new topics touched upon is Whole Chromosome Transcriptional Mapping, Genomic Functional Profiling, Tissue-Specific Functional Profiling, and RNAi Analysis. • New End-of-Chapter Material--Along with the revision of End-ofChapter Review Questions and Analytical Questions, new References and Suggested Readings have been added throughout the text. • Revised Art Program!--Many of the illustrations in this edition have been redrawn to further clarify details, make content current, and to create a consistent appearance. FEATURES • Guide to Experimental Techniques--A summary guide to more than 75 experimental techniques, referenced to the pages on which the techniques are discussed, is found in the front matter. • Material from Original Publications--Significant data and autoradiographs from original publications are included to support the narrative and to help students analyze data. • Analytical Questions--As part of the End-Of-Chapter material, these questions encourage students to use outside tools to further their understanding of that particular chapter’s concepts. (Answers will be provided on the new Fourth Edition website.) • Text-Specific Website--The text-specific website includes updated references, downloadable line art and tables from the text, and links to relevant instructive sites on the web. CONTENTS 1 Introduction 1 A Brief History 2 The Molecular Nature of Genes 3 An Introduction to Gene Function 2 Methods of Molecular Biology 4 Molecular Cloning Methods 5 Molecular Tools for Studying Genes and Gene Activity 3 Transcription in Prokaryotes 6 The Mechanism of Transcription in Prokaryotes 7 Operons: Fine Control of Prokaryotic Transcription 8 Major Shifts in Prokaryotic Transcription 9 DNA-Protein Interactions in Prokaryotes 4 Transcription in Eukaryotes 10 Eukaryotic RNA Polymerases and Their Promoters 11 General Transcription Factors in Eukaryotes 12 Transcription Activators in Eukaryotes 13 Chromatin Structure and Its Effects on Transcription 5 Posttranscriptional Events 14 Messenger RNA Processing I: Splicing 15 Messenger RNA Processing II: Capping and Polyadenylation 16 Other RNA Processing Events 6 Translation 17 The Mechanism of Translation I: Initiation 18 The Mechanism of Translation II: Elongation and Termination 19 Ribosomes and Transfer RNA 7 DNA Replication, Recombination, and Transposition 20 DNA Replication I: Basic Mechanism and Enzymology 21 DNA Replication II: Detailed Mechanism 22 Homologous Recombination 23 Transposition 8 Genomes 24 Genomics and Proteomics SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF MOLECULAR BIOLOGY By William Stansfield, California State Polytechnic University 1996 / 384 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-060898-6 / MHID: 0-07-060898-9 [A Schaum Professional Publication] CONTENTS 1. Cells / 2. Biomacromolecules / 3. Chromosomes / 4. Transcription and Gene Regulation / 5. Translation / 6. Mutations / 7. The Genetics of Bacteria and Their Viruses / 8. Genetic Engineering / Recombinant DNA Technology / 9. Nucleic Acid Manipulations / 10. Eukaryotic Cells and Their Viruses / 11. Cellular Communication / 12. Development in Multicellular Organisms / 13. The Immune System / 14. Molecular Evolution. INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg 56 HED 2007 Cellular Molecular, Mic56 56 9/29/2006 12:02:15 PM Cellular Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics Virology Developmental Biology / Embryology International Edition International Edition ANALYSIS OF BIOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENT 2nd Edition By Klaud Kalthoff, University of Texas at Austin 2001 /816 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118078- 8 / MHID: 0-07-118078-8 [IE] Website: www.mhhe.com/kalthoff CONTENTS Part I From Gametogenesis to Histogenesis 1 Analysis of Development 2 The Role of Cells in Development 3 Gametogenesis 4 Fertilization 5 Cleavage 6 Cell Fate, Potency and Determination 7 Genomic Equivalence and the Cytoplasmic Environment 8 Localized Cytoplasmic Determinants 9 Axis Formation and Mesoderm Induction 10 Gastrulation 11 Cell Adhesion and Morphogenesis 12 Organogenesis 13 Ectodermal Organs 14 Endodermal and Mesodermal Organs Part II Control of Gene Expression in Development 15 The Use of Mutants and Transgenic Organisms in the Analysis of Development 16 Transcriptional Control 17 RNA Processing 18 Translational Control and Post-translational Modifications 19 Genetic and Paragenetic Information Part III Current Topics in Developmental Biology 20 Cell Differentiation 21 Pattern Formation and Embryonic Fields 22 Genetic and Molecular Analysis of Pattern Formation in the Drosophila Embryo 23 Genetic and Molecular Analysis of Vertebrate Development 24 Genetic and Molecular Analysis of Pattern Formation in Plants 25 Experimental and Genetic Analysis of Caenorhabditis elegans Development 26 Sex Determination 27 Hormonal Control of Development 28 Organismic Growth and Oncogenes Immunology SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF IMMUNOLOGY By George Pinchuk 2002 / 304 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-137366-1 / MHID: 0-07-137366-7 [A Schaum Professional Publication] CONTENTS 1. Overview of Immunity and the Immune System / 2. Cells, Tissues, and Organs of the Immune System / 3. Antibodies and Antigens / 4. Maturation of B Lympocytes and Expression of Immunoglobullin Genes / 5. The Major Histocompatibility Complex / 6. Antigen Processing and Presentation / 7. T-Lymphocyte Antigen Recognition and Activation / 8. B-Lymphocyte Activation and Antibody Production / 9. Immunologic Tolerance / 10. Cytokines / 11. Innate Immunity / 12. Effector Mechanisms of Cell-Mediated Immunity / 13. Effector Mechanisms of Humoral Immunity / 14. Immunity to Microbes / 15. Transplantation Immunology / 16. Immunity to Tumors / 17. Autoimmunity and Autoimmune Diseases / 18. Immunodeficiencies. THE BIOLOGY OF VIRUSES 2nd Edition By Bruce Voyles, Grinnell College 2002 /432 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120477- 4 / MHID: 0-07-120477-6 [IE] CONTENTS 1 Viruses and Host Cells 2 Getting In: Attachment, Penetration, and Uncoating 3 Expression and Replication of the Viral Genome in Prokaryotic Hosts 4 Expression and Replication of the Viral Genome in Eukaryotic Hosts: The RNA Viruses 5 Expression and Replication of the Viral Genome in Eukaryotic Hosts: The DNA Viruses 6 Assembly, Maturation, and Release of Virions 7 Effects of Viral Infection on Host Cells: Cytological and Inductive Effects 8 Effects of Viral Infection on Host Cells: Integrated Viruses and Persistent Infections 9 Subviral Entities, Viral Evolution, and Viral Emergence Human Genetics International Edition New HUMAN GENETICS 7th Edition By Ricki Lewis, SUNY at Albany 2007 (Nov 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310143-9 / MHID: 0-07-310143-5 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110779-2 / MHID: 0-07-110779-7 [IE] Human Genetics, Seventh Edition, is a non-science majors human genetics text that clearly explains what genes are, how they function, how they interact with the environment, and how our understanding of genetics has changed since completion of the human genome project. It is a clear, modern, and exciting book for citizens who will be responsible for evaluating new medical options, new foods, and new technologies in the age of genomics. New to this edition Chapter openings have been reworked to include a Case Study at the beginning of each chapter. These Case Studies provide students with real-life applications of the concepts to be discussed in the chapter. Relating the Concept sections are incorporated throughout every chapter, relating content back to the real-life Case Study in the chapter opener. Features Problems requiring the use of web resources have been included within the Applied Questions at the end of each chapter. On-page references to specific topics on the Online Learning Center have been added to provide additional information to the student. Figure references in the text have been highlighted so that it is easier for students to locate references within the narrative. 57 HED 2007 Cellular Molecular, Mic57 57 9/29/2006 12:02:15 PM Cellular Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics General Genetics Cutting-edge scientific coverage is incorporated throughout the book. The author’s experience as a scientific journalist enables her to keep current with breaking topics in genetics, giving students the most up-to-date human genetics text on the market. Case Studies. Human Genetics has always been full of cases stud ies, from the end-of-chapter pedagogy, to the “In Their Own Words” boxes, to the case workbook, to the narrative itself. These cases allow students to see that the research today deals with populations and common ills and traits. Over 50 pieces of color-coded art present basic concepts of single-gene inheritance, chromosome structure, and DNA structure and function, helping students visualize the material they have just read. Compelling, human interest examples from the author’s extensive experience as a genetic counselor and science journalist keep the students interested in the textual material. This text weaves relevance throughout by including stories about real people dealing with real genetic issues. Through In Their Own Words Essays, individuals tell of their experience with genetic conditions. In addition, Bioethics: Choices for the Future Boxes, found at the ends of appropriate chapters, encourage students to ask difficult questions of themselves, and to predict how the new science of genetics might impact their lives. Instructors can customize this text using our do-it-yourself website. The Primis Content Center features more than one million items, including this and hundreds of other best-selling McGraw-Hill textbooks, laboratories, case studies, and readings. These materials, along with others including your own notes, can be customized into a black and white, high resolution printed textbook or a full-color Primis eBook that saves your students 1/3 off bookstore prices. Log on to our website, register, and create your own complimentary copy. www. primiscontentcenter.com International Edition New GENETICS From Genes to Genomes, 3rd Edition By Leland Hartwell, University of Washington 2008 (October 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322738-2 / MHID: 0-07-322738-2 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110215-5 / MHID: 0-07-110215-9 [IE] Genetics: From Genes to Genomes is a cutting-edge, introductory genetics text authored by an unparalleled author team, including Nobel Prize winner, Leland Hartwell. The Third Edition continues to build upon the integration of Mendelian and molecular principles, providing students with the links between early genetics understanding and the new molecular discoveries that have changed the way the field of genetics is viewed. NEW TO THIS EDITION Additional problems have been added throughout each chapter, providing students and teachers with more variety in the level of problems. At the end of each chapter, the level of difficulty is indicated for each problem, giving instructors the ability the select problems to assign based upon the level of difficulty. New “On Our Website” feature, at the end of each chapter, directs students and teachers to additional, more detailed information on specialized topics not found in the textbook. This information is in the form of content, references, or links, for easy access. In the Online Learning Center, instructors will find the instructor’s manual, answer key to the case study workbook, additional case studies, and links to additional resources. New Chapter 12: Systems Biology is included in the new edition, giving students information on a new way of studying genetics by looking at every system of biology as a whole. In appropriate locations in the text, step-by-step problem-solving strategies have been included to give students a complete understanding of how to work out specific problems. New “Internet Assignments and Exercises” offer students an interactive way to read and complete additional exercises beyond those offered in the textbook. Contents FEATURES Part One Introduction Chapter 1 Overview of Genetics Chapter 2 Cells Chapter 3 Development Part Two Transmission Genetics Chapter 4 Mendelian Inheritance Chapter 5 Extensions and Exceptions to Mendel’s Laws Chapter 6 Matters of Sex Chapter 7 Multifactorial Traits Chapter 8 The Genetics of Behavior Part Three DNA and Chromosomes Chapter 9 DNA Structure and Replication Chapter 10 Gene Action: From DNA to Protein Chapter 11 Control of Gene Expression Chapter 12 Gene Mutation Chapter 13 Chromosomes Part Four Population Genetics Chapter 14 When Allele Frequencies Stay Constant Chapter 15 Changing Allele Frequencies Chapter 16 Human Origins and Evolution Part Five Immunity and Cancer Chapter 17 Genetics of Immunity Chapter 18 The Genetics of Cancer Part Six Genetic Technology Chapter 19 Genetic Technologies: Amplifying, Modifying, and Monitoring DNA Chapter 20 Genetic Testing, Genetic Counseling, and Gene Therapy Chapter 21 Reproductive Technologies Chapter 22 The Age of Genomics Model Organism Portrait chapters--These additional chapters, located at the text-specific website, are written by contributing experts in the field to reflect the most current information on each organism. Students concentrate on the most widely used model organisms--yeast, arabadopsis (plant), C. elegans (worm), fruit fly, and mouse--to understand how the developmental mechanisms of the model organisms gives insight into human development and genomics. Fast Forward Boxes are one of the mechanisms used to implement the integration of Mendelian and molecular genetics. Genetics & Society Boxes require students to critically think about the ethical and social questions arising from the application of modern genetic knowledge to issues like privacy and reproduction. End-of-Chapter Problems have been revised and expanded! Social & Ethical Issues--these questions prompt the student to apply problem-solving skills to the type of real-world situations that scientific breakthroughs have forced us to face as a society. Solved Problems--sample problems covering topical material with complete answers to aid the student in understanding the problem solving process. Problems & Questions-exercises that allow the student to develop their own problem solving skills. Answers to selected questions are in the back of the book. An Unparalleled Author Team--Included in this winning team are Nobel prize-winning yeast specialist, Leland Hartwell; pioneer geneticist and physician, Leroy Hood; a leading Drosophila expert, Michael Goldberg; a leading mouse expert, Lee Silver; and a distinguished science writer, Ruth Veres. This team continues to incorporate the most up-to-date, cutting-edge research throughout the breadth of the book. 58 HED 2007 Cellular Molecular, Mic58 58 9/29/2006 12:02:15 PM Cellular Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics The text’s detailed, accurate and instructive art program also includes “Feature Figures,” which combine art and text in special two-page and four-page spreads that summarize the central genetic processes for students who appreciate a visual synopsis of the core ideas. The Digital Content Manager is an instructor-based presentation CD-ROM that contains all the illustrations, tables, and photos found in the text in jpeg format. In addition, professors have access to numerous genetics animations, active art, and chapter-specific PowerPoint lecture presentations. Part 3 (Genomes) has been extensively revised! Completely restructured and updated, Chapters 9, 10, and 11 (formerly 8-10) focus on the dramatic explosion of information that is the result of the completion of the Human Genome Project, as well as continuing genome research on a wide variety of organisms. Students will have the opportunity to read the most current coverage available of this critical topic and have a complete understanding of the “hows and whys” of genetic research. Professors have the option of creating a customized version of the text by selecting only the chapters they cover in lecture, allowing students savings in book costs. Customization can occur in two ways: Chapter-by-chapter color customization (printed book). Primis Online--choose the appropriate chapters and mix and match with other items on Primis Online, allowing maximum choice and flexibility. Choose between two delivery formats: custom printed books (in black and white) or custom eBooks (in color). CONTENTS 1 Genetics: The Study of Biological Information 2 Mendel’s Breakthrough: Patterns, Particles, and Principles of Heredity 3 Extensions to Mendel: Complexities in Relating Genotype to Phenotype 4 The Chromosome Theory of Inheritance 5 Linkage, Recombination, and the Mapping of Genes on Chromosomes 6 DNA: How the Molecule of Heredity Carries, Replicates, and Recombines Information 7 Anatomy and Function of a Gene: Dissection Through Mutation 8 Gene Expression: The Flow of Genetic Information from DNA to RNA to Protein 9 Deconstructing the Genome: DNA at High Resolution 10 Reconstructing the Genome Through Genetic and Molecular Analysis 11 The Direct Detection of Genotype Distinguishes Individual Genomes 12 Systems Biology and Proteomics 13 The Eukaryotic Chromosome: An Organelle for Packaging and Managing DNA 14 Chromosomal Rearrangements and Changes in Chromosome Number Reshape Eukaryotic Genomes 15 The Prokaryotic Chromosome: Genetic Analysis in Bacteria 16 The Chromosomes of Organelles Outside the Nucleus Exhibit NonMendelian Patterns of Inheritance 17 Gene Regulation in Prokaryotes 18 Gene Regulation in Eukaryotes 19 Cell-Cycle Regulation and the Genetics of Cancer 20 Using Genetics to Study Development 21 The Genetic Analysis of Populations and How They Evolve 22 Evolution at the Molecular Level International Edition New INTRODUCTION TO GENETICS By David Hyde, University of Notre Dame 2007 (March 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110803-4 / MHID: 0-07-110803-3 [IE] Hyde’s Introduction to Genetics teaches the principles of genetics with an innovative approach that emphasizes the basic concepts involved in solving problems as well as teaching students how to manipulate genetic data. While most genetics textbooks provide some examples and several problems for the student to work, the texts primarily stress facts and historical information. It is often left to the student to make the connection from what is in the text to elucidating the approaches to solve problems. Dr. David Hyde presents these skills to the students throughout the narrative in a stepped-out fashion, making an explicit tie between the facts and their application. This text maintains the rigor that faculty require in a genetics book, while incorporating a student-friendly presentation style that helps the reader comprehend the material. The four key features of Hyde’s Introduction to Genetics include: 1. Innovative, problem-solving-based approach maintains the connection between basic genetic principles and their application to problems using a stepped-out system. The text also links specific portions of the text with selected end-of-chapter problems to direct the student to problems that will test their comprehension of the material they just studied. 2. Strong and accessible molecular genetics coverage discusses in a clear and basic manner the new information on molecular processes and new techniques. This is achieved without sacrificing either the content or depth of material. 3. Dynamic illustration and photo program incorporates vibrant colors and three-dimensional effects with pedagogically sound layouts that greatly assist students in visualizing and understanding difficult genetic processes. 4. Superior media package offers instructors full access to textbook art, photos and tables, as well as high-quality animations and customizable PowerPoint lecture presentations. The Online Learning Center provides students with additional study tools and problem-solving exercises. Features Up to date and accurate content Organization that matches the current trends in genetics Key concepts are easier to identify Genetics Lab activities are in each chapter and are linked to the OLC Genetics Studente resource CD-ROM COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog. Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com 59 HED 2007 Cellular Molecular, Mic59 59 9/29/2006 12:02:15 PM Cellular Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics GENETICS DEMYSTIFIED By Edward Willet 2006 (September 2005) / 210 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-145930-3 / MHID: 0-07-145930-8 [A Professional Reference Title] Genetics Demystified offers an up-to-date, highly readable explanation of the basic principles of genetics, covering key topics such as human genetics, DNA, heredity, mutations, traits, chromosomes, and much more. This self-teaching guide comes complete with key points, background information, quizzes at the end of each chapter, and even a final exam. Simple enough for beginners but challenging enough for advanced students, this is a lively and entertaining brush-up, introductory text, or classroom supplement. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Mendelism and Classical Genetics Chapter 2: The Cell--The Basic Unit of Life Chapter 3: DNA--The Chemical Basis of Heredity Chapter 4: Chromosomes--Organized DNA Chapter 5: Traits--How Genes Are Expressed Chapter 6: Genomes--Reading the Genetic Code Chapter 7: Mutations--Misreading the Code Chapter 8: Cancer--Genetics Gone Awry Chapter 9: Bacteria--A Different Way of Doing Things Chapter 10: Organelles--Genetics Outside the Nucleus Chapter 11: Viruses--Hijacking Heredity Chapter 12: Genetic Engineering--Sculpting the Code Chapter 13: Evolution--Change Driven by Genetics Chapter 14: Humans--How Genetics Affect Us / Final Exam / Answers to Quiz and Final Exam Questions / Suggested Additonal References / Glossary / Index International Edition GENETICS Analysis and Principles, 2nd Edition By Robert J Brooker, University of Minnesota — Minneapolis 2005 (Jan 2004) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296597-1 / MHID: 0-07-296597-5 (with OLC Bind-In Card) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111099-0 / MHID: 0-07-111099-2 [IE with OLC Bind-In Card] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/brooker Genetics: Analysis and Principles is a one-semester, introductory genetics textbook that takes an experimental approach to understanding genetics. By weaving one or two experiments into the narrative of each chapter, students can simultaneously explore the scientific method and understand the genetic principles that have been learned from these experiments. SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF GENETICS 4th Edition By Susan Elrod, California Polytechnic State University - San Luis Obispo 2002 / 500 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-136206-1 / MHID: 0-07-136206-1 [A Schaum Professional Publication] CONTENTS 1. The Physical Basis of Heredity / 2. Patterns of Inheritance / 3. The Biochemical Basis of Heredity / 4. Genetic Interactions / 5. The Genetics of Sex / 6. Linkage and Chromosome Mapping / 7. Cytogenetics / 8. Quantitative Genetics / 9. Population Genetics and Evolution / 10. Genetics of Bacteria / 11. Viruses, Transposable Elements, and Cancer / 12. Molecular Genetics and Biotechnology / 13. The Molecular Biology of Eukaryotes. International Edition PRINCIPLES OF GENETICS 7th Edition By Robert Tamarin, University of Massachusetts 2002 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124320-9 / MHID: 0-07-124320-8 [IE with OLC&CD] Website: www.mhhe.com/tamarin7 CONTENTS I Genetics and the Scientific Method 1 Introduction II Mendelism and the Chromosomal Theory 2 Mendel’s Principles 3 Mitosis and Meiosis 4 Probability and Statistics 5 Sex Determination, Sex Linkage, and Pedigree Analysis 6 Linkage and Mapping in Eukaryotes 7 Linkage and Mapping in Prokaryotes and Bacterial Viruses 8 Cytogenetics III Molecular Genetics 9 Chemistry of the Gene 10 Gene Expression: Transcription 11 Gene Expression: Translation 12 DNA: Its Mutation, Repair, and Recombination 13 Genomics, Biotechnology, and Recombinant DNA 14 Gene Expression: Control in Prokaryotes and Phages 15 The Eukaryotic Chromosome 16 Gene Expression: Control in Eukaryotes 17 Non-Mendelian Inheritance IV Quantitative and Evolutionary Genetics 18 Quantitative Inheritance 19 Population Genetics: The Hardy-Weinberg Equilibrium and Mating Systems 20 Population Genetics: Processes That Change Allelic Frequencies / Appendix A Brief Answers to Selected Exercises, Problems, and Critical Thinking Questions / Appendix B Suggestions for Further Reading CONTENTS Part 1 Introduction 1 Overview of Genetics Part 2 Patterns of Inheritance 2 Mendelian Inheritance 3 Reproduction and Chromosome Transmission 4 Extensions of Mendelian Inheritance 5 Linkage and Genetic Mapping in Eukaryotes 6 Genetic Transfer and Mapping in Bacteria and Bacteriophages 7 Non-Mendelian Inheritance 8 Variation in Chromosome Structure and Number Part 3 Molecular Structure and Replication of The Genetic Material 9 Molecular Structure of DNA and RNA 10 Chromosome Organization and Molecular Structure 11 DNA Replication Part 4 Molecular Properties of Genes 12 Gene Transcription and RNA Modification 13 Translation of mRNA 14 Gene Regulation in Bacteria and Bacteriophages 15 Gene Regulation in Eukaryotes 16 Gene Mutation and DNA Repair 17 Recombination and Transposition at the Molecular Level Part 5 Genetic Technologies 18 Recombinant DNA Technology 19 Genome Analysis 20 Molecular Genetics and Biotechnology 21 Computer Analysis of Genetic Sequences Part 6 Genetic Analysis of Individuals and Populations 22 Genetics of Cancer and other Human Diseases 23 Developmental Genetics 24 Quantitative Genetics 25 Population Genetics 26 Evolutionary Genetics INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg 60 HED 2007 Cellular Molecular, Mic60 60 9/29/2006 12:02:16 PM Cellular Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics Introductory Microbiology – Majors Text International Edition New PRESCOTT/HARLEY/KLEIN’S MICROBIOLOGY 7th Edition By Joanne Willey, Hofstra University, Linda Sherwood, Montana State University-Bozeman and Chris Woolverton, Kent State University-Kent 2008 (January 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330208-9 / MHID: 0-07-330208-2 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110231-5 / MHID: 0-07-110231-0 [IE] The brand new author team of Prescott, Harley and Klein’s Microbiology continues the tradition of past editions by providing a balanced, comprehensive introduction to all major areas of microbiology. Because of this balance, the Seventh Edition of Microbiology is appropriate for microbiology majors and mixed majors courses. The new authors have focused on readability, artwork, and the integration of several key themes (including evolution, ecology and diversity) throughout the text, making an already superior text even better. NEW TO THIS EDITION The Seventh Edition introduces a brand new author team with over 40 years of combined research and teaching experience. Joanne Willey, Linda Sherwood, and Christopher Woolverton focused on readability, artwork, and the integration of several key themes throughout the text, making an already superior text even better. Increased emphasis on microbial evolution and diversity. The themes of microbial evolution, ecology, and diversity are now more than ever integrated throughout the Seventh Edition. Several chapters have been revised and reorganized to reflect this integration, including Chapter 19, which now covers microbial evolution in greater depth than other texts. The chapters that are specifically devoted to ecology (27-29) have also undergone significant revisions. The most up-to-date information to maintain accurate descriptions of structures and processes, as well as provide exciting recent discoveries to illustrate essential points, has been added. A few specific examples include: - a current description of the structure and function of DNA polymerase III - the role of viruses in marine ecosystems - the ubiquitous nature of type III secretion systems - an updated coverage of the inflammatory response - the current understanding of HIV origins - the avian influenza epidemiology • Nearly 200 new and 300 revised illustrations and photos featuring three-dimensional renditions and bright, attractive colors are part of the extensively revised art program! The art program also includes new pedagogical features such as concept maps and annotation of key pathways and processes. - In addition to every term being page-referenced, the updated glossary now also includes 200 new and revised entries. • New instructor and student technology resources available with the 7th edition! - The 50 high-quality animations that were available with the 6th edition are even more improved with the 7th edition! With an additional 25 new animations available (75 total), students can now quiz themselves over each animation, receive automatic feedback on correct/incorrect answers, and then submit their answers to their instructors for grading. - McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is a new complete electronic homework and course management system, designed for greater ease of use than any other system available. Instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. Instructors can edit questions, import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a student is registered in the course, all student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. FEATURES • The Seventh Edition continues to present material in short chapters organized thematically into eleven separate sections. Shorter chapters are less daunting and more “digestible” for most students. Furthermore, they offer the professor a greater degree of flexibility so that the order in which chapters are covered can be tailored to meet the needs of an individual class. CONTENTS Part I Introduction to Microbiology 1 The History and Scope of Microbiology 2 The Study of Microbial Structure: Microscopy and Specimen Preparation 3 Procaryotic Cell Structure and Function 4 Eucaryotic Cell Structure and Function Part II Microbial Nutrition, Growth, and Control 5 Microbial Nutrition 6 Microbial Growth 7 Control of Microorganisms by Physical and Chemical Agents Part III Microbial Metabolism 8 Metabolism: Energy, Enzymes, and Regulation 9 Metabolism: Energy Release and Conservation 10 Metabolism: The Use of Energy in Biosynthesis Part IV Microbial Molecular Biology and Genetics 11 Microbial Genetics: Gene Structure, Replication, and Expression 12 Microbial Genetics of Gene Expression 13 Microbial Genetics: Mechanisms of Genetic Variation Part V DNA Technology and Genomics 14 Recombinant DNA Technology 15 Microbial Genomics Part VI The Viruses 16 The Viruses: Introduction and General Characteristics 17 The Viruses: Viruses of Bacteria and Archaea 18 The Viruses: Eucaryotic Viruses and Other Acellular Infectious Agents Part VII The Diversity of the Microbial World 19 Microbial Evolution, Taxonomy, and Diversity 20 The Archaea 21 Bacteria: The Deinococci and Nonproteobacteria Gram Negatives 22 Bacteria: The Proteobacteria 23 Bacteria: The Low G + C Gram Positives 24 Bacteria: The High G + C Gram Positives 25 The Protists 26 The Fungi (Eumycota) Part VIII Ecology and Symbiosis 27 Biogeochemical Cycling and Introductory Microbial Ecology 28 Microorganism in Marine and Freshwater Environments 29 Microorganisms in Terrestrial Environments Part IX Nonspecific (Innate) Resistance and the Immune Response 30 Microbial Interactions 31 Nonspecific (Innate) Host Resistance 32 Specific (Adaptive) Immunity 33 Pathogenecity of Microorganisms Part X Microbial Diseases and Their Control 34 Antimicrobial Chemotherapy 35 Clinical Microbiology 36 The Epidemiology of Infectious Disease 37 Human Diseases Caused by Viruses 38 Human Diseases Caused by Bacteria 39 Human Diseases Caused by Fungi and Protists Part XI Food and Industrial Microbiology 40 Microbiology of Food 41 Applied and Industrial Microbiology Appendix I A Review of the Chemistry of Biological Molecules Appendix II Common Metabolic Pathways • New study aids have been developed to help students better understand the vast array of microbiology concepts: - New questions that require critical thinking skills have been added throughout. - Important names of scientists, techniques, and microbes are now called out to students by being highligted in red font. 61 HED 2007 Cellular Molecular, Mic61 61 9/29/2006 12:02:16 PM Cellular Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics Introductory Microbiology - Non Majors Text Allied Health Emphasis - McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is a new complete electronic homework and course management system, designed for greater ease of use than any other system available. Instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. Instructors can edit questions, import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a student is registered in the course, all student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. FEATURES International Edition New FOUNDATIONS IN MICROBIOLOGY 6th Edition By Kathleen Park Talaro, Pasadena City College 2008 (September 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330540-0 / MHID: 0-07-330540-5 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110229-2 / MHID: 0-07-110229-9 [IE] Written with the non-major/allied health student in mind, Foundations in Microbiology offers an engaging and accessible writing style through the use of tools such as case studies and analogies to thoroughly explain difficult microbiology concepts. A taxonomic approach is used for the study of pathogens. NEW TO THIS EDITION • The immunology chapters have been extensively reorganized and updated: - Chapter 14, now titled “Nonspecific Host Defenses”, only includes material on nonspecific immunity. - Chapter 15, now titled “Specific Immunity and Immunization”, includes material on specific immunity and immunization. - The previous edition’s Chapter 16 material on immunization is now placed in Chapter 15, and previous material on immune assays can now be found in the new Chapter 17 on diagnosing infections. The new Chapter 16 is “Disorders in Immunity” (old Chapter 17). • Chapter 17, Diagnosing Infections, is brand new to this edition! Bringing together in one place the methods used to diagnose infectious diseases, the chapter starts with collecting samples from the patient and details the biochemical, serological and molecular methods used to identify causative microbes. • Talaro’s text takes a taxonomic (organism) approach to the disease coverage(Ch. 18-25). Students are introduced to each pathogen by a description of the class it belongs to, the diseases (and characteristic symptoms) it causes, and the diagnosis and treatment of those diseases. • A Basic Principles version (Chapters 1-17 of this text) is also available. • Excellent learning aids such as bulleted Chapter Overview sections, Chapter Checkpoint reviews, footnoted word origins, and pronunciation guides help students better comprehend difficult material. CONTENTS Chapter 1 The Main Themes of Microbiology Chapter 2 The Chemistry of Biology Chapter 3 Tools of the Laboratory: The Methods for Studying Microorganisms Chapter 4 An Introduction to Cells and Procaryotic Cell Structure and Function Chapter 5 Eucaryotic Cells and Microorganisms Chapter 6 An Introduction to the Viruses Chapter 7 Elements of Microbial Nutrition, Ecology, and Growth Chapter 8 Microbial Metabolism: The Chemical Crossroads of Life Chapter 9 Microbial Genetics Chapter 10 Genetic Engineering: A Revolution in Molecular Biology Chapter 11 Physical and Chemical Control of Microbes Chapter 12 Drugs, Microbes, Host--The Elements of Chemotherapy Chapter 13 Microbe-Human Interactions Chapter 14 Nonspecific Host Defenses Chapter 15 Adaptive, Specific Immunity and Immunization Chapter 16 Disorders in Immunity Chapter 17 Diagnosing Infections Chapter 18 The Cocci of Medical Importance Chapter 19 The Gram-Positive Bacilli of Medical Importance Chapter 20 The Gram-Negative Bacilli of Medical Importance Chapter 21 Miscellaneous Bacterial Agents of Disease Chapter 22 The Fungi of Medical Importance Chapter 23 The Parasites of Medical Importance Chapter 24 Introduction to Viruses: The DNA Viruses Chapter 25 The RNA Viruses that Infect Humans Chapter 26 Environmental and Applied Microbiology • Each chapter now begins with a “Real Case Study in Microbiology”, giving students an opportunity to appreciate and understand how microbiology impacts their lives on a daily basis. The solutions appear at the end of the chapter, after the necessary elements have been presented. • Over 200 new and revised illustrations add to the existing art program’s display of realistic views of microbiology. • The boxed readings in previous editions have been updated to “Insight Boxes” in the 6th edition. These interesting boxed readings found throughout each chapter include Historical, Medical, Discovery, and Cultural spotlights on microbiology. Questions at the end of each reading reinforce for students the important material they have just read (answers can be found on the ARIS website). • Concept Questions found at the ends of chapters now include page references, allowing students to easily page back and review the information they are looking for. • New instructor and student technology resources available with the 6th edition! - 100+ animations available with the Sixth Edition! Students can quiz themselves over each animation, receive automatic feedback on correct/incorrect answers, and then submit their answers to their instructors for grading. COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog. Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com 62 HED 2007 Cellular Molecular, Mic62 62 9/29/2006 12:02:16 PM Cellular Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics International Edition New FOUNDATIONS IN MICROBIOLOGY Basic Principles, 6th Edition By Kathleen Park Talaro, Pasadena City College 2008 (September 20060 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330947-7 / MHID: 0-07-330947-8 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330655-1 / MHID: 0-07-330655-X (with ARIS QuickStart Guide) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110230-8 / MHID: 0-07-110230-2 [IE] Written with the non-major/allied health student in mind, Foundations in Microbiology: Basic Principles offers an engaging and accessible writing style through the use of tools such as case studies and analogies to thoroughly explain difficult microbiology concepts. This version includes chapters 1 through 17 of the full Foundations in Microbiology text, teaching only the basic principles of microbiology and not covering the clinical aspects. NEW TO THIS EDITION • The metabolism (8) and immunology chapters have been extensively revised. The reorganized and updated immunology chapters include: - Chapter 14, now titled “Nonspecific Host Defenses”, only includes material on nonspecific immunity. nouncements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a student is registered in the course, all student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. FEATURES • The full version of this text, Foundations in Microbiology, has additional chapters 18-26, which include material on diseases (organized by pathogen) and environmenatal and applied microbiology. • Excellent learning aids such as bulleted Chapter Overview sections, Chapter Checkpoint reviews, footnoted word origins, and pronunciation guides help students better comprehend difficult material. CONTENTS Chapter 1 The Main Themes of Microbiology Chapter 2 The Chemistry of Biology Chapter 3 Tools of the Laboratory: The Methods for Studying Microorganisms Chapter 4 An Introduction to Cells and Procaryotic Cell Structure and Function Chapter 5 Eucaryotic Cells and Microorganisms Chapter 6 An Introduction to the Viruses Chapter 7 Elements of Microbial Nutrition, Ecology, and Growth Chapter 8 Microbial Metabolism: The Chemical Crossroads of Life Chapter 9 Microbial Genetics Chapter 10 Genetic Engineering: A Revolution in Molecular Biology Chapter 11 Physical and Chemical Control of Microbes Chapter 12 Drugs, Microbes, Host—The Elements of Chemotherapy Chapter 13 Microbe—Human Interactions Chapter 14 Nonspecific Host Defenses Chapter 15 Adaptive, Specific Immunity and Immunization Chapter 16 Disorders in Immunity Chapter 17 Diagnosing Infections - Chapter 15, now titled “Specific Immunity and Immunization”, includes material on specific immunity and immunization. - The previous edition’s Chapter 16 material on immunization is now placed in Chapter 15, and previous material on immune assays can now be found in the new Chapter 17 on diagnosing infections. The new Chapter 16 is “Disorders in Immunity” (old Chapter 17). • Chapter 17, Diagnosing Infections, is brand new to this edition! Bringing together in one place the methods used to diagnose infectious diseases, the chapter starts with collecting samples from the patient and details the biochemical, serological and molecular methods used to identify causative microbes. • Each chapter now begins with a “Real Case Study in Microbiology”, giving students an opportunity to appreciate and understand how microbiology impacts their lives on a daily basis. The solutions appear at the end of the chapter, after the necessary elements have been presented. • Over 200 new and revised illustrations add to the existing art program’s display of realistic views of microbiology. • The boxed readings in previous have been updated to “Insight Boxes” in the 6th edition. These interesting boxed readings found throughout each chapter include historical, medical, and cultural spotlights on microbiology. Questions at the end of each reading reinforce for students the important material they have just read (answers can be found on the ARIS website). • Concept Questions found at the ends of chapters now include page references, allowing students to easily page back and review the information they are looking for. • New instructor and student technology resources available with the 6th edition! - The 50 high-quality animations that were available with the 5th edition are even more improved with the 6th edition! With an additional 25 new animations available (75 total), students can now quiz themselves over each animation, receive automatic feedback on correct/incorrect answers, and then submit their answers to their instructors for grading. - McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is a new complete electronic homework and course management system, designed for greater ease of use than any other system available. Instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. Instructors can edit questions, import their own content, and create an- International Edition New MICROBIOLOGY A Human Perspective, 5th Edition By Eugene W Nester, Denise G Anderson and C Evans Roberts Jr of University of Washington, Martha T Nester 2007 (Nov 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321152-7 / MHID: 0-07-321152-4 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110781-5 / MHID: 0-07-110781-9 [IE] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/nester4 Appropriate for the non-major/allied health student, this authoritative text carefully explains the fundamentals of microbiology, providing a general overview of the principles followed by more detailed explanations. With its clear and concise writing style, Microbiology: A Human Perspective offers modern coverage on such topics as genomics, biofilms, and quorum sensing. A body systems approach is used in the coverage of diseases. New to this edition The Digital Content Manager and Text Website now include 75 animations (25 are brand new to this edition!) for students and instructors to view in and out of class. Students can quiz themselves over each animation, receive automatic feedback on correct/incorrect answers, and then submit their answers to their instructors for grading. Several chapters have been thoroughly revised, restructured, and updated to provide students with the most modern coverage available in a concise, easy-to-read presentation. Examples include: --Chapter 4: Dynamics of Prokaryotic Growth – reorganized to increase emphasis on biofilms -- Chapter 5: Control of Microbial Growth--reorganized so that the methods of physical control are covered adjacent sections; new section that describes the use of high pressure to pasteurize foods such as guacamole; new section describes the role of water treatment facilities in providing pathogen-free drinking water; mentions amended regulations that require water treatment facilities to minimize the level of disinfection by-products and Cryptosporidium oocysts. 63 HED 2007 Cellular Molecular, Mic63 63 9/29/2006 12:02:16 PM Cellular Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics -- Chapter 9: Biotechnology and Recombinant DNA--chapter now begins with a section that describes the fundamental tools used in biotechnology (restriction enzymes, gel electrophoresis, nucleic acid probes and primers) -- Chapter 17: Applications of Immune Responses – extensive revision of the section on immunological testing Over 75 new and revised pieces of art! Knowing that the art program is a key element of the learning process, each figure in the text was developed as the narrative was written, providing students with a concrete, visual reinforcement of the topics discussed throughout the text. Colors and symbols are used consistently throughout the text. Legends are short, clear, and descriptive. A list of key terms and their definitions has been added at the beginning of each chapter to help students understand the terms to be covered. Each section now begins with a list of “Focus Points” learning objectives, helping students focus on key areas as they proceed through each section. Science cartoons have been added throughout various chapters, relating microbiology to everyday life. Features Expert Approach to Writing. Because of their individual specializations and their research and educational backgrounds, the authors remain in the hub of the scientific community and can provide accurate and modern coverage spanning the breadth of microbiology. More importantly, the authors write in a clear and concise manner, striving to present material that easily speaks to the students reading it. Excellent Disease Coverage. The chapters on infectious diseases are organized by body system and contain exceptional student learning tools: --Consistent coverage of all diseases including symptoms, pathogenesis, epidemiology, prevention and treatment. --Case studies are included that relate basic science to actual clinical situations; the case studies are accompanied by several questions with answers provided. --”Disease Summaries” have been designed for each major disease. These include 1) a summary table 2) a drawing showing human symptoms, portals of entry and exit and location of pathology, and 3) a step-by-step description of infection process. These are presented in the book for selected diseases and on the web page for all diseases discussed in the book. Major sections end with a short “Microcheck” that summarizes the major concepts in that section and offers both review questions and critical thinking questions (in blue) to assess understanding of the preceding section. Applications to Promote Further Interest. Applications throughout the text not only help students understand microbiology’s history but also how microbiology influences their daily lives and futures. --”Glimpse of History” stories about the men and women who pioneered the field of microbiology open each chapter. --”Perspective” boxes introduce a human perspective by showing how microorganisms and their products influence our lives in a myriad of different ways. Contents 1 Life and Death of Microorganisms 1 Humans and the Microbial World 2 The Molecules of Life 3 Microscopy and Cell Structure 4 Dynamics of Prokaryotic Growth 5 Control of Microbial Growth 6 Metabolism: Fueling Cell Growth 7 The Blueprint of Life, from DNA to Protein 8 Bacterial Genetics 9 Biotechnology and Recombinant DNA 2 The Microbial World 10 Identification and Classification of Prokaryotes 11 The Diversity of Prokaryotic Organisms 12 The Eukaryotic Members of the Microbial World 13 Viruses of Bacteria 14 Viruses, Prions and Viroids: Infectious Agents of Animals and Plants 3 Microorganisms and Humans 15 The Innate Immune Response 16 The Adaptive Immune Response 17 Applications of Immune Responses 18 Immunologic Disorders 19 Host-Microbe Interactions 20 Epidemiology 21 Antimicrobial Medications 4 Infectious Diseases 22 Skin Infections 23 Wound Infections 24 Respiratory System Infections 25 Alimentary System Infections 26 Genitourinary Infections 27 Nervous System Infections 28 Blood and Lymphatic Infections 29 HIV Disease and Complications of Immunodeficiency 5 Applied Microbiology 30 Microbes and the Environment 31 Applications of Environmental Microbiology: Water and Waste Treatment 32 Food Microbiology International Edition MICROBIOLOGY An Organ Systems Approach By Marjorie Kelly Cowan, Miami University –Oxford and Kathleen Park Talaro, Pasadena City College 2006 (Jan 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304838-3 / MHID: 0-07-304838-0 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111572-8 / MHID: 0-07-111572-2 [IE] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cowan1 Up-to-date and extensively reviewed, Microbiology is written with the non-major/allied health student in mind. Offering both an engaging writing style through the use of case studies and analogies and a vivid art program, the text thoroughly explains difficult microbiology concepts in an accessible manner. Utilizing an organ systems approach, the unique in-chapter organization of the disease/clinical chapters provides students a realistic viewpoint of the clinical experiences they will encounter in the future. CONTENTS 1 The Main Themes of Microbiology. 2 From Atoms to Cells: A Chemical Connection. 3 Tools of the Laboratory: The Methods for Studying Microorganisms. 4 Procaryotic Profiles: The Bacteria and Archaea. 5 Eucaryotic Cells and Microorganisms. 6 An Introduction to the Viruses. 7 Elements of Microbial Nutrition, Ecology, and Growth. 8 Microbial Metabolism: The Chemical Crossroads of Life. 9 Microbial Genetics. 10 Genetic Engineering: A Revolution in Molecular Biology. 11 Physical and Chemical Control of Microbes. 12 Drugs, Microbes, Host--The Elements of Chemotherapy. 13 Microbe-Human Interactions: Infection and Disease. 14 Nonspecific Host Defenses. 15 Specific Immunity and Immunization. 16 Disorders in Immunity. 17 Diagnosing Infections. 18 Infectious Diseases Affecting the Skin and Eyes. 19 Infectious Diseases Affecting the Nervous System. 20 Infectious Diseases Affecting the Cardiovascular and Lymphatic Systems. 21 Infectious Diseases Affecting the Respiratory System. 22 Infectious Diseases Affecting the Gastrointestinal Tract. 23 Infectious Diseases Affecting the Genitourinary System. 24 Environmental and Applied Microbiology. Appendix A Answers to Multiple-Choice Questions and Selected Matching. --”Future Challenges” essays conclude each chapter to inform students of a pending challenge facing current and future microbiologists. 64 HED 2007 Cellular Molecular, Mic64 64 9/29/2006 12:02:17 PM Cellular Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics International Edition MICROBIOLOGY Essentials and Applications, 2nd Edition By Larry McKane, California State Polytechnic and Judy Kandel, California State – Fullerton 1996 / 880 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-045154-4 / MHID: 0-07-045154-0 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-117933-1 / MHID: 0-07-117933-X [IE with Microbes in Motion II, Mandatory Package] Introductory Microbiology - Non Majors Multimedia HYPERCLINIC 2 CD-ROM FOR WINDOWS 2nd Edition By Lewis L Tomalty and Gloria J Delisle of Queen’s University 2001 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-232312- 2 / MHID: 0-07-232312-4 HyperClinic is an interactive multimedia program appropriate for undergraduate microbiology students majoring in the health sciences or for medical students studying clinical microbiology. It is used very differently in the two modes. Allied health students are asked to evaluate a realistic case study that includes a patient history and description of signs and symptoms and to analyze the results of physician-ordered clinical tests to reach a diagnosis. Medical students will evaluate a case study scenario and then decide which clinical samples should be taken and which diagnostic tests run. Immediate feedback and prompts help the students evaluate their decisions. Animations and movies provide detailed information on how the clinical tests are conducted, providing the undergraduate with an excellent introduction to a clinical lab and providing a solid review for the more experienced student. New BENSON’S MICROBIOLOGICAL APPLICATIONS Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology, Complete Version, 10th Edition By Alfred E Brown, Auburn University-Auburn 2007 (April 2006) / 544 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299273-1 / MHID: 0-07-299273-5 The classic resource for undergraduate microbiology laboratory courses just keeps getting better. The self-contained, clearly illustrated exercises and full-color format make Microbiological Applications: Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology the ideal lab manual. Appropriate for either a majors or non-majors lab course, this manual assumes no prior organic chemistry course has been taken. New to this edition Content has been updated throughout, especially in Part 8: Identification of Unknown Bacteria, and in Part 13: Medical Microbiology and Immunology, to include the latest research. Also updated was Exercise 78: A Synthetic Epidemic, in keeping with lab safety requirements. Features Benson’s Complete Version (78 experiments) provides the largest variety of laboratory exercises to accommodate all laboratory curricula-from a medical emphasis to an environmental emphasis and everything between. (A Short Version with 60 experiments is also available.) Full-color examples of lab test results appear in the lab exercises so students have an immediate reference against which they can compare their results. Because you may prefer or require a different way to stage a lab exercise, this lab manual includes suggestions for alternative approaches and procedures in the appendixes and in the Instructor’s Manual. The Instructor’s Manual provides a materials list and guidelines for conducting all the experiments, as well as answers to the lab exercises. It can be found at www.mhhe.com/labcentral Customize this book through Primis Online! This title is part of the Primis Online Database: www.mhhe.com/primis/online. You can customize this book to meet your exact needs and mix and match with other items on Primis Online--allowing you maximum choice and flexibility. Instructors can also choose between two delivery formats: custom printed books (in black and white) or custom eBooks (in color). Contents Introductory Microbiology Laboratory New MICROBIOLOGY LAB MANUAL 7th Edition By John Harley, Eastern Kentucky University 2008 (March 2007) / 480 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299293-9 / MHID: 0-07-299293-X Laboratory Exercises in Microbiology, 7/e has been prepared to accompany Prescott, Harley and Klein’s Microbiology, 7e, written by new authors Joanne Willey, Linda Sherwood, and Christopher Woolverton. Like the text, the laboratory manual provides a balanced introduction to laboratory techniques and principles that are important in each area of microbiology. Part 1 Microscopy Exercise 1 Brightfield Microscopy Exercise 2 Darkfield Microscopy Exercise 3 Phase-Contrast Microscopy Exercise 4 Fluorescence Microscopy Exercise 5 Microscopic Measurements Part 2 Survey of Microorganisms Exercise 6 Protozoans, Algae, and Cyanobacteria Exercise 7 Ubiquity of Bacteria Exercise 8 The Fungi: Yeasts and Molds Part 3 Manipulation of Microorganisms Exercise 9 Aseptic Technique Exercise 10 Pure Culture Techniques Part 4 Staining and Observation of Microorganisms Exercise 11 Smear Preparation Exercise 12 Simple Staining Exercise 13 Negative Staining Exercise 14 Capsular Staining Exercise 15 Gram Staining Exercise 16 Spore Staining: Two Methods Exercise 17 Acid-Fast Staining: Ziehl-Neelsen Method Exercise 18 Motility Determination Part 5 Culture Methods Exercise 19 Culture Media Preparation Exercise 20 Preparation of Stock Cultures Exercise 21 Cultivation of Anaerobes Exercise 22 Enumeration of Bacteria: The Standard Plate Count Exercise 23 Slime Mold Culture Exercise 24 Slide Culture: Molds Part 6 Bacterial Viruses Exercise 25 Determination of a Bacteriophage Titer Exercise 26 Burst Size Determination: A One-Step Growth Curve Exercise 27 Isolation of Phage from Flies Exercise 28 Phage Typing Part 7 Enviornmental Influences and Control of Microbial Growth Exercise 29 Temperature: Effects on Growth Exercise 30 Temperature: Lethal Effects Exercise 31 pH and Microbial Growth Exercise 32 Water Activity and Osmotic Pressure Exercise 33 Ultraviolet Light: Lethal Effects Exercise 34 Oligodynamic Action Exercise 35 Evaluation of Alcohol: Its Effectiveness As an Antiseptic Exercise 36 Antimicrobic Sensitivity Testing: The Kirby-Bauer Method Exercise 37 Evaluation of 65 HED 2007 Cellular Molecular, Mic65 65 9/29/2006 12:02:17 PM Cellular Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics Antiseptics: The Filter Paper Disk Method Exercise 38 Effectiveness of Hand Scrubbing Part 8 Identification of Unknown Bacteria Exercise 39 Morphological Study of Unknown Bacterium Exercise 40 Cultural Characteristics Exercise 41 Physiological Characteristics: Oxidation and Fermentation Tests Exercise 42 Physiological Characteristics: Hydrolytic Reactions Exercise 43 Physiological Characteristics: Biochemical Tests Exercise 44 Use of Bergey’s Manual Part 9 Miniaturized Multitest Systems Exercise 45 Enterobacteriaceae Identification: The API 20E System Exercise 46 Enterobacteriaceae Identification: The Enterotube II System Exercise 47 O/F Gram-Negative Rods Identification: The Oxi/Ferm Tube II System Exercise 48 Staphyococcus Identification: The API Staph-Ident System Part 10 Diversity and Environmental Microbiology Exercise 49 Isolation of an Antibiotic Producer: The Actinomyces Exercise 50 Nitrogen Cycle: Ammonification Exercise 51 Symbiotic Nitrogen Fixation: Rhizobium Exercise 52 Free-Living Nitrogen Fixation: Azotobacter Exercise 53 Denitrification: Paracoccus Denitrificans Exercise 54 The Winogradsky Column Exercise 55 Purple Nonsulfer Photosynthetic Bacteria Exercise 56 Sulfate Reducing Bacteria: Desulfovibrio Exercise 57 Bacterial Commensalism Exercise 58 Bacterial Synergism Exercise 59 Microbial Antagonism Part 11 Applied Microbiology Exercise 60 Bacterial Counts of Foods Exercise 61 Bacteriological Examination of Water: Qualitative Tests Exercise 62 The Membrane Filter Method Exercise 63 Reductase Test Exercise 64 Microbial Spoilage of Canned Food Exercise 65 Microbiology of Alcohol Fermentation Part 12 Bacterial Genetics and Biotechnology Exercise 66 Mutant Isolation by Replica Plating Exercise 67 Bacterial Transformation Exercise 68 Polymerase Chain Reaction for Amplifying DNA Exercise 69 Plasmid Isolation Part 13 Medical Microbiology and Immunology Exercise 70 The Staphylococci: Isolation and Identification Exercise 71 The Streptococci: Isolation and Identification Exercise 72 Gram-Negative Intestinal Pathogens Exercise 73 Slide Agglutination Test: Serological Typing Exercise 74 Slide Agglutination (Latex) Test: For S. aureus Identification Exercise 75 Tube Agglutination Test: The Heterophile Antibody Test Exercise 76 White Blood Cell Study: The Differential WBC Count Exercise 77 Blood Grouping Exercise 78 A Synthetic Epidemic / Appendix A: Tables Appendix B: Indicators, Stains, Reagents Appendix C: Media Appendix D: Identification Charts Appendix E: The Streptococci: Classification, Habitat, Pathology, and Biochemical Characteristics New BENSON’S MICROBIOLOGICAL APPLICATIONS Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology, Short Version, 10th Edition By Alfred E Brown, Auburn University-Auburn 2007 (April 2006) / 432 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299272-4 / MHID: 0-07-299272-7 The classic resource for undergraduate microbiology laboratory courses just keeps getting better. The self-contained, clearly illustrated exercises and four-color format make Microbiological Applications: Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology the ideal lab manual. Appropriate for either a majors or non-majors lab course, this lab manual assumes no prior organic chemistry course has been taken. New to this edition Content has been updated throughout, especially in Part 8: Identification of Unknown Bacteria, and in Part 11: Medical Microbiology and Immunology, to include the latest research. Also updated was Exercise 60: A Synthetic Epidemic, in keeping with lab safety requirements. Because you may prefer or require a different way to stage a lab exercise, this lab manual includes suggestions for alternative approaches and procedures in the appendixes and in the Instructor’s Manual. The Instructor’s Manual provides a materials list and guidelines for conducting all the experiments, as well as answers to the lab exercises. It can be found at www.mhhe.com/labcentral Customize this book through Primis Online! This title will be part of the Primis Online Database: www.mhhe.com/primis/online. You can customize this book to meet your exact needs and mix and match with other items on Primis Online--allowing you maximum choice and flexibility. You can also choose between two delivery formats: custom printed books (in black and white) or custom eBooks (in color). Contents Part 1 Microscopy Exercise 1 Brightfield Microscopy Exercise 2 Darkfield Microscopy Exercise 3 Phase-Contrast Microscopy Exercise 4 Microscopic Measurements Part 2 Survey of Microorganisms Exercise 5 Protozoans, Algae, and Cyanobacteria Exercise 6 Ubiquity of Bacteria Exercise 7 The Fungi: Yeasts and Molds Part 3 Manipulation of Microorganisms Exercise 8 Aseptic Technique Exercise 9 Pure Culture Techniques Part 4 Staining and Observation of Microorganisms Exercise 10 Smear Preparation Exercise 11 Simple Staining Exercise 12 Negative Staining Exercise 13 Capsular Staining Exercise 14 Gram Staining Exercise 15 Spore Staining: Two Methods Exercise 16 Acid-Fast Staining: Ziehl-Neelsen Method Exercise 17 Motility Determination Part 5 Culture Methods Exercise 18 Culture Media Preparation Exercise 19 Cultivation of Anaerobes Exercise 20 Enumeration of Bacteria: The Standard Plate Count Exercise 21 Slime Mold Culture Exercise 22 Slide Culture: Molds Part 6 Bacterial Viruses Exercise 23 Determination of a Bacteriophage Titer Exercise 24 Isolation of Phage from Flies Exercise 25 Phage Typing Part 7 Enviornmental Influences and Control of Microbial Growth Exercise 26 Temperature: Effects on Growth Exercise 27 Temperature: Lethal Effects Exercise 28 pH and Microbial Growth Exercise 29 Water Activity and Osmotic Pressure Exercise 30 Ultraviolet Light: Lethal Effects Exercise 31 Oligodynamic Action Exercise 32 Evaluation of Alcohol: Its Effectiveness As an Antiseptic Exercise 33 Antimicrobic Sensitivity Testing: The Kirby-Bauer Method Exercise 34 Evaluation of Antiseptics: The Filter Paper Disk Method Exercise 35 Effectiveness of Hand Scrubbing Part 8 Identification of Unknown Bacteria Exercise 36 Morphological Study of Unknown Bacterium Exercise 37 Cultural Characteristics Exercise 38 Physiological Characteristics: Oxidation and Fermentation Tests Exercise 39 Physiological Characteristics: Hydrolytic Reactions Exercise 40 Physiological Characteristics: Biochemical Tests Exercise 41 Use of Bergey’s Manual Part 9 Miniaturized Multitest Systems Exercise 42 Enterobacteriaceae Identification: The API 20E System Exercise 43 Enterobacteriaceae Identification: The Enterotube II System Exercise 44 O/F Gram-Negative Rods Identification: The Oxi/Ferm Tube II System Exercise 45 Staphyococcus Identification: The API Staph-Ident System Part 10 Applied Microbiology Exercise 46 Bacterial Counts of Foods Exercise 47 Bacteriological Examination of Water: Qualitative Tests Exercise 48 The Membrane Filter Method Exercise 49 Reductase Test Exercise 50 Microbial Spoilage of Canned Food Exercise 51 Microbiology of Alcohol Fermentation Part 11 Medical Microbiology and Immunology Exercise 52 The Staphylococci: Isolation and Identification Exercise 53 The Streptococci: Isolation and Identification Exercise 54 Gram-Negative Intestinal Pathogens Exercise 55 Slide Agglutination Test: Serological Typing Exercise 56 Slide Agglutination (Latex) Test: For S. aureus Identification Exercise 57 Tube Agglutination Test: The Heterophile Antibody Test Exercise 58 White Blood Cell Study: The Differential WBC Count Exercise 59 Blood Grouping Exercise 60 A Synthetic Epidemic / Appendix A: Tables Appendix B: Indicators, Stains, Reagents Appendix C: Media Appendix D: Identification Charts Appendix E: The Streptococci: Classification, Habitat, Pathology, and Biochemical Characteristics Features Benson’s Short Version (60 experiments) provides a large variety of laboratory exercises to accommodate all laboratory curricula--from a medical emphasis to an environmental emphasis and everything between. (A Complete Version with 78 experiments is also available.) Full-color examples of lab test results appear in the lab exercises so students have an immediate reference against which they can compare their results. 66 HED 2007 Cellular Molecular, Mic66 66 9/29/2006 12:02:17 PM Cellular Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics New microbiology experiments A Health Science Perspective, 5th Edition By John Kleyn and Mary Bicknell of University of Washington 2007 (Nov 2005) / 352 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299949-5 / MHID: 0-07-299949-7 All experiments are correlated to Nester’s Microbiology: A Human Perspective, 5/e, but can be used with any non-majors/allied health microbiology textbook. New to this edition Changes made to the 5th edition: » The exercise involving the identification of Gram negative organisms (Exercise 24) has been expanded . » The controls in the transformation experiment (Exercise 16) are no longer explained, forcing the student to analyze them more carefully . » The Ribosomal Data Project directions (Exercise 35) have been updated to reflect the changes of the web site (Michigan State online analysis--http://rdp.cme.msu.edu). » Alternate procedures: Some instructors requested other procedures for making plate counts, calculating dilutions, and increased data collecting opportunities for graphing. These procedures were included, but in such a way that they were optional for an instructor who preferred the original methods. » The safety of certain organisms was carefully considered and some organisms were removed that might pose a potential hazard even though there have not been problems in the past. » A bibliography of books related to microbiology was added to the appendix which should be interesting to students that now have a background in microbiology. » Questions have been added to the Prep Manual that do not appear in the Lab Manual. Answers are also provided in the Prep Manual. » The lab manual is correlated to the new edition of Nester’s Microbiology: A Human Perspective, 5/e. Nester page references are given in each chapter of the manual. » The instructor’s manual to the lab can be found online at Lab Central!, a password protected site for instructor resources. www.mhhe. com/labcentral Features Experiments follow the spirit of the ASM guidelines for laboratory content. Kleyn features health-oriented experiments covering topics that are included in a lecture course for non-majors going into an allied health field. The manual also includes: Experiments are basic, easy to follow, inexpensive, and time-efficient, and are, therefore, ideal for instructors who have little time, expertise, or money. Contents Part One: Basic Microbiology Introduction to Microbiology Exercise: 1 Ubiquity of Microorganisms Exercise: 2 Bright-field Light Microscopy, Including History and Working Principles Exercise: 3 Microscopic (Bright-field and Dark-field) Determination of Cell Motility, Form, and Viability Using Wet Mount and Hanging Drop Preparations Introduction to Staining of Microorganisms Exercise: 4 Simple Stains: Positive and Negative Stains Exercise: 5 Differential and Special Stains Introduction to Microbial Growth Exercise: 6 Pure Culture and Aseptic Technique Exercise: 7 Chemically Defined, Complex, Selective and Differential Media Exercise: 8 Quantification of Microorganisms Introduction to the Environment and Microbial Growth Exercise: 9 Aerobic and Anaerobic Growth Exercise: 10 The Effect of Incubation Temperature on Generation Time Introduction to Control of Microbial Growth Exercise: 11 Moist and Dry Heat Sterilization: Thermal Death Point and Thermal Death Time Exercise: 12 Control of Microbial Growth with Ultraviolet Light Exercise: 13 Osmotic Pressure, and Its Effect on Rate and Amount of Microbial Growth Exercise: 14 Antiseptics and Antibiotics Introduction to Microbial Genetics Exercise: 15 Selection of Bacterial Mutants Resistant to Antibiotics Exercise: 16 Transformation: A Form of Genetic Recombination Exercise: 17 Bacterial Conjugation Exercise: 18 Gene Regulation: Induction and Catabolite Repression Part Two: The Other Microbial World Introduction to the Other Microbial World Exercise: 19 Microscopic Identification of Fungi Exercise: 20 Parasitology: Protozoa and Helminths Exercise: 21 Titering Prokaryotic Viruses Part Three: Microbes and Humans Introduction to Medical Microbiology Exercise: 22 Normal Skin Flora Exercise: 23 Respiratory Microorganisms Exercise: 24 Identification of Enteric Gram-Negative Rods Exercise: 25 Clinical Unknown Identification Part Four: Immunology Introduction to Some Immunological Principles and Techniques Exercise: 26 Differential White Blood Cell Stains Exercise: 27 Lysozyme, an Enzymatic Form of Natural Resistance Exercise: 28 Lancefield Grouping of Pathogenic Streptococci with a Latex Slide Agglutination Test Exercise: 29 Use of an Enzyme-Linked Immunosorbent Assay (ELISA) Test for Coccidioides immitis Identification Exercise: 30 An Ouchterlony Double Immunodiffusion Test for Coccidioides immitis Identification Part Five: Public Health Introduction to the Prevention and Control of Communicable Diseases Exercise: 31 Epidemiology: A Staphylococcus Carrier Study Exercise: 32 Bacteriological Examination of Water: Multiple-Tube Fermentation and Membrane Filter Techniques Part Six: Applications of Biotechnology Introduction to Biotechnology Exercise: 33 Identifying DNA with Restriction Enzymes Exercise: 34 Identification of Bacteria Using the Ribosomal Data Project Part Seven: Projects Introduction to the Individual Projects Exercise: 35 Hydrocarbon-Degrading Bacteria, Cleaning Up After Oil Spills Exercise: 36 Luminescent Bacteria: Bacteria That Produce Light Exercise: 37 Methylotrophs, Organisms That Grow on One-Carbon Compounds Exercise: 38 Deinococcus, Bacteria with Out-Of-This-World Capabilities Appendices 1. Living Microorganisms (Bacteria, Fungi, Protozoa, and Helminths) Chosen for Study in this Manual 2. Dilution Practice Problems 3. Metric System, Use of with Conversions to the English System of Measurement 4. Alternative Procedures 5. Use of the Ocular Micrometer for Measurement of Relative and Absolute Cell Size 6. Use of the Hemocytometer for Determining Total Cell Number in a Liquid Suspension 7. Preparation of Covered Slide Cultures for Study of Intact Structure of a Mold Thallus 8. Additional Reading --Two experiments in which students apply some of the techniques used in biotechnology to identify DNA. --Four individual projects provide flexibility in teaching and also expand the breadth of the manual beyond health-related topics and into the diversity of nonpathogenic microorganisms. Students will isolate and culture bacteria that degrade oil spills, that glow in the dark, that consume 1-carbon compounds, and that are resistant to UV light. --Seven appendices provide basic technique and practice problems in using the metric system, making pH adjustments measuring cell size, counting cells, and preparing slide cultures. 67 HED 2007 Cellular Molecular, Mic67 67 9/29/2006 12:02:18 PM Cellular Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics LABORATORY MANUAL AND WORKBOOK IN MICROBIOLOGY 8th Edition By Josephine A. Morello, University of Chicago, Paul A. Granato, SUNY Health Science Center, Helen Eckel Mizer, Western Connecticut State University 2006 (Jan 2005) / 320 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282718-7 / MHID: 0-07-282718-1 This laboratory manual and workbook, now in its Eighth Edition, maintains its original emphasis on the basic principles of diagnostic microbiology for students preparing to enter the allied health professions. It remains oriented primarily toward meeting the interests and needs of those who will be directly involved in patient care and who wish to learn how microbiological principles should be applied in the practice of their professions. CONTENTS 1 Basic Techniques of Microbiology 1 Orientation to the Microbiology Laboratory 1 The Microscope 2 Handling and Examining Cultures 2 Microsopic Morphology of Microorganisms 3 Hanging-Drop and Wet-Mount Preparations 4 Simple Stains 3 Differential Stains 5 Gram Stain 6 Acid-Fast Stain 7 Special Stains 4 Cultivation of Mircroorganisms 8 Culture Media 9 Streaking Technique to Obtain Pure Cultures 10 PourPlate and Subculture Techniques 11 Culturing Microorganisms from the Environment 2 Destruction of Microorganisms 5 Physical Antimicrobial Agents 12 Moist and Dry Heat 13 The Autoclave 6 Chemical Antimicrobial Agents 14 Disinfectants 15 Antimicrobial Agent Susceptibility Testing and Resistance 3 Diagnostic Microbiology in Action 7 Principles of Diagnostic Microbiology: Culture of Clinical Specimens, Identifying Isolated Microorganisms, Antigen Detection and Nucleic Acid Assays 16 Primary Media for Isolation of Microorganisms 17 Some Metabolic Activities of Bacteria 18 Activities of Bacterial Enzymes 19 Principles of Antigen Detection and Nucleic Acid Assays for Detection and Identification of Microorganisms 8 Microbiology of the Respiratory Tract 20 Staphylococci 21 Streptococci, Pneumococci, and Enterococci 22 Haemophilus, Corynebacteria, and Bordetella 23 Clinical Specimens from the Respiratory Tract 9 Microbiology of the Intestinal Tract 24 The Enterobacteriaceae 25 Clinical Specimens from the Intestinal Tract 10 Microbiology of the Urinary and Genital tracts 26 Urine Culture Techniques 27 Neisseria and Spirochetes 11 Microbial Pathogens Requiring Special Laboratory Techniques; Serological Identification of Patients’ Antibodies 28 Anaerobic Bacteria 29 Mycobacteria 30 Mycoplasmas, Rickettsiae, Chlamydiae, Viruses, and Prions 31 Fungi: Yeasts and Molds 32 Protozoa and Animal Parasites 33 Serological Identification of Patients’ Antibodies 4 Applied (Sanitary) Microbiology 34 Bacteriologic Analysis of Water 35 Bacteriologic Analysis of Milk Media Preparation and Sterilization 14 Culture Transfer Instruments, Techniques, and Isolation of Pure Cultures and Their Maintenance 15 Spread-Plate Technique 16 Streak-Plate Technique and Differential Media 17 Pour-Plate Technique 18 Cultivation of Anaerobic Bacteria 19 Determination of Bacterial Numbers 4 Biochemical Activities of Bacteria 20 Carbohydrates I: Fermentation and beta-Galactosidase Activity 21 Carbohydrates II: Triple Sugar Iron Tests 22 Carbohydrates III: Starch Hydrolysis 23 Lipids: Lipid Hydrolysis 24 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes I: Hydrogen Sulfide Production and Motility 25 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes II: The IMViC Tests 26 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes III: Casein Hydrolysis 27 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes IV: Gelatin Hydrolysis 28 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes V: Catalase Activity 29 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes VI: Coagulase and DNA Activity 30 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes VII: Oxidase Test 31 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes VIII: Urease Activity 32 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes IX: Lysine and Ornithine Decarboxylase Test 33 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes X: Phenylalanine Deamination 34 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes XI: Nitrate Reduction 5 Rapid Multitest Systems 35 The API 20E System 36 The Enterotube II System 6 Unknown Identification 37 Using the First Edition of Bergey’s Manual of Systematic Bacteriology to Identify Bacteria 38 General Unknown 7 Environmental Factors Affecting Growth of Microorganisms 39 Temperature 40 pH 41 Osmotic Pressure 42 The Effects of Chemical Agents on Bacteria I: Disinfectants 43 The Effects of Chemical Agents on Bacteria II: Antimicrobial Agents (Kirby-Bauer Method) 44 Hand Washing, Environmental Sampling, and Microbiological Monitoring 45 Determination of a Bacterial Growth Curve: Classical and Two-Hour Methods 8 Environmental and Food Microbiology 46 Standard Coliform Most Probably Number (MPN)Test and Presence-Absence Coliform Test 47 Membrane Filter Technique for Coliform and Fecal Streptococci; KONFIRM Test for Fecal Coliforms 48 Isolation of Escherichia coli Bacteriophages from Sewage and Determining Bacteriophage Titers 49 Enumeration of Soil Microorganisms 50 Bacterial Count of a Food Product 51 Examination of Milk for Bacteria 9 Medical Microbiology 52 Agglutination Reactions: Blood Groups 53 Isolation of Normal Microbiota from the Human Body 54 Staphylococci 55 Pneumococci 56 Streptococci 57 Neisseriae 58 Aerobic and Anaerobic Endospore-Forming Bacteria 10 Survey of Selected Eucaryotic Microorganisms 59 Fungi I: Yeasts 60 Fungi II: Phycomycetes, Ascomycetes, and Basidiomycetes 11 Microbial Genetics and Genomics 61 Bacterial Mutation 62 Bacterial Transformation 63 Bacterial Conjugation: The Transfer of Antibiotic-Resistant Plasmids 64 Isolation of Genomic DNA from Saccharomyces cerevisiae 65 Isolation and Purification of Genomic DNA from Escherichia coli 66 Identifying Archaea and Bacteria Using the Internet and ComputerAssisted Gene Analysis / Appendix A Dilutions with Sample Problems Appendix B Metric and English Measurement Equivalents Appendix C Transmission-Absorbance Table for Spectrophotometry Appendix D Logarithms Appendix E pH and pH Indicators Appendix F Scientific Notation Appendix G Identification Charts Appendix H Reagents, Solutions, Stains, and Tests Appendix I Culture Media Appendix J Sources and Maintenance of Microbiological Stock Cultures LABORATORY EXERCISES IN MICROBIOLOGY 6th Edition By John Harley, Eastern Kentucky University 2005 (Feb 2004) / 480 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-255680-3 / MHID: 0-07-255680-3 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/prescott6 Laboratory Exercises in Microbiology, 6/e has been prepared to accompany Prescott et al’s Microbiology, 6/e. Like the text, the laboratory manual provides a balanced introduction to laboratory techniques and principles that are important in each area of microbiology. CONTENTS 1 Microscopic Techniques 1 Bright-Field Light Microscope, the Hanging Drop Slide, and Bacterial Motility 2 Dark-Field Light Microscope 3 Phase-Contrast Light Microscope 4 Fluorescence Microscope 5 Microscopic Measurement of Microorganisms 2 Bacterial Morphology and Staining 6 Negative Staining 7 Smear Preparation and Simple Staining 8 Gram Stain 9 Acid-Fast Staining (Ziehl-Neelsen and Kinyoun) Procedures 10 Endospore Staining (Schaeffer-Fulton or Wirtz-Conklin) 11 Capsule Staining 12 Flagella Staining: West and Difco’s SpotTest Methods 3 Basic Laboratory and Culture Techniques 13 Microbiological Culture International Edition LABORATORY EXERCISES IN ORGANISMAL AND MOLECULAR MICROBIOLOGY By Steve K. Alexander, University of Mary Hardin Baylor, Dennis Strete, McLennan Community College and Mary Jane Niles, University of San Francisco 2004 / 480 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-248744-2 / MHID: 0-07-248744-5 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115124-5 / MHID: 0-07-115124-9 [IE] A modern general microbiology laboratory manual that combines the procedural details of a laboratory manual with the photographic support of a laboratory atlas. The 46 class-tested laboratory experiments are divided into 9 specialty areas, and the extensive four-color illustration program includes 220 photos and micrographs plus 150 line drawings. 68 HED 2007 Cellular Molecular, Mic68 68 9/29/2006 12:02:18 PM Cellular Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics CONTENTS Laboratory Safety in the Microbiology Laboratory. Section I Survey of Microscopic Organisms Part A The Microscope: 1 Structure, Function, and Use of the Microscope 2 Microscopic Comparisons of Microorganisms, Parasites, and Small Invertebrates / Part B Microorganisms: 3 Microbial Prokaryotes: Bacteria and Cyanobacteria 4 Microbial Eucaryotes: Fungi 5 Microbial Eucaryotes : Protozoa and Algae / Part C Multicellulart Parasites: 6 Flatworms and Roundworms / Part D Microscopic Invertebrates: 7 Zooplankton 8 Disease Vectors Section II Staining Techniques Part A Morphological Stains: 9 Negative Staining 10 Smear Preparation and the Simple Stain / Part B Differential Stains: 11 Gram Stain 12 Acid-fast Stain / Part C Structural Stains: 13 Spore Stain 14 Capsule and Flagella Stain / Part D Application: 15 The Staining Characterization of a Bacterial Unknown Section III Bacterial Cultivation Part A Aseptic Technique: 16 Bacteria and Fungi in the Laboratory Environment: The Necessity of Aseptic Technique / Part B The Culture of Bacteria: 17 The Preparation and Inoculation of Growth Media 18 Culture Characterization Using Agar and Broth Media Section IV Bacterial Identification 19 Biochemical Tests Used to Identify Bacteria / 20 Application: The Identification of a Non-clinical Bacterial Unknown Section V Medical Microbiology Part A Bacteria of the Human Body: 21 Isolation and Identification of Staphylococci from the Skin 22 Isolation and Identification of Streptococci from the Throat 23A Identification of Enteric Bacteria Including the Intestinal pathogens Salmonella and Shigella 23B Enterotubes, a Rapid Test System to Identify Enteric Bacteria 24 Isolation and Identification of a Bacteria from the Urinary Tract / Part B Treatment of Bacterial Infections: 25 Assessing Antibiotic Effectiveness: The Kirby-Bauer Method / Part C Application: 26 The Identification of a Clinical Bacterial Unknown Section VI Controlling the Risk and Spread of Bacterial Infections Part A Food Handling: 27 Killing Bacteria Using High Temperatures / Part B Disinfecting Skin and Countertops: 28 Skin Disinfection: Evaluating Antiseptics and Hand Sanitizers 29 Cleaning Countertops with Disinfectants / Part C Testing Drinking Water Safety: 30 Bacteriological Examination of Drinking Water Using the MPN Method Section VII Bacterial Genetics Part A Bacterial Genomic DNA: 31 Bacterial DNA Fingerprinting 32 Mutagenesis in Bacteria: The Ames Test / Part B Plasmid DNA: 33 Plasmid Isolation and Restriction Mapping / Part C The Transfer of Drug Resistance: 34 Transformation / 35 Conjugation Section VIII Viruses Part A The Nature and Characterization of Viruses: 36 Structural Analysis of an Insect Virus, NPV / Part B Virus Propagation: 37 Detection and Quantification of Viruses of Bacteria 38 The Virus Infection Cycle 39 Virus Infection in Plants Section IX Hematology and Serology Part A Hematology: 40 Identification and Enumeration of White Blood Cells / Part B Serology: 41 Antigen-Antibody Reactions and Determination of Antibody Titer / Part C Serological Techniques: 42 Agglutination Reactions: ABO Blood Typing 43 Immunodiffusion: Antigen-Antibody Reactions in Gels 44 ELISA (Enzyme-Linked Immunosorbent Assay) 45 Bacterial Protein Fingerprinting and Western Blotting 46 Neutralization of Viruses by Antibodies Microbiology Printed - Supplements SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF MICROBIOLOGY By Edward Alcamo, SUNY-Farmingdale 1998 / 409 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-000967-7 / MHID: 0-07-000967-8 [A Schaum Professional Publication] CONTENTS Introduction to Microbiology. / The Chemical Basis of Microbiology. / Microbial Size and Microscopy. / Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes. / Microbial Growth and Cultivation. / Metabolism of Microorganisms. / DNA and Gene Expression. / Microbial Genetics. / Control of Microorganisms. / The Major Groups of Bacteria. / The Fungi. / The Protozoa. / The Unicellular Algae. / The Viruses. / The Host-Parasite Relationship. / Host Resistance and the Immune System. / Immune Tests and Disorders. / Microbial Diseases of the Skin and Eyes. / Microbial Diseases of the Nervous System. / Microbial Diseases of the Respiratory System. / Microbial Diseases of the Digestive System. / Microbial Diseases of the Blood and Viscera. / Microbial Diseases of the Urogenital System. / Food and Industrial Microbiology. / Environmental Microbiology. Biotechnology BIOTECHNOLOGY DEMYSTIFIED By Sharon Walker 2007 (Sept 2006) / 320 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-144812-3 / MHID: 0-07-144812-8 [A Professional Publication] This self-teaching guide explains the basic concepts and fundamentals in all the major subtopics of biotechnology. The content advances logically from the basics of molecular and cellular biology to more complex topics such as DNA, reproductive cloning, experimental procedures, infectious diseases, immunology, the Human Genome Project, new drug discoveries, and genetic disorders. CONTENTS COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog. Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com Part 1: Fundamental Topics in Molecular and Cellular Biology Chapter 1: The Molecules of Life: The stuff you are made of Chapter 2: The Cellular Basis of Life: What cells look like and what they do Chapter 3: Information Flow within the Cell: Going from gene to protein Chapter 4: DNA Replication and Cell Division: How life continues Chapter 5: Regulation of gene expression: cells don’t express every gene they have Chapter 6: Signal Transduction: How cells interact with what is outside Part 2: Essential Experimental Techniques in Biotechnology Chapter 7: Genetic Engineering: How you do something with DNA Chapter 8: Assays for Gene Function: I made this DNA, now what? Part 3: Advanced Topics in Biotechnology Chapter 9: Cancer and the Cell Cycle: When good cells go bad Chapter 10: Infectious Disease: Bacteria and viruses and prions, oh my! Chapter 11: Immunology: How the body protects itself from invasion Chapter 12: Genetic Disease: When good genes go bad Part 4: Applications of Biotechnology Chapter 13: The Human Genome Project: What it is and what it’s used for Chapter 14: Reproductive Cloning: Understanding the controversy Chapter 15: Genetically Modified (GM) Crops: The new way to make a better tomato Chapter 16: Drug Discovery: The accelerated pace of finding new drugs Chapter 17: Future Prospects for Biotechnology: Is it bright or a lack of foresight? 69 HED 2007 Cellular Molecular, Mic69 69 9/29/2006 12:02:18 PM Cellular Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics International Edition BIOTECHNOLOGY DNA to Protein: A Laboratory Project in Molecular Biology By Teressa Thiel and Shirley Bissen of University of Missouri-St Louis and Eilene Lyons, St. Louis Community College at Florissant Valley 2002 /192 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-241664-0 / MHID: 0-07-241664-5 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112279-5 / MHID: 0-07-112279-6 [IE] Website: www.mhhe.com/thiel CONTENTS Part 1: Examine Enzyme Activity of alpha-Amylase 1 Starch Plate Assay 2 Quantitative Enzyme Assay 3 Factors Affecting Enzyme Function Part 2: Examine alpha-Amylase Proteins 4 Analysis of Protein Structure Using RasMol 5 Analysis of alpha-Amylase Proteins Part 3: Examine DNA Structure 6 Analysis of DNA Structure Using RasMol 7 Isolation of Chromosomal DNA from Bacillus licheniformis Part 4 Find the alpha-Amylase Gene 8 PCR Amplification and Labeling of Probe DNA 9 Southern Hybridization Part 5 Clone the alpha-Amylase Gene 10 Cloning the alpha-Amylase Gene Part 6 Analyze alpha-Amylase Clones 11 Verification and Mapping of alpha-Amylase Clones 12 Enzyme Activity of alpha-Amylase Clones STDs / AIDS * An explanation of why HIV/AIDS is a unique and exceptional disease among all other diseases. * What the impact of a global HIV vaccine will be if one becomes available. • A variety of boxed essays provide supplemental information on chapter topics and illustrate important events and information about HIV/AIDS. • Discussion Questions encourage students to think critically about difficult and controversial issues associated with HIV and provide a starting point for lively class discussions. • Each chapter begins with a Chapter Concepts section that allows students to preview the material and stay focused on key topics. Chapter Summary and Review Questions provide students with a quick review of the key concepts of the chapter and help students test their understanding of the chapter’s material. CONTENTS Chapter 1 – AIDS, Defining the Disease and Finding Its Cause Chapter 2 – What Causes AIDS: Origin of the AIDS Virus Chapter 3 – Biological Characteristics of the AIDS Virus Chapter 4 – Anti-HIV Therapy Chapter 5 – The Immunology of HIV Disease/AIDS Chapter 6 – Opportunistic Infections and Cancers Associated with HIV Disease/AIDS Chapter 7 – A Profile of Biological Indicators for HIV Disease and Progression to AIDS Chapter 8 – Epidemiology and Transmission of the Human Immunodeficiency Virus Chapter 9 – Preventing the Transmission of HIV Chapter 10 – Prevalence of HIV Infections, AIDS Cases, and Deaths Among Select Groups in the United States and AIDS in Other Countries Chapter 11 – Prevalence of HIV Infection and AIDS Cases Among Women and Children in the United States Chapter 12 – Prevalence of HIV Infection and AIDS Among Young Adults, Ages 13 to 24 Chapter 13 – Testing for Human Immunodeficiency Virus Chapter 14 – AIDS and Society: Knowledge, Attitudes, and Behavior New AIDS UPDATE 2007 By Gerald J Stine, University of North Florida 2008 (January 2007) / 512 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340234-5 / MHID: 0-07-340234-6 AIDS Update 2007 presents a balanced review of current research and information on HIV infection, HIV disease, and AIDS. AIDS Update 2007 places this discussion within a biological, medical, social, economic and legal framework, helping readers to more fully understand this modern-day pandemic. FEATURES • The new edition now has 14 chapters. Chapter 11 deals only with women and children. A new Chapter 12 deals with HIV/AIDS among young adults, ages 13 to 24. • Almost half of the photographs, figures and line drawings are new to this edition. • AIDS Update 2007 has been updated with the most current data and emerging studies and research involving this devastating disease. FEATURES • Further Information sources, including Internet addresses and national hotline numbers, give students additional resources to contact. A list of References also allows students to see the sources of all scientific and social data within the book involving this devastating disease, including the following information: * Estimated data and information out to years 2035 and 2060 are provided. INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg * New information on the first 25 years of HIV/AIDS. 70 HED 2007 Cellular Molecular, Mic70 70 9/29/2006 12:02:18 PM 2007-2008 NEW Chemistry Titles Chemistry ~ Contents Allied Health/Nursing Chemistry (General, Organic and Biochemistry) - Lab Manuals.............................................................. 76 - Supplements . ........................................................... 77 - Textbooks.................................................................. 75 2007 New Titles Analytical Chemistry........................................................ 85 Biochemistry - 1 Semester - Textbooks.................................................................. 81 General Chemistry - Lab............................................................................ 80 - Multimedia................................................................ 81 - Supplements.............................................................. 80 - Textbooks.................................................................. 77 Kinetics and Reaction Mechanics..................................... 86 Liberal Arts Chemistry (Non Science Majors) - Textbooks.................................................................. 72 Organic Chemistry - 1 Semester - Textbooks.................................................................. 82 Organic Chemistry - 2 Semester - Lab Manual............................................................... 84 - Supplements.............................................................. 84 - Textbooks.................................................................. 83 BAUER Conceptual Introduction Chemistry.........................73 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322106-9 / MHID: 0-07-322106-6 CHANG Chemistry, 9e...........................................................77 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322103-8 / MHID: 0-07-322103-1 DENNISTON General, Organic and Biochemistry, 5e...................75 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322107-6 / MHID: 0-07-322107-4 GOLDBERG Fundamentals of Chemistry, 5e................................73 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322104-5 / MHID: 0-07-322104-X HENDRICKSON Laboratory Manual by Hendrickson to accompany General, Organic & Biochemistry, 5e.......................76 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282848-1 / MHID: 0-07-282848-X SILBERBERG Principles of General Chemistry...............................78 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322105-2 / MHID: 0-07-322105-8 2008 New Titles Physics Chemistry - Lab............................................................................ 85 - Supplements.............................................................. 85 - Textbooks.................................................................. 85 Prep/Basic Chemistry - Supplements............................................................. 74 - Textbooks................................................................ 73 CAREY Organic Chemistry, 7e.............................................83 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331184-5 / MHID: 0-07-331184-7 CHANG General Chemistry, 5e..............................................77 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331185-2 / MHID: 0-07-331185-5 DENNISTON Foundations of General, Organic and Biochemistry............................................................75 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331183-8 / MHID: 0-07-331183-9 SMITH Organic Chemistry, 2e.............................................84 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304986-1 / MHID: 0-07-304986-7 71 HED 2007 Chemistry.indd 71 9/29/2006 1:14:14 PM Chemistry Liberal Arts Chemistry (Non Science Majors) Textbooks International Edition Water Hardness 15 Measurement of Chloride in River Water 16 Analysis of Bottled Water 17 Reactions of Acids with Common Substances 18 pH Measurements of Common Substances 19 What Is the pH of Rain? 20 Solubilities: An Investigation 21 Measurement of Radon in Air 22 Chemical Reactions and Electricity 23 Polymer Synthesis and Properties 24 Classification and Identification of Common Plastics 25 Identification of Analgesic Drugs by Thin-Layer Chromatography 26 Synthesis of Aspirin 27 How Much Fat Is in Potato Chips and Hot Dogs? 28 How Much Sugar Is in Soft Drinks and Fruit Juices? 29 Vitamin C in Fruit Juice and in a Vitamin Tablet 30 Isolation of DNA (Deoxyribonucleic Acid) / Performance-Based Assessment Activities CHEMISTRY IN CONTEXT Applying Chemistry to Society, 5th Edition By American Chemical Society 2006 (Feb 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310159-0 / MHID: 0-07-310159-1 (with OLC Password Card) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111535-3 / MHID: 0-07-111535-8 [IE with OLC] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cic Following in the tradition of the first four editions, the goal of this market leading textbook, Chemistry in Context, fifth edition, is to establish chemical principles on a need-to-know basis within a contextual framework of significant social, political, economic and ethical issues. The non traditional approach of Chemistry in Context reflect today’s technological issues and the chemistry principles imbedded within them. Global warming, alternate fuels, nutrition, and genetic engineering are examples of issues that are covered in CIC. SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BEGINNING CHEMISTRY 3rd Edition By David Goldberg, University of Illinois – Urbana – Champaign 2005 (Dec 2004) / 384 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-144780-5 / MHID: 0-07-144780-6 [A Schaum Professional Publication] This clear and complete guide to the fundamentals of chemistry features course material in a succinct outline form, together with hundreds of detailed, fully solved problems. A perfect companion to most standard texts, this third edition has been updated to include the latest pedagogic approaches; more than 670 fully worked problems of varying difficulty, designed to lead you safely through the pitfalls of the course; and hundreds more practice problems. CONTENTS The Air We Breathe / Protecting the Ozone Layer / The Chemistry of Global Warming / Energy, Chemistry, and Society / The Water We Drink / Neutralizing the Threat of Acid Rain / The Fires of Nuclear Fission / Energy from Electron Transfer / The World of Plastics and Polymers / Manipulating Molecules and Designing Drugs / Nutrition: Food for Thought / Genetic Engineering and the Chemistry of Heredity / Measure for Measure: Conversion Factors and Constants / The Power of Exponents / Clearing the Logjam / Answers to Your Turn Questions Not Answered in the Text / Answers to Selected End-of-Chapter Questions LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY CHEMISTRY IN CONTEXT Applying Chemistry to Society 5th Edition By American Chemical Society 2006 (Feb 2005) / 224 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282836-8 / MHID: 0-07-282836-6 The 5th edition Laboratory Manual that accompanies Chemistry in Context is compiled and edited by Gail Steehler (Roanoke College). The experiments use microscale equipment (wellplates and Beral-type pipets) as well as common materials. Projecttype and cooperative/collaborative laboratory experiments are included. Additional experiments are available on the Online Learning Center, as is the instructor’s guide. Contents Preface to Instructions / To the Student / Essay: The Wonder of Chemistry Experiments / Some Notes About Laboratory Safety / 1 Preparation and Properties of Gases in a Breath 2 Chromatographic Study of Felt-Tip Pen Inks 3 Weighing Air and Cooling Water: A Graphic Experience 4 Solids in Cigarette Smoke 5 What Protects Use from Ultraviolet Light? 6 Visibly Delighted: A Spectrophotometric Study of Colored Solutions 7 Chemical Bonds, Molecular Models, and Molecular Shapes 8 Weighing Gases To Find Molar Masses 9 Chemical Moles: Converting Baking Soda to Table Salt 10 Hot Stuff: An Energy Conservation Problem 11 Comparison of the Energy Content of Fuels 12 Building a Conductivity Detector and Testing for Ions 13 Analysis of Vinegar 14 Measurement of International Edition CHEMISTRY A World of Choices, 2nd Edition By Paul B. Kelter, University of North Carolina—Greensboro, James D. Carr, University of Nebraska—Lincoln and Andrew Scott 2003 / 672 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-293040-5 / MHID: 0-07-293040-3 (with OLC Bind-In Card) - Out of Print ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119938-4 / MHID: 0-07-119938-1 [IE with OLC Bind-In Card] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/kelter2 CONTENTS Prelude / 1 Origins / 2 Connections / 3 Bonding / 4 Recycling and Chemical Mathematics / 5 The Role of Energy in Chemical Reactions / 6 Creating with Carbon—The Importance of Molecular Structure / 7 Properties of Water / 8 Acids and Bases / 9 Acid Rain / 10 Water Quality: Chemical Concerns, Chemical Solutions / 11 Behavior of Gases / 12 Air Quality: The Choices That Have Let Us Breathe More Easily / 13 The Earth As a Resource / 14 The Power of the Nucleus / 15 Solar Power: The Chemical Energy Alternative / 16 The Chemistry of Life / 17 The Chemistry of Food / 18 Chemistry at Home INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg 72 HED 2007 Chemistry.indd 72 9/29/2006 1:14:15 PM Chemistry HOW TO SOLVE WORD PROBLEMS IN CHEMISTRY By David E. Goldberg, Brooklyn College 2001 / 231 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-136302-0 / MHID: 0-07-136302-5 Features Vivid, micro to macro art. [A Schaum Professional Publication] Introduction of math where applicable, on a need-to-know basis. This book is not a baby general chemistry textbook. Website: http://books.mcgraw-hill.com/cgi-bin/getbook.pl?isbn=007136 3025&adkey=W02003 CONTENTS All chapters begin with a scenario involving students in real-life situations. Chapter 1: Introduction. Chapter 2: Measurement. Chapter 3: Classical Laws of Chemical Combination. Chapter 4: Formula Calculations. Chapter 5: Stoichiometry. Chapter 6: Concentration Calculations. Chapter 7: Gas Laws. Chapter 8: Thermochemistry. Chapter 9: Electrochemistry. Chapter 10: Equilibrium. Chapter 11: Colligative Properties. Chapter 12: Thermodynamics. Chapter 13: Miscellaneous Problems. List of Important Equations. 3,000 SOLVED PROBLEMS IN CHEMISTRY By David E. Goldberg, Brooklyn College 1988 / 624 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-023684-4 / MHID: 0-07-023684-4 This textbook will take a conceptual approach, teaching the chemistry first and the mathematics later. Contents Chapter 1 Matter and Energy Chapter 2 Atoms, Ions, and the Periodic Table Chapter 3 Chemical Compounds Chapter 4 Chemical Composition Chapter 5 Chemical Reactions and Equations Chapter 6 Quantities in Chemical Reactions Chapter 7 Electron Structure of the Atom Chapter 8 Chemical Bonding Chapter 9 The Gaseous State Chapter 10 The Liquid and Solid States Chapter 11 Solutions Chapter 12 Reaction Rates and Chemical Equilibrium Chapter 13 Acids and Bases Chapter 14 Oxidation-Reduction Reactions Chapter 15 Nuclear Chemistry Chapter 16 Organic Chemistry Appendix A Useful Reference Information Appendix B Toolboxes Appendix C Answers to Practice Problems Appendix D Answers to Selected Questions and Problems Glossary Index [A Schaum Professional Publication] Website: http://books.mcgraw-hill.com/cgi-bin/getbook.pl?isbn=007023 6844&adkey=W02003 This powerful problem-solver gives you 3,000 problems in chemistry, fully solved step-by-step! From Schaum’s, the originator of the solved-problem guide, and students’ favorite with over 30 million study guides sold his timesaver helps you master every type of general chemistry problem that you will face in your homework and on your tests, from basic units to coordination compounds. Work the problems yourself, then check the answers, or go directly to the answers you need with a complete index. Compatible with any classroom text, Schaum’s 3000 Solved Problems in Chemistry is so complete it’s the perfect tool for graduate or professional exam review! International Edition New FUNDAMENTALS OF CHEMISTRY 5th Edition By David Goldberg, Brooklyn College 2007 (May 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322104-5 / MHID: 0-07-322104-X ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326769-2 / MHID: 0-07-326769-4 (with ARIS Instructor Access Kit) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110842-3 / MHID: 0-07-110842-4 [IE with ARIS Card] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/goldberg Prep/Basic Chemistry Textbooks International Edition New CONCEPTUAL INTRODUCTION CHEMISTRY By Rich Bauer, James Birk and Pamela S Marks of Arizona State University-Tempe 2007 (Jan 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322106-9 / MHID: 0-07-322106-6 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110794-5 / MHID: 0-07-110794-0 [IE] Website: http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/0072857684 A Conceptual Introduction to Chemistry by Bauer/Birk/Marks offers today’s student a fresh perspective to the introduction of chemistry. This new textbook offers a conceptual approach to chemistry by starting first with macroscopic phenomena, and then presenting the underlying microscopic detail. Each chapter opens with a real-life scenario that helps students connect abstract chemical concepts to their own lives. The math found in A Conceptual Introduction to Chemistry is introduced on a need-to-know basis, with “Math Toolboxes” ending each chapter, in support of the math skills required in that chapter. Designed for the one-semester preparatory chemistry course, the new, fifth edition of Fundamentals of Chemistry provides students with a solid foundation in problem solving for all the topic areas covered in a standard general chemistry course. The author not only provides a clear consistent methodology to help students develop conceptual and quantitative problem-solving skills, but also engages students by using analogies that relate chemistry to everyday life. Students who need help with mathematical manipulations, as well as reading and writing scientific material, will find Goldberg’s text an excellent learning tool. NEW TO THIS EDITION • NEW CHAPTER 17: ELECTROCHEMISTRY provides students with more detailed coverage of this topic so they are well-prepared for future courses. FEATURES • Proven methodology to teaching chemistry: - Use of real world problems (use of analogies and conceptual problems) engages students in the topic of study. - Dimensional analysis is integrated as a key element for helping students to translate word problems into algebraic expressions. - Various problem-solving methods are introduced (in-chapter; self-tutorial; end-of-chapter problems by topic; end-of-chapter general problems), each designed to challenge students to think logically. • Proven methodology to helping students learn chemistry: 73 HED 2007 Chemistry.indd 73 9/29/2006 1:14:15 PM Chemistry - Organizing the readers’ thoughts (chapter outlines, learning objectives; review clues, problem-solving flow diagrams). - Tools to learning (worked examples; stop and review sections; key tables and illustrations). - Summarizing what they have learned (Snapshot Reviews after each section, Chapter Summaries; Items for Special Attention, Self-Tutorial Problems). • Solid ancillary package, written by the author himself: - For the student: Online Learning Center, ChemSkill Builder, How to Study Science, 3000 Solved Problems in Chemistry. - For the instructor: Instructor’s Manual and Solution Manual, Instructor Testing and Resource CD-ROM, Digital Content Manager CD-ROM, ChemSkill Builder. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Basic Concepts Chapter 2: Measurement Chapter 3: Atoms and Atomic Masses Chapter 4: Electronic Configuration of the Atom Chapter 5: Chemical Bonding Chapter 6: Nomenclature Chapter 7: Formula Calculations Chapter 8: Chemical Reactions Chapter 9: Net Ionic Equations Chapter 10: Stoichiometry Chapter 11: Molarity Chapter 12: Gases Chapter 13: Atomic and Molecular Properties Chapter 14: Solids and Liquids, Energies of Physical and Chemical Changes Chapter 15: Solutions Chapter 16: Oxidation Numbers Chapter 17: Chemical Equilibrium Chapter 18: Acid-Base Theory Chapter 19: Organic Chemistry Chapter 20: Nuclear Reactions Supplements SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE BEGINNING CHEMISTRY By David E. Goldberg, Brooklyn College 2004 (Oct 2003) / 144 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-142239-0 / MHID: 0-07-142239-0 [A Schaum Professional Publication] What could be better than the bestselling Schaum’s Outline series? For students looking for a quick nuts-and-bolts overview, it would have to be Schaum’s Easy Outline series. Every book in this series is a pared-down, simplified, and tightly focused version of its predecessor. With an emphasis on clarity and brevity, each new title features a streamlined and updated format and the absolute essence of the subject, presented in a concise and readily understandable form. » Graphic elements such as sidebars, reader-alert icons, and boxed highlights stress selected points from the text, illuminate keys to learning, and give students quick pointers to the essentials. » Designed to appeal to underprepared students and readers turned off by dense text » Cartoons, sidebars, icons, and other graphic pointers get the material across fast » Concise text focuses on the essence of the subject International Edition CHEMISTRY A First Course, 3rd Edition By Jacqueline I Kroshwitz, formerly of Kean College of New Jersey, Melvin Winokur, formerly of Bloomfield College and A Bryan Lees, Kean College of New Jersey 1995 / 640 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-697-27282-9 / MHID: 0-697-27282-6 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-697-23660-9 / MHID: 0-697-23660-9 (with Student Study Art Notebook, Mandatory Package) (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-697-32799-4 / MHID: 0-697-32799-X (Extended Version) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-114453-7 / MHID: 0-07-114453-6 [IE] » Deliver expert help from teachers who are authorities in their fields » Perfect for last-minute test preparation So small and light that they fit in a backpack! COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog. Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com 74 HED 2007 Chemistry.indd 74 9/29/2006 1:14:15 PM Chemistry Allied Health / Nursing Chemistry (General,Organic and Biochemistry) Textbooks New FOUNDATIONS OF GENERAL, ORGANIC AND BIOCHEMISTRY By Katherine Denniston and Joseph Topping of Towson University 2008 (January 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331183-8 / MHID: 0-07-331183-9 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331531-7 / MHID: 0-07-331531-1 (with ARIS Instructor’s Access Guide) This new Foundations of General, Organic, and Biochemistry is designed to help undergraduate health-related majors, and students of all other majors, understand key concepts and appreciate the significant connections between chemistry, health, disease, and the treatment of disease. Foundations, just like its parent text, strikes a balance between theoretical and practical chemistry, while emphasizing material that is unique to health-related studies. Foundations of General, Organic and Biochemistry is designed for the one semester allied health chemistry course. This text has an easy-to-follow problem-solving approach, vivid illustrations, and engaging applications including timely “Chemistry at the Crime Scene” applications with “For Further Understanding” questions that follow to help the students think through what they just read. The art program, engaging and thought provoking questions, problems, and discussion topics, is what will make this book appealing to students and instructors alike. FEATURES • Denniston’s new Foundations of General, Organic and Biochemistry textbook will feature macroscopic and molecular views of a process, so students can learn to connect these two levels of reality with each other. • Denniston’s new Foundations will have a complete ARIS electronic homework site that will contain in-chapter and end-of-chapter problems from the text and an online gradebook. • Clear and Effective Approach to Problem Solving In-Chapter Examples, Solutions, and Problems: Each chapter includes examples that show the student, step by step, precisely how to properly determine the correct answer. Whenever possible, the solved examples are followed by in-text problems that allow the students to test their mastery of information and to build self-confidence. In-Chapter and End-of Chapter Problems: The authors have created a wide variety of paired concept problems. The answers to the odd-numbered questions will be found in the back of the book as reinforcement for the students as they develop problem-solving skills. However, the students must then be able to apply the same principles to the related even-numbered problems. Critical Thinking Problems: Each chapter includes a set of critical thinking problems. These problems are intended to challenge the students to integrate concepts to solve more complex problems. They make a perfect complement to the classroom lecture since they provide an opportunity for in-class discussion of complex problems dealing with daily life and the health care sciences • Engaging Applications! Connections: Clinical, Medical, Human and Chemistry at the Scene Connections are found throughout every chapter of the book. The Medical, Clinical, Human and Chemistry at the Scene Connections provide updated information in various health fields and other growing areas of chemistry to engage students’ interest and help them understand chemistry as related to their lives. Learning Goal Icons: To help alert the student to the important concepts covered in the text, an icon is placed next to the textual material that supports the learning goal. Integration of Chemistry in all Disciplines: The emphasis in this text is on integration of general, organic, and biochemistry to help students understand the interrelatedness of these sub-disciplines. Students need to understand that chemistry is not divided into separate areas but is one interconnected discipline. Margin notes demonstrate the relationships between the areas. CONTENTS 1. Chemistry: Methods and Measurement 2. The Structure of the Atom and the Periodic Table 3. Structure and Properties of Ionic and Covalent Compounds 4. Calculations and the Chemical Equation 5. Energy, Rate, and Equilibrium 6. States of Matter: Gases, Liquids, and Solids 7. Solutions 8. Acids and Bases 9. The Nucleus and Radioactivity 10. An Introduction to Organic Chemistry: The Saturated Hydrocarbons 11. The Unsaturated Hydrocarbons: Alkenes, Alkynes, and Aromatics 12. Oxygen- and Sulfur Containing Organic Compounds 13. Carboxylic Acids, Esters, Amines, and Amides 14. Carbohydrates 15. Lipids and their Functions in Biochemical Systems 16. Protein Structure and Enzymes 17. Introduction to Molecular Genetics 18. Carbohydrate Metabolism 19. Fatty Acid and Amino Acid Metabolism International Edition New GENERAL, ORGANIC AND BIOCHEMISTRY 5th Edition By Katherine J. Denniston and Joseph J. Topping of Towson University, Robert L Caret, San Jose State University 2007 (Nov 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322107-6 / MHID: 0-07-322107-4 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110795-2 / MHID: 0-07-110795-9 [IE with ARIS Card] Website: http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/0072828471 The fifth edition of General, Organic, and Biochemistry is designed to help undergraduate health-related majors, and students of all other majors, understand key concepts and appreciate the significant connections between chemistry, health, disease, and the treatment of disease. This text continues to strike a balance between theoretical and practical chemistry, while emphasizing material that is unique to health-related studies. Designed for the one- or two-semester course, the text has an easy-to-follow problem-solving pedagogy, vivid illustrations, and engaging applications. The updating of the art program throughout, along with many new questions, problems, and discussion topics, continues to make this book appealing to students and instructors alike. New to this edition New micro-to-macro art! Denniston’s textbook will feature macroscopic and molecular views of a process, so students can learn to connect these two levels of reality with each other. Art program has been updated throughout. Approximately 220 full-color illustrations have been revised for this edition, in addition to over 30 new illustrations and 50 new photos, to help students better understand difficult concepts. In many cases, illustrations have been redrawn to be more realistic, and have been color-enhanced. New Electronic Homework Program for GOB! GOB Zone will contain in-chapter and end-of-chapter problems from the text and an online gradebook. 75 HED 2007 Chemistry.indd 75 9/29/2006 1:14:15 PM Chemistry Additional Questions and Problems have been added in every chapter. and problems have been organized to reflect different levels of student understanding, and the number of problems has been increased. Each chapter contains new additional problems for students, for a total of over 500 new problems in the Fifth Edition. These questions are now separated into sections for Foundations and Applications. “Foundations” include fundamentals and drill problems. “Applications” require the students to use the basic course content to solve more complex problems. Contents Features Clear and effective approach to problem solving: Each chapter includes examples that show the student, step-by-step, precisely how to properly determine the correct answer. Whenever possible, the solved examples are followed by in-text problems that allow the students to test their mastery of information and to build self-confidence. In-chapter and end-of chapter problems: The authors have created a wide variety of paired concept problems. The answers to the odd-numbered questions will be found in the back of the book as reinforcement for students as they develop problem-solving skills. The students must then be able to apply the same principles to the related even-numbered paired problems. Part 1 General Chemistry Chapter 1 Chemistry: Methods and Measurement Chapter 2 The Structure of the Atom and the Periodic Table Chapter 3 Structure and Properties of Ionic and Covalent Compounds Chapter 4 Calculations and the Chemical Equation Chapter 5 States of Matter: Gases, Liquids, and Solids Chapter 6 Reactions and Solutions Chapter 7 Energy, Rate, and Equilibrium Chapter 8 Acids and Bases and Oxidation-Reduction Chapter 9 The Nucleus, Radioactivity, and Nuclear Medicine Part 2 Organic Chemistry Chapter 10 An Introduction to Organic Chemistry: The Saturated Hydrocarbons Chapter 11 The Unsaturated Hydrocarbons: Alkenes, Alkynes, and Aromatics Chapter 12 Alcohols, Phenols, Thiols, and Ethers Chapter 13 Aldehydes and Ketones Chapter 14 Carboxylic Acids and Carboxylic Acid Derivatives Chapter 15 Amines and Amides Part 3 Biochemistry Chapter 16 Carbohydrates Chapter 17 Lipids and Their Functions in Biochemical Systems Chapter 18 Protein Structure and Function Chapter 19 Enzymes Chapter 20 Introduction to Molecular Genetics Chapter 21 Carbohydrate Metabolism Chapter 22 Aerobic Respiration and Energy Production Chapter 23 Fatty Acid Metabolism Critical Thinking Problems: Each chapter includes a set of critical thinking problems. These problems are intended to challenge the students to integrate concepts to solve more complex problems. They make a perfect complement to the classroom lecture, since they provide an opportunity for in-class discussion of complex problems dealing with daily life and the health care sciences. Engaging Applications! Perspectives: Added eleven new Clinical, Medical and Human Perspectives throughout the book. The Medical, Clinical, Human and Environmental Perspectives provide updated information in various health fields and other growing areas of chemistry to engage students’ interest and help them understand chemistry as related to their lives. Learning Goal Icons: To help alert the student to the important concepts covered in the text, an icon is placed next to the textual material that supports the learning goal. Integration of Chemistry in all Disciplines: The emphasis in this text is on integration of general, organic, and biochemistry to help students understand the interrelatedness of these sub-disciplines. Students need to understand that chemistry is not divided into separate areas but is one interconnected discipline. Margin notes demonstrate the relationships between the areas. Lab Manuals Dynamic Visual Program Illustrations: Each chapter is amply illustrated using figures, tables, and chemical formulas. All of these illustrations are carefully annotated for clarity. Color-Coding Scheme: Because it is difficult for students to understand the chemical changes that occur in complex reactions, the authors have color-coded the reactions so that chemical groups being added or removed in a reaction can be quickly recognized. Spartan models: The students’ ability to understand the geometry and three-dimensional structure of molecules is essential to the understanding of organic and biochemical reactions. This text has used WaveFunction Inc. cutting edge molecular modeling software, Spartan, to render many of the molecules in the text. The text’s website has been expanded. The Online Learning Center website now includes the former textbook appendices providing crossreferences to the website in the text, allowing more effective use of the website in conjunction with the text material. In addition, interactive learning exercises, animations, web links, and math tutorials have been added to this Online Learning Center. New LABORATORY MANUAL BY HENDRICKSON TO ACCOMPANY GENERAL, ORGANIC & BIOCHEMISTRY 5th Edition By Charles H Hendrickson, Western Kentucky University 2007 (Oct 2005) / 400 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282848-1 / MHID: 0-07-282848-X CONTENTS I. General Laboratory Procedures and Laboratory Safety II. Basic Concepts, Measurement, and Properties 1 Measurement and Density 2 Preparing Graphs 3 The Identification of an Unknown Liquid III. Chemical Separations 4 Elements, Compounds, and Mixtures 5 Separation Using Chromatographic Techniques IV. Chemical Formulas, Equations, Mass Relationships, and Structure 6 Hydrates and the Determination of the Formula of a Hydrate 7 Simple Chemical Reactions 8 Analysis of a KClO3-KCl Mixture 9 The Structure of Covalent Molecules and Polyatomic Ions V. The Chemical Behavior of Elements 10 An Activity Series of Several Metals 11 The Preparation and Properties of Oxygen and the Properties of Oxides VI. The Gas Laws 12 Boyle’s Law and Charles’ Law 13 The Combined Gas Law and Dalton’s Law VII. Acid-Base Chemistry 14 Acid-Base Titrations 15 Acids, Bases, pH, Hydrolysis, and Buffers VIII. Organic and Biochemistry 16 The Structure of Hydrocarbons 17 Properties of Hydrocarbons 18 The Synthesis of Aspirin 19 The Properties and Preparation of Esters and Soaps 20 Alcohols 21 Aldehydes and Ketones 22 Organic Functional Group Tests 23 The Detection of Fats, Proteins, and Carbohydrates in Foods 24 The Characterization of Carbohydrates 25 Enzyme Action 26 Analysis of Proteins and Amino Acids by Chromatography 27 Digestion Appendixes A: Vapor Pressure of Water at Several Temperatures B: Concentration of Common Acids and Bases C: Values of Physical Constants D: The Metric Prefixes E: Conversion Factors F: An Introduction to Chemical Nomenclature G: Significant Figures and Rounding Numbers H: The Solubility Rules I: Using Excel to Prepare Straight-Line Graphs / Periodic Table (inside front cover) Substantial revision has been made to the content of specific chapters. In response to reviewers’ comments, chapters have been updated for content and perspectives; art has been enhanced in all chapters; 76 HED 2007 Chemistry.indd 76 9/29/2006 1:14:15 PM Chemistry Supplements International Edition SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF GENERAL, ORGANIC AND BIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY By George Odian, and Ira Blei of College of Staten Island, CUNY 1994 / 512 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-047609-7 / MHID: 0-07-047609-8 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113529-0 / MHID: 0-07-113529-4 [IE] [A Schaum Professional Publication] (International Edition is not available for sale in Japan) If you want top grades and excellent understanding of general, organic and biological chemistry, this powerful study tool is the best tutor you can have! It takes you step-by-step through the subject and gives you accompanying related problems with fully worked solutions. You also get hundreds of additional problems to solve on your own, working at your own speed. This superb Outline clearly presents every aspect of general, organic and biological chemistry. Famous for their clarity, wealth of illustrations and examples, and lack of dreary minutia, SchaumÕs Outlines have sold more than 30 million copies worldwide. Compatible with any textbook, this Outline is also perfect for self-study. For better grades in courses covering general, organic and biological chemistry, and invaluable preparation for careers in the health professions and you can do better than this Schaum’s Outline! General Chemistry Textbooks International Edition New GENERAL CHEMISTRY The Essential Concepts, 5th Edition By Raymond Chang, Williams College 2008 (March 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331185-2 / MHID: 0-07-331185-5 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110226-1 / MHID: 0-07-110226-4 [IE] The fifth edition of General Chemistry continues the tradition of presenting only the material that is essential for a one-year general chemistry course. It strikes a balance between theory and application by incorporating real-world examples; helping students visualize the three-dimensional atomic and molecular structures that are the basis of chemical activity; and developing problem-solving and critical thinking skills. Although the fifth edition incorporates many new features, such as macro to micro artwork, six new animations correlated to the text, and the addition of new hand-sketched worked examples, General Chemistry is still 200 to 300 pages shorter and much less expensive than other two-semester textbooks. Dr. Chang’s concise-but-thorough approach will appeal to efficiency-minded instructors and value-conscious students. NEW TO THIS EDITION • Electronic Homework. McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is an online, electronic homework and course management system which is designed for greater power, flexibility, and ease of use than any other system. Whether you are looking for a “ready-to-use-straight-out-of- the-box” system or one in which you can customize to fit your specific course needs, ARIS is the solution. Go to www.aris.mhhe.com to learn more. • Accurate Chemical Models. New Molecular Images which can be found in the text’s line art, figures of molecular reactions, and underlining an equation, were created using the Spartan software. FEATURES • Clear Examples. All of the worked examples assist students with step-by-step processes. Additional hand-worked examples show students how a scientist would work out a problem (sometimes called the back-of-the-envelope calculations.) • Macro to Micro Undertstanding. Macroscopic to microscopic art pieces allow students to see “zoom in” on real-life examples of chemical reactions. CONTENTS 1 Introduction 2 Atoms, Molecules, and Ions 3 Stoichiometry 4 Reactions in Aqueous Solutions 5 Gases 6 Energy Relationships in Chemical Reactions 7 The Electronic Structure of Atoms 8 The Periodic Table 9 Chemical Bonding I: The Covalent Bond 10 Chemical Bonding II: Molecular Geometry and Hybridization of Atomic Orbitals 11 Introduction to Organic Chemistry 12 Intermolecular Forces and Liquids and Solids 13 Physical Properties of Solutions 14 Chemical Kinetics 15 Chemical Equilibrium 16 Acids and Bases 17 Acid-Base Equilibria and Solubility Equilibria 18 Thermodynamics 19 Redox Reactions and Electrochemistry 20 The Chemistry of Coordination Compounds 21 Nuclear Chemistry 22 Organic Polymers--Synthetic and Natural / Appendix 1 Units for the Gas Constant Appendix 2 Selected Thermodynamic Data at 1 atm and 25 degrees Centigrade Appendix 3 Mathematical Operations Appendix 4 The Elements and the Derivation of Their Names and Symbols International Edition New CHEMISTRY 9th Edition By Raymond Chang, Williams College 2007 (June 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322103-8 / MHID: 0-07-322103-1 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110792-1 / MHID: 0-07-110792-4 [IE] Website: http://highered.mcgraw-hill/sites/0072980605 Designed for the two-semester general chemistry course, Chang’s best-selling textbook continues to take a traditional approach and is often considered a student and teacher favorite. The book features a straightforward, clear writing style and proven problem-solving strategies. It continues the tradition of providing a firm foundation in chemical concepts and principles while presenting a broad range of topics in a clear, concise manner. The new edition of Chemistry continues to strike a balance between theory and application by incorporating real examples and helping students visualize the three-dimensional atomic and molecular structures that are the basis of chemical activity. An integral part of the text is to develop students’ problem-solving and critical thinking skills. A hallmark of the ninth edition is the integration of many tools designed to inspire both students and instructors. The textbook is a foundation for the unparalleled, effective technology that is integrated throughout. The multimedia package for the new edition stretches students beyond the confines of the traditional textbook. New to this edition New GenchemZone--our newest electronic homework program contains algorithmically-generated problems, feedback and solutions in response to incorrect answers, a molecular drawing component and a comprehensive gradebook. 77 HED 2007 Chemistry.indd 77 9/29/2006 1:14:15 PM Chemistry Approximately 20% new end-of-chapter problems have been added. These problems continue to be categorized into various topics and difficulty levels. New Molecular Images created using the Spartan software for chemical accuracy of models. You will see the images in line art, figures of molecular reactions and underlining an equation. New “Chemistry in Action” essays have been added. New “Chemical Mystery” have been added. Features Each chapter opening page has an Interactivity Summary List for the accompanying media. All of the worked examples have been revised to give the student more help in the step by step processes. Statement of problem, Strategy, Solution, Check. Additional hand-worked examples show students what a scientist would do as he/she works out a problem (sometimes called the backof-the-envelope calculations). Revised art program now includes macroscopic to microscopic art pieces. These pieces allow students to see real life examples and to zoom in to see what is occurring chemically in a specific reaction. Contents 1 Chemistry: The Study of Change 2 Atoms, Molecules, and Ions 3 Mass Relationships in Chemical Reactions 4 Reactions in Aqueous Solutions 5 Gases 6 Thermochemistry 7 Quantum Theory and the Electronic Structure of Atoms 8 Periodic Relationships Among the Elements 9 Chemical Bonding I: Basic Concepts 10 Chemical Bonding II: Molecular Geometry and Hybridization of Atomic Orbitals 11 Intermolecular Forces and Liquids and Solids 12 Physical Properties of Solutions 13 Chemical Kinetics 14 Chemical Equilibrium 15 Acids and Bases 16 Acid-Base Equilibria and Solubility Equilibria 17 Chemistry in the Atmosphere 18 Entropy, Free Energy, and Equilibrium 19 Electrochemistry 20 Metallurgy and the Chemistry of Metals 21 Nonmetallic Elements and Their Compounds 22 Transition Metal Chemistry and Coordination Compounds 23 Nuclear Chemistry 24 Organic Chemistry 25 Synthetic and Natural Organic Polymers / Appendices 1 Derivation of the Names of Elements 2 Units for the Gas Constant 3 Thermodynamic Data at 1 atm and 25 degrees C 4 Mathematical Operations SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF COLLEGE CHEMISTRY 9th Edition By Jerome Rosenberg and Lawrence Epstein of University of Pittsburg and Peter Krieger, Palm Beach CC Eissey Campus 2007 (April 2007) / 400 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-147670-6 / MHID: 0-07-147670-9 International Edition New PRINCIPLES OF GENERAL CHEMISTRY By Martin Silberberg 2007 (Jan 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322105-2 / MHID: 0-07-322105-8 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110793-8 / MHID: 0-07-110793-2 [IE] Website: http//highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/0073107204 Silberberg’s Principles of General Chemistry offers students the same authoritative topic coverage as his 4th edition textbook while appealing to today’s efficiency-minded and value-conscious instructors and students. Principles allows for succinct coverage of content with minimal emphasis on pedagogic learning aids. This new approach offers a more straightforward approach to learning the core principles without sacrificing depth, clarity, or rigor. Features This is a shorter textbook! For any instructor who has felt that Silberberg’s text was too much, this will be the perfect book. We will retain the same writing style and ground-breaking artwork. However, this will be a shorter, cleaner textbook. This text will have a very clean design. It will be void of all margin notes and most margin artwork. Less Expensive than most textbooks. This textbook will be approximately $12 less expensive than most books on the market. Contents 1 Keys To The Study Of Chemistry 2 The Components Of Matter 3 Stoichiometry Of Formulas And Equations 4 The Major Classes Of Chemical Reactions 5 Gases And The Kinetic-Molecular Theory 6 Thermochemistry: Energy Flow And Chemical Change 7 Quantum Theory And Atomic Structure 8 Electron Configuration And Chemical Periodicity 9 Models Of Chemical Bonding 10 The Shapes Of Molecules 11 Theories Of Covalent Bonding 12 Intermolecular Forces: Liquids, Solids, And Phase Changes 13 The Properties Of Mixtures: Solutions And Colloids 14 The Main-Group Elements: Applying Principles Of Bonding And Structure 15 Organic Compounds And The Atomic Properties Of Carbon 16 Kinetics: Rates And Mechanisms Of Chemical Reactions 17 Equilibrium: The Extent Of Chemical Reactions 18 Acid-Base Equilibria 19 Ionic Equilibria In Aqueous Systems 20 Thermodynamics: Entropy, Free Energy, And The Direction Of Chemical Reactions 21 Electrochemistry: Chemical Change And Electrical Work 22 The Transition Elements And Their Coordination Compounds 23 Nuclear Reactions And Their Applications Appendix A Common Mathematical Operations In Chemistry Appendix B Standard Thermodynamic Values For Selected Substances At 298 K Appendix C Equilibrium Constants At 298 K Appendix D Standard Electrode (Half-Cell) Potentials At 298 K Appendix E Answers To Selected Problems Glossary [A Schaum Professional Publication] The best and most up-to-date study guide of its kind, this book summarizes the chemical principles of a first course in college chemistry through problems with clearly explained solutions. This new edition reflects changes in the major current textbooks, and it contains up-to-date information about newer techniques used in environmental chemistry, biochemistry and medicinal chemistry. INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg 78 HED 2007 Chemistry.indd 78 9/29/2006 1:14:16 PM Chemistry International Edition CHEMISTRY The Molecular Nature of Matter and Change, 4th Edition By Martin Silberberg 2006 (Jan 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310169-9 / MHID: 0-07-310169-9 (with OLC Password Card) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111659-6 / MHID: 0-07-111659-1 [IE] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/silberberg Chemistry: The Molecular Nature of Matter and Change by Martin Silberberg has become a favorite among faculty and students. Silberberg’s 4th edition contains features that make it the most comprehensive and relevant text for any student enrolled in General Chemistry. The text contains unprecedented macroscopic to microscopic molecular illustrations, consistent step-by-step worked exercises in every chapter, an extensive range of end-of-chapter problems which provide engaging applications covering a wide variety of freshman interests, including engineering, medicine, materials, and environmental studies. All of these qualities make Chemistry: The Molecular Nature of Matter and Change the centerpiece for any General Chemistry course. CONTENTS 1 Keys to the Study of Chemistry 1.1 Some Fundamental Definitions 1.2 Chemical Arts and the Origins of Modern Chemistry 1.3 The Scientific Approach: Developing a Model 1.4 Chemical Problem Solving 1.5 Measurement in Scientific Study 1.6 Uncertainty in Measurement: Significant Figures 2 The Components of Matter 2.1 Elements, Compounds, and Mixtures: An Atomic Overview 2.2 The Observations That Led to an Atomic View of Matter 2.3 Dalton’s Atomic Theory 2.4 The Observations That Led to the Nuclear Atom Model 2.5 The Atomic Theory Today 2.6 Elements: A First Look at the Periodic Table 2.7 Compounds: Introduction to Bonding 2.8 Compounds: Formulas, Names, and Masses 2.9 Mixtures: Classification and Separation 3 Stoichiometry of Formulas and Equations 3.1 The Mole 3.2 Determining the Formula of an Unknown Compound 3.3 Writing and Balancing Chemical Equations 3.4 Calculating Amounts of Reactant and Product 3.5 Fundamentals of Solution Stoichiometry 4 The Major Classes of Chemical Reactions 4.1 The Role of Water as a Solvent 4.2 Writing Equations for Aqueous Ionic Reactions 4.3 Precipitation Reactions 4.4 Acid-Base Reactions 4.5 Oxidation-Reduction (Redox) Reactions 4.6 Elements in Redox Reactions 4.7 Reversible Reactions: An Introduction to Chemical Equilibrium 5 Gases and the Kinetic-Molecular Theory 5.1 An Overview of the Physical States of Matter 5.2 Gas Pressure and Its Measurement 5.3 The Gas Laws and Their Experimental Foundations 5.4 Further Applications of the Ideal Gas Law 5.5 The Ideal Gas Law and Reaction Stoichiometry 5.6 The Kinetic-Molecular Theory: A Model for Gas Behavior 5.7 Real Gases: Deviations from Ideal Behavior 6 Thermochemistry: Energy Flow and Chemical Change 6.1 Forms of Energy and Their Interconversion 6.2 Enthalpy: Heats of Reaction and Chemical Change 6.3 Calorimetry: Laboratory Measurement of Heats of Reaction 6.4 Stoichiometry of Thermochemical Equations 6.5 Hess’s Law of Heat Summation 6.6 Standard Heats of Reaction (¿Hrxn0) 7 Quantum Theory and Atomic Structure 7.1 The Nature of Light 7.2 Atomic Spectra 7.3 The Wave-Particle Duality of Matter and Energy 7.4 The Quantum-Mechanical Model of the Atom 8 Electron Configuration and Chemical Periodicity 8.1 Development of the Periodic Table 8.2 Characteristics of Many-Electron Atoms 8.3 The Quantum-Mechanical Model and the Periodic Table 8.4 Trends in Three Key Atomic Properties 8.5 Atomic Structure and Chemical Reactivity 9 Models of Chemical Bonding 9.1 Atomic Properties and Chemical Bonds 9.2 The Ionic Bonding Model 9.3 The Covalent Bonding Model 9.4 Bond Energy and Chemical Change 9.5 Between the Extremes: Electronegativity and Bond Polarity 9.6 An Introduction to Metallic Bonding 10 The Shapes of Molecules 10.1 Depicting Molecules and Ions with Lewis Structures 10.2 Valence-Shell Electron-Pair Repulsion (VSEPR) Theory and Molecular Shape 10.3 Molecular Shape and Molecular Polarity 11 Theories of Covalent Bonding 11.1 Valence Bond (VB) Theory and Orbital Hybridization 11.2 The Mode of Orbital Overlap and the Types of Covalent Bonds 11.3 Molecular Orbital (MO) Theory and Electron Delocalization 12 Intermolecular Forces: Liquids, Solids, and Phase Changes 12.1 An Overview of Physical States and Phase Changes 12.2 Quantitative Aspects of Phase Changes 12.3 Types of Intermolecular Forces 12.4 Properties of the Liquid State 12.5 The Uniqueness of Water 12.6 The Solid State: Structure, Properties, and Bonding 12.7 Advanced Materials 13 The Properties of Mixtures: Solutions and Colloids 13.1 Types of Solutions: Intermolecular Forces and Predicting Solubility 13.2 Intermolecular Forces and Biological Macromolecules 13.3 Energy Changes in the Solution Process 13.4 Solubility as an Equilibrium Process 13.5 Quantitative Ways of Expressing Concentration 13.6 Colligative Properties of Solutions 13.7 The Structure and Properties of Colloids Chemical Connections in Sanitary Engineering: Solutions and Colloids in Water Purification 14 Periodic Patterns in the MainGroup Elements: Bonding, Structure, and Reactivity 14.1 Hydrogen, the Simplest Atom 14.2 Trends Across the Periodic Table: The Period 2 Elements 14.3 Group 1A(1): The Alkali Metals 14.4 Group 2A(2): The Alkaline Earth Metals 14.5 Group 3A(13): The Boron Family 14.6 Group 4A(14): The Carbon Family 14.7 Group 5A(15): The Nitrogen Family 14.8 Group 6A(16): The Oxygen Family 14.9 Group 7A(17): The Halogens 14.10 Group 8A(18): The Noble Gases 15 Organic Compounds and the Atomic Properties of Carbon 15.1 The Special Nature of Carbon and the Characteristics of Organic Molecules 15.2 The Structures and Classes of Hydrocarbons 15.3 Some Important Classes of Organic Reactions 15.4 Properties and Reactivities of Common Functional Groups 15.5 The Monomer-Polymer Theme I: Synthetic Macromolecules 15.6 The Monomer-Polymer Theme II: Biological Macromolecules 16 Kinetics: Rates and Mechanisms of Chemical Reactions 16.1 Factors That Influence Reaction Rate 16.2 Expressing the Reaction Rate 16.3 The Rate Law and Its Components 16.4 Integrated Rate Laws: Concentration Changes over Time 16.5 The Effect of Temperature on Reaction Rate 16.6 Explaining the Effects of Concentration and Temperature 16.7 Reaction Mechanisms: Steps in the Overall Reaction 16.8 Catalysis: Speeding Up a Chemical Reaction 17 Equilibrium: The Extent of Chemical Reactions 17.1 The Dynamic Nature of the Equilibrium State 17.2 The Reaction Quotient and the Equilibrium Constant 17.3 Expressing Equilibria with Pressure Terms: Relation Between Kc and Kp 17.4 Reaction Direction: Comparing Q and K 17.5 How to Solve Equilibrium Problems 17.6 Reaction Conditions and the Equilibrium State: Le Châtelier’s Principle 18 Acid-Base Equilibria 18.1 Acids and Bases in Water 18.2 Autoionization of Water and the pH Scale 18.3 Proton Transfer and the Brønsted-Lowry Acid-Base Definition 18.4 Solving Problems Involving Weak-Acid Equilibria 18.5 Weak Bases and Their Relation to Weak Acids 18.6 Molecular Properties and Acid Strength 18.7 Acid-Base Properties of Salt Solutions 18.8 Generalizing the Brønsted-Lowry Concept: The Leveling Effect 18.9 Electron-Pair Donation and the Lewis Acid-Base Definition 19 Ionic Equilibria in Aqueous Systems 19.1 Equilibria of Acid-Base Buffer Systems 19.2 Acid-Base Titration Curves 19.3 Equilibria of Slightly Soluble Ionic Compounds 19.4 Equilibria Involving Complex Ions 19.5 Ionic Equilibria in Chemical Analysis 20 Thermodynamics: Entropy, Free Energy, and the Direction of Chemical Reactions 20.1 The Second Law of Thermodynamics: Predicting Spontaneous Change 20.2 Calculating the Change in Entropy of a Reaction 20.3 Entropy, Free Energy, and Work 20.4 Free Energy, Equilibrium, and Reaction Direction 21 Electrochemistry: Chemical Change and Electrical Work 21.1 Half-Reactions and Electrochemical Cells 21.2 Voltaic Cells: Using Spontaneous Reactions to Generate Electrical Energy 21.3 Cell Potential: Output of a Voltaic Cell 21.4 Free Energy and Electrical Work 21.5 Electrochemical Processes in Batteries 21.6 Corrosion: A Case of Environmental Electrochemistry 21.7 Electrolytic Cells: Using Electrical Energy to Drive Nonspontaneous Reactions 22 The Elements in Nature and Industry 22.1 How the Elements Occur in Nature 22.2 The Cycling of Elements Through the Environment 22.3 Metallurgy: Extracting a Metal from Its Ore 22.4 Tapping the Crust: Isolation and Uses of the Elements 22.5 Chemical Manufacturing: Two Case Studies 23 The Transition Elements and Their Coordination Compounds 23.1 Properties of the Transition Elements 23.2 The Inner Transition Elements 23.3 Highlights of Selected Transition Metals 23.4 Coordination Compounds 23.5 Theoretical Basis for the Bonding and Properties of Complexes 24 Nuclear Reactions and Their Applications 24.1 Radioactive Decay and Nuclear Stability 24.2 The Kinetics of Radioactive Decay 24.3 Nuclear Transmutation: Induced Changes in Nuclei 24.4 The Effects of Nuclear Radiation on Matter 24.5 Applications of Radioisotopes 24.6 The Interconversion of Mass and Energy 24.7 Applications of Fission and Fusion 79 HED 2007 Chemistry.indd 79 9/29/2006 1:14:16 PM Chemistry Supplements International Edition Chapter 13. Chemical Bonding Chapter 14. Acids and Bases Chapter 15. Solids Chapter 16. Liquids Chapter 17. Gases Chapter 18. Biochemistry, Nanotechnology, and the Future Test: Part Four / Final Exam / Answers to Quiz, Test and Exams Questions / References / Index UNDERSTANDING CHEMISTRY By Charles Lovett and Raymond Chang of Williams College 2005 (Jan 2004) / 208 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-255553-0 / MHID: 0-07-255553-X ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121595-4 / MHID: 0-07-121595-6 [IE] Website: http://www.understandingchemistry.com This is a supplement to accompany any of our General Chemistry titles. It is an easy to read guide written to help students with little or no background in chemistry. CONTENTS A User Friendly Guide to General Chemistry / In the Beginning / Building a Foundation / Chemical Reactions / Reactants to Products / Energy Changes in Chemical Reactions / Atomic Structure and the Periodic Table / Chemical Bonding / Chemical Equilibrium / Glossary DICTIONARY OF CHEMISTRY 2nd Edition By McGraw-Hill 2003 / 431 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141046-5 / MHID: 0-07-141046-5 [A Professional Reference Publication] CONTENTS Preface / Staff / How to Use the Dictionary / Fields and Their Scope / Pronunciation Key / A-Z Terms / Appendix SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINES: COLLEGE CHEMISTRY SCHAUM’S A-Z CHEMISTRY By Andrew Hunt 2004 / 400 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141935-2 / MHID: 0-07-141935-7 [A Schaum Professional Publication] Schaum’s A-Z handbooks make excellent complements to course textbooks and test preparation guides. Ideal for ambitious high school seniors--especially AP students--and college freshmen, they feature concise, thoroughly cross-referenced definitions of hundreds of key terms and phrases that help students quickly break through the jargon barrier. Clear explanations of key concepts, supplemented with lucid illustrations, help build mastery of theory and provide a ready reference to supplement class work. Each entry begins with a clear, one-sentence definition and is followed by an explanation and examples. By Jerome Rosenberg and Lawrence M. Epstein of University of Pittsburgh 2000 / 156 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-052714-8 / MHID: 0-07-052714-8 [A Schaum Professional Publication] CONTENTS Quantities and Units. / Moles and Empirical Formulas. / Calculations Based on Chemical Equations. / Concentration and Solution Stoichiometry. / The Ideal Gas Law and Kinetic Theory. / Thermochemistry. / Atomic Structure. / Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure. / Solids and Liquids. / Oxidation-Reduction. / Properties of Solutions. / Thermodynamics and Chemical Equilibrium. / Acids and Bases. / Precipitates and Complex Ions. / Electrochemistry. / Rates of Reactions. / Appendix: Table of Atomic Masses. A-to-Z format for ready reference Lab Clear definitions and explanations, cross-referenced and enhanced with numerous worked examples and illustrations Extended explanations of more important concepts Review lists of entries that relate to main topics in the Appendix aid review CHEMISTRY DEMYSTIFIED By Linda Williams 2003 / 280 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141011-3 / MHID: 0-07-141011-2 [A Professional Reference Publication] CONTENTS Preface Acknowledgments / Part 1: UNDERSTANDING MATTER Chapter 1. Scientific Method and Chemistry Chapter 2. Data and How to Study It Chapter 3. Properties of Matter Chapter 4. Elements, Symbols, and the Periodic Table Test: Part One Part 2: CHEMICAL BUILDING BLOCKS Chapter 5. Atoms, Elements, and Compounds Chapter 6. Electron Configurations Chapter 7. Concentration and Molarity Chapter 8. The Hydrogen Atom Test: Part Two Part 3: ELEMENTS, GROUPS, AND BEHAVIOR Chapter 9. Atomic Number and Ions Chapter 10. Organic Chemistry and Functional Groups Chapter 11. Radiochemistry Chapter 12. Metals Test: Part Three Part 4: PROPERTIES AND REACTIONS COOPERATIVE CHEMISTRY LAB MANUAL 3rd Edition By Melanie M. Cooper, Clemson University 2006 (Feb 2005) / 160 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282846-7 / MHID: 0-07-282846-3 The laboratory course described in the lab manual emphasizes experimental design, data analysis, and problem solving. Inherent in the design is the emphasis on communication skills, both written and oral. Students work in groups on openended projects in which they are given an initial scenario and then asked to investigate a problem. There are no formalized instructions and students must plan and carry out their own investigations. Contents Section 1: Cooperative Chemistry: How and Why / To the Instructor / To the Student / Cooperative Learning / Conflict Management / Nature of the Course / Brief Outline of the Course / Resources / Safety Rules / Basic Laboratory Etiquette / NFPA Hazard Codes / Recording and Reporting Results / The Laboratory Notebook / Writing Lab Reports / Preliminary Report Guidelines / The Science Writing Heuristic / Sample Laboratory Report / Reporting Numerical Results / Graphing Data / Oral Report Guidelines / Section 2: Laboratory Equipment / Containers / Measuring Devices--Liquids / Measuring Devices--Solids / Transfer Devices / 80 HED 2007 Chemistry.indd 80 9/29/2006 1:14:16 PM Chemistry Support Devices / Heating Devices / Section 3: Laboratory Techniques / Preparing an Experiment / Dealing With Unknown Compounds / Solubility Tests / Analysis of Anions / Analysis of Cations / Microscale Techniques / Solution Techniques Filtration / Chromatography / Gravimetric Analysis / Boiling Points/Melting Points / Separation of Liquids and Solids / Recrystallization / Organic Chemistry / Section 4: Laboratory Instruments and Spectroscopy / Nuclear Magnetic Resonance (NMR) / Infra Red (IR) / Spectronic 20 Spectrophotometer / Color and Spectroscopy / pH Meters / Voltmeter / Conductivity Meter / Section 5: Projects / Project 1: Density / Project 2: Investigation of Chemiluminescence / Project 3: Concrete / Project 4: Finding the Relationship Between the Volume of a Gas and the Temperature / Project 5: Designing a Calcium Supplement / Project 6: Properties of Matter and Separations / Project 7: Acids and Bases / Project 8: Buffers / Project 9: White Powders / Project 10: Electrochemistry / Project 11: Identification, Properties and Synthesis of an Unknown Ionic Compound / Project 12: Hot and Cold / Project 13: Analysis of Colas / Project 14: Identification, Properties and Synthesis of an Unknown Organic Compound / Project 15: What Affects the Rate of a Reaction? / Glossary / Index HANDS ON CHEMISTRY LABORATORY MANUAL By Jeffrey A. Paradis 2006 (Jan 2005) / 384 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-253411-5 / MHID: 0-07-253411-7 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/paradis This lab manual offers a modern approach to the two semester general chemistry laboratory course. The manual contains over 37 labs that cover all of the topics commonly taught in the course. Each experiment contacts extensive background and procedure outlines to give students a solid conceptual background before completing the lab. CONTENTS 1. Alchemy and the Origins of Chemistry 2. An Investigation of the Properties of Some Common Metals: Why NASA Needs Chemistry 3. Measurement and Proper Use of Laboratory Glassware 4. Classification of Matter and Separating Mixtures 5. Chemical Nomenclature 1: Inorganic Compounds 6. Understanding the Basics: How Many Is a Mole? 7. Limiting Reactants 8. Electrolytes in Solution: A Conductivity Experiment 9. Precipitation Reactions: The Ion Drop Matrix 10. An Application of Redox Chemistry: The Breathalyzer 11. Introduction to Thermochemistry: Using a Calorimeter 12. Calorimetry II: Nutrition in a Nutshell 13. Calorimetry III: Hess’ Law 14. Electronic Structure of Atoms 15. A Determination of the Effectiveness of Sunscreens 16. An Exploration of the Chemistry Behind Cyanotype Photography 17. LDS and VSEPR: A Model Building Laboratory 18. Discovering the Gas Laws 19. The Molecular Weight of a Volatile Liquid 20. Gas Stoichiometry and the Automobile Airbag 21. Colligative Properties: Analysis of Freezing Point Depression 22. A Titration for the Determination of Ions in Water: The Hard Truth 23. Chemical Nomenclature II: Naming Basic Organic Compounds 24. Introduction to Organic Analysis: Infrared Spectroscopy 25. Spectrophotometric Analysis: Phophates in Water 26. Introduction to Kinetics: Factors Effecting the Rate of a Reaction 27. Determining the Rate Law: A Kinetics Study of the Iodination of Acetone 28. Amylase and Enzyme Catalysis 29. Determining the Equilibrium Constant of a Complex 30. LeChatelier’s Principle: “Stress Management” 31. Introduction to Acids and Bases 32. The Properties of Buffers: Resisting Change in a Turbulent World 33. Electrochemistry: Voltaic Cells and Their Applications Multimedia International Edition CHEMSKILL BUILDER ONLINE Version 2, 2nd Edition By James D Spain, Electronic Homework Systems, Inc and Hal Peters 2004 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-288264-3 / MHID: 0-07-288264-6 (Student’s Edition-Password Booklet) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125103-7 / MHID: 0-07-125103-0 [IE] ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298449-1 / MHID: 0-07-298449-X (Instructor’s Edition- Password Booklet) This incredible online tool contains more than 1500 algorithmically generated questions, each with tutorial feedback. There is a direct correlation between student time investment in this program and increased problem-solving ability. A record of student work is maintained in an online gradebook so that homework can be done at home, in a dorm room, or in a university lab. CONTENTS Unit 1. Introduction to Chemistry Unit 2. Units and Measurements Unit 3. Chemical Nomenclature Unit 4. Stoichiometry Unit 5. Chemical Reaction Unit 6. Molarity of Solution Unit 7. Properties of Gases Unit 8. Thermochemistry Unit 9. Atomic Structure Unit 10. Oxidation Reduction Unit 11. Periodic Properties Unit 12. Polyatomic Structures Unit 13. Covalent Bonding Section Unit 14. Liquids and Solids Unit 15. Properties of Solutions Unit 16. Chemical Kinetics Unit 17. Chemical Equilibria Unit 18. Acid-Base Equilibria Unit 19. Buffers and Hydrolysis S Unit 20. Solubility Equilibria Unit 21. Thermodynamics Unit 22. Electrochemistry Unit 23. Nuclear Chemistry Unit 24. Organic Chemistry Unit 25. Polymer Chemistry Biochemistry - 1 Semester Textbooks International Edition BIOCHEMISTRY An Introduction, 3rd Edition By Gertrude McKee, Thomas Jefferson University and James R McKee, Philadelphia College Pharmacy 2003 / 800 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-231592-9 / MHID: 0-07-231592-X ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112248-1 / MHID: 0-07-112248-6 [IE] Website: www.mhhe.com/mckee CONTENTS Part I: Fundamental Concepts 1 Biochemistry: An Introduction 2 Living Cells 3 Water: The Medium of Life 4 Energy Part II: Structures and Metabolism of Proteins, Carbohydrates, and Lipids 5 Amino Acids, Peptides, and Proteins 6 Enzymes 7 Carbohydrates 8 Carbohydrate Metabolism 9 Aerobic Metabolism I: Citric Acid Cycle and Electron Transport 10 Aerobic Metabolism II: Oxidative Phosphorylation and Oxidative Stress 11 Lipids and Membranes 12 Lipid Metabolism 13 Photosynthesis 14 Nitrogen Metabolism I: Synthesis 15 Nitrogen Metabolism II: Degradation 16 Integration of Metabolism Part III: Genetic Information Flow 17 Nucleic Acids 18 Genetic Information and Gene Expression 19 Protein Synthesis 81 HED 2007 Chemistry.indd 81 9/29/2006 1:14:16 PM Chemistry International Edition BASIC CONCEPTS IN BIOCHEMISTRY A Student’s Survival Guide, 2nd Edition By Hiram F. Gilbert, Baylor University College of Medicine 2000 / 331 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-135657-2 / MHID: 0-07-135657-6 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120182-7 / MHID: 0-07-120182-3 [IE] (A Professional Publication] CONTENTS Preface. / Prologue. / Chapter 1: Where to Start. / Chapter 2: Protein Structure. / Chapter 3: Membranes and Membrane Proteins. / Chapter 4: DNA-RNA Structure. / Chapter 5: Expression of Genetic Information. / Chapter 6: Recombinant-DNA Methodology. / Chapter 7: Enzyme Mechanism. / Chapter 8: EnzymeKinetics. / Chapter 9: Signal Transduction Pathways. / Chapter 10: Glycolysis and Gluconeogenesis. / Chapter 11: Glycogen Synthesis and Degradation. / Chapter 12: TCA Cycle. / Chapter 13: Fat Synthesis and Degradation. / Chapter 14: Electron Transport and Oxidative Phosphorylation. / Chapter 15: Pentose Phosphate Pathway. / Chapter 16: Amino Acid Metabolism. / Chapter 17: Integration of Energy Metabolism. / Chapter 18: UREA Cycle. / Chapter 19: Purine Metabolism. / Chapter 20: Pyrimidine Metabolism. / Chapter 21: One-Carbon Metabolism. / Chapter 22: Tracking Carbons. / Chapter 23: ph, pKa, Problems. / Chapter 24: Thermodynamics and Kinetics. / Appendix. / Glossary. / Index. Organic Chemistry - 1 Semester Textbooks ORGANIC CHEMISTRY DEMYSTIFIED By Daniel Bloch 2006 (March 2006) / 551pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-145920-4 / MHID: 0-07-145920-0 [A Schaum Professional Publication] There’s no easier, faster, or more practical way to learn the really tough subjects. Organic Chemistry Demystified follows the organization of standard organic chemistry courses and can also be used as a study guide for the MCAT (Medical College Admission Test) and DAT (Dental Admissions Testing) exams. This self-teaching guide comes complete with key points, background information, quizzes at the end of each chapter, and even a final exam. Simple enough for beginners but challenging enough for advanced students, this is a lively and entertaining brush-up, introductory text, or classroom supplement. FEATURES • Written in a style that enables readers to mentally visualize why molecules react the way they do • Chock-full of illustrations and chemical structures • Can be used as a study guide for the MCATs and/or DAT exam SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BIOCHEMISTRY 2nd Edition By Philip Kuchel, University of Sydney 1997 / 576 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-036149-2 / MHID: 0-07-036149-5 [A Schaum Professional Publication] This step-by-step outline steers you logically, expertly, and clearly through biochemistry. It can save you study time and helps you get better grades because it focuses on the core information you really need to know and avoids confusing, extraneous material that you don’t need! A question-and-answer format highlights the meaning of the material and helps you remember. Easy-to-read line drawings and diagrams make important structures and processes memorable. This new second edition features added sections on whole-body metabolism, enzyme kinetics, and new technologies for monitoring metabolic processes. Use this excellent study guide to help you ace your biochemistry course, study it alone as a complete biochemistry course, or use it for review before a standardized test it can cut your study hours as it moves you quickly from cell structure through protein synthesis. This is the study guide that makes biochemistry comprehensible the one whose first edition was chosen by 32,000 grateful students! • Questions and answers follow each chapter, and the book includes a final exam to help readers monitor their progress and comprehension of topics CONTENTS PREFACE / ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Chapter 1: Structure and Bonding Chapter 2: Families and Functional Groups Chapter 3: Acids and Bases Chapter 4: Alkanes and Cycloalkanes Chapter 5: Stereochemistry Chapter 6: Structure and Properties of Alkenes Chapter 7: Reaction Mechanisms Chapter 8: Reactions of Alkenes Chapter 9: Alkynes Chapter 10: Characterization Chapter 11: Organohalides Chapter 12: Nucleophilic Substitution and Elimination Reactions Chapter 13: Alcohols Chapter 14: Ethers Chapter 15: Sulfur Compounds Chapter 16: Conjugated Systems Chapter 17: Aromatic Compounds Chapter 18: Reactions of Benzene and other Aromatic Compounds Chapter 19: Aldehydes and Ketones Chapter 20: Carboxylic Acids Chapter 21: Derivatives and Carboxylic Acids Chapter 22: Alpha-Substitution Reactions in Carbonyl Compounds Chapter 23: Carbonyl Condensation Reactions QUIZ AND EXAM QUESTIONS / FINAL EXAM / BIBLIOGRAPHY /ABOUT THE AUTHOR / INDEX International Edition ORGANIC CHEMISTRY A Brief Course, 3rd Edition By Robert C Atkins, James Madison University 2002 / 608 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-231944-6 / MHID: 0-07-231944-5 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112162-0 / MHID: 0-07-112162-5 [IE] Website: www.mhhe.com/atkins-carey CONTENTS 1 Chemical Bonding 2 Alkanes and Cycloalkanes 3 Alcohols and Alkyl Halides 4 Alkenes and Alkynes I: Structure and Preparation 5 Alkenes and Alkynes II: Reactions 6 Aromatic Compounds 7 Stereochemistry 8 Nucleophilic Substitution 9 Free Radicals 10 Alcohols, Ethers, and Phenols 11 Aldehydes and Ketones 12 Carboxylic Acids 13 Carboxylic Acid Derivatives 14 Amines 15 Carbohydrates 16 Lipids 17 Amino Acids, Peptides, and Proteins 18 Nucleic Acids 19 Spectroscopy 82 HED 2007 Chemistry.indd 82 9/29/2006 1:14:16 PM Chemistry SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE: ORGANIC CHEMISTRY By Herbert Meislich, City College 2000 / 138 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-052718-8 / MHID: 0-07-052718-0 [A Schaum Professional Publication] Organic Chemistry- 2 Semester Textbooks CONTENTS Chapter 1: Structure and Properties. / Chapter 2: Reactivity and Reactions. / Chapter 3: Alkanes and Cycloalkanes. / Chapter 4: Stereochemistry. / Chapter 5: Alkenes, Alkynes, and Dienes. / Chapter 6: Alkyl Halides. / Chapter 7: Aromatic Compounds. / Chapter 8: Spectroscopy and Structure. / Chapter 9: Alcohols, Ethers, and Epoxides. / Chapter 10: Aldehydes and Ketones. / Chapter 11: Carboxylic Acids and Their Derivatives. / Chapter 12: Enolates and enols. / Chapter 13: Amines. / Chapter 14: Amino Acids, Peptides, Proteins. / Chapter 15: Carbohydrates and Nucleic Acids. / Index. New ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 7th Edition By Francis Carey, University of VA-Charlottesville 2008 (January 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331184-5 / MHID: 0-07-331184-7 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331529-4 / MHID: 0-07-331529-X (with ARIS Instructor QuickStart Guide) (International Edition is not for sale in Japan) Throughout all seven editions, Organic Chemistry has been designed to meet the needs of the “mainstream,” two-semester, undergraduate organic chemistry course. This best-selling text gives students a solid understanding of organic chemistry by stressing how fundamental reaction mechanisms function and reactions occur. With the addition of handwritten solutions, new cutting-edge molecular illustrations, updated spectroscopy coverage, seamless integration of molecular modeling exercises, and state-of-the-art multimedia tools, the 7th edition of Organic Chemistry clearly offers the most up-to-date approach to the study of organic chemistry. CONTENTS NEW TO THIS EDITION International Edition SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 3rd Edition By George Hademenos, University of Dallas 1999 / 464 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-134165-3 / MHID: 0-07-134165-X ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116598-3 / MHID: 0-07-116598-3 [IE] Structure and Properties of Organic Compounds:- 1 Bonding and Molecular Structure. 2 Chemical Reactivity and Organic Reactions. 3 Alkanes. 4 Stereochemistry. 5 Alkenes. 6 Alkyl Halides. 7 Alkynes and Dienes. 8 Cyclic Hydrocarbons. 9 Benzene and Polynuclear Aromatic Compounds. 10 Aromatic Substitution, Arenes. 11 Spectroscopy and Structure. 12 Alcohols and Thiols. 13 Ethers, Epoxides, Glycols, and Thioethers. 14 Carbonyl Compounds: Aldehydes and Ketones. 15 Carboxylic Acids and Their Derivatives. 16 Carbanion-Enolates and Enols. 17 Amines. 18 Phenolic Compounds. 19 Aromatic Heterocyclic Compounds. • NEW--MCAT Practice. A Descriptive Passage and related Interpretive Problems have been added to the end of each chapter. This new feature has been written to simulate the types of problems and questions that students will encounter when they take the MCAT test. • NEW--IR Spectra’s. Chapter 13 “Spectroscopy” has been revised to include a new discussion about Infrared Spectra and Characteristic Absorption Frequencies. There are 27 new IR spectra graphs in the book with 17 specifically located in Chapter 13. • NEW--Visual aids. 60 new photo’s and 18 new handwritten solutions (a popular feature of the sixth edition) have been added throughout the text. • NEW--Electronic Homework. McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is an online, electronic homework and course management system which is designed for greater power, flexibility, and ease of use than any other system. Whether you are looking for a “ready-to-use-straight-out-of- the-box” system or one in which you can customize to fit your specific course needs, ARIS is the solution. Go to www.aris.mhhe.com to learn more. CONTENTS COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog. Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com Chapter 1--Structure Determines Properties Chapter 2--Hydrocarbon Frameworks. Alkanes Chapter 3--Conformations of Alkanes and Cycloalkanes Chapter 4--Alcohols and Alkyl Halides Chapter 5--Structure and Preparation of Alkenes: Elimination Reactions Chapter 6--Reactions of Alkenes: Addition Reactions Chapter 7--Stereochemistry Chapter 8-Nucleophilic Substitution Chapter 9--Alkynes Chapter 10--Conjugation in alkadienes and Allylic Systems Chapter 11 -Arenes and Aromaticity Chapter 12 – Reactions of Arenes: Electrophilic Aromatic Substitution Chapter 13 -- Spectroscopy Chapter 14 -- Organometallic Compounds Chapter 15 – Alcohols, Diols and Thiols Chapter 16 – Ethers, Epoxides and Sulfides Chapter 17 – Aldehydes and Ketones: Nucleophilic Addition to the Carbonyl Group Chapter 18 – Enols and Enolates Chapter 19 – Carboxylic Acids Chapter 20 – Carboxylic Acid Derivates: Nucleophilic Acyl Substitution Chapter 21 – Ester Enolates Chapter 22 -- Amines Chapter 23 – Aryl Halides Chapter 24 -- Phenols Chapter 25 – Carbohydrates Chapter 26 -- Lipids Chapter 27 – Amino Acids, Peptides and Proteins Chapter 28 – Nucleosides, Nucleotides and Nucleic Acids Chapter 29 – Synthetic Polymers / Glossary / Credits / Index 83 HED 2007 Chemistry.indd 83 9/29/2006 1:14:17 PM Chemistry Lab Manuals New ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 2nd Edition By Janice Gorzynski Smith, University of Hawaii-Manoa 2008 (March 2007) / 1408 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304986-1 / MHID: 0-07-304986-7 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-332749-5 / MHID: 0-07-332749-2 (Mandatory Package) Smith’s Organic Chemistry continues to breathe new life into the organic chemistry world. This student and instructor reviewed, new 2nd edition presents information in the form of bulleted lists and tables; with minimal use of text paragraphs. Janice Smith saw a great need for stepped out worked examples; incorporated biological, medicinal, and environmental applications, and an art program that has yet to be seen in organic chemistry! A highlight of the art program includes the micro-to-macro art pieces that visually guide students to conceptually understand organic chemistry. Smith: Organic Chemistry is the text you need to see before making your organic chemistry decision. NEW TO THIS EDITION • Students and Instructors alike have commented on the GREAT summaries at the end of every chapter. • Two new chapters have been added to the second edition; Chapter 26--Carbon-Carbon Bond-Forming Reactions in Organic Synthesis and Chapter 30--Synthetic Polymers. FEATURES • Smith presents material in short, discrete bites of information keeping text paragraphs to a minimum. International Edition MICROSCALE AND MINISCALE ORGANIC CHEMISTRY LABORATORY EXPERIMENTS 2nd Edition By Allen M. Schoffstall and Barbara A. Gaddis of University of Colorado—Colorado Springs and Melvin L. Druelinger, University of Southern Colorado 2004 / 640 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294338-2 / MHID: 0-07-294338-6 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111016-7 / MHID: 0-07-111016-X [IE with OLC] Website: http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/0072424567 This book offers a comprehensive introductory treatment of the organic laboratory techniques for handling glassware and equipment, safety in the laboratory, micro- and miniscale experimental procedures, theory of reactions and techniques, relevant background information, applications and spectroscopy. CONTENTS 1 Techniques in the Organic Laboratory / 2 Spectroscopic Methods / 3 Introduction to Organic Compounds, Solvents, Separations and Recrystallizations / 4 Alcohols and Alkyl Halides / 5 Synthesis of Alkenes / 6 Alkene Addition Reactions / 7 Molecular Modeling and Stereochemistry / 8 Introduction to Nucleophilic Substitution Reactions / 9 Dienes and Conjugation / 10 Qualitative Organic Analysis I / 11 Reactions of Aromatic Sidechains / 12 Electrophilic Aromatic Substitution / 13 Combined Spectroscopy and Advanced Spectroscopy / 14 Organometallics / 15 Alcohols and Diols / 16 Ethers / 17 Aldehydes and Ketones / 18 Enols and Enolates / 19 Carboxylic Acids / 20 Carboxylic Acid Derivatives / 21 Multistep Preparations / 22 Amines / 23 Aryl Halides / 24 Phenols / 25 Carbohydrates / 26 Lipids / 27 Amino Acids and Proteins / 28 Qualitative Organic Analysis II / 29 Special Investigations • Great use of bulleted lists, numbered steps, outlines, charts, tables, figures, and diagrams. • Sample problems show students how to solve organic chemistry problems in a logical, stepwise manner. • Clear ties between biological and real-world applications [see Application sections throughout]. A must have concept for students entering the allied health industry. • Smith offers students the ultimate in illustrations including select micro-to-macro art throughout. CONTENTS Preface / Chapter 1 Structures and Bonding Chapter 2 Acids and Bases Chapter 3 Introduction to Organic Molecules and Functional Groups Chapter 4 Alkanes Chapter 5 Stereochemistry Chapter 6 Understanding Organic Reactions Chapter 7 Alkyl Halides and Nucleophilic Substitution Chapter 8 Alkyl Halides and Elimination Reactions Chapter 9 Alcohols, Ethers, and Epoxides Chapter 10 Alkenes Chapter 11 Alkynes Chapter 12 Oxidation and Reduction Chapter 13 Radical Reactions Chapter 14 Mass Spectrometry and Infrared Spectroscopy Chapter 15 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy Chapter 16 Conjugation, Resonance, and Dienes Chapter 17 Benzene and Aromatic Compounds Chapter 18 Electrophilic Aromatic Substitution Chapter 19 Carboxylic Acids and Acidity of the O¿H Bond Chapter 20 Introduction to Carbonyl Chemistry: Organometallic Reagents; Oxidation and Reduction Chapter 21 Aldehydes and Ketones—Nucleophilic Addition Chapter 22 Carboxylic Acids and Their Derivatives—Nucleophilic Acyl Substitution Chapter 23 Substitution Reactions of Carbonyl Compounds at the ¿-Carbon Chapter 24 Carbonyl Condensation Reactions Chapter 25 Amines Chapter 26 Carbon-Carbon Bond-Forming Reactions in Organic Synthesis Chapter 27 Carbohydrates Chapter 28 Amino Acids and Proteins Chapter 29 Lipids Chapter 30 Synthetic Polymers / Appendices / Glossary / Credits / Index Supplements International Edition 3000 SOLVED PROBLEMS IN ORGANIC CHEMISTRY By Herbert Meislich, City College of CUNY, Estelle Meislich, Bergen Community College and Jacob Sharefkin, Formerly Brooklyn College 1994 / 704 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-056424-4 / MHID: 0-07-056424-8 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113969-4 / MHID: 0-07-113969-9 [IE] [A Schaum Professional Publication] CONTENTS Structure and Properties / Bonding and Molecular Structure / Chemical Reactivity and Organic Reactions / Alkanes / Cycloalkanes / Stereo-chemistry / Alkenes / Alkyl Halides / Alkynes, Dienes, and Orbital Symmetry / Aromaticity and Benzene / Aromatic Substitution / Arenes / Spectroscopy and Structure Proof / Alcohols and Thiols / Ethers, Epoxides, Glycols, and Thioethers / Aldehydes and Ketones / Carboxylic Acids / Acid Derivatives / Carbanion-Enolates and Enols / Amines / Phenols and Their Derivatives / Aromatic Heterocyclic Compounds / Amino Acids, Petidides, and Proteins / Carbohydrates. 84 HED 2007 Chemistry.indd 84 9/29/2006 1:14:17 PM Chemistry Physical Chemistry Textbooks International Edition PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 5th Edition By Ira N. Levine, Brooklyn College 2002 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-253495-5 / MHID: 0-07-253495-8 (Revised) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123213-5 / MHID: 0-07-123213-3 [IE, Revised] CONTENTS 1 Thermodynamics / 2 The First Law of Thermodynamics / 3 The Second Law of Thermodynamics / 4 Material Equilibrium / 5 Standard Thermodynamic Functions of Reaction / 6 Reaction Equilibrium in Ideal Gas Mixtures / 7 One-Component Phase Equilibrium / 8 Real Gases / 9 Solutions / 10 Nonideal Solutions / 11 Reaction Equilibrium in Nonideal Systems / 12 Multicomponent Phase Equilibrium / 13 Surface Chemistry / 14 Electrochemical Systems / 15 Kinetic Theory of Gases / 16 Transport Processes / 17 Reaction Kinetics / 18 Quantum Mechanics / 19 Atomic Structure / 20 Molecular Electronic Structure / 21 Spectroscopy and Photochemistry / 22 Statistical Mechanics / 23 Theories of Reaction Rates / 24 Solids and Liquids Lab International Edition EXPERIMENTS IN PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 7th Edition By David P Shoemaker, Joseph W Nibler of Oregon State University and Carl W Garland, Massachusetts Institute of Technology 2003 / 800 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-231821-0 / MHID: 0-07-231821-X ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119954-4 / MHID: 0-07-119954-3 [IE] Website: www.mhhe.com CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 Introduction CHAPTER 2 Treatments of Experimental Data CHAPTER 3 Use of Computer Software CHAPTER 4 Gases CHAPTER 5 Transport Properties of Gases CHAPTER 6 Thermochemistry CHAPTER 7 Solutions CHAPTER 8 Phase Equilibria CHAPTER 9 Electrochemistry CHAPTER 10 Chemical Kinetics, Method of Initial Rate CHAPTER 11 Surface Pheomena CHAPTER 12 Macromolecules CHAPTER 13 Electric and Magnetic Properties CHAPTER 14 Spectroscopy CHAPTER 15 Solids CHAPTER 16 Computer Interfacing CHAPTER 17 Electronic Devices and Measurements CHAPTER 18 Temperature CHAPTER 19 Vacuum Techniques CHAPTER 20 Instruments CHAPTER 21 Miscellaneous Procedures CHAPTER 22 Least Squares Fitting Procedures Appendixes Supplements SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 2nd Edition By Clyde R. Metz, Indiana University 1987 / 512 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-041715-1 / MHID: 0-07-041715-6 [A Schaum Professional Publication] Website: http://books.mcgraw-hill.com/cgi-bin/getbook.pl?isbn=007041 7156&adkey=W02003 If you want top grades and excellent understanding of physical chemistry, this powerful study tool is the best tutor you can have! It takes you step-by-step through the subject and gives you accompanying related problems with fully worked solutions. You also get hundreds of additional problems to solve on your own, working at your own speed. This superb Outline clearly presents every aspect of physical chemistry. Famous for their clarity, wealth of illustrations and examples, and lack of dreary minutie, Schaum’s Outlines have sold more than 30 million copies worldwide. Compatible with any textbook, this Outline is also perfect for self-study. For better grades in courses covering physical chemistry you can do better than this Schaum’s Outline! Analytical Chemistry International Edition MODERN ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY By David Harvey, De Pauw University 2000 / 816 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-237547-3 / MHID: 0-07-237547-7 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118374-1 / MHID: 0-07-118374-4 [IE] Website: www.mhhe.com/physsci/chemistry/harvey CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Basic Tools of Analytical Chemistry Chapter 3 The Language of Analytical Chemistry Chapter 4 Evaluating Analytical Data Chapter 5 Calibrations, Standardizations, and Blank Corrections Chapter 6 Equilibrium Chemistry Chapter 7 Obtaining and Preparing Samples for Analysis Chapter 8 Gravimetric Methods of Analysis Chapter 9 Titrimetric Methods of Analysis Chapter 10 Spectroscopic Methods of Analysis Chapter 11 Electrochemical Methods of Analysis Chapter 12 Chromatographic and Electrophoretic Methods Chapter 13 Kinetic Methods of Analysis Chapter 14 Developing a Standard Method Chapter 15 Quality Assurance 85 HED 2007 Chemistry.indd 85 9/29/2006 1:14:17 PM Chemistry International Edition PRINCIPLES OF QUANTITATIVE CHEMICAL ANALYSIS By Robert de Levie, Georgetown University 1997 / 704 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-016362-2 / MHID: 0-07-016362-6 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-114288-5 / MHID: 0-07-114288-6 [IE] Kinetics and Reaction Mechanics International Edition CHEMICAL KINETICS AND REACTION DYNAMICS SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY By Adon Gordus, University of Michigan 1985 / 256 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-023795-7 / MHID: 0-07-023795-6 [A Schaum Professional Publication] Chemistry students love Schaum’s for their thorough introduction to each topic, including easy-to-follow explanations of the necessary mathematics and procedures. With 590 fully solved problems and hundreds more to solve on your own (with answers supplied), this guide can help you spend less time studying and still make better grades! Clear and comprehensive, this guide covers the entire course and is compatible with all major analytical chemistry texts. By Paul L Houston, Cornell University-Ithaca 2001 / 352 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-243537-5 / MHID: 0-07-243537-2 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120260-2 / MHID: 0-07-120260-9 [IE] CONTENTS 1 Kinetic Theory of Gases 2 The Rates of Chemical Reactions 3 Theories of Chemical Reactions 4 Transport Properties 5 Reactions in Liquid Solutions 6 Reactions at Solid Surfaces 7 Photochemistry 8 Molecular Reaction Dynamics COMPLIMENTARY COPIES INVITATION TO PUBLISH Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog. McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg 86 HED 2007 Chemistry.indd 86 9/29/2006 1:14:17 PM 2007-2008 NEW Forestry/Agriculture Titles Forestry/Agriculture ~ Contents 2007 New Titles KAY Farm Management, 6e..........................................89, 90 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302829-3 / MHID: 0-07-302829-0 FORESTRY Dendrology..................................................................... 88 Forest Resources.............................................................. 88 Mensuration Measurement.............................................. 88 Silviculture...................................................................... 88 AGRICULTURE Agricultural Business...................................................... 89 Agricultural Economics.................................................... 89 Agricultural Education..................................................... 90 Animal Science................................................................ 91 Soil Science..................................................................... 91 87 HED 2007 Forestry_Agriculture.in87 87 9/29/2006 1:16:44 PM Forestry/Agriculture Forestry Dendrology HARLOW AND HARRAR’S TEXTBOOK OF DENDROLOGY 9th Edition By James Hardin, North Carolina State University-Raleigh, Donald Leopold, State University of New York at Syracuse and Fred White, Chief Forester with the Forester Group 2001 / 544 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-366171-1 / MHID: 0-07-366171-6 Microeconomic Concepts CHAPTER 2 Economics of Demand CHAPTER 3 Production Functions and Product Curves CHAPTER 4 Costs, Returns, ans Profit Maximization Part 3 Markets CHAPTER 5 Theory of Markets CHAPTER 6 Multiple Inputs and Outputs CHAPTER 7 Forms of Market Competition CHAPTER 8 International Trade CHAPTER 9 Agribusinesses Organization, Management, and Finance CHAPTER 10 Economic Performance of Agribusiness Part 4 Macroeconomic Relationships CHAPTER 11 Introduction to Macroeconomics CHAPTER 12 Gross Domestic Product and Fiscal Policy CHAPTER 13 Gross Domestic Product and Monetary Policy CHAPTER 14 Gross Domestic Product, International Transactions, and Macroeconomic Policy Part 5 Public Policy and Agriculture CHAPTER 15 Resource and Environmental Management CHAPTER 16 Agriculture and Development CHAPTER 17 Agricultural Price and Income Policy CHAPTER 18 Putting It All Together: The Economic System CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Classification Chapter 3 Nomenclature Chapter 4 Identification Chapter 5 Variation Chapter 6 Habitat, Range, and Communities Chapter 7 Vegetative and Reproductive Morphology Chapter 8 Pinophyta (Gymnosperms) Chapter 9 Magnoliophyta (Angiosperms) Chapter 10 Dendrochronology Chapter 11 After Dendrology, What? Glossary References Index Mensuration Measurement FOREST MEASUREMENTS 5th Edition Forest Resources International Edition GIS APPLICATIONS IN FORESTRY AND NATURAL RESOURCES By Pete Bettinger, Oregon State University 2004 / 256 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121590-9 / MHID: 0-07-121590-5 [IE] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/earthsci This new text will provide forestry and natural resources students with an overview of the typical types of GIS analysis they may perform in an entry-level position and provide professionals the basic information they need to update their skills. Many of the types of spatial analyses that field foresters perform to assist in decision-making activities will be covered. By Thomas Eugene Avery and Harold Burkhart 2002 / 480 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-366176-6 / MHID: 0-07-366176-7 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/catalogs/sem/agriculture/burkhart. mhtml CONTENTS Preface / 1. Introduction / 2. Statistical Methods / 3. Sampling Designs / 4. Land Measurements. / 5. Cubic Volume, Cord Meaure, and Weight Scaling / 6. Log Rules, Scaling Practices, and Specialty Wood Products / 7. Measuring Standing Trees / 8. Volumes and Weights of Standing Trees / 9. Forest Inventory / 10. Inventories with Sample Strips or Plots / 11. Inventories with Point Samples / 12. Inventories with 3P Sampling / 13. Using Aerial Photographs / 14. Geographic Information Systems / 15. Site, Stocking, and Stand Density / 16. Tree—Growth and Stand-Table Projection / 17. Growth and Yield Models / 18. Assessing Rangeland, Wildlife, Water and Recreational Resources / Answers to Selected Problems / Glossary CONTENTS 1 GIS Data Structures / 2 GIS Databases / 3 Maps/Tables/Spatial Analyses / 4 Forest Thinning Opportunities / 5 Delineating Variable Width Riparian Areas / 6 Buffer Owl Nest Sites / 7 Forest Fertilization Plan / 8 Forest Pruning Plan / 9 Recreation Opportunity Spectrum / 10 Land Classification / 11 Integration of GIS and Forest Inventories / 12 Soil Loss Potential / 13 Tactical Issues with Forest Harvest Schedule INTRODUCTION TO FOREST AND RENEWABLE RESOURCES 7th Edition By Grant Sharpe, University of Washington, Clare Hendee, Formerly University of Maryl, Wenonah Sharpe, Washington Chapter of Federal Women in Timber and John Hendee, University of Idaho 2003 / 640 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-366172-8 / MHID: 0-07-366172-4 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/earthsci/ CONTENTS Part 1 Economic Scope, Organization, and Problems of Agriculture CHAPTER 1 Economics of Resources, Agriculture, and Food Part 2 Silviculture International Edition SILVICULTURE Concepts and Applications, 2nd Edition By Ralph Nyland, SUNY Environmental Science & Forestry 2002 / 704 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121579-4 / MHID: 0-07-121579-4 [IE] CONTENTS 1 Silviculture as an Orderly Discipline 2 The Silvicultural System 3 Harvesting as a Tool of Silviculture 4 Concepts of Regeneration 5 Site Preparation 6 Planning for Artificial Regeneration 7 Nursery and Tree Planting Operations 8 Regeneration from Seed and Direct Seeding 9 Reproduction Methods and Their Implications 10 Selection System and Its Application 11 Uneven-Aged Reproduction Methods 12 Growth and Development in Selection System Stands 13 Clearcutting 14 Shelterwood and Seed-Tree Methods 15 Early Stand Development 16 Release Treatments 17 Thinning and Its Effects on Stand Development 18 Methods of Thinning 19 Thinning Regimes in the Even-Aged Silvicultural System 20 Managing Quality in Forest Stands 21 Stand 88 HED 2007 Forestry_Agriculture.in88 88 9/29/2006 1:16:44 PM Forestry/Agriculture Protection and Health Management 22 Improvement, Salvage, and Sanitation Cuttings 23 Other Partial Cuttings 24 Coppice Silviculture 25 Adjusting to Administrative Demands Agriculture Agricultural Business New FARM MANAGEMENT 6th Edition By Ronald Kay, Texas A&M University 2007 (June 2006) / 480 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302829- 3 / MHID: 0-07-302829-0 This text was developed for the first course in Farm Management, typically taken by a junior/senior level student. It was designed to introduce students to the key concepts on how to effectively manage a farm business. The sixth edition provides students with the basic information needed to measure management performance, financial progress, and the financial condition of the farm business. FEATURES • Chapter 1 on “Farm Management in the 21st Century” responds to changes coming in the farm business that, “will require a new type of manager..able to absorb, organize, and use large amounts of information, particularly that related to new technologies.” This gets students thinking about farm management practices in a way that will allow them to compete in the future. • “Chapter Objectives”, “Chapter Summaries”, as well as “Questions for review” are helpful learning tools for students. • Terminology and Guidelines in Part 2, (the accounting section), are based on standards maintained by the Farm Financial Standards Council. importance of the different types of economic costs. The discussion of economies of size has been revised and expanded. Practical use of budgeting is emphasized in the chapters on enterprise, partial, whole farm, and cash flow budgets. An expanded discussion on using sensitivity analysis with partial budgets has been added and linear programming is covered in more detail than in previous editions. • Topics necessary to increase a manager’s decision-making skills are included in Part Four. Farm business organization, analyzing investments, managing risk, income tax management, and whole farm business analysis are discussed. The chapter on income tax management has been updated with the latest changes available. Data from an actual farm is now used to demonstrate the analysis process in the chapter on whole farm business analysis. The chapter on investment analysis includes a new discussion of the concepts of annual equivalent and capital recovery values. • Part Five discusses the management alternatives and decisions related to acquiring the resources needed on farms and ranches. This part includes chapters on capital and credit, land, human resources, and machinery. The human resource chapter includes new sections on improving managerial capacity and bridging the cultural barriers that may be encountered in managing agricultural labor. CONTENTS 1 Management 1 Farm Management in the Twenty-First Century 2 Management 2 Measuring Management Performance 3 Acquiring and Organizing Management Information 4 Depreciation and Asset Valuation 5 The Balance Sheet and Its Analysis 6 The Income Statement and Its Analysis 3 Developing Basic Management Skills 7 Economic Principles--Choosing Production Levels 8 Economic Principles--Choosing Input and Output Combinations 9 Cost Concepts in Economics 10 Enterprise Budgeting 11 Partial Budgeting 12 Whole-Farm Planning 13 Cash Flow Budgeting 4 Improving Management Skills 14 Forms of Farm Business Organization 15 Managing Risk and Uncertainty 16 Managing Income Taxes 17 Investment Analysis 18 Farm Business Analysis 5 Acquiring Resources for Management 19 Capital and the Use of Credit 20 Land--Control and Use 21 Human Resource Management 22 Machinery Management / Appendix Agricultural Economics New • More emphasis on Strategic Planning in chapter 1 • As with the previous edition, this book is divided into five parts. Part One begins with the chapter “Farm Management in the Twenty-first Century”. It describes some of the forces and technology, which are driving the changes we see in agriculture. We hope that by reading this chapter students will find both an incentive to study farm management and an appreciation for the management skills modern farm managers must have or acquire. Part One concludes with an explanation of the concept of management and the decision-making process with an increased emphasis on the importance of strategic decision-making. • Part Two presents the basic information needed to measure management performance, financial progress, and the financial condition of the farm business. It discusses how to collect and organize accounting data and how to construct and analyze balance sheets and income statements. In response to several suggestions, income tax depreciation (MACRS) has been added to the chapter on depreciation methods and asset valuation. • As in the fifth edition, Part Three contains three chapters on basic microeconomic principles and four on budgeting and planning tools. The topics in this part provide the basic tools needed to make good management decisions. Students will learn how and when economic principles can be used in management decision-making along with the FARM MANAGEMENT 6th Edition By Ronald Kay, Texas A&M University 2007 (June 2006) / 480 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302829-3 / MHID: 0-07-302829-0 This text was developed for the first course in Farm Management, typically taken by a junior/senior level student. It was designed to introduce students to the key concepts on how to effectively manage a farm business. The sixth edition provides students with the basic information needed to measure management performance, financial progress, and the financial condition of the farm business. FEATURES • Chapter 1 on “Farm Management in the 21st Century” responds to changes coming in the farm business that, “will require a new type of manager..able to absorb, organize, and use large amounts of information, particularly that related to new technologies.” This gets students thinking about farm management practices in a way that will allow them to compete in the future. 89 HED 2007 Forestry_Agriculture.in89 89 9/29/2006 1:16:45 PM Forestry/Agriculture • “Chapter Objectives”, “Chapter Summaries”, as well as “Questions for review” are helpful learning tools for students. • Terminology and Guidelines in Part 2, (the accounting section), are based on standards maintained by the Farm Financial Standards Council. • More emphasis on Strategic Planning in chapter 1 • As with the previous edition, this book is divided into five parts. Part One begins with the chapter “Farm Management in the Twenty-first Century”. It describes some of the forces and technology, which are driving the changes we see in agriculture. We hope that by reading this chapter students will find both an incentive to study farm management and an appreciation for the management skills modern farm managers must have or acquire. Part One concludes with an explanation of the concept of management and the decision-making process with an increased emphasis on the importance of strategic decision-making. • Part Two presents the basic information needed to measure management performance, financial progress, and the financial condition of the farm business. It discusses how to collect and organize accounting data and how to construct and analyze balance sheets and income statements. In response to several suggestions, income tax depreciation (MACRS) has been added to the chapter on depreciation methods and asset valuation. • As in the fifth edition, Part Three contains three chapters on basic microeconomic principles and four on budgeting and planning tools. The topics in this part provide the basic tools needed to make good management decisions. Students will learn how and when economic principles can be used in management decision-making along with the importance of the different types of economic costs. The discussion of economies of size has been revised and expanded. Practical use of budgeting is emphasized in the chapters on enterprise, partial, whole farm, and cash flow budgets. An expanded discussion on using sensitivity analysis with partial budgets has been added and linear programming is covered in more detail than in previous editions. • Topics necessary to increase a manager’s decision-making skills are included in Part Four. Farm business organization, analyzing investments, managing risk, income tax management, and whole farm business analysis are discussed. The chapter on income tax management has been updated with the latest changes available. Data from an actual farm is now used to demonstrate the analysis process in the chapter on whole farm business analysis. The chapter on investment analysis includes a new discussion of the concepts of annual equivalent and capital recovery values. • Part Five discusses the management alternatives and decisions related to acquiring the resources needed on farms and ranches. This part includes chapters on capital and credit, land, human resources, and machinery. The human resource chapter includes new sections on improving managerial capacity and bridging the cultural barriers that may be encountered in managing agricultural labor. CONTENTS 1 Management 1 Farm Management in the Twenty-First Century 2 Management 2 Measuring Management Performance 3 Acquiring and Organizing Management Information 4 Depreciation and Asset Valuation 5 The Balance Sheet and Its Analysis 6 The Income Statement and Its Analysis 3 Developing Basic Management Skills 7 Economic Principles--Choosing Production Levels 8 Economic Principles--Choosing Input and Output Combinations 9 Cost Concepts in Economics 10 Enterprise Budgeting 11 Partial Budgeting 12 Whole-Farm Planning 13 Cash Flow Budgeting 4 Improving Management Skills 14 Forms of Farm Business Organization 15 Managing Risk and Uncertainty 16 Managing Income Taxes 17 Investment Analysis 18 Farm Business Analysis 5 Acquiring Resources for Management 19 Capital and the Use of Credit 20 Land--Control and Use 21 Human Resource Management 22 Machinery Management / Appendix ECONOMICS OF RESOURCES, AGRICULTURE AND FOOD 2nd Edition By Wesley D. Seitz, Gerald Nelson and Harold Halcrow of University of Illinois-Urbana-Champaign 2002 / 544 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-025958-4 / MHID: 0-07-025958-5 CONTENTS Part 1 Economic Scope, Organization, and Problems of Agriculture / 1 Economics of Resources, Agriculture, and Food / Part 2 Microeconomic Concepts / 2 Economics of Demand / 3 Production Functions and Product Curves / 4 Costs, Returns, and Profit Maximization / Part 3 Markets / 5 Theory of Markets / 6 Multiple Inputs and Outputs / 7 Forms of Market Competition / 8 International Trade / 9 Agribusiness Organization, Management, and Finance / 10 Economic Performance of Agribusiness / Part 4 Macroeconomic Relationships / 11 Introduction to Macroeconomics / 12 Gross Domestic Product and Fiscal Policy / 13 Gross Domestic Product and Monetary Policy / 14 Gross Domestic Product, International Transactions, and Macroeconomic Policy / Part 5 Public Policy and Agriculture / 15 Resource and Environmental Management / 16 Agriculture and Development / 17 Agricultural Price and Income Policy / 18 Putting It All Together: The Economic System / Glossary / Index Agricultural Education New FARM MANAGEMENT 6th Edition By Ronald Kay, Texas A&M University 2007 (June 2006) / 480 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302829- 3 / MHID: 0-07-302829-0 This text was developed for the first course in Farm Management, typically taken by a junior/senior level student. It was designed to introduce students to the key concepts on how to effectively manage a farm business. The sixth edition provides students with the basic information needed to measure management performance, financial progress, and the financial condition of the farm business. FEATURES • Chapter 1 on “Farm Management in the 21st Century” responds to changes coming in the farm business that, “will require a new type of manager..able to absorb, organize, and use large amounts of information, particularly that related to new technologies.” This gets students thinking about farm management practices in a way that will allow them to compete in the future. • “Chapter Objectives”, “Chapter Summaries”, as well as “Questions for review” are helpful learning tools for students. • Terminology and Guidelines in Part 2, (the accounting section), are based on standards maintained by the Farm Financial Standards Council. • More emphasis on Strategic Planning in chapter 1 • As with the previous edition, this book is divided into five parts. Part One begins with the chapter “Farm Management in the Twenty-first Century”. It describes some of the forces and technology, which are driving the changes we see in agriculture. We hope that by reading this chapter students will find both an incentive to study farm management and an appreciation for the management skills modern farm manag- 90 HED 2007 Forestry_Agriculture.in90 90 9/29/2006 1:16:45 PM Forestry/Agriculture Animal Science ers must have or acquire. Part One concludes with an explanation of the concept of management and the decision-making process with an increased emphasis on the importance of strategic decision-making. • Part Two presents the basic information needed to measure management performance, financial progress, and the financial condition of the farm business. It discusses how to collect and organize accounting data and how to construct and analyze balance sheets and income statements. In response to several suggestions, income tax depreciation (MACRS) has been added to the chapter on depreciation methods and asset valuation. • As in the fifth edition, Part Three contains three chapters on basic microeconomic principles and four on budgeting and planning tools. The topics in this part provide the basic tools needed to make good management decisions. Students will learn how and when economic principles can be used in management decision-making along with the importance of the different types of economic costs. The discussion of economies of size has been revised and expanded. Practical use of budgeting is emphasized in the chapters on enterprise, partial, whole farm, and cash flow budgets. An expanded discussion on using sensitivity analysis with partial budgets has been added and linear programming is covered in more detail than in previous editions. • Topics necessary to increase a manager’s decision-making skills are included in Part Four. Farm business organization, analyzing investments, managing risk, income tax management, and whole farm business analysis are discussed. The chapter on income tax management has been updated with the latest changes available. Data from an actual farm is now used to demonstrate the analysis process in the chapter on whole farm business analysis. The chapter on investment analysis includes a new discussion of the concepts of annual equivalent and capital recovery values. • Part Five discusses the management alternatives and decisions related to acquiring the resources needed on farms and ranches. This part includes chapters on capital and credit, land, human resources, and machinery. The human resource chapter includes new sections on improving managerial capacity and bridging the cultural barriers that may be encountered in managing agricultural labor. International Edition ANIMAL SCIENCES The Biology, Care, and Production of Domestic Animals, 4th Edition By John R. Campbell, Oklahoma State U—Oklahoma City, M. Douglas Kenealy, Iowa State University and Karen L. Campbell, University of Illinois-Urbana-Champaign 2003 / 528 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-366175-9 / MHID: 0-07-366175-9 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121732-3 / MHID: 0-07-121732-0 [IE] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/campbell CONTENTS 1 Animal Agriculture / 2 Breeds and Life Cycles of Livestock and Poultry / 3 Animal Products / 4 Companion Animals / 5 Horses / 6 Aquaculture / 7 State of Being of Domestic Animals / 8 Fundamental Principles of Genetics / 9 Principles of Selecting and Mating Farm Animals / 10 Anatomy and Physiology of Farm Animals / 11 The Application of Endocrinology to Selected Animals and Humans / 12 The Physiology of Growth and Senescence / 13 Anatomy and Physiology of Reproduction and Related Technologies in Farm Mammals / 14 Artificial Insemination / 15 Physiology of Lactation / 16 Physiology of Egg Laying / 17 Ecology and Environmental Physiology / 18 Principles of Nutrition: Plant and Animal Composition / 19 The Physiology of Digestion in Nutrition / 20 The Nutritional Application of Vitamins to Human and Animal Health / 21 The Nutritional Contributions of Minerals to Humans and Animals / 22 Animal Disease and the Health of Humans / 23 Selected Insects and Parasites of Significance to Humans and Animals 24 Ethology and Animal Behavior / Appendix A: Common Terms or Names Applied to Selected Farm Animals / Appendix B: Convenient Conversion Data / Appendix C: Tables of Weights and Measures / Appendix D: Agricultural Colleges and Experiment Stations in the United States and Its Territories / Appendix E: Alphabetical List of Elements and Symbols CONTENTS 1 Management 1 Farm Management in the Twenty-First Century 2 Management 2 Measuring Management Performance 3 Acquiring and Organizing Management Information 4 Depreciation and Asset Valuation 5 The Balance Sheet and Its Analysis 6 The Income Statement and Its Analysis 3 Developing Basic Management Skills 7 Economic Principles--Choosing Production Levels 8 Economic Principles--Choosing Input and Output Combinations 9 Cost Concepts in Economics 10 Enterprise Budgeting 11 Partial Budgeting 12 Whole-Farm Planning 13 Cash Flow Budgeting 4 Improving Management Skills 14 Forms of Farm Business Organization 15 Managing Risk and Uncertainty 16 Managing Income Taxes 17 Investment Analysis 18 Farm Business Analysis 5 Acquiring Resources for Management 19 Capital and the Use of Credit 20 Land--Control and Use 21 Human Resource Management 22 Machinery Management / Appendix Soil Science LABORATORY MANUAL FOR SOIL SCIENCE Agricultural & Environmental Principles, 8th Edition By Steve J. Thien, Kansas State University and John Graveel, Purdue University—West Lafayette 2003 / 224 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-242881-0 / MHID: 0-07-242881-3 CONTENTS COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog. Preface / 1 Soil as a Natural Resource / 2 Soil Texture / 3 Particle Size Distribution / 4 Bulk Density and Soil Porosity / 5 Soil Water Content / 6 Water Movement in Soil / 7 Environmental Influence on Soil Formation / 8 Properties of Colloids in the Soil Environment / 9 Types of Soil Acidity / 10 Liming Acid Soils / 11 Soil Degradation by Salinity and Sodicity / 12 Soil Testing for Available Phosphorus / 13 Soil Organic Matter and Chemical Sorption / 14 Microbial Decomposition of Organic Materials in Soil / 15 Soil Survey Reports / Appendix: Applications of Chemistry to Soil Science Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com 91 HED 2007 Forestry_Agriculture.in91 91 9/29/2006 1:16:45 PM Forestry/Agriculture 92 HED 2007 Forestry_Agriculture.in92 92 9/29/2006 1:16:45 PM 2007-2008 NEW General & Human Biology Titles General & Human Biology ~ Contents 2007 New Titles Biology Multimedia................................................................ 109 Supplements.............................................................. 110 General Biology Majors Laboratory................................................................. 106 Textbook................................................................... 104 General Biology - Non Majors Laboratory................................................................. 100 Textbook..................................................................... 95 General Biology - Non Majors & Majors Combined Laboratory................................................................. 103 Textbook................................................................... 101 Human Biology Laboratory................................................................. 108 Textbook................................................................... 107 ENGER Concepts in Biology, 12e..........................................98 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322737-5 / MHID: 0-07-322737-4 ENGER Laboratory Manual to Accompany Concepts In Biology, 12e.........................................................100 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298663-1 / MHID: 0-07-298663-8 LEWIS Life, 6e.....................................................................101 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322480-0 / MHID: 0-07-322480-4 MADER Biology, 9e...............................................................102 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320928-9 / MHID: 0-07-320928-7 MADER Lab Manual to Accompany Biology, 9e....................103 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298955-7 / MHID: 0-07-298955-6 MADER Laboratory Manual to Accompany Essentials of Biology.................................................................101 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340341-0 / MHID: 0-07-340341-5 MADER Essentials of Biology.................................................98 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322479-4 / MHID: 0-07-322479-0 STRETE Photo Atlas for General Biology, 2e.........................110 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-284610-2 / MHID: 0-07-284610-0 93 HED 2007 General & Human Biology93 93 9/29/2006 1:19:13 PM 2007-2008 NEW General & Human Biology Titles 2008 New Titles BROOKER Biology.....................................................................104 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326807-1 / MHID: 0-07-326807-0 DOLPHIN Biological Investigations Lab Manual, 8e..................106 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299287-8 / MHID: 0-07-299287-5 JOHNSON Essentials of the Living World, 2e.............................95 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330935-4 / MHID: 0-07-330935-4 JOHNSON The Living World, 5e................................................95 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325653-5 / MHID: 0-07-325653-6 MADER Human Biology, 10e.................................................107 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298686-0 / MHID: 0-07-298686-7 MADER Inquiry Into Life, 12e................................................96 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330933-0 / MHID: 0-07-330933-8 MADER Laboratory Manual to Accompany Human Biology, 10e.............................................................108 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298690-7 / MHID: 0-07-298690-5 MADER Laboratory Manual to Accompany Inquiry Into Life, 12e............................................................100 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298682-2 / MHID: 0-07-298682-4 PRESSON Biology: Dimensions of Life......................................97 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322736-8 / MHID: 0-07-322736-6 RAVEN Biology, 8e...............................................................105 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322739-9 / MHID: 0-07-322739-0 VODOPICH Biology Laboratory Manual, 8e................................106 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299522-0 / MHID: 0-07-299522-X 94 HED 2007 General & Human Biology94 94 9/29/2006 1:19:13 PM General & Human Biology General Biology - Non Majors Environment 29 How the Body Defends Itself 30 The Nervous System 31 Chemical Signaling Within the Animal Body 32 Reproduction and Development Part 7 Plant Life 33 Plant Form and Function 34 Plant Reproduction and Growth Textbook International Edition International Edition New ESSENTIALS OF THE LIVING WORLD 2nd Edition By George Johnson and Jonathan Losos of Washington University-St Louis 2008 (October 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330935-4 / MHID: 0-07-330935-4 (ARIS) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110211-7 / MHID: 0-07-110211-6 [IE] In this Essentials version of George Johnson’s textbook, The Living World which is often considered to be a student favorite. Dr. Johnson has written this textbook from the ground up to be an engaging and accessible learning tool with an emphasis on “how things work and why things happen the way they do”. This Essentials textbook features a straightforward, clear writing style and a wide variety of media assets to enhance the content of the textbook. The strength of the second edition is the integration of many tools that are designed to inspire both students and instructors. The multi-media package for the new edition stretches students beyond the confines of the traditional textbook to include high interest video clips and animations of key biological concepts. NEW TO THIS EDITION • Issues Oriented: The author endeavors to apply biology to current issues and students’ lives as much as possible throughout the text. However, he specifically adds boxes entitled “A Closer Look”, “Author’s Corner” and “Science in Action” to accomplish this objective as well. FEATURES • Learning Modules: Chapter Concepts are broken into smaller “learning modules” contained on one or two pages. • Process Boxes: Key processes are illustrated via approximately 40 boxes that step a process through frame by frame. • Relatively Inexpensive: Essentials of the Living World covers all of the key biological concepts for a semester course, but costs students about $25 less than a traditional, full-length text. • Early Coverage of Evolution and Ecology: Evolution and ecology are introduced in the beginning of the text (Chapter 2) and then revisited later. • Chapter Devoted to New Discoveries, Chapter 10, The New Biology, focuses on gene technology, genomics, and recent discoveries in cell technology. CONTENTS Part 1 The Study of Life 1 The Science of Biology 2 Evolution and Ecology Part 2 The Living Cell 3 The Chemistry of Life 4 Molecules of Life 5 Cells 6 Energy and Life 7 Photosynthesis: Acquiring Energy from the Sun 8 How Cells Harvest Energy from Food Part 3 The Continuity of Life 9 Mitosis 10 Meiosis 11 Foundations of Genetics 12 DNA: The Genetic Material 13 How Genes Work 14 The New Biology Part 4 The Evolution and Diversity of Life 15 Evolution and Natural Selection 16 Exploring Biological Diversity 17 Evolution of Microbial Life 18 Evolution of Plants 19 Evolution of Animals Part 5 The Living Environment 20 Ecosystems 21 Populations and Communities 22 Behavior and the Environment 23 Plant Under Stress Part 6 Animal Life 24 The Animal Body and How It Moves 25 Circulation 26 Respiration 27 The Path of Food Through the Animal Body 28 Maintaining the Internal New THE LIVING WORLD 5th Edition By George Johnson, Washington University-St Louis 2008 (February 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325653-5 / MHID: 0-07-325653-6 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110212-4 / MHID: 0-07-110212-4 [IE] George Johnson’s textbook, The Living World is often considered to be a student favorite. Dr. Johnson has written this non-majors textbook from the ground up to be an engaging and accessible learning tool with an emphasis on “how things work and why things happen the way they do”. This authoritative textbook features a straightforward, clear writing style and a wide variety of media assets to enhance the content of the textbook. The strength of the fifth edition is the integration of many tools that are designed to inspire both students and instructors. The multi-media package for the new edition stretches students beyond the confines of the traditional textbook to include high interest video clips and animations of key biological concepts. NEW TO THIS EDITION • NEW FEATURE! Inquiry and Analysis--This new feature appears at the end of all chapters and is intended to help students with developing their skills in analyzing and interpreting data. • The author provides a 2-page discussion on the presentation of data in Chapter 1, introducing the students to the concepts of variables, relationships between variables, and presentation of data in various types of graphs. To reinforce this concept, the Inquiry and Analysis sections present the student with experimental data and help them analyze the data with a set of questions that walks them through the data. • Reorganized Table of Contents--In response to the comments of our reviewers, the Table of Contents for the 5th edition will contain more, but shorter chapters than the 4th edition. Several of the chapters were sited as being too long and containing too much information for nonmajors. Six of these longer chapters have been split to form the addition of two more manageable chapters. These two new chapters are Chapters 29 and 30; 29 is devoted to the circulatory system and 30 is dedicated to the respiratory system. • Art Tie-Ins--Throughout the text, descriptions of the art have been incorporated into the textual discussion, encouraging the students to look at the art as they are reading the textual descriptions. In many cases, the artwork has been revised to make these rat tie-ins in the text clearer and more meaningful. A numbering system has been placed within the figures allowing the text to guide the student through particular areas of a figure. • New Boxed Readings!--The addition of boxes readings in the previous edition (i.e. Author’s Corner, Science in Action and A Closer Look) were very well received, so additional topics have been added. • UPDATED TEXT WEBSITE!--McGraw-Hill’s ARIS--Assessment, Review, and Instruction System for The Living World, 5/e is a complete electronic homework and course management system. Instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. Instructors can edit questions and algorithms, import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of easy-to-assign algorithmically generated homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a student is registered in the course, all student activity within McGrawHill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. 95 HED 2007 General & Human Biology95 95 9/29/2006 1:19:14 PM General & Human Biology Contact your local McGraw-Hill Publisher’s representative for more information on getting started with ARIS. FEATURES • Hallmark Feature! Learning Modules--Chapter Concepts are broken into smaller “learning modules” so students can absorb difficult concepts in easy-to-digest steps. These one or two page units assist students in easily identifying the details of major chapter concepts. They always end with a summary wrapping up what was just covered. • Animated Process Boxes--We have animated 30 key biological processes directly from the textbook art. These process animations will demonstrate for the student “how it works” by striping away some of the detail and focus on the essence of the biological process helping them develop a deeper understanding of the science. • Digitized Video Clips--McGraw-Hill has organized a series of 75 digitized video clips that cover all the areas of introductory biology. These high interest video clips are an excellent way to start out your classes, post to a website for study purposes or to assist in demonstrating relevance of key biological topics for your students. • Customizable: The Living World is now color customizable by chapter so instructors can select only the chapters they will need for their course, or couple chapters from The Living World with material from another source. CONTENTS Part 1 The Study of Life 1 The Science of Biology 2 Evolution and Ecology Part 2 The Living Cell 3 The Chemistry of Life 4 Molecules of Life 5 Cells 6 Energy and Life 7 Photosynthesis: Acquiring Energy from the Sun 8 How Cells Harvest Energy from Food Part 3 The Continuity of Life 9 Mitosis 10 Meiosis 11 Foundations of Genetics 12 DNA: The Genetic Material 13 How Genes Work Part 4 The New Biology 14 Gene Technology 15 Genomics 16 The Revolution in Cell Technology Part 5 The Evolution and Diversity of Life 17 Evolution and Natural Selection 18 How We Name Living Things 19 The First Single-Celled Creatures 20 Advent of the Eukaryotes 21 Fungi Invade the Land Part 6 Plant Life 22 Evolution of Plants 23 Plant Form and Function 24 Plant Reproduction and Growth Part 7 Evolution of Animal Life 25 Evolution of the Animal Phyla 26 History of the Vertebrates 27 How Humans Evolved Part 8 Animal Life 28 The Animal Body and How It Moves 29 Circulation 30 Respiration 31 The Path of Food Through the Animal Body 32 Maintaining the Internal Environment 33 How the Body Defends Itself 34 The Nervous System 35 Chemical Signaling Within the Animal Body 36 Reproduction and Development Part 9 The Living Environment 37 Ecosystems 38 Populations and Communities 39 Behavior and the Environment 40 Planet Under Stress NEW TO THIS EDITION • More Critical Thinking Emphasis--Discussion questions have been provided at the end of each “Focus” boxed reading and at the end of each chapter. Is it important that your students be able to apply what they’ve learned to real-life applications? Do you think this better prepares them for the future? • eInstruction questions are available with this project and can be found on the A.R.I.S. site. eInstruction is a wireless student response system that allows for the ultimate in classroom participation, giving you immediate feedback from every student. • Content Revised Throughout--Content has been revised throughout the book by contributing experts in the field. • Integrated Disease Coverage--More human disease coverage will be integrated throughout the text. Each of the systems chapter will ahve a new Disease and Disorder section. • A.R.I.S.--McGraw-Hill’s ARIS (Assessment, Review, and Instruction System) is an electronic homework and course management system which is designed for greater flexibility, power, and ease of use than any other system. Homework is easy-to-assign, automatically graded, and recorded in a robust grade book. Instructors can even share their course materials and assignments with colleagues. Whether you are looking for a “ready-to-use-straight-out-of-the-box” system or one you can customize to fit your specific course needs, ARIS is your solution. Contact your local McGraw-Hill Publisher’s representative for more information on getting started with ARIS. • Enhanced Art Program--The content and clarity of the art program within Inquiry Into Life have always been a hallmark of the text. Great care has been taken to maintain this high standard in making this revision. Vibrant colors and added dimension have been put into place to help create an even more beneficial art program. FEATURES • Digital Assets--containing 60 pieces of active art, which are text art files developed to allow instructors the opportunity to manipulate illustrations so you can “tell your own story”, all art and photos from the text, and PowerPoint lectures. • An Emphasis on the Scientific Process--The introductory chapter begins with a new and expanded explanation of the scientific process. New art contributes to this expanded coverage; Science Focus readings occur throughout the text. These readings discuss recent biological research in the area under discussion. • Bioethical Issues--No general biology book covers as many issues or devotes as much space to this growing area of biology. Most chapters of Inquiry into Life end with a bioethical issue. International Edition New INQUIRY INTO LIFE 12th Edition By Sylvia S Mader 2008 (January 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330933-0 / MHID: 0-07-330933-8 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110213-1 / MHID: 0-07-110213-2 [IE] From the unique delivery of biology content, to the time tested art program, to the complete integration of the text with technology, Dr. Sylvia Mader has formed a teaching system that will both motivate and enable your students to understand and appreciate the wonders of all areas of biology. Inquiry into Life, 12/e emphasizes the application of all areas of biology to knowledge of human concerns, what the students are able to relate to. This distinctive text was developed to stand apart from all other non-majors texts with a unique approach, unparalleled art, and a straightforward, succinct writing style that has been acclaimed by both users and reviewers. • Chapter Opening Vignette A short, thought-provoking vignette applies chapter material to a real-life situation. • Digitized Video Clips--McGraw-Hill’s Biology Digitized Videos are an exciting new presentation tool for introductory general biology instructors to use in lecture or lab! Licensed from some of the highestquality life science video producers in the world, these brief video clips on DVD range in length from 15 seconds to two minutes and cover all areas of general biology from cells to ecosystems. Engaging and informative, McGraw-Hill’s digitized biology videos will help capture students’ interest while illustrating key biological concepts, applications, and processes. • Inquiry into Life has Four Types of Boxed Readings: » Health Focus review procedures and technology that can contribute to our well-being. » Science Focus readings describe how experimentation and observations have contributed to our knowledge about the living world. » Ecology Focus readings show how the concepts of the chapter can be applied to ecological concerns. 96 HED 2007 General & Human Biology96 96 9/29/2006 1:19:14 PM General & Human Biology » Bioethical Focus readings describe modern situations that call for value judgments and challenge students to develop a point of view. • End-of-Chapter Material--Through the wide variety of the The Endof-Chapter material, students can be assured that they have grasped the concepts just discussed. Each chapter ends with Understanding Key Terms--Bold terms within the chapter are presented at the end of the chapter for review which include page references. Summarizing the Concepts,Testing Yourself review questions, and finally Thinking Critically questions. • Chapter by Chapter Customization--Inquiry into Life is chapter-bychapter color customizable so you and your students use only the chapters you want. • Customize this book through Primis Online! This title is tentatively planned to be part of the Primis Online Database: www.mhhe.com/ primis/online CONTENTS 1 Exploring Life and Science Part I Human Organization 2 Chemistry of Life 3 Cell Structure and Function 4 Organization and Regulation of Body Systems Part II Maintenance of the Human Body 5 Cardiovascular System: Heart and Blood Vessels 6 Cardiovascular System: Blood 7 Lymphatic System and Immunity ** 8 Digestive System and Nutrition 9 Respiratory System 10 Urinary System and Excretion Part III Movement and Support in Humans 11 Skeletal System 12 Muscular System Part IV Integration and Coordination in Humans 13 Nervous System 14 Senses 15 Endocrine System Part V Reproduction in Humans 16 Reproductive System 17 Development and Aging Part VI Human Genetics 18 Patterns of Chromosome Inheritance ** 19 Cancer 20 Patterns of Genetic Inheritance ** 21 DNA Biology and Technology ** Part VII Human Evolution and Ecology 22 Human Evolution 23 Global Ecology 24 Human Population, Planetary Resources, and Conservation New BIOLOGY Dimensions of Life By Joelle C Presson, University of Maryland-College Park and Janann Jenner 2008 (January 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322736- 8 / MHID: 0-07-322736-6 Presson/Jenner: Biology: Dimensions of Life, 1e is a one-semester biology text with an engaging, conversational style which encourages basic understanding of biology, issues, and applications leading students to a greater awareness of how they interact with the world around them. The goal of this text is to help students understand how biology relates to their lives and why they should develop a desire to obtain knowledge about science and biological issues. FEATURES • Accessible writing style • Key terms are boldfaced when they are first presented and formally defined. Then this definition is repeated in the margin space that is close to the relevant text. • Key questions appear in the margins throughout the text and ask students to rephrase what they have learned. • Illustrations, photos, graphs, and other visual items complement the written text to provide the most accessible definitions of basic biological concepts. • A complete set of instructor and student media ancillaries accompanies Modern Biology, including Students Online Learning Center, Life Science Animations, Instructor’s Digital Content Manager, Instructor’s Testing, and Primis Online customizable digital and print versions. • Use of analogies and deeper explanations • Added Dimensions • Full applications chapters • End of Chapter Now You Can Understand • What Do You Think? • Quick Checks CONTENTS Chapter 1: The Framework of Biology Part I: Biological Chemistry, Cells, and Cellular Processes Chapter 2: Life Emerges from Chemistry: Atoms and Molecules Chapter 3: Biological Molecules Chapter 4: Life is Cellular: Cell Structure and Function Chapter 5: Life Uses Chemical Energy: Energy and Life Chapter 6: Engine of Life: Photosynthesis and Glucose Metabolism Part II: Reproduction of Cells and Inheritance Chapter 7: The Master Molecule of Life: DNA: Structure and Function Chapter 8: Life Renews Itself: Reproduction of Cells Chapter 9: Constructing Life: The Control of Eukaryotic Gene Expression Chapter 10: Rules of Inheritance: Classical Genetics Part III: Applying Your Knowledge of Cells and Cellular Processes Chapter 11: Biotechnology (Applications chapter) Chapter 12: The Biology and Treatment of Cancer (Applications chapter) Part IV: Evolution and Diversity of Life Chapter 13: Life Evolves: Darwin and the Science of Evolution Chapter 14: All Life is Related: Understanding Biological Diversity Chapter 15: Varieties of Life: Prokaryotes, Single-Celled Eukaryotes, and Algae Chapter 16: Varieties of Life: Fungi and Animals Chapter 17: Varieties of Life: Plants Part V: Applying Your Knowledge of Biological Diversity Chapter 18: The Value of Biological Diversity (Applications chapter) Part VI: Plant Biology Chapter 19: The Living Plant: Plant Structure and Function Chapter 20: The Thread of Life: Reproduction of Seed Plants Part VII: Human Biology Chapter 21: Nerves, Senses, Bones, Muscles Chapter 22: Nutrition and Digestion Chapter 23: Circulation, Respiration, and Excretion Chapter 24: Hormones, Reproduction, and Early Development Part VIII: Applying Your Knowledge of Human Biology Chapter 25: Human Control of Reproduction (Applications chapter) Chapter 26: The Immune System and Emergent Diseases (Applications chapter) Part IX: Ecology Chapter 27: Ecology: Populations and Communities Chapter 28: Ecosystems and Biomes Part X: Applying Your Knowledge of Ecology Chapter 29: Human Impact Upon the Earth (Applications chapter) • Fundamental biological concepts are presented with less complexity in terms of detail, but with more attention paid to conveying a deeper understanding that students are sure to grasp. • Applied topics of particular interest to students (e.g. Psychoactive Drugs chapter) are covered in greater detail than normally expected in a text for this course. • Modern Biology emphasizes the use of scientific processes to understand nature. • Each chapter starts with an interesting story or scenario and then ends with a section that returns to the story and asks the question “How Do You Know?” The introductory scenario sets up intriguing issues and questions and, after covering the material in the chapter, the last section returns to the opening scenario and addresses these issues and questions in detail. 97 HED 2007 General & Human Biology97 97 9/29/2006 1:19:14 PM General & Human Biology International Edition New CONCEPTS IN BIOLOGY 12th Edition By Eldon Enger, Delta College 2007 (March 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322737-5 / MHID: 0-07-322737-4 (with ARIS Card) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110946-8 / MHID: 0-07-110946-3 [IE with ARIS Card] Enger/Ross/Bailey: Concepts in Biology is a relatively brief introductory general biology text written for students with no previous science background. The authors strive to use the most accessible vocabulary and writing style possible while still maintaining scientific accuracy. The text covers all the main areas of study in biology from cells through ecosystems. Evolution and ecology coverage are combined in Part Four to emphasize the relationship between these two main subject areas. The new, 12th edition is the latest and most exciting revision of a respected introductory biology text written by authors who know how to reach students through engaging writing, interesting issues and applications, and accessible level. Instructors will appreciate the book’s scientific accuracy, complete coverage and extensive supplement package. New to this edition All new chapter dedicated to coverage of biotechnology. Former biochemical pathways chapter is now separated into two chapters. The first covers cellular respiration and the second covers photosynthesis. Hundreds of new photographs and illustrations appear in Concepts in Biology, 12/e. Concepts in Biology is now organized with physiological processes appearing as the last major part of the text. Brief vignettes of 2-3 paragraphs in length now appear at the beginning of each chapter. Each chapter now ends with an illustrated summary, organized by major heading, and then many new objective questions. McGraw-Hill’s Biology Digitized Video Clips are correlated to topics covered in the text and identified by an icon on the appropriate book pages. Features Evolution and ecology coverage appear in the same unit, unlike most texts that have evolution in the first 1/3 of the text and ecology at the end. Many new and updated high-interest boxed readings appear throughout the text. Contents Part 1 Introduction 1 What is Biology? Part 2 Cells: Anatomy and Action 2 The Basics of Life: Chemistry 3 Organic Chemistry: The Chemistry of Life 4 Cell Structure and Function 5 Enzymes 6 Respiration 7 Photosynthesis 8 DNA and RNA: The Molecular Basis of Heredity Part 3 Cell Division and Heredity 9 Mitosis: The Cell-Copying Process 10 Meiosis: Sex-Cell Formation 11 Mendelian Genetics 12 Biotechnology Part 4 Evolution and Ecology 13 Diversity Within Species 14 Natural Selection and Evolution 15 Speciation and Evolutionary Change 16 Ecosystem Organization and Energy Flow 17 Community Interactions 18 Population Ecology 19 Evolutionary and Ecological Aspects of Behavior Part 5 The Origin and Classification of Life 20 The Origin of Life and Evolution of Cells 21 The Classification and Evolution of Organisms 22 Microorganisms: Bacteria, Protista, and Fungi 23 Plants 24 Animals Part 6 Physiological Processes 25 Materials Exchange in the Body 26 Nutrition: Food and Diet 27 The Body’s Control Mechanisms and Immunity 28 Human Reproduction, Sex, and Sexuality Appendix 1: The Metric System Appendix 2: Acronyms International Edition New ESSENTIALS OF BIOLOGY By Sylvia S Mader 2007 (Jan 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322479-4 / MHID: 0-07-322479-0 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110801-0 / MHID: 0-07-110801-7 [IE with ARIS Card] Essentials of Biology is an essentials level introductory general biology text for non-majors students that combines Dr. Sylvia Mader’s superb and accessible writing style with clear visuals, a comprehensive learning system, and abundant supplements. Essentials of Biology emphasizes the relevance of biology to students’ lives within a framework of biodiversity and basicconcepts coverage of all main areas of general biology. The three key features of Essentials of Biology include: 1. Dr. Sylvia Mader’s succinct, precise writing style. Sylvia’s writing is what has earned her a reputation as one of the most successful introductory biology textbook author ever, and it is what will be most compelling in this text. 2. A comprehensive learning system to help students get the most out of each chapter’s text content and an incredible instructional visual program. 3. Our package would not be complete without our robust media technology package with quality animations, digitized videos, OLC, and student interactive CD-ROM. Each chapter features numerous pedagogical tools that are carefully developed to help students grasp challenging concepts. These include: -A numbered outline at the beginning of each chapter with accompanying concept statements for the main topics in each chapter. - Check Your Progress questions and answers at the end of each major heading within the chapter to help students assess their understanding of the previous section. - The boldface terms in each chapter are page referenced in an Understanding the Terms list at the end of the chapter, and a matching exercise allows students to test their knowledge of the terms. - A Thinking Scientifically section at the end of each chapter gives students the opportunity to use critical thinking skills to respond to scientific questions. - The Bioethical Issue at the end of each chapter briefly discusses a controversial issue confronting society and poses questions to help students fully consider the issue and arrive at an opinion. -Numbered summary at the end of the chapter to help students review. -Testing Yourself objective questions at the end of the chapter to help students prepare for the test. Features Essentials of Biology is authored by Dr. Sylvia Mader, one of the most respected and successful introductory general biology authors in the history of college textbook publishing. Each chapter features numerous learning aids that are carefully developed to help students grasp challenging concepts. Examples include: 98 HED 2007 General & Human Biology98 98 9/29/2006 1:19:14 PM General & Human Biology » A numbered outline at the beginning of each chapter with accompanying concept statements for the main topics in each chapter. » Check Your Progress questions and answers at the end of each major heading within the chapter to help students assess their understanding of the previous section. Transport Systems 24 The Maintenance Systems 25 Human Nutrition 26 Defenses Against Disease 27 The Control Systems 28 Sensory Input and Motor Output 29 Reproduction and Development Part 7 Ecology 30 Ecology of Populations 31 Communities and Ecosystems 32 Human Impact on the Biosphere » Testing Yourself questions at the end of the chapter to help students prepare for the test. » The boldface terms in each chapter are page referenced in an Understanding the Terms list at the end of the chapter, and a matching exercise allows students to test their knowledge of the terms. » A Thinking Scientifically section at the end of each chapter gives students the opportunity to use critical thinking skills to respond to scientific questions. » The Bioethical Issue at the end of each chapter briefly discusses a controversial issue confronting society and poses questions to help students fully consider the issue and arrive at an informed opinion. Short, cost efficient paperbound text. Outstanding photographs and vibrantly colored and simple, yet accurate and effective, illustrations are featured through Essentials of Biology. Outstanding instructor’s media package that includes: » McGraw-Hill’s Biology Digitized Video Clips DVD. Licensed from some of the highest-quality science video producers in the world, these brief segments range from 15 seconds to two minutes in length and cover all areas of general biology from cells to ecosystems. » Approximately 70 new animations of key biological processes, most of which are also available in a Spanish version. » A Digital Content Manager CD-ROM provides easy access to all photos, tables, and artwork from the text, plus a complete set of PowerPoint lectures organized by chapter. » The Instructor’s Testing and Resource CD-ROM includes the Instructor’s Manual; a Test Bank in EZ Test, McGraw-Hill’s flexible and easy-to-use electronic testing program; and questions for the Classroom Performance System (CPS). Outstanding media study tools for students. » The Online Learning Center (OLC) provides study aids such as chapter quizzes, art exercises, flashcards, case studies, and access to an online tutor. » The quizzes and other tutorial exercises from the OLC, as well as animations of key biological processes, are on the Student Interactive CD. In Essentials of Biology, Dr. Mader focuses on providing non-majors with exactly what they need to understand key biological concepts instead of emphasizing greater detail. Each chapter opens with several captivating photos and an accompanying brief vignette that relates to students’ lives. Contents BIOLOGY 3rd Edition By Bruce Knox (Deceased), Pauline Ladiges and Barbara Evans of University of Melbourne and Robert Saint, Australian National Univeristy 2004 (Sept 2004) / 1240 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471325-9 / MHID: 0-07-471325-6 [McGraw-Hill Australia Title] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/au/knox3e The new third edition of the leading Australian Biology text has been significantly reviewed and revised to incorporate the needs and requests of Australian universities and academics. Drawing from the many strengths of the second edition of the text, this third edition successfully strikes a balance between the academic rigour that instructors demand and the simplicity that students need. New international examples are accompanied not only by Australian examples, but also by examples from New Zealand. Knox 3e offers students the key principles essential to an understanding of fundamental introductory Biology challenges. The appearance, structure and presentation of the new edition is substantially different to the previous edition in many respects. Technology is now part of the text, rather than being an added extra. Animal form and function and Plant form and function are now grouped as two individual parts. Students who purchase the new edition automatically get access to online content such as self-quizzing exercises as well as local and international journal articles. Visually, the text is clear and engaging, especially with regard to figures, photos and other graphics, ensuring that the learning process is an enjoyable one. CONTENTS Introduction--The nature of biology and science Part 1 – Cell Biology and Energetics 1 Molecules of life 2 The chemistry of life 3 Functioning cells 4 Movement across membranes 5 Harvesting energy 6 Cells, tissues and signals 7 Cell division Part 2 – Genetics and Molecular Biology 8 Inheritance 9 Genes, chromosomes and DNA 10 The genetic code 11 Gene expression 12 Genomes, mutation and cancer 13 Genetic engineering and biotechnology Part 3 – Plant Form and Function 14 Reproduction, growth and development of flowering plants 15 Structure of plants 16 Plant nutrition, transport and adaptation to stress 17 Plant hormones and growth responses Part 4--Animal Form and Function 18 Animal reproduction 19 Animal development 20 Animal and human nutrition 21 Gas exchange in animals 22 Circulation 23 Water, solutes and excretion 24 Innate defences and the immune system 25 Hormonal control in animals 26 Nervous systems 27 Animal movement 28 Animal behaviour 29 Animals responding to environmental stress Part 5--Evolution and Biodiversity 30 Evolving life 31 Evolving earth 32 Mechanisms of evolution 33 Bacteria 34 Viruses 35 The protists 36 Plants 37 Fungi 38 Simple animals: sponges to flatworms 39 Annelids, molluscs, nematodes and arthropods 40 Echinoderms and chordates Part 6 – Ecology 41 Australian biota 42 Population ecology 43 Living in communities 44 Ecosystems 45 Human impacts / Appendix 1 Classification of cellular organisms / Glossary / Credits / Index 1 A View of Life Part 1 The Cell 2 The Chemical Basis of Life 3 The Organic Molecules of Life 4 Inside the Cell 5 The Dynamic Cell 6 Energy for Life 7 Energy for Cells Part 2 Genetics 8 Cellular Reproduction 9 Sexual Reproduction 10 Patterns of Inheritance 11 DNA Biology and Technology 12 Gene Regulation and Cancer 13 Genetic Counseling Part 3 Evolution 14 Darwin and Evolution 15 Evolution on a Small Scale 16 Evolution on a Large Scale Part 4 Diversity of Life 17 The First Forms of Life 18 Land Environment: Plants and Fungi 19 Both Water and Land: Animals Part 5 Plant Structure and Function 20 Plant Anatomy and Growth 21 Plant Responses and Reproduction Part 6 Animal Structure and Function 22 Being Organized and Steady 23 The 99 HED 2007 General & Human Biology99 99 9/29/2006 1:19:14 PM General & Human Biology Laboratory New LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY INQUIRY INTO LIFE 12th Edition By Sylvia Mader 2008 (February 2007) / 512 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298682-2 / MHID: 0-07-298682-4 The laboratory exercises in this manual are coordinated with Inquiry into Life. The text emphasizes how we can apply biological knowledge to our own lives and to our relationships with other organisms. Although each laboratory is referenced to the appropriate chapter in Inquiry into Life, this manual may be used in coordination with other general biology texts. This manual can be adapted to a variety of course orientations and designs. There are a sufficient number of laboratories to permit a choice of activities over the length of the course. Many activities may be performed as demonstrations rather than as student activities, thereby shortening the time required to cover a particular concept. FEATURES • Customizable. Inquiry into Life Lab Manual is chapter-by-chapter color customizable through Primis Online so you and your students use only the exercises you want. • Integrated Opening. Each laboratory begins with a list of learning objectives that are organized according to the major sections of the laboratory. The major sections of the labs are numbered on the opening page, in the lab material, and in the review. • Self-Contained Content. Each lab contains all the background information necessary to understand the concepts being studied and to answer the questions asked. This feature will reduce student frustration and increase learning. • Scientific Method. All laboratories stress the scientific method, and many opportunities are given for students to gain an appreciation of the scientific process. The first laboratory of this edition explicitly explains the steps of the scientific method and gives students an opportunity to use them. • Student Activities. A color bar is used to designate a student activity. Some student activities are observations and some are experimental procedures. An icon appears whenever a procedure requires a period of time before results can be viewed. Sequentially numbered steps guide students as they perform an activity. • Live Materials. Although students work with living material during some part of almost all laboratories, the exercises are designed to be completed within one laboratory session. This facilitates the use of the manual in multiple-section courses. • Laboratory Safety. Lab safety is of prime importance, and the listing on page vii will assist instructors in their efforts to make the lab experience a safe one. • A Laboratory Resource Guide--The lab resource guide is available to instructors and lab assistants via the password protected Instructor Center of Mader: Human Biology’s A.R.I.S., text specific website. • Each lab exercise is designed to be completed within one laboratory session. CONTENTS To the Instructor / To the Student / Laboratory Safety / Part 1 Cell Biology 1 Scientific Method 2 Metric Measurement and Microscopy 3 Chemical Composition of Cells 4 Cell Structure and Function 5 Mitosis and Meiosis 6 Enzymes 7 Cellular Respiration Part 2 Plant Biology 8 Photosynthesis 9 Organization of Flowering Plants 10 Reproduction in Flowering Plants Part 3 Maintenance of the Human Body 11 Animal Organization 12 Chemical Aspects of Digestion 13 Basic Mammalian Anatomy I 14 Cardiovascular System 15 Features of the Cardiovascular System 16 Basic Mammalian Anatomy II 17 Homeostasis Part 4 Integration and Control of the Human Body 18 Nervous System and Senses 19 Musculoskeletal System Part 5 Continuance of the Species 20 Development 21 Patterns of Inheritance 22 DNA Biology and Technology 23 Genetic Counseling Part 6 Evolution and Diversity 24 Evidences of Evolution 25 Microbiology 26 Seedless Plants 27 Seed Plants 28 Introduction to Invertebrates 29 Molluscs, Annelids, and Arthropods 30 Echinoderms and Chordates Part 7 Behavior and Ecology 31 Sampling Ecosystems 32 Effects of Pollution on Ecosystems / Appendix A Preparing a Laboratory Report/Laboratory Report Form Appendix B Metric System Appendix C Classification of Organisms New LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY CONCEPTS IN BIOLOGY 12th Edition By Eldon Enger and Frederick Ross of Delta College 2007 (March 2007) / 304 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298663-1 / MHID: 0-07-298663-8 NEW TO THIS EDITION • Each exercise begins with a set of objectives detailing what the student should be able to accomplish after completing the exercise. • Each exercise begins with a “Safety Box” describing important safety procedures for the exercise. • The first exercise introduces students to the scientific method. • Each exercise has a detailed introduction describing what students will encounter in the exercise. CONTENTS Lab Exercise 1: Metric Measurement and the Scientific Method Lab Exercise 2: Atoms and Molecules Lab Exercise 3: Diffusion and Osmosis Lab Exercise 4: Structure of Some Organic Molecules Lab Exercise 5: The Microscope Lab Exercise 6: Survey of Cell Types: Structure and Function Lab Exercise 7: Enzymes Lab Exercise 8: Photosynthesis and Respiration Lab Exercise 9: The Chemistry and Ecology of Yogurt Production Lab Exercise 10: DNA and RNA: Structure and Function Lab Exercise 11: Mitosis-Cell Division Lab Exercise 12: Meiosis Lab Exercise 13: DNA Extraction Lab Exercise 14: Genetics Problems Lab Exercise 15: Genetic Ratios and Chi-Square Analysis Lab Exercise 16: Human Variation Lab Exercise 17: Sensory Abilities Lab Exercise 18: Population Demographics Lab Exercise 19: Population Genetics Simulation Lab Exercise 20: Bacterial Selection Lab Exercise 21: The Effect of Abiotic Factors on Habitat Preference Lab Exercise 22: Successional Changes in Vegetation Lab Exercise 23: Behavioral Differences in Small Mammals Lab Exercise 24: Plant Life Cycles Lab Exercise 25: Plant Structure and Function Lab Exercise 26: Natural Selection Lab Exercise 27: Species Diversity Lab Exercise 28: Frog Dissection Lab Exercise 29: Roll Call of the Animals Lab Exercise 30: Intraspecific and Interspecific Competition Appendix A: Chi-Square (Goodness of Fit) Test Appendix B: Math Review • Each lab exercise concludes with review and thought questions. 100 HED 2007 General & Human Biology100 100 9/29/2006 1:19:15 PM General & Human Biology New LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY ESSENTIALS OF BIOLOGY General Biology Non Majors & Majors Combined Textbook By Sylvia Mader 2007 (May 2006) / 304 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340341-0 / MHID: 0-07-340341-5 International Edition CONTENTS 1 Scientific Method 2 Metric Measurement and Microscopy 3 Cell Structure and Function 4 Enzymes 5 Cellular Respiration 6 Photosynthesis 7 Mitosis and Meiosis 8 Patterns of Inheritance 9 DNA Biology and Technology 10 Genetic Counseling 11 Evidences of Evolution 12 Microbiology 13 Seedless Plants and Seed Plants 14 Plant Anatomy and Growth 15 Animal Diversity 16 Basic Mammalian Anatomy I 17 Cardiovascular System 18 Chemical Aspects of Digestion 19 Basic Mammalian Anatomy II 20 Nervous System and Senses 21 Effects of Pollution on Ecosystems Appendix A: Metric System Practical Examination Answer Sheet INTERACTIVE LABORATORY AND BIOLOGICAL SIMULATIONS Version 2.0, 2nd Edition By Deanne Raineri, University of Illinois 2004 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-285012-3 / MHID: 0-07-285012-4 (CD and Workbook) Interactive Laboratories and Biological Simulations dynamically illustrate molecular genetics and biotechnology through lively, engaging tutorials and interactive, inquiry-based labs. Developed as a collaboration between instructors and students, iLaBS provides rigorous yet entertaining exercises that relate lecture and lab content to real-life applications. CONTENTS Interactive Laboratories / Cystic Fibrosis Lab (Case A) / Cystic Fibrosis Lab (Case B) / Sickle Cell Anemia Lab / Huntington’s Disease Lab / Hemophilia Lab / Restriction Mapping Lab / Solving a Murder Mystery / Lac Operon Exercise 1 / Lac Operon Exercise 2 / Biological Simulations / Basic Techniques in Molecular Biology / A Murder Mystery / The Romanov Mystery / DNA Replication / The Polymerase Chain Reaction / Sequencing / Transcription / Viruses / Regulation of Lactose (Lac) Operon New LIFE 6th Edition By Ricki Lewis, SUNY-at Albany, Bruce Parker, Utah Valley State College-Orem, Douglas Gaffin and Marielle Hoefnagels of University of Oklahoma-Norman 2007 (Jan 2006) / 1024 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322480-0 / MHID: 0-07-322480-4 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110802-7 / MHID: 0-07-110802-5 [IE] Classroom concepts “come to life” with this exciting new edition of Life by Lewis, Parker, Gaffin and Hoefnagels. For over 15 years, Life has been known for its ability to weave together solid biology content with interesting stories, real-life case studies and applications to student life. The sixth edition offers the depth of content, pedagogical organization, accuracy and visual appeal to serve both majors and non-majors biology students. New to this edition McGraw-Hill’s Biology Digitized Video Clips DVD. Licensed from some of the highest-quality science video producers in the World, these brief segments range from 15 seconds to two minutes in length and cover all areas of general biology from cells to ecosystems. Of Atoms and Molecules: Chemistry Basics chapter (Chapter 2) has been separated into two distinct chapters, entitled Chemistry and Organic Molecules, to help make these concepts easier for students to master. Integrated, end-of-chapter Study Guide, containing a summary, quiz questions and additional study aids. Concise chapter opening vignettes. A dedicated Genetic Technology chapter now appears in the text, combining information into one area for cohesive coverage of topics such as cancer research, DNA replication, gene therapy and biological weapons. Features Many chapters feature a new organization of major headings within the chapter. COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog. Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com Life, 6/e is customizable. Where appropriate, chapters include genetics problems for students to solve with answers in an appendix. A carefully-developed art program coordinates colors throughout the book for instructional value. Numbered process figures walk students through key processes such as the cell cycle. Engaging writing combines solid biology content with interesting stories, real-life case studies and applications to student life. Online Learning Center located at http://www.mhhe.com/life6 Life employs a lively, story-telling style and uses current, true-life examples to engage student interest. 101 HED 2007 General & Human Biology101 101 9/29/2006 1:19:15 PM General & Human Biology CONTENTS Unit 1 From Atoms to Cells 1 What is Life? 2 Of Atoms and Molecules: Chemistry Basics 3 Life’s Chemistry 4 Cells 5 The Cell Surface and Cytoskeleton 6 The Energy of Life 7 Photosynthesis 8 How Cells Release Energy Unit 2 Genetics & Biotechnology 9 The Cell Cycle 10 Meiosis 11 How Inherited Traits are Transmitted 12 Chromosomes 13 DNA Structure and Function 14 Genetic Technology Unit 3 Evolution 15 The Evolution of Evolutionary Thought 16 The Forces of Evolutionary Change--Microevolution 17 Speciation and Extinction 18 Evidence for Evolution 19 The Origin and History of Life Unit 4 The Diversity of Life 20 Viruses 21 Bacteria and Archaea 22 Protista 23 Plantae 24 Fungi 25 Animalia I: Sponges Through Echinoderms 26 Animalia II: Chordates Unit 5 Plant Life 27 Plant Form and Function 28 Plant Nutrition and Transport 29 Reproduction of Flowering Plants 30 Plant Responses to Stimuli Unit 6 Animal Life 31 Animal Tissues and Organ Systems 32 The Nervous System 33 The Senses 34 The Endocrine System 35 The Musculoskeletal System 36 The Circulatory System 37 The Respiratory System 38 Digestion and Nutrition 39 Regulation of Temperature and Body Fluids 40 The Immune System 41 Human Reproduction and Development Unit 7 Behavior and Ecology 42 Animal Behavior 43 Populations 44 Communities and Ecosystems 45 Biomes and Aquatic Ecosystems 46 Environmental Challenges International Edition New BIOLOGY 9th Edition By Sylvia S Mader 2007 (Dec 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320928-9 / MHID: 0-07-320928-7 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110780-8 / MHID: 0-07-110780-0 [IE] Biology is a comprehensive introductory biology textbook for non-majors or mixed-majors courses that covers biology in a traditional order from the structure and function of the cell to the organization of the biosphere. The book, which centers on the evolution and diversity of organisms, is appropriate for a one- or two-semester course. It’s no wonder that Sylvia Mader’s Biology continues to be a text that’s appreciated as much by instructors as it is by the students who use it. The ninth edition is the epitome of Mader’s expertise: Its concise, precise writing uses an economy of words to present the material as succinctly and clearly as possible, thereby enabling students--even nonmajors--to understand the concepts without necessarily asking the instructor to explain further. New to this edition McGraw-Hill’s Biology Digitized Video Clips DVD. Licensed from some of the highest-quality science video producers in the world, these brief segments range from 15 seconds to two minutes in length and cover all areas of general biology from cells to ecosystems. Approximately 70 new animations of key biological processes accompany Biology 9e. Approximately 50 of these animations are available in a Spanish version. Key content updates are based on reviewer suggestions and biological discoveries: » Chapter 9 The Cell Cycle and Cellular Reproduction This chapter was reorganized and updated. The description of stages now applies to both plant and animal cells with differences still clearly designated. A new section, “The Functions of Mitosis,” includes a Science Focus reading on Reproductive and Therapeutic Cloning. The cancer section has been completely rewritten to include the origin of cancer and how it relates to the regulation of the cell cycle. The action of oncogenes and tumor repressor genes is stressed. » Chapter 15 Regulation of Gene Activity and Gene Mutations The importance of gene activity control has taken on new significance because we now know that humans have far fewer genes than previously estimated before the sequencing of the human genome. This chapter was revised to reflect the importance of chromatin organization, transcription factors and activators to the control of gene activity within the nucleus. Translational control within the cytoplasm including the possible role of RNA to expand each gene’s functions is discussed as is the importance of gene mutations to the development of cancer. » Chapter 16 Biotechnology and Genomics This chapter updated and the topic of genomics was expanded to include a discussion of a genomic profile, proteomics, and bioinformatics. The importance of all these advances for improved health care is explored. » Chapter 18 Process of Evolution This chapter was reorganized to include a section on microevolution and macroevolution. Under macroevolution a more thorough discussion of speciation due to reproductive isolating mechanisms precedes real-life examples of allopatric speciation. » Chapter 20 Classification of Living Organisms This chapter was rewritten and now includes a better explanation of the phylogenetic tree and its relationship to the classification and evolutionary relationships between organisms. The utilization of molecular data to guide classification from domain to species is stressed. A new Science Focus reading describes the proposal to use DNA differences as a basis to develop bar codes for all living species. » Chapter 23 The Fungi This chapter was reorganized to reflect the classification of fungi based on DNA sequencing. Fungi previously classified as imperfect fungi have been incorporated into the ascomycetes, and this chapter now has an expanded discussion of the sac fungi and their relationship to human beings. » Chapter 25 Structure and Organization of Plants A generalized flowering plant has been developed to present the basics of plant anatomy. New additional structural information pervades this chapter, which seeks to have students understand the overall functioning of a flowering plant. The discussion of primary versus secondary growth has been expanded to provide a better explanation for plant growth. » Part VI Animal Evolution This part has been reorganized to be consistent with molecular data regarding the relationship of groups of animals. Traditional classification is the backbone of this part but new hypotheses regarding the classification of animals are introduced. To accommodate the new hypotheses, Chapter 30 now includes molluscs, annelids, arthropods and echinoderms. Chapter 31 is devoted exclusively to the vertebrates. » Chapter 33 Animal Organization and Homeostasis Reorganization of each section in this chapter will lead to better student understanding of tissues, organs, and organ systems. Professors will particularly appreciate the new homeostasis diagrams that explain negative feedback mechanisms. A new Health Focus regarding nerve regeneration stresses advances in this field and touches on the possible use of stem cells to cure paralysis. » Chapter 35 Lymph Transport and Immunity This chapter has been updated and revised to include updated explanations of nonspecific and specific defenses. New data regarding the role of chronic inflammatory response to human illnesses is included. This chapter also has a new Health Focus reading regarding Opportunistic Infections and HIV. » Chapter 42 Hormones and the Endocrine Systems This chapter now begins with an overview of the endocrine system, which includes a contrast between hormone and nervous signaling. An in-depth look at hormone signaling follows. The review of endocrine glands and their hormones includes an updated discussion of diabetes mellitus. » Chapter 44 Animal Development This chapter is reorganized to present a more logical progression of animal developmental stages before developmental processes are explained. The discussion of developmental processes places an emphasis on experimental data to explain the orderliness of development. As before, the chapter ends with a look at the stages of human development. » Chapter 46 Ecology of Populations This chapter was reorganized and rewritten to better present the modern principles of population ecology. The sections now include demographics of populations, population growth models, and regulation of population size before life history patterns and human population growth is considered. 102 HED 2007 General & Human Biology102 102 9/29/2006 1:19:15 PM General & Human Biology Laboratory Phonetic pronunciations have been added to the Glossary. All text, artwork, and photos necessary to understand a particular concept (e.g., prokaryotic vs. eukaryotic replication) appear either on the same page or facing pages. Features Every piece of artwork in Biology 9e is either new or revised. Additionally, scores of photographs are new to this edition. The new creative paging process retains the functional page spreads but enhances the role of art and photos in creating the most effective and appealing pages possible. Multi-level perspective figures combine macroscopic (e.g., section of intestine) and microscopic (micrograph slice of intestinal tissue) images to illustrate subject from larger to smaller. See body systems chapters for many examples. The accompanying Online Learning Center serves as a comprehensive study tool for students and location for a vast array of teaching resources for instructors. Online Learning Center content examples include sample quiz questions, learning objectives, flashcards, art labeling exercises, and access to current articles and research. Brief “Focus” boxes covering Science, Health, and Ecology present relevant applications issues to students. Bioethical Issue topics end many chapters and present both side of contemporary issues such as the use of alternative medicines available over the counter. New LAB MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY BIOLOGY 9th Edition By Sylvia S Mader 2007 (March 2006) / 576 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298955-7 / MHID: 0-07-298955-6 The Laboratory Manual to accompany Biology reflects all of the exceptional features of the Biology text. Instructors appreciate the refined exercises that are so numerous you won’t need to look anywhere else for student activities. Author Sylvia Mader’s writing in the laboratory manual, just as in the text, emphasizes clarity, with carefully worded study questions that are direct in their intent and purpose. The lab manual’s accessible writing accompanies unparalleled illustrations to provide students with clear exercises and questions. The visuals have been updated to be even easier for students--both majors and non-majors--to comprehend. The dramatic illustrations and photographs not only help students understand concepts and process, but also give them an appreciation for the beauty of organisms and biological structure. McGraw-Hill’s Biology Digitized Video Clips on the accompanying DVD will capture students’ interest while illustrating key biological concepts and processes. Connecting the Concepts boxes appear at the end of most chapters and establish connections between the concepts of the chapter and other concepts throughout the book. Features Full-Color Customization--Professors have the option of creating a customized version of the text by selecting only the chapters they cover in lecture, providing students with significant savings in book costs. Customization can occur in two ways:--Chapter-by-chapter color customized printed book or a full-color Primis eBook. A Laboratory Resource Guide is featured on the Instructor Edition of the Online Learning Center. Contents 1 A View of Life Part I The Cell 2 Basic Chemistry 3 The Chemistry of Organic Molecules 4 Cell Structure and Function 5 Membrane Structure and Function 6 Metabolism: Energy and Enzymes 7 Photosynthesis 8 Cellular Respiration Part II Genetic Basis of Life 9 The Cell Cycle and Cellular Reproduction 10 Meiosis and Sexual Reproduction 11 Mendelian Patterns of Inheritance 12 Chromosomal Patterns of Inheritance 13 DNA Structure and Functions 14 Gene Activity: How Genes Work 15 Regulation of Gene Activity and Gene Mutations 16 Biotechnology and Genomics Part III Evolution 17 Darwin and Evolution 18 Process of Evolution 19 Origin and History of Life 20 Classification of Living Things Part IV Microbiology and Evolution 21 Viruses, Bacteria, and Archaea 22 The Protists 23 The Fungi Part V Plant Evolution and Biology 24 Evolution and Diversity of Plants 25 Structure and Organization of Plants 26 Nutrition and Transport in Plants 27 Control of Growth and Responses in Plants 28 Reproduction in Plants Part VI Animal Evolution 29 Introduction to Invertebrates 30 More Invertebrates 31 Vertebrates 32 Human Evolution Part VII Comparative Animal Biology 33 Animal Organization and Homeostasis 34 Circulation and Cardiovascular Systems 35 Lymph Transport and Immunity 36 Digestive Systems and Nutrition 37 Respiratory Systems 38 Body Fluid Regulation and Excretory Systems 39 Neurons and Nervous Systems 40 Sense Organs 41 Locomotion and Support Systems 42 Hormones and the Endocrine Systems 43 Reproductive Systems 44 Animal Development Part VIII Behavior and Ecology 45 Animal Behavior 46 Ecology of Populations 47 Community Ecology 48 Ecosystems and Human Interferences 49 The Biosphere 50 Conservation Biology All labs stress the scientific method. Customization. An adopting professor has the option of creating a full-color customized version of this lab manual by selecting only the exercises covered in a particular lab course. Adding additional professor-developed exercises is easy as well. Integrated Opening. Each laboratory begins with a list of learning objectives that are organized according to the major sections of the laboratory. Self-Contained Content. Each lab contains all the background information necessary to understand the concepts being studied and to answer the questions asked. Student Activities. A color bar is used to designate a student activity. Some student activities are observations and some are experimental procedures. An icon appears whenever a procedure requires a period of time before results can be viewed. Sequentially numbered steps guide students as they perform an activity. Contents Preface / To the Instructor / To the Student / Laboratory Safety / 1 Scientific Method 2 Metric Measurement and Microscopy 3 Chemical Composition of Cells 4 Cell Structure and Function 5 Enzymes 6 Photosynthesis 7 Cellular Respiration 8 Mitosis and Meiosis 9 Mendelian Genetics 10 Human Genetics 11 DNA and Biotechnology 12 Evidences of Evolution 13 Mechanisms in Evolution: Genetic Drift and Natural Selection 14 Bacteria and Protists 15 Fungi 16 Nonvascular and Seedless Vascular Plants 17 Seed Plants 18 Organization of Flowering Plants 19 Water Absorption and Transport in Plants 20 Control of Plant Growth and Responses 21 Reproduction in Plants 22 Introduction to Invertebrates 23 The Protostomes 24 The Deuterostomes 25 Animal Organization 26 Basic Mammalian Anatomy I 27 Basic Mammalian Anatomy II 28 Chemical Aspects of Digestion 29 Homeostasis 30 Nervous System and Senses 31 Musculoskeletal System 32 Animal Development 33 Symbiotic Relationships 34 Sampling Ecosystems 35 Effects of Pollution on Ecosystems 103 HED 2007 General & Human Biology103 103 9/29/2006 1:19:15 PM General & Human Biology INTERACTIVE LABORATORY AND BIOLOGICAL SIMULATIONS Version 2.0, 2nd Edition By Deanne Raineri, University of Illinois 2004 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-285012-3 / MHID: 0-07-285012-4 (CD and Workbook) Interactive Laboratories and Biological Simulations dynamically illustrate molecular genetics and biotechnology through lively, engaging tutorials and interactive, inquiry-based labs. Developed as a collaboration between instructors and students, iLaBS provides rigorous yet entertaining exercises that relate lecture and lab content to real-life applications. CONTENTS Interactive Laboratories / Cystic Fibrosis Lab (Case A) / Cystic Fibrosis Lab (Case B) / Sickle Cell Anemia Lab / Huntington’s Disease Lab / Hemophilia Lab / Restriction Mapping Lab / Solving a Murder Mystery / Lac Operon Exercise 1 / Lac Operon Exercise 2 / Biological Simulations / Basic Techniques in Molecular Biology / A Murder Mystery / The Romanov Mystery / DNA Replication / The Polymerase Chain Reaction / Sequencing / Transcription / Viruses / Regulation of Lactose (Lac) Operon International Edition SCHAUM’S 3000 SOLVED PROBLEMS IN BIOLOGY By Stephen Bernstein and Ruth Bernstein of University of Colorado at Boulder 1989 / 406 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-005022-8 / MHID: 0-07-005022-8 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-099157-6 / MHID: 0-07-099157-X [IE] ]A Schaum Professional Publication] (International Edition is not for sale in Japan) FEATURES • Evolution--A strong evolutionary approach The author team delivers a clear theme of evolution through natural selection through out each chapter by use of genomes and proteomes. This engages students who are reading popular press about these topics and encourages their study of biology. It sets the stage of future biology courses and/or career opportunities. • Content--Top notch and break through content Provides the most accurate and up to date reference book on the market that will assist students throughout their college career and beyond. The Brooker texts will also provide a useful resource to students. • Investigative Approach--From the first chapter, the Brooker author team guides the reader through how the investigation of living things leads to discoveries that no one would have imagined. This is emphasized in the Feature Investigation boxes throughout the text. Each Feature Investigation highlights important experiments in the various fields of biology and the relevance to the discoveries. • Art--Instructive visuals The student can understand what is going on in the figures/photos with out necessarily reading the narrative. Visual learners will especially benefit from the clear and concise art/photos. Brand new art, all consistent! • Integrated Scientific method--You get the traditional TOC, but the benefit of integrated feature investigations throughout the narrative at appropriate areas in every chapter. • Strong Author Team--The best education tool is available with this new textbook because this new author team is current researchers, active/award-winning teachers, and experienced authors with current textbooks in their field of expertise. • Balanced pedagogy--Everything in the book is important and the student is not overwhelmed by lots of pedagogy (boxes, tables, insights…). • 360 Degree Development Plan--The development of Brooker Biology has truly gone full circle to guarantee customers the most accurate, authoritative new majors biology textbook ever launched in this market. This plan includes: General Biology Majors Textbook New BIOLOGY By Robert Brooker, University of Minnesota-Minneapolis, Eric Widmaier, Boston University, Linda Graham, University of WisconsinMadison and Peter Stiling, University of South Florida-Tampa 2008 (January 2007) / 1488 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326807-1 / MHID: 0-07-326807-0 Coming in January 2007, McGraw-Hill will publish the most carefully developed NEW biology textbook in the history of our company. Brooker et al Biology combines the talent of four active researchers and experienced textbook authors to create a comprehensive modern text featuring an evolutionary focus with an emphasis on scientific inquiry.--Four active researchers--Four experienced text authors--Comprehensive and modern approach--Evolutionary focus--Emphasizes scientific inquiry-Realistic, integrated (3-D) visual program 7 Developmental Focus Groups – 1 for each unit of the book. Never before done in publishing development….Each unit was extensively reviewed and critiqued by experts in the field from across the country to make sure the development of this textbook met the needs of instructors/students. This step was taken with the authors present to improve the early draft writing of the manuscript. 6 Freelance Developmental Editors--A monumental undertaking to bring in a large staff of developmental editors to make sure the content was accurate, concise, and well connected between the other authors and it’s important illustration program. Steps Taken to Assure Accuracy--*11 Accuracy Checkers *3 Photo Consultants *Board of Consultants for Textbook *Board of Consultants for Media CONTENTS 1 An Introduction to Biology Unit 1 Chemistry 2 The Chemical Basis of Life I: Atoms, Molecules, and Water 3 The Chemical Basis of Life II: Organic Molecules Unit 2 Cell 4 General Features of Cells 5 Membrane Structure and Transport 6 Systems Biology of Cell Organization 7 Enzymes, Metabolism and Cellular Respiration 8 Photosynthesis 9 Cell Communication and Regulation of the Cell Cycle 10 Multicellularity Unit 3 Genetics 11 Nucleic Acid Structure and DNA Replication 12 Gene Expression at the Molecular Level 13 Gene Regulation 14 Mutation, DNA Repair, and Cancer 15 Eukaryotic Chromosomes, Mitosis, and Meiosis 16 Simle Patterns of Inheritance 17 Complex Patterns of Inheritance 18 Genetics of Bacteria and Viruses 19 Developmental Genetics 20 Genetic Technology 21 Genomes, Proteomes, and Bioinformatics 104 HED 2007 General & Human Biology104 104 9/29/2006 1:19:15 PM General & Human Biology Unit 4 Evolution 22 Origin and History of Life 23 An Introduction to Evolution 24 Population Genetics 25 Origin of Species 26 Taxonomy and Systematics Unit 5 Diversity 27 The Bacteria and Archaea 28 Protists 29 The Kingdom Fungi 30 Plants and the Conquest of Land 31 The Diversity of Modern Gymnosperms and Angiosperms 32 An Introduction to Animal Diversity 33 The Invertebrates 34 Vertebrates Unit 6 Plants 35 An Introduction to Flowering Plants 36 Flowering Plants: Behavior 37 Flowering Plants: Nutrition 38 Flowering Plants: Transport 39 Flowering Plants: Reproduction and Development Unit 7 Animals 40 Introduction to Animal Form and Function 41 Nutrition, Digestion, and Absorption 42 Control of Energy Balance, Metabolic Rate, and Body Temperature 43 Neuroscience I: Cells of the Nervous System 44 Neuroscience II: Evolution and Function of the Brain and Nervous Systems 45 Neuroscience III: Sensory Systems 46 The Muscular-Skeletal System and Locomotion 47 Circulatory Systems 48 Gas Exchange 49 Excretory Systems and Salt and Water Balance 50 Endocrine Systems 51 Animal Reproduction 52 Animal Development 53 Defense Mechanisms of the Body Unit 8 Ecology 54 An Introduction to Ecology and Biomes 55 Behavioral Ecology 56 Population Ecology 57 Species Interactions 58 Community Ecology 59 Ecosystem Ecology 60 Conservation Biology and Biodiversity • Experimental Focus--The authors use existing scientific evidence to reinforce biological concepts within the narrative when a particularly elegant story exists. Talking about actual experiments within the flow of text, rather than a boxed reading or solitary figure, helps students make the connection between actual people doing science and the contents of the textbook they are reading. • Updated Molecular Coverage--The team has brought more modern information by incorporating even more molecular information throughout the text, which is most evident in the evolution section where two new chapters on molecular evolution have been added. • Organizational Changes * Pattern of Inheritance divided into two chapters allowing more focus on heredity and Mendelian principles, and the expanded explanation of chromosomal theory of inheritance(12 & 13). * Evolution Unit--Expanded coverage of Evolution based on latest research in molecular biology. Jonathon Losos of Harvard expanded and updated this key unit of text. Moved Systematics & Phylogeny Chapter to this unit from Diversity unit. = new chapter 23. Split old chapter 24 into two new chapters: International Edition New BIOLOGY 8th Edition By Peter Raven, Missouri Botanical Gardens, George Johnson, Washington University-St Louis, Kenneth Mason, Purdue University-West Lafayette, Jonathan Losos, Washington University-St Louis and Susan Singer, Carleton College 2008 (January 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322739-9 / MHID: 0-07-322739-0 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110202-5 / MHID: 0-07-110202-7 [IE] BIOLOGY is an authoritative majors textbook with evolution as a unifying theme. In revising the text, McGraw-Hill has consulted extensively with previous users, noted experts and professors in the field. It is distinguished from other texts by its strong emphasis on natural selection and the evolutionary process that explains biodiversity. The new 8th edition will feature the latest in cutting edge content reflective of the rapid advances in Biology and will also offer a Dynamic, Realistic, Accurate New Visual Program. NEW TO THIS EDITION • Dynamic Author Team--This new team is comprised of Susan Singer, Plant Geneticist--Carleton College, Jonathan Losos, Evolutionary Biologist--Harvard University, and Ken Mason, Molecular Biologist--Purdue University have joined forces and completely overhauled the textbook. They were able to successfully modernize the content of the material, while maintaining the historical context to the subject matter. • Thorough Reorganization of Material--The author team worked closely in conjunction with a copy editor to create a sense of unity, providing a seamless and balanced presentation of the material. The material has been reorganized, including splitting excessively long chapters into more manageable components where appropriate. These adjustments were made in response to feedback from our many reviewers Part of the reorganization has been to ensure that a tightly structured pedagogical framework is carried throughout each chapter. This consistent flow gives the student a better learning tool. It also allows an instructor ease in assigning or eliminating specific sections from a chapter. • Strengthened Evolutionary Emphasis--From the inception of Biology, evolution has been the underlying theme of the text. The Eighth edition has been written with an even greater focus on evolution, beginning with the first chapter and more consistently threaded it throughout the entire text. There has been a significant increase of coverage at the molecular level to create more depth in this area, again balancing the amount of evolutionary coverage throughout. 24 Genome Evolution 25 Evolution of Development * Systematics and the Phylogenetic Revolution Chapter (23) has been greatly expanded creating this new chapter. Systematics * Expanded Diversity Unit--Chapter 26. This new dedicated chapter on diversity coverage was developed by taking content from the previous edition, plus adding new information on key events in evolution. This chapter can be used as a stand alone chapter for instructors who are only able to cover a small amount of diversity in their course. Includes Expanded coverage of new molecular understanding of phylogeny * Animal Unit--Reorganized and expanded coverage of animal biology starting with Nervous System (like Campbell) • A.R.I.S.--McGraw-Hill’s ARIS (Assessment, Review, and Instruction System) is an electronic homework and course management system which is designed for greater flexibility, power, and ease of use than any other system. Homework is easy-to-assign, automatically graded, and recorded in a robust grade book. Instructors can even share their course materials and assignments with colleagues. Whether you are looking for a “ready-to-use-straight-out-of-the-box” system or one you can customize to fit your specific course needs, ARIS is your solution. Contact your local McGraw-Hill Publisher’s representative for more information on getting started with ARIS. CONTENTS Part I The Molecular Basis of Life 1 The Science of Biology 2 The Nature of Molecules 3 The Chemical Building Blocks of Life Part II Biology of the Cell 4 Cell Structure 5 Membranes 6 Energy and Metabolism 7 How Cells Harvest Energy 8 Photosynthesis 9 Cell-Cell Interactions 10 How Cells Divide Part III Genetic and Molecular Biology 11 Sexual Reproduction and Meiosis 12 Patterns of Inheritance 13 Chromosomes, Mapping and the Meiosis—Inheritance Connection 14 DNA: The Genetic Material 15 Genes and How They Work 16 Control of Gene Expression 17 Biotechnology 18 Genomics 19 Cellular Mechanisms of Development Part IV Evolution 20 Genes Within Populations 21 The Evidence for Evolution 22 The Origin of Species 23 Systematics and the Phylogenetic Revolution 24 Genome Evolution 25 Evolution of Development Part V Diversity of Life on Earth 26 Tree of Life 27 Viruses 28 Prokaryotes 29 Protists 30 Overview of Plant Diversity 31 Fungi 32 Overview of Animal Diversity 33 Noncoelomate Invertebrates 34 Coelomate Invertebrates 35 Vertebrates Part VI Plant Form and Function 36 Plant Form 37 Vegetative Plant Development 38 Transport in Plants 39 Plant Nutrition 40 Plant Defense Responses 41 Sensory Systems in Plants 42 Plant Reproduction Part VII Animal Form and Function 43 The Animal Body and Principles of Regulation 44 The Nervous System 45 Sensory Systems 46 The Endocrine System 47 The Musculoskeletal System 48 The Digestive System 49 The Circulatory and Respiratory Systems 50 Temperature, Osmotic Regulation and the Urinary System 105 HED 2007 General & Human Biology105 105 9/29/2006 1:19:16 PM General & Human Biology 51 The Integumentary & Immune Systems 52 The Reproductive Systems 53 Animal Development Part VIII Ecology and Behavior 54 Behavioral Biology 55 Population Ecology 56 Community Ecology 57 Dynamics of Ecosystems 58 The Biosphere 59 Conservation Biology Laboratory International Edition New BIOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS LAB MANUAL 8th Edition and Working with Plasmids 13 Testing Assumptions in Microevolution and Inducing Mutations 14 Working with Diverse Bacteria 15 Diversity Among Protists 16 Investigating Plant Phylogeny: Seedless Plants 17 Investigating Plant Phylogeny: Seed Plants 18 Observing Fungal Diversity and Symbiotic Relationships 19 Investigating Early Events in Animal Development 20 Animal Phylogeny: Investigating Animal Body Plans 21 Protostomes I: Lophotrochozoans and Development of Complexity 22 Protostomes II: Ecdysozoa and Great Diversity 23 Deuterostomes and the Origins of Vertebrates 24 Investigating Plant Tissues and Primary Root Structure 25 Investigating Primary Roots, Stems and Secondary Growth 26 Investigating Leaf Structure and Photosynthesis 27 Angiosperm Reproduction, Germination, and Development Interchapter Investigating Animal Form and Function 28 Investigating Digestive and Gas Exchange Systems 29 Investigating Circulatory Systems 30 Investigating the Mammalian Urogenital System 31 Investigating the Properties of Muscle and Skeletal Systems 32 Investigating Nervous and Sensory Systems 33 Statistically Analyzing Simple Behaviors 34 Estimating Population Size and Growth Appendix A Significant Figures and Rounding Appendix B Making Graphs Appendix C Simple Statistics Appendix D Writing Lab Reports and Scientific Papers By Warren Dolphin, Iowa State University 2008 (January 2007) / 512 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299287-8 / MHID: 0-07-299287-5 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110201-8 / MHID: 0-07-110201-9 [IE] This independent lab manual can be used for a one or two-semester majors level general biology lab and can be used with any majors-level general biology textbook. The labs are investigative and ask students to use more critical thinking and handson learning. The author emphasizes investigative, quantitative, and comparative approaches to studying the life sciences. NEW TO THIS EDITION • The instructor’s manual to the lab manual can be found at www. mhhe.com/labcentral • Revised Art Program--More than 90 figures have been reived or replaced throughout the textbook. • How To Evaluate Web Material--Information on evaluating material gathered on the web has been added to Lab Topic 1. FEATURES • Emphasis on Hypothesis Testing--Throughout the manual, the concept of hypothesis testing as the basic method of inquiry has been emphasized. Students are asked to form hypotheses to be tested during their lab work and then are asked to reach a conclusion to accept or reject their hypotheses. • Labs Consistently Organized--Icons throughout the lab manual distinguish activities and critical thinking questions. • “Understanding Scientific Terminology”--This useful chart is located on the inside of the back cover of the Lab Manual. This is a table of Greek and Latin prefixes and suffixes that will help students decipher the meaning of scientific terminology. • Customizeable!--Instructors can customize this text using our do-ityourself website! The Primis Content Center features more than one million items, including this and hundreds of other best-selling McGrawHill textbooks, laboratories, case studies, and readings. These materials, along with others including your own notes, can be customized into a black and white, high resolution printed textbook or a full-color Primis eBook that saves your students 1/3 off bookstore prices. Log on to our website, register, and create your own complimentary copy. www. primiscontentcenter.com CONTENTS 1 Science: A Way of Gathering Knowledge 2 Techniques in Microscopy 3 Cellular Structure Reflects Function 4 Determining How Materials Enter Cells 5 Using Quantitative Techniques and Statistics 6 Modeling Biological Molecules 7 Determining the Properties of an Enzyme 8 Measuring Cellular Respiration 9 Determining Chromosome Number in Mitotic Cells 10 Observing Meiosis and Determining Cross-Over Frequency 11 Determining Genotypes of Fruit Flies 12 Isolating DNA New BIOLOGY LABORATORY MANUAL 8th Edition By Darrell S Vodopich, Baylor University and Randy Moore, University of Minnesota-Minneapolis 2008 (January 2007) / 576 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299522-0 / MHID: 0-07-299522-X This laboratory manual is designed for an introductory majors biology course with a broad survey of basic laboratory techniques. The experiments and procedures are simple, safe, easy to perform, and especially appropriate for large classes. Few experiments require a second class-meeting to complete the procedure. Each exercise includes many photographs, traditional topics, and experiments that help students learn about life. Procedures within each exercise are numerous and discrete so that an exercise can be tailored to the needs of the students, the style of the instructor, and the facilities available. NEW TO THIS EDITION • Clearer information on Safety--A new safety icon will be used throughout the text, replacing the current “CAUTION” that appears in red font. Plus a Laboratory Safety Rules table has been added to the Welcome chapter. • Process of Science Exercises--A new exercises on Process of Science now appears in Chapter 1. • New Figures and Tables--More than 70 tables and figures have been extended with additions, revisions or replacements. FEATURES • Clearly Marked Steps--Procedures have been numbered consecutively and the steps of the procedures have been highlighted within each exercise making it easier for students to follow the necessary steps. • Objectives Clearly Identified--The objectives of the labs and the steps of each procedure are clearly identified to help students identify the goals of the lab and how to achieve them. • Critical Thinking Skills Enhanced--Questions embedded within the procedures help students see the big picture by making them think beyond the next step in the procedure. Questions are available on the website as a handout, which enables the instructor to collect the answers to these questions if desired. 106 HED 2007 General & Human Biology106 106 9/29/2006 1:19:16 PM General & Human Biology • “How to Write a Scientific Paper or Lab Report”--This useful information has been moved from an appendix to the Front Matter directly before the first exercise. • Optional Writing Assignments--Writing to Learn Biology and Doing Biology Yourself activites found throughout the manual provide further avenues of study, and give students an opportunity to express their understanding of biology in written form. • An investigation section at the end of most labs walks students through the process of designing an experiment based on what they just learned. • Instructor’s Manual--The instructor’s manual to the lab manual can be found at www.mhhe.com/labcentral • Fully Customizable--Instructors can customize this text using our doit-yourself website! The Primis Content Center features more than one million items, including this and hundreds of other best-selling McGrawHill textbooks, laboratories, case studies, and readings. These materials, along with others including your own notes, can be customized into a black and white, high resolution printed textbook or a full-color Primis eBook that saves your students 1/3 off bookstore prices. Log on to our website, register, and create your own complimentary copy. www. primiscontentcenter.com INTERACTIVE LABORATORY AND BIOLOGICAL SIMULATIONS Version 2.0, 2nd Edition By Deanne Raineri, University of Illinois 2004 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-285012-3 / MHID: 0-07-285012-4 (CD and Workbook) Interactive Laboratories and Biological Simulations dynamically illustrate molecular genetics and biotechnology through lively, engaging tutorials and interactive, inquiry-based labs. Developed as a collaboration between instructors and students, iLaBS provides rigorous yet entertaining exercises that relate lecture and lab content to real-life applications. CONTENTS Interactive Laboratories / Cystic Fibrosis Lab (Case A) / Cystic Fibrosis Lab (Case B) / Sickle Cell Anemia Lab / Huntington’s Disease Lab / Hemophilia Lab / Restriction Mapping Lab / Solving a Murder Mystery / Lac Operon Exercise 1 / Lac Operon Exercise 2 / Biological Simulations / Basic Techniques in Molecular Biology / A Murder Mystery / The Romanov Mystery / DNA Replication / The Polymerase Chain Reaction / Sequencing / Transcription / Viruses / Regulation of Lactose (Lac) Operon CONTENTS 1 Scientific Methods 2 Measurements in Biology: The Metric System and Data Analysis 3 The Microscope: Basic Skills of Light Microscopy 4 The Cell: Structure and Function 5 Solutions, Acids, and Bases: The pH Scale 6 Biologically Important Molecules: Carbohydrates, Proteins, Lipids, and Nucleic Acids 7 Separating Organic Compounds: Column Chromatography, Paper Chromatography, and Gel Electrophoresis 8 Spectrophotometry: Identifying Solutes and Determining Their Concentration 9 Diffusion and Osmosis: Passive Movements of Molecules in Biologal Systems 10 Cellular Membranes: Effects of Physical and Chemical Stress 11 Enzymes: Factors Affecting the Rate of Activity 12 Respiration: Aerobic and Anaerobic Oxidation of Organic Molecules 13 Photosynthesis: Pigment Separation, Starch Production, and CO2 Uptake 14 Mitosis: Replication of Eukaryotic Cells 15 Meiosis: Reduction Division and Gametogenesis 16 Molecular Biology and Biotechnology: DNA Isolation and Bacterial Transformation 17 Genetics: The Principles of Mendel 18 Evolution: Natural Selection and Morphological Change in Green Algae 19 Human Evolution: Skull Examination 20 Ecology: Diversity and Interaction in Plant Communities 21 Community Succession 22 Population Growth: Limitations of the Environment 23 Pollution: The Effect of Chemical, Thermal, and Acid Pollution 24 Survey of Bacteria: Kingdoms Archaebacteria and Bacteria 25 Survey of the Kingdom Protista: The Algae 26 Survey of the Kingdom Protista: Protozoa and Slime Molds 27 Survey of the Kingdom Fungi: Molds, Sac Fungi, Mushrooms, and Lichens 28 Survey of the Plant Kingdom: Liverworts, Mosses, and Hornworts of Phyla Hepaticophyta, Bryophyta, and Anthocerophyta 29 Survey of the Plant Kingdom: Seedles Vascular Plants of Phyla Pterophyta and Lycophyta 30 Survey of the Plant Kingdom: Gymnosperms of Phyla Cycadophyta, Ginkgophyta, Coniferophyta, and Gnetophyta 31 Survey of the Plant Kingdom: Angiosperms 32 Plant Anatomy: Vegetative Structure of Vascular Plants 33 Plant Physiology: Transpiration 34 Plant Physiology: Tropisms, Nutrition, and Growth Regulators 35 Bioassay: Measuring Physiologically Active Substances 36 Survey of the Animal Kingdom: Phyla Porifera and Cnidaria 37 Survey of the Animal Kingdom: Phyla Platyhelminthes and Nematoda 38 Survey of the Animal Kingdom: Phyla Mollusca and Annelida 39 Survey of the Animal Kingdom: Phylum Arthropoda 40 Survey of the Animal Kingdom: Phyla Echinodermata, Hemichordata, and Chordata 41 Vertebrate Animal Tissues: Epithelial, Connective, Muscular, and Nervous Tissues 42 Human Biology: The Human Skeletal System 43 Human Biology: Muscles and Muscle Contraction 44 Human Biology: Breathing 45 Human Biology: Circulation and Blood Pressure 46 Human Biology: Sensory Perception 47 Vertebrate Anatomy: External Features and Skeletal System of the Rat 48 Vertebrate Anatomy: Muscles and Internal Organs of the Rat 49 Vertebrate Anatomy: Urogenital and Circulatory Systems of the Rat 50 Embryology: Comparative Morphologies and Strategies of Development 51 Animal Behavior: Taxis, Kinesis, and Agonistic Behavior Human Biology Textbook International Edition New HUMAN BIOLOGY 10th Edition By Sylvia Mader 2008 (February 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298686-0 / MHID: 0-07-298686-7 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330934-7 / MHID: 0-07-330934-6 (ARIS) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-128579-7 / MHID: 0-07-128579-2 [IE] This market leading human biology text emphasizes the relationships of humans to other living things. Human Biology remains user friendly; relevancy and pedagogy are among its strengths. In this edition, as in previous editions, each chapter presents the topic clearly and distinctly so that students will feel capable of achieving an adult level of understanding. Detailed, highlevel scientific data and terminology are not included because Dr. Mader believes that true knowledge consists of working concepts rather than technical facility. NEW TO THIS EDITION • New Artwork!--New art will be presented throughout the text. Several of the new figures have been created specifically for Human Biology incorporating a new updated style. Chapter summaries will also be more visually focused with the addition of art and sections of art brought into the summary. • A.R.I.S.--McGraw-Hill’s ARIS--Assessment, Review, and Instruction System for Human Biology, 10/e is a complete electronic homework and course management system. Instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. Instructors can edit questions and algorithms, import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of easy-to-assign algorithmically generated homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a student is registered in the course, all student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. Contact your 107 HED 2007 General & Human Biology107 107 9/29/2006 1:19:16 PM General & Human Biology Laboratory local McGraw-Hill Publisher’s representative for more information on getting started with ARIS. • New Chapter Openers Throughout--Each chapter begins with an engaging, real-life vignette that captures the student’s attention. The vignette is referenced throughout the chapter with connections/applications woven into the chapter and finally at the end of the chapter students are asked to consider the vignette in light of the chapter concepts by discussing critical-thinking questions related to the chapter opener. • Human Disease Coverage Expanded--Human Disease coverage has been enhanced and is covered as each system is discussed. Additionally each of these chapters will have a Disease and Disorder section. • Updated Genetics Coverage--The entire genetics chapter has been updated to include the most recent information possible. This edition now combines genetics and genetic counseling topics in one chapter. New LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY HUMAN BIOLOGY 10th Edition By Sylvia Mader 2008 (March 2007) / 320 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298690-7 / MHID: 0-07-298690-5 (Details unavailable at press time) FEATURES • Updated Boxed Readings Throughout--Human Biology features three different types of boxed readings. Theses readings have been thoroughly updated by Dr. Mader, as well as experts in the field, throughout the book to remain current. Health Focus boxes provide relevant information and ideas that contribute to our overall well-being. Science Focus boxes describe how experimentation and observations have contributed to our knowledge about the living world. Bioethical Focus boxes describe modern situations that call for value judgments and challenge students to develop a point of view. • eInstruction--eInstruction is a wireless student response system that allows for the ultimate in classroom participation, giving you immediate feedback from every student. These questions can be found on the text specific website under the instructor assets. • A complete set of chapter learning aids includes a listing of chapter concepts, brief concept summaries within the chapter, boldface key terms, summary, and objective questions. Students value tools within the text that help them grasp the concepts. • Customize this book through Primis Online! This title is tentatively planned to be part of the Primis Online Database: www.mhhe.com/ primis/online • Emphasis on Homeostasis--Homeostasis is emphasized throughout the text. The homeostasis sections at the end of specific chapters and the accompanying homeostasis illustrations, have been revised for greater clarity and explain in depth how the body systems work together to maintain homeostasis. LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY HUMAN BIOLOGY 9th Edition By Sylvia S. Mader 2006 (June 2005) / 320 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-285799-3 / MHID: 0-07-285799-4 The laboratory exercises in this manual are coordinated with Human Biology, a text that has two primary functions: 1) to understand how the human body works and 2) to understand the relationship of humans to other living things in the biosphere. This laboratory manual can be adapted to a variety of course orientations and designs. There are a sufficient number of laboratories to permit a choice of activities over the length of the course. Many activities may be performed as demonstrations rather than as student activities, thereby shortening the time required to cover a particular concept. CONTENTS 1 Scientific Method 2 Metric Measurement and Microscopy 3 Chemical Composition of Cells 4 Cell Structure and Function 5 Human Body Tissues 6 Basic Mammalian Anatomy I 7 Chemical Aspects of Digestion 8 Energy Requirements and Ideal Weight 9 Cardiovascular System 10 Features of the Cardiovascular System 11 Basic Mammalian Anatomy II 12 Homeostasis 13 Musculoskeletal System 14 Nervous System and Senses 15 Human Development 16 Mitosis and Meiosis 17 Human Genetics 18 DNA and Biotechnology 19 Infectious Disease and Immunology 20 Human Evolution 21 Effects of Pollution on Ecosystems Appendix: Metric System Practical Examination Answer Sheets CONTENTS 1 Exploring Life and Science Part I Human Organization 2 Chemistry of Life 3 Cell Structure and Function 4 Organization and Regulation of Body Systems Part II Maintenance of the Human Body 5 Cardiovascular System: Heart and Blood Vessels 6 Cardiovascular System: Blood 7 Lymphatic System and Immunity 8 Digestive System and Nutrition 9 Respiratory System 10 Urinary System and Excretion Part III Movement and Support in Humans 11 Skeletal System 12 Muscular System Part IV Integration and Coordination in Humans 13 Nervous System 14 Senses 15 Endocrine System Part V Reproduction in Humans 16 Reproductive System 17 Development and Aging Part VI Human Genetics 18 Patterns of Chromosome Inheritance 19 Cancer 20 Patterns of Genetic Inheritance 21 DNA Biology and Technology Part VII Human Evolution and Ecology 22 Human Evolution 23 Global Ecology and Human Interferences 24 Human Population, Planetary Resources, and Conservation INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg 108 HED 2007 General & Human Biology108 108 9/29/2006 1:19:16 PM General & Human Biology Biology Multimedia BIOLOGY DIGITIZED VIDEO CLIPS By McGraw-Hill 2006 (August 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312155-0 / MHID: 0-07-312155-X (Details unavailable at press time) INTERACTIVE LABORATORY AND BIOLOGICAL SIMULATIONS Version 2.0, 2nd Edition MICROBES IN MOTION III CD-ROM 3rd Edition By Gloria J Delisle, Queen’s University and Lewis L Tomalty, Queen’s University/Kingston General Hospital 2002 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-233438-8 / MHID: 0-07-233438-X CONTENTS Anaerobic Bacteria / Antimicrobial Action / Antimicrobial Resistance / Bacterial Structure & Function / Control—Physical & Chemical / Environmental Microbiology / Epidemiology of Infectious Diseases / Microbial Genetics / Gram Negative Organisms / Gram Positive Organisms / Immunology / Metabolism and Growth / Miscellaneous Bacteria / Mycology/Fungal Structure and Function / Parasitology/Parasite Structure and Function / Microbial Pathogenesis—Specific Immunology / Vaccines / Virology/Viral Structure & Function / Glossary By Deanne Raineri, University of Illinois 2004 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-285012-3 / MHID: 0-07-285012-4 (CD and Workbook) BIOCOURSE.COM Interactive Laboratories and Biological Simulations dynamically illustrate molecular genetics and biotechnology through lively, engaging tutorials and interactive, inquiry-based labs. Developed as a collaboration between instructors and students, iLaBS provides rigorous yet entertaining exercises that relate lecture and lab content to real-life applications. Website: www/biocourse.com CONTENTS Interactive Laboratories / Cystic Fibrosis Lab (Case A) / Cystic Fibrosis Lab (Case B) / Sickle Cell Anemia Lab / Huntington’s Disease Lab / Hemophilia Lab / Restriction Mapping Lab / Solving a Murder Mystery / Lac Operon Exercise 1 / Lac Operon Exercise 2 / Biological Simulations / Basic Techniques in Molecular Biology / A Murder Mystery / The Romanov Mystery / DNA Replication / The Polymerase Chain Reaction / Sequencing / Transcription / Viruses / Regulation of Lactose (Lac) Operon By Mark Decker, University of Minnesota-Minneapolis 2001 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-248557-8 / MHID: 0-07-248557-4 BioCourse.Com is an electronic meeting place for students and instructors. It provides a comprehensive set of resources in one place that is up-to-date and easy to navigate. You can access BioCourse.Com from any of McGraw-Hill’s Life Science Online Learning Centers. A password for this site is packaged for free with the following 2002 copyright titles: Raven/Johnson: Biology, 6th edition; Lewis et al: Life, 4th edition; and Mader: Human Biology, 7th edition. DIGITAL ZOOLOGY VERSION 2.0 CD-ROM By Jon Houseman, University of Ottawa 2003 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-256481-5 / MHID: 0-07-256481-4 (with Workbook) Website: www.mhhe.com/digitalzoology CONTENTS Unit Names: Annelida / Apicomplexa / Arthropoda / Cheliceriformes / Ciliophora / Cnidaria / Crustacea / Ctenophora / Echinodermata / Hemichordata / Lophophores / Mesozoa / Microspora / Mollusca / Myxozoa / Nematoda / Nemertea / Other Chordata / Other Pseudocoelomates / Placozoa / Platyhelminthes / Porifera / Sarcomastigophora / Uniramia / Vertebrata / Workbook chapters: Protozoans / Porifera / Cnidaria / Platyhelminthes / Annelida / Mollusca / Nematoda, Gastrotricha, Rotifera, including Acanthocephala / Arthropoda / Bryozoa and Brachiopoda / Echinodermata /Hemichordata / Urochordata and Cephalochordata / Agnatha / Jawed Fishes / Amphibia / Mammalia COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog. Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com 109 HED 2007 General & Human Biology109 109 9/29/2006 1:19:16 PM General & Human Biology Supplements New PHOTO ATLAS FOR GENERAL BIOLOGY 2nd Edition By Dennis Strete, McLennan Communiy College and Darrell S. Vodopich, Baylor University 2007 (August 2006) / 272 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-284610-2 / MHID: 0-07-284610-0 PHOTO ATLAS FOR GENERAL BIOLOGY By Dennis Strete, McLennan Community College and Darrell Vodopich, Baylor University 2002 / 256 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-234855-2 / MHID: 0-07-234855-0 CONTENTS 1 Microscopy 2 Plant Cells 3 Animal Cells and Tissues 4 Plant Mitosis and Gametogenesis 5 Animal Cell Mitosis and Meiosis 6 Prokaryotes 7 Kingdom Protista 8 Kingdom Fungi 9 Bryophytes 10 Seedless Vascular Plants 11 Ferns 12 Gymnosperms 13 Flowering Plants 14 Invertebrate Phyla 15 Chordates 16 The Vertebrates 17 Vertebrate Dissections 18 Human Biology - Histology and Anatomy of Systems 19 Development (Details unavailable at press time) SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE OF BIOLOGY SCHAUM’S A-Z BIOLOGY By Bill Indge 2003 / 320 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141934-5 / MHID: 0-07-141934-9 [A Schaum Professional Publication] Schaum’s A-Z handbooks make excellent complements to course textbooks and test preparation guides. Ideal for ambitious high school seniors--especially AP students--and college freshmen, they feature concise, thoroughly cross-referenced definitions of hundreds of key terms and phrases that help students quickly break through the jargon barrier. Clear explanations of key concepts, supplemented with lucid illustrations, help build mastery of theory and provide a ready reference to supplement class work. By George H. Fried and George J. Hademenos 2001 / 154 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-136971-8 / MHID: 0-07-136971-6 [A Schaum Professional Publication] CONTENTS Chapter 1: The Chemistry of Life. / Chapter 2: Cell Structure and Function. / Chapter 3: The Molecular Basis of Inheritance. / Chapter 4: The Cellular Basis of Inheritance. / Chapter 5: The Mechanism of Inheritance. / Chapter 6: Classification of Prokaryotes. / Chapter 7: Classification of Eukaryotes. / Chapter 8: Plant STructure and Function. / Chapter 9: Intercellular Communication. / Chapter 10: Musculoskeletal System. / Chapter 11: Respiration and Circulation. / Chapter 12: Homeostasis and Excretion. / Chapter 13: Nurition and Digestion. / Chapter 14: Reproduction and Early Human Development. / Chapter 15: Evolution and the Origin of Life. / Chapter 16: Ecology. Each entry begins with a clear, one-sentence definition and is followed by an explanation and examples. A-to-Z format for ready reference Clear definitions and explanations, cross-referenced and enhanced with numerous worked examples and illustrations Extended explanations of more important concepts Review lists of entries that relate to main topics in the Appendix aid review SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BIOLOGY 2nd Edition By George Fried, Brooklyn College 1999 / 455 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-022405-6 / MHID: 0-07-022405-6 [A Schaum Publication] CONTENTS Part I: Fundamentals of Biology. Part II: Biology of the Cell. Part III: Genetics and Inheritance. Part IV: Plant Biology. Part V: Animal Biology. Part VI: Evolution and Ecology. Part VII: Biological Diversity. HOW TO STUDY SCIENCE 4th Edition By Kristin L.D. Milligan and Frederick W. Drewes, Suffolk Community College—Selden 2003 / 128 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-234693-0 / MHID: 0-07-234693-0 CONTENTS INVITATION TO PUBLISH 1 The Study of Science / 2 Science Classes and Instructors / 3 Bridging the Learning Pyramid / 4 The First Week and the “Two D’s” / 5 Listening and Taking Notes / 6 Time Management / 7 Study Sessions / 8 Use of Textbooks / 9 Terms, Symbols, and Figures / 10 Analyzing Figures / 11 Practice Understanding Figures / 12 Assignments and Reports / 13 Answering Essay and Math-Based Problems / 14 Tests / 15 Analyzing Results of Tests and Assignments / Appendix A Mnemonics / Appendix B Exercise Resource McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg 110 HED 2007 General & Human Biology110 110 9/29/2006 1:19:17 PM 2007-2008 NEW Geography Titles Geography~ Contents GIS................................................................................ 112 Human / Cultural Geography......................................... 113 2007 New Titles Intro to Geography........................................................ 114 Latin America................................................................ 117 Map Use / Cartography.................................................. 115 Meteorology.................................................................. 116 US & Canada................................................................. 117 BRADSHAW Contemporary World Regional Geography 2e.............................................................................116 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322272-1 / MHID: 0-07-322272-0 FELLMANN Human Geography, 9e.............................................113 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322271-4 / MHID: 0-07-322271-2 Klett International Perthes World Atlas ................................113, 115, 117 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329073-7 / MHID: 0-07-329073-4 World Regional Geography........................................... 116 2008 New Titles CHANG Introduction to Geographic Information Systems, 4e...............................................................112 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305115-4 / MHID: 0-07-305115-2 GETIS Introduction to Geography, 12e...............................114 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305126-0 / MHID: 0-07-305126-8 PRICE Mastering ARCGIS with Video Clips CD-ROM 3e.............................................................................112 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331280-4 / MHID: 0-07-331280-0 111 HED 2007 Geography.indd 111 9/29/2006 1:21:44 PM Geography GIS New INTRODUCTION TO GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEMS 4th Edition By Kang-Tsang (Karl) Chang, University of Idaho 2008 (October 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305115-4 / MHID: 0-07-305115-2 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331279-8 / MHID: 0-07-331279-7 (with Data Files CD) This book is designed to provide students in a first or second GIS course with a solid foundation in both GIS concepts and the use of GIS. Introduction to GIS strikes a careful balance between GIS concepts and hands-on applications. The main portion of the chapter presents GIS terms and concepts and helps students learn how each one fits into a complete GIS system. At the end of each chapter, an application section with 3-5 tasks presents students with actual GIS exercises and the necessary data to solve the problem. NEW TO THIS EDITION • The website provides PowerPoint files and sample test questions. The student center provides ArcView9.0 data sets and exercise instructions. • The text provides data sets and instructions for the applications section in each chapter, as well as challenge tasks, written questions, and review questions for each chapter. • Key terms are boldfaced where they first appear in the chapter and then summarized and defined with a glossary at the end of the chapter. New MASTERING ARCGIS WITH VIDEO CLIPS CD-ROM 3rd Edition By Maribeth Price, South Dakota School Mines & Technology 2008 (January 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331280-4 / MHID: 0-07-331280-0 Mastering ArcGIS is an introductory GIS text that is designed to offer everything you need to master the basic elements of GIS. The author’s step-by-step approach helps students negotiate the challenging tasks involved in learning sophisticated GIS software. This text employs a carefully developed learning system to help students use ArcView 9.2 or ArcGIS Desktop or higher, to set up and solve GIS problems. An innovative and unique feature of Mastering ArcGIS is its accompanying CD-ROM with narrated video clips that show students exactly how to perform chapter tutorials before attempting an exercise on their own. NEW TO THIS EDITION • New 3rd edition of Price has been updated to reflect ArcView 9.2 software (2nd edition reflected 9.0). • More current/relevant examples. • A more expanded treatment of ModelBuilder and geoprocessing issues. • Maribeth Price narrates the video clips on the accompanying CD herself. • Earlier coverage of geodatabases. FEATURES • Comprehensive tutorials in every chapter to learn the skills. Each step is demonstrated in a video clip. • The author created all the figures and tables ensuring precise correlation between the chapter material and their accompanying visuals. • A set of exercises, map documents, and data for practicing skills independently. • Emphasizes both concepts and hands-on experience in GIS. Follows a logical progression from basic to complex and specialized GIS topics. Key changes or enhancements in the 4th edition include network applications (Chapter 18), applications of geocoding (Chapter 17), and online connection to a remote database (Chapter 6). CONTENTS CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Coordinate Systems Chapter 3 Georelational Vector Data Model Chapter 4 Object-Based Vector Data Model Chapter 5 Raster Data Model Chapter 6 Data Input Chapter 7 Geometric Transformation Chapter 8 Spatial Data Editing Chapter 9 Attribute Data Input and Management Chapter 10 Data Display and Cartography Chapter 11 Data Exploration Chapter 12 Vector Data Analysis Chapter 13 Raster Data Analysis Chapter 14 Terrain Mapping and Analysis Chapter 15 Viewsheds and Watersheds Chapter 16 Spatial Interpolation Chapter 17 Geocoding and Dynamic Segmentation Chapter 18 Path Analysis and Network Applications Chapter 19 GIS Models and Modeling Chapter 1. Introducing ArcGIS Chapter 2. Working with ArcMap Chapter 3. Coordinate Systems and Map Projections Chapter 4. Drawing and Symbolizing Features Chapter 5. Working with Tables Chapter 6. Queries Chapter 7. Spatial Joins Chapter 8. Map Overlay Chapter 9. Presenting Data Chapter 10. Geocoding Chapter 11. Basic Editing in ArcMap Chapter 12. More Editing Techniques Chapter 13. Working with Geodatabases Chapter 14. Analyzing Networks Chapter 15. Raster Analysis COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog. Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com 112 HED 2007 Geography.indd 112 9/29/2006 1:21:44 PM Geography Human / Cultural Geography International Edition New HUMAN GEOGRAPHY 9th Edition By Jerome D Fellmann, University of Illinos-Champaign, Arthur Getis, San Diego State University-San Diego and Judith Getis 2007 (Nov 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322271-4 / MHID: 0-07-322271-2 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110797-6 / MHID: 0-07-110797-5 [IE with OLC] Fellmann’s Human Geography introduces students to the scope and excitement of human geography and its relevance to their daily lives. Designed for the one-semester or one-quarter course, this edition continues to convey the breadth of human geography and to provide insight into the nature and intellectual challenges of the field of geography itself. The authors pay special attention to gender issues and assume no previous experience in geography on the part of the students. New to this edition Chapter 7: Folk and Popular Culture includes extensive expansion on sections on Popular Culture, including microbreweries and rap music. This chapter also now includes new and expanded material on expanding crop production, fishing, and genetically modified foods. Four new boxed readings have been added to this edition: “Is Geography Destiny?”, “Log Cabin Myths and Facts”, “The Globalization of Reggae”, and “Terrorism and Political Geography.” Updated artwork and photos throughout include maps that have been altered to accommodate colorblind readers. Many new and updated topics have been added throughout, including: the meaning of “space” and “place” in Remote Sensing; outsourcing, off-shoring and New International Division of Labor; World Cities and exurbs, spread city, and counter-urbanization; Cities in the Developing World; and “e-waste” and its disposal problems and regulations. NEW CD-ROM available to instructors, featuring the “Sights and Sounds” of world regions. This program provides brief slide shows of China, South America, or the South Pacific (in addition to others) accompanied by native music of the region to offer a glimpse of diversity manifested by the cultures and landscapes of world regions. Interactive maps now include physical features. Focus Follow-Up Located in the end-of-chapter material, this summary section conveys additional information and explanation of integral parts of the text. A Digital Content Manager CD-ROM accompanies Human Geography, with all of the art and tables from the text, most of the photographs from the text, extra photos from other sources, and a complete set of PowerPoint lectures. The Online Learning Center not only includes interactive quizzing and exercises, but also interactive map exercises, case studies, and base maps. It also includes Case Studies, one- to three-page readings relating concepts to a student’s daily life. Maps, photos, and graphics are included, as well as further study and discussion questions that allow students to investigate readings and concepts in greater detail. This ninth edition retains the basic format of its predecessors but contains significant content changes including new and revised tables, maps, and text. The world of human geography is constantly changing in response to developing cultural, economic, and political patterns. Geography and Public Policy Boxes Located in almost every chapter, these special-purpose boxes introduce discussions of a topic of current national or international interest and conclude with a set of questions designed to induce thought and class discussion. Contents 1 Introduction: Some Background Basics Part 1 Themes and Fundamentals of Human Geography 2 Roots and Meaning of Culture 3 Spatial Interaction and Spatial Behavior 4 Population: World Patterns, Regional Trends Part 2 Patterns of Diversity and Unity 5 Language and Religion: Mosaics of Culture 6 Ethnic Geography: Threads of Diversity 7 Folk and Popular Culture: Diversity and Uniformity Part 3 Dynamic Patterns of the Space Economy 8 Livelihood and Economy: Primary Activities 9 Livelihood and Economy: From Blue Collar to Gold Collar 10 Patterns of Development and Change Part 4 Landscapes of Functional Organization 11 Urban Systems and Urban Structures 12 The Political Ordering of Space Part 5 Human Actions and Environmental Impacts 13 Human Impacts on Natural Systems / Appendix A Map Projections Appendix B 2003 World Population Data Appendix C Anglo America Reference Map New PERTHES WORLD ATLAS By Klett International 2007 (July 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329073-7 / MHID: 0-07-329073-4 Features Website: http://www.mhhe.com/earthsci/geography/klett/ Chapter Opening Vignettes As in earlier editions, chapter introductions take the form of interest-arousing vignettes to focus student attention on the subject matter that follows. The NEW World Atlas for Higher Education and College Geography Level teachings. This new atlas uses the Klett-Perthes high quality map print details as known from their Wall Maps. Features over 350 pages of detailed maps, statistics, glossary and information to teach higher level geography education. Focus Preview This intro chapter page alerts students to the main themes of the chapter. Boxed Inserts Located in every chapter, these boxes expand on ideas included within the text or introduce related examples of chapter concepts or conclusions, often in gender-related contexts. End-of-Chapter Learning Aids New terms are included in the Key Words list at the end of the chapter. The Summary reiterates the main points of the chapter and provides a bridge to the chapter that follows. For Review contains questions that direct student attention to important concepts developed within the chapter. Selected References suggest a number of book and journal articles that expand on topics. FEATURES • High quality physical and polical maps. • Sophisticated thematic maps. • Detailed regional maps. • Easy to understand introduction. • Statistics for all countries of the world. • Glossary of important terms. • Index with more than 20,000 names. 113 HED 2007 Geography.indd 113 9/29/2006 1:21:44 PM Geography INTERACTIVE WORLD ISSUES CD-ROM By Cambridge Studios 2004 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-255648-3 / MHID: 0-07-255648-X This CD emphasizes critical thinking by presenting regional issues through the use of videos, animations, and diagrams that closely examine the how and why of specific case studies. The CD will feature 5 case studies (Oregon, Chicago, Mexico, South Africa, and China), and can be packaged with any geography or environmental science title. FREE with Bradshaw et. al. Contemporary World Regional Geography. CONTENTS (CD-ROM 1) Oregon Part 1. Salmon Recovery: A Spatial Approach Part 2. Conflict on the Umatilla Part 3. Controversy on the Columbia South Africa Part 1. The Geography of Apartheid Part 2. Righting the Wrongs: Initial Land Reform Stategies Part 3. Land Reform (CD-ROM 2) Mexico: Motive to Migrate Part 1. Mapping Migration Part 2. Domestic Destinations Part 3. Maquila Movement China—Lanzhou: Frontier Forces Part 1. Borderlands and Ecoregions Part 2. Great Walls,Silk Roads, and Oil Pipelines Part 3. Han, Hui, and Uygur Chicago: Farming on the Edge Part 1. The Growth of a City Part 2. Put Up a Parking Lot Part 3. National Implications of Cropland Loss • Discussions of Hurricane Katrina and tsunami have been expanded. • Appendix 2, a modified version of the 2006 World Population Data Sheet of the Population Reference Bureau, includes basic demographic data and projections for countries, regions, and continents, as well as selected economic and social statistics helpful in national and regional comparisons. • CD-ROM available to instructors, featuring the “Sights and Sounds” of world regions. This program provides brief slide shows of China, South America, or the South Pacific (in addition to others) accompanied by native music of the region to offer a glimpse of diversity manifested by the cultures and landscapes of world regions. FEATURES • Chapter 2: Maps features expanded information on Global Positioning Systems (GPS). Also new in this chapter is a section on Applications of Geographic Information Systems (GIS). • World maps have been put on the Robinson projection for added visual appeal. In addition, all colors in the maps have been altered to accommodate most colorblind readers. • Fold-out World Map in the inside back cover provides students with both political and physical world data. The map is easy to use; when folded out it can be referenced from any chapter in the book. Intro to Geography International Edition New INTRODUCTION TO GEOGRAPHY 12th Edition By Arthus Getis and Judith Getis of San Diego State University, Jerome Fellmann, University of Illinois – Champaign and Victoria Getis, Ohio State University 2008 (September 2006) / 576 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305126-0 / MHID: 0-07-305126-8 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325649-8 / MHID: 0-07-325649-8 (Mandatory Package) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110228-5 / MHID: 0-07-110228-0 [IE] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/getis11e This market-leading book introduces college students to the breadth and spatial insights of the field of geography. The authors’ approach allows the major research traditions of geography to dictate the principal themes. Chapter 1 introduces students to the four organizing traditions that have emerged through the long history of geographical thought and writing: earth science, culture-environment, location, and area analysis. Each of the four parts of this book centers on one of these geographic perspectives. • The Online Learning Center features quizzes, internet exercises, flash animations and eInstruction questions. eInstruction is a wireless student response system that allows for the ultimate in classroom participation, giving instructors immediate feedback from every student. • Interactive base maps appear in the Online Learning Center, showing the political boundaries of Europe, North and South America, Africa, and the Caribbean. Students can choose drag and drop exercises to test their knowledge of regions, states and key cities. • Interactive World Issues CD-ROM is available as an optional package with this text. This CD emphasizes critical thinking by presenting regional issues through the use of videos, animations, and diagrams that closely examine the how and why of specific case studies. The CD features five case studies (Oregon, Chicago, Mexico, South Africa, and China). CONTENTS 1 Introduction 2 Maps Part 1 The Earth Science Tradition 3 Physical Geography: Landforms 4 Physical Geography: Weather and Climate 5 The Geography of Natural Resources Part 2 The Culture-Environment Tradition 6 Population Geography 7 Cultural Geography 8 Spatial Interaction 9 Political Geography Part 3 The Locational Tradition 10 Economic Geography 11 Urban Geography 12 Human Impact on the Environment Part 4 The Area Analysis Tradition 13 The Regional Concept NEW TO THIS EDITION • Major reorganization and revision of Chapter 11, including new sections on “Origin and Evolution of Cities,” “The Functions of Urban Areas, and “Planned Cities.” INVITATION TO PUBLISH • Seven new boxed readings have been added to this edition, including: Red States, Blue States, township and range survey system, Is Geography Destiny?, Broken Borders, Central Place Theory, The Canadian City, and disposal of electronic waste. McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] • Maps, charts, tables, graphs, and illustrations have been revised throughout to include the most current data. Several new figures have been added where appropriate. Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg 114 HED 2007 Geography.indd 114 9/29/2006 1:21:44 PM Geography CONTENTS New PERTHES WORLD ATLAS By Klett International 2007 (July 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329073-7 / MHID: 0-07-329073-4 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/earthsci/geography/klett/ The NEW World Atlas for Higher Education and College Geography Level teachings. This new atlas uses the Klett-Perthes high quality map print details as known from their Wall Maps. Features over 350 pages of detailed maps, statistics, glossary and information to teach higher level geography education. 1 Introduction: Changing Landscapes of Singapore Part I NATURAL ENVIRONMENTS AND ENGINEERED LANDSCAPES 2 Environmental Planning and Management 3 Engineered Biophysical Landscapes: Parks and Open Spaces for Recreation Part II LANDSCAPES OF COMMUNITY AND NATIONHOOD 4 Urbanisation and Landscape Changes 5 The Nation, Its Signs and Symbols: Street-names and Monuments 6 Public Housing: The Housing of a Nation 7 Landscapes of Heritage: Historic and Cultural Districts Part III LANDSCAPES OF GLOBALISATION 8 Achieving Global City Status: Industrial Restructuring and Regionalisation 9 Tourism Capital: Reinterpreting Tourism Space 10 Transnational Connectivities and Local Tensions Part IV FORGOTTEN LANDSCAPES 11 Neglected Landscapes: Old and Forgotten Singaporeans 12 Landscapes of Death: Cemeteries, Crematoria and Columbaria 13 Changing Landscapes and Future Challenges: A Review FEATURES • High quality physical and polical maps. • Sophisticated thematic maps. • Detailed regional maps. • Easy to understand introduction. • Statistics for all countries of the world. • Glossary of important terms. • Index with more than 20,000 names. Map Use / Cartography International Edition MAP USE AND ANALYSIS 4th Edition By John Campbell, University of Wisconsin – Parkside 2001 / 384 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-303748-6 / MHID: 0-07-303748-6 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125264-5 / MHID: 0-07-125264-9 [IE] Website: www.mhhe.com/earthsci/geography/campbell4e CONTENTS CHANGING LANDSCAPES OF SINGAPORE By Peggy Teo, Brenda S A Yeoh, Ooi Giok Ling and Karen P Y Lai 2004 / 240 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123479-5 / MHID: 0-07-123479-9 [An Asian Publication] The transformations that have occurred in Singapore’s landscape have been rapid since independence. Changing Landscapes of Singapore discusses these changes from the perspective of lived landscapes which have day-to-day meanings for Singaporeans. It begins with an exploration of the major physical changes resulting from rapid urbanisation and industrialisation and Singapore’s attempt to balance the stresses of physical development with the needs of a green agenda. Several other themes relating to landscape change follow. A section on landscapes of community and nationhood investigates how issues concerning shelter (public housing), heritage conservation, street-names and national symbols affect Singaporeans’ notions of belonging. This is followed by a discussion on globalisation and the way it affects the nationstate’s development. This section examines not only Singapore’s efforts at regionalisation and its attempt to gain a better foothold in the workings of the global capitalistic system but also evaluates the impacts of globalisation on the society. The last section on forgotten landscapes is a reminder of who and what may be left behind in striving for excellence. Landscapes reveal and refl ect forgotten needs as much as they record what have been remembered and valued. The various strands are brought together in the fi nal chapter where the landscape is used as a lens to raise questions on future challenges. While intended as a general text for university students, this book will also provide source materials for school teachers (junior college and upper secondary levels), the general student population as well as the general reader interested in understanding the country’s rapid landscape changes. Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Basic Mapping Processes Chapter 3 Map Projections Chapter 4 Locational and Land-Partitioning Systems Chapter 5 Scale and Generalization Concepts Chapter 6 Measurement from Maps Chapter 7 Route Selection and Navigation Chapter 8 Terrain Representation Chapter 9 Contour Interpretation Chapter 10 Topographic Features Chapter 11 Qualitative and Quantitative Information Chapter 12 Characteristics of Map Features: Shape and Point Patterns Chapter 13 Characteristics of Map Features: Networks and Trees Chapter 14 Cartograms and Special Purpose Maps Chapter 15 Maps and Graphs Chapter 16 Map Misuse Chapter 17 Remote Sensing from Airborne Platforms Chapter 18 Remote Sensing from Space Chapter 19 Computer-Assisted Cartography Chapter 20 Digital Map Applications Chapter 21 Geographic Information Systems Appendixes: A U.S. and Canadian Map Producers and Information Sources B Foreign Maps C Copyright D Magnetic Compass Use E Map Storage and Cataloging Systems F British National Grid COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog. Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com 115 HED 2007 Geography.indd 115 9/29/2006 1:21:45 PM Geography Meteorolgy A NEW Sights and Sounds CD-ROM is packaged with every new text. This unique lecture tool offers a brief slide show of every region, along with music native to that region, allowing students to both see and hear an overview of regions, countries and local areas covered in the text. International Edition METEOROLOGY 2nd Edition By Eric W. Danielson, Hartford College For Women, James Levin, Pennsylvania State University—University Park and Elliot Abrams, AccuWeather, Inc. 2003 / 558 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-242072-2 / MHID: 0-07-242072-3 (with Essential Study Partner CD-ROM) – Out of Print ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121383-7 / MHID: 0-07-121383-X [IE with Essential Study Partner CD-ROM] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/meteorology CONTENTS 1 Introduction to Meteorological Inquiry / 2 Is the Atmosphere’s Composition Changing? / 3 How Does the Atmosphere Maintain Such a Steady Temperature? / 4 Humidity / 5 How Do Clouds Form? / 6 Precipitation / 7 Structure of Large Mid-Latitude Weather Systems / 8 Air Masses, Fronts, and Frontal Cyclones / 9 Weather Forecasting / 10 Circulations on Many Scales, and Their Interactions / 11 Thunderstorms and Tornadoes / 12 Hurricanes / 13 Introduction to Climatology: How Stable is Earth’s Climate? / 14 Is the Atmosphere Warming? / 15 Light and Color in the Atmosphere / 16 Air Pollution / Appendix A: Some Notable Dates in the History of Meteorology / B Scientific Notation / C SI Units of Measurement / D Other Units, Conversion Factors, and Constants / E List of Elements / F Latitude and Longitude / G Time Zones / H Weather Plotting Symbols / I Windchill and Heat Index Tables / J Humidity Tables / K Saturation Mixing Ratio Diagram / L Thermodynamic Diagram / M Climatological Data / N Atomic Structure: A Review of Some Basics World Regional Geography International Edition Every regional chapter will include a new box titled “Geographers at Work.” New CONTEMPORARY WORLD REGIONAL GEOGRAPHY 2nd Edition By Michael Bradshaw, College of St. Mark & John, Joseph Dymond, George Washington University, George White, Frostburg State University and Elizabeth Chacko 2007 (Dec 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322272-1 / MHID: 0-07-322272-0 (with Interactive World Issues CD) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110799-0 / MHID: 0-07-110799-1 [IE with CD and ARIS] Website: http://highered.mcgraw-hill/sites/0072826835 Contemporary World Regional Geography provides a current, balanced geographical study of world issues through analysis of nine world regions and the countries in each. It consistently integrates the themes of “global connections” and “local voices” and is structured so that within each chapter the global and local tensions are discussed, as well as economic, political, cultural, social, and environmental issues. Each chapter follows the same framework, allowing students to easily make comparisons from one world region to the next. New to this edition Regional chapters will feature a stronger emphasis on culture and less on regional data. Interactive World Issues CD-ROM is also packaged with every new text, and is an excellent tool for assignments or self-paced study. This CD features five case studies (Oregon, China, South Africa, Mexico, and Chicago) and allows students to view videos and complete inquirybased exercises, mapping exercises and quizzes. Approximately 100 NEW photos have been added to the text, in addition to those found in the first edition, to give students an even more complete visual presentation of each region. Each region features NEW physical maps, now found at the beginning of each chapter, providing greater physical detail of each region being studied. Thematic maps have also been updated and improved throughout the text. In addition, students will continue to find a foldout world map at the end of the book, showing political and physical features of the world regions. A NEW partnership with Klett-Perthes Verlag that will give McGrawHill customers an exclusive 30% discount on any item from the KPV catalog of maps and geographic resources. Features “Personal View” boxes focus on the life of an individual or family from the region. Contemporary World Regional Geography provides thematic integration of “global connections” and “local voices.” The text introduces each major region from the big picture perspective with transitions into local issues of cultural, social, historical, and economic importance. An emphasis on the relationships between the other regions of the world and the local issues in a particular region provide the framework for the Global Connections-Local Voices theme. A unique feature, not found in any other world regional text, is that the book concludes with a summary chapter that emphasizes the “connections” of global policies, economies, and heritages around the world. This final chapter reiterates the main theme, of global connections/local voices, of the book and ties together the regional chapters. Contemporary World Regional Geography is the recommended text for the popular world regional telecourse produced and distributed by Annenberg/CPB. The video tape series that is developed by Cambridge Studios for this telecourse ties directly to this text. Contemporary World Regional Geography is designed to be color customized for those who want to use a book that matches their syllabus. Well-integrated pedagogical aids, such as “Test Your Understanding” segments and “Point-Counterpoint” boxes throughout promote student understanding and tackle challenging issues, teaching students to explore various sides of difficult topics. Two boxed pedagogical aids, “Personal View” boxes and “Geography At Work” boxes, portray “geography in action,” offering a glimpse of what it’s like to live in another part of the world or to work in a geographic-related field. These boxes provide a local voice with an awareness of global connections. The text’s Online Learning Center offers a wealth of online study aids for students as well as teaching aids for instructors. It includes: interactive chapter quizzing, key term flashcards, and base maps with labeling exercises. Emphasis on “geography in action” by using point-counterpoint debates and by featuring “personal view” boxes that focus on an individual or family in a particular region. The point-counterpoint boxes highlight opposing sides of an issue such as the war between Pakistan and India over Kashmir. 116 HED 2007 Geography.indd 116 9/29/2006 1:21:45 PM Geography Latin America Contents Chapter 1: Globalization and World Regions Chapter 2: Human Development and World Regional Geography Chapter 3: Europe Chapter 4: Russia and Neighboring Countries Chapter 5: East Asia Chapter 6: Southeast Asia and South Pacific Chapter 7: South Asia Chapter 8: Northern Africa and Southwestern Asia Chapter 9: Africa South of Sahara Chapter 10: Latin America Chapter 11: North America Chapter 12: Global Connections, Local Voices / Glossary of Key Terms / Index New PERTHES WORLD ATLAS By Klett International 2007 (July 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329073-7 / MHID: 0-07-329073-4 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/earthsci/geography/klett/ The NEW World Atlas for Higher Education and College Geography Level teachings. This new atlas uses the Klett-Perthes high quality map print details as known from their Wall Maps. Features over 350 pages of detailed maps, statistics, glossary and information to teach higher level geography education. FEATURES • High quality physical and polical maps. • Sophisticated thematic maps. LATIN AMERICA AND THE CARIBBEAN 4th Edition By David L. Clawson, University of New Orleans 2006 (June 2005) / 448 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282694-4 / MHID: 0-07-282694-0 This book has been written primarily as a geography of Latin America and the Caribbean, but is also intended to serve as an interdisciplinary introduction to the region. The focus of the text is on comprehension of concepts, patterns, and issues rather than on memorization of facts and figures. The latter are provided, but they are intended primarily to illustrate the underlying conditions rather than to serve as the focus of the text. The text is designed for maximum flexibility. Written to be readable for beginning students, it is also generously documented with scholarly references for the research needs of advanced undergraduate and graduate students. The individual chapters can be used in all, or in part, and in any order. CONTENTS 1 The Changing Face of Latin America and the Caribbean I Physical Geography 2 Landform Regions of Latin America and the Caribbean 3 Weather and Climate 4 Natural Regions II Cultural Patterns 5 Iberian Heritage, Conquest, and Institutions 6 Political Change 7 Race, Ethnicity, and Social Class 8 Latin America as a Culture Region 9 Religion III Economic Patterns 10 Agriculture and Agrarian Development 11 Mining, Manufacturing, and Tourism 12 Urbanization, Population Growth, and Migration 13 Development and Health • Detailed regional maps. • Easy to understand introduction. • Statistics for all countries of the world. US & Canada • Glossary of important terms. • Index with more than 20,000 names. THE UNITED STATES AND CANADA The Land and the People, 2nd Edition By Arthur Getis, Judith Getis and Imre Quastler of San Diego State University - San Diego 2001 / 448 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-235677-9 / MHID: 0-07-235677-4 Website: www.mhhe.com/earthsci/geography/survey.mhtml CONTENTS 1 Introduction 2 Phyiscal Features of the United States and Canada 3 Settlement Patterns before 1950 4 Population Trends since 1950 5 Political Geography 6 Agriculture, Gathering, and Extractive Industries 7 Industrial and Commercial Organization 8 Modern Transportation and Communication Systems 9 Cities 10 Neighborhoods 11 Recreational Resources 12 Human Impact on the Environment 13 Culture Regions of the United States 14 The Canadian Difference INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg 117 HED 2007 Geography.indd 117 9/29/2006 1:21:45 PM Geography 118 HED 2007 Geography.indd 118 9/29/2006 1:21:45 PM 2007-2008 NEW Geology Titles Geology~ Contents Dinosaurs...................................................................... 120 Earth Science................................................................. 120 Environmental Geology................................................. 121 General Geology........................................................... 121 Geomorphology............................................................ 121 Hazards / Natural Disasters............................................ 122 Historical Geology........................................................ 122 2007 New Titles LUCAS Dinosaurs: The Textbook, 5e....................................120 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282695-1 / MHID: 0-07-282695-9 PLUMMER Physical Geology, 11e..............................................127 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321821-2 / MHID: 0-07-321821-9 ZUMBERGE Laboratory Manual for Physical Geology, 13e...........................................................................128 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298861-4 / MHID: 0-07-298861-4 Hydrogeology................................................................ 123 Meteorology.................................................................. 123 Oceanography............................................................... 124 Paleontology................................................................. 125 Petrology....................................................................... 125 Physical Geology Laboratory................................................................. 128 Textbook................................................................... 126 2008 New Titles ABBOTT Natural Disasters, 6e................................................122 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329232-8 / MHID: 0-07-329232-X CARLSON Physical Geology, 7e................................................126 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325648-1 / MHID: 0-07-325648-X CHAMBERLIN Exploring the World Ocean......................................124 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331276-7 / MHID: 0-07-331276-2 JONES Lab Manual to accompany Physical Geology, 6e.............................................................................128 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305091-1 / MHID: 0-07-305091-1 McCONNELL The Good Earth: Introduction to Earth Sciences....................................................................120 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325650-4 / MHID: 0-07-325650-1 SVERDRUP Introduction to the World’s Oceans, 9e...................124 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325483-8 / MHID: 0-07-325483-5 119 HED 2007 Geology.indd 119 9/29/2006 1:23:55 PM Geology Dinosaurs New DINOSAURS The Textbook, 5th Edition By Spencer George Lucas, New Mexico Museum of Natural History 2007 (Oct 2005) / 320 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282695-1 / MHID: 0-07-282695-9 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/lucas5e Dinosaurs: The Textbook is a monument to our present understanding of these wonderful creatures. It is a book that takes the student on a journey through nearly every aspect of dinosaur biology, geology, and the history of their discovery. The book presents facts together with current ideas, notions, and controversies. Dr. Lucas presents dinosaurs as successful, living creatures that were merely different in appearance from animals living today. Dr. Lucas has written a comprehensive book that is easily read and understood by students with little scientific background--a book that teaches students not only how to use scientific methods, but how to synthesize data to create their own ideas. In contrast with many dinosaur books from the past, Dr. Lucas, although indicating his own views, allows students the opportunity to think for themselves. New to this edition Expanded art and photo program. This is one of the hallmark strengths of the Lucas text. We added new photos and illustrations as appropriate to enhance the understanding of the prose. New information on the latest dinosaur discoveries has been added, including the Microraptor from China and the Neuquenraptor from Argentina. Spencer Lucas has updated the text with new and revised theories in the study of dinosaurs based on his research and reviewer requests. New THE GOOD EARTH Introduction to Earth Sciences By David McConnell, David Steer, Katherine Owens, Catherine Knight and Lisa Park of University of Akron 2008 (February 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325650-4 / MHID: 0-07-325650-1 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331534-8 / MHID: 0-07-331534-6 (with ARIS Instructor QuickStart Guide) The Good Earth (TGE) is the product of collaboration between the content rigor provided by Earth Science specialists (McConnell, Park, Steer) and the results of research on learning as contributed by pedagogical experts (Knight, Owens). TGE has been explicitly designed to be compatible with inquiry-based, active learning in the college classroom. The structural elements of this text will allow the instructor to incorporate these studentcentered teaching methods into their Earth Science course. The authors have tested the book’s content and pedagogy in large Earth Science classes for non-majors that are populated with mostly freshmen. Their experiences show that the materials and methods in TGE can improve students’ learning, increase daily attendance, reduce attrition, and increase students’ enthusiasm in comparison with classes taught following a traditional lecture format. The authors have chosen to emphasize three scientific themes throughout the text: i) scientific literacy; ii) Earth Science and the human experience; and, iii) the science of global change. The discussion of scientific methods is woven into the text throughout. They have included numerous examples of human interaction with the Earth that can serve as entry points for students to appreciate the nature of science. Global change is a theme that is evident in much current Earth Science research so our authors have used global change as a content theme throughout the book. The text now incorporates the newest ideas on bird origins. FEATURES Updated references have been added to the end-of-chapter lists. • The text emphasizes “active learning” by providing ample opportunities for self-assessement. Some of these can be completed electronically with results forwarded to the instructor. Features Earth Science Page referenced key terms at the end of each chapter. The excellent writing style continues to present a scientifically accurate overview of dinosaurs that is understandable to the non-science student. The Instructor’s Manual is available on the text web site. The Instructor’s Manual includes a suggested syllabus along with a description of the text’s organization and chapter interdependence to assist instructors in planning how best to use the text to meet the needs of their course. The manual provides a description of the material covered in each chapter as well as suggestions for presenting the material. The suggestions discuss what material should be emphasized and methods for overcoming potential difficulties. Answers to all of the review questions are also provided for each chapter, a benefit that’s unique to this Instructor’s Manual. Contents A Dinosaur Dictionary 1 Dinosaur Hunters 2 Evolution, Phylogeny, and Classification 3 Fossils, Sedimentary Environments, and Geologic Time 4 The Origin of Dinosaurs 5 Theropods 6 Sauropodomorphs 7 Ornithopods 8 Stegosaurs and Ankylosaurs 9 Ceratopsians and Pachycephalosaurs 10 The Dinosaurian World 11 Dinosaur Trace Fossils 12 Dinosaur Biology and Behavior 13 Hot-Blooded Dinosaurs? 14 The Origin of Birds 15 Dinosaur Extinction 16 Dinosaurs in the Public Eye Appendix A Primer of Dinosaur Anatomy • The text organization is similar to competing texts with the defining difference being the focus on concepts and everyday examples that will support what is relevant to the student. • Another unique differentiation is the author’s goal to introduce cognitive development by providing guidance to instructors on “how” to utilize inquiry-based learning strategies. • The text is heavily supported by media elements (animations, simulations, actvities, quizzing, etc.) • The author team provides a specialized range of expertise in geology and education to support the text’s goal of being a unique collaboration of earth science and active learning modules. CONTENTS 1 Introduction to Earth Science 2 Earth in Space 3 Near-Earth Objects 4 Plate Tectonics 5 Earthquakes 6 Volcanoes and Mountains 7 Rocks and Minerals 8 Geologic Time 9 Weathering and Soils 10 Slope Failure 11 Streams and Floods 12 Groundwater and Wetlands 13 Oceans and Coastlines 14 The Atmosphere 15 Weather Systems 16 Earth’s Climate System 17 Global Change 120 HED 2007 Geology.indd 120 9/29/2006 1:23:56 PM Geology DICTIONARY OF EARTH SCIENCE 2nd Edition By McGraw-Hill 2003 / 468 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141045-8 / MHID: 0-07-141045-7 [A Professional Reference] CONTENTS Preface / Staff / How to Use the Dictionary / Fields and Their Scope / Pronunciation Key / A-Z Terms / Appendix International Edition CONTENTS Section One Foundations 1 An Overview of Our Planetary Environment 2 Rocks and Minerals--A First Look Section Two Internal Processes 3 Plate Tectonics 4 Earthquakes 5 Volcanoes Section Three Surface Processes 6 Streams and Flooding 7 Coastal Zones and Processes 8 Mass Movements 9 Geology and Climate: Glaciers, Deserts, and Global Climate Trends Section Four Resources 10 Water as a Resource 11 Soil as a Resource 12 Mineral and Rock Resources 13 Energy Resources--Fossil Fuels 14 Energy Resources--Alternative Sources Section Five Waste Disposal, Pollution, and Health 15 Waste Disposal 16 Water Pollution 17 Air Pollution Section Six Other Related Topics 18 Environmental Law 19 Land-Use Planning and Engineering Geology / Appendix A Geologic Time, Geologic Process Rates Appendix B Introduction to Topographic and Geologic Maps and Remotely Sensed Imagery Appendix C Mineral and Rock Identification EARTH SCIENCE Understanding Environmental Systems By Edgar W. Spencer, Washington & Lee University 2003 / 544 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-234146-1 / MHID: 0-07-234146-7 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121876-4 / MHID: 0-07-121876-9 [IE] General Geology CONTENTS I Introduction to Earth System Science / Unit I Major Elements of the Earth System / 1 The Building Blocks of Earth Materials / 2 Minerals and the Rock Cycle / 3 Earth Model—Core-Mantle System / 4 Time and Change in Earth Systems / Unit II The Plate Tectonic System / 5 Plate Tectonics and Mountain Building / 6 Earthquakes / 7 Volcanic Activity / Unit III Earth’s Physical Climate System / Part 1 Oceans and Coasts / 8 The Sea Floor and Marine Environments / 9 Ocean Dynamics / 10 Coasts and Coastal Environments / Part 2 The Atmosphere / 11 Earth’s Atmosphere / 12 The Atmosphere in Motion / 13 Climate—Past, Present, and Future / Part 3 The Land Surface / 14 Introduction to Earth’s Land Environments / 15 Weathering and Soil Development / 16 Mass Wasting—The Work of Gravity / 17 The Role of the Wind / 18 Streams / 19 GroundWater / 20 The Role of Ice in Earth Systems / Unit IV The Solar System and Its Place in the Universe / 21 Earth’s Neighbors in Space—The Solar System / 22 Beyond the Solar System / Appendix A Units and Conversions / Appendix B Minerals / Appendix C Rock Identification / Appendix D Topographic and Geologic Maps / Appendix E Star Charts / Appendix F The Periodic Table of Elements / Appendix G Glossary DICTIONARY OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY 2nd Edition By McGraw-Hill 2003 / 420 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141044-1 / MHID: 0-07-141044-9 (A Professional Reference) CONTENTS Preface / Staff / How to Use the Dictionary / Fields and Their Scope / Pronunciation Key / Dictionary / Appendix Geomorphology International Edition Environmental Geology International Edition ENVIRONMENTAL GEOLOGY 7th Edition By Carla W. Montgomery, Northern Illinois University 2006 (Jan 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304082-0 / MHID: 0-07-304082-7 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111626-8 / MHID: 0-07-111626-5 [IE with OLC] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/montgomery7 Intended for the introductory-level college course, the principal aim of this text is to present the student with a broad overview of environmental geology. The text looks both at how the earth developed into its present condition and where matters seem to be moving for the future. It is hoped that this knowledge will provide the student with a useful foundation for discussing and evaluating specific environmental issues, as well as for developing ideas about how the problems should be solved. PROCESS GEOMORPHOLOGY 4th Edition By Dale F Ritter, University of Nevada-Desert Research Institute, R Craig Kochel, Bucknell University and Jerry R Miller, University of Nevada-Desert Research Institute 2002 / 576 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-697-34411-3 / MHID: 0-697-34411-8 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111022-8 / MHID: 0-07-111022-4 [IE] CONTENTS 1 Process Geomorphology 2 Climate and Internal Forces 3 Chemical Weathering and Soils 4 Physical Weathering, Mass Movement, and Slopes 5 The Drainage Basin: Development, Mormometry, and Hydrology 6 Fluvial Processes 7 Fluvial Landforms 8 Wind Processes and Landforms 9 Glaciers and Glacial Mechanics 10 Glacial Erosion, Deposition at Landforms 11 Periglacial Processes and Landforms 12 Karst: Processes and Landforms 13 Coastal Zones: Processes and Landforms Bibliography Index 121 HED 2007 Geology.indd 121 9/29/2006 1:23:56 PM Geology Hazards / Natural Disasters New NATURAL DISASTERS 6th Edition By Patrick Leon Abbott, San Diego State University 2008 (March 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329232-8 / MHID: 0-07-329232-X This book focuses on natural disasters: how the normal processes of the Earth concentrate their energies and deal heavy blows to humans and their structures. It is concerned with how the natural world operates and, in so doing, kills and maims humans and destroys their works. Throughout the book, certain themes are maintained: * energy sources underlying disasters * plate tectonics and climate change * earth processes operating in rock, water, and atmosphere * significance of geologic time * complexities of multiple variables operating simultaneously * detailed and readable case studies. NEW TO THIS EDITION • New feature: Entire text has been revised to feature 4-color line drawings and photos. • Case Histories: The text aims to explain important principles about the Earth and then develop further understanding through numerous case studies. • End-of-Chapter Learning Aids: Learning aids at the conclusion of every chapter include Terms to Remember, Questions for Review and Questions for Further Thought. • Organization: The primary organization of the book is based on an energy theme. Chapter 1 leads off with data describing death and destruction, and then examines the energy sources underlying disasters. Earthquake and volcano disasters fueled by Earth’s internal energy are addressed in Chapters 2 through 7 and are organized on a plate-tectonics theme. Disasters powered primarily by gravity are covered in Chapter 8 on mass movements. Disasters fueled by the external energy of the Sun are examined in Chapters 9 through 13 on climate change, severe weather, floods, and fire. Chapter 14 examines the great dyings encased in the fossil record. Chapter 15 examines impacts from asteroids and comets and includes plans to protect Earth from future impacts. Historical Geology LABORATORY STUDIES IN EARTH HISTORY 8th Edition By James C. Brice, Harold L. Levin, Washington University—St. Louis and Michael S. Smith 2004 / 320 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-252806-0 / MHID: 0-07-252806-0 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/brice Utilizing actual case studies and field photographs, this successful lab manual covers the full spectrum of historical geology sediments, plate tectonics, paleontology, and petrology in flexible, self-contained units. This manual has been developed for use in both nonmajors and combined courses in historical geology. The exercises emphasize the principles and methods by which geologists discover the origins and changing nature of our planet. These exercises or “studies” will help students understand how ancient conditions can be read from rocks and fossils, how geologic forces at the surface and within the planet can alter the environment and change world geography, and how events of the past can be placed within an integrated chronological sequence. The exercises are designed for students who may not intend to specialize in geology. This does not mean, however, that the treatment is superficial, nor that it cannot give adequate preparation for students pursuing an academic major in the earth sciences. CONTENTS 1 Sedimentary Rock in Hand Sample 2 Textural Clues to the History of Sediment 3 Sedimentary Rock Under the Microscope 4 Ancient Sedimentary Environments 5 Major Tectonic Settings of Earth History 6 Sea-Floor Spreading and Plate Tectonics 7 Age Relations and Unconformity 8 Rock Units and Time-Rock Units 9 Ancient Shorelines 10 Fossils and Their Living Relatives: Protists, Sponges, Corals, Bryozoans, and Brachiopods 11 Fossils and Their Living Relatives: Mollusks, Arthropods, Echinoderms, Graptolites, and Plants 12 Fossil Indicators of Age, Environment, and Correlation 13 A Brief Survey of the Vertebrates 14 Geologic Maps and Geologic Structures 15 Canadian Shield and Basement Rocks of North America 16 Mountain Belts of North America 17 The Interior Plains and Plateaus 18 Igneous Rocks 19 Metamorphic Rocks Plates • Comprehensiveness: The text covers the most significant natural hazards from geologic to oceanographic to atmospheric to space debris and their associated phenomena. The broad range of natural disasters topics allows each instructor to select those chapters that cover their interests and local hazards. CONTENTS 1 Natural Disasters and Their Energy Sources 2 Plate Tectonics and Earthquakes 3 Basic Principles of Earthquake Geology, Seismology and Tsunami 4 Some Earthquakes in Western North America 5 More United States and Canadian Earthquakes 6 Volcanic Eruptions: Plate Tectonics and Magmas 7 Volcanic Eruptions Continue 8 Mass Movements 9 Climate Change 10 Severe Weather 11 Hurricanes and the Coastline 12 Floods 13 Fire 14 The Great Dyings 15 Impacts with Space Objects COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog. Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com 122 HED 2007 Geology.indd 122 9/29/2006 1:23:56 PM Geology Hydrogeology International Edition EVOLUTION OF THE EARTH 7th Edition By Donald A. Prothero, Occidental College and Robert Dott, University of Wisconsin—Madison 2004 (July 2003) / 608 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-252808-4 / MHID: 0-07-252808-7 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121628-9 / MHID: 0-07-121628-6 [IE] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/prothero7 Evolution of the Earth reveals the logical framework of geology, shows relations of the science to the totality of human knowledge, and gives some idea of what it is to be a participant in the discipline. In keeping with the preference for a “How do we know?” rather than “What do we know?” approach, the authors stress what assumptions are made by earth historians, what kinds of evidence (and tools for gathering that evidence), and what processes of reasoning and limitations of hypotheses are involved in reconstructing and interpreting the past. Each chapter begins with a list of highlights entitled “Major Concepts”. Many chapters have a summary timeline that puts the entire sequence of events into a quick visual reference frame. The use of dioramas and reconstructions of extinct animals and plants has been greatly expanded, so that students can get a more vivid concept of typical life in any part of the geologic past. In many places, the authors have supplied a full page of color photos of classic fossils from each period to improve the visual recognition of the organisms that give life its distinctive history. The areas of hottest controversy, such as mass extinctions, dinosaur endothermy, the origin of life, and controversies over late Proterozoic tectonics and glaciation, have been given separate sections so that students can appreciate the different sides of the debates. CONTENTS 1 Time and Terrestrial Change / 2 Floods, Fossils, and Heresies: “No vestige of a beginning, no prospect of an end?” / 3 Evolution / 4 The Relative Geologic Time Scale and Modern Concepts of Stratigraphy / 5 The Numerical Dating of the Earth / 6 Origin and Early Evolution of the Earth / 7 Mountain Building and Drifting Continents / 8 Cryptozoic History: An Introduction to the Origin of Continental Crust / 9 Early Life and its Patterns / 10 Earliest Paleozoic History: The Sauk Sequence—An Introduction to Cratons and Epeiric Seas / 11 The Later Ordovician: Further Studies of Plate Tectonics and the Paleogeography of Orogenic Belts / 12 The Middle Paleozoic: Time of Reefs, Salt, and Forests / 13 Late Paleozoic History: A Tectonic Climax and Retreat of the Sea / 14 The Mesozoic Era: Age of Reptiles and Continental Breakup / 15 Cenozoic History: Threshold of the Present / 16 Pleistocene Glaciation and the Advent of Humans / 17 The Best of all Possible Worlds? / Appendix I The Classification and Relationships of Life / Appendix II English Equivalents of Metric Measures International Edition INTRODUCTION TO HYDROGEOLOGY By David Deming, University of Oklahoma-Norman 2002 / 480 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-232622-2 / MHID: 0-07-232622-0 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113019-6 / MHID: 0-07-113019-5 [IE] CONTENTS 1 Fluids in the Earth’s Crust: The Science of Hydrogeology 2 Darcy’s Law and Hydraulic Head 3 Properties of Porous Media 4 Geologic Fluids 5 Transient Flow 6 Near Surface Flow 7 Driving Forces and Mechanisms for Fluid Flow 8 Abnormal Fluid Pressures 9 Environmental Hydrogeology 10 Petroleum Migration 11 Heat Transport 12 Earthquakes, Stress, and Fluids 13 Fluids in the Oceanic Crust 14 Fluids and Ore Deposits Meteorology International Edition METEROLOGY 2nd Edition By Eric W. Danielson, Hartford College for Women, James Levin, Pennsylvania State University—University Park and Elliot Abrams, AccuWeather, Inc. 2003 / 558 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-242072-2 / MHID: 0-07-242072-3 (with Essential Study Partner CD-ROM) – Out of Print ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121383-7 / MHID: 0-07-121383-X [IE] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/meteorology CONTENTS 1 Introduction to Meteorological Inquiry 2 Is the Atmosphere’s Composition Changing? 3 How Does the Atmosphere Maintain Such a Steady Temperature? 4 Humidity 5 How Do Clouds Form? 6 Precipitation 7 Structure of Large Mid-Latitude Weather Systems 8 Air Masses, Fronts, and Frontal Cyclones 9 Weather Forecasting 10 Circulations on Many Scales, and Their Interactions 11 Thunderstorms and Tornadoes 12 Hurricanes 13 Introduction to Climatology: How Stable is Earth’s Climate? 14 Is the Atmosphere Warming? 15 Light and Color in the Atmosphere 16 Air Pollution Appendix A: Some Notable Dates in the History of Meteorology B Scientific Notation C SI Units of Measurement D Other Units, Conversion Factors, and Constants E List of Elements F Latitude and Longitude G Time Zones H Weather Plotting Symbols I Windchill and Heat Index Tables J Humidity Tables K Saturation Mixing Ratio Diagram L Thermodynamic Diagram M Climatological Data N Atomic Structure: A Review of Some Basics INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg 123 HED 2007 Geology.indd 123 9/29/2006 1:23:56 PM Geology Oceanography New EXPLORING THE WORLD OCEAN By Sean Chamberlin, Fullerton College and Tommy Dickey 2008 (January 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331276-7 / MHID: 0-07-331276-2 Exploring the World Ocean presents oceanography as a systems science, aimed at understanding the world ocean as a single, interdependent system of interacting geological, physical, chemical and biological processes. Also emphasized is the idea that ocean science is an ongoing process, dependent upon cutting-edge technology and research. Students are encouraged to take an active role in learning by exploring scientific ideas, data, and alternative ways of thinking as they view oceanography through the eyes of an oceanographer. FEATURES • Exploring the World Ocean takes a systems approach: each chapter contributes to the understanding of the ocean’s geological, physical, chemical, and biological processes and how they work together to form one world ocean. • Written by an oceanographer and researcher currently in the field, the authors’ goal is to capture the spirit of oceanography by allowing the reader to view it through the eyes of an oceanographer. • “You Might Wonder” sections offer general interest questions and answers that provide interesting tidbits, strange and amazing facts, common misconceptions and miscellaneous topics of interest to students. • Each chapter ends with Critical Thinking questions and activities which are designed to help students assess their understanding of chapter material. These questions also provide an excellent starting point for deeper explorations of a topic in classroom or online discussions. • Appendices include: Symbols, Metric System, Conversions, and Useful Oceanographic Formulas. • A fold-out map at the end of the book provides a quick reference to the oceans, seas, bays, gulfs, straights, channels, and waters that form the world ocean. • The Online Learning Center features additional tools and activities for students including: chapter quizzing, key terms flashcards, web links, animations, and Scripps video clips. • Instructors will find an Instructor’s Manual, PowerPoint Lecture outlines, and CPS questions. CONTENTS Preface / Chapter One: Introducing the World Ocean Chapter Two: World Ocean Origins Chapter Three: Plate Tectonics Theory and Evidence Chapter Four: Sea Floor Features Chapter Five: Ocean Sediments Chapter Six: Ocean Chemistry Chapter Seven: Ocean Physics Chapter Eight: The Ocean and the Atmosphere Chapter Nine: Surface and Deep Circulation Chapter Ten: Ocean Waves Chapter Eleven: Ocean Tides and Sea Level Chapter Twelve: Ocean Life and Its Evolution Chapter Thirteen: Phytoplankton Productivity Chapter Fourteen: Ocean Food Webs Chapter Fifteen: Humans and the Coastal Ocean Chapter Sixteen: Future Explorations Appendices • Guided by the desire to present science as a process and to immerse students in the literature of modern day oceanographic research, fundamental questions of human and scientific interest are explored throughout the text. • Exploring the World Ocean offers a more contemporary view of oceanography, prompting students to question the ocean and its systems, and to seek answers by investigating the different tools and methods scientists use to explain the processes they observe. • “Spotlight” boxed readings highlight cutting-edge oceanographic research and technology through discussions of ocean-related environmental and societal issues, as well as controversies and areas of research where oceanographers disagree. These boxes provide added interest and demonstrate the fact that science is constantly changing. Topics include: Sea Floor Observatories: Telescopes to Inner Space, Increasing CO2 in the World Ocean, Are the Polar Ice Caps Melting?, and Robotic “Oceanographers” Witness Extreme Events. • Pedagogical features include: chapter outline, Questions to Consider, bolded key terms, “Spotlight” boxed readings, “You Might Wonder” questions and answers, bulleted key concepts, Terms to Remember, and directions to the Online Learning Center for self-assessment, web links, and animations. • Each chapter begins with Questions to Consider; a set of questions that may be used as an introduction to a topic, or a starting point for inquiry-based studies. These questions are intended to stimulate curiosity and promote thinking like an oceanographer. • Historical content and environmental issues are woven throughout the text in the context of chapter-specific subject matter. • Figure captions often function as an extension of the text by providing new or additional information about a topic. This forces students to view the art as a learning tool, and helps them to better understand the concept being presented. • Exploring the World Ocean contains more than 400 full-color maps, illustrations and photographs. All of the art has been carefully designed and selected to complement and reinforce the text. World maps have been put on the Robinson projection for added visual appeal. International Edition New INTRODUCTION TO THE WORLD’S OCEANS 9th Edition By Keith Sverdrup and Alyn Duxbury of University of Washington and Alison Duxbury, North Seattle Comm College 2008 (September 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325483-8 / MHID: 0-07-325483-5 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110221-6 / MHID: 0-07-110221-3 [IE] An Introduction to the World’s Oceans, Ninth Edition, is an introductory oceanography text intended for students without a background in mathematics, chemistry, physics, geology, or biology. It emphasizes the role of basic scientific principles in helping understand the processes that govern the ocean and the earth. A major objective of the text is to stimulate student interest and curiosity by blending contemporary information and research with basic principles to form an integrated introduction to the sciences of the oceans. To keep the text as current as possible, the authors conduct their own research and examine other findings such as analyzing satellite data and large-scale oceanographic programs. From this vast amount of data, they select interesting, relevant, and understandable examples that illustrate contemporary principles of oceanography. An Introduction to the World’s Oceans places greater emphasis on the physical and geological aspects of the oceans than on the chemical and geochemical properties, because the latter disciplines require more specific background knowledge. An ecological approach helps integrate the biological chapters with other subjects. Students are encouraged to look at oceanography as a cohesive and united discipline rather than a collection of subjects gathered under a marine umbrella. As with all previous editions, the authors continue to make each chapter stand as independently as possible, so that professors can assign chapters in the order that best suits their classrooms. 124 HED 2007 Geology.indd 124 9/29/2006 1:23:57 PM Geology Paleontology NEW TO THIS EDITION • Field Notes (six found throughout the book) feature guest essays by prominent oceanographers. These essays offer insight into the world of oceanographers and help students learn about some of the most exciting and cutting-edge developments in oceanography. They also provide the reader a glimpse into the near future of the discipline. • Thirty-four Scripps Video Clips are available to users of this text. These 15- to 20-second, underwater clips feature footage of marine animals and their behavior, giving students a glimpse into a real, underwater perspective. FEATURES • Updated: The Online Learning Center now features a student study guide, flashcards, and web links, in addition to online quizzing, animations and exercises, and instructor resources. • The authors each bring unique skills and expertise to this text. Alyn Duxbury has expertise in physical oceanography, Alison Duxbury has expertise in marine biology, and Keith Sverdrup has expertise in marine geology, geophysics, and how oceanography relates to other areas of science. • The Digital Content Manager CD-ROM contains nearly every photograph and piece of artwork from the textbook. Additionally, video clips from the Scripps Institute of Oceanography are also included on this presentation CD-ROM. CONTENTS 1 The History of Oceanography 2 The Water Planet 3 Plate Tectonics 4 The Sea Floor and Its Sediments 5 The Physical Properties of Water 6 The Chemistry of Seawater 7 The Structure and Motion of the Atmosphere 8 Circulation and Ocean Structure 9 The Surface Currents 10 The Waves 11 The Tides 12 Coasts, Beaches, and Estuaries 13 Environmental Issues and Concerns 14 The Living Ocean 15 Production and Life 16 The Plankton: Drifters of the Open Ocean 17 The Nekton: Free Swimmers of the Sea 18 The Benthos: Dwellers of the Sea Floor BRINGING FOSSILS TO LIFE An Introduction to Paleobiology, 2nd Edition By Donald A. Prothero, Occidental College 2004 / 480 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-366170-4 / MHID: 0-07-366170-8 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/earthsci/geology This is the first text to combine both paleontology and paleobiology. Traditional textbooks treat these separately, despite the recent trend to combine them in teaching. It bridges the gap between purely theoretical paleobiology and purely descriptive invertebrate paleontology books. The text is targeted at undergraduate geology and biology majors, with the emphasis on organisms, rather than dead objects to be described and catalogued. Current ideas from modern biology, ecology, population genetics, and many other concepts will be applied to the study of the fossil record. CONTENTS 1 The Fossil Record: A Window on the Past 2 Variation in Fossils 3 Species and Speciation 4 Systematics 5 Evolution 6 Extinction 7 Functional Morphology 8 Paleoecology 9 Biogeography 10 Biostratigraphy 11 Micropaleontology 12 Colonial Life: Archaeocyathans, Sponges, and Enidarians 13 Lophophorates: Brachiopods and Bryozoans 14 Arthropods 15 Mollusks 16 Echinoderms 17 Chordates 18 Trace Fossils Petrology International Edition International Edition FUNDAMENTALS OF OCEANOGRAPHY 5th Edition By Keith A. Sverdrup, University of Wisconsin – Milwaukee, Alyn C. Duxbury, University of Washington, Alison B. Duxbury, North Seattle Community College 2006 (Jan 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304081-3 / MHID: 0-07-304081-9 (Essential Version) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111712-8 / MHID: 0-07-111712-1 [IE with OLC] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/sverdrup5 Fundamentals of Oceanography is intended for less intensive college oceanography courses, courses for non-science majors and advanced placement oceanography programs for high school students. To meet the needs of these groups, this text has numerous student aids including chapter learning objectives, section review questions, summary charts, units in metric and English units, chapter summaries, chapter word lists, bold face for technical terms in the text, and reduced use of technical terms. No prerequisites in math, chemistry, physics, or biology are required. CONTENTS 1 History of Oceanography 2 Introduction to Earth 3 Plate Tectonics 4 The Sea Floor 5 Water 6 The Atmosphere and the Oceans 7 Circulation Patterns and Ocean Currents 8 Waves and Tides 9 Coasts, Estuaries, and Environmental Issues 10 Oceanic Environment and Production 11 Life in the Water 12 Life on the Sea Floor Appendix A Latitude and Longitude Appendix B Classification Summaries Appendix C Units and Notation PETROLOGY The Study of Igneous, Sedimentary and Metamorphic Rocks, 2nd Edition By Loren A Raymond, Appalachian State University 2002 / 736 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-366168-1 / MHID: 0-07-366168-6 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115041-5 / MHID: 0-07-115041-2 [IE] Website: www.mhhe.com/earthsci/geoscience/virtuality/raymond/index. mhtml CONTENTS Part I Introduction 1 Rocks and Earth Structure Part II Igneous Rocks 2 Igneous Rocks: Their Structures and Textures 3 Chemistry, Mineralogy, and Classification of Igneous Rocks 4 The Phase Rule and Phase Diagrams 5 Petrogenesis, Movement, and Modification of Magmas 6 Basalts and Ultramafic Volcanic Rocks 7 Rhyolites and Pyroclastic Rocks 8 Andesites and Related Rocks 9 Ultramafic-Mafic Complexes and Related Rocks 10 Granodiorites and Related Rocks 11 Alkaline Igneous Rocks and Carbonatites Part III Sedimentary Rocks 12 Sedimentary Rocks: Their Structures, Textures, and Compositions 13 Classification of Sedimentary Rocks 14 Sedimentary Provenance, Processes, and Diagenesis 15 Sedimentary Environments 16 Mudrocks 17 Sandstones 18 Conglomerates, Diamictites, Breccias 19 Carbonate Rocks 20 Cherts, Evaporites, and Other Precipitated Rocks Part IV Metamorphic Rocks 21 Metamorphism and Metamorphic Rock Textures and Structures 22 Metamorphic Conditions, Classifications, Mineralogies, Protoliths, Facies, and Facies Series 23 Metamorphic Phase Diagrams 24 Contact Metamorphism 25 Regional Metamorphism Under Low to Medium P/T Conditions: Buchan and Barrovian Facies Series 26 High P/T Metamorphism: Franciscan and Sanbagawa Facies Series and the Origin of Blueschists 27 Eclogites 28 Dynamic Metamorphism 29 Alpine Ultramafic Rocks and the Mantle Part V Epilogue 30 Petrotectonic Assemblages 125 HED 2007 Geology.indd 125 9/29/2006 1:23:57 PM Geology Physical Geology Textbook International Edition New PHYSICAL GEOLOGY 7th Edition By Diane Carlson and Charles Plummer of California State University-Sacramento and David McGeary 2008 (September 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325648-1 / MHID: 0-07-325648-X ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110219-3 / MHID: 0-07-110219-1 [IE] Physical Geology: Earth Revealed is a classic in introductory geology classes. This text, which includes the same information as the market-leading Physical Geology, 11th Edition, is for the professor who wants to use the same valuable information and engaging format but in a different teaching sequence. Coverage of plate tectonics is moved to the beginning of the book. In keeping with the long-standing tradition, the seventh edition has been updated to include the most current information from the various sub-disciplines that comprise physical geology. The book’s purpose is to clearly present the various aspects of physical geology so that students can understand the logic of what scientists have discovered, as well as the elegant way the parts are interrelated to explain how Earth, as a whole, works. The outstanding art program and proven, accessible writing style will grab students’ attention and further their interest. This text continues to be used as the official textbook to accompany the Annenberg CPB distributed telecourse for physical geology. NEW TO THIS EDITION • McGraw-Hill is proud to bring you an assortment of 44 outstanding animations like no others. These include 20 new animations and 24 animations retained from previous editions. These animations are located on ARIS and also on the Digital Content Manager. A special animation icon has been placed beside every figure in the text that has a corresponding animation. • This new edition includes an updated art program that will not only aid in understanding, but also engage students’ interest. Over 300 illustrations have been revised or created from scratch. Over 130 new photos have been added to provide the reader with significant detail to support the textual material. Several photos from previous editions have been retained for their subject matter, but have been electronically enhanced to improve focus and clarity. • “A Geologist’s View” pieces have been added. Seventeen photos in the text are accompanied by an illustration depicting how a geologist would view the scene. Students gain experience understanding how the trained eye of a geologist views a scene in order to understand the historical processes that have occurred that result in what they are seeing today. • McGraw-Hill’s ARIS for Carlson is a complete electronic homework and course management system, designed for greater ease of use than any other system available. Instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. Instructors can edit questions, import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of easy-to-assign homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a student is registered in the course, all student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. • New Classroom Performance System and Questions--McGraw-Hill has partnered with eInstruction to provide the revolutionary Classroom Performance System (CPS) and to bring interactivity into the classroom. CPS is a wireless response system that gives the instructor and students immediate feedback from the entire class. The wireless response pads are essentially remotes that engage students and are easy to use. CPS allows you to motivate student preparation, interactivity, and active learning so you can receive immediate feedback and know what students understand. A text-specific set of questions, formatted for both CPS and PowerPoint, is available via download from the Instructor area of the Online Learning Center. • A three page fold-out map has been added to the back of the text for students’ reference. The front side of the foldout contains a geographic map of the world. FEATURES • Planetary Geology Boxes. These boxes compare features elsewhere in the solar system to their Earthly counterparts (e.g.; Stream Features on the Planet Mars). • Environmental Geology Boxes. These boxes discuss topics that relate the chapter material to environmental issues, including impact on humans (e.g., Radon-A Radioactive Health Hazard). • Earth Systems Boxes. These boxes highlight the interrelationships between the geosphere, the atmosphere, and other Earth systems (e.g., Oxygen Isotopes and Climate Change). • Web Boxes. These boxes summarize material that is further explained on the book’s Online Learning Center. • Internet Resource Integration. The Internet has revolutionized the way we obtain knowledge, and this book makes full use of its potential to help students learn. We have URLs for appropriate websites throughout the book– within the main body of text, at the end of many boxes, and at the end of chapters. We have made the process student-friendly by having all websites that we mention in the book posted as links in this book’s Online Learning Center website. (We also include all URLs in the textbook for those who wish to go directly to a site.) • In Greater Depth Boxes. These boxes discuss phenomena that are not necessarily covered in a geology course (e.g., Precious Gems) or present material in greater depth (e.g., Calculating the Age of a Rock). • Purpose Statements. Each chapter begins with a statement of purpose of the chapter and its relationship with other chapters. This is usually followed by a section showing how that chapter’s material relates to Earth systems. CONTENTS 1 Introducing Geology, the Essentials of Plate Tectonics, and other Important Concepts 2 Earth’s Interior and Geophysical Properties 3 The Sea Floor 4 Plate Tectonics 5 Mountain Belts and the Continental Crust 6 Geologic Structures 7 Earthquakes 8 Time and Geology 9 Atoms, Elements, and Minerals 10 Volcanism and Extrusive Rocks 11 Igneous Rocks, Intrusive Activity, and the Origin of Igneous Rocks 12 Weathering and Soil 13 Mass Wasting 14 Sediment and Sedimentary Rocks 15 Metamorphism, Metamorphic Rocks, and Hydrothermal Rocks 16 Streams and Floods 17 Ground Water 18 Deserts and Wind Action 19 Glaciers and Glaciation 20 Waves, Beaches and Coasts 21 Geologic Resources 22 The Earth’s Companions INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg 126 HED 2007 Geology.indd 126 9/29/2006 1:23:57 PM Geology International Edition New PHYSICAL GEOLOGY 11th Edition By Charles (Carlos) C Plummer and Diane Carlson of California State University-Sacramento and David McGeary (Deceased) 2007 (Dec 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321821-2 / MHID: 0-07-321821-9 (with ARIS Card) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110789-1 / MHID: 0-07-110789-4 [IE with ARIS Card] Website: http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/0072826924 Physical Geology, Eleventh Edition, is the latest refinement of a classic introductory text that has helped countless students learn basic physical geology concepts for over 20 years. Students taking introductory physical geology to fulfill a science elective, as well as those contemplating a career in geology, will appreciate the accessible writing style and depth of coverage in Physical Geology. Hundreds of carefully rendered illustrations and accompanying photographs correlate perfectly with the chapter descriptions to help readers quickly grasp new geologic concepts. Numerous chapter learning tools and a rich Online Learning Center website further assist students in their study of physical geology. For professors, McGraw-Hill offers a complete supplement package consisting of slides, transparencies, computerized testbank, PowerPoint lectures, and digital images of every single piece of artwork and photograph in the text. These valuable supplements will make teaching easier and assist in fully conveying important concepts to students. McGraw-Hill is committed to adding considerable quality to each new edition of Physical Geology in the form of new and revised content, artwork, supplements, and media technology. Professors can adopt Physical Geology, Eleventh Edition, with confidence and count on the authors and McGraw-Hill to help them most effectively teach introductory physical geology. to support the textual material. Several photos from previous editions have been retained for their subject matter, but have been electronically enhanced to improve focus and clarity. Each chapter concludes with the following learning tools: » Summaries bring together and summarize the major concepts of the chapter. » Terms to Remember include all the boldfaced terms covered in the chapter so that students can verify their understanding of the concepts behind each term. » Testing Your Knowledge Quizzes allow students to gauge their understanding of the chapter (The answers to the multiple choice portions are posted on the website). » Expanding Your Knowledge Questions stimulate a student’s critical thinking by asking questions with answers that are not found in the textbook. » Exploring Web Resources describe some of the best sites on the web that relate to the chapter. » Animations listing of related animations on Online Learning Center. Physical Geology, 11/e will feature five types of boxed readings: 1) In Greater Depth Boxes. These boxes discuss phenomena that are not necessarily covered in a geology course (e.g., Precious Gems) or present material in greater depth (e.g., Calculating the Age of a Rock). 2) Environmental Geology Boxes. These boxes discuss topics that relate the chapter material to environmental issues, including impact on humans (e.g., Radon-A Radioactive Health Hazard). New to this edition 3) Planetary Geology Boxes. These boxes compare features elsewhere in the solar system to their Earthly counterparts (e.g.; Stream Features on the Planet Mars). Outstanding art program by illustrator Cindy Shaw featuring accuracy in scale, realism, and aesthetic appeal driven by a panel of profesors, the authors, and illustrator including an intense weekend event. 4) Earth Systems Boxes. These boxes highlight the interrelationships between the geosphere, the atmosphere, and other Earth systems (e.g., Oxygen Isotopes and Climate Change). “A Geologist’s View” pieces have been added. Seventeen photos in the text are accompanied by an illustration depicting how a geologist would view the scene. Students gain experience understanding how the trained eye of a geologist views a scene in order to understand the historical processes that have occurred that result in what they are seeing today. 5) Web Boxes. These boxes summarize material that is further explained on the book’s Online Learning Center. New Classroom Performance System and Questions--McGraw-Hill has partnered with eInstruction to provide the revolutionary Classroom Performance System (CPS) and to bring interactivity into the classroom. CPS is a wireless response system that gives the instructor and students immediate feedback from the entire class. The wireless response pads are essentially remotes that engage students and are easy to use. CPS allows you to motivate student preparation, interactivity, and active learning so you can receive immediate feedback and know what students understand. A text-specific set of questions, formatted for both CPS and PowerPoint, is available via download from the Instructor area of the Online Learning Center. Two new contributing authors: Rick Hazlett from California Polytechnic University--Pomona contributed to chapters 2, 19, and 21. J Bret Bennington from Hofstra University contributed to chapters 5 and 6. Features This new edition includes an updated art program that will not only aid in understanding, but also engage students’ interest. Over 300 illustrations have been revised or created from scratch. Over 130 new photos have been added to provide the reader with significant detail Digital Content Manager has been updated. This CD-ROM contains every illustration, photograph and table from the text, 80 animations, active art, lecture outlines, and 200 additional photos. The software makes customizing your multimedia presentation easy. You can organize figures in any order you want; add labels, lines, and your own artwork; integrate material from other sources; edit and annotate lecture notes; and have the option of placing your multimedia lecture into another presentation program such as PowerPoint. Dr. Steve Boss of the University of Arkansas will thoroughly update the Online Learning Center website that he created for Physical Geology, 9e. Instructors will find an instructor’s manual, test questions, and list of slides and transparencies for each chapter. Students will be able to access a study guide, animations of difficult concepts, interactive quizzing, flashcards, Internet exercises, and more. Instructor’s can customize this text using our do-it-yourself website! The Primis Content Center features more than one million items, including this and hundreds of other best-selling McGraw-Hill textbooks, laboratories, case studies, and readings These materials, along with others including your own notes, can be customized into a black and white, high resolution printed textbook or a full-color Primis eBook that saves your students 1/3 off bookstore prices. Log on to our website, register, and create your own complimentary copy. www.primiscontentcenter.com 127 HED 2007 Geology.indd 127 9/29/2006 1:23:58 PM Geology Contents 1 The Essentials of Plate Tectonics and other Important Concepts 2 Atoms, Elements, and Minerals 3 Igneous Rocks, Intrusive Activity, and the Origin of Igneous Rocks 4 Volcanism and Extrusive Rocks 5 Weathering and Soil 6 Sediment and Sedimentary Rocks 7 Metamorphism, Metamorphic Rocks, and Hydrothermal Rocks 8 Time and Geology 9 Mass Wasting 10 Streams and Floods 11 Ground Water 12 Glaciers and Glaciation 13 Deserts and Wind Action 14 Waves, Beaches and Coasts 15 Geologic Structures 16 Earthquakes 17 Earth’s Interior and Geophysical Properties 18 The Sea Floor 19 Plate Tectonics 20 Mountain Belts and the Continental Crust 21 Geologic Resources 22 The Earth’s Companions Laboratory New New LABORATORY MANUAL FOR PHYSICAL GEOLOGY 13th Edition By James H Zumberge (Deceased) 2007 (June 2006) / 288 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298861-4 / MHID: 0-07-298861-4 This successful laboratory manual is written for the freshmanlevel laboratory course in physical geology. In this lab, students study Earth materials, geologic interpretation of topographic maps, aerial photographs and Earth satellite imagery, structural geology and plate tectonics and related phenomena. With nearly 30 exercises, professors have great flexibility when developing the syllabus for their physical geology lab course. The ease of use, tremendous selection, and tried and true nature of the labs selected have made this lab manual one of the leading selling physical geology lab manuals. Features LAB MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY PHYSICAL GEOLOGY 6th Edition By Norris Jones, University of Wisconsin-Oshkosh and Charles Jones, University of Pittsburgh 2008 (February 2007) / 207 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305091-1 / MHID: 0-07-305091-1 If it’s important for you to incorporate the scientific method into your teaching, this lab manual is the perfect fit. In every exercise there are scientific method boxes that provide students with insight into the relevance of the scientific method to the topic at hand. The manual also includes “In Greater Depth” problems, a more challenging probe into certain issues. They are more quantitative in nature and require more in-depth, critical thinking, which is unique to this type of manual. CONTENTS Minerals 1 Properties of Minerals / 2 Mineral Identification / Rocks 3 Igneous Rocks / 4 Sedimentary Rocks / 5 Metamorphic Rocks / Maps and Images 6 Topographic Maps and Digital Elevation Models / 7 Remote Sensing of Volcanoes and Volcanic Hazards / Surface Processes 8 Streams and Humid-Climate Landscapes / 9 Groundwater and Groundwater-Influenced Landscapes / 10 Glaciation / 11 Sea Coasts / 12 Arid-Climate Landscapes / Geologic Time and Sequences 13 Geologic Age / Internal Processes 14 Structural Geology / 15 Geologic Maps / 16 Earthquakes / 17 Plate Tectonics COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog. Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com This lab manual incorporates well-produced, easy-to-read, and varied topographic and geologic maps. The authors have selected maps from across North America, helping professors tailor the presentation to their region of the country. The authors provide excellent coverage of Earth materials (rocks and minerals), while doing an outstanding job of teaching the scientific method, through well-written and well-illustrated exercises. The authors consistently use K-feldpsar rather than potassium feldspar and/or orthoclase throughout the manual. Throughout the text, website listings called Web Connections, related to the topic at hand, provide students with access to current information and additional resources. A glossary, located in the back of the manual, allows students to review the important concepts and geologic terms they will encounter in the laboratory. The glossary is particularly useful when students do not routinely bring their textbooks to the lab, or when students are not concurrently enrolled in the lecture course. An Instructor’s Manual to the Laboratory Manual can be found on the custom web site. The website that accompanies Zumberge provides students with flashcards, animations, additional photos, and all of the weblinks listed in the lab manual. Instructor’s can customize this lab manual using our do-it-yourself website. The Primis Content Center features more than one million items, including this and hundreds of other best-selling McGraw-Hill textbooks, laboratories, case studies, and readings These materials, along with others including your own notes, can be customized into a black and white, high resolution printed textbook or a full-color Primis eBook that saves your students 1/3 off bookstore prices. Log on to our website, register, and create your own complimentary copy. Contents 1 Earth Materials / Minerals / Rocks / The Geologic Column and Geologic Time / 2 Topographic Maps, Aerial Photographs, and Other Imagery From Remote Sensing / Map Coordinates and Land Divisions Topographic Maps / Imagery From Remote Sensing / 3 Geologic Interpretation of Topographic Maps, Aerial Photographs, and Earth Satellite Images / 4 Structural Geology / Structural Features of Sedimentary Rocks / Faults and Earthquakes / The Use of Seismic Waves to Locate the Epicenter of an Earthquake / 5 Plate Tectonics and Related Geologic Phenomena / Seafloor Spreading in the South Atlantic and Eastern Pacific Oceans 128 HED 2007 Geology.indd 128 9/29/2006 1:23:58 PM 2007-2008 NEW Integrative Biology (PAE) Titles Integrative Biology (PAE) ~ Contents Animal Behavior............................................................ 130 Biostatistics.................................................................... 130 Botany (Economic)......................................................... 131 Botany - Non Majors Lab Manuals.............................................................. 131 Textbook................................................................... 130 Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy.................................. 140 Conservation Biology.................................................... 132 Ecology......................................................................... 132 Laboratory................................................................. 133 2007 New Titles CASTRO Marine Biology, 6e...................................................139 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321577-8 / MHID: 0-07-321577-5 CUNNINGHAM Environmental Science, 9e.......................................136 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321881-6 / MHID: 0-07-321881-2 HICKMAN Animal Diversity, 4e.................................................141 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-252844-2 / MHID: 0-07-252844-3 HICKMAN Laboratory Studies in Animal Diversity, 4e..............142 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326098-3 / MHID: 0-07-326098-3 MILLER Zoology, 7e..............................................................141 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322807-5 / MHID: 0-07-322807-9 Environmental Science Introductory Texts...................................................... 133 Media........................................................................ 137 2008 New Titles Evolution....................................................................... 137 Invertebrate Biology...................................................... 138 Limnology..................................................................... 138 Mammalogy.................................................................. 138 Marine Biology.............................................................. 139 Parasitology................................................................... 139 Vertebrate Biology Laboratory................................................................. 140 Textbook................................................................... 140 Zoology Laboratory - Majors.................................................... 142 Supplements.............................................................. 142 Textbook................................................................... 141 CUNNINGHAM Principles of Environmental Science, 4e...................133 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330446-5 / MHID: 0-07-330446-8 ENGER Environmental Science, 11e.....................................134 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330447-2 / MHID: 0-07-330447-6 KARDONG Introduction to Biological Evolution, 2e...................137 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305077-5 / MHID: 0-07-305077-6 KAULFMANN Environmental Science.............................................135 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331186-9 / MHID: 0-07-331186-3 MOLLES Ecology, 4e...............................................................132 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330976-7 / MHID: 0-07-330976-1 STERN Introductory Plant Biology, 11e...............................130 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331421-1 / MHID: 0-07-331421-8 STERN Laboratory Manual to accompany Introductory Plant Biology, 11e....................................................131 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-283068-2 / MHID: 0-07-283068-9 129 HED 2007 Integrative Biology (PA129 129 9/29/2006 1:26:55 PM Integrative Biology (PAE) Animal Behavior Botany - Non Majors Textbook International Edition ANIMAL BEHAVIOR 5th Edition By Lee C Drickamer, Southern Illinois University, Carbondale, Stephen H Vessey, Bowling Green State University and Elizabeth Jakob, University of Massachusetts - Amherst 2002 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-012199-7 / MHID: 0-07-012199-0 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113020-2 / MHID: 0-07-113020-9 [IE] Website: www.mhhe.com/zoology CONTENTS Part One The Study of Animal Behavior 1 Introduction 2 History of the Study of Animal Behavior 3 Approaches and Methods Part Two Behavior Genetics and Evolution 4 Genes and Evolution 5 Behavioral Genetics 6 Evolution of Behavior Patterns Part Three Mechanisms of Behavior 7 The Nervous System and Behavior 8 Hormones and Behavior, and Immunology and Behavior 9 Biological Timekeeping 10 Development of Behavior 11 Learning Behavior 12 Communication Part Four Finding Food and Shelter 13 Migration, Orientation, and Navigation 14 Habitat Selection 15 Foraging Behavior Part Five Social Organization and Mating Systems 16 Aggression 17 Sexual Reproduction and Parental Care 18 Parental Investment and Mating Systems 19 Evolution of Social Systems / References / Glossary New INTRODUCTORY PLANT BIOLOGY 11th Edition By Kinsley Stern, California State University-Chico, James Bidlack, University of Central Oklahoma and Shelley Jansky, University of Wisconsin-Madison 2008 (February 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331421-1 / MHID: 0-07-331421-8 This introductory text assumes little prior scientific knowledge on the part of the student. It includes sufficient information for some shorter introductory botany courses open to both majors and nonmajors, and is arranged so that certain sections can be omitted without disrupting the overall continuity of the course. Stern emphasizes current interests while presenting basic botanical principles. FEATURES • Stern implements a traditional, micro to macro approach (cells to ecology) to organizing chapters. • To pique student interest and reinforce concepts, there is a considerable amount of ecology and ethnobotany included with traditional botany throughout the text. Biostatistics International Edition INTRODUCTION TO BIOSTATISTICS By Thomas Glover and Kevin Mitchell of Hobart & WM Smith College 2002 / 432 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123743-7 / MHID: 0-07-123743-7 [IE] Website: www.mhhe.com/biosci/pae/zoology/glover/index.mhtml CONTENTS 1 Introduction to Data Analysis 2 Introduction to Probability 3 Probability Distributions 4 Sampling Distributions 5 Introduction to Hypothesis Testing 6 One-Sample Tests of Hypothesis 7 Tests of Hypothesis Involving Two Samples 8 k-Sample Tests of Hypothesis: The Analysis of Variance 9 Two-Factor Analysis 10 Linear Regression and Correlation 11 Goodness of Fit Tests for Categorical Data Appendixes: A Proofs of Selected Results / B Answers to Even-numbered Problems / C Tables of Distributions and Critical Values • A chapter outline, review questions, discussion questions, learning online topics, and additional reading lists are provided for each chapter. New terms are defined as they are introduced, and those used more than once are boldfaced and included in a pronunciation glossary. CONTENTS Chapter 1: What Is Plant Biology? Chapter 2: The Nature of Life? Chapter 3: Cells Chapter 4: Tissues Chapter 5: Roots and Soils Chapter 6: Stems Chapter 7: Leaves Chapter 8: Flowers, Fruits, and Seeds Chapter 9: Water in Plants Chapter 10: Plant Metabolism Chapter 11: Growth Chapter 12: Meiosis and Alternation of Generation Chapter 13: Genetics Chapter 14: Plant Breeding and Propagation Chapter 15: Evolution Chapter 16: Plant Names and Classification Chapter 17: Domain (Kingdom) Bacteria, Domain (Kingdom) Archaea, and Viruses Chapter 18: Kingdom Protista Chapter 19: Kingdom Fungi Chapter 20: Introduction to the Plant Kingdom: Bryophytes Chapter 21: The Seedless Vascular Plants: Ferns and Their Relatives Chapter 22: Introduction to Seed Plants: Gymnosperms Chapter 23: Seed Plants: Angiosperms Chapter 24: Flowering Plants and Civilization Chapter 25: Ecology Chapter 26: Biomes COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog. Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com 130 HED 2007 Integrative Biology (PA130 130 9/29/2006 1:26:55 PM Integrative Biology (PAE) Botany (Economic) International Edition PRINCIPLES OF BOTANY By Gordon Uno, National Science Foundation, Richard Storey, Colorado College and Randy Moore, University of Minnesota-Minneapolis 2001 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118087-0 / MHID: 0-07-118087-7 [IE] Website: www.mhhe.com/botany CONTENTS 1 An Introduction to Plants and Their Study 2 The Ecology and Natural Selection of Plants 3 Energy and Cell Chemistry 4 Plant Cells and Tissue Systems 5 DNA, Genes, and Cell Division 6 Plant Growth and Development 7 Root Systems and Plant Mineral Nutrition 8 Stems and Secondary Growth 9 Leaves and the Movement of Water 10 Photosynthesis 11 Respiration 12 Flowers, Fruits and Seeds 13 Genetics 14 Evolution 15 The Diversity and Classification of Plants 16 Bacteria, Fungi and Algae 17 Bryophytes and Ferns: The Seedless Plants 18 Gymnosperms and Angiosperms: The Seed Plants 19 Ecology Appendix A: What is Genetic Engineering? Appendix B: Fundamentals of Chemistry for Botany Students PLANTS AND SOCIETY 4th Edition By Estelle Levetin and Karen McMahon of University of Tulsa 2006 (Feb 2005) / 544 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-252842-8 / MHID: 0-07-252842-7 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/levetin4e This introductory, one quarter/one-semester text takes a multidisciplinary approach to studying the relationship between plants and people. The authors strive to stimulate interest in plant science and encourage students to further their studies in botany. Also, by exposing students to society’s historical connection to plants, Levetin and McMahon hope to instill a greater appreciation for the botanical world. Plants and Society covers basic principles of botany with strong emphasis on the economic aspects and social implications of plants and fungi. CONTENTS Lab Manuals New LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY INTRODUCTORY PLANT BIOLOGY 11th Edition I Plants and Society: The Botanical Connections to Our Lives 1 Plants in Our Lives II Introduction to Plant Life: Botanical Principles 2 The Plant Cell 3 The Plant Body 4 Plant Physiology 5 Plant Life Cycle: Flowers 6 Plant Life Cycle: Fruits and Seeds 7 Genetics 8 Plant Systematics and Evolution 9 Diversity of Plant Life III Plants as a Source of Food 10 Human Nutrition 11 Origins of Agriculture 12 The Grasses 13 Legumes 14 Starchy Staples 15 Feeding a Hungry World IV Commercial Products Derived from Plants 16 Stimulating Beverages 17 Herbs and Spices 18 Materials: Cloth, Paper, and Wood V Plants and Human Health 19 Medicinal Plants 20 Psychoactive Plants 21 Poisonous and Allergy Plants VI Algae and Fungi: The Impacts of Algae Fungi on Human Affairs 22 The Algae 23 Fungi in the Natural Environment 24 Beverages and Foods from Fungi 25 Fungi that Affect Human Health VII Plants and the Environment 26 Plant Ecology Appendix A Metric System Appendix B Classification of Plants. By Kingsley Stern, California State University-Chico and James Bidlack, University of Central Oklahoma 2008 (February 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-283068-2 / MHID: 0-07-283068-9 CONTENTS 1: The Microscope 2: The Cell 3: Mitosis 4: Roots 5: Stems 6: Leaves 7: Plant Propagation 8: Cell Components and Products 9: Diffusion, Growth, and Hormones 10: Photosynthesis 11: Water in Plants; Respiration; Digestion 12: Meiosis and Alternation of Generations 13: Domain and Kingdom Survey 14: Domains Archaea and Bacteria; Kingdom Protista 15: Kingdom Fungi (Mycota) 16: Bryophytes and Ferns 17: Kingdom Plantae: Gymnosperms 18: Kingdom Plantae: Angiosperms (Flowering Plants--Phylum Magnoliophyta) 19: Fruits, Spices, Survival Plants, and Poisonous Plants 20: Ecology 21: Genetics International Edition ECONOMIC BOTANY 3rd Edition By Beryl Simpson and Molly Ogorzaly of University of Texas at Austin 2001/ 210 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-290938-8 / MHID: 0-07-290938-2 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118188-4 / MHID: 0-07-118188-1 [IE] Website: www.mhhe.com/biosci/pae/botany/simpson-links/weblinks. mhtml CONTENTS LABORATORY MANUAL FOR APPLIED BOTANY By Estelle Levetin and Karen McMahon of the University of Tulsa, Rob Reinsvold, University of Northern Colorado 2002 / 272 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-246548-8 / MHID: 0-07-246548-4 Website: www.mhhe.com/biosci/pae/botany/ CONTENTS 1 Cells of Crystal and Color 2 Cell Division and Cloning 3 Plant Tissues-The Fabrics of Our Lives 4 Plant Architecture 5 Plants Do It AllPhotosynthesis, Respiration, and Transpiration 6 Say It With Flowers 7 Fleshy Fruits and Flying Seeds 8 Genetic Diversity of Our Food 9 Algae-From Diversity to Dessert 10 Your Piece of the Sun 11 Leaves of Grass 12 The Lowdown on Legumes 13 Food from Underground and Far Away 14 The Spice of Life 15 The Beauty of Wood 16 Bioprospecting for Medicinal Plants 17 Bioactive Drugs in Action 18 The Fungus Among Us 1 Plants and Their Manipulation by People 2 Origins of Agriculture 3 Fruits and Nuts of Temperate Regions 4 Fruits and Nuts of Warm Regions 5 Cereal Grains and Forage Grasses 6 Legumes 7 Foods from Leaves, Stems, and Roots 8 Spices, Herbs, and Perfumes 9 Vegetable Oils and Waxes 10 Hydrogels, Elastic Latexes, and Resins 11 Medicinal Plants 12 Psychoactive Drugs and Poisons from Plants 13 Stimulating Beverages 14 Alcoholic Beverages 15 Fibers, Dyes, and Tannins 16 Wood, Cork, and Bamboo 17 Ornamental Plants 18 Algae 19 Uses of Plants in the Future 131 HED 2007 Integrative Biology (PA131 131 9/29/2006 1:26:55 PM Integrative Biology (PAE) Conservation Biology International Edition • “Investigating the Evidence” boxes now include critical thinking questions. These boxes focus on the scientific method, emphasizing statistics and study design. They support the concept discussions by presenting step-by-step clarification within a broader treatment of the process of science. • A foldout, 2-page biome map has been added at the back of the book. CONSERVATION BIOLOGY Foundations, Concepts, Applications By Fred Van Dyke, Wheaton College 2003 / 432 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-239770-3 / MHID: 0-07-239770-5 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119906-3 / MHID: 0-07-119906-3 [IE] Website: www.mhhe.com/conservation CONTENTS 1 The History and Distinctions of Conservation Biology 2 The Legal Foundations of Conservation Biology 3 Values and Ethics in Conservation 4 Biodiversity: Concept, Measurement, and Challenge 5 The Historic and Foundational Paradigms of Conservation Biology 6 The Conservation of Genetic Diversity 7 The Conservation of Populations 8 The Conservation of Habitat and Landscape 9 The Conservation of Aquatic Systems 10 Ecosystem Management 11 Restoration Ecology 12 Conservation, Economics, and Sustainable Development 13 Professional Effectiveness and Future Directions in Conservation Biology • Changes to the pedagogical system strengthen the critical thinking aspect of the book and include: - A new feature called “Concept Review” questions, with answers, now appears at the end of each section of the chapter. Each section of the chapter now contains “Concepts,” “Concept Discussions,” and “Concept Review” questions. - A new list of key terms now appears at the end of each chapter. - The author has shortened the length of the “Suggested Readings” where possible. Items in the “Suggested Readings” are not duplicated with items in the “References” at the end of the book. - The “List of Chapter Concepts” now appears in the Online Learning Center, rather than in an appendix. - Helpful appendices include commonly used statistical tables and an extended list of abbreviations used in the text, for use as reference and as study aids. FEATURES Ecology • This text takes a true “Concepts” approach with each chapter being built around several key concepts. It includes many examples drawn from the natural history of organisms. • This text offers a unique art program that uses captions within the illustration to explain the process. The key information is integral to the concept, rather than contained in a standard figure legend. International Edition New ECOLOGY Concepts and Applications, 4th Edition By Manuel Molles, University of New Mexico-Albuquerque 2008 (September 2006) / 640 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330976-7 / MHID: 0-07-330976-1 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110197-4 / MHID: 0-07-110197-7 [IE] This introductory general ecology text features a strong emphasis on helping students grasp the main concepts of ecology while keeping the presentation more applied than theoretical. An evolutionary perspective forms the foundation of the entire discussion. The book begins with the natural history of the planet, considers portions of the whole in the middle chapters, and ends with another perspective of the entire planet in the concluding chapter. Its unique organization of focusing only on several key concepts in each chapter sets it apart from the competition. NEW TO THIS EDITION • Includes classical studies along with contemporary examples to show the scientific method is valid and that research is still incomplete or ongoing. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Introduction: What Is Ecology? Section I: Natural History Chapter 2: Life on Land Chapter 3: Life in Water Section II: Individuals Chapter 4: Temperature Relations Chapter 5: Water Relations Chapter 6: Energy and Nutrient Relations Chapter 7: Social Relations Section III: Population Ecology Chapter 8: Population Genetics and Natural Selection Chapter 9: Population Distribution and Abundance Chapter 10: Population Dynamics Chapter 11: Population Growth Chapter 12: Life Histories Section IV: Interactions Chapter 13: Competition Chapter 14: Exploitative Interactions: Predation, Herbivory, Parasitism, and Disease Chapter 15: Mutualism Section V: Communities and Ecosystems Chapter 16: Species Abundance and Diversity Chapter 17: Species Interactions and Community Structure Chapter 18: Primary Production and Energy Flow Chapter 19: Nutrient Cycling and Retention Chapter 20: Succession and Stability Section VI: Large-Scale Ecology Chapter 21: Landscape Ecology Chapter 22: Geographic Ecology Chapter 23: Global Ecology • Content has been updated throughout with current examples and sources. Updated coverage includes: ecological stoichiometry, acid precipitation, global warming, symbiotic systems, speciation, organismal ecology, and discussion of tsunamis. • Artwork has been updated throughout for greater focus and clarity. The art program continues to use captions within the illustrations to explain the point of the art. The key information is integral to the concept, rather than contained in a standard figure legend. The explanatory boxes used in this text are unique and not available in any other ecology textbook. • New photos have been added throughout the text to illustrate the dynamic nature of ecological study. 132 HED 2007 Integrative Biology (PA132 132 9/29/2006 1:26:55 PM Integrative Biology (PAE) FUNDAMENTALS OF ECOLOGY 2nd Edition By Dash Madhab 2001 / 544 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-042147-9 / MHID: 0-07-042147-1 [Tata McGraw-Hill Title] The book has retained its fundamental, interdisciplinary approach, with balanced treatment of botany and zoology related concepts and examples. The environmental aspect has been strengthened in this edition. There are several new chapters to this edition: 1. Enviromental Toxicology with relevant case studies 2. Pollution Ecology with a comprehensive section on the provisions of the Indian Constitution and environmental laws, and detailed discussion on a wide range of pollutants, including industrial pollutants. Other important additions: 1. The concept of landscape ecology 2. Coverage on the Eastern and Western ghats of India 3. A discussion on world climate change 4. The concept of sustainable development 5. Geographical information system and remote sensing, applied to ecology. Laboratory GENERAL ECOLOGY LABORATORY MANUAL 8th Edition By George Cox 2002 / 320 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-290974-6 / MHID: 0-07-290974-9 Website: www.mhhe.com/biosci/pae CONTENTS Part I Techniques of Ecological Study 1 Designing an Ecological Study 2 Experimental Design in Ecological Studies 3 Sampling Design in Ecological Studies 4 Statistical Analysis and Testing in Ecology 5 Literature Research in Ecology 6 Internet Resources in Ecology 7 Preparing an Ecological Research Paper Part II Terrestrial and Aquatic Ecosystems 8 Plant Community Structure 9 Animal Community Structure 10 Soil Arthropod Community Structure 11 Structure of a Lake Ecosystem Part III Temperature, Water, and Energy Relations 12 Acclimation to Temperature 13 Behavioral Preference Analysis 14 Plant Water Potential 15 Field Measurement of Photosynthesis and Transpiration Part IV Population Ecology 16 Mark-Recapture and Catch-Effort Population stimates 17 Mapping Home Ranges and Territories 18 Intrapopulation Dispersion Analysis 19 Mortality, Recruitment, and Migration Rates in Populations 20 Life Tables and Survivorship Curves 21 Ecogenetic Evolution in Plants 22 Population Growth, Limitation, and Interaction Part V Intraspecific and Interspecific Interactions 23 Field Studies of Plant Competition 24 Ecological Isolation 25 Niche Breadth, Niche Overlap, and the Community Matrix 26 Interspecific Association 27 Pollination Ecology Part VI Community Ecology 28 Measurement of Species Diversity 29 Community Similarity and Ordination 30 Nestedness in Community Composition Part VII Ecosystem Ecology 31 Analysis of Food Webs 32 Primary Production in Terrestrial Ecosystems 33 Primary Production in Aquatic Ecosystems 34 Simulation of Ecosystem Dynamics 35 Mechanisms of Biotic Succession Part VIII Regional and Global Ecology 36 Species-Area Relationships 37 Metapopulation Dynamics 38 Landscape Ecology 39 Geographic Information Systems 40 Conserving Global Biodiversity Appendix I Statistical Tables Appendix II Sources of Software and Hardware Environmental Science Introductory Texts International Edition New PRINCIPLES OF ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE Inquiry and Applications, 4th Edition By William Cunningham, University of Minnesota and Mary Ann Cunningham, Vassar College 2008 (September 2006) / 448 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330446-5 / MHID: 0-07-330446-8 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110194-3 / MHID: 0-07-110194-2 [IE] Rather than the 25 to 30 chapters found in most environmental science textbooks, the authors have limited Principles of Environmental Science: Inquiry and Applications to 15 chapters--perfect for the one-semester, non-majors environmental science course. True to its title, the goal of this concise text is to provide an upto-date, introductory view of essential themes in environmental science along with offering students numerous opportunities to practice scientific thinking and active learning. NEW TO THIS EDITION • Several chapters have been significantly revised: - In addition to significant revisions of the section on matter, energy, chemistry, biomolecules, and cells, Chapter 2 features a new section on ecological systems, and expanded discussion on DNA. - Chapter 3 has been revised heavily to include a strengthened discussion of evolution, speciation, taxonomy, species interaction, keystone species, community complexity, and ecological disturbance. - Chapter 5 features a major revision on the discussion on biomes with a greatly expanded section on coastlines, reefs, mangroves, estuaries, saltmarshes and freshwater ecosystems. - A new section on New Source Review and the 2005 Clean Air Interstate Rule has been added to Chapter 9. In addition, the section on evidence for climate change including 2005 hurricane season has been rewritten; and the section on controlling greenhouse gas emissions has been updated. - In Chapter 12, a discussion on rapid energy demand growth in China and India, and on LNG shipments has been added. The discussion of energy conservation and renewable energy sources has been expanded, including new sections on biofuels and wave power. - Chapter 15 has undergone a major revision and reorganization including much more material on sustainability and what individuals can do. Also, a new section on “What can Individuals Do?” has been added, including environmental education, environmental literacy, citizen science, environmental careers, individual choices, green consumerism, working together, and student environmental groups. The section on ecosystem management has been rewritten with a focus on Everglades restoration; and the chapter now ends with a new positive message about global sustainability and the key messages from the Millennium Assessment study. • Updated Case Studies--Every chapter opens with a Case Study (nearly all of them are new to this edition) that shows how the science presented in that chapter is of current interest. In this edition, the authors have chosen positive examples in which people are taking action to repair and improve some aspect of their environment. In addition, each case study has a new Locator Map that highlights the area of interest being discussed. 133 HED 2007 Integrative Biology (PA133 133 9/29/2006 1:26:56 PM Integrative Biology (PAE) • Numerous new photos have been added throughout the text to depict real-life situations. Several illustrations, graphs, and charts are new or revised to present realistic and current information in a form that is easier to comprehend than if that same material were presented in text. • Each chapter opens with a “List of Objectives” that will help students organize study priorities. Rather than being imperative requirements, these objectives have been changed to more active questions that lead rather than command. • New and Redesigned End-of-Chapter Tools: New Data Analysis Exercises. Because so many students need practice analyzing data, graphing data, and thinking analytically, the end-ofchapter exercises have been redesigned as Data Analysis projects. In each exercise, students are asked to create or analyze graphs, to map or inspect a data set, or take other steps to analyze data. A more challenging, open-ended set of questions have been added to encourage students to think more deeply and independently about issues and principles presented in the chapter. These Critical Thinking and Discussion questions make excellent starting points for discussion sections. They also could be used to practice for essay exams. The number of Review Questions has been doubled to provide more comprehensive coverage of important topics in each chapter. Answers to review questions are posted to the text website. • McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is a new complete electronic homework and course management system, designed for greater ease of use than any other system available. Instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. Instructors can edit questions, import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a student is registered in the course, all student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. FEATURES • Concise and affordable, Principles of Environmental Science: Inquiry and Applications explores the scientific principles and active investigation behind environmental science. Three themes are woven throughout every chapter: scientific thinking, active learning, and sustainability. • Central questions that underlie the text are “how would a scientist think about this problem?” and “how can we make informed decisions in the face of uncertainty?”. • Because few of us learn effectively without an opportunity to actively apply new ideas, application boxes have been included throughout the text. These boxes provide a break in reading and invite students to practice or apply skills they have just learned. In addition, “What can you do?” boxes in nearly every chapter suggest practical things that individuals can do to help improve environmental quality and resource conservation. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Understanding Our Environment Chapter 2: Environmental Systems: Connections, Cycles, Flows, and Feedback Loops Chapter 3: Species Populations, Interactions, and Communities Chapter 4: Human Populations Chapter 5: Biomes and Biodiversity Chapter 6: Environmental Conservation: Forests, Grasslands, Parks, and Nature Preserves Chapter 7: Food and Agriculture Chapter 8: Environmental Health and Toxicology Chapter 9: Air: Climate and Pollution Chapter 10: Water: Resources and Pollution Chapter 11: Environmental Geology and Earth Resources Chapter 12: Energy Chapter 13: Solid and Hazardous Waste Chapter 14: Economics and Urbanization Chapter 15: Environmental Policy and Sustainability International Edition New ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE A Study of Interrelationships, 11th Edition By Eldon Enger, Delta College and Bradley Smith, Western Washington University 2008 (September 2006) / 544 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330447-2 / MHID: 0-07-330447-6 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110195-0 / MHID: 0-07-110195-0 [IE] This full-color, introductory environmental science text is known for being concise, conceptual, and value-priced. The approach and reading level cover the basic concepts without overloading students with too much detail. The authors reinforce the text’s central theme of “interrelationships” by providing a historical perspective, information on economic and political realities, discuss the role of different social experiences, and integrate this with the crucial science to describe the natural world and how we affect it. NEW TO THIS EDITION • Several chapters have been significantly revised. - New guest author, Christopher Preston, University of Montana, has broadened the coverage of Chapter 2-Environmental Ethics-to give the chapter greater force and clarity. New information has been added to reflect the history, development, and maturation of thinking about environmental issues. - New guest author, Jacob VanHouten, Delta College, has intergrated his knowledge of environmental regulations and the handling of hazardous materials into Chapter 3--Environmental Risk and Chapter 18-Environmental Regulations. Energy savings cost/benefit analysis, and the Great Lakes Resource Management are topics addressed through detailed discussion and case studies. Also included are the most current Environmental liability protection and grants through the new Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Small Business Liability Relief and Brownfield Revitalization Act (SBLRBRA or “Brownfield Law”) as it relates to economics, assessment and management. - Chapter 7- Populations: Characteristics and Issues is the result of the combination of two separate chapters from previous editions (chapters 7 and 8). In response to reviewer requests, several sections such as those on carrying capacity, limiting factors, and r and K strategists have been rewritten. - Chapter 10- Nuclear Energy has been completely reorganized. New material has been added on the biological effects of ionizing radiation, measuring radiation, radiation protection, radioactive decay series, and dirty bombs. • Nearly 300 new photos have been added throughout the eleventh edition to present real-life situations. Several illustrations, graphs, and charts are new or revised to present detailed information in a form that is easier to comprehend than if that same information were presented in text form. • The new “What’s Your Take?” feature found at the end of each chapter asks students to take a stand on a particular issue and develop arguments to support their position. This is an effective way to develop and foster critical thinking. • The new student learning tool, “Experience This”, asks students to extend their learning by undertaking simple activities that relate to the content of the chapter. • McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is a new complete electronic homework and course management system, designed for greater ease of use than any other system available. Instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. Instructors can edit questions, import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a student is registered in the course, all student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS 134 HED 2007 Integrative Biology (PA134 134 9/29/2006 1:26:56 PM Integrative Biology (PAE) is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. FEATURES • Environmental Science: A Study of Interrelationships covers the engaging topics of ethics, law & policy, energy, and pollution in addition to traditional biological and physical subjects. The length and price of this text make it one of the most cost-effective, one-semester environmental science texts available. • “Global Perspectives” compare different countries approaches to environmental problems and provide examples of environmental issues not typically found in North America. • Critical Thinking questions can be found in every chapter. By answering these questions, students will become better at evaluating information, opinions, and arguments, so they can learn to recognize bias, characterize the assumption behind arguments, and avoid jumping to conclusions. • Issues--Analysis boxed readings encourage students to think about issues and formulate their own thoughts. Found in each chapter, these readings present real world examples of environmental problems and prompt students to think about issues involved and respond to a series of questions. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Environmental Interrelationships Chapter 2: Environmental Ethics Chapter 3: Environmental Risk: Economics, Assessment, and Management Chapter 4: Interrelated Scientific Principles: Matter, Energy, and Environment Chapter 5: Interactions: Environments and Organisms Chapter 6: Kinds of Ecosystems and Communities Chapter 7: Populations: Characteristics and Issues Chapter 8: Energy and Civilization: Patterns of Consumption Chapter 9: Energy Sources Chapter 10: Nuclear Energy Chapter 11: Biodiversity Issues Chapter 12: Land-Use Planning Chapter 13: Soil and Its Uses Chapter 14: Agricultural Methods and Pest Management Chapter 15: Water Management Chapter 16: Air Quality Issues Chapter 17: Solid Waste Management and Disposal Chapter 18: Environmental Regulations: Hazardous Substances and Wastes Chapter 19: Environmental Policy and Decision Making New ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE By Robert Kaufmann and Cutler Cleveland of Boston University 2008 (February 2007) ISBN13: 978-0-07-331186-9 / MHID: 0-07-331186-3 • The text’s unique art program does not rely heavily on photographs. Instead, conceptual figures and graphs are used to illustrate important ideas and relationships. • Three types of boxed readings are available in each chapter to help students see the relationship between humans and the environment: - Your Ecological Footprint. These exercises ask students to calculate how certain parts of their lifestyle affect the environment. Consistent with the interdisciplinary emphasis, these Ecological Footprint exercises build on each other from chapter to chapter. - Case Studies. Case studies illustrate how the systems aspects of environmental challenges complicates possible solutions. - Policy in Action. These readings apply the systems perspective to decision making and thus help students understand how the links between natural and social sciences influence why some environmental policies are effective while others are not. • McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is a new complete electronic homework and course management system, designed for greater ease of use than any other system available. Instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. Instructors can edit questions, import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a student is registered in the course, all student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. CONTENTS Introduction to Environmental Science 1 Environment and Society: A Sustainable Partnership? Building a Framework to Study Environmental Problems 2 The Laws of Energy and Matter 3 Systems: Why Are Environmental Problems So Difficult to Solve? How the Natural Environment Works 4 THe Physical Systems of Planet Earth: The Engine of Life 5 The Flow of Energy in Biological Systems: Why Does It Matter? 6 The Flow of Matter in the Environment: Why Does It Matter? 7 Biomes: Where Do Plants and Animals Live? 8 Succession: How Do Ecosystems Respond to Disturbance? How Human Systems Work 9 Carrying Capacity: How Large a Population? 10 An Ecological View of the Economy 11 The Driving Forces of Environmental Change Global Environmental Challenges 12 Biodiversity: Species and So Much More 13 Global Climate Change: A Warming Planet 14 A Reduction in Atmospheric Ozone: Let the Sunshine In Living Off the Land: Soils, Food Production, and Forests 15 Soil: A Potentially Sustainable Resource 16 Agriculture: The Ecology of Growing Food 17 Forests: So Much More Than Wood Air and Water Resources 18 Water Resources 19 Air Pollution: Costs and Benefits of Clean Air Energy and Materials 20 Fossil Fuels: The Lifeblood of the Global Economy 21 Nuclear Power 22 Renewable Energy and Energy Efficiency 23 Materials, Society, and the Environment 24 A Sustainable Future: Will Business as Usual Get Us There? Unlike any other introductory environmental science text, Kaufmann/Cleveland takes a fresh approach to the subject in that they intertwine social science (i.e. economic systems and policy) with the natural sciences (i.e. energy) throughout the entire text. In other words, students are going to clearly see the relevancy between the underlying causes of environmental problems and how they are affected on a daily basis. FEATURES • An Interdisciplinary Approach. Unlike other textbooks, the authors weave both social and natural sciences throughout the text, allowing students to see the complete relationship between people and their environment. The five main themes woven throughout include: 1) energy and material flows, 2) ecology and economics, 3) costs and benefits of environmental policy, 4) a systems perspective, and 5) Darwinian evolution and natural selection. • Unlike other environmental science textbooks, Environmental Science is not an “encyclopedia of facts”. The authors teach principles and applications, aiming to identify relevant problems, understand the basis of those problems, and develop the tools to solve those problems. INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg 135 HED 2007 Integrative Biology (PA135 135 9/29/2006 1:26:56 PM Integrative Biology (PAE) International Edition New ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE A Global Concern, 9th Edition By William P Cunningham, University of Minnesota--Minneapolis, Mary Ann Cunningham, Vassar College and Barbara Woodworth Saigo 2007 (Nov 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321881-6 / MHID: 0-07-321881-2 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110790-7 / MHID: 0-07-110790-8 [IE with ARIS] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cunningham9e Environmental Science, Ninth Edition, is a comprehensive presentation of environmental science for non-science majors which emphasizes critical thinking, environmental responsibility, and global awareness. This book is intended for use in a one- or two-semester course in environmental science, human ecology, or environmental studies at the college or advanced placement high school level. The goal of this book is to provide an up-to-date, introductory global view of essential themes in environmental science along with emphasis on details and case studies that will help students process and retain the general principles. Because most students who will use this book are freshman or sophomore non-science majors, the authors make the text readable and accessible without technical jargon or a presumption of prior science background. At the same time, enough data and depth are presented to make this book suitable for many upper-division classes and a valuable resource for students who will keep it in their personal libraries after their formal studies are completed. New to this edition Every chapter now opens with a Case Study, introducing students to real-life applications of environmental science. Examples include: the IPCC report on climate change, the Alaska National Wildlife Refuge, genetically modified organisms (GMSs), the explosion of urban geese populations, and the recent earthquake in Gujarat, India. Many more Case Studies can be found on the text’s website. New and updated content throughout ensures that the most recent data in environmental science are included. Expanded coverage of evolution, found in Chapter 4. New Instructor Media! Upon adoption of the text, instructors will have access to over 200 engaging video clips to integrate into their lectures for more visually stimulating presentations. --New Discovery Channel Education Video Clips on DVD cover topics ranging from ecology, evolution, chemistry, and energy, among several others. These short, 5-minute video clips include an easy-to-use search function for quick access. --Biology Digitized Video Clips on DVD are now available. Licensed from some of the highest-quality science video producers in the world (including National Geographic), these brief segments range from 15 seconds to two minutes in length and cover all areas of general biology. Engaging and informative, these video clips will help capture students’ interest while illustrating key biological concepts and processes. New, more contemporary design throughout makes the textbook more visually appealing and inviting than ever before. New Website Index found on the text’s website (www.mhhe.com/ cunningham9e) provides students and instructors with quick links to the wealth of content within it. The topics are listed alphabetically for quick and easy searches. Features Critical thinking emphasis. Throughout the text, the skill of critical thinking is emphasized by asking the reader to view all sides of an issue and to make informed, rational decisions based on ethical values. --Case Studies, “Exploring Science” boxes, “What Do You Think?” essays (many with “Ethical Considerations” attached), and “Think About It” boxes give students real-life examples to evaluate and a chance to practice critical thinking skills and formulate reasoned opinions. These boxes are carefully planned to build upon chapter content and are long enough to present important, real information. -End-of-chapter “Questions for Critical Thinking” are designed to stimulate creative, analytical thinking and to serve as a springboard for class discussions. “Learning to Learn” chapter. Speaking directly to the student about why environmental science is important, how to study, how to take a test, critical thinking, and cognitive maps, this introductory chapter prepares students to succeed. No other book goes into the fundamentals of critical thinking theory and application found here. Unique “Environmental Policy, Planning, and Law” chapter. Our future on this Earth depends on both good science and good decisionmaking. How is policy made? Why do we write our laws as we do? The unique “Environmental Policy, Planning and Law” chapter (24) explains the policy cycle of agenda setting, problem definition, implementation, and evaluation by which public environmental policy is established. Statutory, case, and administrative law are discussed with a level of sophistication never before presented in an environmental science textbook. Also included are current concepts such as alternative dispute resolution, wicked problems, resilience in ecosystems and institutions, the precautionary principle, arbitration and mediation, and collaborative approaches to community-based planning. If students are going to be educated environmental citizens, they need to know how these processes work. Every chapter in this book is enhanced with links to web-based material. The links give the address to our Online Learning Center (OLC) where students can find an abundant amount of learning aids and resources. Instructors can customize this text using our do-it-yourself website! The Primis Content Center features more than one million items, including this and hundreds of other best-selling McGraw-Hill textbooks, laboratories, case studies, and readings. These materials, along with others including your own notes, can be customized into a black and white, high resolution printed textbook or a full-color Primis eBook that saves your students 1/3 off bookstore prices. Log on to our website, register, and create your own complimentary copy. www.primiscontentcenter.com Contents Introduction: Learning to Learn Part One: Principles for Understanding Our Environment Chapter 1: Understanding Our Environment Chapter 2: Frameworks for Understanding Science, Systems, and Ethics Chapter 3: Matter, Energy, and Life Chapter 4: Biological Communities and Species Interactions Chapter 5: Biomes: Global Patterns of Life Chapter 6: Population Biology Part Two: People in the Environment Chapter 7: Human Populations Chapter 8: Environmental Health and Toxicology Chapter 9: Food and Agriculture Chapter 10: Pest Control Part Three: Understanding and Managing Living Systems Chapter 11: Biodiversity Chapter 12: Land Use: Forests and Grasslands Chapter 13: Preserving and Restoring Nature Part Four: Physical Resources and Environmental Systems Chapter 14: Geology and Earth Resources Chapter 15: Air, Weather, and Climate Chapter 16: Air Pollution Chapter 17: Water Use and Management Chapter 18: Water Pollution Part Five: Issues and Policy Chapter 19: Conventional Energy Chapter 20: Sustainable Energy Chapter 21: Solid, Toxic, and Hazardous Waste Chapter 22: Urbanization and Sustainable Cities Chapter 23: Ecological Economics Chapter 24: Environmental Policy, Law, and Planning Chapter 25: What Then Shall We Do? / Glossary / Index Global Concern Theme. The text’s “global concern” theme is critical because students need to understand that environmental problems and solutions are relevant to all nations and countries and not specific to just North America. 136 HED 2007 Integrative Biology (PA136 136 9/29/2006 1:26:56 PM Integrative Biology (PAE) International Edition CONNECTIONS IN ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE A Case Study Approach By J Richard Mayer, Western Washington University 2001 / 352 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-229726-3 / MHID: 0-07-229726-3 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247288-2 / MHID: 0-07-247288-X (with ESP 2.0 CD-ROM) (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118941-5 / MHID: 0-07-118941-6 [IE] Website: www.mhhe.com/environmentalscience CONTENTS Chapter 1 Arctic Wilderness and Wildlife Chapter 2 Tropical Forests and Biodiversity Chapter 3 Industrial Revolution and Polution Chapter 4 Estuaries, Seagrass Meadows, and Saltwater Ecosystems Chapter 5 Air Pollution: History, Legislation, and Trends Chapter 6 Population Principles and Demography Chapter 7 Impacts of Green Revolution Agriculture Chapter 8 Sustainable Agriculture Chapter 9 Petroleum Resources and Fossil Fuels Chapter 10 Nuclear Power Chapter 11 Sustainable Energy Chapter 12 Global Climate Chang Chapter 13 Stratospheric Ozone Depletion Chapter 14 Managing Hazardous Wastes Glossary Credits Index lar, and overwhelmingly genetic in emphasis. Ken Kardong, also author of Vertebrates; Comparative Anatomy, Function, Evolution, is known for his accessible writing style. His almost conversational approach to this topic puts the reader at ease while learning evolutionary concepts. The result is an inviting book--that will be read. NEW TO THIS EDITION • New Chapter 17: This new short concluding chapter takes advantage of the collective case made throughout the book and focuses on current issues facing students—the threat of epidemics and a critique of “intelligent design”. • Organization. Major sections (e.g. hot and cold blooded dinosaurs) have been re-deployed to chapters where they more logically fit and enhance the theme of that chapter. • Revisions. Although each chapter was revised for currency, special effort was made to update chapters of central importance (e.g. selection) or special interest (e.g. chapters on hominid evolution). • New Material. A short section on population genetics has been added (chapter 3), as well as sections on “What is life?” (chapter 4), “Darwin’s” pigeons (chapter 7), ring species (chapter 9), and on cultural and social evolution in hominids (chapters 14 and 15). • Throughout the text, many figures have been replaced, and many new ones added. FEATURES Media DISCOVERY CHANNEL VIDEO SERIES DVD By Discovery Channel 2006 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352541-9 / MHID: 0-07-352541-3 The exciting NEW Discovery Channel DVD offers 50 short (3-5 minute) videos on topics ranging from conservation to volcanoes. The video clips are most appropriate for environmental science, ecology, geology, and physical science courses. Search by topic and download into your PowerPoint lecture. Begin your class with a quick peek at science in action. Evolution International Edition New INTRODUCTION TO BIOLOGICAL EVOLUTION 2nd Edition By Kenneth Kardong, Washington State University-Pullman 2008 (December 2006) / 416 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305077-5 / MHID: 0-07-305077-6 ISBN-13:978-0-07-128582-7 / MHID: 0-07-128582-2 [IE] Written for a general college audience, this book offers an introduction to the principles and significance of Darwinian evolution. It differs from most other textbooks on evolution in three fundamental ways: First, it is intended for students taking evolution early in their studies. Second, it examines the intellectual significance of Darwinian evolution. Third, the text departs from the standard treatment of evolution in other textbooks, wherein the arguments are reductionist, molecu- • Introduction to Evolution differs from other evolution textbooks in three ways: 1. The book is intended for a general college audience new to the subject of Darwinian evolution. In other words, it is written for an introductory course for non-science majors. 2. The book examines the intellectual significance of Darwinian evolution. Students will study the history of his thought, the evidence for his ideas, the implications these have for the appearance and loss of life on Earth, and the significance to our own history as a species. 3. Other texts are higher level, molecular, and overwhelmingly genetic. • “Consider This” boxes feature a short paragraph on every day connections to evolution. For example, when you turn on a faucet, do you wonder where that water comes from-was it part of a glacier long ago? The idea is to connect the student with evolutionary principles that play a part in their daily existence. • Learning tools built into the text include chapter outlines, introductions, boldfaced terms, chapter overviews, references, and “On the Internet” information. • Instructors can customize this text using our do-it-yourself website! The Primis Content Center features more than one million items, including this and hundreds of other best-selling McGraw-Hill textbooks, laboratories, case studies, and readings. These materials, along with others including your own notes, can be customized into a black and white, high resolution printed textbook or a full-color Primis eBook that saves your students 1/3 off bookstore prices. Log on to our website, register, and create your own complimentary copy. www.primiscontentcenter.com CONTENTS 1 Evolution of Evolution 2 Time 3 Heredity 4 Emergence of Life 5 Diversity of Life 6 Evidence of Evolution 7 Selection 8 Variation: Spice of Life 9 Speciation 10 Co-Evolution 11 Life History Strategies 12 Life in Groups 13 Extinctions 14 Human Evolution: The Early Years 15 Human Evolution: Building Modern Humans 16 Evolutionary Biology: Today and Beyond 17 Afterword / Appendix 1 Cell Division--A Review Appendix 2 Taxonomy Appendix 3 Molecular Clocks 137 HED 2007 Integrative Biology (PA137 137 9/29/2006 1:26:56 PM Integrative Biology (PAE) Limnology The Echinoderms 21 The Hemichordates 22 The Nonvertebrate Chordates 23 Invertebrate Reproduction and Development—An Overview / Glossary / Index INTRODUCTION TO LIMNOLOGY By Stanley Dodson, University of Wisconsin — Madison 2005 (Jan 2004) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287935-3 / MHID: 0-07-287935-1 This text includes the basic foundation information of limnology in an appropriate length for a one-semester course. It is written for intermediate undergraduate college students with some science background, including an introductory biology course. The text is especially well-suited for undergraduate majors in zoology, botany, conservation biology, biology, environmental studies, ecology, aquatic biology, and related fields. Introduction to Limnology contains more biology, ecology, and human-environmental connections than other such books on the market. The text emphasizes aquatic ecology, with a wide range of ecological fields represented, including: landscape, ecosystem, physiological, population, community, and biome. CONTENTS 1 Introduction to Limnology 2 Setting the Stage: Water as an Environment 3 Diversity of Aquatic Organisms: The Single-Celled and Colonial Organisms 4 Diversity of Aquatic Organisms: Rotifers, Annelids, and Arthropods 5 Diversity of Aquatic Organisms: Larger Organisms 6 Population Dynamics in Limnology: Population Size Changing with Time 7 Community Ecology: Species Interactions and Community Structure 8 Community Ecology: Freshwater Communities Changing Through Time 9 Aquatic Ecosystems and Physiology: Energy Flow 10 Aquatic Ecosystems: Chemical Cycles 11 Water in Landscapes 12 The Citizen Limnologist 13 Field and Laboratory Exercises Invertebrate Biology International Edition Mammalogy International Edition MAMMALOGY Adaptation, Diversity, and Ecology, 2nd Edition By George A. Feldhamer, Southern Illinois University—Carbondale, Lee C. Drickamer, Northern Arizona University, Stephen H. Vessey, Bowling Green State University—Bowling Green and Joseph F. Merritt, Powdermill Biological Station 2004 / 576 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-290948-7 / MHID: 0-07-290948-X (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123240-1 / MHID: 0-07-123240-0 [IE] Introductory mammalogy for use at upper level undergraduate or graduate level. Assumes students have basic background in zoology of vertebrates. CONTENTS Part 1: Introduction / 1 Study of Mammals / 2 History of Mammalogy / 3 Methods and Techniques for Studying Mammals / 4 Evolution and Dental Characteristics / Part 2: Structure and Function / 5 Integument, Support and Movement / 6 Foods and Feeding / 7 The Nervous and Endocrine Systems and Biological Rhythms / 8 Environmental Adaptations / 9 Reproduction / Part 3: Adaptive Radiation and Diversity / 10 Monotremes and Marsupials / 11 Insectivora, Macroscelidea, Scandentia, and Dermoptera / 12 Chiroptera / 13 Primates / 14 Xenarthra, Pholidota, and Tubulidentata / 15 Carnivora / 16 Cetacea / 17 Rodentia and Lagomorpha / 18 Proboscidea, Hyracoidea, and Sirenia / 19 Perissodactyla and Artiodactyla / Part 4: Behavior, Ecology, and Biogeography / 20 Communication, Aggression, and Spatial Relations / 21 Sexual Selection, Parental Care, and Mating Systems / 22 Social Behavior / 23 Dispersal, Habitat Selection, and Migration / 24 Populations and Life History / 25 Community Ecology / Part 5: Special Topics / 27 Parasites and Diseases / 28 Domestication and Domesticated Mammals / 29 Conservation / Glossary / References BIOLOGY OF INVERTEBRATES 5th Edition By Jan Pechenik, Tufts University 2005 (May 2004) / 608 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-234899-6 / MHID: 0-07-234899-2 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111175-1 / MHID: 0-07-111175-1 [IE] Website: www.mhhe.com/zoology This textbook is the most concise and readable invertebrates book in terms of detail and pedagogy (other texts do not offer boxed readings, a second color, end of chapter questions, or pronunciation guides). All phyla of invertebrates are covered (comprehensive) with an emphasis on unifying characteristics of each group. CONTENTS 1 Environmental Considerations 2 Invertebrate Classification and Relationships 3 The Protozoans 4 The Poriferans and Placozoans 5 Introduction to the Hydrostatic Skeleton 6 The Cnidarians 7 The Ctenophores 8 The Platyhelminthes 9 The Mesozoans: Possible Flatworm Relatives 10 The Nemertines 11 The Rotifers and Acanthocephalans 12 The Molluscs 13 The Annelids and Sipunculans 14 The Arthropods 15 Two Phyla of Likely Arthropod Relatives: Tardigrada and Onychophora 16 The Nematodes 17 Four Phyla of Likely Nematode Relatives: Nematomorpha, Priapulida, Kinorhyncha, and Loricifera 18 Five Phyla (Plus One Species) of Uncertain Affiliation: Myxozoa, Gnathostomulida, Gastrotricha, Xenoturbella bocki, Chaetognatha, and Cyliophora 19 The Lophophorates (Phoronids, Brachiopods, Bryozoans) and Entoprocts 20 A MANUAL OF MAMMALOGY WITH KEYS TO FAMILIES OF THE WORLD 3rd Edition By Robert Martin, McMurry University, Ron Pine and Anthony De Blase 2001 / 352 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-697-00643-1 / MHID: 0-697-00643-3 Website: www.mhhe.com/zoology CONTENTS Preface Acknowledgments 1 Introduction 2 The Skull 3 Teeth 4 The Integument 5 Horns and Antlers 6 The Postcranial Skeleton 7 Locomotor Adaptations 8 Keys and Keying 9 The Orders of Living Mammals 10 The Monotremes 11 The Marsupials 12 The Insectivores 13 The Colugos 14 The Bats 15 The Tupaiids 16 The Primates 17 The Xenarthrans: Anteaters, Armadillos, and Sloths 18 The Pangolins 19 The Carnivores 20 The Whales, Dolphins, and Porpoises 21 The Macroscelideans 22 The Rabbits, Hares, and Pikas 23 The Rodents 24 The Aardvark 25 The Subungulates 26 The Perissodactyls 27 The Artiodactyls 28 Sign and Habitat Analysis 29 Recording Data 30 Collecting 31 Specimen Preparation and Preservation 32 Collecting Ectoparasites of Mammals 33 Age Determination 34 Diet Analysis 35 Analysis of Spatial Distribution 36 Estimation of Abundance and Density 37 Literature Research Glossary Selected Bibliography Index 138 HED 2007 Integrative Biology (PA138 138 9/29/2006 1:26:57 PM Integrative Biology (PAE) Marine Biology International Edition New MARINE BIOLOGY 6th Edition By Peter Castro, California State Polytechnic University-Pomona and Michael E Huber, Global Coastal Strategies, Brisbane-Australia 2007 (Dec 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321577-8 / MHID: 0-07-321577-5 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110788-4 / MHID: 0-07-110788-6 [IE with OLC] Contents 1 Principles of Marine Science 1 The Science of Marine Biology 2 The Sea Floor 3 Chemical and Physical Features of Seawater and the World Ocean 4 Fundamentals of Biology 2 The Organisms of the Sea 5 The Microbial World 6 Multicellular Primary Producers: Seaweeds and Plants 7 Marine Animals without a Backbone 8 Marine Fishes 9 Marine Reptiles, Birds, and Mammals 3 Structure and Function of Marine Ecosystems 10 An Introduction to Marine Ecology 11 Between the Tides 12 Estuaries: Where Rivers Meet the Sea 13 Life on the Continental Shelf 14 Coral Reefs 15 Life Near the Surface 16 The Ocean Depths 4 Humans and the Sea 17 Resources from the Sea 18 The Impact of Humans on the Marine Environment 19 The Oceans and Human Affairs / Appendix A Units of Measurement Website: http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com:80/sites/0072933569 The new, sixth edition of Marine Biology covers the basics of marine biology and takes a global, non-regional perspective, emphasizing that the world’s oceans and seas are an integrated system that cannot be understood by looking in any one person’s own backyard. For many students this is a new perspective. This introductory, one-semester text is designed for non-majors. New to this edition Updated content throughout, reflecting recent events, new research, and changes in perspective. NEW “Eye on Science” boxed readings throughout the book reflect current scientific research and technology in the field of marine biology. Sample topics include: ocean observing systems, deep-ocean drilling, female mimicry in cuttlefishes, restoration of seagrass beds, search for the giant squid, etc. NEW fold-out world map at the end of the book provides a quick reference to the world’s oceans. Features Marine Biology features a global, non-regional perspective. That the world’s oceans and seas function as a vast, integrated system is among the most important messages of this book. One aspect of this global approach is the deliberate inclusion of examples from many different regions and ecosystems, so as many students as possible will find something relevant to their local areas. Outstanding art program, illustrated by two professional illustrators with a strong reputation in the science field: Bill Ober and Claire Garrison. Thirty-four Scripps Video Clips are available to users of this text. These 15-20 second,”See it in Motion” underwater clips feature video footage of marine animals and their behavior, giving students a glimpse into a real, underwater perspective. A collection of eight laboratories and field investigations in marine biology have been specially written to be used with Marine Biology. Each of the exercises includes review questions that integrate information learned in the laboratory or field with material covered by the text. The exercises are available as part of the Online Learning Center for this text at www.mhhe.com/castro6e. - Instructors can customize this text using our do-it-yourself website! The Primis Content Center features more than one million items, including this and hundreds of other best-selling McGraw-Hill textbooks, laboratories, case studies, and readings. These materials, along with others including your own notes, can be customized into a black and white, high resolution printed textbook or a full-color Primis eBook that saves your students 1/3 off bookstore prices. Log on to our website, register, and create your own complimentary copy. www.primiscontentcenter.com Parasitology International Edition FOUNDATIONS OF PARASITOLOGY 7th Edition By Larry Roberts, University of Miami and John Janovy, Jr., University of Nebraska—Lincoln 2005 (May 2004) / 736 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-234898-9 / MHID: 0-07-234898-4 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111271-0 / MHID: 0-07-111271-5 [IE] A parasitology text for biology and/or zoology students at the undergraduate level. Emphasizes principles with related information on the biology, physiology, morphology, and ecology of the major parasites of humans and domestic animals. This is not a diagnostic manual for medical students. CONTENTS Chapter 1- Introduction to Parasitology Chapter 2- Basic Principles and Concepts I: Parasite Ecology and Evolution Chapter 3- Basic Principles and Concepts II: Immunology and Pathology Chapter 4- Parasitic Prototoa: Form, Function, and Classification Chapter 5- Kinetoplasta: Trypanosomes and their Kin Chapter 6- Other Flagellated Protozoa Chapter 7- The Amebas Chapter 8- Phylum Apicomplexa: Gregarines, Coccidia, and Related Organisms Chapter 9- Phylum Apicomplexa: Malaria Organisms and Piroplasms Chapter 10- Phylum Ciliophora: Ciliated Protistan Parasites Chapter 11- Phyla Microspora and Myxozoa: Parasites with Polar Filaments Chapter 12- The Mesozoa: Pioneers or Degenerates? Chapter 13- Introduction to the Phylum Platyhelminthes Chapter 14- Trematoda: Aspidobothrea Chapter 15- Trematoda: Form, Function, and Classification of Digeneans Chapter 16- Digeneans: Strigeiformes Chapter 17- Digeneans: Echinostomatiformes and Paramphistomiformes Chapter 18- Digeneans: Plagiorchiformesand Opisthorchiformes Chapter 19- Monogenea Chapter 20- Cestoidea: Form, Function, and Classification of the Tapeworms Chapter 21Tapeworms Chapter 22- Phylum Nematoda: Form, Function, and Classification Chapter 23- Nematodes: Trichurida and Dioctophymatida, Enoplean Parasites Chapter 24- Nematodes: Rhabditida, Pioneering Parasites Chapter 25- Nematodes: Strongylida, Bursate Rhabditians Chapter 26- Nematodes: Ascaridida, Intestinal Large Roundworms Chapter 27- Nematodes: Oxyurida, the Pinworms Chapter 28- Nematodes: Spirurida, A Potpourri Chapter 29- Nematodes: Filaroidea, the Filarial Worms Chapter 30- Nematodes: Camallanina, the Guinea Worms and Others Chapter 31- Phylum Acanthocephala: Thorny-Headed Worms Chapter 32- Phylum Pentastomida: Tongue Worms Chapter 33- Phylum Arthropoda: Form, Function, and Classification Chapter 34- Parasitic Crustaceans Chapter 35- Parasitic Insects: Mallophaga and Anoplura, the Lice Chapter 36- Parasitic Insects: Hemiptera, the Bugs Chapter 37- Parasitic Insects: Siphonaptera, the Fleas Chapter 38- Parasitic Insects: Diptera, the Flies Chapter 39- Parasitic Insects: Strepsiptera, Hymenoptera, and Others Chapter 40- Parasitic Archnids: Subclass Acri, the Ticks and Mites / Glossary 139 HED 2007 Integrative Biology (PA139 139 9/29/2006 1:26:57 PM Integrative Biology (PAE) Vertebrate Biology Textbook International Edition VERTEBRATE BIOLOGY By Donald Linzey, Wytheville Community College 2001 / 552 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-697-36387-9 / MHID: 0-697-36387-2 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118866-1 / MHID: 0-07-118866-5 [IE] Website: www.mhhe.com/zoology CONTENTS Part 1 The Vertebrate Story: An Overview Part 2 Systematics and Vertebrate Evolution Part 3 Vertebrate Zoogeography Part 4 Early Chordates and Jawless Fishes Part 5 Gnathostome Fishes Part 6 Amphibians Part 7 Evolution of Reptiles Part 8 Reptiles (Including Birds): Morphology, Reproduction and Development Part 9 Mammals Part 10 Population Dynamics Part 11 Movements Part 12 Intraspecific Behavior and Ecology Part 13 Interspecific Interactions Part 14 Techniques for Ecological and Behavioral Studies Part 15 Extinction and Extirpation Part 16 Conservation and Management Appendices Glossary Bibliography Index Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy International Edition Vertebrates Comparative Anatomy, Function, Evolution, 4th Edition By Kenneth V Kardong, Washington State University – Pullman 2006 (June 2005) / 784 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-252830-5 / MHID: 0-07-252830-3 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124457-2 / MHID: 0-07-124457-3 [IE] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/kardong4e This one-semester text is designed for an upper-level majors course. Vertebrates features a unique emphasis on function and evolution of vertebrates, complete anatomical detail, and excellent pedagogy. Vertebrate groups are organized phylogenetically, and their systems discussed within such a context. Morphology is foremost, but the author has developed and integrated an understanding of function and evolution into the discussion of anatomy of the various systems. CONTENTS Laboratory 1 Introduction 2 Origin of Chordates 3 The Vertebrate Story 4 Biological Design 5 Life History 6 Integument 7 Skeletal System: The Skull 8 Skeletal System: The Axial Skeleton 9 Skeletal System: The Appendicular Skeleton 10 The Muscular System 11 The Respiratory System 12 The Circulatory System 13 The Digestive System 14 The Urogenital System 15 The Endocrine System 16 The Nervous System 17 Sensory Organs 18 Conclusions International Edition Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy Laboratory Dissection Guide, 4th Edition By Kenneth Kardong, Washington State University and Edward Zalisko, Blackburn College 2006 (June 2005) / 384 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-252831-2 / MHID: 0-07-252831-1 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124456-5 / MHID: 0-07-124456-5 [IE with OLC] This high-quality laboratory manual may accompany any comparative anatomy text, but correlates directly to Kardong’s Vertebrates: Comparative Anatomy, Function, Evolution text. This text carefully guides students through dissections and is richly illustrated. First and foremost, the basic animal architecture is presented in a clear and concise manner. This richly illustrated manual carefully guides students through dissections. Throughout the dissections, the authors pause strategically to bring the students attention to the significance of the material they have just covered. CONTENTS 1 Introduction Classification and Comparison / Defining the Chordates / Studying Advice / Designing for Students 2 Protochordates 3 Agnathans--Examination of a Primitive Vertebrate: The Lamprey Agnathans / Adult Lamprey Anatomy / Anatomy of the Lamprey (Ammocoete) Larva 4 Vertebrate Integuments Introduction / Examination of Vertebrate Integuments / Specializations of the Integument 5 Skeletal System Tissues of the Skeletal System / Divisions of the Skeletal System / Postcranial Skeleton / Skull / Cranial Skeleton / Teeth 6 Muscular System and External Anatomy Introduction / Shark Dissection / Necturus / Cat 7 Digestive Systems Introduction / Shark / Necturus / Cat 8 Circulatory and Respiratory Systems Introduction / Shark / Necturus / Cat 9 Urogential System Shark / Necturus / Cat 10 Nervous System Introduction / Shark / Sheep Brain International Edition COMPARATIVE ANATOMY OF THE VERTEBRATES 9th Edition By George Kent, Louisiana State University-Baton Rouge and Robert Carr, Ohio University-Athens 2001 / 544 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-303869-8 / MHID: 0-07-303869-5 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118168-6 / MHID: 0-07-118168-7 [IE] Website: www.mhhe.com/biosci/pae/kentcarr/links.mhtml CONTENTS 1 Introduction 2 Concepts, Premises, and Pioneers 3 Protochordates and the Origin of Vertebrates 4 The Parade of the Craniates in Time and Taxa 5 Early Craniate Morphogenesis 6 Integument 7 Mineralized Tissues: An Introduction to the Skeleton 8 Vertebrae, Ribs, and Sterna 9 Skull and Visceral Skeleton 10 Girdles, Fins, Limbs, and Locomotion 11 Muscles 12 Digestive System 13 Respiratory System 14 Circulatory System 15 Urogential System 16 Nervous System 17 Sense Organs18 Endocrine Organs Appendix Glossary Credits Index 140 HED 2007 Integrative Biology (PA140 140 9/29/2006 1:26:57 PM Integrative Biology (PAE) Zoology Textbook International Edition New ANIMAL DIVERSITY 4th Edition By Cleveland P Hickman Jr, Washington & Lee University, Larry S Roberts, Florida Int’l University-Miami, Susan L Keen, University of California Davis, Allan Larson, Washington University-St Louis and Eisenhour J David, Morehead State University 2007 (Feb 2006) / 480 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-252844-2 / MHID: 0-07-252844-3 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110670-2 / MHID: 0-07-110670-7 [IE] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/hickmanad4e A top choice among students and instructors alike, Animal Diversity continues to earn the appreciation of both science majors and non-majors alike. The book uses the theme of evolution to develop a broad-scale view of animal diversity—students focus not only the organisms themselves, but also the processes that produce evolutionary diversity. The book is unique in its comprehensive survey of zoological diversity and its emphasis on evolutionary, systematic and ecological principles, all in one package. New to this edition Information on phylogeny, always of major importance, has been updated to include the latest research findings. Students will examine genetics, systematic principles, habitat distributions, structure and function in this text that has been carefully revised utilizing comments from users of past editions. The text’s high-quality photographs and illustrative drawings have been updated. Features The text helps learners understand existing diversity of animal forms, and understand the evolutionary processes that produce diversity. Animal Diversity includes chapters that develop general diversity principles, as well as a series of chapters that range from the details of diversity to illustration of principles presented in the earlier chapters. The scientific method is used to answer questions about the evolutionary relationship of organisms, and students learn how information is gathered from comparisons of morphology, comparisons of genomes and reconstruction of the historical relationships of organisms. Author recognition- Professors and students can depend on accurate, experienced writing, knowing the tradition of quality work by these authors. CONTENTS 1 Science of Zoology and Evolution of Animal Diversity 2 Animal Ecology 3 Animal Architecture 4 Classification and Phylogeny of Animals 5 Protozoan Groups 6 Sponges: Phylum Porifera 7 Radiate Animals: Cnidarians and Ctenophores 8 Acoelomate Bilateral Animals: Flatworms, Ribbon Worms, and Jaw Worms 9 Pseudocoelomate Animals 10 Molluscs 11 Segmented Worms: Annelids, Including Pogonophorans 12 Arthropods 13 Lesser Protostomes 14 Echinoderms and Hemichordates 15 Vertebrate Beginnings: The Chordates 16 Fishes 17 The Early Tetrapods and Modern Amphibians 18 Amniote Origins and Reptilian Groups 19 Birds 20 Mammals International Edition New ZOOLOGY 7th Edition By Stephen A Miller, College of the Ozarks and John P Harley, Eastern Kentucky University 2007 (May 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322807-5 / MHID: 0-07-322807-9 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110049-6 / MHID: 0-07-110049-0 [IE with OLC] The new 7th edition of Zoology continues to offer students an introductory general zoology text that is manageable in size and adaptable to a variety of course formats. It is a principles-oriented text written for the non-majors or the combined course, presented at the freshman and sophomore level. Zoology is organized into three parts. Part One covers the common life processes, including cell and tissue structure and function, the genetic basis of evolution, and the evolutionary and ecological principles that unify all life. Part Two is the survey of protists and animals, emphasizing evolutionary and ecological relationships, aspects of animal organization that unite major animal phyla, and animal adaptations. Part Three covers animal form and function using a comparative approach. This approach includes descriptions and full-color artwork that depict evolutionary changes in the structure and function of selected organ systems. New to this edition Incorporating feedback from current users and reviewers of the text, there has been an overall update of content throughout, particularly in molecular biology. New “How Do We Know” sections throughout the text offer students brief scientific explanations for occurrences while debunking popular myths. Features This text features an evolutionary and ecological focus, believing that these perspectives captivate students and are fundamental to understanding the unifying principles of zoology and the remarkable diversity within the animal kingdom. Emphasis on basic concepts at the most accessible level for students with no science background assures understanding by students with a variety of backgrounds. “Wildlife Alert” boxes increase student awareness of the need to preserve animal habitats and species. In response to reviewer suggestions and requests, several chapters that are often treated as optional in courses can be found on the text’s website, including: The Chemical Basis of Animal Life / Energy and Enzymes: Life’s Driving and Controlling Forces / How Animals Harvest Energy Stored In Nutrients / Embryology. Instructors can customize this text using our do-it-yourself website. The Primis Content Center features more than one million items, including this and hundreds of other best-selling McGraw-Hill textbooks, laboratories, case studies, and readings. These materials, along with others including your own notes, can be customized into a black and white, high resolution printed textbook or a full-color Primis eBook that saves your students 1/3 off bookstore prices. Log on to our website, register, and create your own complimentary copy. www.primiscontentcenter.com Contents Part One Biological Principles 1 Zoology: An Ecological and Evolutionary Perspective 2 Cells, Tissues, Organs, and Organ Systems of Animals 3 Cell Division and Inheritance 4 Evolution: History and Evidence 5 Evolution and Gene Frequencies 6 Ecology: Preserving the Animal Kingdom Part Two Animal-Like Protists and Animalia 7 Animal Classification, Phylogeny, and Organization 8 Animal-like Protists: The Protozoa 9 Multicellular and Tissue Levels of Organization 10 The Triploblastic, Acoelomate Body Plan 11 The Pseudocoelomate Body Plan: Aschelminths 12 Molluscan Success 13 Annelida: The Metameric Body 141 HED 2007 Integrative Biology (PA141 141 9/29/2006 1:26:57 PM Integrative Biology (PAE) Form 14 The Arthropods: Blueprint for Success 15 The Hexapods and Myriapods: Terrestrial Triumphs 16 The Echinoderms 17 Hemichordata and Invertebrate Chordates 18 The Fishes: Vertebrate Success in Water 19 Amphibians: The First Terrestrial Vertebrates 20 Reptiles: The First Amniotes 21 Birds: Feathers, Flight, and Endothermy 22 Mammals: Specialized Teeth, Hair Endothermy, and Viviparity Part Three Form and Function: A Comparative Perspective 23 Protection, Support, and Movement 24 Communication I: Nervous and Sensory Systems 25 Communication II: The Endocrine System and Chemical Messengers 26 Circulation and Gas Exchange 27 Nutrition and Digestion 28 Temperature and Body Fluid Regulation 29 Reproduction and Development 30 The Chemical Basis of Animal Life 31 Energy and Enzymes: Life’s Driving and Controlling Forces 32 How Animals Harvest Energy Stored in Nutrients 33 Embryology 34 Animal Behavior International Edition INTEGRATED PRINCIPLES OF ZOOLOGY 13th Edition including Acanthocephala / Arthropoda / Bryozoa and Brachiopoda / Echinodermata /Hemichordata / Urochordata and Cephalochordata / Agnatha / Jawed Fishes / Amphibia / Mammalia Supplements TAXONOMIC WALL CHART 12th Edition By Cleveland P. Hickman, Washington & Lee University 2004 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-291786- 4 / MHID: 0-07-291786-5 This 30 x 36” poster is a great reference/study tool for students. This full-color poster presents the Chief Taxonomic Subdivisions and Organ Systems of the Major Animal Phyla. By Cleveland P. Hickman, Jr, Washington & Lee University, Larry S. Roberts, Florida International University—Miami, Allan Larson, Washington University – St. Louis and Helen I’ Anson, Washington & Lee University and David Eisenhour, Morehead State University 2006 (Feb 2005) / 872 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310174-3 / MHID: 0-07-310174-5 (with Bind-In OLC Card) - No Sales Rights ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111594-0 / MHID: 0-07-111594-3 [IE with OLC] This best-selling, comprehensive text is suitable for one- or twosemester courses. Integrated Principles of Zoology is considered the standard by which other texts are measured. It features high quality illustrations and photos, engaging narrative, traditional organization, and comprehensive coverage. CONTENTS Laboratory - Majors New LABORATORY STUDIES IN ANIMAL DIVERSITY 4th Edition Part 1 Introduction to Living Animals 1 Life: Biological Principles and the Science of Zoology 2 The Origin and Chemistry of Life 3 Cells as Units of Life 4 Cellular Metabolism Part 2 Continuity and Evolution of Animal Life 5 Genetics: A Review 6 Organic Evolution 7 The Reproductive Process 8 Principles of Development Part 3 Diversity of Animal Life 9 Architectural Pattern of an Animal 10 Classification and Phylogeny of Animals 11 Protozoan Groups 12 Mesozoa and Parazoa 13 Radiate Animals 14 Acoelomate Bilateral Animals 15 Pseudocoelomate Animals 16 Molluscs 17 Segmented Worms 18 Arthropods 19 Aquatic Mandibulates 20 Terrestrial Mandibulates 21 Smaller Protostome Phyla 22 Echinoderms and Hemichordates 23 Chordates 24 Fishes 25 Early Tetrapods and Modern Amphibians 26 Amniote Origins and Reptilian Groups 27 Birds 28 Mammals Part 4 Activity of Life 29 Support, Protection, and Movement 30 Homeostasis 31 Internal Fluids and Respiration 32 Digestion and Nutrition 33 Nervous Coordination 34 Chemical Coordination 35 Immunity 36 Animal Behavior Part 5 Animals and Their Environments 37 The Biosphere and Animal Distribution 38 Animal Ecology By Cleveland Hickman, Washington & Lee University 2007 (January 2006) / 288 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326098-3 / MHID: 0-07-326098-3 DIGITAL ZOOLOGY VERSION 2.0 CD-ROM Regeneration in Planaria (Exercise 7); Behavior of the medicinal leech, Hirudo medicinalis (Exercise 10); The Phototactic behavior of Daphnia (Exercise 12); Aggression in paradise fish, Macropodus opercularis (Exercise 16); Analysis of the multiple hemoglobin system in Carassius auratus, the common goldfish (Exercise 16). By Jon Houseman, University of Ottawa 2003 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-256481-5 / MHID: 0-07-256481-4 (with Workbook) Website: www.mhhe.com/digitalzoology CONTENTS Unit Names: Annelida / Apicomplexa / Arthropoda / Cheliceriformes / Ciliophora / Cnidaria / Crustacea / Ctenophora / Echinodermata / Hemichordata / Lophophores / Mesozoa / Microspora / Mollusca / Myxozoa / Nematoda / Nemertea / Other Chordata / Other Pseudocoelomates / Placozoa / Platyhelminthes / Porifera / Sarcomastigophora / Uniramia / Vertebrata / Workbook chapters: Protozoans / Porifera / Cnidaria / Platyhelminthes / Annelida / Mollusca / Nematoda, Gastrotricha, Rotifera, Laboratory Studies in Animal Diversity offers students hands-on experience in learning about the diversity of life. It provides students the opportunity to become acquainted with the principal groups of animals and to recognize the unique anatomical features that characterize each group as well as the patterns that link animal groups to each other. FEATURES • Project exercises are placed with certain chapters in units entitles “Experimenting in Zoology.” Some of these exercises can be completed within a single laboratory period; others are followed for a longer period. In all project exercises the student follows experimental procedures, records and analyzes quantitative data, and draws conclusions from the results. Many instructors will want their students to gain additional experience by writing a laboratory report in which the student states the objectives, methods followed, results obtained, and conclusions that can be drawn from the results. The Experimenting in Zoology exercises are: • The exercises are designed to be more interactive with questions placed throughout the text, and spaces for students to write down their responses and observations. This “active learning” approach involves students in the exercise and encourages them to think about the information as they read. Some questions may require students to consult their textbook for answers. A few exercises have questions in the figure legends, to be answered in the spaces provided when the student consults the figure. Examples of this interactive approach are found in Exercise 15 through 20. 142 HED 2007 Integrative Biology (PA142 142 9/29/2006 1:26:57 PM Integrative Biology (PAE) • There are many aids for the student in this laboratory manual. Throughout the exercises, working instructions are clearly set off from the descriptive material. Classifications, where appropriate, are included with the text, together with a “pie” diagram showing the relative sizes of the classes Mina phylum. Function is explained along with anatomy. Topic headings help the student mentally organize the material. Metric tables and definitions are placed on the inside front and back covers for convenient use. Much of the artwork was designed to assist the student with difficult dissections. CONTENTS 1 Activity of Life 1 Ecological Relationships of Animals 2 Introduction to Animal Classification 2 The Diversity of Animal Life 3 The Microscope 4 Protozoan Groups 5 The Sponges 6 The Radiate Animals 7 The Acoelomate Animals 8 The Pseudocoelomate Animals 9 The Molluscs 10 The Annelids 11 The Chelicerate Arthropods 12 The Crustacean Arthropods 13 The Uniramia Arthropods: Myriapods and Insects 14 The Echinoderms 15 Phylum Chordata: A Deuterostome Group 16 The Fishes—Lampreys, Sharks, and Bony Fishes 17 Class Amphibia 18 Class Reptilia 19 Class Aves 20 Class Mammalia GENERAL ZOOLOGY LABORATORY MANUAL 14th Edition By Charles Lytle, North Carolina State University—Raleigh and John Meyer 2005 (May 2004) / 400 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-234900-9 / MHID: 0-07-234900-X Website: http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com:80/sites/007234900x General Zoology Laboratory Manual is ideal for the laboratory that emphasizes the dissection and microscopic study of live and preserved specimens. Recognized for its accuracy and readability, this manual is comprehensive in its representation of the major groups of animal phyla.This new edition is suitable for a wide range of course needs and structures. CONTENTS Contents / Preface / Laboratory Safety / Comparative Safety of Preservatives / 1 Microscopy 2 Animal Cells and Tissues 3 Mitosis and Meiosis 4 Development 5 Protozoa 6 Porifera 7 Cnidaria 8 Introduction to Animal Morphology 9 Platyhelminthes 10 Pseudocoelomate Animals 11 Mollusca 12 Annelida 13 Arthropoda and Onychophora 14 Echinodermata 15 Chordata 16 Shark Anatomy 17 Perch Anatomy 18 Frog Anatomy 19 Fetal Pig Anatomy 20 Rat Anatomy / Index LABORATORY STUDIES IN INTEGRATED PRINCIPLES OF ZOOLOGY 13th Edition By Cleveland P Hickman, Washington & Lee University 2006 (April 2006) / 448 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-283074-3 / MHID: 0-07-283074-3 Laboratory Studies in Integrated Principles of Zoology uses a comprehensive, phylogenetic approach in emphasizing basic biological principles, animal form and function, and evolutionary concepts. This introductory lab manual is ideal for a one- or two-semester course. The new edition expertly combines up-todate coverage with the clear writing style and dissection guides that have distinguished this manual from edition to edition. Contents 1 Introduction to the Living Animal 1 The Microscope 2 Cell Structure and Division 3 Gametogenesis and Embryology 4 Tissue Structure and Function 5 Introduction to Animal Classification 2 The Diversity of Animal Life 6 Protozoan Groups 7 The Sponges 8 The Radiate Animals 9 The Acoelomate Animals 10 The Pseudocoelomate Animals 11 The Molluscs 12 The Annelids 13 The Chelicerate Arthropods 14 The Crustacean Arthropods 15 The Uniramia Arthropods: Myriapods & Insects 16 The Echinoderms 17 Phylum Chordata: A Deuterostome Group 18 The Fishes--Lampreys, Sharks, and Bony Fishes 19 Class Amphibia 20 Class Reptilia 21 Class Aves 22 Class Mammalia 3 Activity of Life 23 Ecological Relationships of Animals / Appendix A Instructor’s Resources for Implementing Exercises Appendix B Sources of Living Material and Prepared Microslides GENERAL ZOOLOGY LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY ZOOLOGY 6th Edition By Stephen A. Miller, College of The Ozarks 2005 (April 2004) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-252837-4 / MHID: 0-07-252837-0 This General Zoology Laboratory Manual is intended for students taking their first course in zoology. Provided are exercises and experiences that will help students: (1) understand the general principles that unite animal biology, (2) appreciate the diversity found in the animal kingdom and understand the evolutionary relationships that explain this diversity, (3) become familiar with the structure and function of vertebrate organ systems and appreciate some of the evolutionary changes that took place in the development of those organ systems, and (4) develop problem-solving skills. CONTENTS Unit I Introductory Concepts and Skills 1 The Microscope and Scientific Method 2 Cells and Tissues 3 Aspects of Cell Function 4 Genetics 5 Embryology 6 Adaptations of Stream Invertebrates--A Scavenger Hunt Unit II An Evolutionary Approach to the Animal Phyla 7 The Classification of Organisms 8 Animal-like Protists 9 Porifera 10 Cnidaria (Coelenterata) 11 Platyhelminthes 12 The Pseudocoelomate Body Plan: Aschelminths 13 Mollusca 14 Annelida 15 Arthropoda 16 Echinodermata 17 Chordata Unit III An Evolutionary Approach to Vertebrate Structure and Function 18 Vertebrate Musculoskeletal Systems 19 Vertebrate Nervous Regulation 20 Vertebrate Circulation 21 Vertebrate Respiration 22 Vertebrate Digestion 23 Vertebrate Excretion 24 Vertebrate Reproduction INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg 143 HED 2007 Integrative Biology (PA143 143 9/29/2006 1:26:58 PM Integrative Biology (PAE) 144 HED 2007 Integrative Biology (PA144 144 9/29/2006 1:26:58 PM 2007-2008 NEW Nutrition Titles Nutrition ~ Contents Introduction to Nutrition Multimedia................................................................ 147 Supplements.............................................................. 147 Textbook................................................................... 146 Nutritional Assessment.................................................. 149 Nutrition and Sport........................................................ 148 Nutrition Through The Life Cycle Nutrition & Human Development............................. 148 2007 New Titles LEE Nutritional Assessment, 4e.......................................149 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-244106-2 / MHID: 0-07-244106-2 WARDLAW Contemporary Nutrition, 6e.....................................146 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325652-8 / MHID: 0-07-325652-8 WARDLAW Perspectives in Nutrition, 7e....................................146 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322806-8 / MHID: 0-07-322806-0 WILLIAMS Nutrition For Health, Fitness and Sport, 8e..............148 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327058-6 / MHID: 0-07-327058-X 145 HED 2007 Nutrition.indd 145 9/29/2006 1:29:07 PM Nutrition Introduction to Nutrition Textbook International Edition New CONTEMPORARY NUTRITION 6th Edition By Gordon M. Wardlaw and Anne M. Smith of Ohio State University 2007 (Feb 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325652-8 / MHID: 0-07-325652-8 (Updated Edition) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110950-5 / MHID: 0-07-110950-1 [IE, Updated Edition with ARIS Card] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/wardlawcont6 Contemporary Nutrition is designed for students with little or no background in college-level biology, chemistry or physiology. Updated to reflect the latest guidelines and research in this constantly evolving and dynamic field, Contemporary Nutrition will provide students who lack a strong science background the ideal balance of reliable nutrition information and practical consumer-oriented knowledge. With his friendly writing style, Gordon Wardlaw acts as the student’s personal guide to dispelling common misconceptions and to gaining a solid foundation for making informed nutrition choices. NEW TO THIS EDITION • McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is a complete electronic homework and course management system, designed for greater ease of use than any other system available. Free upon adoption of Wardlaw’s Perspectives in Nutrition, 7th edition, instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. Instructors can edit questions, import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of easy-to-assign algorithmically generated [if applicable] homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a student is registered in the course, all student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. • This edition includes information on MyPyramid, the new food guidance system released in April 2005 by the USDA. This replaces the older Food Guide Pyramid. • McGraw-Hill has partnered with NBC to provide 12 short videoclips on current nutrition topics. These will be available on both a DVD and ARIS. * Each chapter concludes with two Rate Your Plate activities that students can work through as a group or individually. All are designed to encourage to students to actively analyze their own eating habits. • Concept Checks At key points throughout the chapter, Concept Checks allow students to mentally summarize what they have learned before proceeding to the next topic in the chapter. • Critical Thinking Questions As students read the text, Critical Thinking Questions challenge them to apply their newly acquired knowledge in the context of real-life circumstances. Answers to these can be found at the end of the book. • The food composition table (Appendix J) reflects the expanded food database in NutritionCalc Plus 2.0 CONTENTS Part 1 Nutrition: A Key to Health 1 What You Eat and Why 2 Tools for Designing a healthy diet 3 The Human Body: A Nutrition Perspective Part 2 Nutrients and Alcohol: The Heart of Nutrition 4 Carbohydrates 5 Lipids 6 Proteins Part 3 Vitamins and Minerals 7 Alcohol 8 Vitamins 9 Water and Minerals Part 4 Energy: Balance and Imbalance 10 Energy Balance and Weight Control 11 Nutrition: Fitness and Sport 12 Eating Disorders Part 5 Nutrition: A Focus on Life Stages 13 Pregnancy and Breastfeeding 14 Nutrition from Infancy through Adolescence 15 Nutrition through Adulthood Part 6 Nutrition Beyond the Nutrients 16 Food Safety 17 Undernutrition throughout the World / Appendixes / Answers to Critical Thinking Questions / Glossary / Index International Edition New PERSPECTIVES IN NUTRITION 7th Edition By Gordon M Wardlaw, Ohio State University--Columbus and Jeffrey Hampl, Arizona State University-East Campus 2007 (May 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322806-8 / MHID: 0-07-322806-0 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110806-5 / MHID: 0-07-110806-8 [IE with ARIS Card] Perspectives in Nutrition, Seventh Edition, is an introductory nutrition text appropriate for the majors and mixed-majors nutrition courses. This student-focused text presents the major concepts in nutrition including the body’s use of food nutrients and diet planning throughout the life cycle. The text places special emphasis on the application of nutrition principles in everyday life by exploring the health consequences of nutrition practices. FEATURES New to this edition • Over 30 new animations and simulations have been developed for the Sixth Edition to cover a broad range of nutrition topics, allowing instructors and students to harness the visual impact of nutrition processes in motion. Chapter 4 “Metabolism” has been totally rewritten to include the latest research and to make it more understandable for students. The reorganized content begins with a simple conceptual explanation of metabolic processes and logically builds into an in-depth scientific understanding of metabolic pathways. New illustrations also help guide students to develop a better understanding of this challenging topic. • eInstruction questions are available with this project and can be found on the Online Learning Center. eInstruction is a wireless student response system that allows for the ultimate in classroom participation, giving you immediate feedback from every student. • The authors purposefully write as though they are acting as personal guides to each student as they explore the world of nutrition. They provide ample opportunities for students to apply concepts and guidelines to their own lives. For example: * Real Life Scenarios at the beginning of each chapter introduce nutrition topics to be covered in context of a real person. The questions raised in the Real Life Scenario are revisited later in the chapter once the student has achieved a better understanding of the concepts involved. This edition includes information on MyPyramid, the new food guidance system released in April 2005 by the USDA. This replaces the older Food Guide Pyramid. Content is included on the new Dietary Guidelines, which were released in the Spring of 2005 by the USDA. New “Expert Opinion” boxes. Each chapter contains “Expert Opinion” boxes which address a key topic covered in that chapter. These sometimes controversial topics can be excellent catalysts for classroom discussion and essay ideas. Just a few of the new titles include: 146 HED 2007 Nutrition.indd 146 9/29/2006 1:29:07 PM Nutrition Supplements --Fiber: Finally a Nutrient (Chapter 5), by Dr. Joanne Slavin, University of Minnesota --The Miracle Vitamin D: Importance for Bone Health and Prevention of Common Cancers, Autoimmune Diseases, Schizophrenia and Cardiovascular Disease (Chapter 9), by Dr. Michael Holick, Boston University NUTRITION ALMANAC 6th Edition --Are Savvy Marketers Contributing to the Obesity Epidemic in Children? (Chapter 16), by Dr. Carol Byrd-Bredbenner, Rutgers University [A Professional Publication] Artwork has been updated throughout the text, providing students with the most current, accurate look at the processes being discussed and intensifying the visual impact, making material more interesting to students. Features Personalized Approach. The authors provide ample opportunities for students to apply nutrition concepts and guidelines to their own lives through real-life examples and individualized activities, such as the chapter-opening “Case Study Scenarios” and in-chapter “Take Action” activities. The authors’ proven learning system provides an extensive pedagogical framework that includes: --Beginning of each chapter: Chapter Outline and Chapter Objectives. --Within each chapter: Marginal notes and definitions, Critical Thinking Questions (in margins), Concept Checks, Nutrition Focus, and Expert Opinions. --End of each chapter: Summary, Study Questions, References, Take Action, and Nutrition Perspective. By Lavon J Dunne, John D Kirschmann, Nutrition Search, Inc 2007 (December 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-143658-8 / MHID: 0-07-143658-8 (Details unavailable at presst time) NUTRITION ALMANAC 5th Edition By Lavon J Dunne 2002 / 404 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-137338-8 / MHID: 0-07-137338-1 [A Professional Publication] Website: http://books.mcgraw-hill.com/cgi-bin/getbook.pl?isbn=007137 3381&adkey=W02003 CONTENTS SECTION I: NUTRIENTS: Macronutrients / Micronutrients SECTION II: ALTERNATIVE MEDICINE AND THERAPIES: Aromatherapy / Ayurvedic Medicine / Bodywork / Chinese Medicine / Chiropractic / Herbal Therapy Homeopathy / Mindbody Therapy SECTION III: HEALTH CONDITIONS SECTION IV: FOODS: Food Groups / Food Lists SECTION V: DIET AND FOOD COMPOSITION: Weights and Measures Recommended Dietary Intake Chart / Table of Food Composition / References / Bibliography / Index Website addresses are incorporated throughout the text, providing information for students wishing to explore specific topics in more detail. Instructors can customize this text using our do-it-yourself website. The Primis Content Center features more than one million items, including this and hundreds of other best-selling McGraw-Hill textbooks, laboratories, case studies, and readings. These materials, along with others including your own notes, can be customized into a black and white, high resolution printed textbook or a full-color Primis eBook that saves your students 1/3 off bookstore prices. Log on to our website, register, and create your own complimentary copy. www.primiscontentcenter.com Contents 1 Nutrition Basics 1 What Nourishes You? 2 The Basis of a Healthy Diet 3 Human Digestion and Absorption 4 Metabolism 2 The EnergyYielding Nutrients and Alcohol 5 Carbohydrates 6 Lipids 7 Proteins 8 Alcohol 3 The Vitamins and Minerals 9 The Fat-Soluble Vitamins 10 The Water-Soluble Vitamins 11 Water and the Major Minerals 12 Trace Minerals 4 Energy Production and Energy Balance 13 Energy Balance and Weight Control 14 Nutrition for Fitness and Sports 15 Eating Disorders: Anorexia Nervosa, Bulimia Nervosa, Binge-Eating Disorder, and Other Conditions 5 Nutrition Applications in the Life Cycle 16 Pregnancy and Breastfeeding 17 Nutrition from Infancy through Adolescence 18 Nutrition During Adulthood 6 Putting Nutrition Knowledge into Practice 19 Food Safety 20 Undernutrition Throughout the World Appendixes A Chemistry: A Tool for Understanding Nutrition B Human Physiology: A Tool for Understanding Nutrition C Dietary Advice for Canadians D The Exchange System: A Helpful Menu-Planning Tool E Exchange System Lists F Dietary Intake and Energy Expenditure Assessment G Fatty Acids, Including Omega-3, Fatty Acids in Foods H The 1983 Metropolitan Life Insurance Company Height- Weight Table and Determination of Frame Size I Caffeine Content of Foods J Sources of Nutrition Information K English-Metric Conversions, and Metric and Household Units L Estimated Average Requirements for Nutrients: Food and Nutrition Board, Institute of Medicine, National Academies M Food Composition Table Multimedia FOODWISE 1.2 CD-ROM 6th Edition By McGraw-Hill 2006 (Jan 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319531-5 / MHID: 0-07-319531-6 Based on the widely tested FoodWorks product, this Windows-based CD-ROM product is designed for dietary analysis in college courses. It offers a variety of functions based on the latest release of the USDA database. FoodWise features a novice-friendly interface and contains approximately 7,500 foods! It generates a variety of simple-to-grade reports and allows the user to easily add their own foods to the database. New to this edition The Dietary Reference Intakes (DRIs) have been updated with the most current information Features Easy to quickly distinguish between colors on RDA graph to indicate nutrient levels above and below 100% of RDA. Caution notes within the Weight Manager indicate if BMI (Body Mass Index) at weight goal becomes dangerously low. Database to includes the latest “USDA Release 13” foods. Users are able to preview reports and food list details before printing them. 147 HED 2007 Nutrition.indd 147 9/29/2006 1:29:07 PM Nutrition NUTRITIONCAL PLUS 2.0 CD-ROM STANDALONE By McGraw-Hill 2006 (July 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319532-2 / MHID: 0-07-319532-4 NutritionCalc Plus 2.0 is a suite of powerful dietary self-assessment tools. Use NutritionCalc Plus 2.0 to analyze and monitor your personal diet and health goals. An easy-to-use interface and the reliability of the ESHA database make NutritionCalc Plus 2.0 your best choice for nutrition analysis software. Nutrition Through The Life Cycle Nutrition & Human Development New to this edition The database has been expanded to include a broader range of ethnic foods, fast foods, and supplements, for a total of 10,000 foods. MyPyramid report allows user to view recommendations based upon their personal profile information. User-friendly tool bar icons make navigating through the program easier and more intuitive. The latest DRI values are included for essential nutrients, vitamins, and minerals. NUTRITIONCALC PLUS 2.0 ONLINE STANDALONE 6th Edition By McGraw-Hill 2006 (July 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321924-0 / MHID: 0-07-321924-X NutritionCalc Plus 2.0 is a suite of powerful dietary self-assessment tools. Use NutritionCalc Plus 2.0 to analyze and monitor your personal diet and health goals. An easy-to-use interface and the reliability of the ESHA database make NutritionCalc Plus 2.0 your best choice for nutrition analysis software. New to this edition International Edition NUTRITION THROUGHOUT THE LIFE CYCLE 4th Edition By Bonnie Worthington-Roberts, University of Washington and Sue Williams, SRW Productions 2000 / 464 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-292732-0 / MHID: 0-07-292732-1 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118379-6 / MHID: 0-07-118379-5 [IE] Website: www.mhhe.com/worthington CONTENTS Chapter 1. Introduction to the Lifecycle: The Role of Nutrition (B. Worthington-Roberts) Chapter 2. The Assessment of Nutritional Needs (S. Rodwell Williams) Chapter 3. Maternal Nutrition: The Beginning of Life and the Physiology of Pregnancy (B. Worthington-Roberts) Chapter 4. Maternal Nutrition: Overall Nutrition and the Roles of Specific Nutrients (B. Worthington-Roberts) Chapter 5. Maternal Nutrition: Issues Beyond the Nutrients (B. Worthington-Roberts) Chapter 6. Lactation: The Mother and Her Milk (B. Worthington-Roberts) Chapter 7. Lactation: Breast-Feeding Is a Desirable Option (B. Worthington-Roberts) Chapter 8. Nutrition in Infancy: Physiology, Development, and Nutritional Recommendations (D. Johnson) Chapter 9. Nutrition in Infancy: Feeding in the First Year of Life (D. Johnson) Chapter 10. Nutrition in Childhood (C. Trahms) Chapter 11. Adolescent Nutrition: General (B. Spear) Chapter 12. Weight-Related Concerns and Disorders Among Adolescents (D. Neumark-Sztainer, J. Moe) Chapter 13. Nutrition During the Middle Adult Years (S. Rodwell Williams) Chapter 14. Nutrition in the Older Adult (E. Schlenker) MyPyramid report allows user to view recommendations based upon their personal profile information. The database has been expanded to include a broader range of ethnic foods, fast foods, and supplements, for a total of 10,000 foods. NutritionCalc Plus 2.0 now allows you track your daily diet for up to 28 days. You can now track your Energy Expenditure over multiple days, rather than a single typical day. The Multiple-Day Average feature now allows you to select the specific days you wish to include in your diet analysis. Weight manager function allows you to adjust your intake goals. The Fast Entry feature allows you to quickly retrieve favorite foods. Personalized reports and graphs have been expanded to include an intake/expenditure comparison report. For convenience you can now delete an entire day’s foods with a single command. The latest DRI values are included for essential nutrients, vitamins, and minerals. Nutrition and Sport International Edition New NUTRITION FOR HEALTH, FITNESS AND SPORT 8th Edition By Melvin H Williams, Old Dominion University 2007 (April 2006) / 576 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327058-6 / MHID: 0-07-327058-X ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110333-6 / MHID: 0-07-110333-3 [IE] This textbook provides the reader with thorough coverage of the role nutrition plays in enhancing one’s health, fitness and sport performance. Current research and practical activities are incorporated throughout. NEW TO THIS EDITION • Chapter 13--new chapter for this edition, covering several drug foods, such as alcohol and caffeine, and other related dietary supplements that previously had been integrated in other chapters. Instructors who prefer to adhere to the chapter content of previous editions may have students read the relevant sections of chapter 13. 148 HED 2007 Nutrition.indd 148 9/29/2006 1:29:08 PM Nutrition • The reference lists have been completely updated for this eighth edition, with the inclusion of nearly 450 new references, and provide the scientific basis for the new concepts or additional support for those concepts previously developed. These references provide greater indepth reading materials for the interested student. • The text has been updated throughout, including new information on the MyPyramid food guide! an invaluable resource to the nutrition professional working in such areas as public health and community nutrition, corporate health, and sports medicine. New to this edition The new edition includes the most recent updates in the nutrition world, including: FEATURES --recent changes in the Dietary Reference Intakes • Uses a question-answer approach with questions arranged in a logical sequence, so that the answer to one question often leads into the question that follows. --2005 Dietary Guidelines for Americans • Examines the interrelationship of health, fitness, sport and nutrition. --revised food pyramid: MyPyramid. Included is a new activity for students utilizing www.mypyramidtracker.gov (a new online dietary and physical activity assessment tool that provides information on diet quality and physical activity status). • Incorporates up-to-date research throughout the text, including expanded information on dietary supplements, ergogenic aids, and nutritional quackery. --information on the recent integration of the Continuing Survey of Food Intakes by Individuals (CSFII) and the National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey (NHANES) • Gives students the latest resources for further exploration and research in the appendix: American College of Sports Medicine: Maintaining Cardiorespiratory and Muscular Fitness; Healthy People 2010 (website updates): Objectives for Physical Activity and Nutrition; Internet Sources of Reliable Information on Nutrition as Related to Health, Exercise, and Sports. Updated figures and tables reflect most recent data on nutritional status and health • Offers practical activities throughout, such as estimating body fat, estimating the number of calories needed to maintain body weight, or calculating the caloric expenditure for a given exercise. Updated and expanded Nutritional Assessment Web Site includes interactive student activities and resource information for students and instructors . Features CONTENTS 1 Introduction to Nutrition for Health, Fitness, and Sports Performance 2 Healthful Nutrition for Fitness and Sport 3 Human Energy 4 Carbohydrates: The Main Energy Food 5 Fat: An Important Energy Source during Exercise 6 Protein: The Tissue Builder 7 Vitamins: The Organic Regulators 8 Minerals: The Inorganic Regulators 9 Water, Electrolytes and Temperature Regulation 10 Body Weight and Composition for Health and Sport 11 Weight Maintenance and Loss through Proper Nutrition and Exercise 12 Weight Gaining through Proper Nutrition and Exercise 13 Food Drugs and Related Supplements / Appendix A--Units of Measurement: English System--Metric System Equivalents Appendix B--Approximate Caloric Expenditure per Minute for Various Physical Activities Appendix C--Self-Test on Drinking Habits and Alcoholism Appendix D--Determination of Healthy Body Weight Appendix E-Exchange Lists for Meal Planning Appendix F--Calories, Percent Fat, and Cholesterol in Selected Fast-Food Restaurant Products Appendix G--Energy Pathways of Carbohydrate, Fat, and Protein Nutritional Assessment International Edition Chapter 8 has been revised and updated on nutritional assessment in disease prevention New NUTRITIONAL ASSESSMENT 4th Edition By Robert D Lee, Central Michigan University and David C Nieman, Appalachian State University 2007 (March 2006) / 608 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-244106-2 / MHID: 0-07-244106-2 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125426-7 / MHID: 0-07-125426-9 [IE] Pedagogy: The textbook utilizes chapter outlines, figures and tables, chapter summaries, glossary and a complete list of up-to-date references at the end of each chapter. These references provide the student and instructor with extensive resources for continued study. Appendixes: To make the textbook as practical as possible, a wide variety of questionnaires, checklists and tables are given in the appendices. All have been updated to reflect the latest values and data, including new food composition tables. In all there are twenty-one (21) appendixes. Web Links: Throughout the textbook are URLs to provide the students with additional sources of information. In addition, the text is linked to McGraw-Hill’s Nutrition web site, which will contain the latest information and links to other reputable and valuable sites. Nutritional Assessment provides the information students need to evaluate and assess client nutritional needs. Not only is it a textbook, but it is a handbook on the topic that can be used outside the classroom by dietitians and practitioners. Chapter Outline: A chapter outline begins each chapter to provide the students with a road map of where they are going. It is also useful as a review mechanism. Assessment Activities: Each chapter ends with an assessment activity to give the students practical experience and to better understand the concepts they have learned. Contents 1 Introduction to Nutritional Assessment 2 Standards for Nutrient Intake 3 Measuring Diet 4 National Dietary and Nutrition Surveys 5 Computerized Dietary Analysis Systems 6 Anthropometry 7 Assessment of the Hospitalized Patient 8 Nutritional Assessment in Disease Prevention 9 Biochemical Assessment of Nutritional Status 10 Clinical Assessment of Nutritional Status 11 Counseling Theory and Technique Website: http://www.mhhe.com/lee-nieman3 This text describes the four major methods of nutritional assessment (dietary, anthropometric, biometric, and clinical) in an understandable and contemporary way. It thoroughly covers assessment of the hospitalized individual, but also serves as 149 HED 2007 Nutrition.indd 149 9/29/2006 1:29:08 PM Nutrition 150 HED 2007 Nutrition.indd 150 9/29/2006 1:29:08 PM 2007-2008 NEW Physics & Astronomy Titles Physics & Astronomy ~ Contents 2007 New Titles College Physics............................................................. 156 Conceptual Physics........................................................ 156 Electricity and Magnetism.............................................. 162 Integrated Sciences........................................................ 155 Introduction to Astronomy............................................. 165 Intro to Physical Science................................................ 152 Mathematical Physics.................................................... 162 Medical Physics............................................................. 163 Modern Physics............................................................. 163 Optics........................................................................... 165 Quantum Mechanics..................................................... 164 Stars and Galaxies......................................................... 167 Technical Physics.......................................................... 164 University Physics......................................................... 161 GIAMBATTISTA College Physics, 2e...................................................157 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322274-5 / MHID: 0-07-322274-7 GRIFFITH Physics of Everyday Phenomena, 5e.........................156 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325315-2 / MHID: 0-07-325315-4 SCHNEIDER Pathways to Astronomy: Stars and Galaxies (Vol 2) with Starry Nights Pro CD-ROM..............................166 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327966-4 / MHID: 0-07-327966-8 SCHNEIDER Pathways to Astronomy with Solar System (Vol 1) with Starry Nights Pro CD-ROM..............................166 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327968-8 / MHID: 0-07-327968-4 SCHNEIDER Pathways to Astronomy with Starry Nights Pro CD-ROM (Version 3.1).......................................165 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-292208-0 / MHID: 0-07-292208-7 TILLERY Chemistry (Chapters 1, 8-13), 7e..............................152 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329818-4 / MHID: 0-07-329818-2 TILLERY Chemistry and Physics Split Prepack, 7e..................153 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329850-4 / MHID: 0-07-329850-6 TILLERY Integrated Science, 3e..............................................155 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322273-8 / MHID: 0-07-322273-9 TILLERY Lab Manual to accompany Integrated Science, 3e.............................................................................155 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299682-1 / MHID: 0-07-299682-X TILLERY Lab Manual to accompany Physical Science, 7e.............................................................................153 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304993-9 / MHID: 0-07-304993-X TILLERY Physical Science, 7e.................................................153 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325647-4 / MHID: 0-07-325647-1 TILLERY Physics (Chapters 1-7), 7e.........................................154 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329817-7 / MHID: 0-07-329817-4 TIPPENS Physics, 7e................................................................164 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322270-7 / MHID: 0-07-322270-4 2008 New Titles GIAMBATTISTA Physics.....................................................................156 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-332750-1 / MHID: 0-07-332750-6 KRAUSKOPF The Physical Universe, 12e......................................152 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331275-0 / MHID: 0-07-331275-4 151 HED 2007 Physics & Astronomy.ind151 151 9/29/2006 1:31:25 PM Physics & Astronomy Intro to Physical Science New THE PHYSICAL UNIVERSE 12th Edition By Konrad Krauskopf (Deceased), Arthur Beiser, formerly New York University 2008 (January 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331275-0 / MHID: 0-07-331275-4 This is an outstanding text with a long history that has been updated and given a fresh look, including worked examples pulled out of the text into numbered boxes. The text is now also accompanied by stronger media support with “CPS” eInstruction student response system questions, more extensive online quizzing, and PowerPoint lectures. Aimed at presenting the essentials of physics, chemistry, earth science, and astronomy in a clear, easy-to-understand way, The Physical Universe shows students how science works, how scientists approach problems, and why science constantly evolves in its search for understanding. The text can also be packaged with its long time companion student study guide, which includes a review of chapter terms and concepts; self quizzing for extra practice; and solved problems from the text. NEW TO THIS EDITION • Mathematical support of topics is included where it can enhance the understanding of the concepts. It is designed to be optional so that an instructor can choose to leave out the more mathmatical emphasis, without disrupting the flow and coverage of the concepts in the text. Although this material is NOT marked as “optional” in the text (so as to not confuse the students), a section has been added to each chapter of the 12th edition Instructor’s Manual to identify this slightly more difficult computational material as “optional”: material that can be left-out without affecting the conceptual coverage of the course. • There will be approximately 200 new end-of-chapter Questions and Problems for the 12th edition (approximately 30 replacement and 170 new/additional). The end of chapter Questions and Problems will also be organized by-section for the 12th edition. • Chapter Goals will be added back into the 12th edition text as part of the chapter opener content. • The ARIS site provide online, grade-able homework using the problems from the text. This site also includes instructor resources, such as the instructor’s manual, digital images from the text, PowerPoint lectures, CPS eInstruction questions, daily concept quizzes (for JiTT) and professional resources for the instructor. For the student, it contains self quizzing, animations, web links, a glossary. FEATURES • Superb pedagogy: updated “A Scientist at Work” essays, biographies of important scientists, worked examples and exercises, chapter summaries, conceptual questions and problems, high-interest sidebars applying science to everday life, and answers to all odd-numbered questions and problems. • Emphasis on environment, structure of matter, science of life. • The Krauskopf/Beiser text is more conceptual than most physical science texts in particular emphasizing the scientific method of inquiry-how scientists think. • Additional in-text, numbered worked examples will be added to the 12th edition. This addition in the 11th edition was very popular. The worked examples are pulled out and set apart from the textual presentation while still appearing where they should fall in the flow of the text. • Math Refresher at the back of the book. This self-contained section provides back ground information for all of the math used in the book. • Questions for student response systems and Daily Concept Quizzes to assist with Just in Time Teaching (JiTT) are included on the Online Learning Center and Instructor’s Testing & Resource CD-ROM. • Text-specific Student Study Guide (SSG) • Digital Content Manager (DCM) housing instructor presentation tools: jpeg images of ALL 4-color line art (~430), ALL photos (~340), ALL tables (~40), and ALL worked examples (~60) from the text; a collection of animations (~150); and Powerpoint Lectures (18 chapters). • Instructors Testing and Resource CD-ROM contains 1) EZ Test Test Bank with over 900 questions and problems; 2) Word and PDF files of the Instructor’s Manual, Test Bank, and Student Study Guide 3) Word files of the quizzes from ARIS 4) CPS eInstruction Questions in CPS database and PowerPoint. • Overhead Transparencies: over 100 full color transparencies featuring images from the text. NOTE: This is the 11E set RELABELED to accompany the 12E with a correlation sheet for figure numbers. CONTENTS 1 The Scientific Method: How Scientists Study Nature / The Solar System / Universal Gravitation / How Many of What 2 Motion: Describing Motion / Acceleration of Gravity / Force and Motion / Gravitation 3 Energy: Work / Energy / Momentum / Relativity / Energy and Civilization 4 Matter and Heat: Temperature and Heat / Fluids / Kinetic Theory of Matter / Changes of State / Energy Transformations 5 Electricity and Magnetism: Electric Charge / Electricity and Matter / Electric Current/ Magnetism / Using Magnetism 6 Waves: Wave Motion / Sound Waves / Wave Behavior 7 The Nucleus: Atom and Nucleus / Radioactivity / Nuclear Energy / Fission and Fusion/ Elementary Particles 8 The Atom: Quantum Theory of Light / Matter Waves / The Hydrogen Atom / Quantum Theory of the Atom 9 The Periodic Law: Elements and Compounds / The Periodic Law / Atomic Structure / Chemical Bonds 10 Crystals, Ions, and Solutions: Solids / Solutions / Acids and Bases 11 Chemical Reactions: Quantitative Chemistry / Chemical Energy / Fuels / Reaction Rates / Oxidation and Reduction 12 Organic Chemistry: Carbon Compounds / Structures of Organic Molecules / Organic Compounds / Chemistry of Life 13 Atmosphere and Hydrosphere: The Atmosphere / Weather / Climate / The Hydrosphere 14 The Rock Cycle: Rocks / Within the Earth / Erosion / Vulcanism 15 The Evolving Earth: Tectonic Movement / Plate Tectonics / Methods of Historical Geology / Earth History 16 The Solar System: The Family of the Sun / The Inner Planets / The Outer Planets / The Moon 17 The Stars: Tools of Astronomy / The Sun / The Stars / Life Histories of the Stars 18 The Universe: Galaxies / The Expanding Universe / Evolution of the Universe / Extraterrestrial Life New CHEMISTRY (CHAPTERS 1, 8-13) 7th Edition By Bill Tillery, Arizona State University-Tempe 2007 (May 2006) / 286 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329818-4 / MHID: 0-07-329818-2 CONTENTS Preface / 1 What Is Science? Chemistry 8 Atoms and Periodic Properties 9 Chemical Bonds 10 Chemical Reactions 11 Water and Solutions 12 Organic Chemistry 13 Nuclear Reactions Appendices A-D Glossary Credits Index Table of Atomic Weights 152 HED 2007 Physics & Astronomy.ind152 152 9/29/2006 1:31:25 PM Physics & Astronomy International Edition New CHEMISTRY AND PHYSICS SPLIT PREPACK 7th Edition New PHYSICAL SCIENCE 7th Edition By Bill Tillery, Arizona State University-Tempe 2007 (May 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329850-4 / MHID: 0-07-329850-6 By Bill W Tillery, Arizona State University--Tempe 2007 (March 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325647-4 / MHID: 0-07-325647-1 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110948-2 / MHID: 0-07-110948-X [IE] (Details unavailable at press time) Website: http://www.mhhe.com/tillery New LAB MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY PHYSICAL SCIENCE 7th Edition By Bill Tillery, Arizona State University-Tempe 2007 (March 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304993-9 / MHID: 0-07-304993-X FEATURES • Written and classroom tested by the author • There are laboratory exercises that require measurement, data analysis, and thinking in a more structured learning environment. • There are also alternative laboratory exercises. The more open-ended “Invitations to Inquiry” are provided for instructors who would like a less structured approach. • The instructor’s edition of the laboratory manual can be found on ARIS for Physical Science and on the ITR CD. CONTENTS Introduction / Materials Required for Each Experiment / Experiments / 1. Graphing 2. Ratios 3. Motion 4. Free Fall 5. The Pendulum 6. Projectile Motion 7. Newton’s Second Law 8. Conservation of Momentum 9. Rotational Equilibrium 10. Centripetal Force 11. Archimedes’ Principle 12. Boyle’s Law 13. Work and Power 14. Friction 15. Hooke’s Law 16. Thermometer Fixed Points 17. Absolute Zero 18. Specific Heat 19. Static Electricity 20. Electric Circuits 21. Series and Parallel Circuits 22. Ohm’s Law 23. Magnetic Fields 24. Electromagnets 25. Standing Waves 26. Speed of Sound in Air 27. Reflection and Refraction 28. Physical and Chemical Change 29. Hydrogen 30. Oxygen 31. Conductivity of Solutions 32. Percentage Composition 33. Metal Replacement Reactions 34. Producing Salts by Neutralization 35. Identifying Salts 36. Solubility Curves 37. Natural Water 38. Measurement of pH 39. Amount of Water Vapor in the Air 40. Nuclear Radiation 41. Growing Crystals 42. Properties of Common Minerals 43. Density of Igneous Rocks 44. Latitude and Longitude 45. Topographic Maps 46. Telescopes 47. Celestial Coordinates 48. Motions of the Sun 49. Phases of Moon 50. Power Output of Sun 51. Special Project Appendix I. The Simple Line Graph II. The Slope of a Straight Line III. Experimental Error IV. Significant Figures V. Conversion of Units VI. Scientific Notation Physical Science, Seventh Edition, is a straightforward, easy-toread, but substantial introduction to the fundamental behavior of matter and energy. It is intended to serve the needs of non-science majors who are required to complete one or more physical science courses. It offers exceptional, straight-forward writing, complimented with useful pedagogical tools. Tillery introduces basic concepts and key ideas while providing opportunities for students to learn reasoning skills and a new way of thinking about their environment. No prior work in science is assumed. The text offers students complete coverage of the physical sciences with a level of explanation and detail appropriate for all students. The sequence of chapters in Physical Science is flexible, and the instructor can determine topic sequence and depth of coverage as needed. The materials are also designed to support a conceptual approach, or a combined conceptual and problem-solving approach. With laboratory studies, the text contains enough material for the instructor to select a sequence for a two-semester course. It can also serve as a text in a onesemester physics and chemistry course. New to this edition Science & Society boxes relate the chapter’s content to current societal issues. New Myths, Mistakes, and Misunderstandings boxes Invitation to Inquiry exercises have been added to the end of each chapter. For Further Analysis exercises have also been added to the end of each chapter. McGraw-Hill’s ARIS for Physical Science is a complete, online electronic homework and course management system, designed for greater ease of use than any other system available. Free on adoption of any McGraw-Hill physical science text, instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. All PowerPoint lectures, assignments, quizzes, and animations are directly tied to text-specific materials in Physical Science, but instructors can also edit questions, import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of easy-to-assign homework, quizzing, and testing. All student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. People Behind the Science biographical boxes have been revised. Applying the Concepts multiple-choice questions were revised. Features • Professors have the option of creating a customized version of the text by selecting only the chapters they cover in lecture, allowing students a savings in book costs. Customization can occur in three ways: • Physics and Chemistry chapter splits • Chapter-by-chapter color customization (printed book). • Primis Online--choose the appropriate chapters and mix and match with other items on Primis Online, allowing maximum choice and flexibility. Choose between two delivery formats: custom printed books (in black and white) or custom eBooks (in color). 153 HED 2007 Physics & Astronomy.ind153 153 9/29/2006 1:31:25 PM Physics & Astronomy Contents 1 What Is Science? Physics 2 Motion 3 Energy 4 Heat and Temperature 5 Wave Motions and Sound 6 Electricity 7 Light Chemistry 8 Atoms and Periodic Properties 9 Chemical Bonds 10 Chemical Reactions 11 Water and Solutions 12 Organic Chemistry 13 Nuclear Reactions Astronomy 14 The Universe 15 The Solar System 16 Earth in Space Earth Science 17 Rocks and Minerals 18 Plate Tectonics 19 Building Earth’s Surface 20 Shaping Earth’s Surface 21 Geologic Time 22 The Atmosphere of Earth 23 Weather and Climate 24 Earth’s Waters Appendixes A Mathematical Review B Solubilities Chart C Relative Humidity Table D Solutions for Group A Parallel Exercises International Edition New PHYSICS (CHAPTERS 1-7) 7th Edition By Bill Tillery, Arizona State University-Tempe 2007 (May 2006) / 320 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329817-7 / MHID: 0-07-329817-4 Physical Science, Seventh Edition, is a straightforward, easy-toread, but substantial introduction to the fundamental behavior of matter and energy. It is intended to serve the needs of non-science majors who are required to complete one or more physical science courses. It offers exceptional, straight-forward writing, complimented with useful pedagogical tools. Tillery introduces basic concepts and key ideas while providing opportunities for students to learn reasoning skills and a new way of thinking about their environment. No prior work in science is assumed. The text offers students complete coverage of the physical sciences with a level of explanation and detail appropriate for all students. The sequence of chapters in Physical Science is flexible, and the instructor can determine topic sequence and depth of coverage as needed. The materials are also designed to support a conceptual approach, or a combined conceptual and problem-solving approach. With laboratory studies, the text contains enough material for the instructor to select a sequence for a two-semester course. It can also serve as a text in a onesemester physics and chemistry course. CONTENTS SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE 2nd Edition By Arthur Beiser, formerly of New York University 1988 / 368 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-004419-7 / MHID: 0-07-004419-8 [A Schaum Professional Publication] CONTENTS Physical Quantities. / Motion in a Straight Line. / The Laws of Motion. / Circular Motion and Gravitation. / Energy. / Momentum. / Relativity. / Fluids. / Heat. / Kinetic Theory of Matter. / Thermodynamics. / Electricity. / Electric Current. / Magnetism. / Electromagnetic Induction. / Waves. / Lenses. / Quantum Physics. / The Nucleus. / Radioactivity and Elementary Particles. / Theory of the Atom. / The Periodic Law. / Molecules and Solids. / Formulas and Equations. / Stoichiometry. / Gas Stoichiometry. / Solutions. / Acids and Bases. / Oxidation and Reduction. / Electrochemistry. / Chemical Energy. / Reaction Rates and Equilibrium. / Organic Chemistry. / The Atmosphere. / Weather. / The Oceans. / Earth Materials. / Erosion and Sedimentation. / Vulcanism and Diastrophism. / The Earth’s Interior. / Continental Drift. / Earth History. / Earth and Sky. / The Solar System. / The Sun. / The Stars. / The Universe. SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF LAGRANGIAN DYNAMICS By Dave Wells, University of Texas 1967 / 368 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-069258-9 / MHID: 0-07-069258-0 [A Schaum Professional Publication] CONTENTS Background Material. / Lagrange’s Equations of Motion of a Single Particle. / Lagrange’s Equations of Motion for a System of Particles. / Conservative Systems. / Dissipative Forces. / General Treatment of Moments and Products of Inertia. / Lagrangian Treatment of Rigid Body Dynamics. / The Euler Method of Rigid Body Dynamics. / Small Oscillations about Positions of Equilibrium. / Small Oscillations about Steady Motion. / Forces of Constraint. / Driving Forces Required to Establish Known Motions. / Effects of Earth’s Figure and Daily Rotation on Dynamical Problems. / Application of Lagrange’s Equations to Electrical and Electromechanical Systems. / Hamilton’s Equations of Motion. / Hamilton’s Principle. / Basic Equations of Dynamics in Vector and Tensor Notation. / Appendix: Relations between Direction Cosines. Preface 1 What Is Science? Physics 2 Motion 3 Energy 4 Heat and Temperature 5 Wave Motions and Sound 6 Electricity 7 Light Appendices A-D Glossary Credits Index Table of Atomic Weights DICTIONARY OF PHYSICS 3rd Edition By McGraw-Hill 2003 / 483 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141048-9 / MHID: 0-07-141048-1 [A Professional Publication] CONTENTS Preface / Staff / How to Use the Dictionary / Fields and Their Scope / Pronunciation Key / A-Z Terms / Appendix COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog. Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com 154 HED 2007 Physics & Astronomy.ind154 154 9/29/2006 1:31:26 PM Physics & Astronomy Integrated Sciences International Edition New INTEGRATED SCIENCE 3rd Edition By Bill W Tillery, Arizona State University-Tempe, Eldon Enger, Delta College and Robert S Ross, California State University-Chico 2007 (Sept 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322273-8 / MHID: 0-07-322273-9 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110798-3 / MHID: 0-07-110798-3 [IE] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/tillery Integrated Science, Third Edition is a straightforward, easy-toread, yet substantial introduction to the fundamental behavior of matter and energy in living and nonliving systems. The authors provide even, well-integrated coverage of chemistry, physics, earth science, biology, and astronomy. The book is intended to serve the needs of non-science majors who are required to complete one or more science courses as part of a general or basic studies requirement. This edition continues to introduce basic concepts and key ideas while providing opportunities for students to learn reasoning skills and a new way of thinking about their environment. No prior work in science is assumed. The language, as well as the mathematics, is as simple as can be practical for a college-level science course. New to this edition A core concept map has been added to the beginning of each chapter. New Science & Society boxes added. New Myths, Mistakes, and Misunderstandings boxes added. Invitation to Inquiry exercises have been added to the end of each chapter. Applying the Concepts Quiz Questions for Thought: Designed to challenge the student to demonstrate comprehension of the topics. Parallel Exercise Sets Contents Chapter One – What Is Science? Chapter Two--Motion Chapter Three-Energy Chapter Four--Heat and Temperature Chapter Five--Wave Motions and Sound Chapter Six--Electricity Chapter Seven--Light Chapter Eight – Atoms and Periodic Properties Chapter Nine – Chemical Reactions Chapter Ten – Water and Solutions Chapter Eleven--Nuclear Reactions Chapter Twelve--The Universe Chapter Thirteen--The Solar System Chapter Fourteen – Earth in Space Chapter Fifteen--The Earth Chapter Sixteen--The Earth’s Surface Chapter Seventeen--Earth’s Weather Chapter Eighteen--Earth’s Waters Chapter Nineteen – Organic and Biochemistry Chapter Twenty – The Nature of Living Things Chapter Twenty-One--The Origin and Evolution of Life Chapter Twenty-two – The History of Life on Earth Chapter Twenty-three--Ecology and Environment Chapter Twenty-four – Human Biology: Materials Exchange and Control Mechanisms Chapter Twenty-five – Human Biology: Sex and Sexuality Chapter Twenty-six--Mendelian and Molecular Genetics / Appendices / Glossary / Credits / Index New LAB MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY INTEGRATED SCIENCE 3rd Edition By Bill Tillery, Arizona State University-Tempe, Eldon Enger and Frederick Ross of Delta College 2007 (September 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299682-1 / MHID: 0-07-299682-X NEW TO THIS EDITION For Further Analysis exercises have also been added to the end of each chapter. • Each lab begins with an open-ended “Invitations to Inquiry,” designed to peak student interest in the lab concept. This is followed by laboratory exercises that require measurement and data analysis for work in a more structured learning environment. Some computational examples have been added back into the Third Edition. FEATURES The Lab Manual has been revised for this edition. Emphasis has been placed on making the manual more inquiry-oriented and increasing the number of biology labs. Features An outline and introduction of concepts at the beginning of each chapter. Chapter Outlines include all the major topic headings and subheadings within the body of the chapter. The Introductory Overview previews the chapter’s contents and what the student can expect to learn from that chapter. Boxed features called “Concepts Applied” New design: more open, less text intense presentation. Even coverage of chemistry, physics, earth science, biology, and astronomy. A Closer Look and Connection boxes contain information on topics of special interest to the general population as well as the science community. This is supplemental reading material. The information contained in them goes “beyond” the boundaries of the required text material. Summary of Equations: reinforce the retention of equations in the text. • The laboratory manual has been written and classroom-tested by the authors. • There is also an instructor’s edition lab manual available for instructors on the OLC and the ITR CD. CONTENTS Introduction / Acknowledgments / Materials Required for Each Experiment / Experiment / 1. Graphing 2. Ratios 3. Motion 4. Free Fall 5. Centripetal Force 6. Work and Power 7. Thermometer Fixed Points 8. Specific Heat 9. Speed of Sound in Air 10. Static Electricity 11. Ohm’s Law 12. Magnetic Fields 13. Reflection and Refraction 14. Physical and Chemical Change 15. Conductivity of Solutions 16. Metal Replacement Reactions 17. Identifying Salts 18. Natural Water 19. Measurement of pH 20. Amount of Water Vapor in the Air 21. Growing Crystals 22. Properties of Common Minerals 23. Density of Igneous Rocks 24. Latitude and Longitude 25. Telescopes 26. Celestial Coordinates 27. Motions of the Sun 28. Diffusion and Osmosis 29. The Microscope 30. Survey of Cell Types: Structure and Function 31. Enzymes 32. Photosynthesis and Respiration 33. The Chemistry and Ecology of Yogurt Production 34. DNA and RNA 35. Mitosis—Cell Division 36. Meiosis 37. Genetics Problems 38. Human Variation 39. Sensory Abilities 40. Daily Energy Balance 41. The Effect of Abiotic Factors on Habitat Preference 42. Natural Selection 43. Roll Call of the Animals 44. Special Project / Appendix I. The Simple Line Graph II. The Slope of a Straight Line III. Experimental Error IV. Significant Figures V. Conversion of Units VI. Scientific Notation Inside Front Cover: Relative Humidity Chart Inside Back Cover: Metric Relationships 155 HED 2007 Physics & Astronomy.ind155 155 9/29/2006 1:31:26 PM Physics & Astronomy Conceptual Physics International Edition New PHYSICS OF EVERYDAY PHENOMENA 5th Edition By Thoms Griffith, Pacific University 2007 (June 2006) / 576 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325315-2 / MHID: 0-07-325315-4 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110320-6 / MHID: 0-07-110320-1 [IE] The Physics of Everyday Phenomena, Fifth Edition, introduces students to the basic concepts of physics using examples of common occurrences. Intended for use in a one-semester or two-quarter course in conceptual physics, this book is written in a narrative style, frequently using questions designed to draw the reader into a dialogue about the ideas of physics. This inclusive style allows the book to be used by anyone interested in exploring the nature of physics and explanations of everyday physical phenomena. Beginning students will benefit from the large number of student aids and the reduced math content. Professors will appreciate the organization of the material and the wealth of pedagogical tools. International Edition PHYSICS FOR POETS 5th Edition By Robert March, University of Wisconsin – Madison 2003 / 304 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247217-2 / MHID: 0-07-247217-0 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119853-0 / MHID: 0-07-119853-9 [IE] Website: www.mhhe.com/physsci CONTENTS 1 A Vast and Most Excellent Science 2 Toward a Science of Mechanics 3 The Denouement: Newton’s Laws 4 The Moon and the Apple 5 The Romance of Energy 6 One Last Part for the Machine 7 Waves 8 Does the Earth Really Move? 9 The Birth of Relativity 10 The Wedding of Space and Time 11 E=mc2 and All That 12 Did God Have Any Choice? 13 The Atom Returns 14 Rutherford Probes the Atom 15 The Atom and the Quantum 16 Particles and Waves 17 Does God Play Dice? 18 Schrodinger’s Cat 19 The Dreams Stuff Is Made Of 20 The Whole Shebang College Physics NEW TO THIS EDITION • NEW “Secrets to Success” introduction, found in the To the Student section at the start of the book, helps students see how to use the text and its resources to master physics. • UPDATED AND REVISED chapter exercises continue to offer students practice in applying the concepts presented. • UPDATED AND ADDITIONAL Everyday Phenomenon boxes throughout the text analyze common phenomena in more detail to promote a better understanding of everyday events in students’ lives. These boxes emphasize the main theme of the text and give relevance to the concepts being presented. • Approximately 5 EOC Conceptual Questions Answers per chapter are provided to students in the text, with approximately another 5 per chapter online. Color is used to highlight question numbers that have answers available to students (at the EOB or online). FEATURES • Instead of traditional titles for each section, leading questions introduce the material. • Effective pedagogy includes unit openers and chapter overviews that alert students to the most important concepts. Internal summaries clarify and remind students of what is most important. The pedagogy and end-of-chapter student aids present a learning system to guide students through the course. CONTENTS 1 Physics, the Fundamental Science The Newtonian Revolution 2 Describing Motion 3 Falling Objects and Projectile Motion 4 Newton’s Laws: Explaining Motion 5 Circular Motion, the Planets, and Gravity 6 Energy and Oscillations 7 Momentum and Impulse 8 Rotational Motion of Solid Objects Fluids and Heat 9 The Behavior of Fluids 10 Temperature and Heat 11 Heat Engines and the Second Law of Thermodynamics Electricity and Magnetism 12 Electrostatic Phenomena 13 Electric Circuits 14 Magnets and Electromagnetism Wave Motion and Optics 15 Making Waves 16 Light Waves and Color 17 Light and Image Formation The Atom and Its Nucleus 18 The Structure of the Atom 19 The Nucleus and Nuclear Energy Relativity and Beyond 20 Relativity 21 Beyond Everyday Phenomena New PHYSICS By Alan Giambattista, Betty Richardson and Robert Richardson of Cornell University-Ithaca 2008 (January 2007) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-332750-1 / MHID: 0-07-332750-6 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-332813-3 / MHID: 0-07-332813-8 (with ARIS Instructor QuickStart Guide) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-332751-8 / MHID: 0-07-332751-4 (Volume 1) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-332752-5 / MHID: 0-07-332752-2 (Volume 2) Physics, 1st edition is the best solution for today’s college physics market. With a unique, new, approach to physics that builds a conceptual framework as motivation for the physical principles, consistent problem solving coverage strategies, stunning art, extensive end-of-chapter material, and superior media support, Giambattista, Richardson, and Richardson delivers a product that addresses today’s market needs with the best tools available. Physics 1st edition is a spin-off of the market leading College Physics 2nd edition text by Giambattista/Richardson/ Richardson. The key difference in in College Physics there is an integrated approach of forces and kinematics, leading with forces, while in this new 1st edition, Physics covers forces in the traditional manner by leading with Kinematics and not integrating forces. FEATURES • Eight Review and Synthesis sections now appear throughout the text, following groups of related chapters. The MCAT® Review includes actual reading passages and questions written for the Medical College Admission Test (MCAT). The Review Exercises are intended to serve as a bridge between textbook problems that are linked to a particular chapter and exam problems that are not. These exercises give students practice in formulating a problem-solving strategy without an external clue (section or chapter number) that indicates which concepts are involved. Many of the problems draw on material from more than one chapter to help the student integrate new concepts and skills with what has been learned previously. • Real MCAT questions included in the text. 156 HED 2007 Physics & Astronomy.ind156 156 9/29/2006 1:31:26 PM Physics & Astronomy • Unparalleled Illustration Program: Giambattista offers an incredible visual program that combines “showcase” pieces with simpler, diagrammatic pieces to aid student understanding. • Flash-based Interactives! These “Interactives” offer a fresh and dynamic method to teach the physics basics by providing students with simulations that are completely accurate and work with real data. Interactives allow students to manipulate parameters and gain a better understanding of 16 of the more difficult physics topics by watching the effect of these manipulations. Each Interactive includes: • Analysis Tool (interactive model) • Tutorial describing its function with content describing its principle themes, self-test questions and explanations. • New approach to college physics! Giambattista was developed from the notes and experiences of authors sitting next to students in study labs explaining physical principles on a daily basis. The authors found that students were able to grasp principles much more easily and completely, and to remember those principles, if they were discussed with-in the context of familiar and relative examples. The “Conceptual Framework” approach was developed, and all physics concepts are presented to students in such a fashion. • Chapter 8, presents another great example of how the Conceptual Framework approach has influenced presentation. Rotational kinetic energy is introduced first since it usually is the easiest of the rotational quantities for the student to understand. It also leads in a very natural way, to the necessity of rotational inertia. Torque, one of the most difficult concepts for many students, is introduced after the student already has some understanding of other rotational concepts. • Problem Solving Approach: Giambattista/Richardson/Richardson employs a consistent approach to the presentation of examples. Every example includes strategy, solution, discussion, and practice problem (with answer at end-of-chapter). Care is taken to make sure that students are equipped with tools to solve problems and that they do not just MEMORIZE STEPS to solve that one example problem. • Extensive End-of-Chapter Material which includes: Master The Concepts (summary of CONCEPTS as well as the integrated equations) Problems--clearly, one of the most closely scrutinized portions of any college physics textbook is the end-of-chapter material including but not limited to the quality and quantity of problems. The Giambattista/ Richardson/Richardson problems have consistently reviewed very well and have been quadruple checked for accuracy. The various problem types are as follows: * Conceptual Questions; * Multiple Choice Questions (with more on the website); * Problems by Section (featuring paired problems); * Problems paired by concept; * Comprehensive Problems; * Combination Problems (quantitative and conceptual problems combined); * Bio/Med application problems. • ARIS (assessment, review, and instruction system) is available with each textbook adoption. ARIS for Physics, First Edition is a complete, online tutorial, electronic homework, and course management system designed for greater ease of use than any other system available. Instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of a mouse. All PowerPoint lectures, assignments, quizzes, tutorials, and interactives are directly tied to text-specific materials in Physics, First Edition. ARIS courses are customized to your textbook, but instructors can also edit questions and algorithms, import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of easy-to-assign, algorithmically-generated homework, quizzing, and testing. All student activity within ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully-integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. • ALEKS (Assessment and Learning in Knowledge Spaces) for College Physics is a tremendously successful math tutorial system available with this text. The program focuses on only the math operations needed for college physics. ALEKS determines students’ current knowledge base, identifies where they need help, and then supplies that student with additional information and problems, allowing them to master those math concepts. This robust course management system is fast, efficient and customizable, and is available free to adopters. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Introduction PART ONE: MECHANICS Chapter 2: Motion Along a Line Chapter 3: Motion in a Plane Chapter 4: Force and Newton’s Laws of Motion Chapter 5: Circular Motion Chapter 6: Conservation of Energy Chapter 7: Linear Momentum Chapter 8: Torque and Angular Momentum Chapter 9: Fluids Chapter 10: Elasticity and Oscillations Chapter 11: Waves Chapter 12: Sound PART TWO: THERMAL PHYSICS Chapter 13: Temperature and the Ideal Gas Chapter 14: Heat Chapter 15: Thermodynamics PART THREE: ELECTROMAGNETISM Chapter 16: Electric Forces and Fields Chapter 17: Electric Potential Chapter 18: Electric Current and Circuits Chapter 19: Magnetic Forces and Fields Chapter 20: Electromagnetic Induction Chapter 21: Alternating Current PART FOUR: ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES AND OPTICS Chapter 22: Electromagnetic Waves Chapter 23: Reflection and Refraction of Light Chapter 24: Optical Instruments Chapter 25: Interference and Diffraction PART FIVE: QUANTUM AND PARTICLE PHYSICS Chapter 26: Relativity Chapter 27: Early Quantum Physics and the Photon Chapter 28: Quantum Physics Chapter 29: Nuclear Physics Chapter 30: Particle Physics APPENDICES Appendix A: Mathematics Review A.1 Algebra A.2 Solving equations A.3 Exponents and logarithms A.4 Proportions and ratios A.5 Geometry A.6 Trigonometry A.7 Approximations A.8 Vectors Appendix B: Table of Selected Isotopes Answers to Selected Questions and Problems International Edition New COLLEGE PHYSICS 2nd Edition By Alan Giambattista, Betty Richardson and Robert C. Richardson of Cornell University—Ithaca 2007 (Dec 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322274-5 / MHID: 0-07-322274-7 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325641-2 / MHID: 0-07-325641-2 (Volume 1) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325642-9 / MHID: 0-07-325642-0 (Volume 2) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110800-3 / MHID: 0-07-110800-9 [IE with Card] Website: http://highered.mcgraw-hill/sites/0072564369 College Physics, Second Edition is the best solution for today’s college physics market. With a unique, new, approach to physics that builds a conceptual framework as motivation for the physical principles, consistent problem solving coverage strategies, stunning art, extensive end-of-chapter material, and superior media support, Giambattista, Richardson, and Richardson delivers a product that addresses today’s market needs with the best tools available. New to this edition Review & Synthesis: A completely new set of problems and exercises has been added to this edition. Eight Review & Synthesis sections now appear throughout the text, following groups of related chapters. The Review & Synthesis sections contain one set of Review Exercises that ask students to combine two or more concepts learned in the previous chapters. The second set of exercises, MCAT® Review, include actual reading passages and questions written for the MCAT® exam. Real MCAT questions included in the text. Revisions to Problem Sets: Great care was taken by both the authors and the contributors to the Second Edition to add more variety to the end of chapter problem sets. 157 HED 2007 Physics & Astronomy.ind157 157 9/29/2006 1:31:26 PM Physics & Astronomy Unparalleled Illustration Program: Giambattista offers an incredible visual program that combines “showcase” pieces with simpler, diagrammatic pieces to aid student understanding. The majority of reviewers of the first edition of College Physics felt that the text’s innovative illustrations and Showcase figures were an enormous improvement over the artwork in most other existing texts. However, reviewers also commented that the graphs were very similar in quality to other texts and that some of the showcase illustrations were “distracting” and “too large.” Given this feedback on the art program, an art panel of experienced instructors was assembled. These instructors advised us on the most useful showcase illustrations to retain and update for the second edition of College Physics. This group also advised us on where to supply additional and improved graphs, diagrams, simpler sketches, and free-body diagrams to truly enhance the text discussions and examples. Reorganization of chapters 2 through 4: 1. Based on reviewer feedback, the introduction of fundamental forces in Chapter 2 was simplified. All material involving surface tension, buoyant forces, Coulomb’s law, and electric field was removed. / 2. Other reviewer feedback included comments that Chapter 2 needed more numerical examples and problems and more examples with pictures for free-body diagrams. So, the introduction of contact forces, ideal cords, and ideal springs was retained in order to have a sufficient variety of examples and problems dealing with free-body diagrams and adding forces. / 3. Some reviewers also felt that the treatment of vector addition and subtraction was “too spread out” in the first edition, so Sections 2.4 and 2.5 now provide a two-dimensional treatment of vector addition and subtraction. / 4. In an attempt to make chapter 2 more intuitive for students, 1-dimensional statics is followed by 2-dimensional statics before introducing kinematics to let students concentrate on each concept before progressing to the next. This also allows one dimensional motion to be discussed as a special case of two-dimensional motion as opposed to treating 1-D motion first, then going to 2-D, which many students find difficult. Whereas, by covering 2-D vectors first and then interspersing 1-D examples among the 2-D coverage, students seem to experience much less difficulty with comprehending the material. All sections from 2.4 to 2.9 now include worked examples of adding forces to find the net force and examples of equilibrium (net force = 0), starting very simply and gradually increasing in complexity. Material from the previous Section 4.3 is now distributed among these sections. / 5. Finally, some reviewers felt that it would be better not to introduce Newton’s second law until after the definition of acceleration. General definitions of position, displacement, velocity, and acceleration (using vector diagrams in order to avoid common misconceptions that can arise when defining them first in 1D) are now presented at the beginning of Chapter 3. Examples start with 1D and then progress to 2D within each section. Revision of Chapter 6: Chapter 6 has been revised to provide a presentation that gives a clearer view of the simplified model and when it is applicable, along with providing “caveats” of when the simplified model is not applicable. This provides students with varying models of problems of energy conservation. Chapter 6 now presents the big picture of the simplified model and its exceptions, rather than just a repetitious, forbidding list of warnings. Revision of Chapter 15: Chapter 15 has been revised to simplify and provide more commonly-used notation. Online Learning Center with ARIS is now available free with each textbook adoption. ARIS for College Physics, Second Edition is a complete, online tutorial, electronic homework, and course management system designed for greater ease of use than any other system available. Instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of a mouse. All PowerPoint lectures, assignments, quizzes, tutorials, and interactives are directly tied to textspecific materials in College Physics, Second Edition. ARIS courses are customized to your textbook, but instructors can also edit questions and algorithms, import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of easy-to-assign, algorithmically-generated homework, quizzing, and testing. All student activity within ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully-integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. Features Flash-based Interactives! These “Interactives” offer a fresh and dynamic method to teach the physics basics by providing students with applets that are completely accurate and work with real data. Interactives allow students to manipulate parameters and gain a better understanding of 16 of the more difficult physics topics by watching the effect of these manipulations. Each Interactive includes: • Analysis Tool (interactive model) • Tutorial describing its function • Content describing its principle themes • Related Exercises • Solutions to the exercises.exercises. New approach to college physics; Giambattista was developed from the notes and experiences of authors sitting next to students in study labs explaining physical principles on a daily basis. The authors found that students were able to grasp principles much more easily, completely, and remember those principles, if they were discussed with-in the context of something students were already familiar with and could relate to. The “Conceptual Framework” approach was developed and all physics concepts are presented to students in such a fashion. Because of the conceptual framework approach, the authors have integrated kinematics with forces in chapters 2-4. This presentation uses force as the central theme and presents kinematics as a natural extension that is necessary to provide a mathematical description of motion that results from a force being applied. This prevents the material from becoming compartmentalized and viewed as something to memorize instead of understand. This approach allows for a gradual exposure to one-dimensional forces, two-dimensional and then multi-dimensional forces. Students also benefit from being exposed to vectors and their terminology much sooner, allowing them to sharpen their skills on simpler situations and then gain confidence as they continue through the force chapters. Chapter 8, presents another great example of how the Conceptual Framework approach has influenced presentation. Rotational kinetic energy is now introduced first since it usually is the easiest of the rotational quantities for the student to understand. It also leads in a very natural way, to the necessity of rotational inertia. Torque, one of the most difficult concepts for many students, is introduced after the student already has some understanding of other rotational concepts. Problem Solving Approach: Giambattista/Richardson/Richardson employs a consistent approach to the presentation of examples. Every example includes strategy, solution, discussion, and practice problem (with answer at end-of-chapter). Care is taken to make sure that students are equipped with tools to solve problems and that they do not just MEMORIZE STEPS to solve that one example problem. Extensive End-of-Chapter Material which includes: Master These Concepts (summary of CONCEPTS as well as the integrated equations) Problems--clearly, one of the most closely scrutinized portions of any college physics textbook is the end-of-chapter material including but not limited to the quality and quantity of problems. The Giambattista/Richardson/Richardson problems have consistently reviewed very well and have been quadruple checked for accuracy. The various problem types are as follows: * Conceptual Questions; * Multiple Choice Review Questions (with more on the website); * Problems by Section (featuring paired problems) * Comprehensive Problems; * Combination Problems (quantitative and conceptual problems combined) * Bio/Med application problems * Problems paired by concept ALEKS (Assessment and Learning in Knowledge Spaces) for College Physics is a tremendously successful math tutorial system available with this text. The program focuses on only the math operations needed for college physics. ALEKS determines students’ current knowledge base, 158 HED 2007 Physics & Astronomy.ind158 158 9/29/2006 1:31:26 PM Physics & Astronomy identifies where they need help, and then supplies that student with additional information and problems, allowing them to master those math concepts. This robust course management system is fast, efficient and customizable, and is available free to adopters. • Examples vary in complexity from textbook-like problems to realworld situations from actual current research Contents Chapter 1: A Quick Review of Special Relativity Chapter 2: Vectors, One Forms, and the Metric Chapter 3: More on Tensors Chapter 4: Tensor Calculus Chapter 5: Cartan’s Structure Equations Chapter 6: The Einstein Field Equations Chapter 7: The Energy-Momentum Tensor Chapter 8: Killing Vectors Chapter 9: Null Tetrads and the Petrov Classification Chapter 10: The Schwarzchild Solution Chapter 11: Black Holes Chapter 12: Cosmology Chapter 13: Gravitational Waves FINAL EXAM QUIZ AND EXAM SOLUTIONS REFERENCES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY INDEX Chapter 1: Introduction PART ONE: MECHANICS Chapter 2: Force Chapter 3: Acceleration and Newton’s Second Law of Motion Chapter 4: Motion with a Changing Velocity Chapter 5: Circular Motion Chapter 6: Conservation of Energy Chapter 7: Linear Momentum Chapter 8: Torque and Angular Momentum Chapter 9: Fluids Chapter 10: Elasticity and Oscillations Chapter 11: Waves Chapter 12: Sound PART TWO: THERMAL PHYSICS Chapter 13: Temperature and the Ideal Gas Chapter 14: Heat Chapter 15: Thermodynamics PART THREE: ELECTROMAGNETISM Chapter 16: Electric Forces and Fields Chapter 17: Electric Potential Chapter 18: Electric Current and Circuits Chapter 19: Magnetic Forces and Fields Chapter 20: Electromagnetic Induction Chapter 21: Alternating Current PART FOUR: ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES AND OPTICS Chapter 22: Electromagnetic Waves Chapter 23: Reflection and Refraction of Light Chapter 24: Optical Instruments Chapter 25: Interference and Diffraction PART FIVE: QUANTUM AND PARTICLE PHYSICS Chapter 26: Relativity Chapter 27: Early Quantum Physics and the Photon Chapter 28: Quantum Physics Chapter 29: Nuclear Physics Chapter 30: Particle Physics APPENDICES Appendix A: Mathematics Review Appendix B: Table of Selected Isotopes SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF COLLEGE PHYSICS 10th Edition By Frederick J Bueche, University of Dayton-Emeritus and Eugene Hecht, Adelphi University 2006 (Nov 2005) / 448 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-144814-7 / MHID: 0-07-144814-4 [A Schaum Professional Publication] An introduction to physics that you don’t need to be a math whiz to understand. Schaum’s Outline of College Physics, Tenth Edition, is a clear, easily understood review of introductory noncalculus-based physics. It is especially helpful if you do not have a strong background in mathematics. RELATIVITY DEMYSTIFIED By David McMahon and Paul Alsing 2006 (December 2005) / 344 pages ISBn-13: 978-0-07-145545-9 / MHID: 0-07-145545-0 CONTENTS ALEKS PREP FOR PHYSICS By Aleks Corporation 2004 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-293245-4 / MHID: 0-07-293245-7 (Packaged) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-291796-3 / MHID: 0-07-291796-2 (Stand-Alone) ALEKS: Math Prep for Physics is the solution for students struggling with poor math skills in their college physics courses. ALEKS works by first identifying what students already know and do not know. ALEKS is able to feed students problems and new concepts based on what they are ready to learn next as opposed to what is next on the syllabus. This allows for students to finally master and understand concepts. Schaum’s Outline of Applied Physics 4th Edition By Arthur Beiser, formerly of New York University 2004 / 384 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-142611-4 / MHID: 0-07-142611-6 [A Schaum Professional Publication] Over the past decade, significant changes in the teaching of applied physics have taken place. More emphasis is now placed on subjects such as relativity, atomic physics, nuclear physics, elementary particle physics, semiconductors, and superconductors. Completely updated, Schaum’s Outline of Applied Physics, Fourth Edition, devotes more space to these subjects and includes a host of new material. (A Professional Publicaition) In Relativity Demystified a physicist explains Einstein’s theory of relativity in layman’s terms, minus heavy-duty discussion or formal mathematics. Author David McMahon gradually builds up readers’ practical skills to a point where they can eventually solve real problems in the field of general relativity. The book offers examples that vary in complexity from textbook-like problems to real-world situations from actual current research. Relativity Demystified also focused on quick definitions and demonstrations of procedures needed to solve problems. FEATURES • Overview of the essentials and formulas of Einstein’s theory • “Teach by Example” approach with simple explanations • Forcuses on quick definitions and demonstrations of the procedures needed to solve problems • Key definitions, examples, and results are set off from regular text, making the important text easy to access SCHAUM’S A-Z PHYSICS By Michael Chapple 2003 / 288 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141937-6 / MHID: 0-07-141937-3 [A Schaum Professional Publication] Schaum’s A-Z handbooks make excellent complements to course textbooks and test preparation guides. Ideal for ambitious high school seniors--especially AP students--and college freshmen, they feature concise, thoroughly cross-referenced definitions of hundreds of key terms and phrases that help students quickly break through the jargon barrier. Clear explanations of key concepts, supplemented with lucid illustrations, help build mastery of theory and provide a ready reference to supplement class work. Each entry begins with a clear, one-sentence definition and is followed by an explanation and examples. A-to-Z format for ready reference Clear definitions and explanations, cross-referenced and enhanced with numerous worked examples and illustrations 159 HED 2007 Physics & Astronomy.ind159 159 9/29/2006 1:31:27 PM Physics & Astronomy Extended explanations of more important concepts Review lists of entries that relate to main topics in the Appendix aid review SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE OF COLLEGE PHYSICS By J. Bueche, Emeritus University of Dayton, Eugene Hecht, Adelphi University and George J. Hademenos 2000 / 138 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-052711-9 / MHID: 0-07-052711-3 [A Schaum Professional Publication] CONTENTS PHYSICS DEMYSTIFIED By Stan Gibilisco 2003 / 599 pages ISBn-13: 978-0-07-138201-4 / MHID: 0-07-138201-1 Newtonian Mechanics. / Density, Elasticity, and Fluids. / Heat, Temperature, and Thermodynamics. / Waves. / Electricity and Magnetism. / Light and Geometrical Optics. [A Professional Publication] CONTENTS PART ZERO: A REVIEW OF MATHEMATICS CHAPTER 1 Equations, Formulas, and Vectors CHAPTER 2 Scientific Notation CHAPTER 3 Graphing Schemes CHAPTER 4 Basics of Geometry CHAPTER 5 Logarithms, Exponentials, and Trigonometry Test: Part Zero PART ONE: CLASSICAL PHYSICS CHAPTER 6 Units and Constants CHAPTER 7 Mass, Force, and Motion CHAPTER 8 Momentum, Work, Energy, and Power Chapter 9: Particles of Matter Chapter 10: Basic States of Matter Chapter 11: Temperature, Pressure, and Changes of State Test: Part One PART TWO: ELECTRICITY, MAGNETISM, AND ELECTRONICS Chapter 12: Direct Current Chapter 13: Alternating Current Chapter 14: Magnetism Chapter 15: More About Alternating Current Chapter 16: Semiconductors Test: Part Two PART THREE: WAVES, PARTICLES, SPACE, AND TIME Chapter 17: Wave Phenomena Chapter 18: Forms of Radiation Chapter 19: Optics Chapter 20: Relativity Theory Test: Part Three / Final Exam / Answers to Quiz, Test, and Exam Questions / Suggested Additional References / Index International Edition CONTEMPORARY COLLEGE PHYSICS 2001 Update, 3rd Edition By Edwin R Jones and Richard L Childers of University of South Carolina 2001 / 1088 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-241512-4 / MHID: 0-07-241512-6 (with CD-ROM, Mandatory Package) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118236-2 / MHID: 0-07-118236-5 [IE - Text] ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118090-0 / MHID: 0-07-118090-7 [IE, Mandatory Package] ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120491-0 / MHID: 0-07-120491-1 [IE, Updated] Website: www.mhhe.com/physsci/physical/jones/ CONTENTS 1 Measurements and Models 2 Motion in One Dimension 3 Motion in Two Dimensions 4 Force and Motion 5 Uniform Circular Motion 6 Work and Energy 7 Momentum 8 Applying the Conservation Laws 9 Rigid Bodies and Rotational Motion 10 Fluids 11 Thermal Physics 12 Gas Laws and Kinetic Theory 13 Thermodynamics 14 Periodic Motion 15 Waves and Sound 16 Electric Charge and Electric Field 17 Electric Potential and Capacitance 18 Electric Current and Resistance 19 Magnetism 20 Electromagnetic Induction 21 Alternating-Current Circuits 22 Geometrical Optics 23 Optical Instruments 24 Wave Optics 25 Relativity 26 Discovery of Atomic Structure 27 Origins of the Quantum Theory 28 Quantum Mechanics 29 The Nucleus 30 Lasers and Holography 31 Condensed Matter 32 Elementary Particle Physics Appendices: A Formulas from Algebra, Geometry, and Trigonometry B The International System of Units C Alphabetical List of Elements D Answers to Odd Numbered Problems SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BEGINNING PHYSICS II By Alvin Halpern 1998 / 592 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-025707-8 / MHID: 0-07-025707-8 [A Schaum Professional Publication] CONTENTS Wave Motion. / Sound. / Coulomb’s Law and Electric Fields. / Electric Potential and Capacitance. / Simple Electric Circuits. / Magnetism--Effect of the Field. / Magnetism--Source of the Field. / Magnetic Properties of Matter. / Induced EMF. / Inductance. / Time Varying Electric Circuits. / Electromagnetic Waves. / Light and Optical Phenomena. / Mirrors, Lenses and Optical Instruments. / Interference, Diffraction and Polarization. / Special Relativity. / Particles of Light and Waves of Matter: Introduction to Quantum Physics. / Modern Physics: Atomic, Nuclear and Solid-State Physics. PHYSICS FOR THE UTTERLY CONFUSED By Robert Oman and Daniel Oman 1998 / 208 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-048262-3 / MHID: 0-07-048262-4 [A Professional Publication] Website: http://books.mcgraw-hill.com/cgi-bin/getbook.pl?isbn=007048 2624&adkey=W02003 CONTENTS Mathematical Background./ Vectors. / Motion in One Dimension. / Motion in Two Dimensions. / Forces. / Unifrom Circular Motion. / Work and Energy. / Momentum Analysis. / Rotational Motion. / Rotational Dynamics. / Simple Harmonic Motion. / Fluids. / Temperature and Calorimetry. / Kinetics and the Gas Laws. / Thermodynamics. / Mechanical Waves. / Sound. / Electric Forces and Electric Fields. / Electric Potential. / Electric Circuits. / Magnetic Forces and Magnetic Fields. / Magnetic Forces. / Electromagnetic Induction. / Alternating Current Circuits. / Electromagnetic Waves. / Reflection, Refraction and Polarization. / Lenses. / The Wave Nature of Light and Interference. / Special Relativity. / Particles and Waves. / The Atom. / Radioactivity. INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg 160 HED 2007 Physics & Astronomy.ind160 160 9/29/2006 1:31:27 PM Physics & Astronomy HOW TO SOLVE PHYSICS PROBLEMS AND MAKE THE GRADE By Robert Oman and Daniel Oman 1996 / 352 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-048166-4 / MHID: 0-07-048166-0 [A Professional Publication] Website: http://books.mcgraw-hill.com/cgi-bin/getbook.pl?isbn=007048 1660&adkey=W02003 The purpose of this book is to show you how to do physics problems. It is only through applications of concepts to solving problems that we can know for certain that we understand something. Nowhere is this more true than in a physics course where performance is measured almost exclusively by your ability to do problems. This book is not a collection of problems. Neither is it a text. It is an attempt to strike a balance between theory and problem solving with heavy emphasis on the problem solving. As such it is intended to complement your course text. University Physics SIX IDEAS THAT SHAPED PHYSICS Unit C – Conservation Laws Constraint Interactions, 2nd Edition By Thomas A. Moore, Pomona College 2003 / 306 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-229152-0/ MHID: 0-07-229152-4 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/mooresixideas CONTENTS C1 Introduction to Interactions C2 Vectors C3 Interactions Transfer Momentum C4 Particles and Systems C5 Applying Momentum Conservation C6 Introduction to Energy C7 Some Potential Energy Functions C8 Force and Energy C9 Rotational Energy C10 Thermal Energy C11 Energy in Bonds C12 Power, Collisions, and Impacts C13 Angular Momentum C14 Conservation of Angular Momentum International Edition PRINCIPLES OF PHYSICS 6th Edition By Frederick Bueche, Emeritus, University of Dayton and David Jerde, St. Cloud State 1995 / 900 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-008986-0 / MHID: 0-07-008986-8 (Revised Edition) (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113854-3 / MHID: 0-07-113854-4 [IE] (Details unavailable) SIX IDEAS THAT SHAPED PHYSICS Unit E – Electromagnetic Fields, 2nd Edition By Thomas A. Moore, Pomona College 2003 / 384 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-239711-6 / MHID: 0-07-239711-X Website: http://www.mhhe.com/mooresixideas CONTENTS E1 Electrostatics E2 Electric Fields E3 Electric Potential E4 Conductors E5 Driving Currents E6 Analyzing Circuits E7 Magnetic Fields E8 Currents and Magnets E9 Symmetry and Flux E10 Gauss’s Law E11 Ampere’s Law E12 The Electromagnetic Field E13 Maxwell’s Equations E14 Induction E15 Introduction to Waves E16 Electromagnetic Waves SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BEGINNING PHYSICS I By Alvin Halpern, City University of New York 1995 / 471 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-025653-8 / MHID: 0-07-025653-5 [A Schaum Professional Publication] CONTENTS Introduction and Mathematical Background. / Motion in a Straight Line. / Motion in a Plane./ Forces and Equilibrium. / Newton’s Second Law. / Work and Mechanical Energy. / Energy, Power and Simple Machines. / Impulse and Momentum. / Equilibrium for Rigid Bodies. / Rotational Motion. / Elasticity and Objects under Stress. / Simple Harmonic Motion. / Fluids at Rest. / Fluids in Motion. / Temperature and Heat. / Thermal Energy Transfer. / Gas Laws and Kinetic Theory. / Thermodynamics: The First and Second Laws. 3,000 SOLVED PROBLEMS IN PHYSICS By Alvin Halpern 1988 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-025734-4 / MHID: 0-07-025734-5 [A Schaum Professional Publication] Website: http://books.mcgraw-hill.com/cgi-bin/getbook.pl?isbn=007025 7345&adkey=W02003 Solved Problem Series -- These books help readers review and master what they’ve learned by showing them how to solve thousands of relevant problems. Perfect for preparing for graduate or professional exams, these detailed reminders of problem-solving techniques show readers the best strategies for answering even the toughest questions, including the types that appear on typical tests. SIX IDEAS THAT SHAPED PHYSICS Unit N – Laws of Physics are Universal, 2nd Edition By Thomas A. Moore, Pomona College 2003 / 288 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-239712-3 / MHID: 0-07-239712-8 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/mooresixideas CONTENTS N1 Newton’s Law N2 Vector Calculus N3 Forces from Motion N4 Motion from Forces N5 Statics N6 Linearly Constrained Motion N7 Coupled Objects N8 Circularly Constrained Motion N9 Noninertial Reference Frames N10 Projectile Motion N11 Oscillatory Motion N12 Introduction to Orbits N13 Planetary Motion SIX IDEAS THAT SHAPED PHYSICS Unit Q – Matter Behaves like Waves, 2nd Edition By Thomas A. Moore, Pomona College 2003 / 288 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-239713-0 / MHID: 0-07-239713-6 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/mooresixideas CONTENTS Q1 Standing Waves Q2 The Wave Nature of Light Q3 The Particle Nature of Light Q4 The Wave Nature of Matter Q5 The Quantum Facts of Life Q6 The Wavefunction Q7 Bound Systems Q8 Spectra Q9 Understanding Atoms Q10 The Schrodinger Equation Q11 Energy Eigenfunctions Q12 Introduction to Nuclei Q13 Stable and Unstable Nuclei Q14 Radioactivity Q15 Nuclear Technology 161 HED 2007 Physics & Astronomy.ind161 161 9/29/2006 1:31:27 PM Physics & Astronomy SIX IDEAS THAT SHAPED PHYSICS Unit R – Laws of Physics are Frame-Independent, 2nd Edition By Thomas A. Moore, Pomona College 2003 / 240 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-239714-7 / MHID: 0-07-239714-4 and the Laws of Geometric Optics./ Geometric Optics./ Interference of Light Waves./ Diffraction and Polarization./ Special Theory of Relativity./ Introduction to Quantum Physics./ Quantum Mechanics./ Atomic Physics./ Molecules and Solids./ Nuclear Structure./ Nuclear Physics Applications and Elementary Particles. Website: http://www.mhhe.com/mooresixideas CONTENTS R1 The Principle of Relativity R2 Synchronizing Clocks R3 The Nature of Time R4 The Metric Equation R5 Proper Time R6 Coordinate Transformations R7 Lorentz Contraction R8 The Cosmic Speed Limit R9 Four-Momentum R10 Conservation of Four-Momentum Appendix A Conversion of Equations to SI Units Appendix B The Relativistic Doppler Effect Electricity and Magnetism International Edition SIX IDEAS THAT SHAPED PHYSICS Unit T – Some Processes are Irreversible, 2nd Edition By Thomas A. Moore, Pomona College 2003 / 208 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-239715-4 / MHID: 0-07-239715-2 BASIC ELECTRONICS FOR SCIENTISTS 5th Edition By Manes J Brophy, formerly of University of Utah 1990 / 462 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-008147-5 / MHID: 0-07-008147-6 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-100675-0 / MHID: 0-07-100675-3 [IE] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/mooresixideas CONTENTS T1 Temperature T2 Ideal Gases T3 Gas Processes T4 Macrostates and Microstates T5 The Second Law T6 Temperature and Entropy T7 Some Mysteries Resolved T8 Calculating Entropy Changes T9 Heat Engines. SIX IDEAS THAT SHAPED PHYSICS 6 Unit Package, 2nd Edition By Thomas A. Moore, Pomona College 2003 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-256482-2 / MHID: 0-07-256482-2 CONTENTS See individual books International Edition SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF PHYSICS FOR ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE By Michael Browne, University of Idaho 1999 / 452 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-008498-8 / MHID: 0-07-008498-X ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124112-0 / MHID: 0-07-124112-4 [IE] [A Schaum Professional Publication] CONTENTS Measurements and Vectors./ Motion in One Dimension./ Motion in Two Dimensions./ The Laws of Motion./ Circular Motion and Other Applications of Newton’s Laws./ Work and Energy./ Potential Energy and Conservation of Energy./ Linear Momentum and Collisions./ Rotation of a Rigid Body About a Fixed Axis./ Angular Momentum and Torque As a Vector Quantities./ Static Equilibrium of a Rigid Body./ Oscillatory Motion./ The Law of Universal Gravitation./ Mechanics of Solids and Fluids./ Wave Motion./ Sound Waves./ Superposition and Standing Waves./ Temperature, Thermal Expansion, and Ideal Gases./ Heat and the First Law of Thermodynamics./ The Kinetic Theory of Gases./ Heat Engines, Entropy, and the Second Law of Thermodynmics./ Electric Fields./ Gauss’ Law./ Electric Potential./ Capacitance and Dielectrics./ Current and Resistance./ Direct Current Circuits./ Magnetic Fields./ Sources of the Magnetic Field./ Faraday’s Law./ Inductance./ Alternating Current Circuits./ Electromagnetic Waves./ The Nature of Light International Edition ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM Berkeley Physics Course, Volume II, 2nd Edition By Berkeley Physics, University of California -- Berkeley 1985 / 512 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-004908-6 / MHID: 0-07-004908-4 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-066495-1 / MHID: 0-07-066495-1 [IE] The sequence of topics covered include: electrostatics; steady currents; magnetic field; electromagnetic induction; and electric and magnetic polarization in matter. Taking a nontraditional approach, students focus on fundamental questions from different frames of reference. Each chapter has figures and problems to apply concepts studied. Mathematical Physics SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF MATHEMATICS FOR PHYSICS STUDENTS By Robert Steiner, Teachers College at Columbia University and Philip Schmidt, State University of New York-New Paltz 2007(January 2007) / 400 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-146158-0 / MHID: 0-07-146158-2 [A Schaum Professional Publication] Schaum’s Outline of Mathematics for Physics Students helps you to apply mathematical concepts to your studies and shows you how these concepts operate in physics problems. The book includes both fully solved problems and supplementary practice problems. 162 HED 2007 Physics & Astronomy.ind162 162 9/29/2006 1:31:27 PM Physics & Astronomy Modern Physics International Edition DATA REDUCTION AND ERROR ANALYSIS FOR THE PHYSICAL SCIENCES 3rd Edition By Philip Bevington (Deceased) and D. Keith Robinson, Case Western Reserve University 2003 / 336 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247227-1 / MHID: 0-07-247227-8 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119926-1 / MHID: 0-07-119926-8 [IE] Website: http://www.mhhe.com/bevington CONTENTS 1 Uncertainties in Measurements 2 Probability Distributions 3 Error Analysis 4 Estimates of Mean and Errors 5 Monte Carlo Techniques 6 Least-Squares Fit to a Straight Line 7 Least-Squares Fit to a Polynomial 8 Least-Squares Fit to an Arbitrary Function 9 Fitting Composite Curves 10 Direct Application of the Maximum-Likelihood Method 11 Testing the Fit Appendix A Numerical Methods Appendix B Matrices Appendix C Graphs and Tables Appendix D Histograms and Graphs Appendix E Computer Routines in Fortran International Edition CONCEPTS OF MODERN PHYSICS 6th Edition By Arthur Beiser 2003 / 560 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-244848-1 / MHID: 0-07-244848-2 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123460-3 / MHID: 0-07-123460-8 [IE] Website: www.mhhe.com/physsci CONTENTS 1 Relativity 2 Particle Properties of Waves 3 Waves Properties of Particles 4 Atomic Structure 5 Quantum Mechanics 6 Quantum Theory of the Hydrogen Atom 7 Many-Electron Atoms 8 Molecules 9 Statistical Mechanics 10 The Solid State 11 Nuclear Structure 12 Nuclear Transformations 13 Elementary Particles Appendix Atomic Masses International Edition International Edition FUNDAMENTALS OF STATISTICAL AND THERMAL PHYSICS By Frederick Reif, University of California-Berkeley 1965 / 651 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-051800-1 / MHID: 0-07-051800-9 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-085615-8 / MHID: 0-07-085615-X [IE] Medical Physics SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF PHYSICS FOR PRE-MED, BIOLOGY AND ALLIED HEALTH STUDENTS By George Hademenos, University of California at Los Angeles 1998 / 256 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-025474-9 / MHID: 0-07-025474-5 [A Schaum Professional Publication] Students of medicine and the life sciences will appreciate the special perspective of this invaluable study guide. It explains how physics principles and concepts apply in these particular fields, including more than 70 drawings and graphs to help students visualize, understand and remember the relationships. The hundreds of problems solved step-by-step also help boost learning and grades by reinforcing the ideas and aiding recall. SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF MODERN PHYSICS 2nd Edition By Gautreau 1999 / 338 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-024830-4 / MHID: 0-07-024830-3 [A Schaum Professional Publication] CONTENTS Part I:The Special Theory Of Relativity. 1 The Gaililean Transformations. 2 The Postulates of Einstien. 3 The Lorentz Coordinates Transformations. 4 Relativistic Length Contraction. 5 Realistic Time Dilation. 6 Relativistic Space-Time Measurements. 7 Relativistic Velosity Transformations. 8 Mass, Energy, and Momentum in Relativity. Part II: The Quantum Theory of Electromagnetic Radiation. 9 Electromagnetic Radioation - Photons. 10 Matter Waves. Part III: Hydrogenlike Atoms. 11 The Bohr Atom. 12 Electron Orbital Motion. 13 Electron Spin. Part IV: Many-Electron Atoms. 14 The Pauli Exclusion Principle. 15 ManyElectron Atoms and the Periodic Table. 16 X-Rays. Part V: Nuclear Physics. 17 Properties of Nuclei. 18 Nuclear Models. 19 The Decay of Unstable Nuclei. 20 Nuclear Reactions. 21 Particle Physics. Part VI: Atomic Systems. 22 Molecules. 23 Kinetic Theory. 24 Distribution Functions. 25 Classical Statistics: The Macwell-Boltzmann Distribution. 27 Quantum-Statistics: Fermi-Dirac and Bose-Einstein Distributions. Solids. Appendix. Index. International Edition PERSPECTIVES OF MODERN PHYSICS By Arthur Beiser, New York University 1984 / 624 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-085047-7 / MHID: 0-07-085047-X [IE] 163 HED 2007 Physics & Astronomy.ind163 163 9/29/2006 1:31:27 PM Physics & Astronomy Technical Physics Quantum Mechanics QUANTUM MECHANICS DEMYSTIFIED By David McMahon 2006 (November 2005) / 393 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-145546-6 / MHID: 0-07-145546-9 [A Professional Publication] This clear, concise introduction to quantum mechanics is the perfect supplement and complement to the math-heavy texts that dominate the field. The author includes hundreds of worked examples to illustrate the processes discussed and Dirac’s Method, explains how to obtain a desired result in familiar terms rather than with confusing terminology and formulas. CONTENTS PREFACE / ACKNOWLEDGMENTS / Chapter 1: Historical Review Chapter 2: Basic Developments Chapter 3: The Time Independent Schrodinger Equation Chapter 4: An Introduction to State Space Chapter 5: The Mathematical Structure of Quantum Mechanics I Chapter 6: The Mathematical Structure of Quantum Mechanics II Chapter 7: The Mathematical Structure of Quantum Mechanics III Chapter 8: The Foundations of Quantum Mechanics Chapter 9: The Harmonic Oscillator Chapter 10: Angular Momentum Chapter 11: Spin-1/2 Systems Chapter 12: Quantum Mechanics in Three Dimensions / FINAL EXAM / ANSWERS TO QUIZ AND EXAM QUESTIONS / REFERENCES / INDEX International Edition New PHYSICS 7th Edition By Paul E Tippens 2007 (Dec 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322270-7 / MHID: 0-07-322270-4 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110796-9 / MHID: 0-07-110796-7 [IE with OLC] Website: http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/007301267x Physics, Seventh Edition is designed for the non-calculus physics course taken by students who are pursuing careers in science or engineering technology. Content is built through extensive use of examples with detailed solutions designed to develop students’ problem-solving skills. New to this edition Digital Content Manager includes electronic copies of all images from the text plus text-specific PowerPoint presentation for each chapter. Instructor’s Testing and Resource CD-ROM includes an electronic test generator, the testbank in Word and the Instructor’s Manual in Word. Features SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF QUANTUM MECHANICS By Elyahu Zaarur, Reuven Pnini and Yoav Peleg of formerly of the Technion Institute of Technology, Haifa, Israel 1998 / 320 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-054018-7 / MHID: 0-07-054018-7 [A Schaum Professional Publication] CONTENTS Introduction. / Mathematical Background. / Schrodinger Equation and Applications. / Foundations of Quantum Mechanics. / Harmonic Oscillator. / Angular Momentum. / Spin. / Hydrogen-Like Atoms. / Particle Motion in an Electromagnetic Field. / Solution Methods in Quantum Mechanics. / Part A: Solutions Methods in Quantum Mechanics. / Part B: Numerical Methods in Quantum Mechanics. / dentical Particles. / Addition of Angular Momenta. / Scattering Theory. / Semiclassical Treatment of Radiation. “CONCEPTUAL EXAMPLES” in every chapter show the student how to develop problem solving strategies. Includes marginal notes that involve “Key Terms”, “Critical Thinking Questions”, “Using the Calculator”, “Job Tips”, “Math Revisted”, “Internet Connections” plus other areas of interest to today’s student. Comprehensive Instructor’s Management System contains solutions to chapter-ending questions and problems; ideas for using the Internet in the classroom; answers to Activities Manual experiments; and a new CD-ROM with a PowerPoint presentation of key chapter features and a comprehensive Windows-based test bank. The activities manual is a combined study guide and experiments manual. Each chapter begins with a concise one-page self-test of basic concepts. The study guide portion outlines each chapter with workedout problems. Each section of the book is described concisely in a brief paragraph. Following the study guide material, each Chapter includes one experiment. Contents International Edition QUANTUM MECHANICS 3rd Edition By Leonard I Schiff 1968 / 432 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-055287-6 / MHID: 0-07-055287-8 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-085643-1 / MHID: 0-07-085643-5 [IE] MECHANICS 1 Introduction 2 Technical Mathematics 3 Technical Measurements and Vectors. 4 Translational Equilibrium and Friction 5 Torque and Rotational Equilibrium 6 Uniform Acceleration 7 Newton’s Second Law 8 Work, Energy, and Power 9 Impulse and Momentum 10 Uniform Circular Motion. 11 Rotation of Rigid Bodies 12 Simple Machines 13 Elasticity 14 Simple Harmonic Motion 15 Fluids THERMODYNAMICS, MECHANICAL WAVES, AND SOUND 16 Temperature and Expansion 17 Quantity of Heat 18 Transfer of Heat 19 Thermal Properties of Matter 20 Thermodynamics 21 Mechanical Waves 22 Sound ELECTRICITY, MAGNETISM, AND OPTICS 23 The Electric Force 24 The Electric Field 25 Electric Potential 26 Capacitance 27 Current and Resistance 28 Direct-Current Circuits 29 Magnetism and the Magnetic Field 30 Forces and Torques in a Magnetic Field 31 Electromagnetic Induction 32 Alternating-Current Circuits 33 Light and Illumination 34 Reflection and Mirrors 35 Refraction 36 Lenses and Optical Instruments 37 Interference, Diffraction, and Polarization MODERN PHYSICS 38 Modern Physics and the Atom 39 Nuclear Physics and the Nucleus INDEX 164 HED 2007 Physics & Astronomy.ind164 164 9/29/2006 1:31:27 PM Physics & Astronomy Optics International Edition FUNDAMENTALS OF OPTICS 4th Edition By Francis A Jenkins, deceased and Harvey E White, University of California, Berkeley 1976 / 746 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-032330-8 / MHID: 0-07-032330-5 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-085346-1 / MHID: 0-07-085346-0 [IE] SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF OPTICS By Eugene Hecht, Adelphi University 1974 / 256 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-027730-4 / MHID: 0-07-027730-3 [A Schaum Professional Publication] CONTENTS Wave Motion. / Electromagnetic Waves and Photons. / Reflection and Transmission. / Geometrical Optics. / Polarization. / Interference and Coherence. / Diffraction. / Fourier Optics Introduction to Astronomy ASTRONOMY FOR THE UTTERLY CONFUSED By Terry Jones, University of Minnesota and Jeanne Hanson 2007 (December 2006) / 352 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-147158-9 / MHID: 0-07-147158-8 [A Professional Publication] In this latest installment in the bestselling Utterly Confused series, an astronomy professor and a popular science writer team up to fill you in on all the essentials of modern astronomy. From the solar system and the constellations to space-time, gravity, and quantum physics, you’ll go on a fascinating journey through the cosmos, becoming acquainted with the most recent astronomical phenomena and concepts, and dozens of fun facts. CONTENTS Ch 1: The Universe in Time and Space Ch 2: The Earth’s Place Ch 3: The Sky As Visible From earth Ch 4: Key Concepts and Basic laws Ch 5: The Gas Planets Ch 6: The Rocky Planets and Moons Ch 7: The Smaller Bodies Ch 8: Brahe, Copernicus, Einstein, and On Ch 9: Down to the Atom and Below Ch 10: How They are Studied Ch 11: How Stars Evolve Ch 12: How Stars End Their “Lives” Ch 13: Formation and Evolution Ch 14: The Role of Dark Matter Ch 15: The Role of Dark Energy Ch 16: Expansion, Contraction, Dissolution Ch 17: Space Travel International Edition New pathways TO ASTRONOMY with Starry Nights Pro CD-ROM (Version 3.1) By Steven Schneider and Thomas T Arny, University of Mass-Amherst 2007 (Feb 2006) / 416 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-292208-0 / MHID: 0-07-292208-7 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110847-8 / MHID: 0-07-110847-5 [IE] Website: http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/0072499656 Pathways to Astronomy is designed more like a series of minilectures instead of a monograph of the entire field of astronomy. The same material covered in other introductory astronomy texts is included, but this is broken up into smaller self-contained units. These units are woven together to flow naturally for the person who wants to read the text like a book, but it is also possible to assign them in different orders, or skip certain units altogether. Professors can customize the units to fit their course needs. They can select individual units for exploration in lecture while assigning easier units for self-study, or they can cover all the units in full depth in a content-rich course. With the short length of units, students can easily digest the material covered in an individual unit before moving onto the next unit. Pathways to Astronomy offers the most complete technology media support package available. That technology media package includes: Starry Night Planetarium Software free with the purchase of every new text, 23 Interactives (on the text website and Digital Content Manager CD); Animations (on the text website); Online Learning Center (that allows instructors to take their course to the web if they choose). Electronic Media Integration has been incorporated throughout the text. Interactive and Animation icons have been placed in places where additional understanding can be gained through an animation or interactive. Features Accessible writing style that allows coverage of technically complex ideas without confusing students. Tom Arny gives the students a reason to read every sentence. Concise introduction to Astronomy. PowerWeb subscription included with each new textbook. Interactive CD-ROM packaged free with the new text! This CDROM includes animations, video, audio, an image bank, full text search engine, links to web sites, and planetarium software. The CD-ROM is hybrid, so it’s compatible on both MAC and Windows systems. Comprehensive OLC / Pageout: The web site gives instructors the tools they need, and provides study aids and enrichment for students. Instructors will have access to sample syllabi and lecture outlines. The web site will also include animations, hundreds of images, chapter summaries and key terms, web links, scorable practice quizzes, interactive tutorials, and much more. “Re-modeling” Sidebar applications. These boxes deal with the dynamic nature of scientific models, explaining how new technologies and information lead to the evolution and refinement of our theories. “Observational Activities”: Many additional activities are included that students can try at home or in class. These are scattered throughout the text. Analogy Sketches are included in the margins. Latest Scientific Information! Contents 1 The Night Sky 2 Laws of Light and Motion 3 The Earth 4 The Moon 5 Telescopes 6 Survey of the Solar System 7 Origin of the Solar System 8 The Planets 9 Meteors, Asteroids, and Comets 10 The Sun, Our Star 11 Measuring the Properties of Stars 12 Stellar Evolution 13 The Milky Way Galaxy 14 Galaxies 15 Cosmology / Appendix Powers-of-Ten Notation 165 HED 2007 Physics & Astronomy.ind165 165 9/29/2006 1:31:28 PM Physics & Astronomy New EXPLORATION An Introduction to Astronomy, 4th Edition By Steven Schneider and Thomas Arny of University of Mass-Amherst 2007 (April 2006) / 474 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327968 8 / MHID: 0-07-327968-4 By Thoms T Arny, University of Massachusetts – Amherst 2006 (Feb 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304080-6 / MHID: 0-07-304080-0 (with Starry Nights Version 3.1 CD-ROM) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304079-0 / MHID: 0-07-304079-7 (Case Bound with Starry Nights Version 3.1 CD-ROM) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312589-3 / MHID: 0-07-312589-X (Solar System (Vol 1) with Starry nights Version 3.1 CD-ROM) CONTENTS Website: http://www.mhhe.com/arny THE COSMIC LANDSCAPE 1 Our Planetary Neighborhood 2 Beyond the Solar System 3 Astronomical Numbers 4 Foundations of Astronomy 5 The Night Sky 6 The Year 7 The Time of Day 8 Lunar Cycles 9 Calendars 10 Geometry of the Earth, Sun and Moon 11 Planets: The Wandering Stars 12 The Beginnings of Modern Astronomy 13 Observing the Sky PROBING MATTER,LIGHT AND INTERACTION 14 Inertia, Mass and Force 15 Accerleration and Interaction 16 The Law of Gravity 17 Measuring a Body’s Mass Using Orbital Motion 18 Escape Velocity 19 Tides 20 Conservation Laws 21 Light, Matter and Energy 22 The Electromagnetic Spectrum 23 Thermal Radiation 24 Atomic Spectra 25 The Doppler Shift 26 Detecting Light 27 Collecting Light 28 Focusing Light 29 Telescope Resolution 30 The Earth’s Atmosphere and Space Observations 31 Amateur Astonomy THE SOLAR SYSTEM 32 Patterns in the Solar System 33 The Origin of the Solar System 34 Other Planetary Systems 35 The Earth as a Terrestrial Planet 36 Earth’s Atmosphere and Hydrosphere 37 Our Moon 38 Mercury 39 Venus 40 Mars 41 Asteroids 42 Comparative Planetology 43 Jupiter 44 Saturn 45 Uranus and Neptune 46 Ice Worlds: Moons, Pluto, and Beyond 47 Comets 48 Impacts on Earth Arny: Explorations-An Introduction to Astronomy, 4th edition, is built on the foundation of its well known writing style, accuracy, and emphasis on current information. This new edition continues to offer the most complete technology/new media support package available. That technology/new media package includes: 23 Interactives including 17 NEW and 6 originals converted from Java to Flash(located on the text website and Digital Content Manager CD); Online Learning Center (that allows instructors to take their course to the web if they choose); and Starry Night Planetarium Software (packaged free with each new text). PATHWAYS TO ASTRONOMY Solar System (Volume 1) with Starry Nights Pro CD-ROM New PATHWAYS TO ASTRONOMY Stars and Galaxies (Volume 2) with Starry Nights Pro CD-ROM By Steven Schneider and Thomas Arny of University of Mass-Amherst 2007 (April 2006) / 620 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327966-4 / MHID: 0-07-327966-8 CONTENTS THE COSMIC LANDSCAPE 1 Our Planetary Neighborhood 2 Beyond the Solar System 3 Astronomical Numbers 4 Foundations of Astronomy 5 The Night Sky 6 The Year 7 The Time of Day 8 Lunar Cycles 9 Calendars 10 Geometry of the Earth, Sun and Moon 11 Planets: The Wandering Stars 12 The Beginnings of Modern Astronomy 13 Observing the Sky PROBING MATTER,LIGHT AND INTERACTION 14 Inertia, Mass and Force 15 Accerleration and Interaction 16 The Law of Gravity 17 Measuring a Body’s Mass Using Orbital Motion 18 Escape Velocity 19 Tides 20 Conservation Laws 21 Light, Matter and Energy 22 The Electromagnetic Spectrum 23 Thermal Radiation 24 Atomic Spectra 25 The Doppler Shift 26 Detecting Light 27 Collecting Light 28 Focusing Light 29 Telescope Resolution 30 The Earth’s Atmosphere and Space Observations 31 Amateur Astonomy STARS AND STELLAR EVOLUTION 49 The Sun, Our Star 50 The Sun’s Source of Power 51 Solar Activity 52 Surveying the Stars 53 Light and Distance 54 The Composition and Temperatures of Stars 55 The Sizes of Stars 56 The Masses of Orbiting Stars 57 The H-R Diagram 58 Stellar Evolution 59 Star Formation 60 Main-Sequence Stars 61 Giant Stars 62 Variable Stars 63 Mass Loss and Death of Low Mass Stars 64 Old Age and Death of Massive Stars 65 Star Clusters 66 Exploding White Dwarfs 67 Neutron Stars 68 Black Holes GALAXIES AND THE UNIVERSE 69 Discovering the Milky Way 70 Stars of the Milky Way 71 Gas and Dust in the Milky Way 72 Mass and Motions in the Milky Way 73 A Universe of Galaxies 74 Types of Galaxies 75 Galaxy Clustering 76 Active Galaxies 77 Dark Matter 78 Cosmology 79 Edges of the Universe 80 The Fate of the Universe 81 The Beginnings of the Universe 82 Astrobiology 83 The Search for Life Elsewhere CONTENTS Preface / Preview: The Cosmic Landscape / Part 1 The Night Sky / 1 History of Astronomy / Essay 1 Backyard Astronomy / Part 2 Atoms, Forces, Light, and How We Learn About the Universe / 2 Gravity and Motion / 3 Light and Atoms / 4 Telescopes / Part 3 The Earth and Moon / 5 The Earth / Essay 2 Keeping Time / 6 The Moon / Part 4 The Solar System / 7 Survey of the Solar System / 8 The Terrestrial Planets / 9 The Outer Planets / 10 Meteors, Asteroids, and Comets / Part 5 Stars / 11 The Sun, Our Star / 12 Measuring the Properties of Stars / 13 Stellar Evolution / 14 Stellar Remnants: White Dwarfs, Neutron Stars, and Black Holes / Part 6 The Milky Way and Other Galaxies / 15 The Milky Way Galaxy / 16 Galaxies / 17 Cosmology / Essay 3 Life in the Universe / Answers to “Test Yourself” / Appendix / Glossary / Index ASTRONOMY Journey to the Cosmic Frontier, 4th Edition By John D. Fix, University of Alabama – Huntsville 2006 (Jan 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304078-3 / MHID: 0-07-304078-9 (with Starry Nights Version 3.1 CD-ROM) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312612-8 / MHID: 0-07-312612-8 (Galaxies (Vol 2) and Starry Nights 3.1 CD-ROM, Chapter 1-6; 17-27) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312611-1 / MHID: 0-07-312611-X (Solar System (Volume 1) and Starry Nights 3.1 CD-ROM, Chapter 1-17) Website: http://www.mhhe.com/fix This is a text for an introductory astronomy course. One of the main goals is to provide a broad enough and deep enough background in astronomy so the student will be able to follow current developments in astronomy years after they complete the course. This book presumes that most of its readers are not science majors and that they probably have not had a college-level science or mathematics course. The book provides a complete description of current astronomical knowledge, neither at an extreme technical level nor at a level that fails to communicate the quantitative nature of physical science. Finally, the historical development of astronomy is emphasized to show that astronomy, like other sciences, advances through the efforts of many scientists, and to show how present ideas have been developed. 166 HED 2007 Physics & Astronomy.ind166 166 9/29/2006 1:31:28 PM Physics & Astronomy CONTENTS Foreword / Preface / Guided Tour Part 1 The Journey Begins 1 Journey’s Start 2 Patterns in the Sky 3 Ancient Astronomy 4 Renaissance Astronomy 5 Gravity and Motion 6 Light and Telescopes Part 2 Journey Through the Solar System 7 Overview of the Solar System 8 The Earth 9 The Moon 10 Mercury and Venus 11 Mars 12 Jupiter and Saturn 13 The Outer Planets 14 Satellites 15 Solar System Debris Part 3 Journey to the Stars 16 Basic Properties of Stars 17 The Sun 18 The Formation of Stars and Planets 19 The Evolution of Stars 20 White Dwarfs, Neutron Stars, and Black Holes 21 Binary Star Systems Part 4 Journey to the Cosmic Frontier 22 The Milky Way 23 Galaxies 24 Quasars and Other Active Galaxies 25 Galaxy Clusters and the Structure of the Universe 26 Cosmology Part 5 The Journey in Search of Life 27 Life in the Universe / Appendixes / Glossary / References / Credits / Index EXPLORATIONS Stars, Galaxies, and Planets, Update By Thomas T. Arny, University of Massachusetts—Amherst 2004 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299699-9 / MHID: 0-07-299699-4 (with OLC, ESP CD-ROM and Starry Nights 3.1 CD-ROM) Website: http://www.mhhe.com/arny The text takes all of the features that have made Arny Explorations a top-selling textbook and applies them under a stars-first approach. This new edition continues to offer the most complete technology/new media support package available. That technology/new media package includes: 6 NEW Interactives; PowerWeb (web-based research and interactive quizzing--very current); Online Learning Center (that allows instructors to take their course to the web if they choose); and a new CD-ROM that offers new and different text material/animations/links to even further enhance student comprehension. / Final Exam / Answers to Quiz, Test, and Exam Questions / Suggested Additional Reading and Reference / Index McGRAW-HILL DICTIONARY OF ASTRONOMY 2nd Edition By McGraw-Hill 2003 / 272 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141047-2 / MHID: 0-07-141047-3 CONTENTS Preface / Staff / How to Use the Dictionary / Fields and Their Scope / Pronunciation Key / A-Z Terms / Appendix SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF ASTRONOMY By Starcey Palen, University of Washington 2002 / 304 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-136436-2 / MHID: 0-07-136436-6 [A Schaum Professional Publication] Providing a basic introduction to a beginning astronomy course, with an emphasis on problem-solving methods ordinarily taught “on the fly” or in ad-hoc tutorials, this essential guide provides a focused, comprehensive presentation of basic astronomical problem-solving techniques. Readers learn by example with the help of more than 200 detailed problems supplemented with over 100 detailed charts and graphs. CONTENTS Preview The Cosmic Landscape / 1 History of Astronomy / Essay 1 Backyard Astronomy /2 Gravity and Motion / 3 Light and Atoms /4 Telescopes / 5 The Sun, Our Star / 6 Measuring the Properties of Stars / 7 Stellar Evolution / 8 Stellar Remnants: White Dwarfs, Neutron Stars, and Black Holes / 9 The Milky Way Galaxy / 10 Galaxies / 11 Cosmology / 12 The Earth / Essay 2 Keeping Time / 13 The Moon / 14 Survey of the Solar System / 15 The Terrestrial Planets / 16 The Outer Planets / 17 Meteors, Asteroids, and Comets / Essay 4 Life in the Universe / Appendix: Powers-of-Ten Notation / Some Useful Formulas / Solving Distance, Velocity, Time (D, v, t) / Problems Stars and Galaxies EXPLORATIONS, STARS AND GALAXIES (VOLUME 2) WITH STARRY NIGHTS 3.1 CD-ROM 4th Edition By Thomas T Arny, University of Mass-Amherst 2006 (March 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312586-2 / MHID: 0-07-312586-5 ASTRONOMY DEMYSTIFIED By Stan Gibilisco 2003 / 575 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-138427-8 / MHID: 0-07-138427-8 [A Professional Publication] CONTENTS CONTENTS Chapter 1: History of Astronomy Chapter 2: Gravity and Motion Chapter 3: Light and Atoms Chapter 4: Telescopes Chapter 11: The Sun, Our Star Chapter 12: Measuring the Properties of Stars Chapter 13: Stellar Evolution Chapter 14: Stellar Remnants: White Dwarfs, Neutron Stars, and Black Holes Chapter 15: The Milky Way Galaxy Chapter 16: Galaxies Chapter 17 Cosmology Appendix: Powers-of-Ten Notation Preface / Acknowledgments / PART ONE: THE SKY Chapter 1: Coordinating the Heavens Chapter 2: Stars Constellations Chapter 3: The Sky “Down Under” Chapter 4: The Moon and the Sun Test: Part One PART TWO: THE PLANETS Chapter 5: Mercury and Venus Chapter 6: Mars Chapter 7: The Outer Planets Chapter 8: An Extraterrestrial Visitor’s Analysis of Earth Test: Part Two PART THREE: SOLAR SYSTEM DYNAMICS Chapter 9: Evolution of the Solar System Chapter 10: Major Moons of the Outer Planets Chapter 11: Comets, Asteroids, and Meteors Chapter 12: The Search for Extraterrestrial Life Test: Part Three PART FOUR: BEYOND OUR SOLAR SYSTEM Chapter 13: Stars and Nebulae Chapter 14: Extreme Objects in Our Galaxy Chapter 15: Galaxies and Quasars Chapter 16: Special and General Relativity Test: Part Four PART FIVE: SPACE OBSERVATION AND TRAVEL Chapter 17: Optics and Telescopes Chapter 18: Observing the Invisible Chapter 19: Traveling and Living in Space Chapter 20: Your Home Observatory Test: Part Five 167 HED 2007 Physics & Astronomy.ind167 167 9/29/2006 1:31:28 PM Dushkin / McGraw-Hill Titles Accounting CONTENTS Applied Biology ISBN-13 / MHID AUTHOR ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351541-0/MHID: 0-07-351541-8 Ramont TITLE/EDITION YEAR Annual Editions: Nursing 06/07 2006 Geography ISBN-13 / MHID AUTHOR TITLE/EDITION YEAR ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294009-1/MHID: 0-07-249008-3 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294010-7/MHID: 0-07-294010-7 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294011-4/MHID: 0-07-294011-5 Palka Malinowski Palka-Galgano Afghanistan: Regional Geography Iraq: Regional Geography North Korea: Regional Geography 2004 2004 2004 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351624-0/MHID: 0-07-351624-4 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320964-7/MHID: 0-07-320964-3 Griffiths Griffiths Annual Editions: Developing World 07/08 [17e] Annual Editions: Developing World 06/07 [16e] 2007 2006 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-354567-7/MHID: 0-07-354567-8 Pitzl Annual Editions: Geography 06/07 [21e] 2006 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339728-3/MHID: 0-07-339728-8 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351603-5/MHID: 0-07-351603-1 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-311217-6/MHID: 0-07-311217-8 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-286151-8/MHID: 0-07-286151-7 Jackson Jackson Jackson Jackson Annual Editions: Global Issues 07/08 [23e] Annual Editions: Global Issues 06/07 [22e] Annual Editions: Global Issues 05/06 [21e] Annual Editions: Global Issues 04/05 [20e] 2008 2007 2005 2004 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351606-6/MHID: 0-07-351606-6 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310826-1/MHID: 0-07-310826-X Purkitt Purkitt Annual Editions: World Politics 06/07 [27e] Annual Editions: World Politics 05/06 [26e] 2007 2006 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319535-3/MHID: 0-07-319535-9 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-284713-0/MHID: 0-07-284713-1 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-243371-5/MHID: 0-07-243371-X Edge Ramsay Ramsay Global Studies: Africa [11e] Global Studies: Africa [10e] Global Studies: Africa [9e] 2006 2004 2001 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337991-3/MHID: 0-07-337991-3 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319872-9/MHID: 0-07-319872-2 Ogden Ogden Global Studies: China [12e] Global Studies: China [11e] 2008 2006 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319874-3/MHID: 0-07-319874-9 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-286259-1/MHID: 0-07-286259-9 Frankland Frankland Global Studies: Europe [9e] Global Studies: Europe [8e] 2006 2004 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337971-5/MHID: 0-07-337971-9 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319873-6/MHID: 0-07-319873-0 Norton Norton Global Studies: India and South Asia [8e] Global Studies: India and South Asia [7e] 2008 2006 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337990-6/MHID: 0-07-337990-5 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-311219-0/MHID: 0-07-311219-4 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-285026-0/MHID: 0-07-285026-4 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-243296-1/MHID: 0-07-243296-9 Collinwood Collinwood Collinwood Collinwood Global Studies: Japan and the Pacific Rim [9e] Global Studies: Japan and the Pacific Rim [8e] Global Studies: Japan and the Pacific Rim [7e] Global Studies: Japan and the Pacific Rim [6e] 2008 2006 2003 2001 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340406-6/MHID: 0-07-340406-3 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-286382-6/MHID: 0-07-286382-X Goodwin Goodwin Global Studies: Latin America [12e] Global Studies: Latin America [11e] 2007 2004 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340405-9/MHID: 0-07-340405-5 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-286159-4/MHID: 0-07-286159-2 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-250575-7/MHID: 0-07-250575-3 Spencer Spencer Spencer Global Studies: Middle East [11e] Global Studies: Middle East [10e] Global Studies: Middle East [9e] 2007 2004 2003 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337989-0/MHID: 0-07-337989-1 Goldman ISBN-13: 978-0-07-286381-9/MHID: 0-07-286381-1 Goldman Global Studies: Russia, The Eurasian Republics, 2008 and Central/Eastern Europe [11e] Global Studies: Russia, The Eurasian Republics, 2005 and Central/Eastern Europe [10e] ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340408-0/MHID: 0-07-340408-X Tessema Global Studies: The World at a Glance 2006 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352757-4/MHID: 0-07-352757-2 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299846-7/MHID: 0-07-299846-6 Allen Allen Student Atlas: World Geography [5e] Student Atlas: World Geography [4e] 2008 2005 168 HED 2007 Dushkin Titles.indd 168 9/29/2006 1:33:25 PM Dushkin / McGraw-Hill Titles Geography ISBN-13 / MHID AUTHOR TITLE/EDITION YEAR ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337972-2/MHID: 0-07-337972-7 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352773-4/MHID: 0-07-352773-4 Allen Allen Student Atlas: World Politics [8e] Student Atlas: World Politics [7e] 2008 2006 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352746-6/MHID: 0-07-352724-6 Harf ISBN-13: 978-0-07-311163-6/MHID: 0-07-311163-5 Harf Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial 2007 Global Issues [4e] Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial 2005 Global Issues [3e] ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351507-6/MHID: 0-07-351507-8 Moseley ISBN-13: 978-0-07-284517-4/MHID: 0-07-284517-1 Moseley Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial 2007 African Issues [2e] Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial 2004 African Issues ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339720-7/MHID: 0-07-339720-2 Rourke ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351501-4/MHID: 0-07-351501-9 Rourke ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352716-1/MHID: 0-07-352716-5 Rourke ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304395-1/MHID: 0-07-304395-8 Rourke Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial 2008 Issues in World Politics [13e] Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial 2007 Issues in World Politics, Expanded [12e] Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial 2006 Issues in World Politics [12e] Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial 2005 Issues in World Politics [11e] ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351504-5 /MHID: 0-07-351504-3 DeGrave Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial Issues on Latin AMerican Issues 2007 Geology ISBN-13 / MHID AUTHOR TITLE/EDITION YEAR ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351544-1/MHID: 0-07-351544-2 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351542-7/MHID: 0-07-351542-6 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352831-1/MHID: 0-07-352831-5 Allen Allen Allen Annual Editions: Environment 07/08 [26e] Annual Editions: Environment 06/07 [25e] Annual Editiosn: Environment 05/06 [24e] 2008 2007 2006 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-303186-6/MHID: 0-07-303186-0 Goldfarb Sources: Notable Selections in Environmental Studies [2e] 2000 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351442-0/MHID: 0-07-351442-X ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351441-3/MHID: 0-07-351441-1 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305140-6/MHID: 0-07-305140-3 Taking Sides: Environmental Issues [12e] Taking Sides: Environmental Issues, Expanded [11e] Taking Sides: Environmental Issues [11e] 2007 2006 2005 Easton Easton Easton 169 HED 2007 Dushkin Titles.indd 169 9/29/2006 1:33:25 PM Dushkin / McGraw-Hill Titles Integrative Biology (PAE) ISBN-13 / MHID AUTHOR TITLE/EDITION YEAR ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351544-1/MHID: 0-07-351544-2 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351542-7/MHID: 0-07-351542-6 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352831-1/MHID: 0-07-352831-5 Allen Allen Allen Annual Editions: Environment 07/08 [26e] Annual Editions: Environment 06/07 [25e] Annual Editions: Environment 05/06 [24e] 2008 2007 2006 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-303186-6/MHID: 0-07-303186-0 Goldfarb Sources: Notable Selections in Environmental Studies [2e] 2000 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351442-0/MHID: 0-07-351442-X ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351441-3/MHID: 0-07-351441-1 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305140-6/MHID: 0-07-305140-3 Easton Easton Easton Taking Sides: Environmental Issues [12e] Taking Sides: Environmental Issues, Expanded [11e] Taking Sides: Environmental Issues [11e] 2007 2006 2005 ISBN013: 978-0-07-252870-1/MHID: 0-07-252870-2 Allen PowerWeb: Environment Science 2003 Nutrition ISBN-13 / MHID AUTHOR TITLE/EDITION YEAR ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351545-8/MHID: 0-07-351545-0 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351543-4/MHID: 0-07-351543-4 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-311220-6/MHID: 0-07-311220-8 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-286133-4/MHID: 0-07-286133-9 Klimis-Zacas Klimis-Zacas Klimis-Zacas Klimis-Zacas Annual Editions: Nutrition 07/08 [19e] Annual Editions: Nutrition 06/07 [18e] Annual Editions: Nutrition 05/06 [17e] Annual Editions: Nutrition 04/05 [16e] 2008 2007 2005 2004 Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial Issues in Food and Nutrition 2004 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-292211-0/MHID: 0-07-292211-7 Nestle-Dixon 170 HED 2007 Dushkin Titles.indd 170 9/29/2006 1:33:25 PM Title Index 3,000 Solved Problems in Chemistry, Goldberg.....................73 3,000 Solved Problems in Organic Chemistry, Meislich.........84 3,000 Solved Problems in Physics, Halpern.........................161 a A&P Animations Collection, McGraw-Hill...........................47 ACLS Basics and More with Student CD & DVD, McKenna..........................................................................53 AIDS Update 2007, Stine........................................................70 Aleks Prep for Physics, Aleks Corporation.........................159 Analysis of Biological Development, 2e, Kalthoff.................57 Anatomy & Physiology, 4e, Saladin.......................................41 Anatomy & Physiology, 8e, Seeley.........................................41 Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory Manual, 4e, Wise...........44 Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory Textbook: Complete Version, 8e, Benson..........................................45 Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory Textbook: Essentials Version, 4e, Gunstream...................................39 Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory Textbook: Intermediate Version, CAT, 6e, Benson.............................46 Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory Textbook: Short Version, 8e, Benson.................................................46 Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CDS 1-4 Complete Series, Medical College of Ohio......................................33 Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CD#2-Nervous, Medical College of Ohio..................................................33 Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CD#3-Cardiovascular, Respiratory and Lymphatic Systems, Medical College of Ohio.................................................................33 Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CD#4-Digestive, Urinary, Reproductive and Endocrine Systems, Medical College of Ohio..................................................34 Anatomy & Physiology Revealed Online, Medical College of Ohio.................................................................47 Anatomy & Physiology with Integrated Study Guide, 3e, Gunstream........................................................................38 Anatomy, Physiology and Pathophysiology for Allied Health, Booth.........................................................21 Anatomy Revealed: Volume 1, Skeletal and Muscular Systems, Medical College of Ohio...................................33 Animal Behavior, 5e, Drickamer..........................................130 Animal Diversity, 4e, Hickman............................................141 Animal Sciences: The Biology, Care and Production of Domestic Animals, 4e, Campbell.....................................91 Astronomy Demystified, Gibilisco........................................167 Astronomy for the Utterly Confused, Jones..........................165 Astronomy: Journey for the Cosmic Frontier, 4e, Fix...........166 Atlas of Skeletal Muscles, 5e, Stone.......................................48 Atlas to Human Anatomy (An), Strete....................................49 B Basic Concepts in Biochemistry: A Student’s Survival Guide, 2e, Gilbert.............................................................82 Basic Electronics for Scientists, 5e, Brophy.........................162 Basic Histology: Text & Atlas, 11e, Junqueira......................50 Basic Life Support: Healthcare and Professional Rescuers, National Safety Council..................................14 Benson’s Microbiology Applications: Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology, Complete Version, 10e, Brown........................................................................65 Benson’s Microbiology Applications: Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology, Short Version, 10e, Brown.......66 Biochemistry: An Introduction, 3e, McKee............................81 Biocourse.com, Decker.........................................................109 Biological Investigations Lab Manual, 8e, Dolphin..............106 Biology, Brooker...................................................................104 Biology, 3e, Knox....................................................................99 Biology, 9e, Mader................................................................102 Biology, 8e, Raven................................................................105 Biology Demystified, Layman................................................46 Biology Digitized Video Clips, McGraw-Hill......................109 Biology: Dimensions of Life, Presson....................................97 Biology Laboratory Manual, 8e, Vodopich...........................106 Biology of Invertebrates, 5e, Pechenik.................................138 Biology of Viruses, 2e (The), Voyles.......................................57 Biotechnology Demystified, Walker.......................................69 Biotechnology: DNA to Protein: A Laboratory Project in Molecular Biology, Thiel..................................70 Bringing Fossils to Life: An Introduction to Paleobiology, 2e, Prothero..............................................125 C Cardiology Atlas CD-ROM, 2e, Blausen Medical Communications..............................................................47 Case Studies for the Medical Office, 4e, Sanderson...............15 Catastrophe Preparation and Prevention for Law Enforcement Professionals with Student CD, Palin..........51 Changing Landscapes of Singapore, Teo...............................115 Chemical Kinetics and Reaction Dynamics, Houston............86 Chemistry, 9e, Chang..............................................................77 Chemistry (Chapters 1, 8-13), 7e, Tillery.............................152 Chemistry and Physics Split Prepack, 7e, Tillery.................153 Chemistry Demystified, Williams...........................................80 Chemistry: A First Course, 3e, Kroshwitz..............................74 Chemistry: A World of Choices, 2e, Kelter............................72 Chemistry in Context: Applying Chemistry to Society, 5e, American Chemical Society........................72 Chemistry: The Molecular Nature of Matter and Change, 4e, Silberberg.....................................................79 Chemskill Builder Online, Version 2, 2e, Spain......................81 College Physics, 2e, Giambattista........................................157 Comparative Anatomy of the Vertebrates, 9e, Kent..............140 Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy: Laboratory Dissection Guide, 4e, Kardong.......................................140 Computers in the Medical Office with Student Data CD-ROM, 5e, Sanderson..................................................15 Concepts in Biology, 12e, Enger.............................................98 Concepts of Human Anatomy and Physiology, 5e, Van De Graaf....................................................................43 Concepts of Modern Physics, 6e, Beiser...............................163 Conceptual Introduction Chemistry, Bauer.............................73 Connections in Environmental Science: A Case Study Approach, Mayer............................................................137 Conservation Biology: Foundations, Concepts, Applications, Dyke..........................................................132 Contemporary College Physics: 2001 Update, 3e, Jones......160 Contemporary Nutrition, 6e, Wardlaw.................................146 Contemporary World Regional Geography, 2e, Bradshaw........................................................................116 Cooperative Chemistry Lab Manual, 3e, Cooper....................80 CPR & AED, 2e, National Safety Council............................16 171 Indexes.indd 171 9/29/2006 1:47:35 PM Title Index D Data Reduction and Error Analysis for the Physical Sciences, 3e, Bevington..................................................163 Dictionary of Bioscience, 2e, McGraw-Hill...........................43 Dictionary of Chemistry, 2e, McGraw-Hill............................80 Dictionary of Eath Science, 2e, McGraw-Hill.....................121 Dictionary of Geology and Mineralogy, 2e, McGraw-Hill..................................................................121 Dictionary of Physics, 3e, McGraw-Hill..............................154 Digital Zoology Version 2.0 CD-ROM, Houseman......109, 142 Dinosaurs: The Textbook, 5e, Lucas.....................................120 Discovery Channel Video Series DVD, Discovery Channel.........................................................137 E Earth Science: Understanding Environmental Systems, Spencer............................................................121 Ecology: Concepts and Applications, 4e, Molles..................132 Economic Botany, 3e, Simpson.............................................131 Economics of Resources, Agriculture and Food, 2e, Seitz......90 Electricity and Magnetism: Berkeley Physics Course, Volume II, 2e, Berkeley Physics.....................................162 Electrocardiography for Health Care Personnel with Student CD-ROM, 2e, Booth............................................17 Emergency Medical Responder: First Responder in Action with Student CD-ROM, Student DVD and Pocket Guide, Aehlert................................................51 Environmental Geology, 7e, Montgomery...........................121 Environmental Science, Kaufmann......................................135 Environmental Science: A Global Concern, 9e, Cunningham...................................................................136 Environmental Science: A Study of Interrelationships, 11e, Enger.......................................................................134 Essentials of Anatomy and Physiology, 6e, Seeley..................38 Essentials of Biology, Mader..................................................98 Essentials of the Living World, 2e, Johnson...........................95 Evolution of the Earth, 7e, Prothero.....................................123 Experimental and Applied Physiology Laboratory Manual, 8e, Pflanzer.........................................................36 Experiments in Physical Chemistry, 7e, Shoemaker..............85 Exploration: An Introduction to Astronomy, 4e, Arny..........166 Explorations, Stars and Galaxies (Volume 2) with Starry Nights 3.1 CD-ROM, 4e, Arny............................167 Explorations: Stars, Galaxies, and Planets, Update, Arny................................................................................167 Exploring the World Ocean, Chamberlin.............................124 F Farm Management, 6e, Kay..............................................89, 90 Fast & Easy ECGS with DVD, Shade.....................................18 First Aid Taking Action, National Safety Council.................14 First Aid with Pocket Guide, 2e, National Safety Council....19 Foodwise 1.2 CD-ROM, 6e, McGraw-Hill..........................147 Forest Measurements, 5e, Avery.............................................88 Foundations in Microbiology, 6e, Talaro................................62 Foundations in Microbiology: Basic Principles, 6e, Talaro................................................................................63 Foundations of General, Organic and Biochemistry, Denniston..........................................................................75 Foundations of Parasitology, 7e, Roberts.............................139 Fundamentals of Chemistry, 5e, Goldberg.............................73 Fundamentals of Ecology, 2e, Madhab................................133 Fundamentals of Oceanography, 5e, Sverdrup.....................125 Fundamentals of Optics, 4e, Jenkins....................................165 Fundamentals of Statistical and Thermal Physics, Reif........163 G General Chemistry: The Essential Concepts, 5e, Chang........77 General Ecology Laboratory Manual, 8e, Cox......................133 General, Organic and Biochemistry, 5e, Denniston................75 General Zoology Laboratory Manual, 14e, Lytle..................143 General Zoology Laboratory Manual to accompany Zoology, 6e, Miller..........................................................143 Genetics: Analysis and Principles, 2e, Brooker......................60 Genetics Demystified, Willet...................................................60 Genetics: From Genes to Genomes, 3e, Hartwell...................58 GIS Applications in Forestry and Natural Resources, Bettinger...........................................................................88 Good Earth: Introduction to Earth Sciences (The), McConnell......................................................................120 H Hands On Chemistry Laboratory Manual, Paradis.................81 Harlow and Harrar’s Textbook of Dendrology, 9e, Hardin....88 Hole’s Essentials of Human A&P, 9e, Shier............................39 Hole’s Human Anatomy & Physiology, 11e, Shier.................42 Homeland Security and Emergency Medical Response, Campbell...................................................50, 52 How to Solve Physics Problems and Make the Grade, Oman...............................................................................161 How to Solve Word Problems in Chemistry, Goldberg..........73 How to Study Science, 4e, Milligan......................................110 Human Aging: Biological Perspectives, 2e, Digiovanna........29 Human Anatomy, McKinley...................................................31 Human Anatomy, 2e, Saladin..................................................30 Human Anatomy, 6e, Van De Graaf.......................................31 Human Anatomy Laboratory Manual, 2e, Wise......................32 Human Anatomy Laboratory Textbook, 7e, Benson...............32 Human Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory Manual: Fetal Pig Dissection, 3e, Martin.......................................43 Human Atlas (Formerly Interactive Clinical Resource CD-ROM), 2e, Blausen Medical Communications........47 Human Biology, 10e, Mader.................................................107 Human Genetics, 7e, Lewis.....................................................57 Human Geography, 9e, Fellmann.........................................113 Human Physiology, 10e, Fox...................................................34 Human Reproductive Biology, 3e, Mader..............................30 Hyperclinic 2 CD-ROM for Windows, 2e, Tomalty...............65 I Inquiry into Life, 12e, Mader..................................................96 Insurance Coding and Electronic Claims for the Medical Office, Safian.......................................................23 Integrated Principles of Zoology, 13e, Hickman..................142 Integrated Science, 3e, Tillery...............................................155 Interactive Laboratory and Biological Simulations, Version 2.0, 2e, Raineri..........................101, 104, 107, 109 Interactive World Issues CD-ROM, Cambridge Studios.....114 Intravenous Therapy for Health Care Personnel with Student CD-ROM, Booth..................................................21 Introduction to Biological Evolution, 2e, Kardong..............137 172 Indexes.indd 172 9/29/2006 1:47:35 PM Title Index Introduction to Biostatistics, Glover.....................................130 Introduction to Forest and Renewable Resources, 7e, Sharpe...............................................................................88 Introduction to Genetics, Hyde................................................59 Introduction to Geographic Information Systems, 4e Chang..............................................................................112 Introduction to Geography, 12e, Getis..................................114 Introduction to Hydrogeology, Deming................................123 Introduction to Limnology, Dodson......................................138 Introduction to Medical Terminology with Student Audio CD-ROM, Besser...................................................28 Introduction to the World’s Oceans, 9e, Sverdrup................124 Introductory Manual for Applied Botany, Levetin................131 Introductory Plant Biology, 11e, Stern..................................130 L Lab Exercises in Human Physiology: A Clinical & Experimental Approach with PhILS 2.0, Lutterschmidt...................................................................36 Lab Manual to accompany Biology, 9e, Mader....................103 Lab Manual to accompany Human Anatomy, 6e, Van De Graaf....................................................................33 Lab Manual to accompany Integrated Science, 3e, Tillery..............................................................................155 Lab Manual to accompany Physical Geology, 6e, Jones......128 Lab Manual to accompany Physical Science, 7e, Tillery......153 Laboratory Atlas of Anatomy & Physiology, 5e, Eder...........48 Laboratory Exercises in Microbiology, 6e, Harley.................68 Laboratory Exercises in Organismal and Molecular Microbiology, Alexander..................................................68 Laboratory Guide to Human Physiology: Concepts and Clinical Applications, 12e, Fox.........................................35 Laboratory Manual and Workbook in Microbiology, 8e, Morello........................................................................68 Laboratory Manual by Hendrickson to accompany General, Organic & Biochemistry, 5e, Hendrickson........76 Laboratory Manual for Physical Geology, 13e, Zumberge........................................................................128 Laboratory Manual for Soil Science: Agricultural & Environmental Principles, 8e, Thien.................................91 Laboratory Manual to accompany Anatomy & Physiology, 8e, Wise.........................................................43 Laboratory Manual to accompany Chemistry in Context: Applying Chemistry to Society, 5e, American Chemical Society..............................................................72 Laboratory Manual to accompany Concepts in Biology, 12e, Enger........................................................100 Laboratory Manual to accompany Essentials of Anatomy and Physiology, 6e, Patton................................40 Laboratory Manual to accompany Essentials of Biology, Mader...............................................................101 Laboratory Manual to accompany Hole’s Essentials of Human Anatomy and Physiology, 9e, Martin..................40 Laboratory Manual to accompany Hole’s Human Anatomy and Physiology, 11e, Martin.............................44 Laboratory Manual to accompany Human Biology, 10e, Mader......................................................................108 Laboratory Manual to accompany Human Biology, 9e, Mader........................................................................108 Laboratory Manual to accompany Inquiry Into Life, 12e, Mader......................................................................100 Laboratory Manual to accompany Introductory Plant Biology, 11e, Stern..........................................................131 Laboratory Manual to accompany Seeley: Anatomy & Physiology, 7e, Wise.........................................................45 Laboratory Studies in Animal Diversity, 4e, Hickman.........142 Laboratory Studies in Earth History, 8e, Brice......................122 Laboratory Studies in Integrated Principles of Zoology, 13e, Hickman..................................................143 Latin America and the Carribean, 4e, Clawson.....................117 Law & Ethics for Medical Careers, 4e, Judson......................24 Life, 6e, Lewis.......................................................................101 Living World, 5e (The), Johnson............................................95 M Mader’s Understanding Human Anatomy & Physiology, 6e, Longenbaker...........................................37 Mammalogy: Adaptation, Diversity, and Ecology, 2e, Feldhamer..................................................138 Manual of Mammalogy with Keys to Families of the World, 3e, (A), Martin..........................................138 Map Use and Analysis, 4e, Campbell...................................115 Marine Biology, 6e, Castro...................................................139 Massage Therapy Review: Passing the NCETMB and NCETM with Student CD-ROM, Abbott.........................19 Mastering ArcGIS with Video Clips CD-ROM, 3e, Price................................................................................112 Math and Dosage Calculations for Medical Careers with Student CD-ROM, 2e, Booth....................................20 McGraw-Hill Allied Health Medical Dictionary, Dumith......26 McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Astronomy, 2e, McGraw-Hill..................................................................167 Medical Insurance: An Integrated Claims Process Approach Workbook, 3e, Valerius....................................23 Medical Insurance Coding Workbook 2007-2008, Newby.....22 Medical Insurance Coding Workbook for Physician Practices 2005 Edition, Newby.........................................23 Medical Language for Modern Health with Student CD-ROM, Allen................................................................25 Medical Office Procedures with Data Disks and Projects CD-ROM, 6e, Becklin.......................................................24 Medical Terminology: A Programmed Approach, Bostwick............................................................................26 Medical Terminology Essentials with Student & Audio CD’s and Flashcards, Thierer...........................................27 Medical Terminology: Language for Health Care with Student and Audio CD’s and Flashcards, 2e, Thierer.......28 Medical Terminology Word Builder and Communications Workbook with Flashcards, Thierer.................................27 Mediaphys Version 3.0: An Introduction to Human Physiology, 3e, Stavraky..................................................37 Meteorology, 2e, Danielson..........................................116, 123 Microbes in Motion III CD-ROM, 3e, Delisle.......................109 Microbiology: A Human Perspective, 5e, Nester....................63 Microbiology: An Organ Systems Approach, Cowan.............64 Microbiology: Essentials and Applications, 2e, McKane.......65 Microbiology Experiments: A Health Science Perspective, 5e, Kleyn...........................................................................67 Microbiology Lab Manual, 7e, Harley....................................65 Microscale and Miniscale Organic Chemistry Laboratory Experiments, 2e, Schoffstall.............................................84 Modern Analytical Chemistry, Harvey...................................85 Molecular Biology, 4e, Weaver...............................................56 173 Indexes.indd 173 9/29/2006 1:47:36 PM Title Index N Natural Disasters, 6e, Abbott................................................122 New Foundations in Therapeutic Massage and Bodywork with Student CD-ROM, Saeger.........................................20 Nutritional Assessment, 4e, Lee............................................149 Nutrition Almanac, 6e, Dunne...............................................147 Nutrition Almanac, 5e, Dunne...............................................147 NutritionCal Plus 2.0 CD-ROM Standalone, McGraw-Hill..................................................................148 NutritionCal Plus 2.0 Online Standalone, 6e, McGraw-Hill..................................................................148 Nutrition for Health, Fitness and Sport, 8e, Williams...........148 Nutrition Throughout the Life Cycle, 4e, Worthington-Roberts....................................................148 O Organic Chemistry, 7e, Carey.................................................83 Organic Chemistry, 2e, Smith.................................................84 Organic Chemistry: A Brief Course, 3e, Atkins......................82 Organic Chemistry Demystified, Bloch...................................82 Orthopedic Atlas CD-ROM, 2e, Blausen Medical Communications..............................................................47 P Paramedic (The), Chapleau....................................................52 Paramedic Review DVD and CD-ROM, Delve Productions, Inc.....................................................53 Paramedic Workbook with Student CD (The), Chapleau.......52 Pathophysiology: Concepts and Applications for Health Care Professionals, 3e, Nowak..............................29 Pathways to Astronomy: Solar System (Volume 1) with Starry Nights Pro CD-ROM, Schneider.................166 Pathways to Astronomy: Stars and Galaxies (Volume 2) with Starry Nights Pro CD-ROM, Schneider.................166 Pathways to Astronomy: With Starry Nights Pro CD-ROM (Version 3.1), Schneider................................165 Patient Billing with Student CD-ROM and Floppy Disk, 5e, Sanderson..........................................................22 Pediatric First Aid, CPR and AED, 2e, National Safety Council...................................................29 Perspectives in Nutrition, 7e, Wardlaw................................146 Perspectives of Modern Physics, Beiser................................163 Perthes World Atlas, Klett International ............113, 115, 117 Petrology: The Study of Igneous, Sedimentary and Metamorphic Rocks, 2e, Raymond..........................125 Photo Atlas for General Biology, 2e, Strete..........................110 Photo Atlas for General Biology, Strete................................110 Physical Chemistry, 5e, Levine...............................................85 Physical Geology, 7e, Carlson..............................................126 Physical Geology, 11e, Plummer..........................................127 Physical Science, 7e, Tillery.................................................153 Physical Universe, 12e (The), Krauskopf.............................152 Physics, Giambattista...........................................................156 Physics, 7e, Tippens..............................................................164 Physics (Chapters 1-7), 7e, Tillery........................................154 Physics Demystified, Gibilisco..............................................160 Physics for Poets, 5e, March.................................................156 Physics for the Utterly Confused, Oman..............................160 Physics of Everyday Phenomena, 5e, Griffith......................156 Physiology Interactive Laboratory Simulations 2.0, 2e, Stephens......................................................................37 Plants and Society, 4e, Levetin..............................................131 Pocket ECGS: A Quick Information Guide, Shade.................18 Practicing ECGS, Shade..........................................................18 Prescott/Harley/Klein’s Microbiology, 7e, Willey..................61 Principles of Botany, Uno......................................................131 Principles of Environmental Science: Inquiry and Applications, 4e, Cunningham.......................................133 Principles of General Chemistry, Silberberg..........................78 Principles of Genetics, 7e, Tamarin........................................60 Principles of Physics, 6e, Bueche..........................................161 Principles of Quantitative Chemical Analysis, Levie..............86 Process Geomorphology, 4e, Ritter......................................121 Q Quantum Mechanics, 3e, Schiff.............................................164 Quantum Mechanics Demystified, McMahon......................164 R Regional Human Anatomy: A Laboratory Workbook for use with Models and Prosections, 3e, Grine.....................31 Relativity Demystified, McMahon.......................................159 Reproduction Atlas CD-ROM, 2e, Blausen Medical Communications..............................................................47 S Safe Firefighting - First Things First with Student DVD, Kidd........................................................................54 Schaum’s 3000 Solved Problems in Biology, Bernstein.......104 Schaum’s A-Z Biology, Indge...............................................110 Schaum’s A-Z Chemistry, Hunt..............................................80 Schaum’s A-Z Physics, Chapple...........................................159 Schaum’s Easy Outline Beginning Chemistry, Goldberg.......74 Schaum’s Easy Outline: College Chemistry, Rosenberg........80 Schaum’s Easy Outline of Biology, Fried.............................110 Schaum’s Easy Outline of College Physics, Bueche.............160 Schaum’s Easy Outline of Human Anatomy and Physiology, Van De Graaf................................................49 Schaum’s Easy Outline: Organic Chemistry, Meislich...........83 Schaum’s Outline of Analytical Chemistry, Gordus...............86 Schaum’s Outline of Applied Physics, 4e, Beiser.................159 Schaum’s Outline of Astronomy, Palen.................................167 Schaum’s Outline of Beginning Chemistry, 3e, Goldberg......72 Schaum’s Outline of Beginning Physics II, Halpern............160 Schaum’s Outline of Beginning Physics I, Halpern.............161 Schaum’s Outline of Biochemistry, 2e, Kuchel......................82 Schaum’s Outline of Biology, 2e, Fried................................110 Schaum’s Outline of College Chemistry, 9e, Rosenberg........78 Schaum’s Outline of College Physics, 10e, Bueche..............159 Schaum’s Outline of General, Organic and Biological Chemistry, Odian.............................................77 Schaum’s Outline of Genetics, 4e, Elrod................................60 Schaum’s Outline of Human Anatomy and Physiology, 2e, Van De Graaf..............................................................49 Schaum’s Outline of Immunology, Pinchuk...........................57 Schaum’s Outline of Lagrangian Dynamics, Wells...............154 Schaum’s Outline of Mathematics for Physics Students, Steiner.............................................................162 Schaum’s Outline of Microbiology, Alcamo...........................69 Schaum’s Outline of Modern Physics, 2e, Gautreau............163 Schaum’s Outline of Molecular Biology, Stansfield...............56 174 Indexes.indd 174 9/29/2006 1:47:36 PM Title Index Schaum’s Outline of Optics, Hecht.......................................165 Schaum’s Outline of Organic Chemistry, 3e, Hademenos......83 Schaum’s Outline of Physical Chemistry, 2e, Metz................85 Schaum’s Outline of Physical Science, 2e, Beiser................154 Schaum’s Outline of Physics for Engineering and Science, Browne..............................................................162 Schaum’s Outline of Physics for Pre-Med, Biology and Allied Health Students, Hademenos........................163 Schaum’s Outline of Quantum Mechanics, Zaarur..............164 Silviculture: Concepts and Applications, 2e, Nyland..............88 Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: 6 Unit Package, 2e, Moore..............................................................................162 Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit C - Conservation Laws Constraint Interactions, 2e, Moore........................161 Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit E - Electromagnetic Fields, 2e, Moore............................................................161 Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit E - Laws of Physics are Universal, 2e, Moore.................................................161 Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit Q - Matter Behaves Like Waves, 2e, Moore....................................................161 Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit R - Laws of Physics are Frame-Independent, 2e, Moore.................................162 Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit T - Some Processes are Irreversible, 2e, Moore..............................162 Solve Saladin: Anatomy & Physiology Crossword Puzzles Specially Prepared for Anatomy & Physiology: The Unity of Form and Function, 4e by Ken Saladin, Reeder.................................................................48 Standard First AID, CPR and AED with Pocket Guide, 2e, National Safety Council.................................17 W Workbook to accompany Anatomy & Physiology Revealed, Broyles..............................................................39 Z Zoology, 7e, Miller................................................................141 T Taxonomic Wall Chart, 12e, Hickman..................................142 U Understanding Chemistry, Lovett............................................80 United States and Canada: The Land and the People, 2e (The), Getis.................................................................117 V Vander’s Human Physiology, 10e, Widmaier.........................35 Vertebrate Biology, Linzey....................................................140 Verbebrates: Comparative Anatomy, Function, Evolution, 4e, Kardong..................................................140 Virtual Anatomy Dissection Review CD-ROM Version 2.0, Waters........................................................................34 Visual Atlas for Anatomy & Physiology to accompany Hole’s Human A&P, 10e (A), McGraw-Hill....................49 Visual Atlas for Anatomy & Physiology to accompany Saladin’s A&P, 3e (A), McGraw-Hill...............................49 175 Indexes.indd 175 9/29/2006 1:47:36 PM Author Index a Abbott: Massage Therapy Review: Passing the NCETMB and NCETM with Student CD-ROM................................19 Abbott: Natural Disasters, 6e................................................122 Aehlert: Emergency Medical Responder: First Responder in Action with Student CD-ROM, Student DVD and Pocket Guide...............................................................51 Alcamo: Schaum’s Outline of Microbiology..........................69 Aleks Corporation: Aleks Prep for Physics.........................159 Alexander: Laboratory Exercises in Organismal and Molecular Microbiology....................................................68 Allen: Medical Language for Modern Health with Student CD-ROM..............................................................25 American Chemical Society: Chemistry in Context: Applying Chemistry to Society, 5e....................................72 American Chemical Society: Laboratory Manual to accompany Chemistry in Context: Applying Chemistry to Society, 5e....................................................72 Arny: Exploration: An Introduction to Astronomy, 4e.........166 Arny: Explorations, Stars and Galaxies (Volume 2) with Starry Nights 3.1 CD-ROM, 4e...............................167 Arny: Explorations: Stars, Galaxies, and Planets, Update..............................................................................167 Atkins: Organic Chemistry: A Brief Course, 3e.....................82 Avery: Forest Measurements, 5e.............................................88 B Bauer: Conceptual Introduction Chemistry............................73 Becklin: Medical Office Procedures with Data Disks and Projects CD-ROM, 6e.................................................24 Beiser: Concepts of Modern Physics, 6e...............................163 Beiser: Perspectives of Modern Physics...............................163 Beiser: Schaum’s Outline of Applied Physics, 4e.................159 Beiser: Schaum’s Outline of Physical Science, 2e................154 Benson: Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory Textbook: Complete Version, 8e........................................45 Benson: Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory Textbook: Intermediate Version, CAT, 6e..........................46 Benson: Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory Textbook: Short Version, 8e...............................................46 Benson: Human Anatomy Laboratory Textbook, 7e...............32 Berkeley Physics: Electricity and Magnetism: Berkeley Physics Course, Volume II, 2e..........................162 Bernstein: Schaum’s 3000 Solved Problems in Biology......104 Besser: Introduction to Medical Terminology with Student Audio CD-ROM...........................................28 Bettinger: GIS Applications in Forestry and Natural Resources...........................................................................88 Bevington: Data Reduction and Error Analysis for the Physical Sciences, 3e.................................................163 Blausen Medical Communications: Cardiology Atlas CD-ROM, 2e............................................................47 Blausen Medical Communications: Human Atlas (Formerly Interactive Clinical Resource CD-ROM), 2e....47 Blausen Medical Communications: Orthopedic Atlas CD-ROM, 2e..................................................................... 47 Blausen Medical Communications: Reproduction Atlas CD-ROM, 2e............................................................47 Bloch: Organic Chemistry Demystified..................................82 Booth: Anatomy, Physiology and Pathophysiology for Allied Health................................................................21 Booth: Electrocardiography for Health Care Personnel with Student CD-ROM, 2e................................17 Booth: Intravenous Therapy for Health Care Personnel with Student CD-ROM.....................................21 Booth: Math and Dosage Calculations for Medical Careers with Student CD-ROM, 2e................................................20 Bostwick: Medical Terminology: A Programmed Approach............................................................................26 Bradshaw: Contemporary World Regional Geography, 2e......................................................................................116 Brice: Laboratory Studies in Earth History, 8e.....................122 Brooker: Biology..................................................................104 Brooker: Genetics: Analysis and Principles, 2e......................60 Brophy: Basic Electronics for Scientists, 5e.........................162 Brown: Benson’s Microbiology Applications: Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology, Complete Version, 10e.......................................................65 Brown: Benson’s Microbiology Applications: Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology, Short Version, 10e.......66 Browne: Schaum’s Outline of Physics for Engineering and Science..................................................162 Broyles: Workbook to accompany Anatomy & Physiology Revealed..........................................................39 Bueche: Principles of Physics, 6e.........................................161 Bueche: Schaum’s Easy Outline of College Physics............160 Bueche: Schaum’s Outline of College Physics, 10e.............159 C Cambridge Studios: Interactive World Issues CD-ROM.....114 Campbell: Animal Sciences: The Biology, Care and Production of Domestic Animals, 4e.................................91 Campbell: Homeland Security and Emergency Medical Response........................................................50, 52 Campbell: Map Use and Analysis, 4e...................................115 Carey: Organic Chemistry, 7e.................................................83 Carlson: Physical Geology, 7e..............................................126 Castro: Marine Biology, 6e...................................................139 Chamberlin: Exploring the World Ocean.............................124 Chang: Chemistry, 9e..............................................................77 Chang: General Chemistry: The Essential Concepts, 5e........77 Chang: Introduction to Geographic Information Systems, 4e......................................................................112 Chapleau: Paramedic (The)....................................................52 Chapleau: Paramedic Workbook with Student CD (The)......52 Chapple: Schaum’s A-Z Physics...........................................159 Clawson: Latin America and the Carribean, 4e....................117 Cooper: Cooperative Chemistry Lab Manual, 3e...................80 Cowan: Microbiology: An Organ Systems Approach.............64 Cox: General Ecology Laboratory Manual, 8e......................133 Cunningham: Environmental Science: A Global Concern, 9e......................................................................136 Cunningham: Principles of Environmental Science: Inquiry and Applications, 4e............................................133 D Delisle: Microbes in Motion III CD-ROM, 3e......................109 Delve Productions, Inc: Paramedic Review DVD and CD-ROM.....................................................................53 Danielson: Meteorology, 2e..........................................116, 123 Decker: Biocourse.com.........................................................109 Deming: Introduction to Hydrogeology................................123 Denniston: Foundations of General, Organic and Biochemistry......................................................................75 Denniston: General, Organic and Biochemistry, 5e................75 Digiovanna: Human Aging: Biological Perspectives, 2e........29 Discovery Channel: Discovery Channel Video Series DVD......................................................................137 Dodson: Introduction to Limnology......................................138 176 Indexes.indd 176 9/29/2006 1:47:36 PM Author Index Dolphin: Biological Investigations Lab Manual, 8e.............106 Drickamer: Animal Behavior, 5e.........................................130 Dumith: McGraw-Hill Allied Health Medical Dictionary......26 Dunne: Nutrition Almanac, 6e..............................................147 Dunne: Nutrition Almanac, 5e..............................................147 Dyke: Conservation Biology: Foundations, Concepts, Applications.....................................................................132 E Eder: Laboratory Atlas of Anatomy & Physiology, 5e...........48 Elrod: Schaum’s Outline of Genetics, 4e................................60 Enger: Concepts in Biology, 12e............................................98 Enger: Environmental Science: A Study of Interrelationships, 11e......................................................134 Enger: Laboratory Manual to accompany Concepts in Biology, 12e.................................................................100 F Feldhamer: Mammalogy: Adaptation, Diversity, and Ecology, 2e................................................................138 Fellmann: Human Geography, 9e.........................................113 Fix: Astronomy: Journey for the Cosmic Frontier, 4e...........166 Fox: Human Physiology, 10e...................................................34 Fox: Laboratory Guide to Human Physiology: Concepts and Clinical Applications, 12e...........................35 Fried: Schaum’s Easy Outline of Biology............................110 Fried: Schaum’s Outline of Biology, 2e................................110 G Gautreau: Schaum’s Outline of Modern Physics, 2e...........163 Getis: Introduction to Geography, 12e..................................114 Getis: United States and Canada: The Land and the People, 2e (The)...............................................................117 Giambattista: College Physics, 2e.......................................157 Giambattista: Physics...........................................................156 Gibilisco: Astronomy Demystified.......................................167 Gibilisco: Physics Demystified.............................................160 Gilbert: Basic Concepts in Biochemistry: A Student’s Survival Guide, 2e.............................................................82 Glover: Introduction to Biostatistics.....................................130 Goldberg: 3,000 Solved Problems in Chemistry....................73 Goldberg: Fundamentals of Chemistry, 5e.............................73 Goldberg: How to Solve Word Problems in Chemistry..........73 Goldberg: Schaum’s Easy Outline Beginning Chemistry......74 Goldberg: Schaum’s Outline of Beginning Chemistry, 3e.....72 Gordus: Schaum’s Outline of Analytical Chemistry..............86 Griffith: Physics of Everyday Phenomena, 5e......................156 Grine: Regional Human Anatomy: A Laboratory Workbook for use with Models and Prosections, 3e.........31 Gunstream: Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory Textbook: Essentials Version, 4e.......................................39 Gunstream: Anatomy & Physiology with Integrated Study Guide, 3e.................................................................38 H Hademenos: Schaum’s Outline of Organic Chemistry, 3e.....83 Hademenos: Schaum’s Outline of Physics for Pre-Med, Biology and Allied Health Students................163 Halpern: 3,000 Solved Problems in Physics.........................161 Halpern: Schaum’s Outline of Beginning Physics II............160 Halpern: Schaum’s Outline of Beginning Physics I...............16 Hardin: Harlow and Harrar’s Textbook of Dendrology, 9e....88 Harley: Laboratory Exercises in Microbiology, 6e.................68 Harley: Microbiology Lab Manual, 7e...................................65 Hartwell: Genetics: From Genes to Genomes, 3e..................58 Harvey: Modern Analytical Chemistry...................................85 Hecht: Schaum’s Outline of Optics.......................................165 Hendrickson: Laboratory Manual by Hendrickson to accompany General, Organic & Biochemistry, 5e............76 Hickman: Animal Diversity, 4e............................................141 Hickman: Integrated Principles of Zoology, 13e..................142 Hickman: Laboratory Studies in Animal Diversity, 4e.........142 Hickman: Laboratory Studies in Integrated Principles of Zoology, 13e................................................................143 Hickman: Taxonomic Wall Chart, 12e.................................142 Houseman: Digital Zoology Version 2.0 CD-ROM.....109, 142 Houston: Chemical Kinetics and Reaction Dynamics............86 Hunt: Schaum’s A-Z Chemistry..............................................80 Hyde: Introduction to Genetics...............................................59 I Indge: Schaum’s A-Z Biology..............................................110 J Jenkins: Fundamentals of Optics, 4e....................................165 Johnson: Essentials of the Living World, 2e...........................95 Johnson: Living World, 5e (The)............................................95 Jones: Astronomy for the Utterly Confused.........................165 Jones: Contemporary College Physics: 2001 Update, 3e......160 Jones: Lab Manual to accompany Physical Geology, 6e......128 Judson: Law & Ethics for Medical Careers, 4e......................24 Junqueira: Basic Histology: Text & Atlas, 11e......................50 K Kalthoff: Analysis of Biological Development, 2e.................57 Kardong: Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy: Laboratory Dissection Guide, 4e.....................................140 Kardong: Introduction to Biological Evolution, 2e..............137 Kardong: Verbebrates: Comparative Anatomy, Function, Evolution, 4e....................................................140 Kay: Farm Management, 6e..............................................89, 90 Kaufmann: Environmental Science......................................135 Kelter: Chemistry: A World of Choices, 2e............................72 Kent: Comparative Anatomy of the Vertebrates, 9e..............140 Kidd: Safe Firefighting - First Things First with Student DVD......................................................................54 Klett International: Perthes World Atlas.............113, 115, 117 Kleyn: Microbiology Experiments: A Health Science Perspective, 5e...................................................................67 Knox: Biology, 3e...................................................................99 Krauskopf: Physical Universe, 12e (The)............................152 Kroshwitz: Chemistry: A First Course, 3e..............................74 Kuchel: Schaum’s Outline of Biochemistry, 2e......................82 177 Indexes.indd 177 9/29/2006 1:47:36 PM Author Index L Layman: Biology Demystified...............................................46 Lee: Nutritional Assessment, 4e............................................149 Levetin: Introductory Manual for Applied Botany...............131 Levetin: Plants and Society, 4e.............................................131 Levie: Principles of Quantitative Chemical Analysis..............86 Levine: Physical Chemistry, 5e...............................................85 Lewis: Human Genetics, 7e.....................................................57 Lewis: Life, 6e.......................................................................101 Linzey: Vertebrate Biology...................................................140 Longenbaker: Mader’s Understanding Human Anatomy & Physiology, 6e................................................37 Lovett: Understanding Chemistry...........................................80 Lucas: Dinosaurs: The Textbook, 5e.....................................120 Lutterschmidt: Lab Exercises in Human Physiology: A Clinical & Experimental Approach with PhILS 2.0......36 Lytle: General Zoology Laboratory Manual, 14e..................143 M Mader: Biology, 9e...............................................................102 Mader: Essentials of Biology.................................................98 Mader: Human Biology, 10e................................................107 Mader: Human Reproductive Biology, 3e..............................30 Mader: Inquiry into Life, 12e.................................................96 Mader: Lab Manual to accompany Biology, 9e....................103 Mader: Laboratory Manual to accompany Essentials of Biology........................................................................101 Mader: Laboratory Manual to accompany Human Biology, 10e.....................................................................108 Mader: Laboratory Manual to accompany Human Biology, 9e.......................................................................108 Mader: Laboratory Manual to accompany Inquiry Into Life, 12e...................................................................100 Madhab: Fundamentals of Ecology, 2e................................133 March: Physics for Poets, 5e................................................156 Martin: Human Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory Manual: Fetal Pig Dissection, 3e.......................................43 Martin: Laboratory Manual to accompany Hole’s Essentials of Human Anatomy and Physiology, 9e...........40 Martin: Laboratory Manual to accompany Hole’s Human Anatomy and Physiology, 11e...............................44 Martin: Manual of Mammalogy with Keys to Families of the World, 3e, (A).........................................138 Mayer: Connections in Environmental Science: A Case Study Approach...................................................137 McConnell: Good Earth: Introduction to Earth Sciences (The).................................................................120 McGraw-Hill: A&P Animations Collection...........................47 McGraw-Hill: Biology Digitized Video Clips.....................109 McGraw-Hill: Dictionary of Bioscience, 2e..........................43 McGraw-Hill: Dictionary of Chemistry, 2e...........................80 McGraw-Hill: Dictionary of Eath Science, 2e.....................121 McGraw-Hill: Dictionary of Geology and Mineralogy, 2e.................................................................121 McGraw-Hill: Dictionary of Physics, 3e..............................154 McGraw-Hill: Foodwise 1.2 CD-ROM, 6e..........................147 McGraw-Hill: McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Astronomy, 2e......................................................................................167 McGraw-Hill: NutritionCal Plus 2.0 CD-ROM Standalone........................................................................148 McGraw-Hill: NutritionCal Plus 2.0 Online Standalone, 6e..................................................................148 McGraw-Hill: Visual Atlas for Anatomy & Physiology to accompany Hole’s Human A&P, 10e (A)......................49 McGraw-Hill: Visual Atlas for Anatomy & Physiology to accompany Saladin’s A&P, 3e (A)................................49 McKane: Microbiology: Essentials and Applications, 2e.......65 McKee: Biochemistry: An Introduction, 3e............................81 McKenna: ACLS Basics and More with Student CD & DVD........................................................................53 McMahon: Quantum Mechanics Demystified......................164 McMahon: Relativity Demystified.......................................159 Medical College of Ohio: Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CDS 1-4 Complete Series..................................33 Medical College of Ohio: Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CD#2-Nervous...................................................33 Medical College of Ohio: Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CD#3-Cardiovascular, Respiratory and Lymphatic Systems.....................................................33 Medical College of Ohio: Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CD#4-Digestive, Urinary, Reproductive and Endocrine Systems......................................................34 Medical College of Ohio: Anatomy & Physiology Revealed Online.................................................................47 Medical College of Ohio: Anatomy Revealed: Volume 1, Skeletal and Muscular Systems........................33 Meislich: 3,000 Solved Problems in Organic Chemistry........84 Meislich: Schaum’s Easy Outline: Organic Chemistry...........83 Metz: Schaum’s Outline of Physical Chemistry, 2e................85 McKinley: Human Anatomy...................................................31 Miller: General Zoology Laboratory Manual to accompany Zoology, 6e...................................................143 Miller: Zoology, 7e...............................................................141 Milligan: How to Study Science, 4e.....................................110 Molles: Ecology: Concepts and Applications, 4e..................132 Montgomery: Environmental Geology, 7e...........................121 Moore: Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: 6 Unit Package, 2e......................................................................162 Moore: Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit C Conservation Laws Constraint Interactions, 2e...............161 Moore: Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit E Electromagnetic Fields, 2e...............................................161 Moore: Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit E Laws of Physics are Universal, 2e...................................161 Moore: Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit Q Matter Behaves Like Waves, 2e.......................................161 Moore: Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit R Laws of Physics are Frame-Independent, 2e...................162 Moore: Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit T Some Processes are Irreversible, 2e.................................162 Morello: Laboratory Manual and Workbook in Microbiology, 8e................................................................68 N National Safety Council: Basic Life Support: Healthcare and Professional Rescuers...............................14 National Safety Council: CPR & AED, 2e............................16 National Safety Council: First Aid Taking Action.................14 National Safety Council: First Aid with Pocket Guide, 2e............................................................................19 National Safety Council: Pediatric First Aid, CPR and AED, 2e.......................................................................29 National Safety Council: Standard First AID, CPR and AED with Pocket Guide, 2e...............................17 Nester: Microbiology: A Human Perspective, 5e...................63 Newby: Medical Insurance Coding Workbook 2007-2008.....22 Newby: Medical Insurance Coding Workbook for Physician Practices 2005 Edition.......................................23 Nowak: Pathophysiology: Concepts and Applications for Health Care Professionals, 3e......................................29 Nyland: Silviculture: Concepts and Applications, 2e.............88 178 Indexes.indd 178 9/29/2006 1:47:37 PM Author Index O Odian: Schaum’s Outline of General, Organic and Biological Chemistry..................................................77 Oman: How to Solve Physics Problems and Make the Grade..........................................................................161 Oman: Physics for the Utterly Confused..............................160 P Palen: Schaum’s Outline of Astronomy................................167 Palin: Catastrophe Preparation and Prevention for Law Enforcement Professionals with Student CD............51 Paradis: Hands On Chemistry Laboratory Manual................81 Patton: Laboratory Manual to accompany Essentials of Anatomy and Physiology, 6e.........................................40 Pechenik: Biology of Invertebrates, 5e.................................138 Pflanzer: Experimental and Applied Physiology Laboratory Manual, 8e.......................................................36 Pinchuk: Schaum’s Outline of Immunology..........................57 Plummer: Physical Geology, 11e.........................................127 Presson: Biology: Dimensions of Life....................................97 Price: Mastering ArcGIS with Video Clips CD-ROM, 3e......................................................................................112 Prothero: Bringing Fossils to Life: An Introduction to Paleobiology, 2e...........................................................125 Prothero: Evolution of the Earth, 7e.....................................123 R Raineri: Interactive Laboratory and Biological Simulations, Version 2.0, 2e....................101, 104, 107, 109 Raven: Biology, 8e................................................................105 Raymond: Petrology: The Study of Igneous, Sedimentary and Metamorphic Rocks, 2e...................... 125 Reeder: Solve Saladin: Anatomy & Physiology Crossword Puzzles Specially Prepared for Anatomy & Physiology: The Unity of Form and Function, 4e by Ken Saladin..............................................................48 Reif: Fundamentals of Statistical and Thermal Physics........163 Ritter: Process Geomorphology, 4e......................................121 Roberts: Foundations of Parasitology, 7e.............................139 Rosenberg: Schaum’s Easy Outline: College Chemistry.......80 Rosenberg: Schaum’s Outline of College Chemistry, 9e........78 S Saeger: New Foundations in Therapeutic Massage and Bodywork with Student CD-ROM....................................20 Safian: Insurance Coding and Electronic Claims for the Medical Office........................................................23 Saladin: Anatomy & Physiology, 4e.......................................41 Saladin: Human Anatomy, 2e...................................................3 Sanderson: Case Studies for the Medical Office, 4e..............15 Sanderson: Computers in the Medical Office with Student Data CD-ROM, 5e................................................15 Sanderson: Patient Billing with Student CD-ROM and Floppy Disk, 5e...........................................................22 Schiff: Quantum Mechanics, 3e............................................164 Schneider: Pathways to Astronomy: Solar System (Volume 1) with Starry Nights Pro CD-ROM.................166 Schneider: Pathways to Astronomy: Stars and Galaxies (Volume 2) with Starry Nights Pro CD-ROM.................166 Schneider: Pathways to Astronomy: With Starry Nights Pro CD-ROM (Version 3.1).................................165 Schoffstall: Microscale and Miniscale Organic Chemistry Laboratory Experiments, 2e.............................84 Seeley: Anatomy & Physiology, 8e.........................................41 Seeley: Essentials of Anatomy and Physiology, 6e.................38 Seitz: Economics of Resources, Agriculture and Food, 2e........................................................................................90 Shade: Fast & Easy ECGS with DVD....................................18 Shade: Pocket ECGS: A Quick Information Guide................18 Shade: Practicing ECGS.........................................................18 Sharpe: Introduction to Forest and Renewable Resources, 7e.....................................................................88 Shier: Hole’s Essentials of Human A&P, 9e...........................39 Shier: Hole’s Human Anatomy & Physiology, 11e.................42 Shoemaker: Experiments in Physical Chemistry, 7e..............85 Silberberg: Chemistry: The Molecular Nature of Matter and Change, 4e.......................................................79 Silberberg: Principles of General Chemistry..........................78 Simpson: Economic Botany, 3e............................................131 Smith: Organic Chemistry, 2e.................................................84 Spain: Chemskill Builder Online, Version 2, 2e.....................81 Spencer: Earth Science: Understanding Environmental Systems...................................................121 Stansfield: Schaum’s Outline of Molecular Biology..............56 Stavraky: Mediaphys Version 3.0: An Introduction to Human Physiology, 3e...................................................37 Steiner: Schaum’s Outline of Mathematics for Physics Students..............................................................162 Stephens: Physiology Interactive Laboratory Simulations 2.0, 2e............................................................37 Stern: Introductory Plant Biology, 11e.................................130 Stern: Laboratory Manual to accompany Introductory Plant Biology, 11e............................................................131 Stine: AIDS Update 2007........................................................70 Stone: Atlas of Skeletal Muscles, 5e.......................................48 Strete: Atlas to Human Anatomy (An)...................................49 Strete: Photo Atlas for General Biology, 2e..........................110 Strete: Photo Atlas for General Biology...............................110 Sverdrup: Fundamentals of Oceanography, 5e....................125 Sverdrup: Introduction to the World’s Oceans, 9e...............124 T Talaro: Foundations in Microbiology, 6e................................62 Talaro: Foundations in Microbiology: Basic Principles, 6e......................................................................63 Tamarin: Principles of Genetics, 7e.......................................60 Teo: Changing Landscapes of Singapore..............................115 Thiel: Biotechnology: DNA to Protein: A Laboratory Project in Molecular Biology.............................................70 Thien: Laboratory Manual for Soil Science: Agricultural & Environmental Principles, 8e....................91 Thierer: Medical Terminology Essentials with Student & Audio CD’s and Flashcards..............................27 Thierer: Medical Terminology: Language for Health Care with Student and Audio CD’s and Flashcards, 2e.....28 Thierer: Medical Terminology Word Builder and Communications Workbook with Flashcards....................27 Tillery: Chemistry (Chapters 1, 8-13), 7e.............................152 Tillery: Chemistry and Physics Split Prepack, 7e.................153 Tillery: Integrated Science, 3e..............................................155 Tillery: Lab Manual to accompany Integrated Science, 3e.......................................................................155 Tillery: Lab Manual to accompany Physical Science, 7e.....153 Tillery: Physical Science, 7e.................................................153 Tillery: Physics (Chapters 1-7), 7e.......................................154 Tippens: Physics, 7e.............................................................164 Tomalty: Hyperclinic 2 CD-ROM for Windows, 2e...............65 179 Indexes.indd 179 9/29/2006 1:47:37 PM Author Index U Uno: Principles of Botany.....................................................131 V Valerius: Medical Insurance: An Integrated Claims Process Approach Workbook, 3e.......................................23 Van De Graaf: Concepts of Human Anatomy and Physiology, 5e....................................................................43 Van De Graaf: Human Anatomy, 6e.......................................31 Van De Graaf: Lab Manual to accompany Human Anatomy, 6e.......................................................................33 Van De Graaf: Schaum’s Easy Outline of Human Anatomy and Physiology...................................................49 Van De Graaf: Schaum’s Outline of Human Anatomy and Physiology, 2e.............................................49 Vodopich: Biology Laboratory Manual, 8e..........................106 Voyles: Biology of Viruses, 2e (The).......................................57 W Walker: Biotechnology Demystified......................................69 Wardlaw: Contemporary Nutrition, 6e.................................146 Wardlaw: Perspectives in Nutrition, 7e................................146 Waters: Virtual Anatomy Dissection Review CD-ROM Version 2.0........................................................34 Weaver: Molecular Biology, 4e..............................................56 Wells: Schaum’s Outline of Lagrangian Dynamics...............154 Widmaier: Vander’s Human Physiology, 10e.........................35 Willet: Genetics Demystified..................................................60 Willey: Prescott/Harley/Klein’s Microbiology, 7e..................61 Williams: Chemistry Demystified...........................................80 Williams: Nutrition for Health, Fitness and Sport, 8e..........148 Wise: Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory Manual, 4e...........44 Wise: Human Anatomy Laboratory Manual, 2e......................32 Wise: Laboratory Manual to accompany Anatomy & Physiology, 8e................................................................43 Wise: Laboratory Manual to accompany Seeley: Anatomy & Physiology, 7e................................................45 Worthington-Roberts: Nutrition Throughout the Life Cycle, 4e...................................................................148 Z Zaarur: Schaum’s Outline of Quantum Mechanics..............164 Zumberge: Laboratory Manual for Physical Geology, 13e....................................................................128 180 Indexes.indd 180 9/29/2006 1:47:37 PM
